Adina Command Referece Manual

UTOMATIC
YNAMIC
NCREMENTAL
ONLINEAR
NALYSIS
ADINA User Interface
Command Reference Manual
Volume I:
ADINA Solids & Structures Model Definition
Report ARD 09-2 May 2009
ADINA R&D, Inc.
ADINA User Interface
Command Reference Manual
Volume I:
ADINA Solids & Structures Model Definition
Report ARD 09-2
May 2009
for the ADINA System version 8.6
ADINA R & D, Inc.
71 Elton Avenue
Watertown, MA 02472 USA
tel. (617) 926-5199
telefax (617) 926-0238
www.adina.com
Notices
ADINA R & D, Inc. owns both this software program system and its documentation. Both
the program system and the documentation are copyrighted with all rights reserved by ADINA
R & D, Inc.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice.
ADINA R & D, Inc. makes no warranty whatsoever, expressed or implied that the Program
and its documentation including any modifications and updates are free from errors and
defects. In no event shall ADINA R & D, Inc. become liable to the User or any party for any
loss, including but not limited to, loss of time, money or goodwill, which may arise from the
use of the Program and its documentation including any modifications and updates.
Trademarks
ADINA is a registered trademark of K. J. Bathe / ADINA R & D, Inc.
All other product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Copyright Notice
ADINA R & D, Inc. 1994 - 2009
May 2009 Printing
Printed in the USA
ADINA R & D, Inc. v
Table of contents
Table of contents
Chapter 1 Introduction.......................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Program execution ................................................................................................ 1-3
1.2 Command syntax................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3 Input details .......................................................................................................... 1-6
1.4 Messages ............................................................................................................ 1-10
1.5 File input/output .................................................................................................. 1-11
1.6 The AUI database................................................................................................ 1-11
1.7 Listings ................................................................................................................ 1-12
1.8 Units .................................................................................................................... 1-13
1.9 Tips for writing batch files ................................................................................... 1-13
1.10 Related documentation ........................................................................................ 1-13
Chapter 2 Quick index.......................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 New commands, parameters and options ............................................................. 2-3
2.2 Quick overview of commands ............................................................................. 2-10
Chapter 3 Input/output .......................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Database operations ............................................................................................. 3-3
3.2 Analysis data files ................................................................................................ 3-9
3.3 External data ........................................................................................................ 3-12
3.4 Auxiliary files ....................................................................................................... 3-28
3.5 Program termination............................................................................................. 3-36
3.6 Auxiliary commands ............................................................................................ 3-38
Chapter 4 Interface control and editing ............................................................................... 4-1
4.1 Settings ................................................................................................................. 4-3
4.2 Editing................................................................................................................... 4-9
Chapter 5 Control data .......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 General .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2 Analysis details ................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3 Options ................................................................................................................ 5-35
5.4 Solver details ....................................................................................................... 5-53
5.5 Automatic control ................................................................................................ 5-57
5.6 Time-dependence ................................................................................................ 5-63
5.7 Iteration ............................................................................................................... 5-66
5.8 Tolerances ........................................................................................................... 5-74
5.9 Analysis output ................................................................................................... 5-78
5.10 Solution monitoring ........................................................................................... 5-100
v i AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
Table of contents
Chapter 6 Geometry definition ............................................................................................. 6-1
6.1 Coordinate systems .............................................................................................. 6-3
6.2 Points .................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Lines ..................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.4 Surfaces ............................................................................................................... 6-35
6.5 Volumes ................................................................................................................ 6-50
6.6 Solid models ........................................................................................................ 6-63
6.7 Spatial functions .................................................................................................. 6-78
6.8 Transformations ................................................................................................... 6-85
6.9 Miscellaneous ..................................................................................................... 6-95
6.10 ADINA - M........................................................................................................ 6-102
Chapter 7 Model definition ................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Material models .................................................................................................... 7-3
7.2 Cross-Sections/Layers ...................................................................................... 7-168
7.3 Element properties ............................................................................................. 7-188
7.4 Substructures and cyclic symmetry .................................................................. 7-225
7.5 Contact conditions ............................................................................................ 7-238
7.6 Fracture mechanics ............................................................................................ 7-310
7.7 Boundary conditions ......................................................................................... 7-334
7.8 Loading .............................................................................................................. 7-368
7.9 Initial conditions ................................................................................................ 7-402
7.10 Systems ............................................................................................................. 7-414
Chapter 8 Finite element representation ............................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Element groups ..................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2 Mesh generation.................................................................................................. 8-58
8.3 Elements ............................................................................................................. 8-154
Chapter 9 Direct finite element data input ........................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Nodal data............................................................................................................. 9-3
9.2 Element data ........................................................................................................ 9-14
9.3 Boundary conditions ........................................................................................... 9-54
9.4 Loads ................................................................................................................... 9-62
9.5 Initial conditions .................................................................................................. 9-75
9.6 Contact ................................................................................................................ 9-87
9.7 Fracture ................................................................................................................ 9-91
9.8 Substructures and cyclic symmetry .................................................................... 9-97
Command index ............................................................................................................... Index-1
Appendix 1 - Error messages ................................................................................................ A-1
Chapter 1
Introduction
ADINA R & D, Inc. 1-3
1. Introduction
This reference manual provides concise descriptions of the command input requirements for
the ADINA User Interface (AUI). This introduction serves to give some background informa-
tion and indicate the general command syntax including descriptions of the conventions
used.
1.1 Program execution
Commands can be entered in the following modes:
Interactive
(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed you can enter commands into the user
interface command window.
(b) AUI is running in command mode (using the "-cmd" option) you can enter commands
from standard input.
Batch
(a) AUI is running with the user interface displayed you can read commands from a file by
choosing File!Open.
(b) Commands can be read from a given file using the aui startup options -s (UNIX versions)
or -b (Windows version).
You can also read commands from a file using the READ command (see Section 3).
1.2 Command syntax
Here is the layout of a typical command reference page:
COMMAND
[1]
PARAM1 PARAM2
[2]
...
data1
i
data2
i
[3]
...
General description of command function.
[4]
Sec. 1.1 Program execution
1-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
Chap. 1 Introduction
PARAM1 [<default>]
[6]
Description of parameter PARAM1
[5]
. {<input choices>}
[7]
PARAM2 [<default>]
Description of parameter PARAM2. {<input choices>}
...
data1
i
[<default>]
[6]
Description of data line entry data1
i
[5]
(ith row, column 1). {<input choices>}
[7]
data2
i
[<default>]
Description of data line entry data2
i
(ith row, column 2). {<input choices>}
...
Auxiliary commands
[8]
LIST COMMAND
Brief description of this command.
DELETE COMMAND
Brief description of this command.
Issuing a command allows you to alter the data associated with the command. This data
comprises the values associated with the command parameters and possibly a table, input via
"data lines", associated with the command.
In the above, the command name "COMMAND"
[1]
, given at the top of the reference page,
has the first few characters emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required
to be input to uniquely identify the command. A list of parameters
[2]
and data lines
[3]
for the
command then follows. In this list the first few characters in the parameter and data line
names are emphasized to show the minimum number of characters required to uniquely
identify the parameter and data line names.
Following a general outline of the command function
[4]
, a description of the command
parameters and data line entries is given below the relevant keynames
[5]
.
The parameters usually have default values
[6]
which are assumed if the parameter is not
explicitly specified. The default values are indicated in brackets [ ] a bold value indicates a
default value (number or string) and an italicized string indicates the source of the default
value, which is either (a) a text description of the default, (b) a parameter name from the same
command, or (c) a combination of command + parameter names, indicating that the default is
taken from the setting of another (different) command parameter.
A parameter for which no default is provided means that there is no default i.e., some choice
must be entered for that parameter.
One important parameter type is that of an entity identifier for which the parameter keyname
"NAME" is normally reserved. If the object identified by NAME has already been defined,
then the other parameter defaults are set to the previous settings for that object. If a new
NAME is given then the defaults, as indicated by the command reference pages herein, are
taken. In the former case, execution of the command redefines the named object.
The choice of parameter values is often discussed within the parameter description, but,
where appropriate, a simple list of choices follows the parameter description
[7]
. For example,
parameters with simple logical choices will have the list "{YES/NO}" appended to the
description.
When a table is associated with the command, the command includes data input lines. For
some commands, the table is initially empty, but for other commands the table already
includes data lines.
The columns of a data line can be divided into two types: key columns and data columns.
When a data line has key columns, the key value columns always precede the data value
columns. In this case the values of the key columns uniquely identify the data line, and,
therefore, two data lines cannot have the same key column values for such input, the
second input data line overwrites the data associated with the key column values.
You can delete a data line by preceding the key column values with the DELETE prefix. When
a data line does not have key columns, two or more data lines can have the same values but
you cannot use the DELETE prefix to delete data lines without key columns. However, you
can always delete all of the data lines of a table using the @CLEAR or CLEAR keywords.
This is of course especially useful for those tables in which there are no key columns.
For data line input, not all the columns need be specified; the ENTRIES keyword, which can
be input as the first data line following the command line, can be used to select a subset of
the data column entries (see below). Then the values you enter in the subsequent data lines
are associated with the columns indicated by the ENTRIES parameters, the other data
columns taking default values whenever possible. Note, however, that key columns are
required input, and should thus be included in the ENTRIES column list.
Many commands have "auxiliary" commands
[8]
which are entered with one of the following
prefixes:
Sec. 1.2 Command syntax
LIST List object definitions.
DELETE Delete objects from the database.
UPDATE Update command defaults.
RESET Reset command defaults.
COPY Copy objects.
SET Set "currently active" objects.
SHOW Show "currently active" objects.
A LIST prefixed command has several forms:
LIST COMMAND List all object identifiers (names).
LIST COMMAND NAME List definition of object with identifier NAME.
LIST COMMAND FIRST LAST List definitions of a range of objects with integer
label numbers. Parameters FIRST, LAST may
also take the string values FIRST, LAST,
ALL.
A DELETE prefixed command has the following forms:
DELETE COMMAND NAME Delete the object with identifier NAME.
DELETE COMMAND FIRST LAST Delete a set of objects with integer label
numbers in the specified range.
Note that an object may not be deleted if another model entity depends on its existence as
part of its own definition. For example, a geometry line cannot be deleted if it forms a bound-
ing edge of some geometry surface.
1.3 Input details
Command input
Please refer to command AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT in the following discussion
(Section 5.5):
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT POINT DOF DISPLACEMENT
ALPHA DISPMAX CONTINUE
RPRINT TYPE NODE
When entering commands, only as many characters as necessary to uniquely specify the
command name need be entered. The same rule applies to the parameters and data line entry
key names within a command. The minimum number of characters necessary are indicated in
bold.
Note that command / parameter is case insensitive. All commands, parameters, values are
stored in upper case, except for string variables (headings, graph legends, etc.).
Parameter values may be input in any order if the keynames are used, e.g.,
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT DOF=3 RPRINT=YES DISPMAX=5.0
DISPLACEMENT=4.0 POINT=17
Some or all of the parameters can be excluded if the positional order of the parameters is
observed, e.g.,
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT 17 3 4.0, ,5.0, ,YES
(the parameters ALPHA and CONTINUE have been omitted by the use of the commas).
A mix of keyname parameters and positional input is allowed, e.g.,
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT 17 DISPLACEMENT=4.0 DOF=3,,5.0,,
YES
The above uses of the AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT command are all equivalent.
The omitted parameters in each case take the default values.
Data lines
Many commands require data line (tabular) input, e.g., MODAL-DAMPING (see Section 5.3):
MODAL-DAMPING
mode
i
factor
i
Use the ENTRIES keyword to select only the data columns that you want to enter (the other
data columns will be given default values):
MODAL-DAMPING
ENTRIES MODE FACTOR
1 1.0
2 0.5
3 2.5
4 1.5
DATAEND
Most commands which take this form of input also allow for incremental row generation via the
"STEP inc TO" option where "inc" represents an increment in the generation, i.e., in the above
Sec. 1.3 Input details
example mode
i+k
, mode
i+2k
, ..., mode
j-k
, are all generated, with the corresponding values for "factor"
linearly interpolated between factor
i
and factor
j
. When generating integer values, the difference
between the first and last values must be an integer multiple of the STEP increment (i.e.,
modulo((mode
j
-mode
i
),k) = 0). There is a default step increment, which for integer values is
normally 1; in this case "STEP 1 TO" may be input simply as "TO". Here are some examples:
MODAL-DAMPING
1 5.5
TO
3 7.5
@
or
MODAL-DAMPING
1 5.5
STEP 1 TO 3 7.5
DATAEND
Both of these are equivalent to
MODAL-DAMPING
1 5.5
2 6.5
3 7.5
@
Note that data line input may be terminated either by entering the symbol "@" or the string
"DATAEND" data line input will be terminated automatically by input of the next command.
Data line rows can be deleted by preceding the key value by the prefix DELETE. This method
of deletion also supports row "generation" i.e., "DELETE i STEP k TO j" may be used to
delete a range of values.
All the data lines associated with a command may be deleted simultaneously using the
CLEAR or @CLEAR keywords. This is useful when you want to define a table if you do not
know if the table is already defined or not:
TIMEFUNCTION 1
CLEAR
which removes all the currently defined data lines of timefunction 1.
The columns for data line input can be selected by use of the keyword ENTRIES in the first
input data line following the command line, e.g.,
COORDINATES POINT
ENTRIES NAME Y Z
which indicates that only global Y and Z coordinates are to be input for geometry points in
the subsequent data lines. The X coordinate assumes the default value 0.0, and thus
subsequent data lines entered describe points in the global Y-Z plane.
Names
AUI names are usually of two types alphanumeric strings of up to 30 characters or integer
label numbers. Integer label numbers are normally greater than or equal to 1.
Integer values
Integers can be input with a maximum of 9 significant digits. For positive values, a preceding
+ sign may, if desired, be input.
Real values
Specification of real values can include a decimal point and/or an exponent. The exponent
must be preceded by the letters E, e, D, or d, e.g.,
2E5
2.0d+05
200000.
all refer to the same real number.
Alphanumeric values
Alphanumeric values must start with a letter (A-Z, a-z) or number (0-9). The only permissible
characters allowed are the letters A-Z, a-z, the digits 0 to 9, the hyphen (-), and the underscore (_).
Lower-case characters in an alphanumeric value are always converted to upper-case by the AUI.
String values
A string should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Any apostrophe within the string must be
entered twice. Any character can be included in a string. Lower-case characters in a string
value are not converted to upper-case.
Filenames
A filename should be enclosed by apostrophes ('). Filenames can be up to 256 characters
long.
Length of input lines
Input lines to the AUI can each contain up to 256 characters.
Line continuation, line separator, blanks, and commas
If the last non-blank character of a command or data line is a comma (,), then the command or
Sec. 1.3 Input details
data is continued on the next input line. The total length of an input line and all of its
continuations can be up to 2000 characters.
A slash (/) in an input line can be used to end a command or data input line; more commands
or data can then be entered on the same input line.
A blank, several blanks, <Tab> characters, a comma, or a comma surrounded by blanks act as
delimiters. Commands, parameter keynames and values must be separated by delimiters.
Comments
Comment lines can appear anywhere in the input and are identified by an asterisk (*) in
column 1, e.g.,
* This is a comment line
Parameter substitution
You can define parameters as numeric expressions, and use the parameter values in later
commands. This feature is useful when creating batch files used in structural optimization.
For example:
PARAMETER A `5 + 7`
PARAMETER B `2*$A`
PARAMETER C `3 + $A + 4*$B`
BODY BLOCK DX1=$A DX2=$B DX3=$C
1.4 Messages
Commands will often echo messages confirming their successful completion, or provide other
information. Otherwise you may get error/warning messages with varying levels of severity:
*** INPUT ERROR
You have entered an unacceptable parameter value or data. The command will not
execute with invalid input.
*** WARNING
The command has completed, but has detected a possible inconsistency which may have
to be resolved.
*** ALERT
The command has completed, but has detected a definite modeling inconsistency which
has to be resolved in order to create a valid model.
*** ERROR
The command has not completed.
*** INTERNAL ERROR
The program has determined some conflict in the database, normally indicating a
software bug. You should contact ADINA R & D Inc. if you encounter such a message.
In order to track down the source of the problem it would be most useful if the input
responsible for this condition is made available to the support engineers.
*** MEMORY OVERFLOW
The command has not completed, due to the program running out of memory. Increse the
memory allocation to the program
1.5 File input/output
The AUI uses several files for handling I/O. Here is a brief description of some of them,
together with a suggested filename extension convention:
<file>.in ADINA-IN batch command input.
<file>.idb ADINA-IN permanent database.
<file>.plo ADINA-PLOT batch command input.
<file>.pdb ADINA-PLOT permanent database.
<file>.ses AUI session file (echo of command input).
<file>.ps PostScript snapshot.
<file>.dat Analysis data.
<file>.por Analysis porthole.
<file>.out Analysis printout.
1.6 The AUI database
The AUI uses an internal database to store and retrieve data used during program execution.
The internal database is stored in main memory and, if main memory is not sufficient, a tempo-
rary database file is created to hold the excess data. The internal database can be saved in a
disk file, called a permanent database file, so that it can be retrieved in a future run.
Five commands are used to create, open and save databases. DATABASE NEW creates a
new empty internal database. DATABASE OPEN initializes the internal database using a
specified permanent database file. DATABASE SAVE saves the internal database to disk,
allowing you to specify the name of the database file. DATABASE ATTACH causes the AUI
to use the specified permanent database file as the internal database. DATABASE DETACH
renames the internal database file as a permanent database file. All of these commands are
described in Section 3.1.
The permanent database file is similar to a text file used in a word processing program. Like
the text file, the permanent database file resides on disk and can be retrieved by the program
Sec. 1.5 File input/output
in a future run. The permanent database file can be saved on disk periodically during
program execution to protect against loss of data due to computer failure. During each save
operation, a different permanent database file can be selected so that several versions of the
database are available for retrieval. (This is similar to saving several versions of a text file on
disk when working with a word processing program.) For the differences between DATABASE
OPEN and DATABASE ATTACH, see the command description for DATABASE ATTACH. For
the differences between DATABASE SAVE and DATABASE DETACH, see the command
description for DATABASE DETACH.
1.7 Listings
Many AUI commands generate lists. For example, the ZONELIST command (see The AUI
Command Reference Manual, Volume IV) lists the values of variables. You can also specify
whether listings are to be sent to your terminal or to a disk file (see the FILELIST command).
When the listings are sent to your terminal, you are prompted by
--More--( %)
after each screen of the listing. The number printed before the percent sign represents the
percentage of the file that has been displayed so far. Responses to this prompt are as
follows:
<return> Display another line of the listing.
<space bar> Display another screenful of the listing.
<i><space bar> Display i more lines.
D or d Display the next half-screen (a scroll) of the listing.
<i>D or <i>d Set the number of lines in the scroll to i and display the next scroll.
<i>Z or <i>z Set the number of lines in each screen to i and display the next screen.
<i>S or <i>s Skip i lines and print a screenful of lines.
<i>F or <i>f Skip i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.
<i>B or <i>b Skip back i screenfuls and print a screenful of lines.
Q or q Stop the listing.
= Print the current line number in the listing.
. Repeat the last prompt response.
In these responses, <i> represents an optional integer argument, defaulting to 1. If you are
familiar with the UNIX operating system, you will recognize that the above options corre-
spond closely to the options of the 'more' command.
1.8 Units
In model definition no particular unit system is assumed. Any consistent unit system may be
adopted. Certain thermodynamic constants do, however, have a choice of temperature unit
system (Celsius/Centigrade/Kelvin, Fahrenheit/Rankine).
1.9 Tips for writing batch files
Increasing execution speed: The AUI contains features that are useful when you enter
commands using the dialog boxes, but are not useful when you read commands from a batch
file. These features are activated by default. You can deactivate the features to increase the
speed at which batch files are processed, and to reduce the memory requirements of the AUI.
The features are
Undo/redo storage:
Command CONTROL UNDO=-1 turns off storage for undo/redo information.
Automatic model rebuilding:
Command CONTROL AUTOMREBUILD=NO turns off automatic model rebuilding.
Session file creation:
Command FILESESSION NO turns off creation of the session file.
Storage of session file information in the database:
To turn off this feature, use the command CONTROL SESSIONSTORAGE=NO.
Stopping after an error or memory overflow is detected:
Command CONTROL ERRORACTION=SKIP activate a feature that AUI skips the
remaining commands in a batch file after an error or memory overflow is detected.
Summary:
Use the following commands to perform all of the above actions:
FILESESSION NO
CONTROL UNDO=-1 AUTOMREBUILD=NO SESSIONSTORAGE=NO,
ERRORACTION=SKIP
1.10 Related documentation
At the time of printing of this manual, the following documents are available with the ADINA
System:
Sec. 1.8 Units
Installation Notes
Describes the installation of the ADINA System on your computer.
ADINA User Interface Command Reference Manual
Volume I: ADINA Solids & Structures Model Definition, Report ARD 09-2, April 2009
Volume II: ADINA Heat Transfer Model Definition, Report ARD 09-3, April 2009
Volume III: ADINA CFD Model Definition, Report ARD 09-4, April 2009
Volume IV: Display Processing, Report ARD 09-5, April 2009
These documents describe the AUI command language. You use the AUI command
language to write batch files for the AUI.
ADINA User Interface Primer, Report ARD 09-6, April 2009
Tutorial for the ADINA User Interface, presenting a sequence of worked examples which
progressively instruct you how to effectively use the AUI.
Theory and Modeling Guide
Volume I: ADINA Solids & Structures, Report ARD 09-7, April 2009
Volume II: ADINA Heat Transfer, Report ARD 09-8, April 2009
Volume III: ADINA CFD & FSI, Report ARD 09-9, April 2009
Provides a concise summary and guide for the theoretical basis of the analysis programs
ADINA, ADINA-T, ADINA-F, ADINA-FSI and ADINA-TMC. The manuals also provide
references to other publications which contain further information, but the detail con-
tained in the manuals is usually sufficient for effective understanding and use of the
programs.
ADINA Verification Manual, Report ARD 09-10, April 2009
Presents solutions to problems which verify and demonstrate the usage of the ADINA
System. Input files for these problems are distributed along with the ADINA System
programs.
TRANSOR for I-DEAS Users Guide, Report ARD 09-15, April 2009
Describes the interface between the ADINA System and I-deas
.
ADINA System 8.6 Release Notes, April 2009
Provides a description of the new and modified features of the ADINA System 8.5.
You will also find the following book useful:
K. J. Bathe, Finite Element Procedures, Prentice Hall, Englewood Cliffs, NJ, 1996.
Provides theoretical background to many of the solution techniques used in the ADINA
System.
This page is intentionally left blank
Chapter 2
Quick index
Quick index Chap. 2 Quick index

2.1 New commands, parameters and options

In version 8.6, the following new commands, parameters and options were added to Volume I
of the AUI Command Reference Manual. The commands are listed in page number order.
Command Parameter Option/[Default] Page
LOAD-CLOUD 3-19
LOAD-STL 3-20
NASTRAN-ADINA DEFAULT Description change 3-23
MASTER TMC-MODEL HEAT 5-6
TMC-CONTROL
GAMMA, TEMP-CUTOFF,
CUTOFF, TEMP-RELAX, HEAT-
RELAX 5-18
TMC-CONTROL METHOD COMPOSITE 5-18
TMC-ITERATION TMCTOL, LINE-SEARCH 5-73
TOLERANCES
ITERATION 5-76
PRINTNODES NODESETS 5-90
CONTACT-OUTPUT-
NODES 5-92
SAVENODES NODESETS 5-95
MONITOR 5-100
MONITOR-CONTROL 5-102
LINE SECTION P1, P2 6-23
BODY-DSCADAP 6-76
BODY MID-SURFACE 6-119
MATERIAL MOHR-
COULOMB
TEMPEFFECTS, ECC,
ALPHA 7-38
MATERIAL
NONLINEAR-ELASTIC NU, MATRIX 7-50
MATERIAL PLASTIC-
CYCLIC 7-65
MATERIAL SMA TOLIL New default 7-75
MATERIAL USER-
SUPPLIED NSUBD Description change 7-86
Chap. 2 Quick index Quick index

2-4 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ! ADINA Structures Model Definition
MATERIAL USER-
SUPPLIED
LENGTH3, LENGTH4,
AUTOLEN, NONSYM,
DENSITY 7-86
TMC-MATERIAL
ISOTROPIC DENSITY 7-92
TMC-MATERIAL
ORTHOTROPIC DENSITY 7-93
TMC-MATERIAL
TEMPDEP-K DENSITY 7-94
TMC-MATERIAL
TEMPDEP-C-
ISOTROPIC DENSITY 7-95
TMC-MATERIAL
TEMPDEP-C-
ORTHOTROPIC DENSITY 7-96
TMC-MATERIAL
TEMPDEP-C-K DENSITY 7-98
TMC-MATERIAL
TIMEDEP-K DENSITY 7-99
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
BILINEAR 7-107
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
MULTILINEAR 7-108
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
EXPONENTIAL 7-109
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
MEMORY-
EXPONENTIAL 7-110
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC
ARMSTRONG-
FREDRICK 7-111
PLCYCL-RUPTURE
AEPS 7-112

CROSS-SECTION
PROPERTIES
CTOFFSET, CSOFFSET,
STINERTIA, SRINERTIA,
TRINERTIA, WINERTIA,
WRINERTIA, DRINERTIA 7-180
LINE-ELEMDATA
TRUSS print(i), save(i) 7-188
CONTACT-3-SEARCH 7-307
FRACTURE
PRESSURE,
TEMPERATURE,
DYNAMIC 7-310
FRACTURE LVUS3, TECHNIQUE Description change 7-310
CRACK-
PROPAGATION Description change 7-314
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
POINT Description change 7-320
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
LINE Description change 7-322
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
SURFACE Description change 7-324
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
RING Description change 7-325
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
RING RING-TYPE
NODE,
AUTOMATIC 7-325
R-CURVE Description change 7-329
USER-RUPURE 7-333
RIGIDLINK DOFSI 7-334
CONSTRAINT TRANSFORMATION 7-338
FIXITY dof(i) BEAM-WARP 7-347
C-PROP TBIRTH, TDEATH 7-391
R-PROP
TBIRTH, TDEATH,
SHAPE 7-392
APPLY-LOAD SHELLNODE 7-395

INITIAL-MAPPING ORDER 7-410
EGROUP TRUSS GAPWIDTH 8-3
EGROUP TWODSOLID RUPTURE-LABEL 8-6
EGROUP TWODSOLID
FRACTURE, LVUS1,
LVUS2 Description change 8-6
EGROUP THREEDSOLID RUPTURE-LABEL 8-12
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
FRACTURE, LVUS1,
LVUS2 Description change 8-12
EGROUP BEAM
TMC-MATERIAL, BOLT-
NUMBER, BOLT-LOAD,
WARP 8-19
EGROUP BEAM
BOLTFORCE,
BOLTNCUR Description change 8-19
EGROUP ISOBEAM TMC-MATERIAL 8-24
EGROUP SHELL
TMC-MATERIAL, WTMC,
RUPTURE-LABEL 8-33
EGROUP PIPE TMC-MATERIAL 8-40
EGROUP PIPE
OVALIZATION, OPTION,
BOLT-TOL Description change 8-40
EGROUP SPRING NONLINEAR MNO-G 8-45
BOLT-OPTIONS 8-56
BOLT-TABLE 8-57
GFACE NCOINCIDE SELECTED 8-122
GBODY NCOINCIDE SELECTED 8-128
GHEXA MINSIZE Description change 8-136
GHEXA
SHIFTX, SHIFTY,
SHIFTZ, MAX-REF 8-136
TRUSS-LINE Correction 8-160
NODESET OPTION
LINE-EDGE,
SURFACE-FACE,
CHAIN 9-10

NODESET ANGLE 9-10
BOUNDARIES
pore(i), temperature(i),
beam-warp(i) 9-54
RIGIDLINK-NODE 9-59
CRACK-
PROPAGATION
NODES Description change 9-91
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
NODE Description change 9-92
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT
ELEMENT Description change 9-93

Updates from 8.6.1
REBAR-LINE NCOINCIDE 8-159

Updates from 8.6.2
MASTER MODEX RESULTS 5-6
CYCLIC-CONTROL BOUND-ELEMENT 7-228
CONTACT-CONTROL Description change 7-239
CGROUP CONTACT2 Description change 7-243
CGROUP CONTACT3 Description change 7-264
EGROUP TRUSS
PRINT, SAVE,
TBIRTH,TDEATH Omission inserted 8-3
EGROUP
TWODSOLID
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP
THREEDSOLID
PRINT, SAVE,

EGROUP BEAM
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP ISOBEAM
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP PLATE
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP SHELL
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP PIPE
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP SPRING
PRINT, SAVE,
EGROUP GENERAL PRINT, SAVE, Omission inserted 8-47
REBAR-LINE NCOINCIDE 8-159



This page intentionally left blank
Chap. 2 Quick index
2.2 Quick overview of commands
The following is a quick overview of all AUI commands in Volume I of the AUI Reference
Manual and their functions. The commands are presented in the order in which they appear.
Chapter 3: Input/output
Section 3.1: Database operations
DATABASE NEW, creates a new database.
DATABASE OPEN, creates a new database
using the specified permanent data-
base file.
DATABASE WRITE, saves the current
internal database as a permanent
database file.
DATABASE SAVE, saves the current
internal database as a permanent
database file.
DATABASE ATTACH, allows access to the
specified file as an AUI database file.
DATABASE DETACH, creates a permanent
database file by detaching a working
copy of the database file.
Section 3.2: Analysis data files
ADINA, initiates model validation and/or
creates an ADINA data file.
REBUILD-MODEL, forces the AUI to
rebuild the model.
Section 3.3: External data
LOADDXF, loads an AutoCAD
DXF file
into the database.
LOADIGES, loads an IGES file into the
database.
LOADSOLID, loads Parasolid

part into the
database.
LOAD-CLOUD, reads in a point cloud file
(depicting the boundary of an object)
and writes out an STL file.
LOAD-STL, Loads an STL format file into the
AUI by creating a STL body.
NASTRAN-ADINA, maps a NASTRAN
data file into the database.

EXPORT NASTRAN, exports an ADINA
model to a NASTRAN file.
EXPORT UNIVERSAL, exports the mesh in
ADINA-AUI to an I-DEAS
universal
file format.
Section 3.4: Auxiliary files
READ, reads AUI input commands from the
specified file.
FILEREAD, controls the source of input
commands to the AUI.
FILESESSION, controls the generation and
output of a session file.
FILELIST, controls the format and output of
listings.
FILEECHO, controls the echoing of input
commands.
FILELOG, controls the output of log
messages.
COMMANDFILE, creates a file of commands
to recreate the current model.
RTOFILE, defines the contents of a run-time-
option file.
Section 3.5: Program termination
PAUSE, stops processing commands until a
key is hit.
END, terminates the program.
Section 3.6: Auxiliary commands
PARAMETER, defines a parameter that can
be substituted in a later command.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Chapter 4: Interface control and editing
Section 4.1: Settings
CONTROL, defines certain parameters that
control program behavior.
Section 4.2: Editing
UNDO, cancels the effects of previous com-
mands.
REDO, cancels the effects of previous
UNDO commands.
Chapter 5: Control data
Section 5.1: General
FEPROGRAM, specifies the finite element
analysis program to be used to solve
the problem.
HEADING, specifies a title for the problem
described by the model database.
MASTER, defines the data controlling the
execution of the analysis program
ADINA.
DOF-ACTIVE, used to identify the active
degree of freedom (DOF) of reduced
model.
TMC-CONTROL, controls the performance
of heat transfer analysis with ADINA.
Section 5.2: Analysis details
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-
INTEGRATION, specifies time integration
parameters for dynamic analysis.
FREQUENCIES, specifies control data for a
frequency solution.
BUCKLING-LOADS, specifies control data
for evaluating static buckling loads and
corresponding mode shapes.
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT, pro-
vides control data for a mode superposi -
tion analysis.
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-
FACTORS, provides control data for a modal
participation factor analysis.
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES,
provides control data for modal stress
calculations.
Section 5.3: Options
KINEMATICS, defines the kinematic
formulation.
MASS-MATRIX, selects the type of mass
matrix to be used in dynamic analysis.
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING, specifies Rayleigh
Damping coefficients.
MODAL-DAMPING, defines modal damping
factors to be used in mode superposi-
tion analysis.
FAILURE MAXSTRESS, defines a failure
criterion of type MAXSTRESS.
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN, defines a failure
criterion of type MAXSTRAIN.
FAILURE TSAI-HILL, defines a failure
criterion of type TSAI-HILL.
FAILURE TSAI-WU, defines a failure
criterion of type TSAI-WU.
FAILURE HASHIN, defines a failure
criterion of type HASHIN.
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED, defines a failure
criterion of type USERSUPPLIED.
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE, defines
reference temperatures and temperature
gradients for both initial conditions and
thermal loads.
Section 5.4: Solver details
SOLVER ITERATIVE, defines control data
for the iterative solution of the matrix
system of equilibrium equations.
PPROCESS, specifies the number of the
processors used to split element groups
into sub-groups.
Chap. 2 Quick index
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE, defines control
data for the iterative solution of the
matrix system of equilibrium equations
for heat transfer analysis.
Section 5.5: Automatic control
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT,
defines parameters for an automatic
load-displacement control (LDC)
procedure.
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING, defines
parameters controlling the automatic
time-stepping procedure.
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICA-
TION, controls the total-load-application
(TLA) procedure.
Section 5.6: Time dependence
TIMESTEP, defines a timestep sequence
which controls the time/loadstep
incrementation during analysis.
TIMEFUNCTION, defines a timefunction,
which may be referenced, e.g., by an
applied load.
Section 5.7: Iteration
ITERATION, selects the equilibrium iteration
scheme to be employed for a nonlinear
analysis.
STIFFNESS-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which the effective stiffness
matrix is reformed by the analysis
program.
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which equilibrium iterations
are performed.
TMC-ITERATION, selects the equilibrium
iteration scheme to be employed for a
heat transfer analysis.
Section 5.8: Tolerances
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, specifies
certain geometric tolerances.
TOLERANCES ITERATION, specifies the
convergence criteria and corresponding
tolerances controlling the equilibrium
iteration scheme.
Section 5.9: Analysis output
PRINTOUT, controls the amount of output
printed.
PRINT-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which results are printed.
PORTHOLE, controls the saving of input
data and solution results on the port-
hole file.
NODESAVE-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which nodal results are
saved in the porthole file.
ELEMSAVE-STEPS, controls the output
timesteps at which element results are
saved on the porthole file.
PRINTNODES, selects nodes (defined by
blocks or geometry entities) for which
solution results shall be printed.
CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES, select nodes
for output of contact results.
REACTION-NODES, selects nodes for
printing reaction forces.
SAVENODES, selects nodes (defined by
blocks or geometry entities) for which
the solution results shall be saved in
the porthole file.
DISK-STORAGE, indicates file storage and
input/output control.
Section 5.10: Solution monitoring
MONITOR, defines solution monitors to
track the change of variables during
simulation.
Chap. 2 Quick index
MONITOR-CONTROL, control settings for
the solution monitoring feature.
Chapter 6: Geometry definition
Section 6.1: Coordinate systems
SYSTEM, defines a local coordinate system.
Section 6.2: Points
COORDINATES POINT, defines geometry
point coordinates.
Section 6.3: Lines
LINE STRAIGHT, defines a straight
geometry line between two geometry
points.
LINE ARC, defines a geometry line as a
circular arc, or as an arc with varying
radius.
LINE CIRCLE, defines a circle geometry
line.
LINE CURVILINEAR, defines a geometry
line as a linearly interpolated curve in a
given local coordinate system.
KNOTS, defines a vector of knot values
for NURBS definition.
LINE POLYLINE, defines a geometry line as
a polyline, i.e., a curve controlled by a
series of geometry points.
LINE SECTION, defines a geometry line to
be part of another geometry line.
LINE COMBINED, defines a geometry line
as a combination of other geometry
lines.
LINE REVOLVED, defines a geometry line
(a circular arc) by rotating a geometry
point about an axis.
LINE EXTRUDED, defines a geometry line
by displacing a geometry point in a
given direction.
LINE TRANSFORMED, defines a geometry
line to be a geometrical transformation
of another geometry line.
SPLIT-LINE, creates two geometry lines of
type SECTION by splitting a given
line into two parts connected at some
point on the given line.
LNTHICKNESS, defines line thicknesses
(e.g., for defining axisymmetric shell
thicknesses).
Section 6.4: Surfaces
SURFACE PATCH, defines a geometry
surface to be bounded by edges which
are specified geometry lines.
SURFACE VERTEX, defines a geometry
surface to be bounded by edges which
are specified by their end geometry
points - the vertices of the surface.
SURFACE GRID, defines a geometry
surface as a grid (array) of geometry
points, which control the shape of the
surface.
SURFACE EXTRUDED, defines a geometry
surface by displacing a geometry line in
a given direction.
SURFACE REVOLVED, defines a geometry
surface by rotating a geometry line
about some axis.
SURFACE TRANSFORMED, defines a
geometry surface via a transformation of
another surface.
SFTHICKNESS, defines surface thick-
nesses.
CHECK-SURFACES, checks geometry
surface connections looking for two
adjoining surfaces which are oppositely
oriented, i.e., with opposite surface
normals.
Section 6.5: Volumes
VOLUME PATCH, defines a geometry
volume to bebounded by faces which
are specified geometry surfaces.
Chap. 2 Quick index
VOLUME VERTEX, defines a geometry
volume in terms of the vertices.
VOLUME REVOLVED, defines a geometry
volume by rotating a geometry surface
about some axis.
VOLUME EXTRUDED, defines a geometry
volume by displacing a geometry
surface in a given direction.
VOLUME SWEEP, defines one or more
geometry volumes by sweeping one or
more geometry surfaces along a line.
VOLUME TRANSFORMED, defines a
geometry volume to be a geometrical
transformation of another volume.
Section 6.6: Solid models
BODY SURFACES, defines a solid body via
a collection of oriented surfaces.
BODY VOLUMES, defines a solid body via
a collection of volumes.
FACE-THICKNESS, defines solid geometry
face thicknesses.
FACELINK, establishes a link, for meshing
purpose, between two faces of distinct
solid models, or between a face of a
solid model and a surface.
SPLIT-EDGE, splits an edge of a body into
two edges by giving a parameter along
the edge.
SPLIT-FACE, splits a face of a body into two
faces by giving two points on the face.
BODY-DISCREP, creates a discrete
boundary represenation for a given
body.
BODY-DEFEATURE, removes small
features from the discrete boundary
represenation of a given body.
BODY-CLEANUP, removes shortbody
edges and/or thin body faces from the
AUI represenation of a given body.
BODY-RESTORE, restores the AUI topo-
logical representation of the body
corresponding to its state before
commands such as BODY-CLEANUP,
REM-EDGE or REM-FACE are executed.
BODY-DSCADAP, adapts (according to the
mesh densities set prior) the surface
triangles that make up the geometry of
an STL body.
Section 6.7: Spatial functions
LINE-FUNCTION, describes the variation of
a quantity along a line.
SURFACE-FUNCTION, describes the
variation of a quantity over a surface.
VOLUME-FUNCTION, describes the
variation of a quantity within a volume.
Section 6.8: Transformations
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED,
defines a general transformation as an
ordered sequence of existing transfor
mations.
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT, defines a
general 3-D transformation by
directly specifying the transformation
matrix.
TRANSFORMATION POINTS, defines a
rigid-body 3-D transformation by the
specification of 6 geometry points, 3
initial points and 3 targetpoints.
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION,
defines a 3-D reflection (mirror) transfor
mation.
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION, defines
a 3-D rotation transformation.
TRANSFORMATION SCALE, defines a 3-
D scaling transformation.
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION,
defines a 3-D translation transformation.
TRANSFORMATION INVERSE, defines a
3-D geometry transformation as the
inverse of another transformation.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 6.9: Miscellaneous
DOMAIN, defines a geometry domain,
which is a collection of geometry
entities.
MEASURE, determines the distance between
two points or the length of an edge or a
line.
GET-EDGE-FACES, lists the body faces
connected to a body edge.
GET-EDGE-POINTS, lists the AUI points
bounding a body edge.
GET-FACE-EDGES, lists the body edges
bounding a body face.
REM-EDGE, removes a body edge by
collapsing one end point onto the other.
REM-FACE, removes a body face by
collapsing one bounding edge onto the
other.
Section 6.10: ADINA - M
BODY BLEND, modifies specified edges of
a body to have a radius blend.
BODY BLOCK, defines a solid geometry or
brickshape.
BODY CHAMFER, applies chamfers to
edges of a solid body.
BODY CONE, defines a cone shape solid
geometry.
BODY CYLINDER, defines a cylinder shape
solid geometry.
BODY HOLLOW, hollows a solid geometry
with thickness THICKNESS.
BODY INTERSECT, modifies an existing
solid body by taking the intersection of
it with other, overlapping body.
BODY LOFTED, creates a sheet body by
lofting through a set of lines or edges
and creates a solid body by lofting
through a set of surfaces, faces, and
sheet bodies.
BODY MERGE, modifies an existing solid
body by joining it with a set of other
solid bodies.
BODY MID-SURFACE, creates sheet
bodies from a thin-walled solid body.
BODY OPTION, provides the options for
ADINA-M bodies.
BODY PARTITION, partition body with a
set of faces of the body.
BODY PIPE, defines a pipe shape solid
geometry.
BODY PRISM, defines a prismatic shape
solid geometry.
BODY PROJECT, projects lines into a face
of the body.
BODY REVOLVED, creates a body by
revolving face of existing body around
an axis.
BODY SECTION, partition solid body
using sheets.
BODY SEW, sews a set of sheet bodies into
sewn bodies.
BODY SHEET, defines a sheet body by a
set of geometry lines.
BODY SPHERE, defines a sphere shape
solid body.
BODY SUBTRACT, modifies an existing
solid body by removing from it a set of
other solid, overlapping bodies.
BODY SWEEP, creates a body by sweeping
existing face of a body in a given
direction or along a line.
BODY TORUS, defines a torus shape solid
geometry.
BODY TRANSFORMED, defines a solid
geometry by copying or moving an
existing Parasolid
body.
SHEET PLANE, defines a planar sheet used
for partition of bodies.
VOLUME BODY, converts a body into a
geometrical volume.
SURFACE FACE, converts a face of a body
into a geometric surface.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Chapter 7: Model definition
Section 7.1: Material models
MATERIAL ANAND, defines an Anand
material.
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE, defines an
Arruda-Boyce material model.
MATERIAL CAM-CLAY, defines a nonlin-
ear Cam-Clay material model.
MATERIAL CONCRETE, defines a nonlin-
ear concrete material model.
MATERIAL CREEP, defines a nonlinear
creep material.
MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION,
defines an irradiation creep material.
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, defines a
nonlinear creep material with variable
creep coefficients.
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION,
defines a nonlinear geological material,
with the option of tension cut-off or
cracking.
MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER, defines a
nonlinear Drucker-Prager material model
with a hardening cap and tension
cut-off.
MATERIAL ELASTIC, defines an isotropic
linear elastic material.
MATERIAL FLUID, defines a linear fluid
material.
MATERIAL GASKET, defines a gasket
material model.
MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC, defines a
nonlinear Gurson plastic material.
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC, defines a
hyperelastic material, which is incom-
pressible nonlinear elastic, for rubber-
like materials.
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM, defines a
hyper-foam material model.
MATERIAL ILYUSHIN, defines a nonlinear
elastic-plastic material with the Ilyushin
yield condition and isotropic hardening.
MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB, defines a
nonlinear Mohr-Coulomb material.
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, defines a
Mooney-Rivlin material, which is
incompressible nonlinear elastic, for
rubber materials.
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR, defines an
elastic-plastic material with Mroz yield
criteria and bilinear hardening.
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-
CREEP, defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-
plastic-multilinear and creep material,
with von Mises yield condition and
isotropic, kinematic or mixed strain
hardening.
CREEP-VARIABLE, defines a nonlinear
thermo-elastic-plastic-multilinear creep
material model with variable creep
coefficients.
MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC,
defines a nonlinear elastic material.
MATERIAL OGDEN, defines an Ogden
material, which is incompressible
nonlinear elastic, for rubber materials.
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, defines an
orthotropic linear elastic material.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR,
defines a bilinear elastic-plastic material
model with von Mises yield condition.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP, defines a
nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic and
creep material, with von Mises yield
condition and isotropic or kinematic
strain hardening.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-
plastic creep material model with
variable creep coefficients.
Chap. 2 Quick index
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC, defines a
plastic-cyclic material.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR,
defines a multilinear elastic-plastic
material model with von Mises yield
condition.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC,
defines a nonlinear orthotropic plastic
material.
MATERIAL SMA, defines a shape-memory
alloy material.
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE,
defines a Sussman-Bathe material
model.
MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC,
defines a nonlinear isotropic
thermo-elastic material.
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC,
defines a nonlinear orthotropic
thermo-elastic material.
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC, defines a
nonlinear thermo-plastic material.
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, defines a
user-supplied material for use with
ADINA, with options for piezoelec-
tric or consolidation analyses.
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC, defines a
time and teperature dependent vis-
coelastic material model.
TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC, defines a
constant isotropic conductivity and a
constant specific heat material for TMC
analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, defines
an orthotropic conductivity and constant
specific heat material for TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, defines a
material with temperature dependent
conductivity and constant specific heat
for TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTRO-
PIC, defines a material with temperature
dependent specific heat and constant
isotropic conductivity for TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-
ORTHOTROPIC, defines a material with
constant, orthotropic, conductivity and
temperature dependent specific heat for
TMC analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K, defines a
material with temperature dependent
specific heat and conductivity for TMC
analysis.
TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K, defines a
material with time dependent conductivity
and constant specific heat for TMC
analysis.
CURVE-FITTING, defines a fitting curve for
hyperelastic material models.
VISCOELASTIC CONSTANTS, defines
viscoelastic contants for a viscoelastic
material model.
PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION, contrrols
parameters for phi model completion
phase of potential-based fluid elements.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR, sets up a
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type
bilinear.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR, sets
up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of
type multilinear.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL,
sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC defini
tion of type exponential.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY-EXPO-
NENTIAL, sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
definition of type memory-exponential.
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-
FREDRICK, sets up a PLCYCL-KINEMATIC
definition of type Armstrong-Fredrick.
PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS, sets up a
PLCYCL-RUPTURE definition of type
AEPS (accumulated effective plastic
strain).
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN,
defines a rubber-table data set of type
Mooney-Rivlin.
Chap. 2 Quick index
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN, defines a
rubber-table data set of type Ogden.
RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE,
Arruda-Boyce.
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM, defines a
rubber-table data set of type hyper-
foam.
RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE
Sussman-Bathe.
RUBBER-TABLE TRS, defines a
rubber-table data set of type TRS
(thermorheologically simple).
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH,
defines a data set of type rubber-
Mullins, subtype Ogden-Roxburgh.
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL,
viscoelastic, subtype Holzapfel.
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL,
orthotropic, subtype Holzapfel.
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE, defines an
effective stress vs. creep coeffients
table.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2, defines
the dependency of creep law coeffi-
cients on temperature.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR,
defines the temperature and depen-
dence of stress creep coefficients.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-
ONLY, defines the dependency of creep law
coefficients on temperature.
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED,
Defines a user supplied creep coefficient
dependence function.
CURVATURE-MOMENT, defines a curvature
vs. moment curve.
FTABLE, defines a modulus vs. decay
coefficient table for MATERIAL
VISCOELASTIC.
FORCE-STRAIN, defines a force vs. strain
curve.
IRRADIATION-CREEP-TABLE, defines an
irradiation creep table.
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE, defines a
moment-curvature-force property for
BEAM elements.
MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE, defines a
moment-twist-force property for BEAM
elements.
NEUTRON-DOSE, defines a neutron
fluence.
NEUTRON-TABLE, defines a neutron
fluence table.
PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY, defines proper-
ties of a pore fluid.
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C, defines a
nonlinear relationship between damping
and velocity.
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K, defines a
nonlinear relationship between force
and relative displacement.
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M, defines a
time-dependent mass property.
PROPERTYSET, defines stiffness, mass,
damping, and stress transformation
properties for SPRING elements.
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE
NONLINEAR-ELASTIC, defines a nonlin-
ear-elastic rigidity property.
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, defines a plastic-
multilinear rigidity property.
RUPTURE MULTILINEAR, defines a
rupture criterion in terms of multilinear
temperature-dependent curves.
RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER, defines a
three-parameter law rupture criterion.
RUPTURE-CURVE, defines a rupture-strain
vs. stress curve.
SCURVE, defines a stress-strain curve which
can be referenced by a material model.
Chap. 2 Quick index
SSCURVE, defines a stress-strain1-2 curve
which can be referenced by a material
model.
LCURVE, defines a loading-unloading curve
which can be referenced by the gasket
material model.
STRAINRATE-FIT, defines a strainrate-fit
for the curve fitting of strainrate
material parameters.
TWIST-MOMENT, defines a twist vs.
moment curve.
Section 7.2: Cross-sections/layers
CROSS-SECTION BOX, defines a box
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION I, defines an I-beam
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION L, defines an L-beam
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION PIPE, defines a pipe
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR,
defines a rectangular cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION U, defines a U-beam
cross-section.
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES, defines a
general cross-section in terms of
principal moments of inertia and areas.
LAYER, defines the control parameters of
each surface layer (for multi-layer shell
elements).
PLY-DATA, defines the layer thickness for a
fiber-matrix composite.
Section 7.3: Element properties
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, assigns data for
TRUSS elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, assigns data for
TRUSS elements on edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, assigns
data for TWODSOLID elements to
geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, assigns
data for TWODSOLID elements on
faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID, assigns
data for THREEDSOLIDelements in
geometry volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID,
assigns data for THREEDSOLID
elements in bodies.
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM, assigns data for
BEAM elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM, assigns data for
BEAM elements on edges.
LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, assigns data
for ISOBEAM elements to geometry
lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, assigns data
for ISOBEAM elements on edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE, assigns data for
PLATE elements to geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE, assigns data for
PLATE elements on faces.
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL, assigns data for
SHELL elements to geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL, assigns data for
SHELL elements on faces.
ELAYER, assigns material to individual
element on diffferent layers for shell
element.
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE, assigns data for
PIPE elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE, assigns data for
PIPE elements on edges.
LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements on faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns data
for GENERAL elements in volumes.
Chap. 2 Quick index
BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL, assigns
data for GENERAL elements in bodies.
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2, assigns data
for FLUID2 elements on surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2, assigns data
for FLUID2 elements on faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3, assigns data for
FLUID3 elements in volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3, assigns data
for FLUID3 elements in bodies.
MATRIX STIFFNESS, defines a stiffness
matrix for general elements.
MATRIX MASS, defines a mass matrix for
general elements.
MATRIX DAMPING, defines a damping
matrix for general elements.
MATRIX STRESS, defines a stress matrix
for general elements.
MATRIXSET, defines the matrixset for the
current GENERAL element group.
MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED, defines the
element stiffness matrix in a general
element group to be provided by
subroutine CUSERG.
MASSES, assigns concentrated masses to
the nodes on a set of geometry entities.
DAMPERS, assigns concentrated dampers
to the nodes on a set of geometry
entities.
Section 7.4: Substructure and cyclic
symmetry
SUBSTRUCTURE, defines substructures.
REUSE, connects a substructure to the main
structure.
CYCLIC-CONTROL, specifies parameters
that control cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCLICLOADS, cyclic symmetric part of
loading.
CYCLICBOUNDARY, defines cyclic
symmetric boundarie based on points,
lines, surfaces or nodes.
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D, defines
cyclic symmetric boundaries based on
lines or edges.
CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D, defines
cyclic symmetric boundaries based on
surfaces or faces.
AXIS-ROTATION, defines a rotational axis
which can be referenced other com-
mands.
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE, creates substructures
in terms of existing element groups.
Section 7.5: Contact conditions
ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET, defines
parameters for analytical rigid target
analysis.
CONTACT-CONTROL, specifies parameters
controlling the behavior of the algo-
rithms used in modeling contact.
CGROUP CONTACT2, defines a contact
group consisting of 2-D or axisymmetric
contact surfaces.
CGROUP CONTACT3, defines a contact
group consisting of 3-D contact
surfaces.
CONTACTBODY, defines a contact body i.e.
a geometry surface in 2D or a geometry
volume in 3D.
CONTACTSURFACE, defines a contact
surface, i.e., a set of geometry bound-
aries which are expected to be in contact
either initially or during analysis with
another similarly defined contact
surface.
CONTACTPOINT, defines a contact point,
i.e., a set of geometry points (in 2-D or 3-
D analysis) which are expected to be in
contact.
DRAWBEAD, defines a drawbead for metal
forming analysis.
COULOMB-FRICTION, specifies variable
Coulomb friction coefficient.
Chap. 2 Quick index
USER-FRICTION, specifies the parameters
used in the calculation of user-supplied
friction for the current contact group.
CS-OFFSET, specifies offset distances for
individual contact-surfaces.
CONTACTPAIR, defines a contact pair, i.e.,
two contact surfaces which are either
initially in contact or are anticipated to
come into contact during analysis.
CONTACT-3-SEARCH, creates 3D contact
surfaces and contact pairs between two
bodies within the given distance range.
Section 7.6: Fracture mechanics
FRACTURE, defines controlling data for
analysis of fracture mechanics problems.
CRACK-GROWTH, specifies the parameters
that govern control of the growth of a
propagating crack.
CRACK-PROPAGATION, defines the initial
crack front position or the virtual/actual
crack propagation path.
J-LINE POINT, defines a line contour via a
circle centered at a point.
J-LINE RING, defines a line contour via a
ring of elements.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT, defines a virtual
material shift via a circle centered at a
point.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE, defines a virtual
material shift via the nodes lying on any
of a given set of lines.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE, defines a
virtual material shift via the nodes lying
on any of a given set of surfaces.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING, defines a virtual
material shift via a number of rings of
elements about the crack front.
R-CURVE, defines a resistance curve set
which can be used in a crack growth
analysis.
SINGULAR, defines a set of singular
nodes-vertex nodes whose adjacent
non-vertex nodes are moved to the 1/4
point, giving a singularity at the
required nodes.
USER-RUPTURE, specifies user-defined
rupture data.
Section 7.7: Boundary conditions
RIGIDLINK, specifies rigid links between
geometry entities.
CONSTRAINT, specifies a constraint
equation which expresses a slave
(dependent) degree of freedom as a
linear combination of a set of master
(independent) degrees of freedom.
CONSTRAINT-MS, similar to the
CONSTRAINT command, but also
allows the specification of multiple slave
entities for a single master entity.
CONSTRAINT-G, defines generalized
constraint equations for ADINA.
FIXITY, defines a fixity boundary condition.
FIXBOUNDARY, assigns fixity conditions to
a set of geometry entities.
ZOOM-BOUNDARY, specifies the boundary
of a zoom model that is inside (internal
to) the coarse model.
ENDRELEASE, defines an endrelease
condition for elements of type BEAM.
FSBOUNDARY, defines a fluid-structure-
interaction boundary.
FSBOUNDARY TWO-D, defines a fluid-
structure-interaction boundary for 2D
analysis.
FSBOUNDARY THREE-D, defines a fluid-
structure-interaction boundary for 3D
analysis.
Chap. 2 Quick index
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE, defines a free-
surface potential-interface for ADINA.
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE,
defines an infinite potential-interface for
ADINA.
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-
TENSION, defines a surface tension
boundary for ADINA.
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT,
enforces the zero-slope-of-skin in the
longitudinal direction for pipe element
nodes.
FREESURFACE, defines a free surface on
the boundary lines (2-D) or surface(3-D)
for potential-based problems.
BCELL, defines a boundary cell using a 4-
node or 3-node cell.
Section 7.8: Loading
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL, defines a centrifu-
gal load.
LOAD CONTACT-SLIP, defines a contact-
slip load.
LOAD CONVECTION, defines a convec
tion load.
LOAD DISPLACEMENT, defines a
displacement load.
LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC, defines an
electromagnetic load.
LOAD FORCE, defines a force load.
LOAD LINE, defines a line load, i.e., a
distributed load in terms of force/unit
length.
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL, defines a
mass proportional load.
LOAD MOMENT, defines a moment load.
LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX, defines a nodal-
phiflux load.
LOAD PHIFLUX, defines a phiflux load.
LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE,
defines a pipe-internal-pressure load.
LOAD POREFLOW, defines a poreflow
load.
LOAD PORE-PRESSURE, defines a pore-
pressure load.
LOAD PRESSURE, defines a pressure load.
LOAD RADIATION, defines a radiation
load.
LOAD TEMPERATURE, defines a tempera-
ture load.
LOAD TGRADIENT, defines a temperature
gradient load to specify the temperature
gradient in the thickness direction of a
surface (when applied to shell elements).
CPROP, defines conveciton properties for
convection loading.
RPROP, defines radiaiton properties for
radiation loading.
LOAD-CASE, used in a linear static analysis
to identify the current load case.
LCOMBINATION, defines a new load case
as a linear combination of previously
defined load cases.
APPLY-LOAD, specifies loads applied to
model geometry.
LOAD-PENETRATION, controls transfer of
applied pressure loads to neighboring
elements when an element dies.
Section 7.9: Initial conditions
INITIAL-CONDITION, defines an initial
condition.
SET-INITCONDITION, assigns initial
conditions to a set of geometry entities.
STRAIN-FIELD, defines an initial strain field.
IMPERFECTION POINTS, specifies
imperfections at points based on
buckling mode shapes which have
been previously calculated.
IMPERFECTION SHAPE, used for initial
shape calculations based on previously
calculated nodal displacements.
INITIAL-MAPPING, loads an initial condi-
tion mapping file and interpolates
variable values at nodes.
Chap. 2 Quick index
THERMAL-MAPPING, interpolates nodal
temperatures and gradients from a given
temperature field contained in a mapping
file.
Section 7.10: Systems
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of a cylinder origin and axis
direction.
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES, defines
a skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of Euler angles.
SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinate system to
be such that one of its directions is
normal to a given line or surface.
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS, defines a
skew Cartesian coordinat system in
terms of geometry points.
SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL, defines a
terms of a sphere origin.
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS, defines a
terms of direction vectors.
DOF-SYSTEMS POINTS, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry points.
DOF-SYSTEMS LINES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry lines.
DOF-SYSTEMS EDGES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to solid geometry
edges.
DOF-SYSTEMS SURFACES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry
surfaces.
DOF-SYSTEMS FACES, assigns skew
faces.
DOF-SYSTEMS VOLUMES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to geometry
volumes.
DOF-SYSTEMS BODIES, assigns skew
bodies.
DOF-SYSTEMS NODESETS, assigns skew
coordinate systems to node sets.
SHELLNODESDOF, specifies the number of
degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of geometry
entities.
AXES CONSTANT, defines an axes-
system in terms of constant direction
vectors.
AXES LINE1, defines an axes-system via
a geometry line.
AXES LINE2, defines an axes-system via
two geometry lines.
AXES NODES, defines an axes-system via
three nodes.
AXES POINT2, defines an axes-system
via two geometry points.
AXES POINT3, defines an axes-system
via three geometry points.
AXES POINT-LINE, defines an axes-
system via a geometry line and a
geometry point.
AXES SURFACE, defines an axes-system
via a geometry surface.
AXES EDGE, defines an axes-system via a
geometry edge.
AXES FACE, defines an axes-system via a
geometry face.
AXES CYLINDRICAL, defines a cylindri-
cal axes system in terms of an origin and
an axis direction.
AXES SPHERICAL, defines a spherical
axes system in terms of an origin.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL, assigns material
axes-system, defined by command
AXES, to a set of geometry entities.
SET-AXES-STRAIN, assigns initial-strain
axes-systems, defined by the command
AXES, to a set of geometry entities.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Chapter 8: Finite element representation
Section 8.1: Element groups
EGROUP TRUSS, defines an element group
consisting of truss elements.
EGROUP TWODSOLID, defines an element
group consisting of planar or
axisymmetric elements.
EGROUP THREEDSOLID, defines an
element group consisting of
three-dimensional solid elements.
EGROUP BEAM, defines an element group
consisting of Hermitian beam elements.
EGROUP ISOBEAM, defines an element
group consisting of isoparametric beam
elements.
EGROUP PLATE, defines an element group
consisting of plate elements.
EGROUP SHELL, defines an element group
consisting of shell elements.
EGROUP PIPE, defines an element group
consisting of pipe elements.
EGROUP SPRING, defines an element
group consisting of spring elements.
EGROUP GENERAL, defines an element
group consisting of linear general
elements.
EGROUP FLUID2, defines an element group
consisting of planar or axisymmetric
fluid elements.
EGROUP FLUID3, defines an element group
consisting of 3-D fluid elements.
EGCONTROL, specifies general control data
for an element group.
BOLT-OPTIONS, defines bolt options for
use with the EGROUP BEAM command.
BOLT-TABLE, specifies the bolt loading
sequence.
Section 8.2: Mesh generation
TRANSITION-ELEMENT, converts a set of
shell elements along an edge of a face/
surface into shell transition elements.
BLAYER, generates boundary layers on
specified body faces.
COPY-TRIANGULATION, copies face
triangulation for later use by meshing
commands like GFACE or GBODY.
DELETE-TRIANGULATION, deletes face
triangulations created by the COPY-
TRIANGULATION command.
LIST-TRIANGULATION, lists all faces
(body and face labels) which have
triangulation created by the COPY-
TRIANGULATION command.
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT, defines default
mesh subdivision data.
SUBDIVIDE MODEL, assigns mesh
subdivision data to the entire current
model geometry.
SUBDIVIDE POINT, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to geometry points.
SUBDIVIDE LINE, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to geometry lines.
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE, assigns mesh
subdivision data to geometry surfaces.
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME, assigns mesh
subdivision data to geometry volumes.
SUBDIVIDE EDGE, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to edges of a solid geometry
body.
SUBDIVIDE FACE, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to faces of a solid geometry
body.
SUBDIVIDE BODY, assigns mesh subdivi-
sion data to solid geometry bodies.
POINT-SIZE, specifies the element size at
geometr points.
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS, defines a
mesh size function using the vertices of
the model bounding box.
Chap. 2 Quick index
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX, defines a mesh size
function using the vertices of an input
box.
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT, defines a mesh
size function via a point source.
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS, defines a mesh size
function via a line source.
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE, defines a mesh
size function via a planar source.
SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED, defines a
mesh size function as a combination of
others.
SIZE-LOCATIONS, specifies mesh size at
certain locations (other than geometry
points).
NLTABLE, creates a table with specification
of number of layers across thin sections.
GPOINT, creates a node at a point with the
same coordinates.
GLINE, creates elements along a set of
geometry lines.
GSURFACE, creates elements on a set of
geometry surfaces.
GVOLUME, creates elements on a set of
geometry volumes.
GEDGE, creates elements on a set of solid
geometry edges.
GFACE, creates elements on a set of solid
geometry faces.
GBODY, creates elements for a solid geom-
etry body.
GBCELL, creates 3D elements from bound-
ary cells.
GHEXA, generates brick element dominant
free-form meshes for a given body.
GADAPT, deletes and remeshes a finite
element mesh.
ELDELETE, deletes elements generated on
specific geometry for a given element
group.
COPY-MESH-BODY, copies a mesh from
one body to another body via affine
transformation.
CSURFACE, creates a set of contact
elements on a contact surface.
CSDELETE, deletes contact elements
generated on specific geometry for a
given contact group.
GLUEMESH, glues two dissimilar meshes
together.
Section 8.3: Elements
TRUSS-POINTS, defines axisymmetric truss
elements at geometry points.
SPRING POINTS, defines spring elements
at points.
SPRING LINES, defines spring elements
between geometry lines.
REBAR- LINE, defines a rebar using lines.
The rebar defined is then referenced in
the EGROUP TRUSS command to model
rebar elements.
TRUSS-LINE, defines TRUSS elements
between lines.
ELTHICKNESS, defines shell element
thickness.
Chapter 9: Direte finite element data input
Section 9.1: Nodal data
COORDINATES NODE, defines coordi-
nates for (current substructure) nodes.
SKEWSYSTEMS NODES, defines a skew
Cartesian coordinate system in terms of
nodes.
DOF-SYSTEM NODES, assigns skew
coordinate systems to nodes in the
current substructure.
MASSES NODES, assigns concentrated
masses to nodes.
DAMPERS NODES, assigns concentrated
dampers to nodes.
SHELLNODESDOF NODES, specifies the
number of degrees of freedom for shell
midsurface nodes.
Chap. 2 Quick index
SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR, defines
director vectors that can be applied via
command SHELLNODESDOF.
NODESET, defines a collection of nodes.
RIGIDNODES SHELL, specifies special
constraints for shell midsurface nodes.
Section 9.2: Element data
AXES-NODES, defines an axes-system via
three model nodes.
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN, defines a set of
axes to be used with the definition of
initial strains in element.
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC, defines set of
principal material axes to be used with
orthotropic material model.
ELEDGESET, defines an element edge set
containing edges of 2-D elements.
ELEMENTSET, defines an element set
containing elements.
ELFACESET, defines an element face set
containing faces of 3-D and shell
elements.
ENODES, defines element nodal connectiv-
ity.
MESH-CONVERT, changes number of
nodes per element.
ENODES-INTERFACE, defines fluid-
structure interface elements.
EDATA, specifies property data associated
with individual elements in a group.
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES, copies all
elements and nodes (in groups) between
database models for two analysis
programs.
DELETE-FE-MODEL, deletes all finite-
element data from the database.
REVOLVE, creates 3D elements by revolving
2D elements about an axis.
SWEEP, creates 3D elements by extruding
2D elements along a vector.
Section 9.3: Boundary conditions
BOUNDARIES, assigns boundary condi-
tions to nodes.
CONSTRAINT-NODE, specifies a constraint
equation between nodal degrees of
freedom.
RIGIDLINK-NODE, specifies a rigid link
between two nodes.
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE,
used to enforce the zero-slope-of-pipe-
skin condition in the longitudinal
direction at pipe-element nodes.
FSI-FACE, defines FSI boundary using
element face nodes.
Section 9.4: Loads
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS,
Defines concentrated loads applied to
nodes.
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS, defines
prescribed displacements applied to
nodes.
APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS,
defines electromagnetic loads applied to
nodes.
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES,
defines internal pressures applied to
pipe element nodes.
APPLY TEMPERATURES, defines tempera-
tures applied to nodes.
APPLY TGRADIENTS, defines temperature
gradients applied to shell element
surface nodes.
APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS, signals
the presence of user-supplied loads.
LOADS-ELEMENT, used to apply loads
onto element edges or faces.
Chap. 2 Quick index
Section 9.5: Initial conditions
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS, assigns initial
accelerations to nodes.
INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS, assigns initial
displacements to nodes.
INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS, assigns
initial flexural strains to plate element
nodes.
INITIAL OVALIZATIONS, assigns initial
ovalizations to pipe element nodes.
INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES,
assigns initial pipe internal pressures to
pipe element nodes.
INITIAL STRAINS, assigns initial strains to
nodes.
INITIAL SGRADIENTS, assigns initial
strain gradients to shell element
midsurface nodes.
INITIAL TEMPERATURES, assigns initial
temperatures to nodes.
INITIAL TGRADIENTS, assigns initial
temperature gradients to shell element
nodes.
INITIAL VELOCITIES, assigns initial
velocities to nodes.
INITIAL WARPINGS, assigns initial
warpings to pipe element nodes.
IMPERFECTION NODES, specifies
imperfections at nodes based on the
buckling mode shapes, which have been
previously calculated.
Section 9.6: Contact
CONTACT-ELEMSET, defines a contact
surface using element edge or face set.
CONTACT-FACENODES, defines a contact
surface within the current group using
face nodenumbers.
CONTACT-NODES, defines a contact-
surface in terms of nodes, within the
current contact group.
Section 9.7: Fracture
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES, used to
define the initial crack front position and
the virtual/actual crack propagation path
in terms of nodes.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE, defines a fixed
virtual-crack-extension material shift via
a set of nodes.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT, defines a
fixed virtual-crack-extension material
shift via a set of elements.
J-LINE ELEMENT, defines a line contour
connected by a series of element faces.
SINGULAR NODES, defines a set of vertex
nodes whose adjacent non-vertex nodes
are to be moved.
Section 9.8: Substructures and cyclic
symmetry
REUSE-NODES, defines the nodal connec
tivity between the substructure and the
main structure.
CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES,
associates cyclicboundaries in terms
of nodes.
Chapter 3
Input/Output
Sec. 3.1 Database operations
DATABASE NEW SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE NEW creates a new database. The new database is initially empty. Before
creating the new database, you have the option of saving any current internal database to
disk. This option is controlled by parameters SAVE and PERMFILE.
SAVE [UNKNOWN]
Used only when a database has been modified.
YES The program saves the current internal database to disk using the
filename specified by parameter PERMFILE. Then the program
creates a new internal database.
NO The program does not save the current internal database before
creating a new internal database.
UNKNOWN The program asks you if you want to save the database.
PERMFILE [the last permanent database name
previously specified]
Used only when the database has been modified. PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent
database file when saving the current database file to disk. You will be prompted for this
name if you do not enter a value for this parameter and no permanent database name was
previously specified.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Used when saving a permanent database file.
YES You will be prompted Ready to save permanent database file?.
UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if
the database file already exists.
NO You will not receive a prompt.
Auxiliary commands
DATABASE CREATE SAVE PERMFILE
DATABASE CREATE has the same effect as DATABASE NEW.
DATABASE NEW
Chap. 3 Input/Output
DATABASE OPEN FILE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE OPEN creates a new database using the permanent database file specified in this
command. Before creating the new database, the current internal database is optionally
saved to disk.
FILE [the last previously specified
permanent database filename]
The filename of the permanent database file to be opened. If you do not enter a filename and
there is no default value, the program will prompt you for the filename.
SAVE [UNKNOWN]
YES The current internal database is saved to disk using the filename
specified by parameter PERMFILE.
NO The current internal database is not saved before clearing the
current database and opening the specified database.
UNKNOWN The program will ask you if you want to save the database.
PERMFILE [the last previously specified
permanent database filename]
Used only if the database has been modified. PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent
database file when saving the current database file to disk. The program will prompt you if
you do not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previ-
ously been specified.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists, if
NO You will not receive a promp
Note: It is allowed to open a database created by AUI 7.0, AUI 7.1 or AUI 7.2. However, all
graphics and model display definitions are deleted and reinitialized in the AUI working
copy of the opened database.
DATABASE OPEN
DATABASE WRITE PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE WRITE saves the current internal database as a permanent database file. It is
the same as the DATABASE SAVE command except that DATABASE WRITE is available
only when the database has been modified.
PERMFILE [the last previously entered permanent
database filename specified]
Specifies the filename of the permanent database file. The program will prompt you if you do
not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously been
specified.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
DATABASE WRITE
DATABASE SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE SAVE saves the current internal database as a permanent database file.
PERMFILE [the last previously entered permanent
database filename specified]
Specifies the filename of the permanent database file. The program will prompt you if you do
not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously been
specified.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
DATABASE SAVE
DATABASE ATTACH FILE
DATABASE ATTACH allows access to the specified file as an AUI database file. Unlike
DATABASE OPEN (described in this section), DATABASE ATTACH does not make a
working copy of the database file prior to opening it. Instead you work directly with the
specified file as you use the AUI, possibly modifying the files contents.
The advantages of DATABASE ATTACH as compared to DATABASE OPEN are: disk
requirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and
the CPU time to attach a database is much less than the CPU time required to open it.
The disadvantages of DATABASE ATTACH are: (1) important information can be inadvert-
ently modified or deleted from an attached database file, (2) the attached database cannot
shrink, but can only grow as the AUI is used and (3) an attached database file cannot be
saved, but can only be detached using DATABASE DETACH (described in this section).
Before you can use DATABASE ATTACH, you must first save any current database, and
then use DATABASE NEW (described in this section) to create a new database. You can use
DATABASE ATTACH only if the current database is new and unmodified.
DATABASE ATTACH clears the permanent database filename.
You can attach a database that was created by earlier versions of the AUI. In this case,
however, the AUI deletes and reinitializes all graphics and model display definitions in the
attached database.
Exiting the AUI when a database is attached automatically detaches the database.
FILE
The filename of the permanent database file to be attached. If no filename is entered, the AUI
will prompt you for the filename.
Note: It is allowed to open a database created by AUI 7.0, AUI 7.1 or AUI 7.2. However, all
graphics and model display definitions are deleted and reinitialized in the AUI
working copy of the opened database.
DATABASE ATTACH
DATABASE DETACH PERMFILE PROMPT
DATABASE DETACH creates a permanent database file by detaching the working copy of
the database file. Unlike DATABASE SAVE, DATABASE DETACH does not create a new
permanent database file.
The advantages of DATABASE DETACH as compared to DATABASE SAVE are: disk
requirements are reduced because the AUI does not create a copy of the database file, and
the CPU time to detach a database is much less than the CPU time required to save it.
The disadvantage of DATABASE DETACH is: the AUI does not compress the database file
by removing unused records.
After the database is detached, the AUI creates a new empty internal database.
A database can be detached at any time whether or not it was attached using DATABASE
ATTACH.
PERMFILE
The working copy of the database file is renamed to PERMFILE.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
DATABASE DETACH
Sec. 3.2 Analysis data files
ADINA OPTIMIZE STARTNODE FILE FIXBOUNDARY
MIDNODE OVERWRITE DUPLICATE
ADINA initiates model validation and, if the model is valid, creates an ADINA input data file,
if requested.
OPTIMIZE [SOLVER]
Equation numbering may be optimized so as to minimize the profile and bandwidth of the
ADINA solution matrices. The node label numbers are not affected by the equation number-
ing. {SOLVER/YES/NO}
SOLVER If the sparse solver is used (see parameter SOLVER in command MASTER),
then equation numbering is not optimized. Otherwise, equation numbering
is optimized.
YES Equation numbering is optimized.
NO Equation numbering is not optimized.
STARTNODE [automatically selected]
Label number of a main structure node, used to initiate the optimized equation numbering
algorithm. If such a node is not given, one will be automatically selected. The starting node
should be a peripheral node on the boundary of the main structure.
FILE
The filename of the ADINA input file to be generated. If no file name is given then only
model validation is performed.
FIXBOUNDARY [YES]
Inactive degrees of freedom, i.e., those which are not connected to any elements and are not
used in constraint equations, may be automatically deleted. {YES/NO}
MIDNODE [NO]
Midside nodes on element edges may be moved to the straight line connecting the relevant
vertex nodes. {YES/NO}
OVERWRITE [CONTROL PROMPT]
Determines, if the filename given by FILE already exists, whether the command will overwrite its
contents with the currently generated input data. If set to UNKNOWN, a prompt will be given
requesting confirmation for overwriting an existing file. {YES/NO/UNKNOWN}
ADINA
REBUILD-MODEL
REBUILD-MODEL
Forces the AUI to rebuild the whole model.
Sec. 3.2 Analysis data files
This page intentionally left blank.
REBUILD-MODEL
LOADDXF FILE GCOINCIDE GCTOLERANCE
LOADDXF loads an AutoCAD
DXF file into the database. The points and lines are con-
verted into AUI geometry entities.
This command supports only up to AutoCAD Release 12 DXF files.
FILE
The DXF file to be loaded in this command. Only a formatted file is accepted.
GCOINCIDE [YES]
Point coincidence checking. If GCOINCIDE is set to YES then point coordinates are checked,
and if within
GCTOLERANCE " (max. difference in global coordinates between all previous points)
then no new point number is created at that location, i.e., the previous point label number is
assumed. {YES/NO}
GCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine point coincidence.
LOADDXF
Sec. 3.3 External data
LOADIGES FILE GCOINCIDE GCTOLERANCE TWOD-XY ADINA-M
LABEL SEWING SEWGAP TOLER1 TOLER2 OPTION1
REVERSE OPTION3 OPTION4 SCALEFACTOR PRECS
PLABEL LLABEL XZERO X-SHIFT Y-SHIFT Z-SHIFT
Loads an IGES file into the database.
FILE
The IGES file to be loaded in this command. Only a formatted and uncompressed file is
accepted.
GCOINCIDE [YES]
Point coincidence checking option. If set to YES, then point coordinates are checked, and if
within
GCTOLERANCE " (max. difference in global coordinates between all previous points)
then no new point is created at that location, i.e. the previous point label number is assumed.
Only valid when ADINA-M = NO.{YES/NO}
GCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine point coincidence. Only valid when ADINA-M = NO.
TWOD-XY [NO]
Indicates whether or not to rotate the IGES geometry model so that the XY plane is trans-
formed into the YZ plane (as used in two-dimensional ADINA, ADINA-T, and ADINA-F
models). {YES/NO}
ADINA-M [NO]
Indicates whether IGES data is to be loaded into ADINA-M. {YES/NO}
Parameters GCOINCIDE, GCTOLERANCE and TWOD-XY are ignored by ADINA-M.
LABEL [(highest current sheet body or solid body label
number) + 1]
Sheet body or solid body label number.
SEWING [NO]
Indicates wether ADINA-M sheet bodies are to be sewn together. {YES/NO}
SEWGAP [0.01]
ADINA-M sewing body gap ratio. The gap value used to sew the body is SEWGAP * (max.
difference in global coordinate between the maximum and minimum of the IGES body).
LOADIGES
TOLER1
This parameter is obsolete.
TOLER2
OPTION1
REVERSE
OPTION3
OPTION4
SCALEFACTOR [1.0]
ADINA-M scale factor - input IGES coordinate values are to be divided by, i.e. (x-coordinate,
y-coordinate, z-coordinate)/scalefactor.
PRECS
PLABEL [(current highest point label number) + 1]
Starting point label.
LLABEL [(current highest line label number) + 1]
Starting line label.
XZERO [NO]
The flag to set the x coordinate to 0. {NO/YES}
X-SHIFT [0.0]
Y-SHIFT [0.0]
Z-SHIFT [0.0]
Shift the IGES geometry by X-SHIFT, Y-SHIFT, and Z-SHIFT in the x, y, and z direction,
respectively. Note that if XZERO=YES, X-SHIFT is ignored. These three parameters are
used only when ADINA-M=NO.
LOADIGES
LOADSOLID PARTFILE BODYNAME XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN
AX AY AZ BX BY BZ PCOINCIDE PCTOLERANCE
MANIFOLD FORMAT OLD-UNIT NEW-UNIT SYSTEM
REPAIR
The LOADSOLID command loads a Parasolid
part (or "transmit") file into the database. The

model may be displayed, meshed, and loads, boundary conditions may be assigned to its faces,
edges, and vertices. For each body within the Parasolid
file a solid geometry BODY is created

which is used to reference that body.
This command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.
PARTFILE
The name of a Parasolid
part file (i.e. for part file name "abcdef.x_t" you input
PARTFILE=abcdef.
BODYNAME [(current highest body label number)+1]
This is the label number to be assigned to the first BODY to be created which is used to refer
to the first body in the part file -- other bodies in the part file will automatically be assigned
BODY label numbers incremented from this parameter (i.e. (BODYNAME+1),
(BODYNAME+2), ..., etc.)
XORIGIN [0.0]
YORIGIN [0.0]
ZORIGIN [0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the model.
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
A vector (in global coordinates) giving the direction of the X-axis of the model.
BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
A vector (in global coordinates) which together with vector (AX, AY, AZ) gives the X-Y
plane of the model.
PCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether or not the vertices of the part are to be checked for coincidence with
existing geometry point coordinates. {NO/YES}
LOADSOLID
PCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used to determine whether two points are coincident.
MANIFOLD [NO]
Indicates whether non-manifold bodies are converted into manifold bodies. {NO/YES}
FORMAT [TEXT]
Parasolid part file format.
TEXT text format.
BINARY binary format.
OLD-UNIT [METER]
The unit of the part in the Parasolid file to be imported.
{METER/CMETER/MMETER/INCH/FOOT}
NEW-UNIT [METER]
The unit of the part after it is imported into ADINA-M.
{METER/CMETER/MMETER/INCH/FOOT}
LOADSOLID
SYSTEM [0]
If system label is greater than 0 and it is Cartesian coordinate system, replace XORIGIN,
YORIGIN, ZORIGIN, AX, AY, AZ, BX, BY, BZ with the values from the given system.
REPAIR [NO]
Repair the bodies if errors are detected. {NO/YES}
LOAD-CLOUD FILE STL-FILE BINARY BYTESWAP OUTLENGTH
element
i
Reads in a point cloud file (depicting the boundary of an object) and writes out an STL file
which can then be loaded into the AUI with the LOAD-STL command. A tetrahedral mesh of the
point cloud is initially built and elements are automatically "sculpted" away from the boundary
going in. This command is used repeatedly until the point cloud mesh corresponds to the
object.
FILE
Name of the point cloud file. Each line of the file contains a point defined by three coordinates
(x, y and z). The point cloud file is assumed to be noise-free and represent accurately (must be
fine enough) the geometry of the object's boundary. The object the point cloud is representing
is assumed to be a single body (not an assembly of bodies).
STL-FILE
If none given, the command will not generate the STL file. It will however save the point cloud
mesh into the AUI (which can then be reloaded if the command is called again). If a STL file
name is given, the command will create the STL file and delete the current point cloud mesh
that's residing in memory.
BINARY [NO]
If set to NO, the output STL file format is supposed to be ASCII.
If set to YES, the output STL file format is supposed to be binary. The byte ordering is
supposed to be "little endian" (the norm for STL binary files). {NO/YES}
BYTESWAP [NO]
If the byte ordering (see BINARY parameter) is "big endian", BYTESWAP should be set to
YES. Because STL files are supposed to be written as "little endian", turning on BYTESWAP
should not be needed in general {NO/YES}
OUTLENGTH [0.0]
Elements of the current point cloud mesh with at least one boundary face bigger (longest side)
than OUTLENGTH are assumed to be outside and are thus removed from the mesh. Because
this process changes the current boundary, a "sculpting" phase follows which automatically
removes elements which are believed to be outside. If set to 0.0 (default), it is not used.
element
i
Elements given are removed from the current point cloud mesh. Because this process changes
the current boundary, a "sculpting" phase follows which automatically removes elements which
are believed to be outside.
LOAD-CLOUD
LOAD-STL FILE BODY RIDGEANG NCTOLERANCE RIDGETOL
MAXNVARS COTOLERANCE MAXNVARC NMTOLERANCE
RIDGEAN2 BYTESWAP
Loads an STL format file into the AUI by creating a STL body. Once loaded, mesh densities
(MODE = LENGTH) can be applied to the created STL body, its faces and edges (just like for an
ADINA-M body). The command BODY-DSCADAP applies the mesh densities and generates a
discrete representation of the STL body which can then be meshed with the GBODY command.
It is assumed the model contained in the STL file is single-bodied and solid (defines a three-
dimensional volume). If the model is made up of several bodies, the command still loads the
STL file as a single body made up of disconnected parts. To create multiple bodies, the model
should be saved as multiple STL files, one for each body to be created.
Upon completion, if the STL file cannot be loaded, problems are either coming from the
tolerance choice or the STL model itself.
If the number of under connected edges (connected to a single triangle) is greater than 0, the
tolerance (NCTOLERA) may be set too low or the model is not watertight.
If the number of over connected edges (connected to more than two triangles) is greater than
0, the tolerance (NCTOLERA) may be set too high or the model has non-manifold features
(see NMTOLERA parameter).
If the number of non-manifold vertices is greater than 0, make sure the tolerance used for
eliminating non-manifold features (NMTOLERA) is greater than 0 (but always significantly
lower than NCTOLERA). Eliminating non-manifold features is attempted only when the
number of under connected edges is 0.
If NCTOLERA is changed, NMTOLERA must be changed accordingly as it should always be
larger than NCTOLERA.
If changing the tolerance (NCTOLERA) does not resolve all problems, it is likely the STL file
is not valid in representing a conforming triangular mesh.
If the STL file loads properly, it is assumed that the geometry it represents is not self-
intersecting.
FILE
Name of file containing the STL data.
BODY [(highest body label number) + 1]
Label of STL body to be created.
LOAD-STL
RIDGEANG [60 (degrees)]
Controls ridge detection and therefore the creation of body edges. If two adjacent triangles in
the STL file have an angle greater than RIDGEANG, the common edge is assumed to be on a
ridge and will be part of a body edge, potentially separating two body faces.
By setting the RIDGEANG to 180, the created body will have no edges and no vertices (points).
NCTOLERANCE [1.0e-5]
Tolerance used for checking coincidence of facet nodes (vertices of triangle facets).
RIDGETOL [0.0]
Tolerance used to decide whether to discard potential edges on body edges. Given an edge and
its two adjacent triangles in the STL file, if the distance from a vertex to the opposite edge is
smaller than RIDGETOL (relative to its length) for each triangle, then the edge cannot be
considered a ridge. By default, RIDGETOL is set to 0.0, meaning it is disabled. In most cases,
enabling RIDGETOL is not necessary.
MAXNVARS [0.0]
Maximum normal variation used in edge swapping (to improve quality of STL surface mesh prior
to ridge detection). This threshold should remain small enough to maintain the shape of the
original model. By default, MAXNVARS is set to 0.0, meaning it is only enabled on planes.
COTOLERANCE [1.0e-4]
Edges that are smaller than COTOLERANCE (relative to model size) are collapsed.
Faces with large angle such that distance from vertex at large angle to opposite side is smaller
than COTOLERANCE are swapped. This is done to remove small features from the STL surface
mesh prior to ridge detection.
Note: COTOLERANCE should be larger than NCTOLERANCE.
MAXNVARC [90.0]
Maximum normal variation used in edge collapsing (to improve quality of STL surface mesh
prior to ridge detection). If COTOLERANCE is small then MAXNVARC may be large. If
COTOLERANCE is large then MAXNVARC should be small.
NMTOLERANCE [1.0e-3]
If the surface triangles in the STL file represent a non-manifold body (for example, the surface
mesh contacts itself at vertices or edges), it is possible to "break" the surface mesh by duplicat-
ing vertices where the surface mesh contacts itself and pulling them away from each other.
NMTOLERANCE represents how far duplicate vertices should be pulled apart from each other,
relative to the dimensions of the model.
If set to 0.0, it is turned off.
LOAD-STL
LOAD-STL
NMTOLERANCE should always be greater than NCTOLERANCE.
RIDGEAN2 [180 (degrees)]
Before the creation of body edges, if a ridge edge (see RIDGEANG description) is not
connected (at either end), it can be extended so as to make sure any edge connects (at either
end) to one or more other ridge edges. New ridge edges will be created only if the adjacent
triangles have an angle greater than RIDGEAN2.
By default, RIDGEAN2 is set to 180, which signifies this extension feature is not activated. If
activated (RIDGEAN2 is not equal to 180), RIDGEAN2 should be smaller than RIDGEANG.
BYTESWAP [NO]
If the STL file is binary and the byte ordering is "big endian" (as opposed to "little endian"
which is the norm for STL binary files), BYTESWAP should be set to YES. {NO/YES}
Sec. 3.3 External data NASTRAN-ADINA
NASTRAN-ADINA FILE XY-YZ BEAM SUBCASE BCELL
CONVERT-ELEMENT-TYPE DEFAULT DUPLICATE
SPLIT ELFACESET NODESET
NASTRAN-ADINA maps a NASTRAN
data file into the ADINA-IN database.

FILE
The NASTRAN
data filename.
XY-YZ
This parameter is now obsolete. The program will automatically rotate 2D models in the XY
plane to the YZ plane.
BEAM [THREE]
Indicates whether hermitian beam elements are to be considered as having two-dimensional
or three-dimensional action. {TWO/THREE}
SUBCASE [0]
The label number of a subcase defined in the NASTRAN
data file. If SUBCASE=0, the first

subcase is used. {$0}
BCELL [NO]
Indicates whether boundary cells (see command BCELL) are created from shell elements
according to the property identification number (PID). All elements with the same PID are put
into the same BCELL. {NO/YES/REPLACE}
NO Do not create boundary cells.
YES Create boundary cells. In addition, if the shell elements are attached to 3-D
elements, the program will also create element-face sets (see ELFACESET
command) and node sets (see NODESET command). All shell elements used
for creating these ELFACESETs and NODESETs are not deleted.
REPLACE Create boundary cells. In addition, if the shell elements are attached to 3-D
elements, the program will also create element-face sets (see ELFACESET
command) and node sets (see NODESET command). All shell elements used
for creating these ELFACESETs and NODESETs will be deleted.
CONVERT-ELEMENT-TYPE [NONE]
Specifies whether or not to convert 4-node shell elements to 8-node. {NONE/SHELL}
The parameters RBAR, RBE2, NCTOLERANCE, RBAR-MATERIAL, RBAR-AREA, RBAR-
Chap. 3 Input/Output NASTRAN-ADINA
DIAMETER, RBAR-THICKNESS, RBE2-MATERIAL, RBE2-AREA, RBE2-DIAMETER, and
RBE2-THICKNESS are now obsolete. The conversion of RBAR and RBE2 elements is now
specified in the NX Nastran bulk data entry NXSTRAT (see parameters EQRBAR and
EQRBE2).
DEFAULT [AUI]
Specifies which default values and convention should be used when a parameter is not
specified. {AUI/NXN}
AUI Use AUI default values and convention.
NXN Use NX Nastran advanced nonlinear analysis (SOL 601/701) default values and
convention. Nodal temperature and displacement loads with different time functions
are added instead of averaged if DEFAULT=NXN.
Note:
The following default values are different between AUI and SOL 601/701 in NX Nastran.
Command Parameter AUI NXN
CGROUP EPST 0.0 1.0E-3
CGROUP CONSISTENT-STIFFNESS DEFAULT OFF
CONTACT-CONTROL POST-IMPACT YES NO
DUPLICATE [YES]
This flag indicates whether or not to issue an error message when the Nastran file has a
duplicate node or element. {NO/YES}
NO No error message issued. Later entries will override the earlier entries.
YES Error message issued.
SPLIT [PROGRAM]
Indicates whether elements from different bulk entry (e.g., CHEXA, CPENTA, CTETRA) but
having the same PID are split into different element groups. By default (i.e., PROGRAM),
splitting is done for ADINA and ADINA-T models but not for ADINA-F models.
{PROGRAM/YES/NO}
ELFACESET [BCELL]
Flag to create elfaceset from attached SHELL element. {BCELL/NO/YES/REPLACE}
BCELL Take the default flag from BCELL parameter
Sec. 3.3 External data NASTRAN-ADINA
NO No elfaceset will bce created
YES Create elfaceset and keep the attached SHELL element group
REPLACE Create elfaceset then delete the attached SHELL element group
Note that as long as one of BCELL, ELFACESET or NODESET = REPLACE
the attached SHELL element will be deleted.
NODESET [BCELL]
Flag to create nodeset from attached SHELL element. {BCELL/NO/YES/REPLACE}
BCELL Take the default flag from BCELL parameter
NO No nodeset will bce created
YES Create nodeset and keep the attached SHELL element group
REPLACE Create nodeset then delete the attached SHELL element group
Note that as long as one of BCELL, ELFACESET or NODESET = REPLACE
the attached SHELL element will be deleted.
EXPORT NASTRAN FILE OVERWRITE FORMAT
Exports an ADINA model to a NASTRAN file. By default, the small field format is used.
FILE
Specifies the NASTRAN file name.
OVERWRITE [CONTROL PROMPT]
Determines, if the file name given by FILE already exists, whether the command will overwrite
its contents with the currently generated input data. If set to UNKNOWN, a prompt will be
given requesting comfirmation for overwriting an existing file. {YES/NO/UNKNOWN}
FORMAT [SMALL]
Indicates the format to export the NASTRAN file. {SMALL/LARGE}
EXPORT NASTRAN
Sec. 3.3 External data EXPORT UNIVERSAL
EXPORT UNIVERSAL FILE
Exports the mesh in ADINA-AUI to an I-DEAS
universal file format.

FILE
Specifies the name of the universal file to be created.
READ
READ FILE REWIND SCANDATA
READ reads AUI input commands from the file specified by parameter FILE until the end of
the file is reached or the READ END command is encountered in the file. After the READ
command is executed, subsequent input is read from the previous command input source
(that is, the input source from which the READ command was entered).
READ commands can be nested (that is, a file processed by the READ command can itself
include a READ command).
FILE
The name of the file from which AUI commands are read (up to 80 characters long). Note that
the name END is not allowed.
REWIND [NO]
If the file pointer is at end-of-file or if the file is not currently open, the read file is rewound
before beginning to read commands regardless of the value of this parameter. {YES/NO}
SCANDATA [ ]
If SCANDATA is specified, the file is scanned until the SCANDATA string (1 - 80 characters)
is found anywhere within an input record. Reading of input data from the file starts at the
beginning of the record that contains the string.
Auxiliary commands
READ END
Terminates reading from file.
Sec. 3.4 Auxiliary files
FILEREAD OPTION FILE
FILEREAD controls the source of input commands to the AUI.
OPTION [INTERFACE]
INTERFACE Commands are read from the terminal or window from which
you invoked the AUI.
FILE Commands are read from the file specified by the FILE parameter.
FILE
The filename of the file from which commands are read. Used only if OPTION = FILE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILEREAD
FILEREAD
FILESESSION OPTION FILE
FILESESSION controls the generation and output of a session file. The session file contains
the commands needed to repeat an AUI session.
A session file differs from an echo file in that:
1) You can generate a session file from a user-interface AUI session (this is the primary
use of the session file).
2) A session file contains all command parameters, regardless of whether you entered
them or whether they were default parameters.
3) Changes to data input lines are handled in a different manner.
OPTION [NO]
NO No session file is created.
OVERWRITE A session file is generated and overwrites any existing contents
of the specified file.
APPEND A session file is generated and is appended to any existing
contents of the specified file.
FILE
The filename of the session file.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILESESSION
FILESESSION
FILELIST OPTION FILE LINPAG EJECT
FILELIST controls the format and output of listings.
OPTION [INTERFACE]
INTERFACE Listings are output at the terminal or window from which you
invoked the AUI. Listings are buffered using an interface similar
to UNIX more that allows you to scroll through listings.
FILE Listings are output to the file specified by the FILE parameter.
FILE
The filename of the file to which listings are written. Used only if OPTION = FILE.
This can be the same file used for command echoing or logging.
LINPAG [0]
The maximum number of lines output between list headings. You can suppress list headings
(except for the first list heading) by specifying LINPAG = 0.
EJECT [NO]
Specifies whether page ejects are placed before headings. {YES/NO}
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILELIST
FILELIST
FILEECHO OPTION FILE
FILEECHO controls the echoing of your input commands.
OPTION [INTERFACE]
NO No echoing of input commands.
INTERFACE Input commands are echoed back to the terminal or window from
which you invoked the AUI.
FILE Input commands are echoed back to the file specified by the FILE
parameter.
FILE
The filename of the file to which input commands are echoed back. Used only if OPTION =
FILE. This can be the same file for logs or listings.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILEECHO
FILEECHO
FILELOG OPTION FILE
FILELOG controls the output of log messages.
OPTION [INTERFACE]
INTERFACE Log messages are written to the terminal or window from which
you invoked the AUI.
FILE Log messages are written to the file specified by the FILE
parameter.
FILE
The filename of the file to which log messages are written. Used only if OPTION = FILE.
This can be the same file used for echoed commands or listings.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FILELOG
FILELOG
COMMANDFILE FILENAME PROMPT OPTION GRAPHICS
Creates a file containing the commands needed to recreate the model stored in the current
database.
FILENAME
The name of the file to be created. This parameter must be entered.
PROMPT [CONTROL PROMPT]
You will be prompted Ready to write command file? if PROMPT = YES. You will be
prompted The command file already exists if the specified file already exists and PROMPT =
UNKNOWN. You will not be prompted if PROMPT = NO. Note that the default is taken from the
parameter with the same name of the CONTROL command.
OPTION [SESSION]
If OPTION = SESSION, the command file produced is a record of all commands issued when
this database file is in use. The command file contains model modifications and deletions as
well as model additions. Commands in the command file may contain references to other files,
for example, when a porthole file is loaded, the command file contains a LOADPORTHOLE
command.
Currently OPTION must be set to SESSION. This parameter is provided for future develop-
ments of the AUI.
GRAPHICS [NO]
This parameter is used when OPTION = SESSION to control whether graphics commands
such as FRAME, MESHPLOT, VIEW, etc. are written to the command file. If GRAPHICS =
YES, graphics commands are written to the command file, otherwise they are not written.
COMMANDFILE
RTOFILE PROGRAM
text
i
This command defines the contents of a run-time-option (.rto) file. When an ADINA, ADINA-
T or ADINA-F data file (.dat file) is created, a corresponding run-time-option file (.rto file) is
also created.
If the RTOFILE command is not run, or if there are no lines of text in the RTOFILE command,
then no .rto file is created.
PROGRAM [Current FE program]
The finite element program for which the .rto file will be created. {ADINA/ADINA-T/
ADINA-F}
text
i
A line of text in the .rto file. This text must be enclosed by single quotes. There can be an
arbitrary number of lines of text in the .rto file.
Allowable input in the .rto file depends on the finite element program.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RTOFILE
DELETE RTOFILE
RTOFILE
PAUSE
When the AUI reads the PAUSE command, it stops processing commands until you hit a key.
PAUSE
Sec. 3.5 Program termination
END SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT IMMEDIATE
END terminates the program. EXIT, QUIT and STOP are equivalent to END.
If the program is reading data from a file specified by the FILEREAD command and the end of
the file is reached, the END command is executed automatically.
SAVE [UNKNOWN]
YES The program saves the current internal database to disk using the filename
specified by parameter PERMFILE. Then the program creates a new
internal database.
NO The program does not save the current internal database before creating a
new internal database.
UNKNOWN The program asks you if you want to save the database.
PERMFILE [the last previously specified permanent
database filename]
PERMFILE is the filename of the permanent database file when saving the current database
file to disk; used only if the database has been modified. The program will prompt you if you
do not enter a value for PERMFILE and if no permanent database filename has previously
been specified.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
UNKNOWN You will be prompted Permanent database file already exists if the
database file already exists.
IMMEDIATE [NO]
If IMMEDIATE=YES, the program immediately stops execution without saving the database
or prompting you. This option is most useful when writing batch scripts to force the program
to terminate. {YES / NO}
Auxiliary commands
EXIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
QUIT SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
STOP SAVE PERMFILE PROMPT
EXIT, QUIT and STOP are equivalent to END.
END
PARAMETER NAME EXPRESSION
Defines a parameter that can be substituted in a later command. The AUI evaluates the given
expression and stores the resulting number as the value of the parameter.
Note: Parameter definitions and values are not stored in the database.
NAME
The name of the parameter (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters). The name is not case sensitive.
If the parameter is not already defined, a new parameter is created, otherwise the existing
parameter is modified.
EXPRESSION
A string (up to 256 characters long) that contains a numeric expression. The expression
string can contain the following items:
The arithmetic operators +, -, *, /, ** (exponentiation)
Numbers (either real numbers or integers)
The following functions:
ABS(x) absolute value
AINT(x) truncation
ANINT(x) nearest whole number
ACOS(x) arccosine
ASIN(x) arcsine
ATAN(x) arctangent
ATAN2(x,y) arctangent(x/y)
COS(x) cosine
COSH(x) hyperbolic cosine
DIM(x,y) positive difference
EXP(x) exponential
LOG(x) natural logarithm
LOG10(x) common logarithm
MAX(x,y,...) largest value
MIN(x,y,...) smallest value
MOD(x,y) remaindering
SIGN(x,y) transfer of sign
SIN(x) sine
SINH(x) hyperbolic sine
SQRT(x) square root
PARAMETER
Sec. 3.6 Auxiliary commands
STEP(x) the unit step function:
0.0 if x % 0.0
1.0 if x & 0.0
TAN(x) tangent
TANH(x) hyperbolic tangent
All trigonometric functions operate on or return angles in radians.
Examples
PARAMETER A '3.0' // A = 3
PARAMETER B '5 + 7' // B = 12
PARAMETER C '6 * \ // The string can be entered on several
5 ' // command lines as in this example; C = 30
Parameter substitution
When the command-line parser finds a token value that starts with a $, the parser finds the
parameter name with that token value and substitutes the parameter value. For example, in
the commands
PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'
PARAMETER X2 'SQRT(5.0)'
PARAMETER X3 'SIN(2.0)'
BODY BLOCK DX1=$X1 DX2=$X2 DX3=$X3
the parser looks for the values of X1, X2 and X3 and substitutes the values (e.g. the charac-
ters '0.666666666666667') for the names (e.g. the characters 'X1'). Hence the above
commands are exactly equivalent to the command
BODY BLOCK DX1=0.666666666666667 DX2=2.23606797749979,
DX3=0.909297426825682
The token values need not be in upper-case:
BODY BLOCK DX1=$x1 DX2=$x2 DX3=$x3
Parameter substitution occurs before command execution, so the following is allowed:
PARAMETER A '2.0'
PARAMETER A '$A + 1' // A = 3
PARAMETER
Now you may want to put the symbol $ into a string without parameter substitution occuring.
The rule is: if the next character after the $ is a letter [a-z], the command-line parser attempts
parameter substitution. So
PARAMETER A '3.0'
USERTEXT ABC
'The cost is $2000.00'
'The size is $A'
DATAEND
is equivalent to
USERTEXT ABC
'The cost is $2000.00'
'The size is 3'
DATAEND
A convenient way to output the value of a single parameter is with the ECHO command:
PARAMETER X1 '2.0/3.0'
ECHO $X1
ECHO 'The value of X1 is $X1'
Auxiliary commands
LIST PARAMETER
Lists the values of all parameters.
ECHO STRING
Outputs the given string. This command can be used to output the value of a parameter,
see the examples given in the PARAMETER command description. STRING is a string
(up to 256 characters long).
PARAMETER
Chapter 4
Interface control and editing
Sec. 4.1 Settings
CONTROL PLOTUNIT VERBOSE ERRORLIMIT LOGLIMIT UNDO
PROMPT AUTOREPAINT DRAWMATTACH DRAWTEXT
DRAWLINES DRAWFILLS AUTOMREBUILD ZONECOPY
SWEEPCOINCIDE SESSIONSTORAGE DYNAMICTRANSFORM
UPDATETHICKNESS AUTOREGENERATE ERRORACTION
FILEVERSION INITFCHECK SIGDIGIT AUTOZONE PSFILEVERSION
CONTROL defines certain parameters that control program behavior. The parameters defined
by the CONTROL command are stored in the database.
PLOTUNIT <not currently active> [PERCENT]
VERBOSE <not currently active> [YES]
ERRORLIMIT <not currently active> [0]
LOGLIMIT <not currently active> [0]
UNDO [5]
The UNDO parameter controls the number of commands that can be undone using the UNDO
command. If UNDO = 0, the UNDO command cannot be used, if UNDO = 1, UNDO can be
used to undo the effects of the previous command, if UNDO = 2, UNDO can be used to
undo the effects of the previous two commands, etc. Setting UNDO = 0 can significantly
speed up the processing of batch files.
PROMPT [UNKNOWN]
Controls the default behavior for prompts which may arise from various commands.
NO No command prompts will be issued - this is useful in batch
mode - eliminating any interaction.
YES Command prompts are always issued.
UNKNOWN Command prompts are issued only when necessary.
AUTOREPAINT [YES]
When AUTOREPAINT = YES, the AUI automatically repaints that area of the graphics
window that is exposed to the removal or motion of overlapping windows or dialogs. You
may want to set AUTOREPAINT to NO to suppress the repainting; in that case, you can use
the REFRESH command whenever you want to repaint the graphics window.
DRAWMATTACH [YES]
When DRAWMATTACH = YES, mesh plot attachments (band plots, load plots, element
vector plots, reaction plots, line contour plots) are drawn. Otherwise, they are not drawn.
CONTROL
Chap. 4 Interface control and editing
One use of this option would be to turn off drawing of mesh plot attachments before moving
the mesh plots with the mouse.
DRAWTEXT [EXACT]
DRAWLINES [EXACT]
DRAWFILLS [EXACT]
These options control the drawing of text, lines and fills:
EXACT Use the requested colors while drawing.
SATURATED Convert all colors to saturated colors before drawing.
GRAY Convert all colors to gray scales before drawing.
INVERSE Convert all colors to the INVERSE color before drawing (the
INVERSE color is the opposite of the background color).
NO Do not draw.
AUTOMREBUILD [YES]
When you enter a command that alters the geometry or finite element model, the AUI rebuilds
all corresponding data structures so that the model can be re-plotted. This feature can be
deactivated by setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO (in this case, if you want to plot the model,
you must use the ADINA, ADINA-T or ADINA-F commands to rebuild the model before-
hand).
Setting AUTOMREBUILD = NO can significantly speed up the processing of batch files.
Notes : 1) One important use of parameters DRAWTEXT, DRAWLINES, DRAWFILLS
is when making plots in black and white for reports. In this case you might
use DRAWTEXT = INVERSE, DRAWLINES = INVERSE, DRAWFILLS =
GRAY.
2) The drawing parameters apply both to graphics as displayed on the screen
and to graphics as produced using SNAPSHOT or MOVIESAVE.
3) One use of DRAWFILLS = SATURATED is to speed up shaded color image
drawing, especially using X Window graphics; all shades of each color are
converted to the same color, resulting in significantly fewer color changes.
ZONECOPY [NO]
Controls whether the commands BANDPLOT, MESHPLOT, ELINEPLOT, EVECTORPLOT,
LCPLOT, REACTIONPLOT, BANDSTYLE, MESHSTYLE, ELINESTYLE, EVECTORSTYLE,
LCSTYLE, REACTIONSTYLE create copies of the input zones. Zone copies are always
created by these commands in AUI 7.0 but not in later versions of the AUI. The preferred
CONTROL
Sec. 4.1 Settings CONTROL
setting of ZONECOPY is NO, but YES may be necessary to read input/session files produced
for/by AUI 7.0. {YES/NO}
SWEEPCOINCIDE [YES]
Controls whether the SURFACE/VOLUME REVOLVED/EXTRUDED geometry definition
commands check for coincident lines and surfaces, as well as for coincident vertices (points).
AUI 7.0 did not attempt to connect adjacent surfaces/volumes, resulting in duplicate lines
and surfaces fro such sweep geometry definition. The default in AUI 7.1 and higher is to
connect adjacent surfaces/volumes whenever possible. However, AUI 7.0 input/session files
which contain such sweep geometry will likely fail, so it may well be necessary to set
SWEEPCOINCIDE=NO to correctly process older input files. {YES/NO}
SESSIONSTORAGE [YES]
If SESSIONSTORAGE = YES, the subsequent commands are stored in the AUI database. You
can output these commands using the command COMMANDFILE. In the event of a system
crash, you can retrieve these commands by opening the AUI temporary database, and
subsequently issuing the COMMANDFILE command.
If SESSIONSTORAGE = NO, subsequent commands are not stored in the AUI database and
therefore cannot be retrieved. You may wish to set SESSIONSTORAGE = NO before reading
commands from a batch file to eliminate the overhead of storing those commands within the
AUI database.
Note that the storage of commands in the AUI database is independent of the writing of
commands to the session file determined by command FILESESSION.
DYNAMICTRANSFORM [YES]
Controls how the program indicates the transformation when you move, resize or rotate
graphics using the mouse. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=YES, the program redraws all picked
graphics completely and redraws all other graphics that overlap the picked graphics. If
DYNAMICTRANSFORM=PARTIAL, the program partially redraws all picked graphics and
does not redraw overlapping graphics. If DYNAMICTRANSFORM=NO, the program
indicates the transformation using a bounding box.
UPDATETHICKNESS [YES]
When you change the thickness of geometry surfaces or faces, all elements generated onto
the surfaces or faces are automatically updated with the updated thickness. {YES/NO}
In AUI 7.2 and lower, elements are not automatically updated. Therefore you may need to set
UPDATETHICKNESS=NO so that input files constructed for use with AUI 7.2 and lower work
correctly.
AUTOREGENERATE [NO]
If AUTOREGENERATE=YES, the program regenerates the graphics after you run a command
that changes the model definition. This parameter only applies to commands that are run
from the command-line (or read from a file); it does not apply to dialog box input from the user
interface. Note that the user interface always regenerates the graphics after you use a dialog
box that changes the model definition. {YES/NO}
ERRORACTION [CONTINUE]
Defines AUI action when error is detected. Parameter affects only commands read from a
batch file.
CONTINUE AUI continues to process commands.
SKIP AUI skips the remaining commands up to the next READ END
command, if any.
Note: For more details see AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. IV - Display processing.
FILEVERSION [V85]
This parameter tells the AUI which algorithms to use during subsequent commands. Use this
flag to request algorithms from previous versions of the AUI. For example, if you constructed
a batch file in AUI 8.3, set FILEVERSION=V83 to specify that the AUI 8.2 algorithms should
be used in processing the file. {V73 / V74 / V75 / V80 / V81 / V82 / V83 /
V84 / V85}.
INITFCHECK [NO]
This parameter tells the AUI whether or not to consider subsequent commands as part of an
initialization file. If INITFCHECK=NO, subsequent commands are not considered part of an
initialization file, if INITFCHECK=YES, subsequent commands are considered part of an
initialization file.
When INITFCHECK=YES, the AUI does not check resultants and aliases for errors. There-
fore resultants and aliases can be included in initialization files when INITFCHECK=YES.
Also the AUI always allows the use of the FEPROGRAM command when
INITFCHECK=YES.
SIGDIGITS [6]
This parameter controls the number of significant digits used in listings. Between 1 and 16
significant digits can be requested.
AUTOZONE [YES]
When AUTOZONE=YES, the AUI automatically creates zones for many common parts of the
model, such as element groups, contact surfaces and geometry bodies. See the description in
CONTROL
Sec. 4.1 Settings CONTROL
the Zones - Introduction section of this manual (Section 6.2.) { YES / NO }
For models with many element groups or geometry bodies, you may want to turn off the
AUTOZONE feature to save storage and CPU time.
PSFILEVERSION [V0]
This parameter gives the Parasolid version number used for saving Parasolid files. For
example, V150 means to save in Parasolid version 15.0 format. V0 means the Parasolid
version used to compile the AUI. { V0 / V80 / V90 / V91 / V100 / V110 /
V111 / V120 / V121 / V130 / V140 / V150 / V160}
Notes
1) One important use of parameters DRAWTEXT, DRAWLINES, DRAWFILLS is when
making plots in black and white for reports. In this case you might use DRAWTEXT
= INVERSE, DRAWLINES = INVERSE, DRAWFILLS = GRAY.
2) The drawing parameters apply both to graphics as displayed on the screen and to
graphics as produced using SNAPSHOT or MOVIESAVE (see Section 3.3).
3) One use of DRAWFILLS = SATURATED is to speed up shaded color image drawing,
especially using X Window System graphics; all shades of each color are converted
to the same color, resulting in significantly fewer color changes.
4) Example of a session file that will not work unless ZONECOPY = YES:
*
LOADPORTHOLE OPERATIO=CREATE FILE=...
*
MESHPLOT MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=WHOLE_MODEL RESPONSE=DEFAULT,
MODELDEP=DEFAULT VIEW=DEFAULT MESHWIND=DEFAULT PLOTAREA=DEFAULT,
SUBFRAME=DEFAULT ELDEPICT=DEFAULT NODEDEPI=DEFAULT,
BOUNDEPI=DEFAULT GPDEPICT=DEFAULT GLDEPICT=DEFAULT,
GSDEPICT=DEFAULT GVDEPICT=DEFAULT MESHREND=DEFAULT,
MESHANNO=DEFAULT FRONDEPI=DEFAULT CONDEPIC=DEFAULT,
VSDEPICI=DEFAULT CRACKDEP=DEFAULT RESULTCO=DEFAULT
*
NODEDEPICTIO NAME=MESHPLOT00001 SYMBOLPL=YES SYMBOL=@C[1,5],
SYMBOLCO=GREEN SYMBOLSI=0.150000005960000 UNITSYMB=CM NUMBER=NO,
NUMBERCO=GREEN NUMBERSI=0.250000000000000 UNITNUMB=CM
@STARTMODIFY
@ENDMODIFY
*
MESHPLOT NAME=MESHPLOT00001 MESHSTYL=DEFAULT ZONENAME=MESHPLOT00001,
RESPONSE=MESHPLOT00001 MODELDEP=MESHPLOT00001 VIEW=MESHPLOT00001,
MESHWIND=MESHPLOT00001 PLOTAREA=MESHPLOT00001,
CONTROL
SUBFRAME=MESHPLOT00001 ELDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
NODEDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 BOUNDEPI=MESHPLOT00001,
GPDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GLDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
GSDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001 GVDEPICT=MESHPLOT00001,
MESHREND=MESHPLOT00001 MESHANNO=MESHPLOT00001,
FRONDEPI=MESHPLOT00001 CONDEPIC=MESHPLOT00001,
VSDEPICI=MESHPLOT00001 CRACKDEP=MESHPLOT00001,
RESULTCO=MESHPLOT00001
The second mesh plot requires a zone name MESHPLOT00001; this zone
name is produced by the first MESHPLOT command by a copy. Notice
that the initial mesh plot works regardless of the value of CONTROL ZONECOPY.
5) Example of commands that work unexpectedly unless ZONECOPY = NO:
MESHPLOT ZONE=PART1
ACTIVEZONE
CLEAR
PART1
DATAEND
LINE STRAIGHT 1 1 2
REGENERATE
We expect that the REGENERATE command will draw line 1, as line 1 has been added to
active zone PART1 and the mesh plot contains zone PART1. However the REGENERATE
command will only draw line 1 if CONTROL ZONECOPY = NO.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTROL
Lists the values of the parameters set by the CONTROL command.
Sec. 4.2 Editing
UNDO NUMBER
UNDO cancels the effects of previous commands.
UNDO is possible only if CONTROL UNDO is greater than zero. See Section 4.1 for a
description of the CONTROL command.
The UNDO command can itself be undone by REDO (described in this section).
NUMBER [1]
The number of previous commands to be undone. The maximum possible number of previous
commands that can be undone is set by CONTROL UNDO. However, the actual number of
previous commands that can be undone may be less than this.
UNDO
REDO NUMBER
REDO cancels the effects of previous UNDO commands (described in this section). It can be
used only if the previous command was either UNDO or REDO.
The REDO command can be followed by the UNDO command to cancel the REDO.
NUMBER [1]
The number of previous UNDO commands to be undone.
REDO
Chapter 5
Control data
Sec. 5.1 General
FEPROGRAM PROGRAM
FEPROGRAM specifies the finite element analysis program to be used to solve the problem
described by the model database.
PROGRAM [ADINA]
The finite element analysis program name. The following choices are available:
ADINA For displacement and stress analysis.
ADINA-T For heat transfer analysis.
ADINA-F For fluid flow and heat transfer analysis.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FEPROGRAM
Lists the currently selected finite element analysis program.
FEPROGRAM
Chap. 5 Control data
HEADING STRING
HEADING specifies a title for the problem described by the model database.
STRING [*** NO HEADING DEFINED ***]
The problem heading, input as a string of up to 80 characters (including blank spaces)
enclosed within apostrophes ().
Auxiliary commands
LIST HEADING
Lists the current problem heading.
HEADING
Sec. 5.1 General
MASTER ANALYSIS MODEX TSTART IDOF OVALIZATION
FLUIDPOTENTIAL CYCLICPARTS IPOSIT REACTIONS
INITIALSTRESS FSINTERACTION IRINT CMASS SHELLNDOF
AUTOMATIC SOLVER CONTACT-ALGORITHM TRELEASE
RESTART-LDC FRACTURE LOAD-CASE LOAD-PENETRATION
MAXSOLMEM MTOTM RECL SINGULARITY-STIFFNESS
STIFFNESS-FACTOR MAP-OUTPUT MAP-FORMAT
NODAL-DEFORMATION-FILE POROUS-COUPLING ZOOM-LABEL
AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC VECTOR-SHELL EPSI-FIRST STABILIZE
STABFACTOR RESULTS FEFCORR BOLTSTEP EXTEND-SSCURVE
CONVERT-SSVAL DEGEN TMC-MODEL ENSIGHT-OUTPUT
MASTER defines the data controlling the execution of the analysis program ADINA.
ANALYSIS [STATIC]
Selects the category of analysis to be performed.
STATIC Static analysis.
DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION Dynamic analysis.
FREQUENCIES Frequency / mode-shape calculation.
BUCKLING-LOADS Linearized buckling load calculation.
MODAL-TRANSIENT Mode superposition for time integration of
modal response.
MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS Calculation of modal participation factors for
subsequent response spectrum, harmonic, or
random analyses.
MODAL-STRESSES Calculation of modal stresses.
MODEX [EXECUTE]
Selects the execution mode of the analysis. {CHECK/EXECUTE/RESTART/RESULTS}
CHECK ADINA checks the data without executing.
EXECUTE ADINA checks the data and executes.
RESTART ADINA performs a restart, reading data from a previous run, checks the
data and executes.
MASTER
Sec. 5.1 General
RESULTS ADINA performs result-recovery.
TSTART [0.0]
Solution start time. For a restart run (MODEX = RESTART) TSTART must equal a solution
time at which data was saved from a previous run.
IDOF [000000]
Master degree of freedom code. A six digit integer, where each digit indicates either an
allowed (0) or a deleted (1) degree of freedom. A degree of freedom deleted by this parameter
is deleted from the entire model. The digits correspond to the following degrees of freedom:
Digit 1: X-translation (a-translation for a skew system).
Digit 2: Y-translation (b-translation for a skew system).
Digit 3: Z-translation (c-translation for a skew system).
Digit 4: X-rotation (a-rotation for a skew system).
Digit 5: Y-rotation (b-rotation for a skew system).
Digit 6: Z-rotation (c-rotation for a skew system).
The default is for all degrees of freedom to be active.
Note: The directions of rotational degrees of freedom at a shell element mid-surface node
with a local reference system depend on the orientation of the director vector or
element normal vector, as applicable.
Note: Preceding zeroes may be omitted, i.e., IDOF = 111 is equivalent to IDOF = 000111.
OVALIZATION [NONE]
Pipe element nodes can have additional ovalization and warping degrees of freedom, as
selected by the following options:
NONE All ovalization and warping degrees of freedom are deleted.
IN-PLANE Only the 3 ovalization and 3 warping degrees of freedom corre-
sponding to in-plane loading are admissible.
OUT-OF-PLANE Only the 3 ovalization and 3 warping degrees of freedom corre-
sponding to out-of-plane loading are admissible.
ALL All 6 ovalization and 6 warping degrees of freedom are admissible.
FLUIDPOTENTIAL [AUTOMATIC]
Selects the fluid potential degree of freedom. If there are elements in groups of type FLUID2
or FLUID3 with a potential-based formulation, this degree of freedom is automatically
selected. {AUTOMATIC/YES/NO}
MASTER
CYCLICPARTS [1]
The number of cyclic symmetric parts of the main structure. If the value is greater than or
equal to 2 then a cyclic symmetric analysis is performed. The maximum number of cyclic
symmetric parts allowed is 999. CYCLICPARTS = 1 indicates no cyclic symmetry.
IPOSIT [STOP]
Specifies the preferred behavior of ADINA when a zero or negative diagonal element is
encountered, i.e. when the system matrix is not positive definite.
STOP ADINA may terminate, see note below.
CONTINUE ADINA continues execution.
Note: The selection IPOSIT = STOP may be overridden by ADINA, as follows:
IPOSIT = STOP
Linear analysis:
ADINA stops if the stiffness matrix is not positive definite, except when
potential-based fluid elements are in use.
Non-linear analysis:
ADINA stops if the stiffness matrix is not positive definite, unless:
- the automatic load-displacement (LDC) option is being used, or
- the automatic time-stepping (ATS) option is being used, or
- the element birth/death option is used, or
- potential-based fluid elements are being used, or
- a contact analysis is being performed.
IPOSIT = CONTINUE
ADINA will always continue execution. If an exact zero pivot is encountered,
ADINA assigns a very large number to the diagonal term, effectively attaching a
very stiff spring to the degree of freedom. If the stiffness matrix is not positive
definite in linear analysis, this usually means that the problem is not well defined
(e.g. insufficient restraint). Use of IPOSIT = CONTINUE in such cases can give
misleading results.
REACTIONS [YES]
Indicates whether reaction forces and moments corresponding to fixed or prescribed degrees
of freedom are evaluated and printed. {NO/YES/SELECTED/SUM-SELECTED}
NO No reaction forces and moments corresponding to fixed or pre-
scribed degrees of freedom are evaluated and printed.
MASTER
Sec. 5.1 General
YES All reaction forces and moments corresponding to fixed or pre-
scribed degrees of freedom are evaluated and printed.
SELECTED Reaction forces are printed for nodes selected by command REAC-
TION-NODES.
SUM-SELECTED The sum of reaction forces for nodes selected by command REAC-
TION-NODES are printed.
INITIALSTRESS [NO]
Indicates whether the initial strains input at nodes are to be interpreted by ADINA as the
corresponding initial stresses. {NO/YES/DEFORMATION}
NO Initial strains at nodes are not interpreted as initial stresses.
YES Initial strains at nodes are interpreted as initial stresses, but
stresses do not result in deformation.
DEFORMATION Nodal initial strains are to be interpreted as initial stress which result
in deformation.
FSINTERACTION [NO]
Determines whether the analysis involves fluid-structure interaction. {YES/NO}
Note: FSINTERACTION = YES is automatically set if FSBOUNDARY is used.
IRINT [DEFAULT]
Frequency of saving ADINA results to restart file.
> 0 Restart file overwritten every IRINT timesteps.
< 0 Restart file appended every IRINT timesteps.
DEFAULT Number of steps in first time step block (see TIMESTEP ) for explicit
timestepping (see ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION ).
1 otherwise.
CMASS [NO]
Controls whether the total mass, total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and
center of mass are calculated by ADINA for each element group. {YES/NO}
SHELLNDOF [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies the default number of degrees of freedom to be associated with shell midsurface
nodes. This default may be overridden by SHELLNODESDOF, which specifies the number of
MASTER
degrees of freedom for shell midsurface nodes.
5 or FIVE Shell midsurface nodes will have 3 translation degrees of freedom
(global or skew) together with two rotation degrees of freedom
corresponding to a local midsurface coordinate system see
SHELLNODESDOF.
6 or SIX Shell midsurface nodes will have 3 translation and 3 rotation degrees
of freedom corresponding to the global or assigned skewsystem.
0 or AUTOMATIC Shell midsurface nodes will have five degrees of freedom, unless
modeling considerations, determined automatically, such as branch
shell structures or direct specification of rotation degrees of freedom
(see SHELLNODESDOF ), require that six degrees of freedom be
employed.
AUTOMATIC [OFF, (FSINTERACTION=NO)]
[ATS, (FSINTERACTION=YES)]
Selects a method of automatic incrementation control during analysis. {OFF/ATS/LDC/
TLA/TLA-S}
OFF No automatic incrementation; user-defined time step sequence is followed.
ATS Automatic time step control is enabled see command
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING.
LDC Automatic load-displacement control is enabled see command
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT.
TLA The program ignores any time step and time function specified. Instead, 50 time
steps of size 0.2 are used with a linear ramp time function (100% load at time of
10.0), and following settings are used.
- ATS with an acceleration scheme is used
- maximum number of equilibrium iterations = 30
- line search is used
- limits maximum incremental displacement in each iteration to 5% of largest
model length
TLA-S Total load application with stabilization. In addition to TLA settings, the
following stabilization settings are used.
- stiffness matrix stabilization factor of 1.0e-10 is used
- low-speed dynamics option is used
- contact damping is used
MASTER
Sec. 5.2 Analysis details
See command AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION for changing the
settings used in the TLA or TLA-S scheme.
SOLVER [SPARSE]
Selects the type of solution algorithm used to solve the equilibrium equation system.
{SKYLINE/ITERATIVE/SPARSE/MULTIGRID/3D-ITERATIVE/NONSYM-SP}
SKYLINE A skyline direct solution algorithm (active column Gauss elimina-
tion) is used.
ITERATIVE An iterative solution (incomplete Cholesky preconditioned
conjugate gradient method) is used.
SPARSE A sparse-matrix solver is used.
MULTIGRID A multigrid solver is used.
3D-ITERATIVE An iterative solver is used for models with relatively large number
of 3-D higher order elements.
NONSYM-SP A nonsymmetric sparse solver is used.
Note: See SOLVER ITERATIVE for input of parameters controlling the operation of the
iterative solver.
CONTACT-ALGORITHM [CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION]
Selects the default algorithm used for contact groups. See the Theory and Modeling Guide
for further details. {CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION/SEGMENT-METHOD/RIGID-TARGET}
It is recommended to use the CONTACT-CONTROL commands CONTACT-ALGORITHM
parameter instead for this purpose as this parameter may be obsolete in future releases.
TRELEASE [0.0]
When the element death option is utilized, an element will die (i.e., have zero stiffness
contribution) at a given time TDEATH associated with the element. By default (TRELEASE =
0.0) an element dies immediately when the solution time reaches TDEATH. However,
when TRELEASE > 0.0, an element will die over the solution time interval from TDEATH
to (TDEATH + TRELEASE). {! 0.0}
RESTART-LDC [NO]
Determines whether or not the load vector is transferred to a restart run.
NO The load vector is not written at the end of an analysis, nor is it read as an
external load vector in a restart analysis.
MASTER
YES The load vector is written at the end of an analysis, and it is read as an
external load vector in a restart analysis.
FRACTURE [NO]
Controls whether or not the analysis involves fracture mechanics. {YES/NO}
LOAD-CASE [NO]
Controls whether or not multiple load cases are used in a linear analysis. If LOAD-CASE =
SIMPACK, the SIMPACK interface will be used. {YES/NO/SIMPACK}
LOAD-PENETRATION [NO]
Controls whether or not load penetration is employed in the analysis, whereby distributed
(pressure) load is transferred upon element death. {YES/NO}
MAXSOLMEM
MTOTM
RECL
SINGULARITY-STIFFNESS [YES]
Assign drilling stiffness to rotational degrees of freedom with zero stiffness associated
with shell nodes connected to rigid links, beams, or pipes. {NO/YES}
STIFFNESS-FACTOR [1E-4]
Stiffness factor value used when SINGULARITY-STIFFNESS = YES. The actual stiffness
used is obtained by multiplying this factor by the rotational stiffness at the shell nodes.
MAP-OUTPUT [NO]
Indicates whether the mapping file is written. If the file is written, the frequency follows the
frequency of the porthole file. {NO/YES/REMESH/NODAL/ZOOM-INITIAL/ZOOM-
ANALYSIS/FSB}
NO No mapping file output.
YES ADINA will output mapping file.
REMESH AUI read nodal deformation file to recreate geometry for remeshing.
NODAL ADINA will output mapping file only for nodal results. This type of
MASTER
mapping file can be used as initial conditions for a subsequent analysis
using a different mesh.
ZOOM-INITIAL
ADINA will output mapping file for use by a zoom model.
ZOOM-ANALYSIS
ADINA will perform analysis for a zoom model. A mapping file created in a
previous analysis (with MAP-OUTPUT = ZOOM-INITIAL) is required.
If the boundary of the zoom model coincides with the boundary of the
original model, the ZOOM-BOUNDARY command must also be specified
(see figure at ZOOM-BOUNDARY command).
FSB MASTER command will read previous mapping file and update
FSI-BOUNDARY with deformed coordinate. Note that this option is only
used with FSINTERACTION = YES and the adaptive-mesh option is used
in the ADINA-F model.
MAP-FORMAT
Indicates whether the mapping file is written in text or binary format. {YES/NO}
NO binary file.
YES text file.
NODAL-DEFORMATION-FILE
Specifies the name of the nodal deformation file. If MAP-OUTPUT=REMESH AUI will read
this file. When the program reads the nodal deformation file to recreate geometry for
remeshing, the following actions are taken:
- all elements and their nodes are deleted.
- all volumes and surfaces are deleted.
- all lines which contain nodes are modified such that the line now passes through the
new nodal positions.
Note: MAP-OUTPUT=REMESH is currently restricted only for 2-D problem where the
model uses only AUI native geometry (i.e. lines and surfaces).
POROUS-COUPLING [NO]
Porous-coupling. {NO/YES}
ZOOM-LABEL [1]
Current zoom model label number .
MASTER
Chap. 5 Control data MASTER
AXIS-CYCLIC [0]
Label number of cyclic symmetry axis defined by axis-rotation command. Default AXIS-
CYCLIC = 0 means use global X axis.
PERIODIC [NO]
Specifies whether periodic loads are to be applied to cyclic parts. {NO/YES}
NO different loads are used for different cyclic parts.
YES the load applied on the first cyclic part is rotated about the cyclic axis and applied to
the other cyclic parts. Unlike basic cyclic symmetry analysis, a periodic symmetry
analysis can be nonlinear. It can also be used with explicit dynamic time integration.
VECTOR-SHELL [GEOMETRY]
Flag for calculation of shell-vector direction
GEOMETRY shell-vector direction from surface/face normal direction
ELEMENT shell-vector direction from element
EPSI-FIRST [NO]
Indicates whether the analysis is first solved with the applied initial strain before loads are
applied. If EPSI-FIRST=YES, then the automatic time stepping (ATS) method can also be used
to scale the initial strains in case the solution fails to converge when the full initial strains are
applied in one step.{NO/YES}
STABILIZE [AUTOMATIC]
The flag to set the option to stabilize the stiffness matrix. {AUTOMATIC/NO/YES}
AUTOMATIC Automatically use stabilization if the ratio of the maximum to minimum
diagonals of the factorized stiffness matrix is greater than 1.0E11.
NO Do not use stabilization.
YES Use stabilization.
STABFACTOR [1.0E-10]
The stabilization factor used if STABILIZE when is set to YES or AUTOMATIC.
RESULTS [PORTHOLE]
Specifies the output option for the results. {PORTHOLE/OP2/OP2+PORT/UNV/
UNV+PORT}
PORTHOLE ADINA porthole file format
OP2 Nastran .OP2 file format
OP2+PORT Nastran OP2 file and ADINA porthole file formats
UNV I-deas universal file format
UNV+PORT I-deas universal file and ADINA porthole file formats
FEFCORR [NO]
Perform fixed-end-force correction for beams. {YES/NO}
BOLTSTEP [1]
The number of steps to iterate for calculation of bolt force.
EXTEND-SSCURVE [YES]
Automatically extend the stress-strain curve to strain value of 100.0 by default. {NO/YES}
CONVERT-SSVAL [NO]
Option to convert stress-strain curve input from engineering stress/strain to true stress/
strain. {NO/YES}
The plastic-multilinear, multilinear-plastic-creep and the multilinear-plastic-creep material
models are affected by the setting of this parameter as follows:
When CONVERT-SSVAL=NO, stress
i
and strain
i
are interpreted as true stresses and strains.
Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also intrepreted as true stresses
and strains.
When CONVERT-SSVAL=YES, stress
i
and strain
i
are interpreted as engineering stresses and
strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also intrepreted as engi-
neering stresses and strains.
DEGEN [YES]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction of degenerate 8-node 2D elements or 20-node 3D
elements. {YES/NO/UNUSED}
TMC-MODEL [NO]
Specifies whether the model contains thermal properties and the type of thermal-mechanical
coupling analysis. {NO/ONEWAY/ITERATIVE/HEAT}
MASTER
NO No heat transfer analysis is performed by the program.
ONEWAY The program performs first a heat transfer step to calculate temperatures,
then a stress/displacement (mechanical) step. Note that the heat transfer
step size can be different than the mechanical step size. Also, heat transfer
can be a transient analysis and mechanical analysis can be a static analysis
(or any combination thereof).
ITERATIVE An iterative thermo-mechanical coupling is used. The program iterates
between heat transfer and mechanical solutions. The same step size is used
in both cases. A solution is obtained if both temperature and displace-
ment results converge. Note that the option is available for contact with
friction, or thermo-plastic and rubber materials only.
HEAT The program ignores any structural loads and boundary conditions and
performs a pure heat transter analysis.
ENSIGHT-OUTPUT [NO]
Indicates whether an EnSight output file is written and which format is used. If the file is
written, it will be written at end of each time step when the porthole file is written.
{NO/UNFORMATTED/FORMATTED}
NO No EnSight output file is written
UNFORMATTED An unformatted EnSight output file is written
FORMATTED A formatted EnSight output file is written
Auxiliary commands
LIST MASTER
MASTER
DOF-ACTIVE
node
i
dof
i
The command is used to identify the active degree of freedom (DOF) of reduced model. It is
only used when LOAD-CASE = SIMPACK in the MASTER command.
node
i
Node label number.
dof
i
Type of DOF.
{X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/R-ROTATION/Y-ROTA-
TION/Z-ROTATION}
DOF-ACTIVE
TMC-CONTROL ANALYSIS TIMESTEP TSTEP-NAME AUTOMATIC
SOLVER HEAT-MATRIX METHOD MAXSUBD ALPHA
TSTART GAMMA TEMP-CUTOFF CUTOFF TEMP-RELAX
HEAT-RELAX
TMC-CONTROL defines parameters that control TMC analysis.
ANALYSIS [STEADY-STATE]
Selects the type of heat transfer analysis to be performed.
{STEADY-STATE/TRANSIENT}
STEADY-STATE Steady-state analysis.
TRANSIENT Time dependent analysis.
TIMESTEP [CURRENT]
Flag to specify the time step for heat transfer analysis. {CURRENT/SPECIFIED}
CURRENT Use the same time step as ADINA.
SPECIFIED Specify the time step using the TSTEP-NAME parameter.
TSTEP-NAME
Specifies the time step for heat transfer analysis. It is used only when TIMESTEP = SPECI-
FIED.
AUTOMATIC [OFF]
Enables automatic incrementation control during analysis. {OFF/ATS}
OFF No automatic incrementation, user-defined timestep sequence is
followed.
ATS Automatic timestep control is enabled, see MAXSUBD parameter
below.
SOLVER [SPARSE]
Selects the type of solution algorithm used to solve the equilibrium equation system.
{SPARSE/ITERATIVE}
SPARSE A sparse-matrix solver is used.
ITERATIVE An iterative solution (incomplete Cholesky preconditioned conjugate
gradient method) is used.
TMC-CONTROL
Note: See command TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE for input of parameters controlling the
operation of the iterative solver.
HEAT-MATRIX [CONSISTENT]
Selects the type of heat capacity matrix to be used in transient analysis. {CONSISTENT/
LUMPED}
CONSISTENT Consistent heat capacity matrix.
LUMPED Lumped (diagonalized) heat capacity matrix.
METHOD [BACKWARD-EULER]
Time integration method used in transient analysis. {BACKWARD-EULER / FORWARD-
EULER / TRAPEZOIDAL / ALPHA / ALPHA / COMPOSITE}
BACKWARD-EULER Euler backward integration.
FORWARD-EULER Euler forward integration.
TRAPEZOIDAL Trapezoidal rule.
ALPHA Alpha-family method.
COMPOSITE Bathe composite method.
MAXSUBD [10]
Specifies the maximum permitted subdivision of any given timestep when AUTOMATIC =
ATS, i.e., for a time step of magnitude 'T, the algorithm will not attempt to subdivide below a
time step of magnitude 'T/2MAXSUBD.
ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter for METHOD=ALPHA. {0 % ALPHA % 1.0}
TSTART [DEFAULT]
Start time of the heat transfer solution. DEFAULT indicates a start time that is the start time
for the structural solution. {DEFAULT / TSTART $ 0.0}
GAMMA [0.5]
Coefficient used for the Bathe composite time integration method.
{0.0 < GAMMA < 1.0}
TMC-CONTROL
Chap. 5 Control data TMC-CONTROL
TEMP-CUTOFF [NO]
If TEMP-CUTOFF = YES, temperature CUT-OFF will be used. {NO/YES}
CUTOFF [1.0D30]
Temperature will be cut-off above CUT-OFF.
TEMP-RELAX [1.0]
Temperature relaxation factor to overcome convergence difficulties.
{0.0 % TEMP-RELAX % 1.0}
HEAT-RELAX [1.0]
Generated heat relaxation factor to overcome convergence difficulties.
{0.0 % TEMP-RELAX % 1.0}
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION METHOD DELTA ALPHA
THETA TIMESTEP NCRSTEP
CRSTEP MASS-SCALE DTMIN1
DTMIN2 GAMMA
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION specifies time integration parameters for a
dynamic, direct time-integration, analysis.
METHOD [NEWMARK]
Selects the method to be used for direct time integration, see Theory and Modeling Guide.
{NEWMARK/CENTRAL-DIFFERENCE/WILSON/COMPOSITE}
NEWMARK Newmark method.
CENTRAL-DIFFERENCE Central difference method (explicit analysis).
WILSON Wilson-! method.
COMPOSITE Bathe composite method.
Note: For the central-difference method:
- substructures and cyclic symmetry cannot be used;
- a lumped mass matrix is used automatically;
- there are further restrictions on analysis features, material models and element
settings. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for more details.
Note: The Wilson-! method cannot be used for nonlinear analysis.
DELTA [0.5]
ALPHA [0.25]
Coefficients for the Newmark method. {DELTA " 0.5}{ALPHA > 0.0}
The following choices are often employed:
DELTA = 0.5, ALPHA = 0.25 The constant-average-acceleration scheme
(also termed the trapezoidal rule).
DELTA = 0.5, ALPHA = 0.5 Good for contact-impact problems.
Note: The Newmark method is unconditionally stable in linear analysis, if:
DELTA " 0.5, ALPHA " 0.25 # (DELTA + 0.5)
2
THETA [1.4]
Coefficient for the Wilson-! method. {1.39 $ THETA $ 2.01}
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION
Sec. 5.2 Analysis details ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION
TIMESTEP [TOTALTIME]
Indicates the method of time step selection for explicit analysis (i.e., METHOD = CENTRAL-
DIFFERENCE). {USER/AUTOMATIC/TOTALTIME}
USER User defined timesteps. (See TIMESTEP )
AUTOMATIC ADINA automatically calculates the time step magnitude in explicit
analysis based on stability considerations. The total number of time
steps specified in the TIMESTEP command will be used.
TOTALTIME The magnitude of the timesteps is calculated automatically by the
program. The analysis runs until the total time specified in the
TIMESTEP command is reached. The number of steps specified in the
TIMESTEP command determines how often results are saved to the
porthole file.
NCRSTEP [1]
Defines how often the time step magnitude is updated in explicit analysis (the time step
magnitude is updated every NCRSTEP step(s)). This parameter is not used if
TIMESTEP=USER.
{NCRSTEP = 1, 2, 3, ...}
CRSTEP [0.0]
Factor used to scale the calculated time step in transient explicit analysis. This parameter is
not used if TIMESTEP=USER. {0.0 % CRSTEP % 4.0}
For the default value CRSTEP = 0.0, CRSTEP will be set to 1.0 always.
MASS-SCALE [1.0]
Specifies the factor to scale the mass (densities) of the entire model (at the beginning of the
analysis) to increase the critical time step size required for stability when the explicit time
integration scheme is used. See caution below. {$ 1.0}
DTMIN1 [0.0]
The minimum time step size used to determine if mass scaling will be applied to elements (at
the beginning of the analysis) whose critical time step size is smaller than DTMIN1. The
amount of mass scaling is calculated for each element so that the critical time step size is
equal to DTMIN1. See caution below. {$ 0.0}
DTMIN2 [0.0]
The minimum time step size used to determine if an element will be removed in an explicit time
integration analysis. In explicit time integration, the smaller an element size is, the smaller will
the critical time step size be. If the critical time step size for an element is smaller than
DTMIN2, the element will be removed in the analysis. See caution below. {$ 0.0}
Notes:
MASS-SCALE, DTMIN1 and DTMIN2 may be used together.
DTMIN1 and DTMIN2 are applied after MASS-SCALE is applied.
If DTMIN1 and DTMIN2 are both used, DTMIN1 should be greater than DTMIN2. If
DTMIN2 $ DTMIN1 is specified, DTMIN1 will be ignored.
CAUTION:
Specifying MASS-SCALE > 1.0, DTMIN1 > 0.0 or DTMIN2 > 0.0 may change the model
significantly. Hence, extra care should be exercised in examining the results when any of
these parameters are used.
GAMMA [0.5]
Coefficient for the Bathe composite method. {0.0 < GAMMA < 1.0}
Note: The Bathe composite method uses Newmark coefficients with the additional
constant GAMMA. It is recommended to use the default value of GAMMA
(i.e., 0.5).
Auxiliary commands
LIST ANALYSIS
Lists the data for the current analysis option.
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRATION
FREQUENCIES METHOD NEIGEN NMODE IPRINT RIGID-BODY
RSHIFT CUTOFF NITEMM NVECTOR STURM-CHECK
ACCELERATE TOLERANCE STARTTYPE NSTVECT
INTERVAL FMIN FMAX MODALSTRESSES STATIC
NSHIFT NSHIFT-BLOCK
FREQUENCIES specifies control data for a frequency solution to be carried out for the
structure linearized at time TSTART. In order to input data via this command the MASTER
command ANALYSIS parameter should have been previously set to FREQUENCIES,
MODAL-TRANSIENT, MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS or MODAL-STRESSES.
METHOD [SUBSPACE-ITERATION]
Specifies the method of frequency calculation. {DETERMINANT-SEARCH/
SUBSPACE-ITERATION/INPUT/LANCZOS-ITERATION}
Please consult the Theory and Modeling Guide for a further description of these methods.
The selection METHOD = INPUT will cause ADINA to read frequencies and mode-shapes
from file, e.g., for use in a subsequent mode superposition analysis; all other parameters of
this command are ignored.
NEIGEN [1]
The number of frequencies and corresponding mode shapes to be calculated. The actual
number of frequencies calculated may be reduced whenever the maximum, specified either by
the cut-off frequency (CUTOFF) or the upper bound on the solution interval (FMAX for the
subspace-iteration method), has been exceeded.
NMODE [0]
The number of mode shapes to be printed in the results output file. Frequency results are
always printed. {% NEIGEN}
IPRINT [NO]
Specifies whether or not intermediate solution information is printed. Such information may
be of interest in tracing the solution behavior. {YES/NO}
RIGID-BODY [NO]
Specifies whether or not rigid-body modes are allowed. Should be used when the lowest
frequency may be zero, or any part of the model would be insufficiently supported if all
contact, mesh glueing and generalized constraints are removed. {YES/NO}
RSHIFT [0.0]
The rigid body mode shift to be applied when RIGID-BODY = YES. RSHIFT = 0.0 will result
in a value being automatically determined by the analysis program. {% 0.0}
FREQUENCIES
CUTOFF [1.0E8]
The cut-off circular frequency (unit = radians/time). The frequency calculation is stopped if
frequency CUTOFF has been exceeded.
NITEMM [24 or 60]
The maximum number of iterations per eigenpair (frequency, mode shape) allowed during
solution. Default = 60 if METHOD = DETERMINANT; otherwise, default = 24.
NVECTOR [DEFAULT]
The number of iteration vectors to be used simultaneously by the subspace-iteration method.
DEFAULT = min(2"NEIGEN, NEIGEN+8) if INTERVAL = NO
= 16 if INTERVAL = YES
STURM-CHECK [NO]
Specifies whether or not a Sturm-sequence check is to be performed to verify that all the
lowest frequencies have been found by the subspace-iteration method. {YES/NO}
ACCELERATE [NO]
Specifies whether or not acceleration schemes (shifting and overrelaxation) are to be em-
ployed during subspace-iteration. Note that if acceleration is applied, then the
Sturm-sequence check is automatically applied.
Furthermore, if NVECTOR < min(2"NEIGEN, NEIGEN+8) then acceleration is always used.
{YES/NO}
TOLERANCE [DEFAULT]
The convergence tolerance used by the subspace-iteration and the Lanczos-iteration
methods in the iteration for frequency values.
DEFAULT = 1.0E-6 if INTERVAL = NO and METHOD = SUBSPACE-ITERATION
= 1.0E-10if INTERVAL = YES and METHOD = SUBSPACE-ITERATION
= 1.0E-9 if METHOD = LANCZOS-ITERATION
STARTTYPE [LANCZOS]
Specifies the method of generating starting vectors for the subspace-iteration method.
STANDARD Standard starting vectors are used.
LANCZOS The Lanczos method is used to generate starting vectors.
NSTVECT [0]
The number of user-provided starting iteration vectors for the subspace-iteration method.
The NSTVECT vectors, read from file, replace the first NSTVECT starting vectors generated
by the analysis program.
FREQUENCIES
INTERVAL [NO]
Specifies whether or not the lowest frequency calculation by the subspace-iteration method
and the Lanczos iteration method is confined to a specified interval (FMIN, FMAX). {YES/
NO}
FMIN [0.0]
If INTERVAL = YES, FMIN gives the lower bound frequency (unit = radians/time) of the
interval in which the subspace-iteration method and the Lanczos iteration method calculates
the lowest frequencies.
FMAX [DEFAULT]
If INTERVAL = YES, FMAX gives the upper bound frequency (unit = radians/time) of the
interval in which the subspace-iteration method and the Lanczos iteration method calculates
the lowest frequencies. DEFAULT = CUTOFF.
MODALSTRESSES [NO]
Indicates whether or not to calculate modal stresses for post-processing. {YES/NO}
STATIC [NO]
Indicates whether or not to perform static analysis load-steps following the frequency/ mode-
shape calculation. {YES/NO}
NSHIFT [AUTO]
Specifies whether to use automatic shifting procedure for the Lanczos-iteration method.
When the number of frequencies (NEIGEN) to be calculated is large, using the automatic
shifting procedure can reduce the computation time significantly. If NSHIFT=AUTO, then the
procedure is used if (NSHIFT-BLOCK * 2) % NEIGEN. Currently, this procedure is applicable
for frequency calculations for potential-based fluid only. {AUTO/YES/NO}
NSHIFT-BLOCK [50]
Specifies the number of frequencies to be calculated for each shift in the Lanczos-iteration
method. {>0}
Note: The parameters NVECTOR, ACCELERATE, STARTTYPE, and NSTVECT are appli-
cable only to the subspace-iteration method. They are ignored by both the determi-
nant-search and Lanczos methods. The parameters TOLERANCE, INTERVAL, FMIN,
FMAX and STURM-CHECK are also ignored by the determinant-search method.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FREQUENCIES
Lists the current setting of parameters for a frequency solution if previously enabled via
the command MASTER ANALYSIS = FREQUENCIES.
FREQUENCIES
BUCKLING-LOADS NEIGEN NMODE IPRINT ITEMM NVECTOR
TOLERANCE S TARTTYPE NSTVECT
MODALSTRESSES METHOD EIGENSOLVER
BUCKLING-LOADS specifies control data for evaluating static buckling loads and correspond-
ing mode shapes based on the linearized state of stress and deformation of the model at time
TSTART+'t, following an evaluation of the static response at the same time, i.e., after the first
step of the analysis. In order to input data via this command, the MASTER command ANALY-
SIS parameter should have been previously set to BUCKLING-LOADS.
The restart option may be used to perform a buckling analysis for the linearized system at step
n, where n > 1. The first run solves for the static response after (n-1) steps. The restart run
then enables the buckling analysis to solve for the buckling response linearized at step n.
The solution of the eigenvalue problem required for the determination of critical load factors
employs the subspace-iteration or Lanczos-iteration method (see FREQUENCIES).
The Sturm-sequence check is applied to verify that the lowest required buckling loads have
been evaluated. The acceleration (shifting and over-relaxation) schemes are used if the
subspace-iteration method is chosen.
NEIGEN [1]
The number of lowest positive critical buckling loads (i.e., acting in the direction of the
applied loads for the first solution step), and corresponding mode shapes to be calculated.
NMODE [0]
The number of mode shapes to be printed in the results output file. The critical buckling load
factors are always printed. {% NEIGEN}
IPRINT [NO]
Specifies whether or not intermediate solution information is printed. Such information may
be of interest in tracing the solution behavior. {YES/NO}
NITEMM [40]
The maximum number of iterations per eigenpair (frequency, mode shape) allowed during
solution for the subspace-iteration method.
NVECTOR [DEFAULT]
The number of iteration vectors to be used simultaneously for the subspace-iteration method.
{$ 0}
DEFAULT = NEIGEN*3 + 18
BUCKLING-LOADS
TOLERANCE [1.0E-6]
The convergence tolerance used by the subspace-iteration method in the iteration for
frequency values.
STARTTYPE [LANCZOS]
Specifies the method of generating starting vectors for the subspace-iteration method.
STANDARD Standard starting vectors are used.
LANCZOS The Lanczos method is used to generate starting vectors.
NSTVECT [0]
The number of user-provided starting iteration vectors for the subspace-iteration method.
The NSTVECT vectors, read from file, replace the first NSTVECT starting vectors generated
by the analysis program.
MODALSTRESSES [NO]
Indicates whether or not to calculate modal stresses for post-processing. {YES/NO}
METHOD [CLASSICAL]
Buckling analysis method. {CLASSICAL/SECANT}
EIGENSOLVER [SUBSPACE]
Eigenvalue solver method. {SUBSPACE/LANCZOS}
Auxiliary commands
LIST BUCKLING-LOADS
Lists the current setting of parameters for a buckling analysis if enabled via the command
MASTER ANALYSIS = BUCKLING-LOADS.
BUCKLING-LOADS
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT NMODES ERROR-INTERVAL FREQUENCIES
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT provides control data for a mode superposition analysis.
NMODES [0]
Number of modes for a mode superposition analysis.
Note that when NMODES = 0 by default, the number of modal participation factors calculated
by ADINA is the number of requested modes in the FREQUENCIES command.
ERROR-INTERVAL [0]
Interval of calculating error in external load representation in mode superposition analysis.
0 No external load error calculation.
> 0 Calculate relative error at this interval of timesteps.
FREQUENCIES [YES]
Indicates whether ADINA is to first perform a frequency analysis (in the same run). Other-
wise the frequencies and mode shapes are assumed available, on file, from a previous
analysis. See command FREQUENCIES for control of the frequency/mode-shape calcula-
tions. {YES/NO}
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS EXCITATION NMODES
STATIC CORRECTION
FREQUENCIES DUSIZE
Provides control data for a modal participation factor analysis.
EXCITATION [GROUND-MOTION]
Defines the type of excitation load. {GROUND-MOTION/APPLIED-LOAD}
NMODES [0]
Number of modes for a modal participation factor analysis. Note that when NMODES = 0 by
default, the number of modal participation factors calculated by ADINA is the number of
requested modes in the FREQUENCIES command.
STATIC [NO]
Indicates whether static load-step calculations are to be performed. {YES/NO}
CORRECTION [NO]
Indicates whether static-correction calculations are to be performed. Calculations of residual
displacements, accelerations, forces, and stresses will be made to evaluate the contribution to
the response from the remaining modes above NMODES included in a response spectrum
analysis assuming this contribution is static, thus not dynamically amplified. {YES/NO}
FREQUENCIES [YES]
Indicates whether ADINA is to first perform a frequency analysis (in the same run). Other-
wise the frequencies and mode shapes are assumed available, on file, from a previous
analysis. See command FREQUENCIES for control of the frequency/mode-shape calcula-
tions. {YES/NO}
DUSIZE [0.0]
This parameter is used in nonlinear analysis to specify the size of the displacement perturba-
tion used in calculating nonlinear modal stresses. The unit of DUSIZE is length.
If DUSIZE=0.0, then ADINA computes the displacement perturbation factor automati-
cally. If you specify DUSIZE, you should choose DUSIZE so that if the mode shapes are
scaled to be of size DUSIZE, the deformations corresponding to the scaled mode shapes are
small.
When the analysis is not a restart analysis, or if the displacements at restart time TSTART
are zero, it is recommended that you enter DUSIZE. This is because ADINA's automatic
calculation can lead to very small or very large displacement perturbations.
When the analysis is a restart analysis and the displacements at restart time TSTART are
nonzero, ADINA's automatic calculation of DUSIZE is usually quite good, however you can
also enter DUSIZE if desired.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 6.2.4 for more information.
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-FACTORS
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES FREQUENCIES DUSIZE
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES provides control data for modal stress calculations.
FREQUENCIES [YES]
Indicates whether ADINA is to first perform a frequency analysis (in the same run). Otherwise
the frequencies and mode shapes are assumed available, on file, from a previous analysis.
See command FREQUENCIES for control of the frequency/mode-shape calculations. {YES/
NO}
DUSIZE [0.0]
This parameter is used in nonlinear analysis to specify the size of the displacement perturba-
tion used in calculating nonlinear modal stresses. The unit of DUSIZE is length.
If DUSIZE=0.0, then ADINA computes the displacement perturbation factor automatically.
If you specify DUSIZE, you should choose DUSIZE so that if the mode shapes are scaled to
be of size DUSIZE, the deformations corresponding to the scaled mode shapes are small.
When the analysis is not a restart analysis, or if the displacements at restart time TSTART are
zero, it is recommended that you enter DUSIZE. This is because ADINA's automatic calcula-
tion can lead to very small or very large displacement perturbations.
When the analysis is a restart analysis and the displacements at restart time TSTART are
nonzero, ADINA's automatic calculation of DUSIZE is usually quite good, however you can
also enter DUSIZE if desired.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 6.2.4 for more information.
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES
Sec. 5.3 Options
KINEMATICS DISPLACEMENTS STRAINS PRESSURE-UPDATE
INCOMPATIBLE-MODES UL-FORMULATION RIGIDLINK-6DOF
KINEMATICS defines the kinematic formulation. An individual element group may select a
different formulation via the appropriate EGROUP command.
DISPLACEMENTS [SMALL]
SMALL Small displacements and rotations are assumed.
LARGE Large displacements and rotations are assumed.
STRAINS [SMALL]
SMALL Small strains are assumed.
LARGE Large strains are assumed.
Note: Large strains are only admissible for element groups of type TWODSOLID,
THREEDSOLID and SHELL with certain material models please refer to the descrip-
tions of the MATERIAL parameter in the commands EGROUP TWODSOLID, EGROUP
THREEDSOLID AND EGROUP SHELL.
PRESSURE-UPDATE [NO]
Specifies whether pressure correction terms are added to the shell stiffness matrix in fre-
quency analysis. Note that this setting cannot be overridden at the element group level.
{NO/YES}
INCOMPATIBLE-MODES [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in formulation of 4-node 2D and shell
elements and 8-node 3D elements. The default AUTOMATIC sets INCOMPATIBLE-MODES =
NO for explicit analysis, and otherwise sets INCOMPATIBLE-MODES = YES.
{AUTOMATIC/NO/YES}
UL-FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Specifies the large strain formulation to be used for 2D solid, 3D solid and shell elements.
{DEFAULT/ULH/ULJ}
DEFAULT ULJ is used if explicit transient analysis or rigid-target contact algorithm of
version 8.3 is used. Otherwise, ULH is used.
ULH Updated Lagrangian Hencky formulation is used.
ULJ Updated Lagrangian Jaumann formulation is used.
KINEMATICS
Chap. 5 Control data KINEMATICS
RIGIDLINK-6DOF [NO]
Specifies whether all six degrees of freedom are active for a master node on a rigid link when
the node is also attached to an element (e.g., 3D solid) where not all six degrees of freedom
are active. {NO/ALL}
NO Only the active degrees of freedom of the attached element are assigned to
the master node on a rigid link.
ALL All six degrees of freedom are active for the master nodes of a rigid link.
Sec. 5.3 Options
MASS-MATRIX TYPE ETA
MASS-MATRIX selects the type of mass matrix to be used in dynamic analysis.
For static analyses, the mass matrix type is used only in evaluating centrifugal and mass-
proportional loads. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
TYPE [CONSISTENT]
Selects the type of mass matrix.
LUMPED Lumped (diagonalized) mass matrix.
CONSISTENT Consistent mass matrix.
Note: The lumped mass matrix is always used in explicit dynamic analysis, and in
substuctures.
Note: The element integration orders specified for element groups do not affect the calcula-
tion of the mass matrix.
ETA [DEFAULT]
Multiplier (! 0.0) for the lumped rotational masses of all BEAM, ISOBEAM, PLATE, SHELL,
and PIPE elements. ETA is applicable only if a dynamic analysis is to be performed with a
lumped mass matrix, see Theory and Modeling Guide.
DEFAULT =0.0 for the NEWMARK or WILSON-" integration method and for
frequency analysis
1.0 for the central difference (explicit) integration method.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MASS-MATRIX
Lists the current mass matrix type.
MASS-MATRIX
Sec. 5.3 Options
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING ALPHA BETA
egroup
i
) )) ))
i
* ** **
i
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING specifies coefficients which define a consistent damping matrix C as a
linear combination of the system mass matrix M and the system stiffness matrix K, i.e.,
C M K C C + , - , - - ) *
conc gen
where
M = Total system mass matrix (lumped or consistent), including any specified
concentrated masses.
K = Stiffness matrix based on the elements in all element groups.
), * = Rayleigh damping factors.
C
conc
= Damping matrix contribution from concentrated dampers (see DAMPERS ).
C
gen
= Damping matrix contribution from GENERAL or SPRING elements.
See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details on the use of the damping matrix.
Different Rayleigh damping coeffients may be specified for individual element groups. The
default coefficients are given by parameters ALPHA, BETA.
ALPHA [0.0]
The Rayleigh damping factor ).
BETA [0.0]
The Rayleigh damping factor *.
Note: The specification of Rayleigh damping is ignored for both a frequency analysis and a
mode superposition analysis.
egroup
i
Label number of an element group.
) )) ))
i
[ALPHA]
Raleigh damping factor ) for element group egroup
i
.
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING
* ** **
i
[BETA]
Raleigh damping factor * for element group egroup
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RAYLEIGH-DAMPING
Lists the Rayleigh damping factors ), *.
DELETE RAYLEIGH-DAMPING
Sets the Rayleigh damping factors ), * to 0.0.
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING
Sec. 5.3 Options
MODAL-DAMPING
mode
i
factor
i
MODAL-DAMPING defines modal damping factors to be used in mode superposition
analysis.
mode
i
The mode number.
factor
i
Damping factor for mode mode
i
, representing the fraction of critical damping. For example,
factor
i
= 0.1 gives 10% damping for the mode.
Note: The mode superposition analysis option must be enabled for the data from this
command to be considered. See MASTER.
Note: At least NMODES damping factors should be given, where NMODES is the
number of modes participating in the mode superposition analysis. See
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MODAL-DAMPING
Lists the assigned modal damping factors.
DELETE MODAL-DAMPING
Deletes all modal damping factors.
MODAL-DAMPING
Sec. 5.3 Options
FAILURE MAXSTRESS NAME SUBTYPE SIGAMT SIGAMC SIGBMT
SIGBMC SIGCMT SIGCMC SIGABM SIGACM
SIGBCM
FAILURE MAXSTRESS defines a failure criterion of maximum stress type for SHELL elements
(EGROUP SHELL) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-ISOTROPIC and THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC. See Theory and Modeling Guide for
details.
NAME [(current highest failure label number) + 1]
Label number of the failure criterion to be defined. If the label number of an existing failure
criterion is given, then the previous failure criterion definition is overwritten.
SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
Indicates the stress/strain conditions.
STRESS2 Plane stress.
STRESS3 General 3-D stress.
SIGAMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material a-direction.
SIGAMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material a-direction.
SIGBMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material b-direction.
SIGBMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material b-direction.
SIGCMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material c-direction.
SIGCMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material c-direction.
SIGABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ab-plane.
SIGACM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material ac-plane.
FAILURE MAXSTRESS
SIGBCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in the material bc-plane.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST FAILURE FIRRST LAST
DELETE FAILURE FIRST LAST
FAILURE MAXSTRESS
Sec. 5.3 Options
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN NAME SUBTYPE EPSAMT EPSAMC EPSBMT
EPSBMC EPSCMT EPSCMC EPSABM EPSACM
EPSBCM
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN defines a failure criterion of maximum strain type for SHELL elements
( EGROUP SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
details.
NAME [current highest failure label number) + 1]
SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
Indicates the stress/strain conditions
EPSAMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension strain in material a-direction.
EPSAMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression strain in material a-direction.
EPSBMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension strain in material b-direction.
EPSBMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression strain in material b-direction.
EPSCMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension strain in material c-direction.
EPSCMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression strain in material c-direction.
EPSABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear strain in the material ab-plane.
EPSACM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear strain in the material ac-plane.
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN
EPSBCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear strain in the material bc-plane.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST FAILURE FIRST LAST
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN
Sec. 5.3 Options
FAILURE TSAI-HILL NAME SUBTYPE SIGAM SIGBM SIGCM
SIGABM SIGACM SIGBCM
FAILURE TSAI-HILL defines a failure criterion of type Tsai-Hilltype for SHELL elements
details.
SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
SIGAM [0.0]
Maximum allowable stress in material a-direction.
SIGBM [0.0]
Maximum allowable stress in material b-direction.
SIGCM [0.0]
Maximum allowable stress in material c-direction.
SIGABM [0.0]
SIGACM [0.0]
SIGBCM [0.0]
Auxiliary Commands
FAILURE TSAI-HILL
FAILURE TSAI-WU NAME SUBTYPE SIGAMT SIGAMC SIGBMT
SIGBMC SIGCMT SIGCMC SIGABM
SIGACM SIGBCM FAB FAC FBC HOFFMAN
FAILURE TSAI-WU defines a failure criterion of type Tsai-Wu type for SHELL elements
details.
SUBTYPE [STRESS2]
SIGAMT [0.0]
SIGAMC [0.0]
SIGBMT [0.0]
SIGBMC [0.0]
SIGCMT [0.0]
Maximum allowable tension stress in material c-direction.
SIGCMC [0.0]
Maximum allowable compression stress in material c-direction.
SIGABM [0.0]
SIGACM [0.0]
FAILURE TSAI-WU
Sec. 5.3 Options
SIGBCM [0.0]
FAB [0.0]
Interaction strength between a- and b- material directions.
FAC [0.0]
Interaction strength between a- and c- material directions.
FBC [0.0]
Interaction strength between b- and c- material directions.
HOFFMAN [YES]
Specifies whether or not the Hoffman convention should be used. {YES/NO}
Auxiliary Commands
FAILURE TSAI-WU
FAILURE HASHIN NAME SIGAMT SIGAMC SIGBMT SIGBMC
SIGABM SIGTRM
FAILURE HASHIN defines a failure criterion of type Hashin for SHELL elements ( EGROUP
SHELL ) in conjunction with material models: ISOTROPIC, ORTHOTROPIC,
details.
SIGAMT [0.0]
SIGAMC [0.0]
SIGBMT [0.0]
SIGBMC [0.0]
SIGABM [0.0]
Maximum allowable shear stress in ab-plane.
SIGTRM [0.0]
Maximum allowable transverse stress.
Auxiliary Commands
FAILURE HASHIN
Sec. 5.3 Options
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED NAME NSURFACE
coef1
k
coef2
k
coef3
k
coef4
k
coef5
k
coef6
k
(k = 8"NSURFACE)
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED defines a user supplied failure criterion for SHELL elements
details.
NSURFACE [1]
The number of failure surfaces. {% 4}
coef1
k
coef2
k
coef3
k
coef4
k
coef5
k
coef6
k
For each failure surface 8 data input lines are entered in the following order:
1: )
1
...)
6
Coefficients )
i
of the stress condition.
2: F
1
...F
6
Linear terms coefficients F
i
of the failure surface
3: F
11
...F
16
Quadratic terms coefficients F
1j
of the failure surface.
4: F
21
...F
26
2j
...
8: F
61
...F
66
6j
Auxiliary Commands
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE TINIT TLOAD TGINIT TGLOAD NCURTL NCURTGL
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE defines reference temperatures and temperature gradients, for
both initial thermal conditions and thermal loads.
TINIT [0.0]
The initial temperature of a structure, in whatever temperature units you employ. Differing
initial temperatures may be specified by commands INITIAL-CONDITION, SET-
INITCONDITION.
TLOAD [0.0]
The prescribed reference temperature for a thermal load on a structure, in whatever tempera-
ture units you employ. Differing prescribed temperatures may be specified by commands
LOAD TEMPERATURE, APPLY-LOAD.
TGINIT [0.0]
The initial temperature gradient through the thickness of a shell type structure, in whatever
temperature/length units you employ. Differing initial temperature gradients may be specified
by commands INITIAL-CONDITION, SET-INITCONDITION.
TGLOAD [0.0]
The prescribed reference temperature gradient for a thermal load on a shell type structure, in
whatever temperature/length units you employ. Differing prescribed temperature gradients
may be specified by commands LOAD TGRADIENT, APPLY-LOAD.
NCURTL [0]
Timefunction label number for the reference load temperature.
NCURTGL [0]
Timefunction label number for the reference load temperature gradient.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE
Lists the reference temperatures and temperature gradients.
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE
Sec. 5.4 Solver details
SOLVER ITERATIVE MAX-ITERATIONS EPSIA EPSIB EPSII
SHIFT NVEC
SOLVER ITERATIVE defines control data for the iterative solution of the matrix system of
equilibrium equations.
This command is applicable when the iterative solver is used, i.e., SOLVER=ITERATIVE,
MULTIGRID or 3D-ITERATIVE in the MASTER command.
MAX-ITERATIONS [0]
The maximum number of iterations for the iterative solver to converge. If MAX-ITERA-
TIONS=0, then MAX-ITERATIONS=1000 is used if SOLVER=ITERATIVE or MULTIGRID
and MAX-ITERATIONS=200 if SOLVER=3D-ITERATIVE. {MAX-ITERATIONS $ 0}
EPSIA [1.0E-6]
EPSIB [1.0E-4]
EPSII [1.0E-8]
Convergence tolerances for the iterative solver, see the Theory and Modeling Guide for
further details. Smaller tolerances than the defaults may be required for contact analysis.
Note: For the 3D-iterative solver, only EPSIB is used in the convergence checking.
SHIFT [1.0]
Factor used to make preconditioning more effective within the iterative solver. Values of
SHIFT > 1.0 make the preconditioning matrix more diagonally dominant. (Not used for the
3D-iterative solver.)
NVEC
<not currently used>
Note: The shift factor SHIFT can be effective with an ill-conditioned stiffness matrix, such as
may be encountered with a shell structure, which is much stiffer in membrane action
than in bending action. A typical value of SHIFT = 1.02 has proved beneficial in this
situation.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SOLVER
Lists the type of SOLVER (all types available as described in the MASTER command,
SOLVER parameter) enabled, and gives the corresponding control parameters, if any.
SOLVER ITERATIVE
PPROCESS NPROC MINEL MAXEL
PPROCESS specifies control data for parallel processing solutions. It allows for the splitting
up of element groups into smaller sub-groups, i.e., the model is partitioned for distributed
solution.
NPROC [0]
Number of processors used. Equivalently, the number of subgroups generated for each
element group. NPROC = 0 indicates single processor solution (equivalent to NPROC = 1), in
which case this command has no effect - EGCONTROL may be used to effect group splitting
in this case.
MINEL [0]
Each element group with MINEL or more elements can be split into subgroups. Element
groups with fewer than MINEL elements are not split. (MINEL = 0 is equivalent to MINEL =
10 " NPROC).
MAXEL [999999]
Each element group (with MINEL or more elements) is split into I " NPROC subgroups, where
the multiplier I is chosen so that each subgroup contains no more than MAXEL elements.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PPROCESS
Lists the current parallel processing control data.
PPROCESS
Sec. 5.4 Solver details
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE MAX-ITERATIONS EPSIA EPSIB EPSII SHIFT
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE defines control data for the iterative solution of the matrix system
of equilibrium equations for heat transfer analysis. To enable the use of the iterative solver,
TMC-CONTROL SOLVER = ITERATIVE must be specified.
MAX-ITERATIONS [1000]
The maximum permitted number of iterations for the iterative solver to converge.
EPSIA [1.0E-6]
EPSIB [1.0E-4]
EPSII [1.0E-8]
Convergence tolerances for the iterative solver.
SHIFT [1.0]
Factor used to make preconditioning more effective within the iterative solver. Values of
SHIFT > 1.0 make the preconditioning matrix more diagonally dominant.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TMC-SOLVER
Lists the type of TMC-SOLVER (iterative) enabled, and gives the corresponding
control parameters, if any.
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE
Sec. 5.5 Automatic control
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT POINT DOF DISPLACEMENT ALPHA
DISPMAX CONTINUE RPRINT TYPE
NODE SUBDIVISIONS
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT defines parameters for the automatic load-displace-
ment control (LDC) procedure, whereby the level of externally applied load is continually
adjusted to solve for the nonlinear equilibrium path of a model until, or beyond, collapse.
The LDC method can be used only for static analysis in which there are no thermal effects or
time-dependent material models (i.e., creep or strain rate dependent materials.)
The automatic load-displacement control procedure is enabled when MASTER AUTOMATIC
= LDC is specified. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for further details on the operation of
the LDC method.)
POINT
The label number of a geometry point at which a displacement for the first solution step is
prescribed. Note that a node will have to be defined at the point location, otherwise an error
message will result whenever the model is validated.
DOF
Indicates which degree of freedom at the requested point or node has the prescribed value
given by parameter DISPLACEMENT. DOF refers to the degree of freedom system (global or
skew) at the point or node. {1/2/3/4/5/6}
1 or X-translation
2 or Y-translation
3 or Z-translation
4 or X-rotation
5 or Y-rotation
6 or Z-rotation
DISPLACEMENT
The prescribed displacement for the degree of freedom DOF at the point or node for the first
solution step. The value input influences the establishment of successive equilibrium
positions using the LDC method. In particular, the sign (positive/negative) of the value often
plays a critical role. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for further details).
ALPHA [3.0]
Factor used to limit the maximum incremental displacement during a solution step. If the
incremented displacements exceed 100 x ALPHA times the displacements in the first time
step, the current time step will be repeated with a reduced load factor.
DISPMAX
The maximum (absolute magnitude) of the displacement for degree of freedom DOF at the
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT
point or node which is allowed during analysis. ADINA stops if DISPMAX is exceeded when
the LDC method is employed. {> 0.0}
CONTINUE [NO]
Determines whether or not the solution is terminated when the first critical point on the
equilibrium path is reached. {YES/NO}
RPRINT [NO]
Determines whether or not the reference load vector corresponding to all mechanical loads is
printed during analysis. {YES/NO}
TYPE [POINT]
Selects the type of entity (point or node) indicating the location of the controlling displace-
ment. {POINT/NODE}
NODE
The label number of a node at which a displacement for the first solution step is prescribed.
SUBDIVISIONS [10]
Number of subdivisions
Note: The LDC method terminates normally when one of the following conditions is met:
The maximum allowed displacement DISPMAX has been attained.
The first critical point on the equilibrium path has been reached and (CONTINUE = NO).
The requested time step sequence has been completed.
The number of subdivisions has been reached without convergence.
Note: The LDC method cannot be used in conjunction with the following analysis types or
features:
Dynamic analysis
Linearized buckling analysis
Time-dependent material models (creep, strain rate dependent)
Analysis including temperature effects
User-supplied or pipe internal pressure loading
Auxiliary commands
LIST AUTOMATIC
Lists the settings for automatic incrementation.
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING MAXSUBD ACCURACY DISTOL DTMAX
RESTORE RESPS RESFAC DIVFAC
LSMASSF
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING controls the automatic time-stepping procedure, whereby
timesteps are subdivided in the event of convergence failure within a prescribed number of
equilibrium iterations. See Section 7.2.1 of the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.
The automatic time-stepping procedure is enabled when MASTER AUTOMATIC = ATS is
specified. When enabled, this procedure will cause ADINA to subdivide the time step when
no iteration convergence is reached in the solution (see commands ITERATION and
TOLERANCES ). This procedure is applicable for nonlinear static and implicit transient
analysis.
MAXSUBD [10]
The maximum permitted subdivision of any given time step, i.e., for a time step of magnitude
!t, the algorithm will not attempt to subdivide below a time step of magnitude (!t/2
MAXSUBD
).
ACCURACY
DISTOL [0.001]
Maximum allowed displacement difference, used in accuracy checking (i.e., when
ACCURACY = YES).
DTMAX [3.0]
A factor that limits the maximum time step that can be attained during analysis. If the user-
specified time step is !t, then the ATS procedure will not use a time step larger than
(DTMAX " !t). This option can only be used if the ATS setting is to return to the previous
time step before division (RESTORE=YES). {# 1.0}
Note:
1. This option is only used in static analysis. It cannot be used in a dynamic analysis or if
low speed dynamics is used (RESPS=YES).
2. This option is not used if more than one time step block has been specified (see
TIMESTEP ).
RESTORE [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates whether the original time step, attempted before ATS subdivision occurred, will be
used again for the next time step after convergence.
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING
NO The ATS method will continue to use the reduced (subdivided)
time step which gave convergence.
YES The ATS method will use the time step which was current prior to
subdivision.
AUTOMATIC The choice of time step restoration is made by ADINA dependent on
other problem characteristics. Currently, RESTORE = YES is the
automatic choice for contact problems.
ORIGINAL The ATS method will use a time step size such that the time step will
match the original next time step specified by the user.
RESPS [NO]
Indicates whether or not the low-speed dynamics option is to be used. Applicable only for
nonlinear statics analysis.{NO/YES}
RESFAC [1.0E-4]
Low-speed dynamics smoothing factor, used when RESPS = YES.
DIVFAC [2.0]
Specifies the division factor used to calculate time step subincrements.
LSMASSF [1.0]
Low-speed dynamics inertia factor used when RESPS=YES. {0.0 $ LSMASSF $ 1.0}
Auxiliary commands
LIST AUTOMATIC
Lists the settings for automatic incrementation.
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION NSTEPS MAXITE MAXDISPF
STABF LSDAMPF CTDAMPF
LSMASSF
Controls the total-load-application (TLA) procedure. The TLA procedure is used when
AUTOMATIC = TLA or TLA-S is specified in the MASTER command.
The TLA procedure is useful for a nonlinear static analysis where the user does not need to
explicitly specify the time step sequence. The program uses a certain number of time steps (50
by default) and automatically increases or reduces the next incremental load level depending
on how well the solution converges in the current step. In addition, stabilization options are
applied when TLA-S (TLA with stabilization) is selected.
When the TLA procedure is used, the program uses the following:
- 50 time steps of step size 0.2 each are used
- the ATS procedure is used with maximum permitted subdivision for any given step
MAXSUBD = 64 (see AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING command)
- maximum number of equilibrium iterations is 30
- line search is used
- maximum incremental displacement in each iteration is limited to 5% of largest model length
When TLA-S is selected, the program uses the following in addition to all the above TLA
settings:
- stiffness matrix stabilization factor of 1.0e-10 is used
- low-speed dynamics damping factor of 1.0e-4 is used
- contact damping (automatically calculated by the program) is used
The default values used by TLA and TLA-S that may be overridden are specified in the
following parameters.
NSTEPS [50]
Specifies the number of time steps to use for the solution. The step size is automatically
adjusted to obtain a total time of 10.0. {> 0}
MAXITE [30]
Specifies the maximum number of equilibrium iterations allowed to achieve convergence in
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION
any time step (subdivided or accelerated). {1 % MAXITE % 999}
MAXDISPF [0.05]
Specifies the maximum displacement factor. The maximum incremental displacement allowed in
any iteration is equal to MAXDISPF * (maximum model dimension) {$ 0.0}
The default values used by TLA-S that may be overridden are specified in the following
parameters.
STABF [1.0e-10]
Specifies the stiffness matrix stabilization factor. If STABF = 0.0, then the stiffness matrix
stabilization feature is not used. {$ 0.0}
LSDAMPF [1.0e-4]
Specifies the low-speed dynamics damping factor. If LSDAMPF = 0.0, then the low-speed
dynamics option is not used. {$ 0.0}
CTDAMPF [1.0e-3]
Specifies the contact damping factor. The amount of contact damping used in the solution is
equal to CTDAMPF * (damping calculated by the program). If CTDAMPF = 0.0, then contact
damping is not used. {$ 0.0}
LSMASSF [1.0]
Low-speed dynamics inertia factor. {0.0 % LSMASSF % 1.0}
Sec. 5.6 Time dependence
TIMESTEP NAME
nstep
i
' '' ''t
i
TIMESTEP defines a time step sequence which controls the time/load-step incrementation
during analysis. The sequence is defined as a number of periods for which a given number of
constant time steps is specified. The currently active time step sequence is set to that named
by the TIMESTEP command.
NAME [DEFAULT]
Identifying time step sequence name. If the name of an existing time step sequence is given,
then the previous sequence definition is appended to.
nstep
i
Number of steps to be taken in the i
th
time step sequence period.
' '' ''t
i
{'t
i
> 0}
Constant time step magnitude, in time units, for the i
th
time step sequence period.
Note: A database is initialized with a time step sequence named DEFAULT which initially
specifies a single time step of magnitude 1.0 time units.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TIMESTEP NAME
Lists a given time step sequence. If no name is specified, then a list of all defined time
step sequence names is given.
DELETE TIMESTEP NAME
Deletes a given time step sequence.
SET TIMESTEP NAME
Sets the currently active time step sequence, i.e., that which will be passed to the analysis
program.
SHOW TIMESTEP
Lists the currently active time step sequence.
TIMESTEP
TIMEFUNCTION NAME IFLIB FPAR1 FPAR2 FPAR3 FPAR4 FPAR5 FPAR6
time
i
value
i
TIMEFUNCTION defines a timefunction, which may be referenced, e.g., by an applied load.
The timefunction curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (time
i
, value
i
),
and may be multiplied by one of a set of modifying functions.
NAME [(current highest TIMEFUNCTION label number) + 1]
Label number of the timefunction to be defined. If the label number of an existing
timefunction is given, then the previous curve definition is overwritten.
IFLIB [1]
Indicator for the library modifying function, which multiplies the input timefunction curve
values.
1 A constant multiplier equal to 1.0, i.e., the input timefunction is unmodified;
f t f t . / + . /
*
2 A sinusoidal multiplier;
f t f t t . / + . /, - . /
*
sin 0 1
3 A short circuit multiplier, type 1;
f t f t a b t . / + . /, - , 2 . / . /
*
exp 3
4 A short circuit multiplier, type 2;
f t f t I t t . / + . /, , , , 2 - . / - 2 . /, 2 . / . /
4
5
6
7
8
9
*
sin exp sin
:
;
0 1 ) 3 1 )
0
4
2
where f
*
(t) is interpolated from the input timefunction curve given by data points
(time
i
, value
i
), and the resulting function f(t) is that used by ADINA.
IFLIB = 3,4 may be used to model the electromagnetic load due to a short circuit current.
FPAR1, ... , FPAR6
Modifying function parameters:
TIMEFUNCTION
Sec. 5.7 Iteration
IFLIB = 2: [FPAR1 = 0.0, FPAR2 = 0.0]
FPAR1 = Angular frequency, 0, in degrees/(unit time).
FPAR2 = Phase angle, 1, in degrees.
IFLIB = 3: [FPAR1 = 0.0, FPAR2 = 0.0, FPAR3 = 1.0]
FPAR1 = Constant a.
FPAR2 = Constant b.
FPAR3 = Constant 3, in time units.
IFLIB = 4: [FPAR5 = 1.0, FPAR6 = 4; ;; ;; " "" ""10
-7
]
FPAR1 = RMS of short circuit current, I.
FPAR2 = Angular frequency, 0, in degrees/(unit time).
FPAR3 = Phase angle, 1, in degrees.
FPAR4 = Impedance angle, ), in degrees.
FPAR5 = Time constant, 3, in time units.
FPAR6 = Magnetic permeability, :
0
. (Volt.second / meter.Ampere).
time
i
Time at data point i.
value
i
Value at time time
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TIMEFUNCTION FIRST LAST
DELETE TIMEFUNCTION FIRST LAST
TIMEFUNCTION
ITERATION METHOD LINE-SEARCH MAX-ITERATIONS PRINTOUT
PLASTIC-ALGORITHM
ITERATION selects the equilibrium iteration scheme to be employed for a non-linear ADINA
analysis.
METHOD [FULL-NEWTON]
Selects one of the following iteration schemes (see the Theory and Modeling Guide for a
discussion of iteration schemes).
MODIFIED-NEWTON Modified Newton iteration method.
BFGS BFGS (Broyden-Fletcher-Goldfarb-Shanno) matrix update method
with line-searches.
FULL-NEWTON Full Newton iteration method.
LINE-SEARCH [DEFAULT]
Flags the use of line searches within the iteration scheme. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
DEFAULT = NO METHOD = MODIFIED-NEWTON/FULL-NEWTON
YES METHOD = BFGS
MAX-ITERATIONS [15]
Specifies the maximum number of iterations within a time step. ADINA will terminate execu-
tion if this maximum number is reached without achieving convergence, unless one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
(a) The automatic time-stepping method has been enabled ( MASTER AUTOMATIC =
ATS), whereby the time step is subdivided a given number of times to try to reach
convergence.
(b) The load-displacement control method has been enabled ( MASTER AUTOMATIC =
LDC), whereby ADINA will automatically restart from the last step with established
equilibrium, using different constraint conditions. (A maximum of 10 such restarts will
be attempted per step.)
{1 % MAX - ITERATIONS % 999}
PRINTOUT [LAST]
Controls the printout of incremental energy, norms of unbalanced forces and moments, etc.,
during equilibrium iteration.
ITERATION
Sec. 5.7 Iteration
NONE No printout.
LAST Printout for last iteration of step.
ALL Printout of intermediate values for each iteration.
Note: For the modified Newton and the BFGS methods of equilibrium iteration,
STIFFNESS-STEPS and EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS may be used to restrict the reformation
of the stiffness matrix and the equilibrium iteration to only be carried out at specific
solution steps. Otherwise, the stiffness matrix reformation and equilibrium iteration
are carried out at every step.
Note: For the full Newton iteration method, equilibrium iteration and stiffness matrix reforma-
tion are always carried out at each solution step, and input to STIFF-
NESS-STEPS, EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS is effectively ignored.
Note: Full Newton iteration, without line-searches, will be used, regardless of the choice
made by this command, for the following situation: the automatic load-displacement
control method (see commands MASTER, AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT )
has been selected.
PLASTIC-ALGORITHM [1]
This flag sets the algorithm used in plasticity.
1 Original algorithm
2 Modified algorithm
The PLASTIC-ALGORITHM flag is used under the following conditions:
Implicit time integration (static or dynamic), and
1) METHOD=FULL-NEWTON (with or without line searches), and
2) 2D solid elements, 3D solid elements or shell elements under the following conditions:
- Large displacement, large strain kinematics
- 2D solid elements: ULJ formulation, material PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
- 3D solid elements: ULJ formulation, material PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
- 3D solid elements: ULH formulation, materials MROZ-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-BILINEAR,
ITERATION
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
- Shell elements: ULJ formulation, material PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
- Shell elements: ULH formulation, materials PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-
MULTILINEAR
For a given load step size, convergence is affected by PLASTIC-ALGORITHM. If the
iterations do not converge with PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=1 because the Jacobian determinant
in the elements becomes non-positive, switching to PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 can some-
times obtain convergence. Hence PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 allows larger load steps than
PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=1, in general.
But if the iterations already converge with PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=1, switching to PLAS-
TIC-ALGORITHM=2 slows down convergence.
The converged solution is not affected by the choice of PLASTIC-ALGORITHM.
The typical use of PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 is in metal forming. In metal forming, the metal
being formed is typically very thin and modeled either with shell elements or with thin 3D
elements. PLASTIC-ALGORITHM=2 allows large load steps, and hence fewer load steps, to
obtain the solution.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ITERATION
Lists the current values of the ITERATION command parameters.
Sec. 5.7 Iteration
STIFFNESS-STEPS
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
STIFFNESS-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which the effective stiffness matrix is
reformed by ADINA. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step blocks, each of
which determines a given frequency of stiffness matrix reformation over a given range of
timesteps.
block
i
The time step block number. The block number must be in the range 1 % block
i
% 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined.
first
i
The initial time step number for the time step block block
i
. {$ 1, $ last
i-1
}
last
i
The final time step number for the time step block block
i
. {$ first
i
}
increment
i
The time step increment for the time step block block
i
. {$ 1}
For each time step block, ADINA will re-form the effective stiffness matrix for timesteps
first
i
, first
i
+ increment
i
, first
i
+ (2 " increment
i
), ...
and so on until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to last
i
.
Note that the stiffness matrix will be reformed at time step last
i
only if (last
i
- first
i
) is an
integer multiple of increment
i
.
The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies
last
i
$ first
i
(i = 1, ..., 10)
increment
i
$ 1
and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.,
first
i
$ last
i
(i = 2, ..., 10)
If these input conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input
will not be accepted.
STIFFNESS-STEPS
Furthermore, it is required that the highest value for last
i
(for the highest block number) be
greater than or equal to the total number of solution timesteps (see TIMESTEP ). If not, then
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error condition.
Note: Command is only applicable when modified Newton or BFGS iterations method are
used.
Auxiliary commands
LIST STIFFNESS-STEPS
DELETE STIFFNESS-STEPS
STIFFNESS-STEPS
Sec. 5.7 Iteration
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which equilibrium iterations are
performed when the modified-Newton or BFGS iteration method is used. This is achieved by
specifying a sequence of time step blocks, each of which determines a given frequency of
equilibrium iteration over a given range of timesteps.
block
i
i
% 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined.
first
i
i
. {$ 1; $ last
i-1
}
last
i
i
. {$ first
i
}
increment
i
i
. {$ 1}
For each time step block, ADINA will carry out equilibrium iteration for time steps
first
i
, first
i
+ increment
i
, first
i
+ (2 " increment
i
), ...
i
.
Note that equilibrium iteration will be performed at time step last
i
only if (last
i
- first
i
) is an
integer multiple of increment
i
.
last
i
$ first
i
(i = 1, ..., 10)
increment
i
$ 1
and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.,
first
i
$ last
i
(i = 2, ..., 10)
If these input conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input
will not be accepted.
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS
DELETE EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS
Sec. 5.8 Tolerances
TMC-ITERATION METHOD MAX-ITERATIONS STEP-REFORMING
STEP-EQUILIBRIUM RTOL TMCTOL LINE-SEARCH
TMC-ITERATION selects the equilibrium iteration scheme to be employed for a heat transfer
analysis.
METHOD [MODIFIED-NEWTON]
Selects the iteration scheme. {MODIFIED-NEWTON /FULL-NEWTON}
MODIFIED-NEWTON Modified Newton iteration.
FULL-NEWTON Full Newton iteration.
MAX-ITERATIONS [15]
The maximum number of iterations within a time step.
STEP-REFORMING [1]
The maximum number of time steps between reforming conductivity, heat capacity,
convection and radiation matrices.
STEP-EQUILIBRIUM [1]
The maximum number of time steps between equilibrium iterations.
Note: The FULL-NEWTON iteration scheme can be more effective when temperature-
dependent material properties are used, or RADIATION elements are present.
RTOL [0.001]
RTOL is the temperature convergence tolerance.
TMCTOL [0.0]
TMC is the iteration tolerance. The default for TMCTOL is RTOL: this means that if
TMCTOL= 0.0, TMCTOL=RTOL.
LINE-SEARCH [NO]
Flags the use of line searches within the iteration scheme. {NO/YES}
Auxiliary commands
LIST TMC-ITERATION
TMC-ITERATION
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC COINCIDENCE EPSILON SHELL-ANGLE
BOLT-ANGLE PHI-ANGLE EMF-DMIN
NCTOL-TYPE
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC specifies certain geometric tolerances used during the construc-
tion of a model.
COINCIDENCE [1.0E-5]
Tolerance used when comparing two locations to see if they are coincident. The default
value is usually sufficient for most models, but may be reduced, e.g, if distinct locations are
extremely close in comparison to the overall dimension of the model.
EPSILON [1.0E-9]
A small value representing zero in many geometry property tests. This value is not normally
required to be changed from the default value.
SHELL-ANGLE [5.0]
A small angular measure, in degrees, used in comparing normal vectors to determine the
number of degrees of freedom to be automatically assigned to a shell midsurface node at
which shell elements meet.
BOLT-ANGLE [0.5]
A small angular measure, in degrees, used in comparing shell element normal vectors to
determine whether any impinging beam-shaft elements give rise to additional constraints
relating the rotational degree of freedom normal to the shell surface to adjacent translational
degrees of freedom. If a shell element normal differs from the average normal at a node by
more than BOLT-ANGLE degrees, no additional bolt constraints will be generated.
PHI-ANGLE [30]
This parameter is obsolete, but retained for backwards compatibility.
Use the PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION command, PHI-ANGLE parameter instead.
EMF-DMIN [0.001]
Specifies minmum distance between two electric conductors. If the distance between two
conducting nodes in the model is less than EMF-DMIN, EMF-DMIN will be used.
NCTOL-TYPE [RELATIVE-LOCAL]
Option to determine the tolerance for node coincidence checking. {RELATIVE-LOCAL/
RELATIVE-GLOBAL/ ABSOLUTE}
A node at (XB,YB,ZB) is close to a geometric location (XA,YA,ZA) if
|XB-XA| % COINCIDENCE * XLEN
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC
Sec. 5.8 Tolerances
|YB-YA| % COINCIDENCE * YLEN
|ZB-ZA| % COINCIDENCE * ZLEN
where, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are decided by the following:
RELATIVE-LOCAL (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the
current geometry.
RELATIVE-GLOBAL (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the
model.
ABSOLUTE (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are (1.0, 1.0, 1.0).
Auxiliary commands
LIST TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC
Lists the tolerance data for the model geometry.
TOLERANCES ITERATION CONVERGENCE ETOL RTOL RNORM
RMNORM RCTOL DTOL DNORM DMNORM
STOL RCONSM ENLSTH LSLOWER LSUPPER
MAXDISP
TOLERANCES ITERATION specifies the convergence criteria and corresponding tolerances
controlling the equilibrium iteration scheme within the analysis program ADINA.
CONVERGENCE [ENERGY]
Selects the convergence criterion to be used, and thereby which of the other parameters are
considered.
ENERGY Energy convergence (ETOL, STOL).
EF Energy and force (moment) convergence (ETOL, RTOL, RNORM,
RMNORM, STOL).
ED Energy and displacement (translation, rotation) convergence (ETOL,
DTOL, DNORM, DMNORM, STOL).
FORCE Force (moment) convergence (RTOL, RNORM, RMNORM, STOL).
DISPLACEMENT Displacement (translation, rotation) convergence (DTOL, DNORM,
DMNORM, STOL).
In addition, when contact is present, the RCTOL and RCONSM parameters are also used.
ETOL [0.0]
Relative energy tolerance. ETOL=0.0 means ETOL=1.0E-6 when the load-displacement
control method (MASTER AUTOMATIC=LDC) is used and ETOL=1.0E-3 otherwise.
RTOL [0.01]
Relative force and moment tolerance.
RNORM [0.0]
Reference force. RNORM is automatically calculated by the program if RNORM=0.0.
RMNORM [0.0]
Reference moment. RMNORM is automatically calculated by the program if RMNORM=0.0.
RCTOL [0.05]
Relative contact force tolerance.
TOLERANCES ITERATION
Sec. 5.8 Tolerances
DTOL [0.01]
Relative displacement (translation, rotation) tolerance.
DNORM [0.0]
Reference translation. DNORM is automatically calculated by the program if DNORM=0.0.
DMNORM [0.0]
Reference rotation. DMNORM is automatically calculated by the program if DMNORM=0.0.
STOL [0.5]
Line search convergence tolerance.
RCONSM [0.01]
Reference contact force.
ENLSTH [0.0]
Line search energy threshold. This parameter is only used if line search is activated (e.g.,
when ITERATION LINE-SEARCH=YES is specified). During each equilibrium iteration, if the
unbalanced energy is less than ENLSTH, no line search will be performed. {>= 0.0}
Notes:
1. RNORM and RMNORM cannot both be zero.
2. DNORM and DMNORM cannot both be zero.
LSLOWER [1.0e-3]
Lower bound for line search. {0.0 % LSLOWER < 1.0}
LSUPPER [1.0 or 8.0]
Upper bound for line search. If there is contact, the default is 1.0; otherwise, if there is no
contact, the default is 8.0. {LSUPPER $ 1.0}
MAXDISP [0.0]
Specifies the maximum incremental displacement that is allowed in an iteration. This feature is
generally useful for contact analysis where rigid body motion before the bodies come into
contact may result in excessive displacements. A value of 0.0 means there is no limit on
incremental displacements. { $ 0.0 }
Auxiliary commands
LIST TOLERANCES ITERATION
Lists the tolerance data for the iteration scheme within the analysis program ADINA.
TOLERANCES ITERATION
PRINTOUT VOLUME ECHO PRINTDEFAULT INPUT-DATA
OUTPUT DISPLACEMENTS VELOCITIES
ACCELERATIONS IDISP ITEMP ISTRAIN IPIPE
STORAGE LARGE-STRAINS ENERGIES
PRINTOUT controls the output printed by ADINA.
VOLUME [MINIMUM]
Sets the defaults for the remaining parameters of this command.
MAXIMUM The following defaults are set:
ECHO = YES
PRINTDEFAULT = YES
INPUT-DATA = 0
OUTPUT = ALL
DISPLACEMENTS = YES
VELOCITIES = YES
ACCELERATIONS = YES
IDISP = YES
ITEMP = YES
ISTRAIN = YES
IPIPE = YES
MINIMUM The following defaults are set:
ECHO = NO
PRINTDEFAULT = NO
INPUT-DATA = 4
OUTPUT = SELECTED
DISPLACEMENTS = YES
VELOCITIES = YES
ACCELERATIONS = YES
IDISP = NO
ITEMP = NO
ISTRAIN = NO
IPIPE = NO
ECHO [NO]
Determines whether the input data file is echoed at the beginning of the ADINA results file.
{YES/NO}
PRINTOUT
Sec. 5.9 Analysis output
PRINTDEFAULT [NO]
Printing of individual element results is controlled by the data entry print of the element
data commands. This parameter defines the default action for those elements with that data
entry left undefined.
YES Print element results.
NO No element results printed.
STRAINS Element strains are printed in addition to element stresses (only applicable
to certain material models).
INPUT-DATA [4]
Level of printout of input mesh data.
0 Detailed printing of all generated input data.
1 As for 0, except equation numbers are not printed.
2 As for 0, except nodal data are not printed.
3 As for 0, except equation numbers and nodal data are not printed.
4 No printing of input mesh data.
OUTPUT [SELECTED]
ALL All nodal point solution variables and requested element stresses, via
element data commands, are printed at all solution steps.
SELECTED Results are printed as requested by the parameters of this command in
conjunction with other commands, e.g., PRINT-STEPS, PRINTNODES.
DISPLACEMENTS [YES]
Controls whether or not the program will print displacements (when OUTPUT =
SELECTED). {YES/NO}
VELOCITIES [YES]
Controls whether or not the program will print velocities (when OUTPUT = SELECTED).
{YES/NO}
ACCELERATIONS [YES]
Controls whether or not the program will print accelerations (when OUTPUT = SELECTED).
{YES/NO}
PRINTOUT
IDISP [NO]
Controls whether or not initial displacements, velocities and accelerations (as indicated by
parameters DISPLACEMENTS, VELOCITIES, and ACCELERATIONS) are printed out.
{YES/NO}
ITEMP [NO]
Controls whether or not initial temperatures and temperature gradients are printed out.
{YES/NO}
ISTRAIN [NO]
Controls whether or not initial strains, flexural strains and strain gradients are printed out.
{YES/NO}
IPIPE [NO]
Controls whether or not initial pipe internal pressures are printed out. {YES/NO}
STORAGE [NO]
Controls whether or not storage requirements are printed out. {YES/NO}
LARGE-STRAINS [NONE]
Indicates whether or not extended results for element stresses and strains are to be printed
for large strain analyses. {NONE/PRINT}
ENERGIES [NO]
Indicates whether the energies due to the use of low-speed dynamics option (inertia and
damping), contact damping or assigned stiffness to the normal rotational degree of freedom
of shell nodes are printed. {NO/YES}
Auxiliary commands
LIST PRINTOUT
PRINTOUT
PRINT-STEPS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
PRINT-STEPS controls the output time steps at which results are printed by the analysis
program. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step blocks, each of which
determines a given frequency of time step output over a given range of time steps.
Note that the results printout can be controlled independently for the main structure and any
substructure reuses.
SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure label number]
The label number of the substructure to which the time step block data is assigned.
REUSE [current substructure reuse label number]
The label number of the substructure reuse to which the time step block data is assigned.
block
i
i
% 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined for printout control.
first
i
i
. {$ 1; $ last
i-1
}
last
i
i
. {$ first
i
}
increment
i
i
. {$ 1}
For each time step block, the analysis program will print results for time steps
first
i
, first
i
+ increment
i
, first
i
+ (2 " increment
i
), ...
etc., until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to last
i
.
Note that printout will be given at time step last
i
only if (last
i
- first
i
) is an integer multiple of
increment
i
.
last
i
$ first
i
(i = 1,...,10)
increment
i
$ 1
PRINT-STEPS
and that adjacent blocks do not overlap, i.e.:
first
i
$ last
(i-1)
(i = 2,...,10)
If these conditions are not satisfied, then an error message will be given and the input will not
be accepted.
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST PRINT-STEPS
DELETE PRINT-STEPS
PRINT-STEPS
PORTHOLE VOLUME SAVEDEFAULT FILEUNIT FORMATTED
INPUT-DATA DISPLACEMENTS VELOCITIES ACCELERATIONS
TEMPERATURES MAX-STEPS SHELLVECTORS ELEM-RESULT
PORTHOLE controls the saving, by ADINA, of input data and solution results on the
porthole file for later post-processing by ADINA-PLOT.
VOLUME [MAXIMUM]
Sets defaults for remaining parameters of this command.
MAXIMUM The following defaults are set:
SAVEDEFAULT = YES
INPUT-DATA = 1
DISPLACEMENTS = YES
VELOCITIES = YES
ACCELERATIONS = YES
TEMPERATURES = YES
MINIMUM The following defaults are set:
SAVEDEFAULT = NO
INPUT-DATA = 0
DISPLACEMENTS = NO
VELOCITIES = NO
ACCELERATIONS = NO
TEMPERATURES = NO
SAVEDEFAULT [YES]
Saving of individual element results is controlled by the data entry save of the element data
commands. This parameter defines the default action for those elements with that data entry
left undefined. {YES/NO}
FILEUNIT
This parameter is no longer used.
FORMATTED [NO]
Controls whether the porthole file records are formatted or written in unformatted binary.
{YES/NO}
INPUT-DATA
This parameter is obsolete and should not be used. This parameter is used only in restart
analysis.
PORTHOLE
0 Save only the master control information. Note that when INPUT-DATA = 0, the
resulting porthole file cannot be read by ADINA-PLOT.
1 Save all input data on the porthole.
DISPLACEMENTS [YES]
Controls whether or not initial and calculated displacements are saved. {YES/NO}
VELOCITIES [YES]
Controls whether or not initial and calculated velocities are saved. {YES/NO}
ACCELERATIONS [YES]
Controls whether or not initial and calculated accelerations are saved. {YES/NO}
TEMPERATURES [YES]
Controls whether or not temperatures are saved on the porthole file. {YES/NO}
Note: TEMPERATURES is also used to control the saving of pipe internal pressures.
MAX-STEPS [0]
Indicates the maximum number of time-step results saved in each porthole file. MAX-
STEPS=0 means no limit on the number of steps that can be saved on the porthole file, i.e.,
only one porthole file is created.
Notes:
1. If MAX-STEPS > 0, multiple porthole file may be created with filenames jobname_1.por,
jobname_2.por, etc.
2. MAX-STEPS is also used to control the maximum number of time-step results saved in
each universal file.
SHELLVECTORS [NO]
Indicates whether or not shell element node director vectors are to be saved on the porthole
file. Note this only refers to those director vectors calculated in large displacement analysis
during the solution response, the initial shell element node director vectors will still be saved
on the porthole file. These vectors are required to plot shell elements with a top-bottom
depiction, but can require considerable storage for large shell models with many output steps.
When SHELLVECTORS=NORMALS, only the normals of the shell direction vectors are saved
in the porthole file. {YES/NO/NORMALS}
PORTHOLE
Sec. 5.9 Analysis output PORTHOLE
ELEM-RESULT [DEF-GRAD]
Controls whether deformation gradients, stretches or strains are saved in the porthole file for
2-D and 3-D solid elements with certain material models/kinematic formulations.
{DEF-GRAD/STRETCH}
The following table lists the material models and kinematic formulations affected by this
parameter:
Material model Output when ELEM-RESULT=STRETCH
ARRUDA-BOYCE Green-Lagrange strains

CAM-CLAY(*) Stretches
CREEP (*) Stretches
CREEP-VARIABLE (*) Stretches
DRUCKER-PRAGER (*) Stretches
GURSON (*) Stretches
HYPER-FOAM Green-Lagrange strains
MOONEY-RIVLIN Green-Lagrange strains
MROZ-BILINEAR (*) Stretches
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP (*) Stretches
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-BILINEAR (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-CREEP (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE (*) Stretches
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR (*) Stretches
OGDEN Green-Lagrange strains
USER-SUPPLIED (+) Green-Lagrange strains
USER-SUPPLIED (*) Stretches
THERMO-PLASTIC (*) Stretches
VISCOELASTIC (*) Stretches
* = KINEMATICS DISP=LARGE STRAINS = LARGE

+ = KINEMATICS DISP=LARGE STRAINS = SMALL
When ELEM-RESULT = DEF-GRAD, then all of the material models/kinematic formulations
in the above table output deformation gradients.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PORTHOLE
Lists the current settings for the PORTHOLE parameters.
NODESAVE-STEPS ELEMSAVE
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
NODESAVE-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which nodal results are saved on the
porthole file by the analysis program. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step
blocks, each of which determines a given frequency of time step output over a given range
of time steps.
ELEMSAVE [NO]
Indicates whether element results are also saved using the same time step blocks. {NO/
COPY/OVERWRITE}
NO Time step blocks for saving element results are specified indepen-
dently in ELEMSAVE-STEPS command.
COPY Time step blocks specified in this command are copied to the
ELEMSAVE-STEPS command if no time step block are specified in that
command.
OVERWRITE Time step blocks specified in this command will overwrite any time step
blocks in the ELEMSAVE-STEPS command.
block
i
i
% 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined for porthole control.
first
i
i
. {$ 1; $ last
(i-1)
}
last
i
i
. {$ first
i
}
increment
i
i
. {$ 1}
For each time step block, the analysis program will save nodal results for timesteps
first
i
, first
i
+ increment
i
, first
i
+(2 " increment
i
), ...
i
.
NODESAVE-STEPS
Note that nodal results will be saved at time step last
i
only if (last
i
- first
i
) is an integer multiple
of increment
i
.
last
i
$ first
i
(i = 1,...,10)
increment
i
$ 1
first
i
$ last
(i-1)
(i = 2,...,10)
be accepted.
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST NODESAVE-STEPS
DELETE NODESAVE-STEPS
NODESAVE-STEPS
ELEMSAVE-STEPS NODESAVE
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
ELEMSAVE-STEPS controls the output timesteps at which element results are saved on the
porthole file by the analysis program. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of time step
blocks, each of which determines a given frequency of time step output over a given range
of timesteps.
NODESAVE [NO]
Indicates whether nodal results are also saved using the same time step blocks. {NO/
COPY/OVERWRITE}
NO Time step blocks for saving nodal results are specified independently
in NODESAVE-STEPS command.
COPY Time step blocks specified in this command are copied to the
NODESAVE-STEPS command if no time step block are specified in that
command.
OVERWRITE Time step blocks specified in this command will overwrite any time step
blocks in the NODESAVE-STEPS command.
block
i
i
% 10, i.e., a
maximum of 10 time step blocks can be defined for porthole control.
first
i
i
. Note that first
i
must be greater
than or equal to 1.
last
i
i
. {$ 1; $ last
(i-1)
}
increment
i
i
. {$ 1}
For each time step block, the analysis program will save element results for timesteps:
first
i
, first
i
+ increment
i
, first
i
+(2 " increment
i
), ...
and so on, until the resulting time step number is greater than or equal to last
i
.
ELEMSAVE-STEPS
Note that element results will be saved at time step last
i
only if (last
i
- first
i
)
is an integer multiple of increment
i
.
The time step block data is checked to see that each block satisfies:
last
i
$ first
i
(i = 1,...,10)
increment
i
$ 1
first
i
$ last
(i-1)
(i = 2,...,10)
be accepted.
Furthermore it is required that the highest value for last
i
it will be set to that value, with no resulting error conditions.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ELEMSAVE-STEPS
DELETE ELEMSAVE-STEPS
ELEMSAVE-STEPS
PRINTNODES BLOCKS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
PRINTNODES POINTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
point
i
PRINTNODES LINES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
line
i
PRINTNODES SURFACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
surface
i
PRINTNODES VOLUMES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
volume
i
PRINTNODES EDGES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY
edge
i
PRINTNODES FACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY
face
i
PRINTNODES BODIES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
body
i
PRINTNODES NODESETS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
nodeset
i
PRINTNODES selects nodes for which solution results shall be printed by ADINA. This is
achieved by specifying a sequence of node blocks (sets of node labels) or by reference to a
set of geometry entities to which the nodes are associated, i.e. via mesh generation.
SUBSTRUCTURE [(current substructure label number)]
The label number of the substructure to which the nodal data is assigned.
REUSE [(current substructure reuse label number)]
The label number of the substructure reuse to which the nodal data is assigned.
BODY [(currently active BODY)]
A solid geometry body label number.
PRINTNODES
block
i
A node block number.
first
i
The initial node number for the node block block
i
. {! 1; ! last
(i-1)
}
last
i
The final node number for the node block block
i
. {! first
i
}
increment
i
The node increment for the node block block
i
. {! 1}
point
i
A point label number.
line
i
A line label number.
surface
i
A surface label number.
volume
i
A volume label number.
edge
i
An edge label number; an edge of a solid body BODY.
face
i
A face label number; a face of a solid body BODY.
body
i
A body label number.
nodeset
i
A node set label number.
Auxilliary Commands
LIST PRINTNODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES / EDGES /
FACES / BODIES.
DELETE PRINTNODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES /
EDGES / FACES / BODIES.
PRINTNODES
CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES TYPE
name
i
body
i
This command is used to select nodes for output of contact results.
TYPE
The type of entity used for selecting nodes where the contact result is to be output.
{NODE/NODESET/POINT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE}
Note:
If TYPE = NODE or NODESETor POINT , the second column body
i
is ignored.
When TYPE = LINE-EDGE or SURFACE-FACE, if body
i
= 0, this means that the geometry
is a line or a surface.
name
i
Label number of the node for which the contact result is output.
body
i
Label number of the body for name
i
.
CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES
Sec. 5.9 Analysis output REACTION-NODES
REACTION-NODES TYPE
name
i
body
i
This command is used with the REACTIONS parameter in the MASTER command to select
the reaction forces to be printed.
TYPE
The type of entity used for selecting nodes where the reaction force is to be printed.
{NODE/NODESET/POINT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE}
Note:
If TYPE = NODE or NODESET or POINT , the second column body
i
is ignored.
When TYPE = LINE-EDGE or SURFACE-FACE, if body
i
= 0, this means that the geometry
is a line or a surface.
name
i
Label number of the node for which the reaction force is printed.
body
i
Label number of the body for name
i
.
SAVENODES BLOCKS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
block
i
first
i
last
i
increment
i
SAVENODES POINTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
point
i
SAVENODES LINES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
line
i
SAVENODES SURFACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
surface
i
SAVENODES VOLUMES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
volume
i
SAVENODES EDGES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY
edge
i
SAVENODES FACES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE BODY
face
i
SAVENODES BODIES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
body
i
SAVENODES NODESETS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
nodeset
i
SAVENODES selects nodes for which solution results shall be saved by the ADINA on the
porthole file. This is achieved by specifying a sequence of node blocks (set of node labels),
or by reference to a set of geometry entities to which the nodes are associated, i.e. via mesh
generation.
SUBSTRUCTURE [(current substructure label number)]
The label number of the substructure to which the nodal data is assigned.
REUSE [(current substructure reuse label number)]
The label number of the substructure reuse to which the nodal data is assigned.
BODY
A solid geometry body label number.
SAVENODES
block
i
A node block number.
first
i
The initial node number for the node block block
i
. {! 1; ! last
(i-1)
}
last
i
The final node number for the node block block
i
. {! first
i
}
increment
i
The node increment for the node block block
i
. {! 1}
point
i
A point label number.
line
i
A line label number.
surface
i
A surface label number.
volume
i
A volume label number.
edge
i
An edge label number; an edge of solid body BODY.
face
i
A face label number; a face of solid body BODY.
body
i
A body label number.
nodeset
i
A node set label number.
Auxilliary Commands
LIST SAVENODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES / EDGES /
FACES / BODIES.
DELETE SAVENODES BLOCKS / POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / VOLUMES / EDGES
/ FACES / BODIES.
SAVENODES
DISK-STORAGE FACTORIZED-MATRIX GLOBAL-MATRIX
TEMPERATURES TGRADIENTS FORCES
DISPLACEMENTS PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES
FDIRECTIONS NSTEPKM LARGE-STRAINS MEMOPT
DISK-STORAGE indicates auxiliary file storage and input/output control for program ADINA.
FACTORIZED-MATRIX [NONE]
Indicates whether or not the factorized linear effective stiffness matrices are to be saved for
subsequent use in restart analyses. This option provides for improved solution efficiency for
large problems for which the factorization calculations may be skipped for a restart.
NONE No factorized linear stiffness matrices are saved.
SAVE The factorized linear effective stiffness matrices are saved for future
use by a restart of the analysis.
Note that this option of saving the linear factorized stiffness matrices is not allowed in an
eigenvalue solution or when the central-difference method is used. Furthermore, static-to-
dynamic or dynamic-to-static restarts are not allowed.
GLOBAL-MATRIX [NONE]
Indicates whether or not the global, assembled, stiffness and mass matrices are to be saved to
a file. For non-linear analyses the stiffness matrix can be saved at a selected time-step via
parameter NSTEPKM. Only available when SOLVER = SKYLINE in the MASTER command,
and for analyses not involving contact conditions.
NONE The assembled global system matrices are not saved.
SAVE The global stiffness and mass matrices are written to file, in formatted
form.
TEMPERATURES [NONE]
Indicates whether or not nodal temperature data is to be input from a file. Material models
which are temperature dependent require the temperature field to be specified. Prescribed or
initial nodal temperatures may be simply described directly by LOAD TEMPERATURE,
APPLY-LOAD, INITIAL-CONDITION, SET-INITCONDITION, but a more complex tempera-
ture distribution may benefit from being input from file (e.g., created by the heat transfer
analysis program ADINA-T). Note that any nodal temperature data input from file is added to
that already specified directly to the database, if any.
NONE No temperature data is input from file.
DISK-STORAGE
READ Temperatures are read from file. The data records of that file must
contain the solution time and the nodal temperatures at that time. The
solution times for this input case must correspond to the times of the
ADINA analysis given by time TSTART (see MASTER) and increments
thereafter determined by the defined time step sequence.
INTERPOLATE Temperatures are read from file, but unlike the case TEMPERATURES =
READ, the solution times need not correspond to the discrete solution
times of the ADINA analysis as given by TSTART and the time step
sequence linear interpolation is performed to give the nodal tempera-
tures at the ADINA solution times.
TGRADIENTS [NONE]
This parameter acts in the same manner as parameter TEMPERATURES except that
through-thickness temperature gradients for shell mid-surface nodes are considered. Note
that any nodal temperature gradient data input from file is added to that already specified
directly to the database, if any. {NONE/READ/INTERPOLATE}
FORCES [NONE]
This parameter acts in the same manner as parameter TEMPERATURES except that nodal
forces are considered. The number and associated (possibly skew) degree-of-freedom
directions of the force components (with a maximum of 6 components) are specified by
parameter FDIRECTIONS. Note that any nodal force data input from file is added to that
already specified directly to the database, if any. {NONE/READ/INTERPOLATE}
DISPLACEMENTS [NONE]
Indicates whether or not nodal displacements are written to file, e.g., for use by analysis
program ADINA-F, to control a moving boundary in a fluid-structure-interaction analysis.
NONE No displacement vectors are written to file.
WRITE Displacement vectors will be written to file.
PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES [NONE]
This parameter acts in the same manner as parameter TEMPERATURES except that pipe
internal pressures are considered. Note that any nodal pipe internal pressure data input from
file is added to that already specified directly to the database, if any. {NONE/READ /
INTERPOLATE}
FDIRECTIONS [123456]
Indicates which degree-of-freedom directions are to be associated with the nodal force
components input from file (i.e., when parameter FORCES = READ or INTERPOLATE). The
parameter value is an integer number with up to six digits (and no embedded blanks) with the
DISK-STORAGE
associated directions given as follows:
1 X-translation (or a-translation for skew system).
2 Y-translation (or b-translation for skew system).
3 Z-translation (or c-translation for skew system).
4 X-rotation (or a-rotation for skew system).
5 Y-rotation (or b-rotation for skew system).
6 Z-rotation (or c-rotation for skew system).
NSTEPKM [1]
Indicates the time-step at which a non-linear stiffness matrix is written to file when GLOBAL-
MATRIX = SAVE. The stiffness matrix at the start of the indicated step is stored any
automatic sub-increments are not counted, the time-step sequence specified by command
TIMESTEP is all that is considered by this parameter. Thus, NSTEPKM = 1 corresponds to
saving the initial stiffness matrix, corresponding to time TSTART.
LARGE-STRAINS [NONE]
Indicates whether or not extended results of element stresses and strains are to be saved in a
file for large strain analyses, and, if so, whether the file is formatted or binary. {NONE/
FORMATTED/BINARY}
MEMOPT [AUTOMATIC]
Specifies option to write element group data on disk to reduce memory required by the
program. {AUTOMATIC/EG-OUT}
AUTOMATIC Program automatically decides when element group data is
written on disk.
EG-OUT Element group data is written on disk to reduce memory usage.
Auxiliary commands
LIST DISK-STORAGE
DISK-STORAGE
MONITOR NAME DESCRIPTION TYPE VARIABLE STOPFLAG
STOPVALUE OPERATION SET1
Defines a monitor that can be used to print out the minimum or maximum value of a variable
during solution. In addition, there is an option to stop the program when the variable reaches
a specified value. For element-based variables, only variables in 2D and 3D solid element can
be monitored.
NAME [(current highest monitor label number) + 1]
The monitor label. {>0}
DESCRIPTION
Description of this monitor.
TYPE [NONE]
Type of quantity to be monitored. {NONE/ELAV-MODEL/ELAV-GROUP/NODE-MODEL}
NONE Monitoring is not active
ELAV-MODEL Nodal averaged element quantity whole model
ELAV-GROUP Nodal averaged element quantity element group
NODE-MODEL Nodal quantity whole model
VARIABLE
Name of variable just like post-processing.
For element-based variables, the choices are
STRESS-XX STRESS-XY STRESS-XZ
STRESS-YY STRESS-YZ STRESS-ZZ
STRESS-EFFECTIVE STRESS-PRINCIPAL
STRAIN-XX STRAIN-YY STRAIN-ZZ
STRAIN-XY STRAIN-XZ STRAIN-YZ
STRAIN-PRINCIPAL
For nodal-based variables, the choices are:
DISP-X DISP-Y DISP-Z DISP-MAGNITUDE
ROT-X ROT-Y ROT-Z ROT-MAGNITUDE
VEL-X VEL-Y VEL-Z VEL-MAGNITUDE
VEL-TX VEL-TY VEL-TZ VEL-T-MAGNITUDE
ACC-X ACC-Y ACC-Z ACC-MAGNITUDE
ACC-TX ACC-TY ACC-TZ ACC-T-MAGNITUDE
STOPFLAG [NO]
Whether or not to stop analysis based on monitored value. {NO/YES}
MONITOR
Sec. 5.10 Solution monitoring MONITOR
NO No stopping. Variable used for informational use only (printed to .out file)
YES Stop analysis once variable reaches STOPVALUE
STOPVALUE
Value at which to stop analysis, used if STOPFLAG=YES.
OPERATION [AMAX]
Operation for combining data. {AMAX/MAX/MIN}
AMAX Absolute maximum
MAX Maximum
MIN Minimum
SET1 [0]
Additional data to define monitor. Format depends on TYPE. SET1 = element group number if
TYPE= ELAV-GROUP. Otherwise, it is not used.
Note that only the first 8 active monitors will be used.
MONITOR-CONTROL NSTEP-EXPLICIT
Sets control parameters for solution monitoring.
NSTEP-EXPLICIT [100]
Frequency of solution monitoring in explicit analysis. {1 ! NSTEP-EXPLICIT ! 99999}
MONITOR-CONTROL
Chapter 6
Geometry definition
Chap. 6 Geometry definition
SYSTEM NAME TYPE MODE XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN PHI
THETA XSI AX AY AZ BX BY BZ P1 P2 P3 MOVE
SYSTEM defines a local coordinate system. Coordinates of geometry points and nodes,
input via COORDINATES, refer to the current local coordinate system, as defined by the last
preceding use of command SYSTEM. The current system may also be changed via SET
SYSTEM.
NAME [(highest system label number) + 1]
Label number of the local coordinate system. Label number 0 is reserved to identify the
global Cartesian coordinate system, and therefore can be used only with the SET SYSTEM
command you cannot redefine the global system.
Relation to the base
local coordinate system:
XL = z
YL = r cosQ
ZL = r sinQ
Cylindrical coordinates
Relation to the base
local coordinate system:
XL = r cosQsinf
YL = r sinQsinf
ZL = r cosf
Spherical coordinates
f
XL
(r, Q, z)
z
ZL
r
YL
Q
XL
(r, Q, f)
ZL
r
YL
Q
TYPE [CARTESIAN]
The type of local coordinate system. Each type has an underlying base Cartesian system
(XL, YL, ZL). See Figure.
CARTESIAN A local Cartesian system, with axes aligned with the
base system (XL, YL, ZL).
CYLINDRICAL A cylindrical local coordinate system with coordinates (r, <= z).
SPHERICAL A spherical local coordinate system with coordinates (r, <= 1).
SYSTEM
MODE [1]
Selects the method of local coordinate system definition. This controls which parameters
actually define the system other parameters are ignored.
1 System defined by origin and direction vectors (XORIGIN,
YORIGIN, ZORIGIN, AX, AY, AZ, BX, BY, BZ).
2 System defined by origin and Euler angles (XORIGIN,
YORIGIN, ZORIGIN, PHI, THETA, XSI).
3 System defined by three geometry points (P1, P2, P3)
XORIGIN [0.0]
YORIGIN [0.0]
ZORIGIN [0.0]
The global system coordinates of the origin of the local coordinate system.
PHI [0.0]
THETA [0.0]
XSI [0.0]
Euler angles (in degrees) used to define the orientation of the basic system (XL, YL, ZL) with
respect to the global Cartesian coordinate system axes. See Figure. Parameters are used only
when MODE=2.
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global system components of a vector along the XL-direction.
BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Global system components of a vector in the XL-YL plane.
P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of geometry points which define the local coordinate system. P1 is the origin
of the system, the XL axis is taken from P1 to P2. P3, together with P1, P2, then defines the
XL-YL plane. The YL axis is taken orthogonal to the XL axis and points to the same side as
P3 of the line between P1 and P2. The ZL axis is then defined by the right hand rule, i.e.,
using a cross product of unit vectors along the XL,YL axes.
SYSTEM
Sec. 6.1 Coordinate systems SYSTEM
MOVE [YES]
If a local coordinate system is redefined, the geometry points and nodes which refer to this
local system would ordinarily be moved to new global positions, since their coordinates refer
to the previous definition of the local coordinate system. However, when MOVE = NO the
geometry points and nodes can be made to retain their global position, with their local
coordinates modified accordingly. {YES/NO}
Auxiliary commands
SET SYSTEM NAME [0]
Once a local coordinate system has been defined, it may be selected as being the
currently active system by issuing the command SET SYSTEM. The currently active
system is initially the global Cartesian system.
SHOW SYSTEM
Lists the currently active system.
LIST SYSTEM FIRST LAST
DELETE SYSTEM FIRST LAST
Euler Angles
PHI = rotation about X-axis
THETA = rotation about Y'-axis
XSI = rotation about X''-axis
Z
X, X'
Y
PHI
PHI
Z'
X''
X'
Z'
Z''
Y'
THETA
THETA
Y'
X''=XL
Z''
XSI
Y'
XSI
YL
ZL
COORDINATES POINT SYSTEM
(ENTRIES NAME X Y Z SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = global Cartesian (0))
(ENTRIES NAME XL YL ZL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = local Cartesian)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA XL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = local cylindrical)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA PHI SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = local spherical)
n
i
x
i
y
i
z
i
sys
i
COORDINATES POINT defines coordinates for geometry points. The coordinates given refer
to the local system specified by parameter SYSTEM.
SYSTEM [currently active system]
Label number of the required local coordinate system. This specifies the coordinate system
to which any appended data line coordinates refer (and determines which column heading
names are allowed by any ENTRIES data line).
ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. The heading
names depend on the type of local coordinate system specified by parameter SYSTEM.
Note: Less than five entry column headings may be given (e.g., to specify points in a
coordinate plane), with previous values retained for omitted entries, but the
column heading NAME must always be specified.
n
i
Label number for the desired geometry point, input under the column heading NAME.
x
i
[0.0]
y
i
[0.0]
z
i
[0.0]
Coordinate values in local coordinate system sys
i
.
sys
i
[SYSTEM]
Local coordinate system label number. Note sys
i
defaults to the system specified by
parameter SYSTEM, which in turn defaults to the currently active coordinate system.
Auxiliary commands
LIST COORDINATES POINT FIRST LAST SYSTEM GLOBAL
Lists the coordinates of geometry points with label numbers in a given range, and
which are defined in terms of a specified local coordinate system. The coordinates may
be listed in terms of the global Cartesian system (GLOBAL = YES). If no range is speci-
fied, only label numbers will be listed.
COORDINATES POINT
Sec. 6.2 Points
DELETECOORDINATES POINT FIRST LAST SYSTEM
Deletes all geometry points, and their coordinate data, with label numbers in a given
range. Note that a geometry point will not be deleted if it is referenced by a higher order
geometry entity (e.g. it is the end point of a line), or a node or other model entity is
associated with that point.
COORDINATES POINT
LINE STRAIGHT NAME P1 P2
LINE STRAIGHT defines a straight geometry line between two geometry points.
NAME [(current highest geometry line label number) + 1]
Label number of the straight geometry line to be defined.
P1
P2
Label numbers of the geometry points which are the ends of the straight geometry line. The
label numbers P1, P2 must be distinct, but the points may be coincident. A null geometry
line is defined by this command when the end points P1, P2 are coincident, i.e., they have
identical global coordinates. The line has zero length, but may be used in mesh generation,
yielding coincident nodes and zero length element edges.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE FIRST LAST ALL
DELETE LINE STRAIGHT FIRST LAST
COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEWNAME PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end-
points of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.
MOVE LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE
Moves line NAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
moved line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.
P1
P2 (u = 1)
(u = 0)
u
LINE STRAIGHT
Sec. 6.3 Lines
LINE ARC NAME MODE P1 P2 P3 CENTER RADIUS ANGLE CHORD
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE MODIFY-LINES DELETE-POINTS
line
i
P1 (u = 0)
P2 (u = 1)
Center
Angle
Chord
P3 (Mode = 2)
P3 (Mode = 4, 5, 6)
u
Radius
LINE ARC defines a geometry line as a circular arc, or as an arc with varying radius.
NAME [(current highest line label number) + 1]
Label number of the arc geometry line.
MODE [1]
Selects the method of arc geometry line definition. This controls which parameters actually
define the arc, other parameters are ignored. See Figure. {1/2/3/4/5/6/7}
1 Arc defined by start point, end point, and center (P1, P2, CENTER).
2 Arc defined by start point, end point, and intermediate point (P1, P2, P3).
3 Arc defined by start point, center, included angle, and a point defining the
plane of the arc (P1, CENTER, ANGLE, P3).
4 Arc defined by start point, center, chord length, and a point defining the
plane of the arc (P1, CENTER, CHORD, P3).
LINE ARC
5 Arc defined by start point, end point, radius, and a point defining the
plane of the arc (P1, P2, RADIUS, P3).
6 Arc defined by start point, end point, included angle, and a point defining
the plane of the arc (P1, P2, ANGLE, P3).
7 Arc defined by two co-planar, non-parallel straight or extruded lines and
radius (RADIUS).
P1
Label number of the geometry point at the start of the arc geometry line.
P2
Label number of the geometry point at the end of the arc geometry line.
P3
Label number of a geometry point either through which the arc geometry line passes (MODE
= 2), or, together with the start point and end point or center, defines the plane of the arc
(MODE = 3,4,5,6).
Note: P3 = 0 corresponds to the origin of the currently active local coordinate system.
CENTER
Label number of the geometry point at the center of the arc geometry line.
RADIUS
Radius of the arc geometry line.
ANGLE
Included angle of the arc geometry line.
CHORD
Chord length of the arc geometry line.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
If MODE > 1 then a geometry point will be located at the center or end of the arc. This
parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry point coordi-
nates, and use an existing point (YES), rather than generate a new geometry point (with a
new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If PCOINCIDE = YES, this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
coordinates of a location against those of existing geometry points.
LINE ARC
Sec. 6.3 Lines
MODIFY-LINES [YES]
Indicates whether or not lines will be modified in order to connect with the created arc. This
parameter is used only when MODE=7. {YES/NO}
DELETE-POINTS [YES]
Indicates whether or not the original points on lines should be deleted if these points are not
used after lines are modified. This parameter is used only when MODE=7 and MODIFY-
LINES=YES. {YES/NO}
line
i
Label number of the lines to define the arc (MODE=7).
Notes:
All MODES
All geometry points referenced by this command P1, P2, P3, CENTER must be distinct.
Thus the arc is open to define a complete (closed) circle, command LINE CIRCLE should be
used.
MODE = 1
The arc defined is circular only if P1 and P2 are equidistant from CENTER otherwise an arc
is defined in which the radius is linearly interpolated across the included angle.
The points P1, P2, and CENTER must not be collinear. The included angle is always chosen
to be less than 180 degrees thus a different mode should be used if a semi-circle or an arc
subtending an angle greater than 180 degrees is required.
No other geometry points are required; the chord length, included angle, and radius (for a
circular arc) are calculated.
MODE = 2
The arc is defined to pass through the intermediate point P3. A point at the center of the arc
is generated. Parameter CENTER may be used to specify the label number of a newly
generated point it defaults to the next highest label number. If so specified, however,
CENTER must not be the label number of an existing geometry point. Furthermore, if
PCOINCIDE = YES and a geometry point already exists at the arc center the coincidence
check is governed by the tolerance value PTOLERANCE then that geometry point will be
taken to be the center of the arc, ignoring any label specified via parameter CENTER.
LINE ARC
The points P1, P2, and P3 must not be collinear.
MODE = 3
The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, CENTER, and P3, which must not be col-
linear. Furthermore, ANGLE is measured positive in the direction from P1 to P3.
A point at the end of the arc is generated. Parameter P2 may be used to specify the label
number of a newly generated point it defaults to the next highest label number. If so
specified, however, P2 must not be the label number of an existing geometry point. Further-
more, if PCOINCIDE = YES and a geometry point already exists at the end of the arc the
coincidence check is governed by the tolerance value PTOLERANCE then that geometry
point will be taken to be the end of the arc, ignoring any label specified via parameter P2.
MODE = 4
The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, CENTER, and P3, which must not be col-
linear. Furthermore, the end point of the arc is taken to be the same side of the line between
the points P1 and CENTER as the point P3.
A point at the end of the arc is generated see MODE = 3.
MODE = 5
The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, P2 and P3, which must not be collinear. The
center of the arc is taken to be the same side of the line between the points P1 and P2 as the
point P3.
A point at the center of the arc is generated see MODE = 2.
MODE = 6
The plane of the arc is defined by the points P1, P2, and P3, which must not be collinear.
Furthermore, ANGLE is measured positive in the direction from P1 to P3.
A point at the center of the arc is generated see MODE = 2.
Auxiliary commands
DELETELINE ARC FIRST LAST
LINE ARC
Sec. 6.3 Lines LINE ARC
PTOLERANCE
move line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.
LINE CIRCLE NAME MODE P1 P2 P3 CENTER RADIUS PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE
LINE CIRCLE defines a circle geometry line.
P2 (Mode = 3)
P1
P2 (Mode = 2)
P3 (Mode = 1,3)
P3 (Mode = 2)
Center
Radius
Label number of the circle to be defined.
MODE [1]
Selects the method of circle definition. This controls which parameters actually define the
circle, other parameters are ignored. See Figure.
1 Circle defined by center, starting point, and a point defining the plane of
the circle (CENTER, P1, P3).
2 Circle defined through three points (P1, P2, P3).
3 Circle defined by center, radius, and by two points one defining the
pole direction (which intersects the circle at its starting point), and the
other defining the plane of the circle (CENTER, RADIUS, P2, P3).
LINE CIRCLE
Sec. 6.3 Lines
P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of the geometry points which define the circle.
CENTER
Label number of a geometry point at the center of the circle.
RADIUS
The radius of the circle.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
A geometry point will be located at the center (MODE = 2), or the starting point (MODE = 3)
of the circle. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geom-
etry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry
point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Note: A circle is a closed geometry line, a circular arc may be defined by command LINE
ARC.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE CIRCLE FIRST LAST
COPY LINE NAME TRANSFORMATION NEW NAME PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE
Copies line NAME to NEWNAME via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end
Move line name via transformation TRANSFORMATION. The end points of the
LINE CIRCLE
Sec. 6.3 Lines
LINE CURVILINEAR NAME P1 P2 SYSTEM ANGLE
LINE CURVILINEAR defines a geometry line as an interpolated curve in a given local
coordinate system; coordinates of points on the curve are linearly interpolated between two
geometry points.
Label number of the curvilinear geometry line to be defined.
P1
P2
Label numbers of the geometry points which are the ends of the curvilinear geometry line.
P1, P2
Q R
R,Q constant
P1 = P2, ANGLE = THETA
P1, P2
R
f
P1 = P2, ANGLE = PHI
XL
ZL
YL
XL
ZL
YL
R,f constant
XL
ZL
YL
P1
P2
i
j
h = curvilinear
coordinates
u
1 2
( h
2
, h
2
, h
2
)
3
( h
1
, h
1
, h
1
)
2 3 1
LINE CURVILINEAR
SYSTEM [current coordinate system]
The label number of a coordinate system in which the curve is to be interpolated.
ANGLE [THETA]
In the case of a spherical coordinate system, if P1 = P2, a circle will be generated by interpo-
lating through 360
in one of the coordinate angles. This parameter selects which angle to

use. See Figure. {THETA/PHI}
Note: The geometry line will be a circle in the case where P1 = P2 with a cylindrical or
spherical coordinate system. In the case of a Cartesian local system (including the
global system) P1 = P2 is not allowed, and the geometry line will be straight.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE CURVILINEAR FIRST LAST
PTOLERANCE
LINE CURVILINEAR
Sec. 6.3 Lines
KNOTS NAME NKNOTS
i u
i
Defines a vector of knot values to be used for non-uniform rational B-spline definition, see
LINE POLYLINE (TYPE=NURBS).
NAME [(current highest knot vector label )+ 1]
Label number of the knot vector.
NKNOTS
The number of input knot values. { ! 4 }
i
Index of the input knot value. { 1 " i " NKNOTS }
u
i
[0.0]
Knot value for index i.
Auxiliary commands
LIST KNOTS FIRST LAST
DELETE KNOTS FIRST LAST
KNOTS
LINE POLYLINE NAME TYPE DEGREE KNOTS
point
i
tangx
i
tangy
i
tangz
i
(TYPE = BIARC)
point
i
weight
i
(TYPE = NURBS)
point
i
(TYPE = SEGMENTED, QBSPLINE,
CBSPLINE, BEZIER, SPINE)
LINE POLYLINE defines a geometry line as a polyline, i.e., a curve controlled by a series of
geometry points.
SEGMENTED
QBSPLINE
CBSPLINE
BIARC
BEZIER
SPLINE
LINE POLYLINE
Sec. 6.3 Lines
Label number of the polyline geometry line to be defined.
TYPE [SEGMENTED]
Selects the type of curve to be defined.
SEGMENTED The points are connected in sequence by a series of straight line
segments. At least two points must be specified.
QBSPLINE A quadratic B-spline is derived from the control points. Note that
the curve passes through the first and last points but not neces-
sarily through the intervening control points. At least three points
must be specified.
CBSPLINE A cubic B-spline is derived from the control points. Note that the
curve passes through the first and last points but not necessarily
through the intervening control points. At least four points must
be specified.
BIARC Each consecutive pair of points is connected by two circular arcs.
The tangent direction of the curve may be specified at any given
point. The tangent directions are otherwise calculated by the
program. At least three non-collinear points must be specified.
Furthermore, all the control points must lie in the same plane, and
any specified tangent vector must also lie in that plane an error
message is given if either of these conditions is violated.
BEZIER A Bezier curve is derived from the control points. Note that the
curve passes through the first and last points but not necessarily
through the intervening control points. At least three points must
be specified.
NURBS A non-uniform rational B-spline curve is derived from the control
points, weights, and knots.
SPLINE A spline is derivied from the control points. Note that the
curvarture of curve is continous at these points. At least two
points must be specified.
DEGREE
The degree of the B-spline basis functions, must be input for TYPE = NURBS.
LINE POLYLINE
KNOTS
The label number of the knot vector (see command KNOTS). The total number of knots used
in the spline definition must equal (DEGREE+(number of control points)+1).
point
i
Label number of geometry point used to interpolate/control the desired curve. The data lines
are input in the order of the sequence of points.
tangx
i
[0.0]
tangy
i
[0.0]
tangz
i
[0.0]
Vector specifying, with reference to the global Cartesian coordinate system, the tangent
direction to the curve at point point
i
. This vector only influences the shape of the polyline
of type BIARC. Input of tangx
i
= tangy
i
= tangz
i
= 0.0 will result in the program automati-
cally calculating the tangent direction from the slope of the quadratic curve interpolated
through the point and its immediate neighbors in the sequence.
Note: A polyline may be closed be selecting the first and last points in the sequence to refer
to the same geometry point.
Note: For BIARC interpolation a straight line segment may be defined by making the
tangent line at a point pass through its neighbor point.
weight
i
The weight at each control point.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE POLYLINE FIRST LAST
PTOLERANCE
LINE POLYLINE
Sec. 6.3 Lines
LINE SECTION NAME PARENT USTART UEND PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE COUPLED P1 P2
LINE SECTION defines a geometry line to be part of another geometry line.
Label number of the section geometry line to be defined.
PARENT
The line upon which the section line is defined.
USTART [0.0]
The line parameter (0.0 " USTART " 1.0) indicating the starting position on the line
PARENT.
UEND [1.0]
The line parameter (0.0 " UEND " 1.0) indicating the end position on the line PARENT.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
This parameter indicates whether or not to check the location of the section line end points
against existing geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than
generate a new geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
PTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]
COUPLED [YES]
If COUPLED=YES, then the parent line cannot be modified. {YES/NO}
u
p
= 1
u
p
= 0
P1
P2
(u = 0)
u
(u = 1)
u
p
=
USTART
u
p
=
UEND
LINE SECTION
P1 [0]
Label number of the geometry point corresponding to USTART.
P2 [0]
Label number of the geometry point corresponding to UEND.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE SECTION FIRST LAST
PTOLERANCE
LINE SECTION
Sec. 6.3 Lines
LINE COMBINED NAME COUPLED
line
i
LINE COMBINED defines a geometry line as a combination of other geometry lines. The
defining or parent lines must form a connected sequence. The combined line may be
closed, by virtue of having connected first and last line subsegments.
Label number of the combined geometry line to be defined.
COUPLED [YES]
line
i
Label number of a parent geometry line.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE COMBINED FIRST LAST
PTOLERANCE
point of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.
LINE COMBINED L1 // L2
P1
(u = 0)
P3
L1
L2
P2
(u = 1)
u
LINE COMBINED
LINE REVOLVED NAME MODE POINT ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS ALINE
AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE
LINE REVOLVED defines a geometry line (a circular arc) by rotating a geometry point about
an axis.
Label number of the revolved geometry line.
MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to define the geometry line. This
controls which parameters actually define the revolved line, other parameters are ignored.
AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given axis of a coordinate
system. (POINT, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).
LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the
end points of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily
straight, but must be open i.e., have non-coincident end points).
(POINT, ANGLE, ALINE).
POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two
given (non-coincident) geometry points. (POINT, ANGLE, AP1,
AP2).
VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by a position vector and a
direction vector. (POINT, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).
ANGLE
AXIS
POINT (u = 0)
P2 (u = 1)
u
LINE REVOLVED
Sec. 6.3 Lines
POINT
Label number of the initial geometry point to be rotated about the desired axis.
ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). Note ANGLE must be in the range -360 " ANGLE " 360
(with ANGLE = 360 or -360 defining a closed line, i.e., a circle). The sign of the angle is
given by considering the right hand rule i.e., if you curl your fingers around the axis of
revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis, then a positive angle is in the direction of
the curl of the fingers.
SYSTEM [currently active coordinate system]
Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this coordinate system may be used
to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.
AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the base axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
eter SYSTEM, is used as the axis of revolution. {XL/YL/ZL}
ALINE
Label number of a geometry line which defines the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.
AP1, AP2
Label numbers of geometry points which define the axis of revolution. The direction of the
axis is taken from point AP1 to point AP2.
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining a point on the axis of rotation when MODE
= VECTORS.
XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis of rotation when
MODE = VECTORS.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
A geometry point is to be located at the other end of the line from the initial point given by
POINT. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry
point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point
(with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
LINE REVOLVED
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE REVOLVED FIRST LAST
PTOLERANCE
LINE REVOLVED
Sec. 6.3 Lines
LINE EXTRUDED NAME POINT DX DY DZ SYSTEM PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE
LINE EXTRUDED defines a geometry line by displacing a geometry point in a given direction.
Label number of the extruded geometry line.
POINT
Label number of the initial geometry point to be displaced.
DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with reference to the base coordinates (XL, YL, ZL) of
system SYSTEM. Note that this is the actual displacement vector, i.e., it specifies both
magnitude and direction.
Label number of a coordinate system which is referenced by the displacement vector (DX,
DY, DZ).
PCOINCIDE [YES]
A geometry point is to be located at the other end of the line from the initial point given by
POINT. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing geometry
POINT: (u = 0)
P2 (u = 1)
P2 = POINT+ (DX, DY)
u
XL
ZL
YL
LINE EXTRUDED
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE EXTRUDED FIRST LAST
PTOLERANCE
LINE EXTRUDED
Sec. 6.3 Lines
LINE TRANSFORMED NAME PARENT TRANSFORMATION
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NCOPY
line
i
LINE TRANSFORMED defines a geometry line to be a geometrical transformation of another
(existing) geometry line. The transformed geometry line is identified by its label number
NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly defined transformed geometry lines are
identified by the current highest geometry line label number + 1.
Label number of the transformed geometry line.
PARENT
The line which, after transformation, gives the line to be defined.
TRANSFORMATION
Label number of a geometrical transformation, see TRANSFORMATION.
PCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether or not to check the location of the transformed line end
points against existing geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather
than generate a new geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of lines to be generated by the transformation - transformation is
repeated NCOPY times.
line
i
Line label number to be transformed.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE LINE TRANSFORMED FIRST LAST
LINE TRANSFORMED
PTOLERANCE
point of the new line may optionally be checked for point coincidence.
LINE TRANSFORMED
Sec. 6.3 Lines
SPLIT-LINE NAME USPLIT LINE1 LINE2 COUPLED
SPLIT-LINE creates two geometry lines of type SECTION by splitting a given line into two
parts connected at some point on the given line, specified via a parameter value along the
line.
NAME
Label number of the geometry line to be split. Note that this line is not altered by this
command. Two new lines are created coincident with the line NAME.
USPLIT [0.5]
A parameter value indicating the point along line NAME at which splitting takes place. The
parameter value can range between 0.0 (the starting point of line NAME) to 1.0 (the end
point of line NAME), but cannot be 0.0 or 1.0, i.e., the splitting point on the line must
create two new lines of non-zero length.
LINE1 [(highest line label number) + 1]
The label number of the new line created ranging from the starting point of line NAME (u =
0.0) to the splitting point (u = USPLIT). Note that LINE1 must not have been previously
defined.
LINE2 [(highest line label number) + 2]
The label number of the new line created ranging from the splitting point (u = USPLIT) to the
end point (u = 1.0) of line NAME. Note that LINE2 must not have been previously defined.
COUPLED [YES]
LINE 1
LINE 2
u = USPLIT
P1 (u = 0)
P2 (u = 1)
u
SPLIT-LINE
LNTHICKNESS
line
i
thick
i
dthick1
i
dthick2
i
LNTHICKNESS defines line thicknesses (useful for defining axisymmetric shell thicknesses,
for example).
line
i
The line label number.
thick
i
[0.0]
The line thickness.
dthick1
i
[0.0]
The deviation of the thickness at the start point of line
i
.
dthick2
i
[0.0]
The deviation of the thickness at the end point of line
i
.
Note: For a constant thickness only the data line entry thick
i
need be specified. The
thickness may be varied linearly along the line by specifying non-zero deviations
and the ends of the line.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LNTHICKNESS FIRST LAST
DELETE LNTHICKNESS FIRST LAST
P1
P2
t
h
i
c
k
+
d
t
h
i
c
k
2
t
h
i
c
k
+
d
t
h
i
c
k
1
u
LNTHICKNESS
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
SURFACE PATCH NAME EDGE1 EDGE2 EDGE3 EDGE4
SURFACE PATCH defines a geometry surface to be bounded by edges which are specified
geometry lines.
NAME [(current highest geometry surface label number) + 1]
Label number of the geometry surface.
EDGE1 [existing surface edge, if any]
EDGE2
EDGE3
EDGE4
Label numbers of geometry lines comprising edges of the geometry surface. To indicate a
missing edge, either the corresponding parameter is not specified or, equivalently, a zero label
number may be given. See Figure. Note: The edge geometry lines must form a connected
sequence, i.e., their end points must match. Otherwise an error condition results.
At least two edges must be specified. If two adjacent edges are specified, then a unique
connecting edge is searched for to form a triangular surface patch. If two opposite edges
(EDGE1 and EDGE3, or EDGE2 and EDGE4) are specified then the missing two edges are
searched for to form a quadrilateral surface patch, unless the given edges are connected, in
which case a single connecting edge is searched for to yield a triangular surface patch. If
three edges are specified, then a unique connecting edge is searched for, unless the three
edges by virtue of their connection already form a triangular surface patch.
In each case of a missing edge, if no line is found to represent the surface edge, then a
straight line will be created with label number incremented from the current highest line label
number.
EDGE2
EDGE1
EDGE4
EDGE3
P2
P3
P4
P1
u
v
SURFACE PATCH
If more than one line could represent the missing surface edge, then a warning message is
given with no surface created.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SURFACE FIRST LAST
DELETE SURFACE FIRST LAST OPTION
When deleting surfaces, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION = SURFACE), only the
surface itself will be deleted.
SURFACE PATCH
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
SURFACE VERTEX NAME P1 P2 P3 P4 EDGE1 EDGE2 EDGE3 EDGE4
SURFACE VERTEX defines a geometry surface to be bounded by edges which are specified
by their end geometry points the vertices of the surface. This command is similar to
SURFACE PATCH the underlying surface representation is identical only the method of
definition differs. If no geometry line exists between adjacent geometry points, then the
command will automatically generate straight geometry lines between the appropriate
geometry point pairs.
P2
P3
P4
P1
EDGE2
EDGE3
EDGE1
EDGE4
P1 (P4)
EDGE3
EDGE1
P2
P3
EDGE2
u v
u
v
SURFACE VERTEX
NAME [(highest geometry surface label number) + 1]
Label number of the geometry surface.
P1, P2, P3, P4
Label numbers of geometry points which are the vertices of the geometry surface. See
Figure. P1, P2, P3 must be specified, and correspond to existing geometry points. A triangu-
lar surface patch is defined by repeating one pair of consecutive points (i.e., P2 = P1, P3 = P2,
P4 = P3, or P1 = P4). Note that P4 defaults to P1, automatically giving a triangular surface
patch if only P1, P2, P3 are specified.
EDGEi [existing surface edges, if any]
Label numbers of the surface edges (i = 1, 2, 3, 4), i.e., geometry lines, input if required see
below. The parameters are related to the surface vertices as follows:
EDGE1 Line from P1 to P2.
If a pair of adjacent vertices is not connected by a geometry line, then a new straight line is
generated between them. The label number of the new edge is given by the appropriate
EDGEi parameter. Note that in this case the parameter must not refer to an existing line. If no
label is given then the highest line label number successively incremented by 1 is used.
If more than one line connects a pair of adjacent vertices, then the choice of line may be made
via the appropriate EDGEi parameter. In this case the parameter must refer to one of the lines
connecting the relevant pair of vertices.
Auxiliary commands
SURFACE VERTEX
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
SURFACE GRID NAME MPOINT NPOINT TYPE EDGE1 EDGE2 EDGE3
EDGE4
1 1 point
1
...
irow
i
jcol
i
point
i
...
MPOINT NPOINT point
MN
SURFACE GRID defines a geometry surface as a grid (array) of geometry points, which
control the shape of the surface.
Label number of the geometry surface to be defined.
MPOINT [4]
Number of rows in the array of surface grid control points.
NPOINT [4]
Number of columns in the array of surface grid control points.
TYPE [POLYFACE]
Selects the type of surface to be defined.
POLYFACE The grid of control points is connected by a quadrilateral polygo
nal mesh. MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of
2 for this surface type.
QBSPLINE A quadratic B-spline surface is derived from the grid of control
points. MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of 3
for this surface type.
CBSPLINE A cubic B-spline surface is derived from the grid of control
points. MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of 4
for this surface type.
BEZIER A Bezier surface is derived from the grid of control points.
MPOINT and NPOINT each have a minimum value of 3 for this
surface type.
SURFACE GRID
EDGEi [existing edge surfaces, if any]
Label numbers of the surface edges (i = 1, 2, 3, 4), i.e., geometry lines, input if required see
below. The parameters are related to the surface control points as follows (see Figure):
EDGE1 Polyline defined by points (i, j): i = MPOINT, j = 1, 2, ..., NPOINT
EDGE2 polyline defined by points (i, j): i = 1, 2, ..., MPOINT, jcol = 1
EDGE3 polyline defined by points (i, j): i = 1, j = 1, 2, ..., NPOINT
EDGE4 polyline defined by points (i, j): i = 1,2,...,MPOINT, jcol = NPOINT
If a set of edge control points does not already define a polyline of the corresponding type
(see note and table below) then a new polyline is generated. The label number of the new
edge is given by the appropriate EDGEi parameter. Note that in this case the parameter must
not refer to an existing line. If no label is given then the highest line label number succes-
sively incremented by 1 is used.
If more than one polyline of the corresponding type is defined by a set of edge control
points, then the choice of polyline is made via the appropriate EDGEi parameter. In this case
the parameter must refer to one of the polylines defined by the relevant set of edge control
points.
SURFACE GRID
Surface-grid definition
TYPE=POLYFACE, MPOINT=3, NPOINT=4
(MPOINT,1)
EDGE1
(MPOINT,NPOINT)
(1,1)
EDGE3
EDGE2
EDGE4
(1,NPOINT)
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
irow
i
, jcol
i
Row and column number, respectively, of the point point
i
entry in the array of control
points. The following range of values are allowed:
1 % irow
i
% MPOINT
1 % jcol
i
% NPOINT
point
i
Label number of geometry point used to interpolate/control the desired surface.
Note: A point label is required input for each entry (irow, jcol) in the array of points;
irow = 1, 2, ..., MPOINT; jcol = 1, 2, ..., NPOINT.
Note: A line of type POLYLINE may be created at each edge of the surface, according to
the following rule:
Surface Grid Type Edge Polyline Type
POLYFACE SEGMENTED
QBSPLINE QBSPLINE
CBSPLINE CBSPLINE
BEZIER BEZIER
Auxiliary commands
SURFACE GRID
SURFACE EXTRUDED NAME LINE DX DY DZ SYSTEM PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE NDIV OPTION ELINE
line
i
SURFACE EXTRUDED defines a geometry surface by displacing a geometry line in a given
direction.
Label number of the extruded geometry surface.
LINE
Label number of the initial geometry line to be displaced, thereby defining the extruded
surface.
DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with respect to the base coordinates (XL, YL, ZL) of
coordinate system SYSTEM. Note that this is the actual displacement vector, i.e., it specifies
both magnitude and direction.
DY, DZ).
LINE
(DX, DY, DZ)
v
u
XL
ZL
YL
SURFACE EXTRUDED
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry points are to be located at the other end of the surface from the initial line given by
LINE. This parameter indicates whether to check points location against existing geometry
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the extruded direction. The DEFAULT
number of subdivisions is taken from the parameter NDIV in the command SUBDIVIDE
DEFAULT. This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.
OPTION [VECTOR]
This parameter offers options to the surface extrusion:
VECTOR surfaces are defined by displacing geometry lines in a given direction.
LINE surfaces are defined by displacing geometry lines along a line.
ELINE
The geometry line label. This parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE
line
i
Label numbers of geometry lines. The data line input allows for more than one line to be
extruded.
Auxiliary commands
When deleting surface, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
SURFACE EXTRUDED
SURFACE REVOLVED NAME MODE LINE ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS
ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NDIV
line
i
SURFACE REVOLVED defines a geometry surface by rotating a geometry line about some axis.
Label number of the revolved geometry surface.
MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to define the geometry surface.
This controls which parameters actually define the revolved surface. Other parameters are
ignored.
AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given coordinate axis
of a coordinate system. (LINE, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).
LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the
end points of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily
straight, but must be open, i.e., have non-coincident end points).
(LINE, ANGLE, ALINE).
POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two
given (non-coincident) geometry points. (LINE, ANGLE, AP1, AP2).
VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by a position vector and a
direction vector. (LINE, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).
AXIS
ANGLE
u
v
LINE
SURFACE REVOLVED
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
LINE
Label number of the initial geometry line to be rotated about the axis thereby defining the
revolved surface.
ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). Note ANGLE must be in the range -360 % ANGLE % 360.
The sign of the angle is given by considering the right hand rule i.e., if you curl your
fingers around the axis of revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis, then a positive
angle is in the direction of the curl of the fingers.
AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the basic axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
ALINE
AP1, AP2
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
= VECTORS.
XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
MODE = VECTORS.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry points/lines are to be located at the edges of the surface beside the initial line given
by LINE. This parameter indicates whether to check the edge point location against existing
geometry, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new geometry point (with a
new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
SURFACE REVOLVED
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the revolved direction. The DEFAULT
DEFAULT.
line
i
Label numbers of geometry lines. The data line input allows for more than one line to be
revolved.
Auxiliary commands
When deleting surface, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
SURFACE REVOLVED
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
SURFACE TRANSFORMED NAME PARENT TRANSFORMATION
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NCOPY
surface
i
SURFACE TRANSFORMED defines a geometry surface to be a geometrical transformation of
another existing geometry surface. The transformed geometry surface is identified by its label
number NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly defined transformed geometry
surfaces are identified by the current highest geometry surface label number + 1.
Label number of the geometry surface to be defined.
PARENT
The surface which, after transformation, gives the surface being defined.
TRANSFORMATION
Label number of a geometrical transformation, see commands TRANSFORMATION.
PCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location of the transformed surface vertices
against existing geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than
generate a new geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of surfaces to be generated by the transformation - transformation
is repeated NCOPY times.
surface
i
Label numbers of surface to be transformed.
Auxiliary commands
SURFACE TRANSFORMED
SFTHICKNESS
name
i
thick
i
dthick1
i
dthick2
i
dthick3
i
dthick4
i
SFTHICKNESS defines surface thicknesses. <Not applicable to ADINA-F.>
name
i
The surface label number.
thick
i
[0.0]
The surface thickness.
dthick1
i
[0.0]
The deviation of thickness for surface surface
i
at surface vertex 1.
dthick2
i
[0.0]
i
dthick3
i
[0.0]
i
dthick4
i
[0.0]
i
Note: Input of surface thickness is given as a constant thickness together with deviations
from that value at each of the vertices.
Thus the thickness at vertex1 = thick + dthick1.
To input constant surface thicknesses, only the first two entries on the data line
input need be entered (since the default deviations are zero).
To input varying surface thickness you could enter a constant thickness of 0.0 and
set the deviations to the vertex thicknesses, or use some median thickness with
non-zero deviations.
Note: Thickness is measured in the direction of the normal vector at the vertex,
determined by the right-hand rule in relation to the ordering of the surface vertices.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SFTHICKNESS FIRST LAST
SFTHICKNESS
Sec. 6.4 Surfaces
CHECK-SURFACES
CHECK-SURFACES checks geometry surface connections looking for two adjoining surfaces
which are oppositely oriented such that the surface normals would be opposite. Such
conditions would likely be the source of a modeling error when elements of type SHELL are
generated on such surfaces.
The command has no parameters and reports geometry surface pairs which should be more
closely examined and re-oriented if necessary.
P4
P3
P6
P5
P2
P1
Surface Vertices
S1 P1-P2-P3-P4
S2 P2-P3-P6-P5
v
1
u
1
u
2
v
2
S1
u
v
n
1
S2
u
v
n
2
CHECK-SURFACES
VOLUME PATCH NAME SHAPE FACE1 FACE2 FACE3
FACE4 FACE5 FACE6
VOLUME PATCH defines a geometry volume to be bounded by faces which are specified
geometry surfaces.
NAME [(current highest geometry volume label number) + 1]
Label number of the geometry volume.
VOLUME PATCH
SHAPE = HEX SHAPE = PRISM
SHAPE = TETRA SHAPE = PYRAMID
P1
P2
P3
P4
P1
P2
P3
P5
P2 P1
P5
P7
P3
P6
FACE 1
FACE 4
FACE 3
FACE 2
P4
P8
FACE 6
P1 P2
P3 P4
P5
P6
F
A
C
E
5
FACE 4
F
A
C
E
5
FACE 1
FACE 2
FACE 3
FACE 4
FACE 1
FACE 3
FACE 2
FACE 4
FACE 1
FACE 3
FACE 5
P4
FACE 2
Sec. 6.5 Volumes
SHAPE [HEX]
Selects the shape of the volume to be defined. This controls which of the parameters
(geometry surface label numbers) are actually used to define the volume, other parameters are
ignored. The faces of the volume must connect as shown in the Figures.
HEX Hexahedral brick volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4,
FACE5, FACE6). Note that each face must be a quadrilateral
geometry surface.
PRISM Prismatic volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4, FACE5). Note
that faces FACE2 and FACE4 must be triangular geometry sur-
faces, whilst faces FACE1, FACE3, and FACE5 must be quadrilat-
eral geometry surfaces.
TETRA Tetrahedral volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4). Note that
each face must be a triangular geometry surface.
PYRAMID 5-faced volume (FACE1, FACE2, FACE3, FACE4, FACE5). Note
that face FACE1 must be a quadrilateral geometry surface, whilst
faces FACE2, FACE3, FACE4, and FACE5 must be triangular
geometry surfaces.
FACE1
FACE2
FACE3
FACE4
FACE5
FACE6
Label numbers of geometry surfaces comprising the faces of the geometry volume. See
Figure.
Note: The faces must be connected, i.e., the edges of adjacent faces (geometry surfaces)
must coincide (i.e., refer to a common geometry line), otherwise an error condition
results.
Auxiliary commands
LIST VOLUME FIRST LAST
DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST OPTION
When deleting volume, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
face surfaces which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION =
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be deleted.
VOLUME PATCH
VOLUME VERTEX NAME SHAPE VERTEX1 VERTEX2 VERTEX3
VERTEX4 VERTEX5 VERTEX6 VERTEX7
VERTEX8
VOLUME VERTEX defines a geometry volume in terms of its vertices. This command is
similar to VOLUME PATCH the underlying volume geometry point representation is
identical, only the method of definition differs. If no geometry line exists between adjacent
geometry points, then the command will automatically generate straight geometry lines
between the appropriate geometry point pairs. If the volume edges do not comprise the
edges of existing geometry surfaces at the faces of the volume, then the command will
automatically generate geometry surfaces at the volume faces with the required edges
(existing or generated).
VOLUME VERTEX
SHAPE = HEX SHAPE = PRISM
SHAPE = TETRA SHAPE = PYRAMID
P1
P2
P3
P4
P1
P2
P3
P5
P2 P1
P5
P7
P3
P6
P4
P8
P1 P2
P3 P4
P5
P6
P4
Sec. 6.5 Volumes
SHAPE [HEX]
Selects the shape of the volume to be defined. This controls which of the parameters
(geometry point label numbers) are actually used to define the volume other parameters are
ignored. The vertices of the volume must connect as shown in the Figure.
HEX Hexahedral brick volume.
PRISM Prismatic volume.
TETRA Tetrahedral volume.
PYRAMID 5-faced volume.
VERTEXi (i = 18)
Label numbers of geometry points which are the vertices of the geometry volume. See Figure
for vertex numbering.
Auxiliary commands
When deleting volumes, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be deleted.
VOLUME VERTEX
VOLUME REVOLVED NAME MODE SURFACE ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS
ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NDIV
surface
i
VOLUME REVOLVED defines one or more geometry volumes by rotating one or more
geometry surfaces about an axis. The first newly defined geometry volume is identified by its
label number NAME. The other newly defined geometry volumes are identified by the
current highest geometry volume label number + 1.
Label number of the revolved geometry volume.
MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to define the geometry volume.
This controls which parameters actually define the revolved volume. Other parameters are
ignored.
AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given coordinate axis of a
coordinate system. (SURFACE, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).
LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the end points
of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily straight, but must be
open i.e., have non-coincident end points). (SURFACE, ANGLE, ALINE).
POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two given
(non-coincident) geometry points. (SURFACE, ANGLE, AP1, AP2).
VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by a position vector and a direction
vector. (SURFACE, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).
P2
P3 P4
AXIS
ANGLE
SURFACE
P1
VOLUME REVOLVED
Sec. 6.5 Volumes
SURFACE
Label number of the initial geometry surface to be rotated about the axis, thereby defining the
revolved volume.
ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). Note ANGLE must be in the range -360 % ANGLE % 360
(with ANGLE = 360 or -360 defining a closed line, i.e., a circle). The sign of the angle is
given by considering the right hand rule i.e., if you curl your fingers around the axis of
revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis, then a positive angle is in the direction of
the curl of the fingers.
AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the base axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
ALINE
AP1, AP2
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
= VECTORS.
XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
MODE = VECTORS.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry point are to be located at the other end of the volume from the initial surface given
by SURFACE. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing
geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new
geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
VOLUME REVOLVED
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the revolved direction. The DEFAULT
DEFAULT.
surface
i
Label numbers of geometry surfaces. The data line input allows for more than one surface to
be revolved.
Auxiliary commands
When deleting volume, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be defined.
VOLUME REVOLVED
Sec. 6.5 Volumes
VOLUME EXTRUDED NAME SURFACE OPTION DX DY DZ SYSTEM
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NDIV LINE RATIO
PROGRESSION CBIAS
surface
i
VOLUME EXTRUDED defines one or more geometry volumes by displacing geometry
surfaces in a given direction or along a line. Please refer to LINE description below for
limitations.
Label number of the extruded geometry volume.
SURFACE
Label number of the initial geometry surface to be displaced, thereby defining the extruded
volume.
OPTION [VECTOR]
This parameter defines the type of extrusion. {VECTOR/LINE}
VECTOR volumes are defined by displacing geometry surfaces in a given direction.
LINE volumes are defined by displacing geometry surfaces along a line.
DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with respect to the base coordinates (XL, YL, ZL) of
coordinate system SYSTEM. Note that this is the actual displacement vector, i.e., it specifies
XL
ZL
YL
SURFACE
( DX, DY, DZ )
P1
P2
P3
P4
VOLUME EXTRUDED
both magnitude and direction. These parameters are only used when OPTION=VECTOR.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry point are to be located at the other end of the volume from the initial surface given
by SURFACE. This parameter indicates whether to check the location against existing
geometry point coordinates, and use an existing point (YES) rather than generate a new
geometry point (with a new label) (NO). {YES/NO}
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
NDIV [DEFAULT]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the surface in the extruded direction. The DEFAULT
DEFAULT. This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.
LINE
The geometry line label. Only straight lines, extruded lines or combined lines are allowed. If a
combined line is used, the combined line should be either straight or extruded. This parameter
is only used when OPTION=LINE. For lines that do not meet these conditions, the com-
mand VOLUME SWEEP should be used.
RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to first element edges along the extruded vector. The grading of
element lengths is governed by parameter PROGRESSION. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=VECTOR.
PROGRESSION [GEOMETRIC]
When element lengths are to be graded, the distribution of element lengths can be selected
from the following options. This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.
{ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}
ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent edges is
constant.
GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is constant.
VOLUME EXTRUDED
Sec. 6.5 Volumes VOLUME EXTRUDED
CBIAS [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the extruded vector. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=VECTOR. {NO/YES}
surface
i
be extruded.
Auxiliary commands
When deleting volumes, OPTION = ALL will delete any vertex points, edge lines or
VOLUME), only the volume itself will be defined.
VOLUME SWEEP NAME SURFACE LINE DELETE-LINE ALIGNMENT
PCOINCIDE PTOLERANCE NPTS
surface
i
Defines one or more geometry volumes by sweeping one or more geometry surfaces along a
line. The first newly defined geometry volume is identified by its label number NAME. The
other newly defined geometry volumes are identified by the current highest geometry volume
label number + 1.
Label number of the swept geometry volume.
SURFACE
Label number of the initial geometry surface to be displaced, thereby defining the swept
volume.
LINE
The geometry line label. Unlike the command VOLUME EXTRUDED, there is no limitation to
straight lines, extruded lines or combined lines.
DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after applying the command VOLUME
SWEEP.
ALIGNMENT [NORMAL]
This parameter specifies the direction of the surface during sweeping.
NORMAL Surface normal is at fixed angle to line tangent.
VOLUME SWEEP
SURFACE
P1
P2
P3
P4
LINE
Sec. 6.5 Volumes
PARALLEL Surface normal always points to the same direction.
PCOINCIDE [YES]
Geometry points are to be located at the other end of the volume from the initial surface given
by SURFACE. This parameter indicates whether to check locations against existing geometry
point coordinates, and use existing points rather than generate new geometry points (with
new labels).
PTOLERANCE [Default given by TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]
If PCOINCIDE=YES, then this parameter provides a tolerance value for checking the global
NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points of non-straight and non-arc lines.
surface
i
be swept.
Auxiliary commands
DELETE VOLUME FIRST LAST
VOLUME SWEEP
VOLUME TRANSFORMED NAME PARENT TRANSFORMATION PCOINCIDE
PTOLERANCE NCOPY
volume
i
The command VOLUME TRANSFORMED defines a geometry volume to be a geometrical
transformation of another existing geometry volume. The transformed geometry volume is
identified by its label number NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly defined
transformed geometry volumes are identified by the current highest geometry volume label
number + 1.
Label number of the transformed geometry volume to be defined.
PARENT
The volume which, after transformation, gives the volume being defined.
TRANSFORMATION [(current transformation label number)]
Label number of a geometrical transformation defined by command TRANSFORMATION.
PCOINCIDE [NO]
This parameter indicates whether to check the location of the transformed volume vertex
points against existing geometry points, and use existing points (YES) rather than generate
new geometry points (NO) (with a new label) . {YES/NO}
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of volumes to be generated by the transformation - transformation
is repeated NCOPY times.
volume
i
Label numbers of volume to be transformed.
Auxiliary commands
Note that no geometry volume is deleted which is referenced by any other model entity,
e.g., as part of the definition of another volume or by virtue of a mesh generation
command (i.e. there are nodes and/or elements associated with the volume).
VOLUME TRANSFORMED
Sec. 6.6 Solid models
BODY SURFACES NAME
surface
i
sense
i
This command is OBSOLETE and is available only for compatibility with old input files.
Defines a solid geometry body, as an oriented collection of geometry surfaces. The set of
surfaces must form a complete boundary of a solid with the proper orientation such that the
oriented surface normal points out of the body. In this way the surfaces yield a boundary
representation of a solid note that a manifold representation is assumed, thus each surface
edge (line) must be connected to exactly two (2) surfaces. A body may be meshed directly via
the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily used - there is no
intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing).
Label number of the body to be defined.
surface
i
Label number of a geometry surface.
sense
i
[+1]
Sense indicator for surface
i
:
+1 the surface normal points out of the body.
-1 the surface normal points into the body.
Auxiliary commands
LIST BODY FIRST LAST
DELETE BODY FIRST LAST
BODY SURFACES
Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY VOLUMES
BODY VOLUMES NAME
volume
i
This commnad is OBSOLETE and is available only for compatibility with old input files.
Defines a solid geometry body, as a collection of geometry volumes. The internal faces of the
body resulting from connected volumes are cancelled out yielding a boundary representa-
tion of a solid in terms of an oriented set of surface patches. A body may be meshed directly
via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily used - there is no
volume
i
Label number of a geometry volume.
Auxiliary commands
LIST BODY FIRST LAST
DELETE BODY FIRST LAST
FACE-THICKNESS BODY
face
i
thick
i
FACE-THICKNESS defines solid geometry face thicknesses.
BODY [currently active solid body]
Solid geometry body label number.
face
i
The face label number (for body BODY).
thick
i
[0.0]
The face thickness (constant).
Auxiliary commands
LIST FACE-THICKNESS FIRST LAST
FACE-THICKNESS
FACELINK NAME OPTION BODY1 FACE1 BODY2 FACE2
PCTOLERANCE
FACELINK establishes a link, for meshing purposes, between two faces of distinct solid bodies, or
between a face of a solid body and a surface. Once the link is established, the program stores the
mesh triangulation of whichever of the two faces/surfaces is meshed first. The meshing of the
corresponding linked face/surface utilizes the same triangulation, thereby resulting in congruent
triangulations and compatible meshes across the linked faces/surfaces.
NAME [(highest face link label number) + 1]
The label number of the face link.
OPTION [TWO]
This parameter offers basic options for creating the facelinks:
ONE Facelinks are created between the faces of a given body and the remaining
adjacent faces and surfaces.
TWO Facelinks are created between two bodies.
ALL Facelinks are created for all the faces and surfaces in the model.
BODY1
The label number of the solid body of which FACE1 is a bounding face. Note: BODY1 = 0
implies that FACE1 is a surface.
FACE1
The label number of the first face/surface of the linked pair.
BODY2
The label number of the solid body of which FACE2 is a bounding face. Note: BODY2 = 0
implies that FACE2 is a surface.
FACE2
The label number of the second face/surface of the linked pair.
PCTOLERANCE [DEFAULT]
Tolerance used to determine whether two faces match.
DEFAULT value set by parameter COINCIDENCE of command
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC
FACELINK
Sec. 6.6 Solid models FACELINK
Note: BODY1, FACE1, BODY2, FACE2 are used only when OPTION=ONE or TWO.
Note: BODY1 cannot equal BODY2, i.e., either two distinct bodies are given or one
solid body face and a surface are given.
Note: When a body is modified, the associated face links will be updated.
When a body is deleted, the associated face links will be deleted.
When a surface is deleted, the associated face link will be deleted
Auxiliary commands
LIST FACELINK FIRST LAST
DELETE FACELINK FIRST LAST
Chap. 6 Geometry definition SPLIT-EDGE
SPLIT-EDGE NAME BODY USPLIT
SPLIT-EDGE splits an edge of a body into two edges by giving a parameter along the edge.
NAME
Label number of the geometry edge to be split.
BODY [current body label]
Label number of the solid geometry body.
USPLIT [0.5]
A parameter value indicating the point along edge NAME at which splitting takes place. The
parameter value can range between 0.0 (the starting point of edge NAME) to 1.0 (the end
point of edge NAME), but cannot be 0.0 or 1.0, i.e. the splitting point on the edge must
create two new edges of non-zero length.
Sec. 6.6 Solid models SPLIT-FACE
SPLIT-FACE NAME BODY P1 P2
SPLIT-FACE splits a face of a body into two faces by giving two points on the face.
NAME
Label number of the geometry face to be split.
BODY [current body label]
P1
Label number of the first geometry point.
P2
Label number of the second geometry point.
BODY-DISCREP NAME
Creates a discrete boundary representation for a given body. The discrete boundary
representation (discrete brep in short) of a body is simply a triangular surface mesh (of the
body) that has the advantage of being modifiable by command BODY-DEFEATURE.
NAME
Body label.
Auxiliary commands
LIST BODY-DISCREP FIRST LAST
DELETE BODY-DISCREP FIRST LAST
BODY-DISCREP
BODY-DEFEATURE NAME SIZE DOMKEEP DOMREMV PREVIEW
OPTION ANGLE SPREAD
After having obtained a discrete boundary representation (discrete brep in short) of a
body with the command BODY-DISCREP, this command enables the modification of the
discrete brep. The actual (geometric) body is never modified. The meshing is limited to 4/
10/11-node tetrahedral elements.
The main purpose of this command is the removal of small features which can be of the
boss type (protrusion) or the cut type (may extend to being a hole). The secondary
purpose is the removal of surface triangles (on the discrete brep) that have either a small
length or height.
NAME
Body label.
SIZE
Any surface triangle on the discrete brep whose shortest length or height is below SIZE
should be eliminated from the discrete brep.
DOMKEEP [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body faces that should not be modified. More exactly,
the surface triangles on the discrete brep that are classified on a body face in the domain
should not be modified.
DOMREMV [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body faces that should be removed. More exactly, the
surface triangles on the discrete brep that are classified on a body face in the domain
should be removed. It is recommended to use one domain per feature to remove.
PREVIEW [NO]
Preview flag. {YES/NO}
YES the command flags the surface triangles on the discrete brep that are targeted
for removal to enable their display. It does not actually remove them.
NO the command will remove the surface triangles that are targeted for removal.
OPTION [COARSEN]
Method by which the body faces defined by DOMREMV are removed. {REMESH1/
REMESH2/COARSEN}
REMESH1, REMESH2 the body faces in domain defined by DOMREMV are removed
using a remeshing algorithm. This option should be used only
BODY-DEFEATURE
when the frontier of the domain is convex. It has to be used when
the feature is a hole (whose frontiers should be convex).
With REMESH1, the normals used to remesh the domain come
from the (boundary discrete representation) faces inside the
domain. With REMESH2, the normals used come from the faces
immediately adjacent to the domain.
COARSEN the body faces in the domain defined by DOMREMV are removed
using a coarsening algorithm that is incremental. It cannot be used
when the feature is a hole.
ANGLE [30.0]
This is the angle in degrees used when using the incremental coarsening algorithm. The
larger the angle, the more surface triangles can be removed but the more deformed the
discrete brep will be. When attempting to remove a feature using the COARSEN option, it
is recommended to set the ANGLE to 180.0 so that the feature can be completely removed.
{0.0 % ANGLE % 180.0}
SPREAD [YES]
Determines whether the removal of surface triangles in the discrete brep extends to other
surfaces triangles outside the feature indicated by DOMREMV. {YES/NO}
NO the command only attempts to remove surface triangles that are below SIZE or that
make up a feature (as indicated by DOMREMV). Other surface triangles will not be
modified.
YES the command may also modify other surface triangles if necessary.
Notes:
If a DOMREMV domain is given, the command will only attempt to remove the surface
triangles associated with the domain. The SIZE parameter is then only used to spread (see
SPREAD parameter).
If no DOMREMV domain is given, the command will attempt to remove all surface triangles
whose dimensions (shortest length or height) are below SIZE.
BODY-DEFEATURE
Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY-CLEANUP
BODY-CLEANUP NAME SIZE DOMKEEP DOMREMV PREVIEW
The main purpose of this command is the removal of short body edges and/or thin body
faces. The actual (geometric) body is never modified but its AUI representation is.
NAME
Body label.
SIZE
Any body edge whose length is below SIZE should be eliminated. Any body face whose
boundary is reduced to 2 edges (after the elimination of body edges) and whose width is
below SIZE should be eliminated.
DOMKEEP [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body edges and/or faces that should not be removed.
DOMREMV [0]
Domain (see DOMAIN command) of body edges and/or faces that should be removed.
PREVIEW [NO]
Preview flag. {YES/NO}
YES the command flags the body edges and/or faces that are targeted for removal to
enable their display. It does not actually remove them.
NO the command will remove them.
Notes:
If a DOMREMV domain is given, the command will only attempt to remove the body edges
and/or faces that are given. The SIZE parameter is not used.
If no DOMREMV domain is given, the command will attempt to remove body edges and/or
faces whose dimensions are below SIZE.
Sec. 6.6 Solid models BODY-RESTORE
BODY-RESTORE BODY
Restores the AUI topological representation of the body corresponding to the state of the
body before commands such as BODY-CLEANUP, REM-EDGE or REM-FACE are executed
(on that body).
BODY
Body label.
Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY-DSCADAP
BODY-DSCADAP NAME MAXNVARS MAXNVARC MAXDIST ADAPT
Adapts (according to the mesh densities set prior) the surface triangles that make up the
geometry of an STL body. The output is stored as a discrete representation (see the BODY-
DISCREP command) which can be then meshed with the GBODY command. This command
should only be used in conjunction with the LOAD-STL command.
NAME
Label of body.
MAXNVARS [30.0 (degrees)]
Maximum normal variation used in edge swapping when adapting (improving quality of) the
surface mesh. When locally changing the topology of the surface mesh, the normal variations
(before and after edge swapping) may not exceed MAXNVARS.
Maximum normal variation used in vertex smoothing when adapting (improving quality of) the
surface mesh. When moving vertices of the surface mesh, the normal variations (before and
after vertex smoothing) may not exceed MAXNVARS. {0.0 % MAXNVARS % 180.0}
MAXNVARC [90.0 (degrees)]
Maximum normal variation used in edge collapsing when adapting (coarsening) the surface
mesh. When locally changing the topology of the surface mesh, the normal variations (before
and after edge collapsing) may not exceed MAXNVARC. {0.0 % MAXNVARC % 180.0}
MAXDIST [0.0]
Maximum (absolute) distance allowed from new edge to "reference" mesh (STL body) when
performing edge swaps. This distance threshold is used in conjunction with MAXNVARS
during edge swapping. By default, MAXDIST is set to 0.0 and therefore disabled.
{MAXDIST $ 0.0}
ADAPT [YES]
If set to NO, no adaptation will take place and the STL surface mesh will be stored directly as
a discrete representation bypassing totally the adaptation process.
LINE-FUNCTION NAME TYPE DL1 DL2 DL3 NPOINT
i fval
i
(i = 1NPOINT)
LINE-FUNCTION describes the variation of a quantity along a line. It may be used, for
instance, to indicate how a load is distributed along some geometry line of the model. Note
that the variation is spatial; variation of a quantity in time is described by TIMEFUNCTION.
This command can be applied to edges.
NAME
Label number of the line-function.
TYPE [LINEAR]
Selects the type of data variation, see Figure. This controls the actual parameters used
other parameters are ignored.
LINEAR A linear variation from value DL1 to DL2.
DL2
DL1
0 1
u
TYPE = LINEAR
DL1
DL2
DL3
0 0.5 1
u
TYPE = QUADRATIC
fval
3
i=3
Du = 1/NPOINT
1
TYPE = TABULAR
u
Du
LINE-FUNCTION
Sec. 6.7 Spatial functions
QUADRATIC A quadratic variation from value DL1, through value DL3, to
value DL2.
TABULAR The function values are given at a set of equally spaced points
along the line. The function is linearly interpolated
between the input values.
DL1
Value at the starting point of the line (u = 0 see Figure).
DL2 [DL1]
Value at the end point of the line (u = 1 see Figure).
DL3 [DL1]
Value at the middle point of the line (u = 0.5 see Figure). This value should not be input for
TYPE = LINEAR.
NPOINT [3]
The number of input function values, used when TYPE = TABULAR. The values are as-
signed at equally spaced points along the line, with linear interpolation used to determine
values along the line. The first point corresponds to the starting point of the line (u = 0), and
the last point to the end point of the line (u = 1). Note that NPOINT must be at least 3
(NPOINT = 2 would be equivalent to selecting TYPE = LINEAR).
i
Index of the input function point, which can take a value from 1 to NPOINT.
fval
i
[1.0]
Value of the function at index point i.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
DELETE LINE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
LINE-FUNCTION
SURFACE-FUNCTION NAME TYPE DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7
DS8 DS9 MPOINT NPOINT
row col fval
ij
SURFACE-FUNCTION describes the variation of a quantity across a surface. It may be used,
for instance, to indicate how a load is distributed over some geometry surface of the model.
Note that the variation is spatial; variation of a quantity in time is described by
TIMEFUNCTION.
(1,1)
DS1
DS3
(0,0) (1,0)
(0,1)
(1,1)
v
u
TYPE = LINEAR
(0,0) (1,0)
(1,1) (0,1)
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
DS6
DS7
DS8
DS9
TYPE = QUADRATIC
(0,0)
[1,1]
(1,0)
[1,MPOINT]
[NPOINT, MPOINT]
(0,1)
[NPOINT, 1]
TYPE = TABULAR
u
v
DS4
DS2
v
u
SURFACE-FUNCTION
NAME
Label number of the surface-function.
TYPE [LINEAR]
Selects the type of data variation see Figure. This controls the actual parameters used.
LINEAR A bilinear variation from surface vertex values DS1, DS2, DS3,
DS4.
QUADRATIC A biquadratic variation from surface vertex values DS1 to DS4,
and mid-side/internal surface point values DS5 to DS9.
TABULAR The function values are given at a grid of regularly spaced points
on the surface. The function is bilinearly interpolated between
the input values.
DS1
Value at the (u = 1, v = 1) vertex point of the surface, see Figure.
DS2 [DS1]
DS3 [DS1]
DS4 [DS1]
DS5 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0.5, v = 1) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.
DS6 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0, v = 0.5) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.
DS7 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0.5, v = 0) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.
DS8 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 1, v = 0.5) mid-side point of the surface, see Figure.
DS9 [DS1]
Value at the (u = 0.5, v = 0.5) internal point of the surface, see Figure.
SURFACE-FUNCTION
MPOINT [3]
The number of input points in the u-parametric direction of the surface, used when TYPE =
TABULAR. The function values are assigned for a grid of points on the surface, with bilinear
interpolation used to determine values on the surface. MPOINT defines the number of
columns for the input grid.
NPOINT [3]
The number of input points in the v-parametric direction of the surface, used when TYPE =
TABULAR. The function values are assigned for a grid of points on the surface, with bilinear
interpolation used to determine values on the surface. NPOINT defines the number of rows
for the input grid.
row
Row index of the input function point, which can take a value from 1 to NPOINT.
{1 % row % NPOINT}
col
Column index of the input function point, which can take a value from 1 to MPOINT.
{1 % col % MPOINT}
fval
ij
[1.0]
Value of the function at index point (i = row, j = col).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SURFACE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
DELETE SURFACE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
SURFACE-FUNCTION
VOLUME-FUNCTION NAME TYPE DV1 DV2 DV3 DV4 DV5 DV6 DV7
DV8 ... DV27
VOLUME-FUNCTION describes the variation of a quantity within a volume. It may be used,
for instance, to indicate how a load is distributed within some geometry volume of the model.
Note that the variation is spatial; variation of a quantity in time is described by
TIMEFUNCTION.
NAME
Label number of the volume-function.
TYPE [LINEAR]
Selects the type of data variation. This controls the actual parameters used.
LINEAR A trilinear variation from volume vertex values DV1 to DV8.
QUADRATIC A triquadratic variation from volume vertex values DV1 to DV8,
and mid-side/internal volume point values DV9 to DV27.
DV1...DV27 [DV
i
= DV1 (i = 2...27)]
Values at the vertex, mid-side, and internal points of the volume, see table below.
Auxiliary commands
LIST VOLUME-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
DELETE VOLUME-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
VOLUME-FUNCTION
Volume-function parametric locations:
Value u v w
DV1 1 1 1
DV2 0 1 1
DV3 0 0 1
DV4 1 0 1
DV5 1 1 0
DV6 0 1 0
DV7 0 0 0
DV8 1 0 0
DV9 0.5 1 1
DV10 0 0.5 1
DV11 0.5 0 1
DV12 1 0.5 1
DV13 0.5 1 0
DV14 0 0.5 0
DV15 0.5 0 0
DV16 1 0.5 0
DV17 1 1 0.5
DV18 0 1 0.5
DV19 0 0 0.5
DV20 1 0 0.5
DV21 0.5 0.5 0.5
DV22 0.5 1 0.5
DV23 0 0.5 0.5
DV24 0.5 0 0.5
DV25 1 0.5 0.5
DV26 0.5 0.5 1
DV27 0.5 0.5 0
VOLUME FUNCTION
Sec. 6.8 Transformations
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED NAME
position
i
transform
i
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED defines a general transformation as an ordered sequence
of existing transformations defined by command TRANSFORMATION. The associated
transformation matrix is calculated by concatenating the matrices of the sequence of transfor-
mations.
NAME [(current highest transformation label number) + 1]
Label number of transformation being defined.
position
i
Index for the transformation, indicating its position in the order of transformation application.
In the concatenation the transformation associated with position
i
= 1 is applied first, then
that for position
i
= 2, and so on. If a transformation is not defined for a given index then
the identity transformation is assumed. The index may also be used to delete a transforma-
tion from the concatenating sequence.
transform
i
[0]
Label number of an existing transformation defined by command TRANSFORMATION
(provided that no recursion is implied). A zero value indicates the identity transformation.
Example
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION NAME=1 MODE=SYSTEM SYSTEM=1,
DX=1.0
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION NAME=2 MODE=AXIS SYSTEM=1,
AXIS=XL ANGLE=35.0
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION NAME=3 MODE=SYSTEM SYSTEM=1,
DX=-1.0
...
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED NAME=4
1 1
2 2
3 3
@
...
1 4
2 1
@
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED
The last command is equivalent to
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 1
@
Auxiliary commands
LIST TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST
DELETE TRANSFORMATION FIRST LAST
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT NAME T11 T12 T13 T14 T21 T22 T23
T24 T31 T32 T33 T34
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT defines a general 3-D transformation by directly specifying the
transformation matrix.
Label number of the transformation.
Tij
Components of the 3-D transformation matrix:
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT
T T T T
T T T T
T T T T
0 0 0 1
11 12 13 14
21 22 23 24
31 32 33 34
!
"
#
#
#
#
$
%
&
&
&
&
TRANSFORMATION POINTS NAME P1 P2 P3 Q1 Q2 Q3
TRANSFORMATION POINTS defines a rigid-body 3-D transformation by the specification
of 6 geometry points 3 initial points P1, P2, P3, and 3 target points Q1, Q2, Q3.
The transformation is such that point P1 is transformed into point Q1, the direction from P1 to
P2 is transformed into the direction from Q1 to Q2, and the plane defined by the 3 initial
points is transformed into the plane defined by the 3 target points.
P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of three non-coincident, non-collinear, initial geometry points.
Q1, Q2, Q3
Label numbers of three target points, which must also be non-coincident and non-collinear.
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION POINTS
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION NAME MODE SYSTEM PLANE
P1 P2 P3
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION defines a 3-D reflection (mirror) transformation about a
plane.
MODE [SYSTEM]
Selects the method of defining the plane of the transformation. This controls which param-
eters actually define the transformation, other parameters are ignored.
SYSTEM The reflection is defined to be relative to one of the base coordinate planes
of a given local coordinate system. (SYSTEM, PLANE)
POINTS The reflection plane is defined via three (non-collinear) points. (P1, P2, P3)
Local coordinate system label number. The reflection is made relative to one of the base
coordinate planes of this system.
PLANE [XZ]
Selects a coordinate plane with respect to the base coordinate directions (XL, YL, ZL) of the
coordinate system SYSTEM.
XY XL-YL plane of coordinate system SYSTEM.
XZ XL-ZL plane of coordinate system SYSTEM.
YZ YL-ZL plane of coordinate system SYSTEM.
P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of geometry points which define the plane of reflection for the trans-forma-
tion. The points must be distinct, non-coincident, and non-collinear (in order to define a
plane).
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION NAME MODE SYSTEM AXIS LINE
P1 P2 ANGLE X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION defines a 3-D rotation transformation, about an axis.
MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of rotation. This controls which parameters actually
define the rotation other parameters are ignored.
AXIS The axis of rotation is taken as one of the basic axes (XL, YL, ZL)
of the local coordinate system given by SYSTEM.
(SYSTEM, AXIS, ANGLE)
LINE The axis of rotation is aligned with the straight line between the
end points of a geometry line. Note that the geometry line is not
necessarily straight. (LINE, ANGLE)
POINTS The axis of rotation is taken to be the straight line between two
geometry points. (P1, P2, ANGLE)
VECTORS The axis of rotation is defined by a position vector (lying on the
axis), and a direction vector. (X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA,
ANGLE)
Local coordinate system label number. The rotation is relative to one of the base axes of this
coordinate system.
ANGLE
AXIS
T
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION
AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the base axes (XL, YL, ZL) of the local coordinate system given by SYSTEM,
is used as the axis of rotation. {XL/YL/ZL}
LINE
Label number of a geometry line. The axis of rotation is given by the straight line between
the starting point and ending point of the geometry line LINE.
P1
P2
Label numbers of two geometry points. The axis of rotation is the straight line between
geometry points P1 and P2.
ANGLE [0.0]
The angle of rotation, measured in degrees.
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global components of a position vector indicating a point lying on the axis of rotation.
XA [0.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Global components of a vector indicating the direction of the axis of rotation.
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION
TRANSFORMATION SCALE NAME MODE SYSTEM POINT SX SY SZ
TRANSFORMATION SCALE defines a 3-D scaling transformation.
MODE
Selects the method of defining the transformation. This controls which parameters actually
define the transformation, other parameters are ignored.
SYSTEM The scaling transformation is defined by scale factors which are relative to
the origin of a given local coordinate system and which scale parallel to
its base axes (XL, YL, ZL). (SYSTEM, SX, SY, SZ)
POINT The scaling transformation is defined with the origin at a given geometry
point, and by scale factors which scale parallel to the global Cartesian
axes. (POINT, SX, SY, SZ)
Coordinate system label number. The scaling is relative to this coordinate system.
POINT
Geometry point label number. The origin of the scaling transformation is taken as this point.
SX [1.0]
SY [1.0]
SZ [1.0]
Scaling factors.
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION SCALE
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION NAME MODE SYSTEM
DX DY DZ LINE P1 P2
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION defines a 3-D translation transformation.
MODE [SYSTEM]
Selects the method of defining the translation. This controls which parameters actually
define the translation, other parameters are ignored.
SYSTEM The translation is defined by increments parallel to the base axes (XL, YL,
ZL) of local coordinate system SYSTEM. (SYSTEM, DX, DY, DZ)
LINE The translation is defined as that which would translate the starting point
of a geometry line to the ending point of the same geometry line. (LINE)
POINTS The translation is defined as that which would translate one geometry
point to another. (P1, P2)
Local coordinate system label number. For MODE = SYSTEM the translation is relative to
this coordinate system.
DX [0.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Translations parallel to the base Cartesian system (XL,YL,ZL) associated with local coordi-
nate system SYSTEM.
LINE
Label number of a geometry line. The translation is that which would translate the starting
point of geometry line LINE to its ending point.
P1
P2
Label numbers of two geometry points. The translation is that which would translate
geometry point P1 to geometry point P2.
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION
TRANSFORMATION INVERSE NAME TINVERT
Defines a 3-D geometry transformation as the inverse of another transformation.
Label number of the transformation to be defined.
TINVERT
Label number of the transformation to be inverted to give the transformation being defined.
Auxiliary commands
TRANSFORMATION INVERSE
Sec. 6.9 Miscellaneous
DOMAIN NAME
type
i
name
i
body
i
Defines a geometry domain, which is a collection of geometry entities. A domain may be
referenced, for example, by parameter NCDOMAIN of the mesh generation commands (e.g.
GSURFACE) to restrict nodal coincidence checking to within a set of geometry entities
thereby facilitating partitioning of the finite element model into topologically distinct but
geometrically adjacent regions.
NAME [(current highest domain label number) + 1]
Label number of the domain to be defined.
type
i
Geometry entity type for entry i in the list of geometry entities which comprise the domain.
{POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY}
name
i
Label number of the geometry entity of type type
i
body
i
[0]
Label number of a solid body, used to identify the entity when type
i
= EDGE or FACE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST DOMAIN FIRST LAST
DELETE DOMAIN FIRST LAST
DOMAIN
MEASURE GTYPE P1 P2 P3 BODY EDGE LINE N1 N2 N3
SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE RESPONSE PROGRAM FACE
Measures the distance between 2 points or 2 nodes, the length of an edge or a line, or the
angle formed by 3 points or 3 nodes.
GTYPE [POINTS]
Options for measurement. {POINTS/EDGE/LINE/POINT-ANGLE/NODES/NODE-
ANGLE/FACE/BODY}
POINTS Distance between two points.
EDGE Length of an edge of a body.
LINE Length of a line.
POINT-ANGLE Angle between three points.
NODES Distance between two nodes.
NODE-ANGLE Angle between three nodes.
FACE Area of a face of a body
BODY Volume of a body
P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of existing geometry points. P3 is only used when GTYPE=POINT-ANGLE.
BODY
Body label number.
EDGE
Edge label number.
LINE
Line label number.
N1, N2, N3
Label numbers of existing nodes. N1 and N2 are only used when GTYPE=NODES or NODE-
ANGLE. N3 is only used when GTYPE=NODE-ANGLE.
The substructure number of the node in the model. Not applicable to ADINA- T/-F.
MEASURE
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M MEASURE
REUSE [current reuse label number]
The reuse number of the node in the model. Not applicable to ADINA-T/-F.
RESPONSE [DEFAULT]
Specifies the response for which the node is evaluated.
PROGRAM [current finite element program]
The current finite element program, used only if GTYPE=NODES or NODE-ANGLE.
FACE
Face label number.
GET-EDGE-FACES NAME BODY
GET-EDGE-POINTS NAME BODY
GET-EDGE-FACES lists the body faces connected to a body edge.
GET-EDGE-POINTS lists theAUI points bounding a body edge.
NAME
Edge label. {1, 2, ...}
BODY
Label of body the edge belongs to. {1, 2, ...}
GET-EDGE-FACES
GET-FACE-EDGES NAME BODY
Lists the body edges bounding a body face.
NAME
Face label. {1, 2, ...}
BODY
Label of body the face belongs to. {1, 2, ...}
GET-FACE-EDGES
REM-EDGE NAME BODY POINT
Removes a body edge by collapsing one end point onto the other. The remaining point is
given as POINT. If POINT is set to 0, the remaining point is chosen by the command.
NAME
Body edge label. {1, 2, ...}
BODY
Label of body the edge belongs to. {1, 2, ...}
POINT
Label of point that will remain. {0, 1, 2, ...}
REM-EDGE
Sec. 6.9 Miscellaneous REM-FACE
REM-FACE NAME BODY EDGE
Removes a body face (bounded by exactly 2 edges) by collapsing one bounding edge onto
the other. The remaining edge is given as EDGE. If EDGE is set to 0, the remaining edge is
chosen by the command.
NAME
Body face label. {1, 2, ...}
BODY
Label of body the face belongs to. {1, 2, ...}
EDGE
Label of edge that will remain. {0, 1, 2, ...}
BODY BLEND NAME OPTION R1 R2 EDGE POINT
edge
i
(OPTION=CONSTANT, LINEAR)
or
face
i
(OPTION=FACE)
The command BODY BLEND takes an existing solid geometry body and modifies specified
edges to have a radius blend. Two options allow for a constant or variable radius blend.
BODY BLEND
NAME
Label number of the body to be blended. An existing body label number must be specified.
OPTION [CONSTANT]
This parameter offers basic options for blending the edges.
CONSTANT Multiple edges are blended by a constant radius.
LINEAR A single edge of the body is blended by two radii - one at each end
(vertex) of the edge.
FACE Multiple faces are blended by a constant radius.
Before blend After blend
Constant blend
Specified
edge
R1
Before blend After blend
Linear blend
Specified
edge
Specified
point
R1
R2
OPTION=CONSTANT OPTION=LINEAR
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
R1
The first radius of the blend. R1 must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).
R2
The second radius of the blend. R2 is only used when OPTION=LINEAR,and must be input
with a non-negative value (no default is assumed).
EDGE
Label number of the edge to be blended. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=LINEAR, in whch case an existing edge label number ust be specified (no default is
assumed).
POINT
Label number of a point at which the blend radius is R1. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=LINEAR, in which case an existing point label number must be specified (no default
is assumed).
edge
i
Label numbers of body edges to be blended with (constant) radius R1. This data is only used
when OPTION=CONSTANT.
face
i
Label numbers of body faces to be blended with (constatnt) radius R1. This data is only used
when OPTION=FACE.
BODY BLEND
BODY BLOCK NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION
CX1 CX2 CX3 CENTER SYSTEM AX AY AZ
BX BY BZ DX1 DX2 DX3 P1 P2
The command BODY BLOCK defines a solid geometry block or brick shape. A number of
options allow for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the block shape. The block
body may be used in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries
using the Boolean operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTER-
SECT. A body may be meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form
meshing is necessarily used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to
support mapped meshing).
BODY BLOCK
NAME [(highest body label number) + 1]
OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the block:
CENTERED The block is defined by its center, orientation and dimensions.
DIAGONAL The block is defined by two diagonally opposite geometry points and
its orientation.
DX1
DX2
DX3
x y
z
P1
P2
Center
Local coordinate system
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the block center is located. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED).
VECTOR The center of the block is specified by a position vector (CX1,CX2,CX3)
with components in terms of a given coordinate system (SYSTEM).
POINT The center of the block is specified by an existing geometry point
(CENTERED), possibly a vertex of another body.
ORIENTATION [SYSTEM]
Specifies how the edges of the block are aligned:
SYSTEM The block is aligned with the base Cartesian axes of a local coordinate
system (possibly the global coordinate system).
VECTORS The X,Y,Z directions of the block edges are input in terms of two
non-parallel direction vectors (AX,AY,AZ), (BX,BY,BZ). These
vectors are used to form a right-handed system as described below.
CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the block, given in terms of curvilinear components of
the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.
CENTER
The center of the block - the label number of an existing geometry point. This parameter is
only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=CENTERED, in which case an existing
geometry point must be specified (no default is assumed).
SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
block and/or provide the orientation of the block. The center of the block may be given in
terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED. The local directions of the block are aligned
with the base Cartesian system (XL,YL,ZL) of this system, see command SYSTEM, when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. This parameter is only used when POSITION=VECTOR (and
OPTION=CENTERED), or when ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as
the global Cartesian coordinate system.
BODY BLOCK
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the local x-direction of the
block. If OPTION= CENTERED, then the component DX1 will be associated with this
direction. Note that this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used if
ORIENTATION=VECTOR.
BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector, which specifies, in conjunction with
vector (AX,AY,AZ), the local x-y plane of the block orientation. The vector product, or
cross product, of (AX,AY,AZ) with (BX,BY,BZ) gives the local z-direction, and the
y-direction is then given by the right hand rule. If OPTION=CENTERED the components
DX2, DX3 will be associated with the local y-direction and z-directions respectively. Note that
this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used if ORIENTATION=VECTOR.
DX1
DX2
DX3
The dimensions of the block, aligned with the local x, y and z-directions of the block, respec-
tively. These lengths are only used if OPTION=CENTERED, in which case they must be input
with positive values (no defaults are assumed).
P1
P2
Label numbers of two existing geometry points which define the opposite corners of a diagonal
of the block. These parameters are only used when OPTION= DIAGONAL, and in that case two
distinct and non-coincident points must be specified (no defaults are assumed).
BODY BLOCK
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY CHAMFER NAME R1 R2 OPTION
edge
i
face
i
(OPTION=EDGE)
or
face
i
(OPTION=FACE)
The command BODY CHAMFER applies chamfers to edges or faces of a solid geometry
body.
BODY CHAMFER
NAME
Label number of the body to be chamfered. (No default - an existing body name must be
given.)
R1
The first range (depth) of the chamfer. R1 must be input with a positive value (no default is
assumed).
R2 [R1]
The second range (depth) of the chamfer. If R2 is input, it cannot be negative. If R2 = 0.0,
then it is assumed that R2 = R1.
Specified
edge
After chamfer applied Before chamfer applied
Range 1
Range 2
Specified
face
OPTION [EDGE]
This parameter offers basic options for chamfering the edges or faces:
EDGE Multiple edges are chamfered.
FACE Multiple faces are chamfered.
edge
i
Label numbers of edges to be chamfered. This parameters is used only when OPTION=EDGE.
face
i
Label numbers of faces to be chamfered with range R1. This data is only used when R2 is not
equal to R1. (OPTION=EDGE)
face
i
Label numbers of faces to be chamfered. (OPTION=FACE)
BODY CHAMFER
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY CONE NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION X1
X2 X3 APEX BASE SYSTEM AXIS AX AY AZ
SANGLE RADIUS LENGTH
The command BODY CONE defines a solid geometry cone shape. A number of options allow
for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the cone shape. The cone body may be used
in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean
operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be
meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is necessarily
used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing).
BODY CONE
OPTION [APEX]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the cone:
APEX The cone is defined by its apex, semi-angle, orientation, and length.
BASE The cone is defined by its base center, orientation, radius and length.
ENDPOINTS The cone is defined by two end points (APEX, BASE) and its base
radius.
Semi-angle
Length
Radius
Apex
Base center
Axis
Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY CONE
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the apex or base of the cone is located. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=APEX or BASE.)
VECTOR The apex or base of the cone is specified by a position vector (X1,X2,X3)
- with components in terms of a given coordinate system (SYSTEM).
POINT The apex or base of the cone is specified by an existing geometry point
(APEX or BASE), possibly a vertex of another body.
Specifies how the direction of the cone axis is defined. (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=APEX or BASE.)
SYSTEM The cone axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes (AXIS) of
a local coordinate system (SYSTEM) (possibly the global coordinate
system).
VECTOR The cone axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in the
global coordinate system.
X1 [0.0]
X2 [0.0]
X3 [0.0]
The position vector of the apex or base of the cone, given in terms of curvilinear components
of the local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only
used when POSITION=VECTOR, and OPTION=APEX or BASE.
APEX
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the apex of the cone. This param-
eter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=APEX, or when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS; in either case an existing geometry point must be specified (no
default is assumed).
BASE
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the base center of the cone. This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=BASE, or when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS; in either case an existing geometry point must be specified (no
SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the apex or base of
the cone and/or define the cone axis direction. The apex or base of the cone may be given in
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M BODY CONE
terms of the curvilinear coordinates (X1,X2,X3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION=SYSTEM the cone axis direction is aligned with
one of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM . This
parameter is only used when OPTION=APEX or BASE, and when POSITION=
VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as the global Carte-
sian coordinate system.
AXIS [XL]
Indicates which of the base Cartesian axes of the local coordinate system (SYSTEM) is to be
used for the direction of the cone axis. Note that both positive and negative coordinate
system axial directions may be requested. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=APEX or BASE. {XL/YL/ZL/XL-/YL-/ZL-}
BODY CYLINDER NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION
CX1 CX2 CX3 CENTER SYSTEM AXIS
AX AY AZ RADIUS LENGTH P1 P2 SHEET
The command BODY CYLINDER defines a solid geometry cylinder shape. A number of
options allow for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the cylinder shape. The
cylinder body may be used in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex
geometries using the Boolean operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT,
BODY INTERSECT. A body may be meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case
free-form meshing is necessarily used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the
body to support mapped meshing).
BODY CYLINDER
Center
P1
P2 Axis
Radius
Length
OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the cylinder:
CENTERED The cylinder is defined by its center, orientation and dimensions.
ENDPOINTS The cylinder is defined by two end points and its radius.
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the cylinder is located. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
VECTOR The center of the cylinder is specified by a position vector
(CX1,CX2,CX3) - with components in terms of a given
coordinate system (SYSTEM).
POINT The center of the cylinder is specified by an existing geometry
point (CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.
Specifies how the direction of the cylinder axis is defined. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.
SYSTEM The cylinder axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes
(AXIS) of a local coordinate system (SYSTEM) (possibly the
global coordinate system).
VECTOR The cylinder axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in
the global coordinate system.
CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the cylinder, given in terms of curvilinear components of
CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the cylinder . This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT and OPTION=CENTERED, and in that case
an existing geometry point must be specified (no default is assumed).
SYSTEM [0]
The number of a local coordinate system which may be used to position the center of the
cylinder and/or define the cylinder axis direction. The center of the cylinder may be given in
POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION= SYSTEM the cylinder axis direction is aligned
with one of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM.
This parameter is only used when OPTION=CENTERED and POSITION=VECTOR or ORIEN-
TATION= SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate
system.
AXIS [XL]
used for the direction of the cylinder axis. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM and OPTION=CENTERED. {XL/YL/ZL}
BODY CYLINDER
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the cylinder axis direction. This
vector is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.
RADIUS
The radius of the cylinder, which must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).
LENGTH
The axial length of the cylinder. This parameter is used only when OPTION=CENTERED, in
which case it must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).
P1
P2
Label numbers of two existing geometry points which implicitly define the location, orienta-
tion, and length of the cylinder - the only other required data to complete the cylinder
definition is the radius (RADIUS). These parameters are only used when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS, in which case they must be distinct and non-coincident (also, no
defaults are assumed).
SHEET [NO]
Create cylindrical sheet body instead of solid body. {NO, YES}
BODY CYLINDER
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY HOLLOW NAME THICKNESS
face
i
thickness
i
The command BODY HOLLOW hollows a solid geometry body with thickness THICKNESS.
NAME
Label number of the body to be hollowed. An existing body name must be given.
THICKNESS
The thickness of all the faces except the faces listed in the table input.
face
i
Label numbers of faces.
thickness
i
Thickness for the given face label number.
Note: if thickness
i
= 0.0, then face
i
is removed.
BODY HOLLOW
BODY INTERSECT NAME KEEP-TOOL
body
i
The command BODY INTERSECT takes an existing solid body (the target) and modifies it
by taking the intersection of it with a set of other (overlapping) solid bodies (tools). This
definition corresponds to a Boolean intersection of several bodies.
NAME
Label number of the (target) body to be modified. (No default - an existing body name must
be given.)
KEEP-TOOL [NO]
Indicates whether or not the tools are to be kept after applying the command BODY INTER-
SECT. {NO/YES}
body
i
Label numbers of other bodies which are to be intersected with the target body. Note that
body
i
cannot be the same as that specified for parameter NAME, and repeated body names
are only counted once. Also, each body must overlap some part of each of the other bodies,
including the target body - i.e. a solid body must result from the intersection operations - an
empty body cannot be defined.
BODY INTERSECT
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY LOFTED NAME ENTITY DELETE-ENTITIES
entity
i
body
i
point
i
reverse
i
Creates a sheet body by lofting through a set of lines or edges, a solid body by lofting
through a set of surfaces, faces, and sheet bodies.
NAME [(highest body label number)+1]
ENTITY
The set of entities used in the lofting process. {LINE/EDGE/SURFACE/FACE/SHEET}
LINE To define a sheet body by lofting a set of lines.
EDGE To define a sheet body by lofting a set of edges.
SURFACE To define a solid body by lofting two surfaces.
FACE To define a solid body by lofting two faces.
SHEET To define a solid body by lofting two sheet bodies.
DELETE-ENTITIES [YES]
Indicates whether the entities are to be deleted after applying the command.{YES/NO}
Entities are lines, surfaces or sheets if ENTITY=LINE, SURFACE or SHEET respectively.
This parameter is only used when ENTITY=LINE, SURFACE, or SHEET.
entity
i
Label of entities used to create the lofted body. Entity type depends on the ENTITY param-
eter.
body
i
Label of parent body of edge or face entity when ENTITY = EDGE or FACE. body
i
i
is not
used if ENTITY = LINE, SURFACE or SHEET.
point
i
Point label numbers of the start points on each entity.
reverse
i
[NO]
Indicates whether or not the orientation of the entities needs to be reversed. {NO/YES}
Please note that the normals of the surfaces/faces/sheets must be oriented in the same
direction as the loft direction. Parameter reversal can be used to reverse the direction if
necessary.
BODY LOFTED
BODY MERGE NAME KEEP-TOOL
body
i
The command BODY MERGE takes an existing solid body (the target) and modifies it by
joining it together with a set of other solid bodies (tools). This definition corresponds to a
Boolean union of several bodies.
NAME
be given.)
KEEP-TOOL [NO]
Indicates whether or not the tools are to be kept after applying the command BODY MERGE.
{NO/YES}
body
i
Label numbers of other bodies which are to be merged with the target body. Note that body
i
cannot be the same as that specified for parameter NAME, and repeated body names are only
counted once.
BODY MERGE
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M BODY MID-SURFACE
BODY MID-SURFACE NAME BODY SEW THICKNESS DELETE-BODY
REDUNDANT SEWGAP
The command BODY MID-SURFACE creates sheet bodies from a thin-walled solid body.
Each thin wall must have two faces and at least one of the following conditions must be met:
1. Both faces are planar.
2. The two faces are offsets of each other.
NAME [(current highest body label number)+1]
Body label number to be created.
BODY
Body label number of the thin-walled body that will be used to create sheet bodies.
SEW [NO]
Indicates whether sheet bodies are to be sewn together.{NO/YES}
THICKNESS
A sheet body will be created if the thickness of the thin wall is less than THICKNESS.
DELETE-BODY [NO]
Indicates whether the thin-walled body is to be deleted when sheet bodies are created. {NO/
YES}
REDUNDANT [KEEP]
Indicates whether the redundant topology is to be removed.{KEEP/REMOVE}
SEWGAP [0.01]
Factor used to determine the sewing gap value. The gap value used to sew the sheet bodies
is SEWGAP*(the largest of the maximum coordinate differences in each global coordinate
direction considering all the sheet bodies that are being sewn together). This parameter is
used only when SEW=YES.
Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY OPTION
BODY OPTION CHECK
This command provides the options for ADINA-M bodies.
CHECK [YES]
Geometry checking for bodies in ADINA-M commands. {YES/NO}
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY PARTITION NAME EXTEND
face
i
The command BODY PARTITION takes an existing solid body and partition it with a set of
faces of the body, resulting in two or more bodies.
BODY PARTITION
Body 2
Body 1
Face 1
Body 1
Body 1 before partition Body 1 and 2 after
partition by face 1
NAME
Label number of the body to be partitioned. (No default - an existing body name must be
given.)
EXTEND [NO]
Indicates whether or not the faces are extended. {NO/YES}
face
i
Label numbers of faces used to partition the body. Note that repeated face names will only be
counted once. Also, when EXTEND=YES and more than one face is used to partition the
body, these extended faces should not intersect.
BODY PIPE NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION
CX1 CX2 CX3 CENTER SYSTEM AXIS AX AY AZ
RADIUS LENGTH P1 P2 THICKNESS
The command BODY PIPE defines a solid geometry pipe shape. A number of options allow
for the position, orientation, and dimensions of the pipe shape. The pipe body may be used
in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean
operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body can be
NAME [(highest body label number)+1]
BODY PIPE
OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the pipe:
CENTERED The pipe is defined by its center, orientation and dimensions.
ENDPOINTS The pipe is defined by two end points and dimensions.
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the pipe is located. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.
VECTOR The center of the pipe is specified by a position vector
POINT The center of the pipe is specified by an existing geometry point
Thickness
Center Axis
Radius
Length
P2
P1
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
(CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.
Specifies how the direction of the pipe axis is defined. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.
SYSTEM The pipe axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes
(AXIS) of a local coordinate system (SYSTEM), possibly the
VECTORS The pipe axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in the
CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the pipe, given in terms of curvilinear components of the
local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the pipe . This
SYSTEM [0]
pipe and/or define the pipe axis direction. The center of the pipe can be given in terms of the
curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when POSITION=VECTOR. For
ORIENTATION= SYSTEM the pipe axis direction is aligned with one of the base Cartesian
system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM. This parameter is only used
when OPTION=CENTERED and POSITION=VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note
that the default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate system.
AXIS [XL]
used for the direction of the pipe axis. This parameter is used only when
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the pipe axis direction. This
vector is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.
BODY PIPE
RADIUS
The outer radius of the pipe, which must be input with a positive value (no default is as-
sumed).
LENGTH
The axial length of the pipe. This parameter is used only when OPTION=CENTERED, in
P1
P2
Label numbers of two existing geometry points which implicitly define the location, orienta-
tion, and length of the pipe - the only other required data to complete the pipe definition is
the radius and thickness (RADIUS, THICKNESS). P1 and P2 are only used when
OPTION=ENDPOINTS, in which case they must be distinct and non-coincident (also, no
defaults are assumed).
THICKNESS
The thickness of the pipe, which must be input with a positive value less than RADIUS (no
BODY PIPE
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY PRISM NAME OPTION POSITION ORIENTATION CX1 CX2 CX3
CENTER SYSTEM AXIS POLE AX AY AZ BX BY BZ
RADIUS LENGTH P1 P2 P3 NSIDES SHEET
The command BODY PRISM defines a prismatic solid geometry shape, which is a cylinder
with a regular polygonal cross-section. A number of options allow for the position, orienta-
tion, and dimensions of the prism shape. The prism body may be used in conjunction with
other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean operation commands
BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be meshed directly via
BODY PRISM
OPTION [CENTERED]
This parameter offers basic options for defining the prism:
CENTERED The prism is defined by its center, orientation, dimensions and
number of sides.
POINTS The prism is defined by two end points, a point giving the pole
direction, its radius and number of sides.
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the prism is located. This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.
P3
(the pole)
Center
Radius
Length
P1
Axis
P2
VECTOR The center of the prism is specified by a position vector
POINT The center of the prism is specified by an existing geometry point
Specifies how both the axial and pole directions of the prism are defined (the pole direction
passes through a vertex of the polygonal cross-section). (This parameter is only used when
OPTION=CENTERED.
SYSTEM The prism axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes
(AXIS), and the pole with another axis (POLE), of a local coordinate
system (SYSTEM), possibly the global coordinate system.
VECTORS The prism axis and pole directions are defined via direction vectors
(AX,AY,AZ), (BX, BY, BZ) in the global coordinate system.
CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the prism, given in terms of curvilinear components of
CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the prism . This
SYSTEM [0]
prism and/or define both the axis and pole directions of the prism. The center of the prism
can be given in terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system,
when POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION=SYSTEM the prism axis and pole directions
are aligned with two of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS, POLE), see
command SYSTEM. This parameter is only used when OPTION=CENTERED and
POSITION=VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the default is chosen as the
global Cartesian coordinate system.
AXIS [XL]
used for the direction of the prism axis. This parameter is used only when
BODY PRISM
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
POLE [YL]
used for the pole direction of the prism. This parameter is used only when
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the prism axis direction. Note
that this vector need not be of unit length, and is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR
and OPTION=CENTERED.
BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector, which specifies, in conjunction with
vector (AX,AY,AZ), the local axis-pole plane of the block orientation. The vector product, or
cross product, of (AX,AY,AZ) with (BX,BY,BZ) gives the local z-direction, and the pole
direction is then given by the right hand rule. Note that this vector need not be of unit
length, and is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR and OPTION=CENTERED.
RADIUS
The radius of the prism, i.e. the distance of the points of the polygonal cross-section from the
prism axis. This value must be input with a positive value (no default is assumed).
LENGTH
The axial length of the prism. This parameter is used only when OPTION=CENTERED, in
P1, P2, P3
Label numbers of three non-collinear existing geometry points which implicitly define the
location, orientation, and length of the prism - the only other required data to complete the
prism definition is the radius (RADIUS). The points P1, P2 are taken to lie at the end points
on the axis of the prism, whilst point P3 determines the pole direction of the prism. These
parameters are only used when OPTION=POINTS, in which case they must be distinct,
non-coincident and non-collinear (also, no defaults are assumed).
NSIDES [3]
The number of sides of the polygonal cross-section of the prism. NSIDES must be at least 3.
SHEET [NO]
Create cylindrical sheet body instead of solid body. {NO, YES}
BODY PRISM
BODY PROJECT NAME FACE DIRECTION VECTOR P1 P2 DX DY
DZ DELETE-LINE
line
i
Projects lines onto a face of the body.
NAME
Label number of the body to be projected onto. An existing body name must be given.
FACE
Label number of the face to be projected onto.
DIRECTION [NORMAL]
Specifies the direction of projection. {NORMAL/VECTOR}
NORMAL Lines project to the face in the direction of the face normal.
VECTOR Lines project to the face along the given vector direction.
VECTOR [VALUES]
Specifies how the vector is defined. (This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR.)
{COMPONENTS/POINTS}
COMPONENTS The vector is defined by DX, DY, and DZ.
POINTS The vector is defined by two points (P1 and P2).
P1
P2
Label numbers of geometry points to define the projection vector. (These two parameters are
only used when VECTOR=POINTS.)
DX
DY
DZ
Components of vector to define the projection vector. (These three parameters are only used
when VECTOR=COMPONENTS.)
DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after projection is done. {YES/NO}
line
i
Label numbers of geometry lines used to project to the face.
BODY PROJECT
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M BODY REVOLVED
BODY REVOLVED NAME MODE BODY FACE ANGLE SYSTEM AXIS
ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA MESH
NODES SUBSTRUCTURE 2D-EGROUP 3D-EGROUP NDIV
NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT
Creates a revolved body on an existing body by rotating a face of the body about an axis.
MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method of defining the axis of revolution used to create the body. This controls
which parameters actually define the revolved body other parameters are ignored.
AXIS The axis of revolution is taken as a given coordinate axis of a coordinate
system (FACE, ANGLE, SYSTEM, AXIS).
LINE The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between the end points
of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily straight, but must be
open , i.e., have non-coincident end points) (FACE, ANGLE, ALINE).
POINTS The axis of revolution is taken as the straight line between two given (non-
coincident) geometry points (FACE,ANGLE,AP1,AP2).
VECTORS The axis of revolution is defined by an position vector and a direction
vector (FACE, ANGLE, X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA).
BODY
Label number of the body to be revolved.
FACE
Label number of the face to be revolved.
Body 1 before revolution
Body 1 after revolution
Face 1 is revolved
Face 1
ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees). The sign of the angle is given by the right hand rule i.e., if
you curl your fingers around the axis of revolution, with the thumb pointing along the axis,
then a positive angle is in the direction of the curl of the fingers. {-360 % ANGLE % 360}
SYSTEM [current active coordinate system]
Label number of a coordinate system. One of the axes of this cartesian coordinate system
may be used to define the axis of revolution, via parameter AXIS, when MODE=AXIS.
AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the basic axes (XL,YL,ZL) of the local cartesian coordinate system, given by
parameter SYSTEM, is used as the axis of revolution {XL/YL/ZL}.
ALINE
Label number of a geometry line which defines the axis of revolution. The direction of the axis
is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.
AP1, AP2
axis is taken from point AP1 topoint AP2.
X0, Y0, Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining the axis of rotation when
MODE=VECTORS.
XA [1.0]
YA, ZA [0.0]
MODE=VECTORS.
MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh is generated while a swept body is created. If MESH =
YES, 3-D elements can be created if 2-D elements exist on the face.
NODES [0]
The number of nodes per element of the mesh. {0/8/20/27}
For the default 0, the program assigns the number of nodes per element in the resulting 3-D
mesh based on the corresponding number of nodes of the 2-D mesh on the face, as follows:
2-D 3-D
4 8
8 20
9 27
The label number of the substructure (ADINA) in which the elements and nodes are created.
BODY REVOLVED
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M BODY REVOLVED
2D-EGROUP [largest element group of the revolved face]
The element group label of the elements on the revolved face.
3D-EGROUP [current group label number]
The element group label of the elements on the revolved body.
NDIV [1]
Number of elements created along the sweeping direction.
NCOINCIDE [BOUNDARIES]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.
ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against those
of existing nodes of the substructure (ADINA) or model (ADINA-T/-F). If
there is coincidence to within NCTOLERANCE * (max. difference in global
coordinates between all previous nodes of the substructure or model), then
no new node is created at that location, i.e., the previous node label number
is assumed.
BOUNDARIES Coincidence checking is carried out for the nodes generated at vertices,
edges, and faces of the geometry bodies.
NO No nodal coincidence checking is carried out.
NCTOLERANCE [TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]
Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.
DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT [ALL]
Indicates whether elements on the 2-D mesh are deleted.
ALL Delete elements on 2-D mesh and also the element group if it does not
contain any elements.
ELEMENT Delete elements on 2-D mesh but do not delete the element group.
NO Do not delete any elements.
BODY SECTION NAME KEEP-SHEET KEEP-IMPRINT OPTION
name
i
body
i
The command BODY SECTION partitions an existing solid body using a set of sheets
(defined using SHEET PLANE) or faces of other bodies, resulting in two or more bodies. This
command is only active when ADINA-M has been licensed.
NAME
Label number of the body to be partitioned. An existing body name must be given.
KEEP-SHEET [NO]
Indicates whether sheets are to be kept after partitioning. This parameter is used only when
OPTION = SHEET. {NO/YES}
KEEP-IMPRINT [NO]
Indicates whether imprinted edges created by the section operation are to be kept. {NO/
YES}
OPTION [SHEET]
Specifies whether sheets or faces are used to partition the body. {SHEET/FACE}
SHEET Use sheets to section the body.
FACE Use faces of bodies to section the body.
name
i
Label number of a sheet (OPTION=SHEET) or face (OPTION=FACE).
Note: The following remarks apply to faces also.
- orientation of two adjacent sheets should be the same.
- each sheet (or set of connected sheets) must divide the body into completely
separate bodies;
- each sheet (or set of connected sheets) cannot have its boundary within the body
to be sectioned;
- the sheets cannot intersect;
- three or more sheets cannot meet at a common edge.
body
i
Label number of a solid body. Used when OPTION=FACE.
BODY SECTION
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY SEW NAME SOLID DELETE-BODY HEAL SEWGAP
bodyi
The command BODY SEW sews a set of sheet bodies into a sewn body.
SOLID [YES]
Indicates whether a solid body is to be created. If SOLID=NO, the created sewn body is a
sheet body.{YES/NO}
DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether the sheet bodies are deleted after the sewn body is created.{YES/NO}
HEAL [NO]
If the resulting sewn body does not have a complete boundary, then any holes are treated as
wounds which are healed as specified by HEAL. Only used when SOLID=YES.
{NO/CAP/EXTEND}
NO Do not heal wounds. Any holes (gaps) will only be closed if they are smaller
than the sewing gap.
CAP Create a face formed by all edges of the hole to cover up (cap) the hole.
EXTEND Faces around the hole are extended until they cover the hole.
SEWGAP [0.01]
Factor used to determine the sewing gap value. The gap value used to sew the body is
SEWGAP * (the largest of the maximum coordinate differences in each global coordinate
direction considering all the bodies that are being sewn together).
body
i
Label numbers of sheet bodies which are used to create the sewn body.
BODY SEW
BODY SHEET NAME LINE DELETE-LINE
line
i
The command BODY SHEET defines a sheet body by a set of geometry lines.
LINE
Label number of geometry line comprising the external loop of the sheet body.
DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after applying the command BODY
SHEET. {YES/NO}
line
i
Label numbers of geometry lines comprising the internal loops of the sheet body.
BODY SHEET
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY SPHERE NAME POSITION DIMENSION CX1 CX2 CX3
SYSTEM CENTER RADIUS POINT
The command BODY SPHERE defines a solid geometry sphere shape. The sphere body may
be used in conjunction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the
Boolean operation commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A
body may be meshed directly via the GBODY command (in which case free-form meshing is
necessarily used - there is no intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped
meshing).
BODY SPHERE
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the sphere center is located:
VECTOR The center of the sphere is specified by a position vector
POINT The center of the sphere is specified by an existing geometry
point (CENTER), possibly a vertex of another body.
DIMENSION [RADIUS]
Specifies the size of the sphere:
RADIUS The radius of the sphere is input via parameter RADIUS.
POINT An existing geometry point lying on the surface of the sphere is
used to determine its radius.
Point
Center
Radius
CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the sphere, given in terms of curvilinear components of
when POSITION=VECTOR.
SYSTEM [0]
sphere, in terms of the curvilinear coordinates (CX1,CX2,CX3) of this local system, when
POSITION=VECTOR. This parameter is only used when POSITION=VECTOR. Note that the
default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate system.
CENTER
The center of the sphere - the label number of an existing geometry point. This parameter is
only used when POSITION=POINT, and in that case an existing geometry point must be
specified (no default is assumed).
RADIUS
The radius of the sphere, used only when DIMENSION=RADIUS, in which case it must be
input with a positive value (no default is assumed).
POINT
Label number of an existing geometry point which implicitly defines the radius of the sphere
(the point is assumed to be on the surface of the sphere). This parameter is only used when
DIMENSION=POINT, in which case it must be non-coincident with the sphere center (also,
no default is assumed).
BODY SPHERE
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY SUBTRACT NAME KEEP-TOOL KEEP-IMPRINT
body
i
The command BODY SUBTRACT takes an existing solid body (the target) and modifies it
by removing from it a set of other solid bodies (tools). This definition corresponds to a
Boolean subtraction of one or more bodies from a given solid body. E.g. to drill a hole
through a body you could subtract a cylindrical body from it.
NAME
be given.)
KEEP-TOOL [NO]
Indicates whether or not the tools are to be kept after applying the command BODY SUB-
TRACT. {NO/YES}
KEEP-IMPRINT [NO]
Indicates whether or not the imprinted edges created by the Boolean operation are to be
merged with the target body. {NO/YES}
body
i
Label numbers of other bodies which are to be subtracted from the target body. Note that
body
i
cannot be the same as that specified for parameter NAME, and repeated body names
are only counted once.
BODY SUBTRACT
BODY SWEEP NAME BODY FACE OPTION DX DY DZ SYSTEM LINE
DELETE-LINE ALIGNMENT MESH NODES SUBSTRUCTURE
2D-EGROUP 3D-EGROUP NDIV NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE
DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT TWIST-ANGLE
BODY SWEEP
Creates a swept body on an existing body by sweeping a face of the body in a given direc-
tion or along a line.
BODY
Label number of the body containing face to be swept.
FACE
Label number of the face to be swept.
OPTION [VECTOR]
This parameter offers the options of body sweep.
VECTOR swept body is created by sweeping a geometry face in a given direction.
LINE swept body is created by sweeping a geometry face along a line.
DX [1.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Components of displacement vector with reference to coordinate system SYSTEM. Note that
this is the actual displacement vector, i.e. it specifies both magnitude as well as direction.
(This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR)
Body before sweep Body after sweep
Face 1 is swept along line 1
Line 1
Face 1
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
DY, DZ). (This parameter is only used when OPTION=VECTOR)
LINE
The geometry line label. (This parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE)
DELETE-LINE [YES]
Indicates whether or not the lines are to be deleted after applying the command BODY
SWEEP. (This parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE). {YES/NO}
ALIGNMENT [NORMAL]
This parameter specifies the direction of the face during sweeping.
NORMAL Face normal is at fixed angle to line tangent.
PARALLEL Face normal always points to the same direction.
MESH [NO]
Indicates whether or not the mesh is generated while a swept body is created. If MESH =
YES, 3-D elements can be created if 2-D elements exist on the face.
NODES [0]
The number of nodes per element of the mesh. {0/8/20/27}
For the default 0, the program assigns the number of nodes per element in the resulting 3-D
mesh based on the corresponding number of nodes of the 2-D mesh on the face, as follows:
2-D 3-D
4 8
8 20
9 27
The label number of the substructure (ADINA) in which the elements and nodes are created.
2D-EGROUP [largest element group of the swept face]
The element group label of the elements on the swept face.
3D-EGROUP [current group label number]
The element group label of the elements on the swept body.
NDIV [1]
Number of elements created along the sweeping direction.
BODY SWEEP
ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against those
of existing nodes of the substructure (ADINA) or model (ADINA-T/-F). If
there is coincidence to within NCTOLERANCE * (max. difference in global
coordinates between all previous nodes of the substructure or model), then
no new node is created at that location, i.e., the previous node label number
is assumed.
BOUNDARIES Coincidence checking is carried out for the nodes generated at vertices,
edges, and faces of the geometry bodies.
DELETE-FACE-ELEMENT [ALL]
Indicates whether elements on the 2-D mesh are deleted.
ALL Delete elements on 2-D mesh and also the element group if it does not
contain any elements.
ELEMENT Delete elements on 2-D mesh but do not delete the element group.
NO Do not delete any elements.
TWIST-ANGLE [0.0]
Indicates the twisted angle when the swept body is twisted along the swept line. This
parameter is only used when OPTION=LINE.
BODY SWEEP
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
BODY TORUS NAME POSITION ORIENTATION CX1 CX2 CX3
CENTER SYSTEM AXIS AX AY AZ RMAJOR RMINOR
BODY TORUS defines a solid geometry torus shape. The torus body may be used in con-
junction with other body shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean opera-
tion commands BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be
BODY TORUS
POSITION [VECTOR]
Specifies how the center of the torus is located:
VECTOR The center of the torus is specified by a position vector (CX1,CX2, CX3) -
with components in terms of a given coordinate system (SYSTEM).
POINT The center of the torus is specified by an existing geometry point
Specifies how the direction of the major torus axis is defined:
SYSTEM The torus axis is aligned with one of the base Cartesian axes (AXIS) of a
local coordinate system (SYSTEM), possibly the global coordinate system.
Center Top view
Axis
Major
radius
Minor
radius
Side view
Chap. 6 Geometry definition BODY TORUS
VECTOR The torus axis is defined via a direction vector (AX,AY,AZ) in the global
coordinate system.
CX1 [0.0]
CX2 [0.0]
CX3 [0.0]
The position vector of the center of the torus, given in terms of curvilinear components of the
local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM. Note that these parameters are only used
when POSITION=VECTOR.
CENTER
The label number of an existing geometry point indicating the center of the torus. This
parameter is only used when POSITION=POINT, and in that case an existing geometry point
must be specified (no default is assumed).
SYSTEM [0]
torus and/or define the major torus axis direction. The center of the torus may be given in
POSITION=VECTOR. For ORIENTATION= SYSTEM the torus axis direction is aligned with
one of the base Cartesian system axes of this system (AXIS), see command SYSTEM. This
parameter is only used when POSITION=VECTOR or ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. Note that the
default is chosen as the global Cartesian coordinate system.
AXIS [XL]
used for the direction of the major torus axis. This parameter is used only when
ORIENTATION=SYSTEM. {XL/YL/ZL}
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Global Cartesian components of a direction vector specifying the major torus axis direction.
This vector is only used when ORIENTATION=VECTOR.
RMAJOR
The major radius of the torus, which must be input with a positive value (no default is
assumed).
RMINOR
The minor radius of the torus, which must be input with a positive value (no default is
assumed).
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M BODY TORUS
BODY TRANSFORMED NAME OPTION PARENT TRANSFORMATION
NCOPY
body
i
The command BODY TRANSFORMED defines a solid geometry by copying or moving an
existing Parasolid body. The transformed body may be used in conjunction with other body
shapes to form more complex geometries using the Boolean operation commands
BODY MERGE, BODY SUBTRACT, BODY INTERSECT. A body may be meshed directly via
intrinsic parametric description of the body to support mapped meshing). The transformed
body is identified by its label number NAME. If NCOPY is greater than 1, the other newly
defined transformed bodies are identified by the current highest body label number + 1.
OPTION [COPY]
This parameter offers two options for defining the body:
COPY The body is defined by coping an existing body.
MOVE The body is defined by moving an existing body.
PARENT
The label of the body to be copied (used only when OPTION=COPY). This parameter must
be entered when copying a body.
TRANSFORMATION
Label number of a geometrical transformation defined by one of the TRANSFORMATION
commands. This parameter must be entered.
NCOPY [1]
Parameter defines number of bodies to be generated by the transformation - transformation is
repeated NCOPY times.
body
i
Label numbers of body to be transformed.
BODY TRANSFORMED
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
SHEET PLANE NAME OPTION POSITION OFFSET X Y Z
POINT NX NY NZ P1 P2 P3 SYSTEM
position
i
point
i
The command SHEET PLANE defines a planar sheet. A number of options allow for the
position, orientation and dimensions of the planar sheet. The planar sheet may be used to
partition a body into one or more bodies using the command BODY SECTION.
NAME [(current highest sheet label number)+1]
The sheet label number.
OPTION [POLYGON]
Selects the method for the planar sheet definition:
POLYGON Sheet defined by a set of co-planar points.
XPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in X direction.
YPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in Y direction.
ZPLANE Sheet defined by normal vector in Z direction.
POINT-NORMAL Sheet defined by a point and a normal vector.
THREE-POINT Sheet defined by three points.
POSITION [VECTOR]
Selects the method to define origin point (only for OPTION=POINT-NORMAL):
VECTOR Origin is defined by a position vector (X,Y,Z).
POINT Origin is defined by an existing geometry point (POINT).
OFFSET
Defines position of the planar sheet along the normal vector. This parameter is only used
when OPTION= XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.
X [0.0]
Y [0.0]
Z [0.0]
Defines origin of the vector normal to the sheet plane. These parameters are only used when
SHEET PLANE
POSITION=VECTOR and OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.
POINT
Defines geometry point - origin of the planar sheet. This parameter is only used when
POSITION=POINT and OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.
NX [1.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
Defines vector normal to the planar sheet. These parameters are only used when
OPTION=POINT-NORMAL.
P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of three existing geometry points which define planar sheet. This parameters
are only used when OPTION=THREE-POINT (no defaults are assumed).
SYSTEM [0]
Label number of a local coordinate system. This parameter is used only when
OPTION=XPLANE, YPLANE, ZPLANE, or POINT-NORMAL. Only the Cartesian coordi-
nate system is allowed.
position
i
Position numbers of geometry points.
point
i
Label numbers of geometry points.
Note: position
i
and point
i
are only used when OPTION=POLYGON.
SHEET PLANE
Sec. 6.10 ADINA - M
VOLUME BODY NAME BODY DELETE-BODY DEG-EDGE NPTS LINE-TYPE
Converts a body into a geometry volume. Only body of the following geometries can be
converted into volume: tetrahedron, hexahedron, prism and pyramid. If more than one body
will be converted into volumes and the bodies are from command LOADSOLID, in order not
to create duplicated surfaces between connected volumes, make sure PCOINCIDE=YES in
command LOADSOLID.
BODY
Label number of solid geometry body to be converted into a geometry volume.
If BODY=ALL, all the bodies will be converted into volumes.
DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether or not the body are to be deleted after applying the command VOLUME
BODY. {YES/NO}
DEG-EDGE [0]
That parameter is used to degenerate edge of the body and body is a prism shape. Parameter
can not be used when BODY= ALL.
NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points of non-straight and non-arc edges.
LINE-TYPE [BIARC-SEGMENT]
This parameter specifies the line type when volume is created. {BIARC-SEGMENT /
SPLINE}
BIARC-SEGMENT If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline bi-arc is used when
all the control points are co-planar and polyline segmented is used
when the control points are not co-planar.
SPLINE If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline spline is used.
Auxiliary commands
Note that no geometry volume is deleted which has nodes and/or elements associated
with it.
VOLUME BODY
Chap. 6 Geometry definition SURFACE FACE
SURFACE FACE NAME BODY FACE DELETE-BODY DEG-POINT NPTS
REVERSE LINE-TYPE
Converts a face of a body into a geometry surface.
Label number of the geometry surface to be created.
BODY
Label number of the body that contains the face to be converted. If BODY=ALL, faces of all
sheet bodies will be converted into surfaces.
FACE
Label number of the face to be converted to a surface. If BODY=ALL or the specified body is
a sheet body, then FACE=1 by default. Otherwise, a face label number has to be input.
DELETE-BODY [YES]
Indicates whether the body will be deleted after executing this command. {YES/NO}
DEG-POINT [0]
If the face is a triangle, this parameter indicates which point will be the degenerate vertex of
the created triangular surface. Otherwise, this parameter is ignored. If BODY=ALL is speci-
fied, this parameter is also ignored and the degenerate vertex is set by the program.
NPTS [3]
The number of intermediate points used for interpolating edges that are not straight or not
arcs.
REVERSE [NO]
Reverses the orientation of the surface. {YES/NO}
LINE-TYPE [BIARC-SEGMENT]
This parameter specifies the line type when surface is created. {BIARC-SEGMENT /
SPLINE}
BIARC-SEGMENT If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline bi-arc is used when
all the control points are co-planar and polyline segmented is used
when the control points are not co-planar.
SPLINE If line type is neither straight nor arc, polyline spline is used.
Auxiliary commands
When deleting surfaces, OPTION=ALL will delete any vertex points or edge lines
which have no other dependent geometry; otherwise (OPTION=SURFACE), only the
SURFACE FACE
Chapter 7
Model definition
Chap. 7 Model definition
MATERIAL ANAND NAME E NU DENSITY A1 QDR XSI M SHAT
N H0 A2 S0 ALPHA
Defines an Anand material model. This material model may be used with 2-D (plane strain and
axisymmetric) and 3-D solid elements.
NAME [ (current highest material label number) + 1]
Label number of the material to be defined.
E
Youngs modulus. {>0.0}
NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density. {!0.0}
A1
Pre-exponential factor. {>0.0}
QDR
Activation energy normalized by the universal gas constant. {!0.0}
XSI
Stress multiplier. {>0.0}
M
Strain rate sensitivity of stress. {>0.0}
SHAT
Coefficient for the saturation value of the deformation resistance. {>0.0, only
checked if H0>0}
N
Strain rate sensitivity of the deformation resistance. {!0.0}
H0
Hardening / softening constant. {!0.0}
A2
Strain rate sensitivity of hardening or softening. {>0.0}
MATERIAL ANAND
S0
Initial value of deformation resistance. {>0.0}
ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. ALPHA is only considered if thermal loading is
modeled.
MATERIAL ANAND
Sec. 7.1 Material models
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE NAME MU LAMDA KAPPA DENSITY
FITTING-CURVE VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF
RUBBER-TABLE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC
Defines an Arruda-Boyce material model, which is a hyperelastic material model for rubber
materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
NAME [(current highest material label number) + 1]
Label number of the material to be defined. If the label number of an existing material is given,
then the previous material definition is overwritten.
MU [12.6008]
Initial shear modulus. MU > 0.
LAMDA [1.0]
Locking stretch. LAMDA > 0.
KAPPA [63000.0]
Bulk modulus. KAPPA > 0.
DENSITY [0]
Mass density.
FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MU and LAMDA.
If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MU and LAMDA will be
ignored.
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label. This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC
parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compatibility.
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE [NO]
Specifies the temperature dependence of the material properties. {NO/TRS/FULL}
NO The material properties are not temperature dependent; thermal effects are not
included.
TRS The material properties are not temperature dependent, but the material is assumed
to be TRS (thermorheologically simple). Thermal effects are included.
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE
FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters C1 to KAPPA, and
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are ignored.
The only parameters used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL are NAME,
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, TREF and RUBBER-TABLE.
TREF [0.0]
The material reference temperature, required if TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS or
FULL.
RUBBER-TABLE [0]
The label number of a rubber-table data set. The type of rubber-table depends upon
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE, as follows:
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = NO :
Do not enter a rubber-table.
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = TRS :
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of temperatures
and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL :
A rubber-table of type Arruda-Boyce must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
temperatures and corresponding material properties.
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC [0]
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included. If RUBBER-VIS-
COELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command. This parameter is not used when
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.
RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included. If RUBBER-MULLINS is non-
zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the corresponding
RUBBER-MULLINS command. This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPEN-
DENCE = FULL.
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC [0]
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included. If RUBBER-
ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command. This parameter is not used when
Auxiliary commands
LIST MATERIAL FIRST LAST
DELETE MATERIAL FIRST LAST
MATERIAL CAM-CLAY NAME E NU LAMDA KAPPA GAMMA
PNULL MIU OCR KNULL DENSITY SINITIAL
Defines a nonlinear Cam-Clay material model This material model may be used with 2-D solid
and 3-D solid elements.
NAME [(current highest material label number)+1]
E
Initial Young's modulus E. {> 0.0}
NU [0.0]
Poisson's Ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}
LAMDA
Isotropic normal consolidation slope. {> 0.0}
KAPPA
Unloading-reloading slope. {> 0.0}
GAMMA
Critical state constant [1]. {> 0.0}
PNULL [0.0]
Initial size of yield surface. {! 0.0}
MIU [1.0]
Critical state constant [2]. {> 0.0}
OCR [0.0]
Over-consolidation ratio. {! 0.0}
KNULL [0.0]
The coefficient of earth pressure. {! 0.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density
SINITIAL
Applied initial conditions : initial stresses SINITIAL=1.0, initial stiffness SINITIAL=0.0.
{1.0/0.0}
Note: If an initial stiffness is applied, the initial size of the yield surface - PNULL >0.0.
MATERIAL CAM-CLAY
MATERIAL CONCRETE NAME OPTION E0 NU SIGMAT SIGMATP
SIGMAC EPSC SIGMAU EPSU BETA C1 C2
XSI STIFAC SHEFAC ALPHA TREF INDNU GF
DENSITY SP11 SP12 SP13 SP14 SP15 SP16
SP311 SP321 SP331 SP341 SP351 SP361 SP312
SP322 SP332 SP342 SP352 SP362 SP313 SP323
SP333 SP343 SP353 SP363
TEMPERATAURE-DEPENDENT
theta
i
E0
i
nu
i
alpha
i
sigmat
i
sigmac
i
epsc
i
sigmau
i
epsu
i
sigmatp
i
xsi
i
gf
i
Defines a nonlinear concrete material. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D
solid elements.
OPTION [KUPFER]
Selects triaxial failure curve input method. INPUT requires the specification of 24 values,
SP11 to SP363, to represent the failure curves. {KUPFER/SANDIA/INPUT}
OPTION = KUPFER corresponds to:
BETA = 0.75
SP11 = 0.0 SP12 = 0.25 SP13 = 0.5
SP14 = 0.75 SP15 = 1.0 SP16 = 1.2
SP311 = 1.0 SP321 = 1.4 SP331 = 1.7
SP341 = 2.2 SP351 = 2.5 SP361 = 2.8
SP312 = 1.3 SP322 = 1.5 SP332 = 2.0
SP342 = 2.3 SP352 = 2.7 SP362 = 3.2
SP313 = 1.25 SP323 = 1.45 SP333 = 1.95
SP343 = 2.25 SP353 = 2.65 SP363 = 3.15
OPTION = SANDIA corresponds to:
BETA = 0.5
SP11 = 0.0 SP12 = 0.1 SP13 = 0.2
SP14 = 0.3 SP15 = 0.4 SP16 = 1.0
SP311 = 1.0 SP321 = 1.62 SP331 = 2.1
SP341 = 2.5 SP351 = 2.8 SP361 = 4.75
SP312 = 1.2 SP322 = 2.25 SP332 = 2.75
SP342 = 3.01 SP352 = 3.25 SP362 = 4.6
SP313 = 1.2 SP323 = 2.06 SP333 = 2.32
SP343 = 2.55 SP353 = 2.72 SP363 = 3.79
MATERIAL CONCRETE
E0
Tangent modulus at zero strain.
NU
Poissons ratio.
SIGMAT
Uniaxial cut-off tensile stress. {> 0.0}
SIGMATP
Post-cracking uniaxial cut-off tensile stress. {> 0.0}
If SIGMATP=0, program sets SIGMATP=SIGMAT.
SIGMAC
Uniaxial maximum compressive stress. {SIGMAC<SIGMAU< 0.0}
EPSC
Uniaxial compressive strain at SIGMAC. {EPSU<EPSC< 0.0}
SIGMAU
Ultimate uniaxial compressive stress. {SIGMAC<SIGMAU< 0.0}
EPSU
Ultimate uniaxial compressive strain. {EPSU<EPSC< 0.0}
BETA [0.75 (OPTION = KUPFER, INPUT)]
[0.5 (OPTION = SANDIA)]
Principal stress ratio used for failure surface input. {0.0 < BETA < 1.0}
C1 [1.4]
C2 [-0.4]
Critical strain constants.
XSI [8.0]
Constant used to define the tensile strain corresponding to zero stress in tensile failure.
STIFAC [0.0001]
Normal stiffness reduction factor.
SHEFAC [0.5]
Shear stiffness reduction factor.
ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion.
MATERIAL CONCRETE
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
INDNU [CONSTANT]
Selects one of the following options for Poissons ratio:
CONSTANT Poissons ratio remains constant.
VARIABLE Poissons ratio is allowed to vary (see Theory and Modeling Guide).
GF [0.0]
Fracture energy.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
SP11 ... SP363
Principal stress ratios used to define compression failure envelope. Only used when OPTION
= INPUT. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENT [NO]
Indicates whether material is temperature dependent. If YES then material property variation
with temperature follows in the command data lines. Note that the maximum allowed number
of temperature points is 16. {YES/ NO}
theta
i
Temperature at data point i.
E0
i
Tangent modulus at zero strain at temperature theta
i
.
nu
i
Poissons ratio at temperature theta
i
.
alpha
i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at temperature theta
i
.
sigmat
i
Uniaxial cut-off tensile stress at temperature theta
i
.
sigmac
i
Uniaxial maximum compressive stress at temperature theta
i
.
MATERIAL CONCRETE
epsc
i
Uniaxial compressive strain for stress sigmac
i
, at temperature theta
i
.
sigmau
i
Uniaxial ultimate compressive stress at temperature theta
i
.
epsu
i
Uniaxial ultimate compressive strain at temperature theta
i
.
sigmatp
i
Post-cracking tensile stress at temperature theta
i
.
Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing
temperature. If the same temperature is given several times, only the last given
values are used.
xsi
i
Constant for the tensile strain failure at temperature i
gf
i
Fracture energy at temperature i
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL CONCRETE
MATERIAL CREEP NAME CREEP-LAW TEMP-UNIT E NU A0 A1
A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY
NRUPT1 NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING A8 A9 A10
A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
Defines a nonlinear creep material model. This model falls under the category of the more
general thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material model, which requires nodal temperature
input. (A uniform zero nodal temperature is assumed otherwise). This model also assumes
that the effective stress remains below 10
4
"(Youngs modulus) during the analysis. It may be
used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.
CREEP-LAW [1]
Selects type of the creep law. For details, please refer to the Theory and Modeling
Guide,Section 3.6.3. {1/2/3/LUBBY2/BLACKBURN}
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Creep law 3 may refer to temperatures in degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or degrees
Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}
E
Youngs modulus. {> 0.0}
NU [0.0]
A0 ... A15 [0.0]
Creep law constants, a
i
. A8 ... A15 are applicable only when CREEP-LAW = BLACKBURN.
ALPHA [1.0]
Parameter for creep rate equation time integration. The limiting values are:
0.0 Euler forward method (explicit).
1.0 Euler backward method (implicit).
Note: ALPHA = 1.0 must be used with large strain analyses.
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance for effective stress calculation. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for
further details.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
MATERIAL CREEP
NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that
no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
Indicates whether strain hardening (NO) or time hardening (YES) is used. {YES/NO}
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL CREEP
MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION NAME IRRADC NF TEMP-UNIT E NU A1
A2 A3 A4 A5 ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY
NRUPT1 NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING TREF
Defines a irradiation creep material model with temperature and neutron fluence dependent
properties. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
IRRADC
Label number of the irradiation creep table used. The number refers to a definition made by
the command IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE.
NF
Label number of the fast neutron dose rate
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Creep law may refer to temperatures in degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or degrees
Kelvin (the absolute scale)
CELSIUS Celsius degrees
KELVIN Kelvin degrees
E
Initial Youngs modulus. (E must be > 0.0)
NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. (-1.0 < NU < 0.5).
A1 ... A5
Creep law constants.
ALPHA [1.0]
0.0 Euler forward method (explicit)
1.0 Euler backward method (implicit)
MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
further details.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
NRUPT1, NRUPT2
Label numbers of rupture criteria used. The numbers refer to definitions made by the com-
mand RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can be used at the same time provided their types are
not the same.
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
NO The usual strain hardening method will be used in ADINA.
YES The time hardening method will be used in ADINA.
TREF
The reference temperature for thermal expansion coefficient
Auxiliary commands
LIST MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION FIRST LAST
DELETE MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION FIRST LAST
MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE NAME NCOEF TEMP-UNIT E NU ALPHA
TOLIL DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2
TIME-HARDENING CREEP-LAW
Defines a nonlinear creep material model with temperature and/or effective-stress dependent
coefficients, see command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS . This model falls under the category of
the more general thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material model, which requires nodal
temperature input. (A uniform zero nodal temperature is assumed otherwise). It may be used
with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.
NCOEF
Label number of the creep coefficient dependence function, defined by command
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS.
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
Indicates the temperature unit for the creep model; degrees Celsius (the centigrade scale) or
degrees Kelvin (the absolute scale). {CELSIUS/KELVIN}
E
NU [0.0]
ALPHA [1.0]
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
further details.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE
NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can be
used simultaneously, provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that no
rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
CREEP-LAW [LAW3]
Specifies creep law to be used. {NONE/LAW3/LUBBY2}
NONE No creep.
LAW3 e S T e
c
H
! " "
#
LUBBY2 Lubby2 creep law.
Note: If CREEP-LAW=LAW3, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient function
defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY or
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR.
If CREEP-LAW=LUBBY2, the parameter NCOEF reference a creep-coefficient
function defined by command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION NAME OPTION GAMMA STIFAC
SHEFAC DENSITY
strainv
i
kload
i
kunload
i
gload
i
(i = 16)
Defines a nonlinear geological material, with the option of tension cut-off or cracking.
Moduli at 6 volume strain values must be provided. This material model may be used with 2-D
plane strain, axisymmetric and 3-D solid elements.
OPTION [NONE]
Selects special options.
NONE No special options.
TENSION-CUT-OFF Tension cut-off is modeled.
CRACKING Material cracking is modeled.
GAMMA [0.0]
The material density used to calculate the in-situ gravity pressure.
STIFAC [0.0]
Normal stiffness reduction factor. {< 1.0}
SHEFAC [0.0]
Shear stiffness reduction factor. {< 1.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
strainv
i
Volume strain at data point i.
kload
i
Loading bulk modulus at strain strainv
i
.
kunload
i
Unloading bulk modulus at strain strainv
i
.
gload
i
Loading shear modulus at strain strainv
i
.
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION
Note:
strainv
1
= 0.0
strainv
j
> strainv
(j-1)
kunload
j
! kload
j
; gload
j
< 1.5 " kload
j
The unloading shear modulus is calculated as
(kunload/kload) " gload
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION
MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER NAME E NU ALPHA KYIELD WCAP
DCAP TCUT ICPOS RCAP DENSITY
BETA POTENTIAL
Defines a nonlinear Drucker-Prager material model with a hardening cap and tension cut-off.
This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
E
NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {0.0 # NU < 0.5}
ALPHA [0.0]
Yield function parameter $. {! 10
-5
}
KYIELD
Yield function parameter, k. {> 0.0}
WCAP
Cap hardening parameter, W. {< 0.0}
DCAP
Cap hardening parameter, D. {< 0.0}
TCUT [0.0]
Tension cut-off limit. {! 0.0}
ICPOS [0.0]
Initial cap position. {# 0.0}
RCAP [0.0]
Cap ratio. This is the ratio of the major/minor axes of the elliptical cap. RCAP = 0.0 corre-
sponds to a planar cap. {! 0.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
BETA [0.0]
Potential function parameter %. {! 0.0}
MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER
Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER
POTENTIAL [NO]
Indicates whether to use or ignore the specified BETA. {YES/NO}
If NO is specified, then BETA = ALPHA.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER
MATERIAL ELASTIC NAME E NU DENSITY ALPHA
Defines an isotropic linear elastic material. This material model may be used with all elements
except fluid elements.
E
NU [0.0]
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
Coefficient of thermal expansion.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL ELASTIC
MATERIAL FLUID NAME K DENSITY GRAVITY X0 Y0 Z0
Defines a linear fluid material. This material model may be used with 2-D and 3-D fluid
elements.
K
Bulk modulus.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
GRAVITY [0.0]
The gravity constant used in calculating free surface effects.
Note: This parameter is used only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=YES. To
specify gravity loads when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC use
commands: APPLY-LOAD and
LOAD MASSPROPORTIONAL INTERPRETATION=BODY-FORCE.
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
X's, Ys and Zs datum value for body force potential. See Theory and Modeling Guide.
Note: These parameters are used only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC
and when there are gravity loads entered using command
LOAD MASSPROPORTIONAL INTERPRETATION=BODY-FORCE.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide, Equation 2.11-35.
Auxiliary Commands
MATERIAL FLUID
MATERIAL GASKET NAME TREF DENSITY YIELD-CURVE G-G E-G ALPHA-G
LEAKAGE-PRESSURE E-INPLANE NU-INPLANE
ALPHA-INPLANE NPOINTS
lcurve
i
Defines a gasket material model. This material model may be used with low-order elements of
2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion coefficient.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
YIELD-CURVE [1]
Label of yield (loading) curve. This curve is defined using the LCURVE command.
G-G [0.0]
Transverse shear modulus. {G-G>=0.0}
E-G [0.0]
Tensile Young's modulus in normal direction.{E-G>=0.0}
ALPHA-G [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in normal direction. {ALPHA-G>=0.0}
LEAKAGE-PRESSURE [0.0]
Leakage pressure.
E-INPLANE [0.0]
Inplane Young's modulus. {E-INPLANE>=0.0}
NU-INPLANE [0.0]
Inplane Poisson's ratio. {NU-INPLANE>=0.0}
ALPHA-INPLANE [0.0]
Inplane mean coefficient of thermal expansion. {ALPHA-INPLANE>=0.0}
MATERIAL GASKET
NPOINTS [2]
The point number on the yield curve which corresponds to the initial yield point. All previ-
ous points are nonlinear elastic loading/unloading data.
lcurve
i
Label numbers of loading-unloading curves. The curves are defined using the LCURVE
command.
Note:
All loading-unloading curves must have same number of points (=NPOINT) and their first
point must have Pressure = 0.0 and their last point must coincide with a yield point.
MATERIAL GASKET
MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC NAME E NU YIELD Q1 Q2 Q3
F0 N FN SN EN TOL DENSITY
ALPHA TREF FC FF
Command MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC defines a Gurson plastic material. This material
model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
E
Young=s modulus. {> 0.0}
NU [0.0]
Poisson=s ratio. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}
YIELD
Initial yield stress in simple tension.
Q1 [1.5]
Q2 [1.0]
Q3 [2.25]
Tvergaard parameters.
F0 [0.0]
Initial void volume fraction.
N [0.1]
Stress-strain curve constant.
FN [0.04]
Volume fraction of void nucleating particles.
SN [0.1]
Standard deviation of normal distribution.
EN [0.3]
Mean plastic strain of normal distribution.
TOL [1.0E-7]
Solution tolerance.
MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC
Sec. 7.1 Material models MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
modeled.
TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion coefficient. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC NAME MODEL TENSION-CURVE
SHEAR-CURVE EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE
ORDER WEIGHTING CURVE-TYPE
ALPHA1 ALPHA2 ALPHA3 ALPHA4
ALPHA5 ALPHA6 ALPHA7 ALPHA8
ALPHA9 KAPPA DENSITY METHOD
NSINGULAR MAX-SINGV MIN-SINGV ECHO
This material model will not be supported from ADINA version 8.0 onwards, but is retained
for the convenience of users of previous versions.
Defines a hyperelastic material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic material
model for rubber materials.
A least squares curve fitting technique is employed to determine the parameters for a general-
ized Mooney-Rivlin or an Ogden material model from experimental stress versus strain (or
stretch) data. The data can be input for any of three test cases: (i) simple tension, (ii) pure
shear, or (iii) equibiaxial tension. A single test or combination of any two, or all three, can be
supplied. The accuracy of the model curve thus fitted depends on the number of data points,
and the desired approximation order of the model. The total number of data points, from all
three test cases, is subject to a minimum (equal to the input order for an Ogden model, and 2,
5, 9 for a generalized Mooney-Rivlin model of input order 1, 2, 3 respectively). See the
Theory and Modeling Guide for details.
MODEL [OGDEN]
Specifies which type of material model is to be used.
OGDEN The Ogden constants &
i
are determined, from the input
data curves and $
i
values.
MOONEY-RIVLIN The Mooney-Rivlin constants C
i
are determined.
TENSION-CURVE [0]
Indicates the label number of a (stress, strain) data curve, defined by command SCURVE,
which provides data for the simple tension test case. A value of 0 indicates no simple
tension data is supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as indicated
by parameter CURVE-TYPE.
SHEAR-CURVE [0]
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC
which provides data for the pure shear test case. A value of 0 indicates no pure shear data is
supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as indicated by parameter
CURVE-TYPE.
EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE [0]
which provides data for the equibiaxial tension test case. A value of 0 indicates no
equibiaxial tension data is supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as
indicated by parameter CURVE-TYPE.
ORDER [3]
Approximation order. Allowed values are:
1 # ORDER # 3 (MODEL = MOONEY-RIVLIN)
1 # ORDER # 9 (MODEL = OGDEN)
Note: If MODEL=MOONEY-RIVLIN, then the material constants derivied are as follows:
ORDER Constants
1 C1 C2
2 C1 C5
3 C1 C9
WEIGHTING [NO]
Specifies whether or not the least squares fitting scheme utilizes weighted data intervals.
Their use may provide a better fit for data with very irregular spacing of the strain (or stretch)
abscissae. {YES/NO}
CURVE-TYPE [STRAIN]
Indicates the type of input curve data given by parameters TENSION-CURVE, SHEAR-
CURVE, and EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE. The option is given for the data abscissae to be either
principal (engineering) strain, or principal stretch (= deformed length / undeformed length).
The ordinate values in either case are values of nominal stress (= force / unit undeformed
area).
STRAIN Input principal engineering strain data.
STRETCH Input principal stretch data.
ALPHAi [i (1 # i # 9)]
Ogden constants $
i
.
KAPPA [determined from the initial shear modulus,
assuming near incompressibility ( '=0.499)]
Bulk modulus.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
METHOD [SVD]
Specifies the least squares matrix equation solution method. Use of Gaussian elimination may
well result in model constants which alternate in sign and have very high magnitude. This is
due to the presence of near-singular terms in the least squares system. The singular value
decomposition method attempts to remove these terms during solution, yielding more
reasonable model constants without affecting the overall quality of the least squares fit. The
number of near-singular terms to be removed may be controlled by parameters MAX-SINGV,
MIN-SINGV. Near-singular terms are removed by default until a monotone increasing
solution is obtained for all test cases.
SVD The singular value decomposition method.
GAUSS Standard Gaussian elimination technique.
NSINGULAR [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates whether the number of near-singular terms to be removed in the singular value
decomposition solution method is controlled automatically by the program, or is to be
specified by you via parameters MAX-SINGV, MIN-SINGV. This parameter is only applicable
when METHOD = SVD.
AUTOMATIC The program controls the number of near-singular terms to be
removed by the singular value decomposition solution method.
CUSTOM You indicate the maximum and minimum number of
near-singular terms to be removed.
MAX-SINGV [ORDER (MODEL=OGDEN)]
[2 (ORDER=1, MODEL=MOONEY-RIVLIN)]
If NSINGULAR = CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the maximum number of near-singular
terms which are permitted to be removed during the search for a monotone increasing set of
result curves. MAX-SINGV may range from 0 (for which the resulting solution is identical to
that obtained by Gaussian elimination) to the total desired number of model constants, as
indicated by parameter ORDER.
MIN-SINGV [0]
If NSINGULAR = CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the minimum number of near-singular
terms which will be removed by the singular value decomposition method, i.e., the SVD
algorithm will remove at least MIN-SINGV terms even if a monotone solution set was ob-
tained with fewer terms removed.
ECHO [ALL]
Specifies the level of information reported by the command.
NONE The command behaves silently, except for a completion message.
MODEL The resulting Ogden / Mooney-Rivlin model constants are reported.
ALL As well as model constants, curve fitting statistics and comparison tables
of input and fitted stress values for the input strain/stretch points is
reported.
Note: It is required that the initial shear modulus be positive, i.e.,
$ %
i i
" & 0 0 . for an Ogden model.
or
C C 1 2 0 0 ( ) .
for a Mooney-Rivlin model.
Note: KAPPA is used in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional analyses.
Note: For a discussion on the singular value decomposition method and its application to
the least squares curve fitting algorithm, please consult the Theory and Modeling
Guide.
Note: It is unwise to apply this command to a small set of data within a narrow range of
strains (stretches). If possible, some values of strain (stretch) should be input for
compression, and it is recommended that the resulting material behavior always be
checked graphically with the MATERIALSHOW command.
Note: The generalized Mooney-Rivlin parameters C1 through C9 may be evaluated by
this command; the parameters D1, D2 are, however, set to zero by this command.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM NAME NPOINTS MU1 MU2 ... MU9
ALPHA1 ALPHA2 ... ALPHA9
BETA1 BETA2 ... BETA9 DENSITY FITTING-CURVE
ISO-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
VOL-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
Defines a hyper-foam material model, which is a hyperelastic material model for rubber
materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
NPOINTS [1]
This parameter is not used in this version of the AUI.
MUi [1.85 (i=1); 9.2 (i=2); 0.0 (i=3,4,5,...,9)]
ALPHAi [4.5 (i=1); -4.5 (i=2); 0.0 (i=3,4,5,...,9)]
BETAi [9.2 (i=1); 9.2 (i=2); 0.0 (i=3,4,5,...,9)]
Non-viscoelastic constants &
i
, $
i
, %
i
(i=1,2,3,...,9).
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
FITTING-CURVE [0.0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MUi, ALPHAi and
BETAi. If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MUi, ALPHAi and BETAi
will be ignored.
ISO-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label (isochoric) . This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-
VISCOELASTIC parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compat-
ibility.
VOL-VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS [0]
Viscoelastic-constants label (volumetric) . This parameter is superseded by the RUBBER-
VISCOELASTIC parameter. However, this parameter is still supported for backwards compat-
ibility.
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM
Sec. 7.1 Material models MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM
Notes:
1 &
i
* $
i
must be greater than zero.
2 %
i
must be greater than -1/3.
included.
TREF [0.0]
FULL.
RUBBER-TABLE [0]
A rubber-table of type Hyper-Foam must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
DENCE = FULL.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM
MATERIAL ILYUSHIN NAME E NU YIELD ET GAMMA DENSITY
Defines a nonlinear elastic-plastic material with the Ilyushin yield condition and isotropic
hardening. This material model may be used with plate elements.
E
NU [0.0]
YIELD
Yield stress in simple tension.
ET [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus.
GAMMA [0.0]
Ilyushin factor.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL ILYUSHIN
MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB NAME E NU PHI PSI COH TCUT DENSITY
DILATATION TEMPEFFECTS ECC ALPHA
Defines a nonlinear Mohr-Coulomb material model that may include temperature effects. This
material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements
E
NU [0.0]
Poissons ratio. {0.0 # NU < 0.5}
PHI
Friction angle in degrees. {) 0.0}
PSI [0.0]
Dilatation angle in degrees. {0.0 # PSI # PHI}
COH [0.0]
Cohesion. {! 0.0}
TCUT [1.0E10]
Tension cut-off limit. {! 0.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
DILATATION [YES]
Indicates whether to use or ignore the specified dilatation angle. {YES/NO}
TEMPEFFECTS [NO]
Indicates whether or not to apply temperature effects. Note that if temperature effects are
included, then a different potential function will be used (see the Theory and Modeling Guide
for details). {YES/NO}
ECC [0.1]
Eccentricity parameter at the apex of the Mohr-Coulomb yield surface. Applicable only when
temperature effects are included. {0.0 < ECC < 1.0}
MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB
ALPHA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion. Applicable only when temperature effects are
included. {! 0.0}
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN NAME C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 C9 D1 D2
KAPPA DENSITY FITTING-CURVE
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS
Defines a Mooney-Rivlin material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic material
model for rubber materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid
elements.
Ci [0.0 (1 # i # 9)]
Dj [0.0 (1 # j # 2)]
Generalized Mooney-Rivlin constants C
i
, D
j
. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for details.
Bulk modulus.
Note: It is required that the initial shear modulus be positive, i.e.,
C1 + C2 + D1+D2 > 0.0
KAPPA is used in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional analyses.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters C
i
and D
i
. If
FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for C
i
and D
i
will be ignored.
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN
included.
TREF [0.0]
FULL.
RUBBER-TABLE [0]
A rubber-table of type Mooney-Rivlin must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
DENCE = FULL.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR NAME E NU YIELD BOUND ET ETB
EPA DENSITY ALPHA TREF
Defines an elastic-plastic material with the Mroz yield criteria and bilinear hardening. This
material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
E
NU [0.0]
YIELD
BOUND
Bounding stress.
ET
ETB
Hardening modulus of the bounding surface.
EPA [0.0]
The maximum allowable effective plastic strain, which enables the modeling of rupture. The
stresses are set to zero when the effective plastic strain is greater than the rupture strain EPA.
EPA = 0.0 corresponds to no rupture condition.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
The mean coefficient of thermal expansion.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for calculation of ALPHA. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP NAME HARDENING
CREEP-LAW TEMP-UNIT
A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6
A7 TREF ALPHA TOLIL
DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2
TIME-HARDENING A8 A9 A10
A11 A12 A13 A14 A15
theta
i
E
i
nu
i
alpha
i
dcurve
i
Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic-multilinear and creep material, with von Mises yield
condition and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may be used with
truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.
HARDENING [ISOTROPIC]
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material.
ISOTROPIC Linear isotropic strain hardening.
KINEMATIC Linear kinematic strain hardening.
CREEP-LAW [0]
Indicates type of the creep law. For details of the creep laws, please refer to Section 3.6.3 of
the Theory and Modeling Guide.
{0/1/2/3/LUBBY2/BLACKBURN}
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
A0 ... A15 [0.0]
i
. A8 ... A15 are applicable only when CREEP-LAW = BLACKBURN.
TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.
ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter {0.0 # ALPHA # 1.0}, used in the integration of the thermo-
plastic and creep rate equations. The limiting values are:
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
be used simultaneously provided that they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates
that no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
theta
i
E
i
Youngs Modulus at temperature theta
i
.
nu
i
i
.
alpha
i
i
.
dcurve
i
Stress vs. strain curve at temperature theta
i
. This data entry is the label number of a stress-
strain curve defined via the SCURVE command.
When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=NO, stress
i
and strain
i
are interpreted as true stresses and
strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also intrepreted as true
stresses and strains.
When MASTER CONVERT-SSVAL=YES, stress
i
and strain
i
are interpreted as engineering
stresses and strains. Stresses and strains entered in the SCURVE command are also
intrepreted as engineering stresses and strains.
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If
the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
NAME HARDENING NCOEF TEMP-UNIT TREF ALPHA TOLIL
DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING CREEP-LAW
theta
i
E
i
nu
i
alpha
i
dcurve
i
Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic-multilinear and creep material, with temperature
and/or effective-stress dependent coefficients (see command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS ), von
Mises yield condition, and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may
be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.
Selects the type of strain hardening rule:
NCOEF
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS.
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
TREF [0.0]
Guide.
ALPHA [1.0]
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, as defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously, provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
CREEP-LAW [LAW3]
NONE No creep.
LAW3 e S T e
c
H
! " "
#
theta
i
E
i
i
.
nu
i
i
.
alpha
i
i
.
dcurve
i
Stress v strain curve at temperature theta
i
. This data entry is the label number of a stress-
strain curve defined via SCURVE.
i
and strain
i
i
and strain
i
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC NAME DENSITY DCURVE NU MATRIX
strain
i
stress
i
Defines a nonlinear elastic material. The model is uniaxial and the stress-strain curve is
defined as piecewise linear through the data points (strain
i
, stress
i
) which can be entered as
data lines following the command or can be referenced via the DCURVE parameter (see
SCURVE ). For a given strain, the total stress and tangent modulus are interpolated from the
input curve. This material model may be used with truss elements, 2-D solid and 3-D solid
elements.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
DCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This defines the stress-
strain data points associated with this material model. If DCURVE is input as 0, then the data
lines following the command define the stress-strain data points. Conversely, if DCURVE is
greater than zero then no data lines are expected.
NU [0.0]
Poisson's ratio. Not applicable to truss element. {-1.0 < NU < 0.5}
MATRIX [TANGENT]
This flag indicates whether the tangent or secant stress-strain matrix is used when the stress-
strain curve enters into a softening region. Not applicable to truss element.{TANGENT/
SECANT}
TANGENT Use tangent stress-strain matrix
SECANT Use secant stress-strain matrix
strain
i
Strain at data point i.
stress
i
Stress at strain strain
i
.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC
MATERIAL OGDEN NAME MU1 ALPHA1 MU2 ALPHA2 MU3
ALPHA3 MU4 ALPHA4 MU5 ALPHA5 MU6
ALPHA6 MU7 ALPHA7 MU8 ALPHA8 MU9
ALPHA9 KAPPA DENSITY FITTING-CURVE
Defines an Ogden material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic material model
for rubber materials. This material model may be used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
MUi [0.0 (1 # i # 9)]
ALPHAi [0.0 (1 # i # 9)]
Ogden constants &
i
, $
i
. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for details. Note that if
ALPHAi = 0.0 and curve fitting is used (i.e., FITTING-CURVE > 0), ALPHAi = i will be
assigned.
Bulk modulus.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
Note: It is required that the initial shear modulus be positive, i.e., &
i
.'
i
> 0.0 .
KAPPA is used in plane strain, axisymmetric and three-dimensional analyses.
FITTING-CURVE [0]
Fitting-curve label. The fitting curve is used to calculate the parameters MU
i
and ALPHA
i
.
If FITTING-CURVE > 0 is specified, any values specified for MU
i
and ALPHA
i
will be ignored.
MATERIAL OGDEN
included.
TREF [0.0]
FULL.
RUBBER-TABLE [0]
A rubber-table of type Ogden must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
DENCE = FULL.
MATERIAL OGDEN
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL OGDEN
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC NAME EA EB EC NUAB NUAC NUBC
GAB GAC GBC DENSITY WRINKLE
W-TIME ALPHA1 ALPHA2 ALPHA3
Defines an orthotropic linear elastic material. This material model may be used with 2-D solid,
3-D solid, shell and plate elements.
EA
a-direction modulus. {> 0.0}
EB
b-direction modulus. {> 0.0}
EC [0.0]
c-direction modulus. EC=0 is admissible only for PLATE elements ( EGROUP PLATE ).
{! 0.0}
NUAB [0.0]
a-b strain ratio.
NUAC [0.0]
a-c strain ratio.
NUBC [0.0]
b-c strain ratio.
GAB
a-b shear modulus. {> 0.0}
GAC [0.0]
a-c shear modulus. GAC=0 is admissible only for PLATE and 2D solid elements
( EGROUP PLATE and EGROUP TWODSOLID ). {! 0.0}
GBC [0.0]
b-c shear modulus. GBC=0 is admissible only for PLATE and 2D solid elements
( EGROUP PLATE and EGROUP TWODSOLID ). {! 0.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC
Chap. 7 Model definition MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC
WRINKLE [NO]
Indicates whether wrinkling is to be modeled (e.g., for fabrics). {YES/NO}
Note: Modeling of wrinkling is only allowed for TWODSOLID plane stress elements.
W-TIME [0.0]
Wrinkling time, i.e., the time at which wrinkling of the material is activated.
ALPHA1 [0.0]
The coefficient. of thermal expansion for the a direction.
ALPHA2 [0.0]
The coefficient. of thermal expansion for the b direction.
ALPHA3 [0.0]
The coefficient. of thermal expansion for the c direction.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR
NAME HARDENING E NU YIELD ET EPA STRAINRATEFUNCTION
DENSITY ALPHA TREF DEPENDENCY TRANSITION-STRAINRATE
EP-STRAINRATE BCURVE BVALUE XM-INF XM0 ETA STRAINRATE-FIT
Defines a bilinear elastic-plastic material model with von Mises yield condition. This material
model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.
Selects the type of strain hardening used by the material. {ISOTROPIC/KINEMATIC/
MIXED}
MIXED Mixed hardening. See Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 3.4.1
E
NU [0.0]
YIELD
ET [0.0]
EPA [0.0]
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain. This allows for the modeling of material rupture,
whereby the stresses are set to zero whenever the effective plastic strain is greater than the
rupture strain EPA. If EPA is input as 0.0, the rupture condition is not used. EPA is not
applicable to beam elements.
STRAINRATEFUNCTION [0]
The parameter is currently not used. Replaced by STRAINRATE-FIT.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
modeled.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for calculations of ALPHA. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Note: The parameters ALPHA, TREF are not applicable to TRUSS elements.
DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {YES/NO}
TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate.
EP-STRAINRATE [0.0]
Non-zero strainrate, used only if STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. This parameter is
obsolete, but kept for backwards compatibility.
BCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This parameter is
BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter.
XM-INF [0.0]
Hardening parameter M
!
, used only for mixed hardening.{0 # XM-INF # 1}
XM0 [0.0]
Hardening parameter M
0
, used only for mixed hardening.{0 # XM0 # 1}
ETA [0.0]
Hardening parameter # , used only for mixed hardening. {ETA ! 0}
If ETA )0, then 0, XM-INF , 1 and 0, XM0 ,1.
STRAINRATE-FIT [0]
The label number of a strainrate-fit describing the strain rate dependence of the yield stress.
The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command. A zero value
indicates no strain rate dependence.
Notes on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE, EP-STRAINRATE, BCURVE
and BVALUE parameters:
These parameters are used only if DEPENDENCY=YES.
1) STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE = 0. The strainrate material parameters are TRANSI-
TION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE. No curve-fitting is performed.
2) STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. The AUI uses the stress-strain curve entered in
BCURVE, and the associated strainrate EP-STRAINRATE, to determine the overstress ratio at
strainrate EP-STRAINRATE.
Then the AUI uses the input material parameter TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and the
overstress ratio in a curve-fitting procedure to determine material parameter BVALUE. Note
that the BCURVE>0 option is obsolete and kept only for backwards compatibility.
3) STRAINRATE-FIT > 0. There are two possibilities, depending upon how many strainrates
are entered in the strainrate-fit.
a) One strainrate (strainrate
1
) and stress-strain curve (scurve
1
) in the strainrate-fit. The AUI
determines the overstress ratio at strainrate
1
using scurve
1
. Then the AUI uses the input
material parameter TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and the overstress ratio in a curve-fitting
procedure to determine material parameter BVALUE.
b) More than one strainrate (strainrate
i
i
)in the strainrate-fit.
The AUI determines the overstress ratio at each strainrate
i
using scurve
i
. Then the AUI uses
these strainrates and overstress ratios in a curve-fitting procedure to determine both material
parameters TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP NAME HARDENING CREEP-LAW TEMP-UNIT A0
A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13
A14 A15 TREF ALPHA TOLIL DENSITY NRUPT1
NRUPT2 TIME-HARDENING
theta
i
E
i
nu
i
yield
i
ET
i
alpha
i
EPA
i
Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material, with von Mises yield condition
and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D
solid, 3-D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.
CREEP-LAW [0]
Indicates type of the creep law. Please refer to the Theory and Modeling Guide, Section 3.6.3
for details of the formulation of these creep laws. {0/1/2/3/LUBBY2/BLACKBURN}
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
A0 ... A15 [0.0]
i
.
TREF [0.0]
Guide.
ALPHA [1.0]
Time integration parameter { 0.0 # ALPHA # 1.0}, used in the integration of the thermo-
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
be used simultaneously provided that they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates
that no rupture criteria are to be used with the material definition.
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
theta
i
E
i
i
.
nu
i
i
.
yield
i
Yield stress in simple tension at temperature theta
i
.
ET
i
Strain hardening modulus at temperature theta
i
.
alpha
i
i
.
EPA
i
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain at temperature theta
i
enabling the modeling of
rupture. If EPA
i
= 0.0 the rupture condition is not used at temperature theta
i
.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE NAME HARDENING NCOEF,
TEMP-UNIT TREF ALPHA TOLIL
DENSITY NRUPT1 NRUPT2
TIME-HARDENING CREEP-LAW
theta
i
E
i
nu
i
yield
i
ET
i
alpha
i
EPA
i
Defines a nonlinear thermo-elastic-plastic and creep material, with temperature and/or
effective-stress dependent coefficients (see command CREEP-COEFFICIENTS ), von Mises
yield condition, and isotropic or kinematic strain hardening. This material model may be used
with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.
NCOEF
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS.
TEMP-UNIT [CELSIUS]
TREF [0.0]
Guide.
ALPHA [1.0]
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
NRUPT1 [0]
NRUPT2 [0]
Label numbers of rupture criteria, as defined by command RUPTURE. Two rupture criteria can
be used simultaneously, provided they are not of the same type. A zero value indicates that
TIME-HARDENING [NO]
theta
i
E
i
i
.
nu
i
i
.
yield
i
i
.
ET
i
i
.
alpha
i
i
.
EPA
i
i
rupture. If EPA
i
i
.
CREEP-LAW [LAW3]
NONE No creep.
LAW3 e S T e
c
H
! " "
#
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC NAME E NU DENSITY ALPHA
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC PLCYCL-KINEMATIC
PLCYCL-RUPTURE BETA MAXITE RTOL
Defines a plastic-cyclic material, that is, a material model used to model cyclic plasticity. This
material model can be used with 3-D solid elements.
E
NU [0.0]
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
modeled.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC
The number of a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition. This definition specifies the dependence of
the radius of the yield surface on the plastic strains. This parameter must be specified.
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC [0]
The number of a PLCYCL-KINEMATIC definition. This definition specifies the dependence
of the back stresses on the plastic strains. This parameter can be set to 0 to specify no
kinematic hardening.
PLCYCL-RUPTURE [0]
The number of a PLCYCL-RUPTURE definition. This definition specifies the rupture criterion.
This parameter can be set to 0 to specify no rupture.
BETA [AUTOMATIC]
A factor used in the stress integration (0 # BETA # 1). If BETA=AUTOMATIC,
ADINA automatically sets BETA based on the time integration method (=1 for static or
implicit dynamics, =0 for explicit dynamics).
MAXITE [100]
The maximum number of stress integration iterations allowed per integration point.
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC
RTOL [1E-12]
A tolerance used to assess convergence of stress integration iterations. This is a relative
tolerance, i.e., dimensionless values are tested against RTOL.
Notes:
1) The simplest material that can be defined using this command is given by a command
sequence such as
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 BILINEAR YIELD=2E8
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC=1
This material is perfectly plastic. This material description is equivalent to
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 YIELD=2E8
2) The PLASTIC-CYCLIC material can be used to model bilinear isotropic hardening using a
command sequence such as
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 BILINEAR YIELD=2E8 EP=2.090909E09
and this material description is equivalent to
ET=2.07E09
3) The plastic-cyclic material can be used to model multilinear isotropic hardening using a
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 MULTILINEAR
0 2E8
1E-3 2.5E8
2E-3 2.7E8
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3
9.6618E-4 2E8
2.2077E-3 2.5E8
3.3043E-3 2.7E8
4) The plastic-cyclic material can be used to model bilinear kinematic hardening using a
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC 1 BILINEAR YIELD=2E8
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC 1 ARMSTRONG-FREDRICK
2.090909E9
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC 1 E=2.07E11 NU=0.3 DENSITY=7800 PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC=1,
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC=1
ET=2.07E09,
HARDENING=KINEMATIC
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
NAME HARDENING E NU STRAINRATEFUNCTION DENSITY
ALPHA TREF DCURVE DEPENDENCY TRANSITION-STRAINRATE
EP-STRAINRATE BCURVE BVALUE STRAINRATE-FIT
strain
1
stress
1
(stress
1
= initial yield stress)
...
strain
i
stress
i
Defines a multilinear elastic-plastic material model with von Mises yield condition. The
stress-strain curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (strain
i
, stress
i
)
which can be entered as data lines following the command or can be referenced via the
DCURVE parameter (see SCURVE ). This material model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-
D solid, beam, iso-beam, shell and pipe elements.
i
and strain
i
i
and strain
i
E [0.0]
NU [0.0]
STRAINRATEFUNCTION [0]
The parameter is currently not used. Replaced by STRAINRATE-FIT.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHA [0.0]
modeled.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature to calculations of ALPHA. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Note: Parameters ALPHA, TREF are not applicable to TRUSS elements.
DCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This defines the stress-
strain data points associated with this material model. If DCURVE is input as 0, then the data
lines following the command define the stress-strain data points. Conversely, if DCURVE is
DEPENDENCY [NO]
Flag indicating strain rate dependency. {YES/NO}
TRANSITION-STRAINRATE [0.0001]
Transition strain rate.
EP-STRAINRATE [0.0]
Non-zero strainrate, used only if STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. This parameter is
BCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SCURVE. This parameter is
BVALUE [0.0]
Strain rate hardening parameter.
strain
1
Strain at data point 1. The input value here is overwritten by the calculated initial yield strain
(stress
1
/ E).
stress
1
Stress at strain
1
, equal to the initial yield stress.
strain
i
Strain at data point i (i > 1).
stress
i
Stress at strain
i
.
Note: The strain-stress data points can be input in any strain order (they will be
automatically sorted in increasing strain order) but all input strains must be greater
than or equal to strain
1
= (stress
1
/ E).
Note: The stress is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic strain is greater than the
maximum input strain value.
Note: The slope of the stress-strain curve (the tangent modulus, ET) must satisfy (for all
points in the nonlinear part of the curve):
0 # ET < E for isotropic hardening.
0.0001 " E # ET < E for kinematic hardening.
STRAINRATE-FIT [0]
The label number of a strainrate-fit describing the strain rate dependence of the yield stress.
The function must have been defined using the STRAINRATE-FIT command. A zero value
indicates no strain rate dependence.
Notes on the STRAINRATE-FIT, TRANSITION-STRAINRATE, EP-STRAINRATE, BCURVE
and BVALUE parameters:
These parameters are used only if DEPENDENCY = YES.
1) STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE = 0. The strainrate material parameters are TRANSI-
TION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE. No curve-fitting is performed.
2) STRAINRATE-FIT = 0 and BCURVE > 0. The AUI uses the stress-strain curve entered in
BCURVE, and the associated strainrate EP-STRAINRATE, to determine the overstress ratio at
strainrate EP-STRAINRATE.
Then the AUI uses the input material parameter TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and the
overstress ratio in a curve-fitting procedure to determine material parameter VALUE. Note
that the BCURVE > 0 option is obsolete and kept only for backwards compatibility.
3) STRAINRATE-FIT > 0. There are two possibilities, depending upon how many strainrates
are entered in the strainrate-fit.
a) One strainrate (strainrate
1
1
) in the strainrate-fit. The AUI
determines the overstress ratio at strainrate
1
using scurve
1
. Then the AUI uses the input
material parameter TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and the overstress ratio in a curve-fitting
procedure to determine material parameter BVALUE.
b) More than one strainrate (strainrate
i
i
)in the strainrate-fit.
The AUI determines the overstress ratio at each strainrate
i
using scurve
i
. Then the AUI uses
these strainrates and overstress ratios in a curve-fitting procedure to determine both material
parameters TRANSITION-STRAINRATE and BVALUE.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
NAME EA EB EC NUAB NUAC NUBC GAB GAC GBC
YIELDAA YIELDBB YIELDCC YIELDAB YIELDAC YIELDBC
ETAA ETBB ETCC ETAB ETAC ETBC EPLU EPA DENSITY
ALPHAA ALPHAB ALPHAC TREF OPTION METHOD
R0 R45 R90 F G H L M N C E0 NN
Defines a nonlinear orthotropic plastic material. This material model may be used with shell,
2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
EA, EB, EC
a-, b- and c-direction modulus, respectively. {> 0.0}
NUAB [0.0]
a-b strain ratio.
NUAC [0.0]
a-c strain ratio.
NUBC [0.0]
b-c strain ratio.
GAB
a-b shear modulus. {> 0.0}
GAC [0.0]
a-c shear modulus. GAC=0 is admissible only for 2D solid elements ( EGROUP TWODSOLID ). {!
0.0}
GBC [0.0]
b-c shear modulus. GBC=0 is admissible only for 2D solid elements ( EGROUP TWODSOLID ).
{! 0.0}
YIELDAA, YIELDBB, YIELDCC
Initial yield stress for a-, b- and c-direction, respectively. See notes at end of command
description.
YIELDAB
Initial yield stress for ab-plane. See notes at end of command description.
YIELDAC [0.0]
Initial yield stress for ac-plane. See notes at end of command description.
YIELDBC [0.0]
Initial yield stress for bc-plane. See notes at end of command description.
ETAA [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for a-direction. Used only for OPTION = 2.
ETBB [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for b-direction. Used only for OPTION = 2.
ETCC [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for c-direction. Used only for OPTION = 2.
ETAB [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for ab-plane. Used only for OPTION = 2.
ETAC [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for ac-plane. Used only for OPTION = 2.
ETBC [0.0]
Strain hardening modulus for bc-plane. Used only for OPTION = 2.
EPLU [0.0]
Universal plastic modulus; ratio of effective plastic stress to effective plastic strain (Hill).
Used only for OPTION = 1.
EPA [0.0]
Maximum allowable effective plastic strain. This allows for the modeling of material rupture,
whereby the stresses are set to zero whenever the effective plastic strain is greater than the
rupture strain EPA. If EPA is input as 0.0, the rupture condition is not used.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
ALPHAA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for a-direction.
ALPHAB [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for b-direction.
ALPHAC [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for c-direction.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for calculation of ALPHAA, ALPHAB and ALPHAC. See the Theory
and Modeling Guide.
OPTION [1]
Indicates method to determine plastic moduli:
1 The universal plastic modulus EPLU is used to determine the plastic moduli. Any
input values for the strain hardening moduli ETAA, ETBB, ETCC, ETAB, ETAC,
ETBC are ignored.
2 The moduli EA, EB, EC, GAB, GAC, GBC are used with the strain hardening
moduli ETAA, ETBB, ETCC, ETAB, ETAC, ETBC to determine the plastic
moduli. Any input value for the universal plastic modulus EPLU is ignored.
3 Constants C, E0 and NN are used to determine the plastic moduli. Any input values
for the strain hardening moduli ETAA, ETBB, ETCC, ETAB, ETAC, ETBC,
EPLU are ignored.
METHOD [1]
Indicates method to determine Hills anisotropy parameters f, g, h, l, m, n:
1 Anisotropy parameters are calculated by AUI based on yield stresses. Any input
values for R0, R45, R90, f, g, h, l, m, n are ignored.
2 Anisotropy parameters are calculated based on Lankford coefficients R0, R45, R90.
Any input values for f, g, h, l, m, n are ignored.
3 Anisotropy parameters are directly defined - f, g, h, l, m, n. Any input values for
R0, R45, R90 are ignored.
R0 [1.0]
Lankford coefficient for 0
0
to rolling direction.
R45 [1.0]
0
R90 [1.0]
0
F [0.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter f.
G [0.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter g.
H [0.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter h.
L [1.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter l.
M [1.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter m.
N [1.5]
Hill's anisotropy parameter n.
C [1.0]
Constant C of analytical stress-strain curve ' ( ( ! " )
* +
C
p
n
0
.
E0 [0.001]
Constant -
0
of analytical stress-strain curve ' ( ( ! " )
* +
C
p
n
0
.
NN [0.1]
Constant n of analytical stress-strain curve ' ( ( ! " )
* +
C
p
n
0
.
Note:
The initial yield stresses YIELDAA, ..., YIELDBC are used as follows:
If METHOD = 1, the initial yield stresses are directly used.
If METHOD = 2 or 3, and OPTION = 1 or 2, the initial yield stresses are only used to
calculate the quantity
.
y
=
/
[{(YIELDAA
2
+ YIELDBB
2
+ YIELDCC
2
)/3 + YIELDAB
2
+ YIELDAC
2
+ YIELDBC
2
}/2]
For other combinations of METHOD and OPTION, the initial yield stresses are not used.
Auxiliary commands
Sec. 7.1 Material models MATERIAL SMA
MATERIAL SMA NAME EM EA NUM NUA ALPHAM ALPHAA
CM CA MS MF AS AF SIGMAR CR
ETMAX TOLIL DENSITY TREF VTM0
Defines a shape-memory alloy (SMA) material. An SMA material may be used with truss, 2-D
solid, 3-D solid and isobeam elements.
EM
Elastic modulus for martensite. {> 0}
EA
Elastic modulus for austenite.{> 0}
NUM [0.0]
Poissons ratio for martensite.{0 # NUM < 0.5}
NUA [0.0]
Poissions ratio for austenite.{0 # NUA < 0.5}
ALPHAM [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for martensite. {! 0.0}
ALPHAA [0.0]
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion for austenite.{! 0.0}
CM
Slope of the martensite transformation conditions. {> 0}
CA
Slope of the austenite transformation conditions. {> 0}
MS
Transformation temperature at the start of martensite. {real}
MF
Transformation temperature at the end of martensite. {real}
AS
Transformation temperature at the start of austenite. {real}
AF
Transformation temperature at the end of austenite. {real}
SIGMAR [0.0]
Martensite re-orientation yield property at temperature 0=0. If SIGMAR > 0.0, the martensite
re-orientation calculation is performed.{! 0.0}
CR [0.0]
Slope of the martensite re-orientation yield function.{! 0.0}
ETMAX
Maximum residual transformation strain.{) 0.0}
TOLIL [1.0E-08]
Solution tolerance for effective stress calculation. {) 0.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
TREF [0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation.
VTM0 [0.0]
Initial twinned martensite fraction.{0.0 # VTM0 # 1.0}
MATERIAL SMA
Sec. 7.1 Material models MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE
NAME SSCURVE SSTYPE RELERROR KAPPA DENSITY
TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE TREF RUBBER-TABLE
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC RUBBER-MULLINS RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC
strain
i
stress
i
Defines a Sussman-Bathe material model, which is an incompressible nonlinear elastic
material model for rubber materials. This material model can be used with 2-D solid and 3-D
solid elements.
SSCURVE [0]
Label number of a stress-strain curve defined by command SSCURVE. This defines the stress-
strain data points associated with this material model. If SSCURVE is input as 0, then the data
lines following the command define the stress-strain data points. Conversely, if SSCURVE is
SSTYPE [ENGINEERING]
The type of stress-strain data entered, either in the SSCURVE command or in the data input
lines. {ENGINEERING/TRUE/STRETCH}
ENGINEERING engineering strains, engineering stresses
TRUE true strains, true stresses
STRETCH stretches, engineering stresses
RELERROR [0.01]
The relative error used to determine the number of splines. This value must be greater than
0.0.
KAPPA [0.0]
The bulk modulus, used for 3-D, plane strain and axisymmetric elements. If the bulk modulus
is 0.0, then the AUI computes the bulk modulus using a Poissons ratio of 0.499.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
included.
FULL The material properties are temperature dependent. Parameters SSCURVE to KAPPA,
and RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC to RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC of this command are
ignored. No data input lines are expected.
TREF [0.0]
FULL.
RUBBER-TABLE [0]
A rubber-table of type TRS must be entered. This rubber-table is a
table of temperatures and corresponding coefficients of thermal expansion.
A rubber-table of type Sussman-Bathe must be entered. This rubber-table is a table of
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
If RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set
from the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.
This parameter is not used when TEMPERATURE-DEPENDENCE = FULL.
RUBBER-MULLINS [0]
If RUBBER-MULLINS is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If RUBBER-MULLINS is nonzero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-MULLINS command.
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
If RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set
from the corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.
strain
i
, stress
i
The strain and stress at data point i. The strain and stress are interpreted according to the
SSTYPE parameter.
The (strain,stress) data points are assumed to correspond to a uniaxial tension/compression
conditions.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC NAME TREF DENSITY
theta
i
E
i
nu
i
alpha
i
Defines a nonlinear isotropic thermo-elastic material model which considers the variation of
material properties with temperature. Linear interpolation is performed to determine values at
intermediate temperatures. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid,
isobeam, shell and pipe elements.
TREF [0.0]
The reference temperature for expansion coefficient calculation. See the Theory and Model-
ing Guide.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
theta
i
Temperature at data point i. (i # 16)
E
i
i
. (i # 16)
nu
i
i
. (i # 16)
alpha
i
i
. (i # 16)
value is used.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC NAME TREF DENSITY
theta
i
Ea
i
Eb
i
Ec
i
nuab
i
nuac
i
nubc
i
Gab
i
Gac
i
Gbc
i
alphaa
i
alphab
i
alphac
i
Defines a nonlinear orthotropic thermo-elastic material model which considers the variation of
material properties with temperature. Linear interpolation is performed to determine values at
intermediate temperatures. This material model may be used with shell, 2-D solid and 3-D
solid elements.
TREF [0.0]
Guide.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
theta
i
Ea
i
a-direction modulus at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
Eb
i
b-direction modulus at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
Ec
i
c-direction modulus at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
nuab
i
a-b strain ratio at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
nuac
i
a-c strain ratio at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
nubc
i
b-c strain ratio at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
Gab
i
a-b shear modulus at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC
Gac
i
a-c shear modulus at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
Gbc
i
b-c shear modulus at temperature theta
i
. (i # 16)
alphaa
i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in a-direction at temperature theta
i
.
alphab
i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in b-direction at temperature theta
i
.
alphac
i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion in c-direction at temperature theta
i
.
values are used.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC NAME HARDENING TREF TOLIL
DENSITY
theta
i
E
i
nu
i
yield
i
ET
i
alpha
i
EPA
i
Defines a nonlinear thermo-plastic material. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D
solid, 3-D solid, isobeam, shell and pipe elements.
TREF [0.0]
Guide.
TOLIL [1.0E-10]
Solution tolerance. See Theory and Modeling Guide.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
theta
i
E
i
i
.
nu
i
i
.
yield
i
i
.
ET
i
i
.
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC
alpha
i
i
.
EPA
i
i
rupture. If EPA
i
i
.
values are used.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED NAME INTEG NSUBD TREF DENSITY
LENGTH1 LENGTH2 OPTION NCTI NSCP NCTD
CTI1 ... CTI99 SCP1 ... SCP99 LENGTH3 LENGTH4
AUTOLEN NONSYM DENSITY
temp
i
alpha
i
ctd1
i
ctd2
i
... CtdNCTD
i
Defines a user-supplied material for use with ADINA, with options for piezoelectric or
consolidation analyses (requiring interaction with ADINA-T). This material model may be
used with 2-D solid and 3-D solid elements.
INTEG [FORWARD]
Stress integration scheme. {FORWARD/BACKWARD}
FORWARD Forward integration scheme.
BACKWARD Backward integration scheme.
NSUBD [10]
Number of subdivisions of strain increments used in the integration of stresses. If INTEG =
BACKWARD, NSUBD = 1 is always used regardless of this input. { > 0 }
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature for thermal expansion calculation. See the Theory and Modeling
Guide.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
LENGTH1 [60]
Length of working real array for storing/retrieving history dependent variables. See the
LENGTH2 [2]
Length of working integer array for storing/retrieving history dependent variables. See
OPTION [NONE]
Special analysis options. {NONE/PIEZOELECTRIC/CONSOLIDATION/LINEAR}
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED
NONE - No special analysis option
PIEZOELECTRIC - Piezoelectric analysis (involving interaction with ADINA-T)
CONSOLIDATION - Consolidation analysis.
LINEAR - Linear material model option
NCTI
Number of active material property constants. {0 # NCTI # 99}
NSCP
Number of active solution control parameters. {0 # NSCP # 99}
NCTD [0]
Number of active temperature dependent material properties. {0 # NCTD # 98}
CTI1 ... CTI99 [0.0]
User defined material constants.
SCP1 ... SCP99 [0.0]
User defined solution control parameters.
LENGTH3 [0]
Number of parameters from the real working array to write to porthole file.
{0 # LENGTH3 # LENGTH1}
LENGTH4 [0]
Number of parameters from the integer working array to write to porthole file.
{0 # LENGTH4 # LENGTH2}
AUTOLEN [0]
Flag for setting the size of working and output arrays LENGTH1 - LENGTH4. {0 1 1}
0 Manually set via LENGTH1 - LENGTH4 variables
1 Automatically set by call to user coded material subroutine with KEY=0
NONSYM [NO]
Flag for symmetry of stiffness matrix generated by this user-supplied material. {NO/YES}
Note: Nonsymmetric stiffness matrix can only be activated when a non-symmetric solver is
selected.
DENSITY [1.0]
Mass density. {! 0.0}
temp
i
alpha
i
Mean coefficient of the thermal expansion at temperature temp
i
.
ctdJ
i
value of temperature-dependent material property J at temperature temp
i
.
Note: The material properties are automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature.
If the same temperature is given several times, only the last given values are used.
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC NAME NSUBD TREF C1 C2 ALPHA G-FUNCTION
K-FUNCTION DENSITY SHIFT
theta
i
alpha
i
Defines a viscoelastic material with time dependent and temperature dependent material
properties. This material model may be used with truss, 2-D solid, 3-D solid and shell ele-
ments.
the existing material definition is overwritten.
NSUBD [10]
Number of subdivisions of strain increments used in the integration of stresses.
TREF [0.0]
Reference temperature used by the WLF (Williams-Landell-Ferry) equation for temperature-
time shift calculation.
C1 [0.0]
C2 [0.0]
Material constants used by the WLF (Williams-Landell-Ferry) equation or the Arrhenius
equation for temperature-time shift calculation.
ALPHA [0.0]
Constant mean coefficient of thermal expansion. If no temperature table is defined, alpha is
assumed constant.
G-FUNCTION
Label number of a table, defined by command FTABLE, containing a series of shear moduli
and decay coefficients to represent the shear modulus relaxation function.
K-FUNCTION
Label number of a table, defined by command FTABLE, containing a series of bulk moduli
and decay coefficients to represent the bulk modulus relaxation function.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density.
SHIFT [WLF]
Specifies the time-temperature superposition law. {WLF/ARRHENIUS}
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC
WLF Williams-Landell-Ferry equation
ARRHENIUS Arrhenius equation
The following data lines are used only when the coefficient of thermal expansion is tempera-
ture-dependent:
theta
i
alpha
i
i
. (i # 16)
Auxiliary commands
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC
TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC NAME K C JOULE-HEAT ELECTRIC-K DENSITY
Defines a constant, isotropic, conductivity and constant specific heat material.
This command is used in ADINA thermal coupling for TRUSS, 2D/3D Solid, BEAM,
ISOBEAM, PIPE elements only.
K [0.0]
Thermal conductivity. {! 0.0}
C [0.0]
Heat capacity per unit volume. {! 0.0}
JOULE-HEAT [NO]
Indicates whether this material is used for Joule heat analysis. { YES/NO }
ELECTRIC-K [0.0]
Constant electrical conductivity (in chosen units, e.g., Siemens/m).
{ ! 0.0 }
DENSITY [1.0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST
DELETE TMC-MATERIAL FIRST LAST
TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC
Sec. 7.1 Material models TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC
TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC NAME KA KB KC C JOULE-HEAT EKA
EKB EKC DENSITY
Defines a constant, orthotropic, thermal conductivity and constant specific heat material.
KA [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in a-direction. {! 0.0}
KB [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in b-direction. {! 0.0}
KC [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in c-direction. {! 0.0}
C [0.0]
JOULE-HEAT [NO]
Indicates whether this material is used for Joule heat analysis. {YES/NO}
EKA [0.0]
EKB [0.0]
EKC [0.0]
Electrical conductivity in the a-, b- and c-directions. (units: electrical conductance/length,
e.g., Siemens/m) {! 0.0}
DENSITY [1.0]
Auxiliary commands
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K NAME C JOULE-HEAT DENSITY
theta
i
k
i
electric-k
i
Defines a material with temperature dependent thermal conductivity and constant specific
heat.
C [0.0]
JOULE-HEAT [NO]
DENSITY [1.0]
theta
i
k
i
Thermal conductivity at temperature theta
i
.
electric-k
i
Electrical conductivity at temperature theta
i
.
Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing temperature. If the same
temperature is given several times, only the last given value is used.
Auxiliary commands
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K
Sec. 7.1 Material models TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC NAME K DENSITY
theta
i
c
i
Defines a material with temperature dependent specific heat and constant, isotropic, thermal
conductivity.
K [0.0]
Thermal conductivity. {! 0.0}
DENSITY [1.0]
theta
i
c
i
Heat capacity per unit volume at temperature theta
i
.
Auxiliary commands
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC NAME KA KB KC
CONDUCTIVITY DENSITY
theta
i
c
i
ka
i
kb
i
kc
i
Defines a material with temperature dependent specific heat and constant, orthotropic thermal
conductivity.
KA [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in a-direction. {! 0.0}
KB [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in b-direction. {! 0.0}
KC [0.0]
Thermal conductivity in c-direction. {0.0}
CONDUCTIVITY [CONSTANT]
Flags whether conductivity is constant or input in table. {CONSTANT/TABLE}
DENSITY [1.0]
theta
i
c
i
i
.
ka
i
[value of parameter KA]
Thermal conductivity in a-direction {! 0.0}
kb
i
[value of parameter KB]
Thermal conductivity in b-direction {! 0.0}
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC
kc
i
[value of parameter KC]
Thermal conductivity in c-direction {! 0.0}
Auxiliary commands
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K NAME JOULE-HEAT DENSITY
theta
i
k
i
c
i
electric-k
i
Defines a material with temperature dependent specific heat and thermal conductivity.
JOULE-HEAT [NO]
DENSITY [1.0]
theta
i
k
i
Thermal conductivity at temperature theta
i
.
c
i
i
.
electric-k
i
Electrical conductivity at temperature theta
i
.
Auxiliary commands
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K
Sec. 7.1 Material models TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K
TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K NAME C DENSITY
time
i
k
i
Defines a material with time dependent thermal conductivity and constant specific heat.
C [0.0]
DENSITY [1.0]
time
i
k
i
Conductivity at time
i
.
Note: The input data is automatically sorted in order of increasing time. If the same time is
given several times, only the last given value is used.
Auxiliary commands
CURVE-FITTING NAME ORDER TENSION-CURVE SHEAR-CURVE
EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE WEIGHTING CURVE-TYPE
METHOD NSINGULAR MAX-SINGV MIN-SINGV ECHO
Defines a fitting curve for hyperelastic material models.
A least squares curve fitting technique is employed to determine the parameters for a
Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce or hyper-foam material model from experimental
stress versus strain (or stretch) data. The data can be input for any of three test cases:
(i) simple tension,
(ii) pure shear, or
(iii) equibiaxial tension.
A single test or combination of any two, or all three, can be supplied. The accuracy of the
model curve thus fitted depends on the number of data points, and the desired approximation
order of the model.
The total number of data points, from all three test cases, is subject to a minimum, as follows:
2,5,9 for a Mooney-Rivlin model of input order 1, 2, 3 respectively;
the input order for the Ogden material;
2 for the Arruda-Boyce material; and
the input order for the hyper-foam material.
NAME [(current highest curve-fitting label number) + 1]
Label number of the curve-fitting to be defined. If the label number of an existing curve-fitting
is given, then the previous curve-fitting definition is overwritten. This curve number can be
assigned to the Mooney-Rivlin, Ogden, Arruda-Boyce or hyper-foam material model where
material constants for the model are evaluated form the input curves (see Notes at the end of
this command).
ORDER [3]
Approximation order. Allowed values are:
Mooney-Rivlin material: 1 to 3
Ogden material: 1 to 9
Arruda-Boyce material: 2
Hyper-foam material: 1 to 9
TENSION-CURVE [0]
Indicates the label number of a (stress, strain) data curve, which provides data for the simple
tension test case. This data curve is defined by command SSCURVE. A value of 0 indicates
no simple tension data is supplied. The abscissae may be interpreted as strain or stretch as
CURVE-FITTING
indicated by parameter CURVE-TYPE.
SHEAR-CURVE [0]
Similar to TENSION-CURVE, except that this curve provides data for the pure shear test case.
EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE [0]
Similar to TENSION-CURVE, except that this curve provides data for the equilbiaxial tension
test case.
WEIGHTING [NO]
Specifies whether the least squares fitting scheme utilises weighted data intervals or not ---
their use may provide a better fit for data with very irregular spacing of the strain (or stretch)
abscissae. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details. Input values are YES or
NO.
CURVE-TYPE [STRAIN]
Indicates the type of input curve data given by parameters TENSION-CURVE, SHEAR-
CURVE, and EQUIBIAXIAL-CURVE. The option is given for the data abscissae to be either
principal (engineering) strain, or principal stretch (= deformed length /undeformed length).
The ordinate values in either case are values of nominal stress (= force / unit undeformed
area). {STRAIN/STRETCH}
STRAIN -input principal engineering strain data
STRETCH - input principal stretch data
METHOD [SVD]
Specifies the least squares matrix equation solution method. Use of Gaussian elimination may
well result in model constants which alternate in sign and have very high magnitude. This is
due to the presence of near-singular terms in the least squares system. The "singular value
decomposition" method attempts to remove these terms during solution, yielding more
reasonable model constants without affecting the overall quality of the least squares fit. The
number of near-singular terms to be removed may be controlled by parameters MAX-SINGV,
MIN-SINGV. Near-singular terms are removed by default until a monotone increasing
solution is obtained for all test cases.
This parameter is only used for the Mooney-Rivlin and Ogden material models.
SVD - The singular value decomposition method
GAUSS - Standard Gaussian elimination technique
NSINGULAR [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates whether the number of near-singular terms to be removed in the singular value
decomposition solution method is controlled automatically by the program, or is to be
CURVE-FITTING
user-specified via parameters MAX-SINGV, MIN-SINGV. This parameter is only applicable
when METHOD=SVD.
AUTOMATIC - the program controls the number of near-singular terms to be removed
by the singular value decomposition solution method.
CUSTOM - the user indicates the maximum and minimum number of near-singular
terms to be removed.
MAX-SINGV [0]
If NSINGULAR=CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the maximum number of near-singular
terms which are permitted to be removed during the search for a monotone increasing set of
result curves.
MAX-SINGV may range from 0 (for which the resulting solution is identical to that obtained
by Gaussian elimination) to the total desired number of model constants, as indicated by
parameter ORDER.
This parameter is only applicable when METHOD=SVD.
MIN-SINGV [0]
If NSINGULAR=CUSTOM, this parameter indicates the minimum number of near-singular
terms which will be removed by the singular value decomposition method, i.e. the SVD
algorithm will remove at least MIN-SINGV terms even if a monotone solution set was
obtained with fewer terms removed.
This parameter is only applicable when METHOD=SVD.
ECHO [ALL]
Specifies the level of information reported by the command:
NONE - the command behaves silently, except for a completion message
MODEL - the resulting material model constants are reported
ALL - as well as model constants, curve fitting statistics and comparison tables
of input and fitted stress values for the input strain/stretch points is
reported.
Notes:
1 For a discussion on the singular value decomposition method and its application to the
least squares curve fitting algorithm, please consult the Theory and Modeling Guide.
2 It is unwise to apply this command to a small set of data within a narrow range of strains/
stretches. If possible, some values of strain/stretch should be input for compression, and
CURVE-FITTING
it is recommended that the resulting curve-fitting behavior always be checked with the
MATERIALSHOW command.
3 The respective constants for each material model calculated from the input data curves
are as follows (see Section 3.8.5 of the Theory and Modeling Guide Volume I for more details):
Mooney-Rivlin:
ORDER Constants
1 C1, C2
2 C1 - C5
3 C1 - C9
Ogden: The constants &
i
and $
i
are calculated from i = 1 to ORDER.
Arruda-Boyce: ORDER = 2 only, with constants C1 to C5.
Hyper-foam: The constants &
i
, $
i
and %
i
are calculated from i = 1 to ORDER.
CURVE-FITTING
Chap. 7 Model definition CURVE-FITTING
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS NAME NPOINTS BETA1 BETA2 BETA3 BETA4
BETA5 TAU1 TAU2 TAU3 TAU4 TAU5 ETA1 ETA2
ETA3 ETA4 ETA5
Defines viscoelastic contants for a viscoelastic material model.
NAME [(current highest viscoelastic-constants label
number) + 1]
Label number of the viscoelastic-contants to be defined. If the label number of an existing
viscoelastic-contants is given, then the previous definition is overwritten.
NPOINTS [2]
Number of constants. {1<=NPOINTS<=5}
BETA1 [1.0]
BETA2 [1.0]
BETA3 [0.0]
BETA4 [0.0]
BETA5 [0.0]
Free energy factors. {BETA>=0.0}
TAU1 [30.0]
TAU2 [20.0]
TAU3 [0.0]
TAU4 [0.0]
TAU5 [0.0]
Relaxation time. {TAU>0.0}
ETA1 [4.002676E6]
ETA2 [4.002676E6]
ETA3 [0.0]
ETA4 [0.0]
ETA5 [0.0]
{ETA>=0.0}
Auxiliary commands
LIST VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS FIRST LAST
DELETE VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS FIRST LAST
Chap. 7 Model definition PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION
PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION CLOSE-TOL XTOL YTOL ZTOL
CLOSE-NODE PHI-ANGLE NORMAL-ANGLE
This command controls certain parameters used during the phi model completion phase of
constructing the data file. The phi model completion phase is performed only when there are
potential-based fluid elements in the model.
CLOSE-TOL [AUTOMATIC]
This parameter controls which tolerances are used during when searching for structural
nodes coincident with potential-based fluid nodes.
AUTOMATIC The tolerances from the TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC command are
used. The coincidence checks are the same as are used during mesh
generation.
CUSTOM The tolerances XTOL, YTOL, ZTOL of this command are used.
XTOL [0.0]
YTOL [0.0]
ZTOL [0.0]
Tolerances used for coincident node checking during phi model completion, used only when
CLOSE-TOL = CUSTOM. Note that XTOL, YTOL, ZTOL are absolute tolerances. To be
specific, a structural node with coordinates (XS,YS,ZS) are coincident with a fluid node with
coordinates (XF,YF,ZF) when
XF-XTOL # XS # XF+XTOL
YF-YTOL # YS # YF+YTOL
ZF-ZTOL # ZS # ZF+ZTOL
CLOSE-NODE [CLOSEST]
This parameter controls which node is taken if two or more nodes are coincident.
HIGHEST The node with the highest number is taken.
CLOSEST The closest node is taken.
PHI-ANGLE [30]
This parameter, in degrees, is used in constructing the boundary conditions for a node on a
free surface that is adjacent to the structure. When the angle between two adjacent faces of
the structural boundary is greater than PHI-ANGLE, the AUI treats the intersection of the
faces as a sharp corner. When the angle between two adjacent faces of the structural bound-
ary is less than or equal to PHI-ANGLE, the AUI considers the faces to approximate smooth
boundary.
NORMAL-ANGLE [80]
This parameter, in degrees, is the maximum angle between the unmodified and modified free
normals on a fluid free surface.
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR NAME YIELD EP
Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type bilinear. This definition can be used in the
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.
NAME [(current highest plcycl-isotropic label number) + 1]
Label number of the plcycl-isotropic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
isotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
YIELD
Yield stress (radius of yield surface).
EP [0.0]
Hardening modulus, giving the change in yield stress with respect to the accumulated
effective plastic strain.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST
DELETE PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC FIRST LAST
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR NAME
aeps
i
stress-radius
i
Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type multilinear. This definition can be used in
the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.
aeps
i
Accumulated effective plastic strain, interpreted as a logarithmic strain in large strain analy-
sis.
stress-radius
i
Associated radius of yield surface (yield stress).
During the analysis, if the accumulated effective plastic strain exceeds the largest value of
aeps
i
, then ADINA issues an error message and either stops or cuts back the time step (if the
ATS method is used).
Auxiliary commands
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL NAME YIELD Q B
Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type exponential. This definition can be used in
the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.
YIELD
Yield stress (radius of yield surface). This parameter must be entered.
Q [0.0]
B [0.0]
Parameters giving the change in yield stress with respect to the accumulated effective plastic
strain, see the Theory and Modeling Guide. If Q is positive, the material cyclically hardens,
if Q is negative, the material cyclically softens. Q and B default to 0.0.
Auxiliary commands
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY- EXPONENTIAL NAME YIELD Q0 QM MU B ETA
Sets up a PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC definition of type memory-exponential. This definition can be
used in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.
The strain memory surface algorithm of Lemaitre and Chaboche is used, see the Theory and
Modeling Guide.
YIELD
Yield stress (radius of yield surface). This parameter must be entered.
Q0 [0.0]
QM [0.0]
MU [0.0]
B [0.0]
ETA [0.5]
Parameters giving the change in yield surface radius with respect to the accumulated effective
plastic strain and the strain memory, see the Theory and Modeling Guide. All of these
parameters, except for ETA, default to 0.0; ETA defaults to 0.5.
Auxiliary commands
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY-EXPONENTIAL
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-FREDRICK NAME
h
i
zeta
i
Sets up a PLCYCL-KINEMATIC definition of type Armstrong-Fredrick. This definition can be
used in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.
NAME [(current highest plcycl-kinematic label number) + 1]
Label number of the plcycl-kinematic definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-
kinematic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
h
i
Linear kinematic hardening constant.
zeta
i
[0.0]
Nonlinear kinematic hardening constant. It is allowed to set zeta
i
=0.0.
Note:
When zeta
i
=0.0, then h
i
is equal to the plastic hardening modulus E
p
.
It is allowed to enter several values of h
i
and zeta
i
, each with a different value of zeta
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PLCYCL-KINEMATIC FIRST LAST
DELETE PLCYCL-KINEMATIC FIRST LAST
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-FREDRICK
PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS NAME VALUE
Sets up a PLCYCL-RUPTURE definition of type AEPS (accumulated effective plastic strain).
This definition can be used in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC command.
NAME [(current highest plcycl-rupture label number) + 1]
Label number of the plcycl-rupture definition. If the label number of an existing plcycl-rupture
data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
VALUE
The value of accumulated effective plastic strain at which the material ruptures. It is allowed
to enter nothing for this value, then the material will not rupture.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PLCYCL-RUPTURE FIRST LAST
DELETE PLCYCL-RUPTURE FIRST LAST
PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN NAME
theta
i
alpha
i
c1
i
c2
i
c3
i
c4
i
c5
i
c6
i
c7
i
c8
i
c9
i
d1
i
d2
i
kappa
i
fitting-curve
i
rubber-viscoelastic
i
rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
Defines a rubber-table data set of type Mooney-Rivlin. This data set can be used to describe
the temperature dependence of the Mooney-Rivlin material constants in the MATERIAL
MOONEY-RIVLIN command.
NAME [(current highest rubber-table label number) + 1]
Label number of the rubber-table data set to define. If the label number of an existing rubber-
table data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
theta
i
The temperature corresponding to the material properties entered in this data input line.
alpha
i
[0.0]
The coefficient of thermal expansion.
c1
i
... c9
i
[0.0]
d1
i
... d2
i
[0.0]
kappa
i
[0.0]
The material properties.
fitting-curve
i
[0]
If fitting-curve
i
is zero, no fitting curve is used.
If fitting-curve
i
is nonzero, curve-fitting data from the CURVE-FITTING command is used to
compute the material properties, and c1
i
to d2
i
are ignored.
rubber-viscoelastic
i
[0]
If rubber-viscoelastic
i
is zero, no viscoelastic effects are included.
i
is non-zero, viscoelastic effects are included, using the data set from
the corresponding RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC command.
rubber-mullins
i
[0]
If rubber-mullins
i
is zero, no Mullins effects are included.
If rubber-mullins
i
is non-zero, Mullins effects are included, using the data set from the
rubber-orthotropic
i
[0]
If rubber-orthotropic
i
is zero, no orthotropic effects are included.
i
is non-zero, orthotropic effects are included, using the data set from the
corresponding RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC command.
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN
Auxiliary commands
LIST RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST
DELETE RUBBER-TABLE FIRST LAST
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY RIVLIN
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN NAME
theta
i
alpha
i
mu1
i
alpha1
i
mu2
i
alpha2
i
mu3
i
alpha3
i
mu4
i
alpha4
i
mu5
i
alpha5
i
mu6
i
alpha6
i
mu7
i
alpha7
i
mu8
i
alpha8
i
mu9
i
alpha9
i
kappa
i
fitting-curve
i
rubber-viscoelastic
i
rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
Defines a rubber-table data set of type Ogden. This data set can be used to describe the
temperature dependence of the Ogden material constants in the MATERIAL OGDEN com-
mand.
theta
i
alpha
i
[0.0]
mu1
i
... mu9
i
[0.0]
alpha1
i
... alpha9
i
[0.0]
kappa
i
[0.0]
fittting-curve
i
[0]
If fittting-curve
i
If fittting-curve
i
compute the material properties, and mu1
i
to alpha9
i
are ignored.
rubber-viscoelastic
i
[0]
i
i
rubber-mullins
i
[0]
If rubber-mullins
i
If rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
[0]
i
i
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN
Auxiliary commands
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN
Sec. 7.1 Material models RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE
RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE NAME
theta
i
alpha
i
mu
i
lambda
i
kappa
i
fitting-curve
i
rubber-viscoelastic
i
rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
Defines a rubber-table data set of type Arruda-Boyce. This data set can be used to describe
the temperature dependence of the Arruda-Boyce material constants in the MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE command.
theta
i
alpha
i
[0.0]
mu
i
[0.0]
lambda
i
[0.0]
kappa
i
[0.0]
fittting-curve
i
[0]
If fittting-curve
i
If fittting-curve
i
compute the material properties, and mu
i
, lambda
i
are ignored.
rubber-viscoelastic
i
[0]
i
i
rubber-mullins
i
[0]
If rubber-mullins
i
If rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
[0]
i
i
Auxiliary commands
RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM NAME
theta
i
alpha
i
mu1
i
alpha1
i
beta1
i
mu2
i
alpha2
i
beta2
i
mu3
i
alpha3
i
beta3
i
mu4
i
alpha4
i
beta4
i
mu5
i
alpha5
i
beta5
i
mu6
i
alpha6
i
beta6
i
mu7
i
alpha7
i
beta7
i
mu8
i
alpha8
i
beta8
i
mu9
i
alpha9
i
beta9
i
fitting-curve
i
rubber-viscoelastic
i
rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
Defines a rubber-table data set of type hyper-foam. This data set can be used to describe the
temperature dependence of the hyper-foam material constants in the MATERIAL HYPER-
FOAM command.
theta
i
alpha
i
[0.0]
mu1
i
... beta
i
[0.0]
fittting-curve
i
[0]
If fittting-curve
i
If fittting-curve
i
compute the material properties, and mu1
i
to alpha9
i
are ignored.
rubber-viscoelastic
i
[0]
i
i
rubber-mullins
i
[0]
If rubber-mullins
i
If rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
[0]
i
i
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM
Auxiliary commands
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM
Sec. 7.1 Material models RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE
RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE NAME
theta
i
alpha
i
sscurve
i
sstype
i
relerror
i
kappa
i
rubber-viscoelastic
i
rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
Defines a rubber-table data set of type Sussman-Bathe. This data set can be used to describe
the temperature dependence of the Sussman-Bathe material model in the MATERIAL
SUSSMAN-BATHE command.
theta
i
alpha
i
[0.0]
sscurve
i
The uniaxial tension/compression stress-strain curve for this temperature, defined by the
SSCURVE command.
sstype
i
[ENGINEERING]
The interpretation of the stress-strain data. {ENGINEERING/TRUE/STRETCH}
ENGINEERING engineering strains, engineering stresses
TRUE true strains, true stresses
STRETCH stretches, engineering stresses
relerror
i
[0.01]
The relative error, used to determine the number of splines for this
temperature. relerrori cannot equal 0.0.
kappa
i
[0.0]
The bulk modulus, used for 3-D, plane strain and axisymmetric elements.
If kappa
i
= 0.0, then the AUI computes the bulk modulus based on a Poissons ratio of 0.499.
rubber-viscoelastic
i
[0]
i
i
Chap. 7 Model definition RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE
rubber-mullins
i
[0]
If rubber-mullins
i
If rubber-mullins
i
rubber-orthotropic
i
[0]
i
i
RUBBER-TABLE TRS NAME
theta
i
alpha
i
Defines a rubber-table data set of type TRS. This data set can be used to specify the coeffi-
cients of thermal expansion for the MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN,
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM materials, when the TRS
temperature dependence option is used.
theta
i
alpha
i
[0.0]
Auxiliary commands
RUBBER-TABLE TRS
RUBBER-TABLE TRS
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH NAME R M GENERATION_FACTOR
Defines a data set of type rubber-Mullins, subtype Ogden-Roxburgh. This data set can be
referenced by the MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, MATERIAL OGDEN, MATERIAL
ARRUDA-BOYCE and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to add the Mullins effect to
any of these materials.
NAME [current highest rubber-mullins label number + 1]
Label number of the rubber-Mullins data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-Mullins data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
R [0.0]
M [0.0]
The material constants of the Ogden-Roxburgh model for the Mullins effect, see the ADINA
Theory and Modeling Guide.
GENERATION_FACTOR [0.0]
The fraction of energy dissipated by the Mullins effect model that is considered as heat
generation. For example, if GENERATION_FACTOR = 1.0, then all energy dissipated by the
Mullins effect model is considered as heat generation. Heat generation can cause heating in
a TMC (thermo-mechanical coupling) analysis.
Auxiliary commands:
LIST RUBBER-MULLINS FIRST LAST
DELETE RUBBER-MULLINS FIRST LAST
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL NAME SHIFT C1 C2
beta
i
tau
i
generation_factor
i
usage
i
Defines a data set of type rubber-viscoelastic, subtype Holzapfel. This data set can be
ARRUDA-BOYCE and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to add the viscoelastic effect
to any of these materials.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide for the meanings of the material parameters.
NAME [current highest rubber-viscoelastic label number + 1]
Label number of the rubber-viscoelastic data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-viscoelastic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
SHIFT [NONE]
Specifies the time-temperature superposition shift law. {NONE/WLF/ARRHENIUS}
NONE Time-temperature superposition is not used.
WLF The WLF (Williams-Landel-Ferry) shift function is used for the time-
temperature superposition.
ARRHENIUS The Arrhenius shift function is used for the time-temperature superposi-
tion.
C1 [0.0]
C2 [0.0]
The material constants for the WLF or Arrhenius shift functions.
beta
i
[0.0]
Beta for chain (i) of the viscoelastic model.
tau
i
[0.0]
Tau for chain (i) of the viscoelastic model. Tau must be greater than 0.
generation_factor
i
[0.0]
The heat generation factor (fraction of dissipation energy convered into heat generation). If
generation_factor
i
= 0, the dissipation is not calculated and there is no heat generation.
usage
i
[DEVIATORIC]
The usage of the chain. {COMBINED/DEVIATORIC/VOLUMETRIC/AORTHO/BORTHO/
CORTHO}
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL
COMBINED The chain is based on the total strain energy.
DEVIATORIC The chain is based on the deviatoric strain energy.
VOLUMETRIC The chain is based on the volumetric strain energy.
AORTHO The chain is based on the A direction orthotropic strain energy.
BORTHO The chain is based on the B direction orthotropic strain energy.
CORTHO The chain is based on the C direction orthotropic strain energy
(not supported in this version)
Auxiliary commands
LIST RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC FIRST LAST
DELETE RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC FIRST LAST
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL NAME BETAA BETAB K1 K2
COMPRESSION
Defines a data set of type rubber-orthotropic, subtype Holzapfel. This data set can be
ARRUDA-BOYCE and MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM commands to add the orthotropic effect to
any of these materials.
See the ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide for the meanings of the material parameters.
NAME [current highest rubber-orthotropic label number + 1]
Label number of the rubber-orthotropic data set to define. If the label number of an existing
rubber-orthotropic data set is defined, then the previous definition is overwritten.
BETAA [0.0]
The angle (in degrees) between the material a axis and the fiber A direction n
a
.
BETAB [0.0]
The angle (in degrees) between the material b axis and the fiber B direction n
b
. This parameter
is not used if DIRECTION = AHOOP.
K1 [0.0]
K1 [0.0]
The material constants of the orthotropic strain energy function.
COMPRESSION [NO]
If COMPRESSION = NO, then material fibers in compression do not contribute to the
orthotropic strain energy (no strain energy in compression). If COMPRESSION = YES, then
material fibers in compression contribute to the orthotropic strain energy.
DIRECTION [AB]
If DIRECTION = AB, then the fiber directions are n
a
and n
b
. If DIRECTION = AHOOP, then the
fiber directions are n
a
and x (the hoop direction). AHOOP is allowed only for axisymmetric
elements.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST
DELETE RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE NAME
sigma
i
a0
i
a1
i
a2
i
a3
i
a4
i
a5
i
a6
i
a7
i
Defines an effective-stress v creep-coefficients table, which can be referenced by command
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR to define the temperature and/or effective-stress
dependence of creep material models with variable coefficients, see commands
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE.
See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details.
NAME [(current highest COEFFICIENTS-TABLE label number) + 1]
Label number of the stress v creep-coefficient table to be defined.
sigma
i
Stress at data point i.
a0
i
Creep law coefficient a0 at stress sigma
i
.
a1
i
i
.
a2
i
i
.
a3
i
i
.
a4
i
i
.
a5
i
i
.
a6
i
i
.
a7
i
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST COEFFICIENTS-TABLE FIRST LAST
DELETE COEFFICIENTS-TABLE FIRST LAST
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2 NAME
theta
i
a0
i
a1
i
a2
i
a3
i
a4
i
a5
i
Defines the dependency of creep law coefficients on temperature. This creep coefficient
function is referenced by the NCOEF parameter in the commands:
if CREEP-LAW=LUBBY2 is specified in those commands.
NAME [(current highest creep-coefficient
function label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep-coefficient function to be defined.
theta
i
Temperature at data point "i".
a0
i
[0.0]
Creep law coefficient a0 at "theta
i
".
a1
i
[0.0]
i
".
a2
i
[0.0]
i
".
a3
i
[1.21e8]
i
". {2 0.0}
a4
i
[188000]
i
". {2 0.0}
a5
i
[251000]
i
". {2 0.0}
Auxiliary commands:
LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2 FIRST LAST
DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2 FIRST LAST
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR NAME
theta
i
ccurve
i
Defines the temperature and/or effective-stress dependence of creep material models with
variable coefficients, see commands
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE, and COEFFICIENTS-TABLE.
theta
i
ccurve
i
Stress vs. creep-coefficient table at temperature theta
i
, see command
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST
DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY NAME
theta
i
a0
i
a1
i
a2
i
a3
i
a4
i
a5
i
a6
i
a7
i
Defines the dependency of creep law coefficients on temperature. This creep coefficient
function is referenced by the NCOEF parameter in the commands:
if CREEP-LAW=LAW3 is specified in those commands.
theta
i
a0
i
i
".
a1
i
i
".
a2
i
i
".
a3
i
i
".
a4
i
i
".
a5
i
i
".
a6
i
i
".
a7
i
i
".
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY
Sec. 7.1 Material models CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY
Auxiliary commands:
LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY FIRST LAST
DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-ONLY FIRST LAST
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED NAME
Defines the temperature and/or effective-stress dependence of creep material models with
variable coefficients, see commands:
MATERIAL MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE.
The dependence is defined via a user-supplied function, see the Theory and Modeling Guide
for further details.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED FIRST LAST
DELETE CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED FIRST LAST
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED
CURVATURE-MOMENT NAME
curvature
i
moment
i
Defines a curvature v moment curve which can be referenced by the command
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE . The curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data
points (curvature
i
, moment
i
).
NAME [(current highest CURVATURE-MOMENT
label number) + 1]
Label number of the curvature v moment curve to be defined.
curvature
i
Curvature at data point i.
moment
i
Moment at curvature
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CURVATURE-MOMENT FIRST LAST
DELETE CURVATURE-MOMENT FIRST LAST
CURVATURE-MOMENT
FTABLE NAME F0 OPTION WEIGHTING W1 W2 TAU
modulus
i
decay
i
(OPTION=DIRECT)
modulus
i
time
i
(OPTION=TEST)
Defines a series of modulus and decay coefficients to represent a modulus relaxation function
used by command MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC.
F0 is 0
th
term of modulus and the corresponding decay coefficient is zero.
If OPTION=TEST, input data are interpreted as the modulus response vs. time. The program
will convert time history curve into a Prony-Dirichlet series representation.
NAME [(current highest FTABLE label number) + 1]
Label number of the modulus-decay function to be defined. If the label number of an existing
function is given, existing function definition is overwritten.
F0 [0.0]
The 0
th
term of modulus representation. Used only when OPTION=DIRECT
OPTION [DIRECT]
DIRECT Table data are input in Prony series
TEST Table data are input in pairs of modulus vs. time
WEIGHTING [NO]
Specifies if least squares fitting scheme is used to smooth moduli terms. Used only if
OPTION=TEST. {NO/YES}
W1 [0.0]
Weighting parameter 1. Active only if WEIGHTING=YES.
W2 [0.0]
Weighting parameter 2. Active only if WEIGHTING=YES.
TAU [0.0]
Relaxation parameter for calculating decay
i
.
modulus
i
Modulus at term "i", or modulus corresponding to time "i"
FTABLE
decay
i
Decay coefficient at term "i"
time
i
Time corresponding to modulus
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FTABLE FIRST LAST
DELETE FTABLE FIRST LAST
FTABLE
FORCE-STRAIN NAME
strain
i
force
i
Defines a force-strain curve which can be referenced by the command
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE.
The curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (strain
i
, force
i
).
NAME [(current highest FORCE-STRAIN label number) + 1]
Label number of the force-strain curve to be defined.
strain
i
Axial strain at data point i.
force
i
Axial force at strain
i
.
Note: The force is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic axial strain exceeds the
maximum effective plastic axial strain on the yield curve (force vs. plastic-strain)
obtained from the above force v total-strain curve.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FORCE-STRAIN FIRST LAST
DELETE FORCE-STRAIN FIRST LAST
FORCE-STRAIN
IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE NAME
temperature
i
neutron-table
i
Defines the dependency of irradiation creep variables on temperature and fast neutron
fluence.
NAME [(current highest irradiation_creep-table label number)
+ 1]
Label number of the irradiation creep table to be defined.
temperature
i
neutron-table
i
Neutron fluence table at temperature theta
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE FIRST LAST
DELETE IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE FIRST LAST
IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE
IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE NAME
force
i
curvature-moment
i
Defines a moment-curvature curve which can be referenced by the command
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE .
NAME [(current highest MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE
label number) + 1]
Label number of the curvature v moment curve to be defined.
force
i
Axial force at data point i.
curvature-moment
i
Label number of the curvature-moment at force
i
. (See CURVATURE-MOMENT ).
Note: For plasticity models, the curves defined by the input data are transformed to yield
curves which are linearly interpolated to obtain the yield curve corresponding to
the current axial force.
Note: The bending moment is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic curvature
exceeds the maximum effective plastic curvature reached by the interpolated yield
curves.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE FIRST LAST
DELETE MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE FIRST LAST
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE
MOMENT-TWIST-FORCENAME
force
i
twist-moment
i
Defines a moment-twist curve which can be referenced by the command
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE.
NAME [(current highest MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE
label number) + 1]
Label number of the moment-twist curve to be defined.
force
i
Axial force at data point i.
twist-moment
i
Label number of the twist-moment at force
i
. (See TWIST-MOMENT ).
Note: For plasticity models, the curves defined by the input data are transformed to yield
curves which are linearly interpolated to obtain the yield curve corresponding to
the current axial force.
Note: The bending moment is assumed to be zero when the effective plastic twist exceeds
the maximum effective plastic twist reached by the interpolated yield curves.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE FIRST LAST
DELETE MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE FIRST LAST
MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE
PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY MATERIAL PX PY PZ COMPRESS FLUIDBULK
POROSITY
Defines pore fluid properties.
MATERIAL
Label number of the material (must be existing).
PX [1.0E-9]
PY [1.0E-9]
PZ [1.0E-9]
Permeability in X, Y and Z directions. Must be positive.
COMPRESS [NO]
Indicates whether the fluid is compressible. {NO/YES}
FLUIDBULK [2.1E9]
Bulk modulus of the pore fluid. Used only when COMPRESS = YES. {)0.0}
POROSITY [0.75]
Porosity of the porous solid material. Used only when COMPRESS = YES. {)0.0}
PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY
NEUTRON-DOSE NAME
time
i
neutron-fluence
i
Defines a neutron fluence as a function of time. The command defines a time dependent total
neutron fluence for the irradiation creep material model.
The time range input should cover the entire time interval required in the solution.
NAME [(current highest neutron dose label number) + 1]
Label number of neutron dose to be defined. If the label number of an existing neutron dose
is given, then the previous definition is overwritten.
time
i
neutron-fluence
i
Neutron fluence at time
i
.
NEUTRON-DOSE
NEUTRON-TABLE NAME
neutron-fluence
i
irradiation-strain
i
E
i
alpha
i
Defines a neutron fluence table which can be referenced by an irradiation creep table.
NAME [(current highest NEUTRON-TABLE label number) + 1]
Label number of the neutron fluence table to be defined.
neutron-fluence
i
Neutron-fluence at data point i.
irradiation-strain
i
Irradiation-strain at neutron-fluence
i
.
E
i
Youngs modulus at neutron-fluence
i
.
alpha
i
Mean coefficient of thermal expansion at neutron-fluence
i
.
Auxiliary commands:
LIST NEUTRON-TABLE FIRST LAST
DELETE NEUTRON-TABLE FIRST LAST
NEUTRON-TABLE
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C NAME XC XN
Defines a nonlinear relationship between the damping force and the relative velocity of the
nonlinear spring element. The relationship is of the form,
F C U
D N
3 +

NAME [(current highest property label number) + 1]
Label number of the property to be defined.
XC
Constant C in the definition of function F
D
, see above.
XN
Exponent N in the definition of function F
D
, see above.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C FIRST LAST
DELETE PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C FIRST LAST
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K NAME RUPTURE
relative-displacement
i
force
i
Defines a nonlinear relationship between relative-displacement and force from which the
stiffness and force of a nonlinear spring element are obtained.
RUPTURE [NO]
Indicates whether a spring ruptures if the relative displacement exceeds the limiting values of
the input relative-displacements. If YES then the force is assumed zero beyond the minimum,
maximum values of the relative-displacement. {YES/NO}
relative-displacement
i
Relative displacement (between spring nodes) at data point i.
force
i
Spring force at relative-displacement
i
.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K FIRST LAST
DELETE PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K FIRST LAST
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M NAME
time
i
mass
i
Defines the time-dependent total mass for nonlinear spring elements. The input time range
should cover that of the entire analysis.
time
i
mass
i
Spring mass at time
i
.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M FIRST LAST
DELETE PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M FIRST LAST
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M
PROPERTYSET NAME K M C S NONLINEAR NK NM NC
Defines stiffness, mass, damping, and stress transformation properties for SPRING elements
in a set termed a propertyset.
See the Theory and Modeling Guide for further details on the resulting spring element
stiffness, mass, damping, and stress transformation matrices evaluated from these constants.
Label number of the propertyset to be defined.
K
Linear spring element stiffness. {> 0.0}
M [0.0]
Total mass of linear spring element. The corresponding mass matrix is lumped or consistent
according to the MASS-MATRIX command.
C [0.0]
Linear spring element damping coefficient.
S [0.0]
Stress transformation constant for a linear spring element. This constant is used to form a
stress transformation matrix, which when multiplied by the element nodal displacements gives
a stress value.
NONLINEAR [NO]
Indicates whether a nonlinear spring propertyset is to be defined. {YES/NO}
NK [0]
Label number of a nonlinear stiffness property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K ). For
NONLINEAR = YES a value must be supplied.
NM [0]
Label number of a nonlinear mass property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M ).
NC [0]
Label number of a nonlinear damping property (see PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C ).
Note: If skew degree-of-freedom systems are applied at the nodes of a spring element
then ADINA will make any necessary transformation to account for the skew
system directions.
Note: For a grounded spring, with one nodal degree of freedom specified, the total mass
PROPERTYSET
of the element is lumped at the spring node degree of freedom.
Note: Stress calculations are carried out for spring elements only when RESULTS =
STRESSES is set by the EGROUP SPRING command.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PROPERTYSET FIRST LAST
DELETE PROPERTYSET FIRST LAST
PROPERTYSET
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE NONLINEAR-ELASTIC
NAME RIGIDITY-AXIAL MOMENT-R
MOMENT-S MOMENT-T DENSITY
MASS-AREA MASS-RINERTIA
MASS-SINERTIA MASS-TINERTIA ALPHA
Defines a nonlinear-elastic rigidity for BEAM elements.
NAME [(current highest RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE
label number) + 1]
Label number of the rigidity to be defined.
RIGIDITY-AXIAL
Axial rigidity.
MOMENT-R [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE giving the torsional moment
of inertia as a nonlinear elastic function of the twist per unit length.
MOMENT-S [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE giving the bending
moment of inertia about the s-axis of a beam element as a nonlinear elastic function of the
corresponding curvature.
MOMENT-T [0]
moment of inertia about the t-axis of a beam element as a nonlinear elastic function of the
corresponding curvature.
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density (in units of mass/length
3
). Used in the calculation of the mass matrix.
MASS-AREA
Cross-sectional area (in units of length
2
). Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.
MASS-RINERTIA
Second moment of area for torsion about the r-axis of a beam element, including warping
effects (in units of length
4
MASS-SINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the s-axis of a beam element (in units of length
4
).
Used only in the calculation of the mass matrix.
MASS-TINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the t-axis of a beam element (in units of length
4
).
ALPHA
Thermal expansion coefficient.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST
DELETE RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
NAME HARDENING BETA FORCE-
AXIAL MOMENT-R MOMENT-S
MOMENT-T AXIAL-CYCLIC-FACTOR
BENDING-CYCLIC-FACTOR
TORSION-CYCLIC-FACTOR DENSITY
MASS-AREA MASS-RINERTIA
MASS-SINERTIA MASS-TINERTIA
ACURVE-TYPE TCURVE-TYPE
BCURVE-TYPE ALPHA
Defines a plastic-multilinear rigidity for BEAM elements.
NAME [(current highest RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE
label number) + 1]
Label number of the rigidity to be defined.
MIXED Linear mixed strain hardening.
BETA
Factor used in mixed hardening to determine the amounts of kinematic and isotropic harden-
ing. BETA = 0 results in purely kinematic hardening while BETA = 1 results in purely
isotropic hardening. {0.0 < BETA < 1.0}
FORCE-AXIAL [0]
Label number of a curve defined by FORCE-STRAIN giving the axial force as a multilinear
plastic function of the axial strain.
MOMENT-R [0]
Label number of a curve defined by MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE giving the torsional moment
of inertia as a multilinear function of the twist per unit length.
MOMENT-S [0]
moment of inertia about the s-axis of a beam element as a multilinear function of the corre-
sponding curvature.
MOMENT-T [0]
moment of inertia about the t-axis of a beam element as a multilinear function of the corre-
sponding curvature.
AXIAL-CYCLIC-FACTOR [1.0]
Ratio of the initial elastic axial rigidity and the elastic axial rigitity after first yield. {! 1.0}
BENDING-CYCLIC-FACTOR [1.0]
Ratio of the initial elastic bending rigidity and the elastic bending rigidity after first yield.
{! 1.0}
TORSIONAL-CYCLIC-FACTOR [1.0]
Ratio of the initial elastic torsional rigidity and the elastic torsional rigidity after first yield.
{! 1.0}
DENSITY [0.0]
Mass density (in units of mass/length
3
). Used in the calculation of the mass matrix.
MASS-AREA
Cross-sectional area (in units of length
2
MASS-RINERTIA
Second moment of area for torsion about the r-axis of a beam element, including warping
effects (in units of length
4
MASS-SINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the s-axis of a beam element (in units of length
4
).
MASS-TINERTIA
Second moment of area for bending about the t-axis of a beam element (in units of length
4
).
Note: For the curves input via FORCE-AXIAL, MOMENT-R, MOMENT-S, and
MOMENT-T, the first data point corresponds to the yield point, all data points
must have positive coordinates, and the slope (hardening modulus) of any curve
segment cannot be greater than the elastic modulus of the curve.
Note: Softening is not modeled.
ACURVE-TYPE [SYMMETRIC]
Indicates whether the axial force-strain curve is symmetric or not.
{SYMMETRIC/UNSYMMETRIC}
TCURVE-TYPE [SYMMETRIC]
Indicates whether the torsional moment-twist curves are symmetric or not.
BCURVE-TYPE [SYMMETRIC]
Indicates whether the bending moment-curvature curves are symmetric or not.
ALPHA
Thermal expansion coefficient.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST
DELETE RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE FIRST LAST
RUPTURE MULTILINEAR NAME COMPRESS TRIAXIALITY
theta
i
rupture-curve
i
Defines a rupture criterion in terms of a multilinear relationship between temperature and
creep rupture strain v. effective stress curves - see the Theory and Modeling Guide for
details. The rupture criterion may be referenced by any of the creep material models, e.g. see
command MATERIAL CREEP.
NAME [(current highest rupture criterion
label number) + 1]
Label number of the rupture criterion to be defined.
COMPRESS [YES]
Indicates whether creep rupture can occure in compression. {YES/NO}
TRIAXIALITY [YES]
Indicates whether triaxiality factor is used. {YES/NO}
theta
i
rupture-curve
i
Creep rupture-strain vs. effective stress curve at temperature theta
i
, defined by command
RUPTURE-CURVE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RUPTURE MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST
DELETE RUPTURE MULTILINEAR FIRST LAST
RUPTURE MULTILINEAR
RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER NAME ALPHA BETA SIGMA
Defines a rupture criterion in terms of the first three stress invariants -- see the Theory and
Modeling Guide for details. The rupture criterion may be referenced by any of the creep
material models, e.g. see command MATERIAL CREEP.
NAME [(current highest rupture criterion
label number) + 1]
Label number of the rupture criterion to be defined.
ALPHA [0.0]
First coefficient of the three-parameter rupture law.
BETA [0.0]
Second coefficient of the three-parameter rupture law.
SIGMA [0.0]
Effective stress at rupture for the three-parameter rupture law.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER FIRST LAST
DELETE RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER FIRST LAST
RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER
RUPTURE-CURVE NAME
strain
i
stress
i
Defines a creep rupture strain v. effective stress curve which may be referenced by command
RUPTURE to define a rupture criterion for a creep material model. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide for further details.
NAME [(current highest RUPTURE-CURVE
label number) + 1]
Label number of the creep rupture strain vs. effective stress curve to be defined.
strain
i
Creep rupture strain at data point i.
stress
i
Stress at creep rupture strain strain
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RUPTURE-CURVE FIRST LAST
DELETE RUPTURE-CURVE FIRST LAST
RUPTURE-CURVE
SCURVE NAME
strain
i
stress
i
Defines a stress-strain curve which can be referenced by a material model. The stress-strain
curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (strain
i
, stress
i
).
NAME [(current highest SCURVE label number) + 1]
Label number of the stress-strain curve to be defined.
strain
i
Strain at data point i.
stress
i
Stress at strain strain
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SCURVE FIRST LAST
DELETE SCURVE FIRST LAST
SCURVE
SSCURVE NAME CONSTANT-NU NU
strain
i
stress
i
strain2
i
Defines a stress-strain curve which can be referenced by a material model. The stress-strain
curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (strain
i
, stress
i
).
This command is currrenlty used only for hyperelastic curve fitting.
NAME [(current highest SSCURVE label number) + 1]
Label number of the stress-strain curve to be defined. If the label number of an existing curve
is given, then the previous curve definition is overwritten.
CONSTANT-NU [NO]
Flag indicate constant nu is used or not {YES/NO}
This parameter is only used when this curve is referenced by the hyper-foam material model.
NU
Specifies the Poissons ratio when CONSTANT-NU=YES.
This parameter is only used with the hyper-foam material model.
Note that NU must be in one of the ranges:
-1 < NU < 0.0, 0.0 < NU < 0.5
strain
i
Strain at data point "i".
stress
i
Stress at data point "i".
strain2
i
Lateral strain at data point "i".
strain2
i
is only used if CONSTANT-NU=NO is specified and this curve is used for a hyper-
foam material model.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SSCURVE FIRST LAST
DELETE SSCURVE FIRST LAST
SSCURVE
Sec. 7.1 Material models SSCURVE
LCURVE NAME
closure
i
pressure
i
Defines a loading-unloading curve which can be referenced by the gasket material model. The
loading-unloading curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (pressure
i
,
closure
i
).
NAME [(current highest LCURVE label number) + 1 ]
Label number of the loading-unloading curve to be defined. If the label number of an existing
curve is given, then the previous curve definition is overwritten.
closure
i
Closure at data point "i".
pressure
i
Pressure at data point "i".
Note: First point must have pressure =0.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LCURVE FIRST LAST
DELETE LCURVE FIRST LAST
LCURVE
STRAINRATE-FIT NAME
strainrate
i
scurve
i
Defines a strainrate-fit. The strainrate-fit can be specified in the MATERIAL PLASTIC-
BILINEAR and MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR commands, for the curve fitting of
strainrate material parameters.
NAME [(current highest strainrate-fit label number) + 1]
Label number of the strain-rate fit to be defined. If the label number of an existing strainrate-fit
is given, then the previous strainrate-fit definition is overwritten.
strainrate
i
The strainrate associated with scurve
i
. The strainrate must be greater than 0.0.
scurve
i
The stress-strain curve, specified by the SCURVE command, for strainrate
i
.
STRAINRATE-FIT
Sec. 7.2 Cross-sections / layers
TWIST-MOMENT NAME
twist
i
moment
i
Defines a twist v moment curve which can be referenced by the MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE
command. The curve is defined as piecewise linear through the data points (twist
i
, moment
i
).
NAME [(current highest TWIST-MOMENT label number) + 1]
Label number of the twist v moment curve to be defined.
twist
i
Twist per unit length at data point i.
moment
i
Moment at twist
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TWIST-MOMENT FIRST LAST
DELETE TWIST-MOMENT FIRST LAST
TWIST-MOMENT
CROSS-SECTION BOX NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICK1
THICK2 SC TC TORFAC SSHEARF
TSHEARF
CROSS-SECTION BOX defines a box cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
sectional characteristics of an elastic Hermitian BEAM element.
NAME [(current highest cross-section label number) + 1]
Label number of the cross-section to be defined.
WIDTH
HEIGHT
THICK1
THICK2
The dimensions of the box cross-section. See Figure.
WIDTH
H
E
I
G
H
T
THICK1 THICK1
THICK2
THICK2
centroid
Y'
X'
CROSS-SECTION BOX
SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
Offset coordinates from the origin of the s-t beam axes to the centroid of the cross-section.
Note that the principal axes x-y of the cross-section are assumed parallel to the s-t axes of
the beam.
TORFAC [1.0]
The torsional rigidity of the cross-section, corresponding to St. Venant torsion with free
warping, is multiplied by the factor TORFAC. (See Theory and Modeling Guide for details).
SSHEARF [0.0 (no s-direction shear effect)]
TSHEARF [0.0 (no t-direction shear effect)]
The shear areas corresponding to the beam s and t directions are calculated as the total
cross-sectional area multiplied by the factors SSHEARF, TSHEARF, respectively.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST
DELETE CROSS-SECTION FIRST LAST
CROSS-SECTION BOX
CROSS-SECTION I NAME WIDTH1 HEIGHT WIDTH2
THICK1 THICK2 THICK3 SC TC
TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF
CROSS-SECTION I defines an I cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
WIDTH1
H
E
I
G
H
T
THICK3
centroid
Y'
X'
THICK1
WIDTH2
THICK2
CROSS-SECTION I
WIDTH1
HEIGHT
WIDTH2
THICK1
THICK2
THICK3
The dimensions of the I cross-section. See Figure.
SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
the beam.
TORFAC [1.0]
Auxiliary commands
CROSS-SECTION I
CROSS-SECTION L NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICK1 THICK2
SC TC TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF
CROSS-SECTION L defines an L cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
WIDTH1
HEIGHT
THICK1
THICK2
The dimensions of the L cross-section. See Figure.
SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
the beam.
TORFAC [1.0]
H
E
I
G
H
T
centroid
Y'
X'
T
H
I
C
K
2
THICK1
CROSS-SECTION L
Auxiliary commands
CROSS-SECTION L
CROSS-SECTION PIPE NAME DIAMETER THICKNESS SC TC
TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF SOLID
CROSS-SECTION PIPE defines a pipe cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
sectional characteristics of a BEAM or PIPE element.
centroid
Y'
X'
DIAMETER
T
H
I
C
K
N
E
S
S
CROSS-SECTION PIPE
DIAMETER
THICKNESS
The diameter and thickness dimensions, respectively, of the pipe cross-section. See Figure.
SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
the beam.
TORFAC [1.0]
Note: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF are only applicable to
elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.
SOLID [NO]
Indicates whether the cross section is solid, i.e. not hollow. If SOLID=YES, THICKNESS
input is ignored and the thickness is set to half the diameter value. {YES/NO}
Auxiliary commands
CROSS-SECTION PIPE
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR NAME WIDTH HEIGHT SC TC
TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF
ISHEAR SQUARE
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR defines a rectangular cross-section which can be used to
describe the cross-sectional characteristics of a BEAM or ISOBEAM element.
WIDTH
H
E
I
G
H
T
centroid
Y'
X'
WIDTH
HEIGHT
The width and height dimensions, respectively, of the rectangular cross-section. See Figure.
SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
the beam.
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR
TORFAC [1.0]
ISHEAR [NO]
Indicates whether transverse shear effects are to be included. {YES/NO}
Note: The parameters SC, TC, TORFAC, SSHEARF, TSHEARF are applicable only to
elastic Hermitian BEAM elements.
Note: The parameter ISHEAR is applicable only to plastic Hermitian BEAM elements.
SQUARE [NO]
Indicates whether the cross section shape is square. If SQUARE=YES, HEIGHT input is
ignored and the height is set equal to the width.{YES/NO}
Auxiliary commands
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR
CROSS-SECTION U NAME WIDTH HEIGHT THICK1 THICK2
SC TC TORFAC SSHEARF TSHEARF
CROSS-SECTION U defines a U cross-section which can be used to describe the cross-
WIDTH
HEIGHT
THICK1
THICK2
The dimensions of the U cross-section. See Figure.
H
E
I
G
H
T
WIDTH
T
H
I
C
K
2
centroid
Y'
X'
THICK1
CROSS-SECTION U
SC [0.0]
TC [0.0]
the beam.
TORFAC [1.0]
Auxiliary commands
CROSS-SECTION U
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES NAME RINERTIA SINERTIA TINERTIA AREA
SAREA TAREA CTOFFSET CSOFFSET STINERTIA
SRINERTIA TRINERTIA WINERTIA WRINERTIA
DRINERTIA
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES defines a general cross-section in terms of principal moments
of inertia and areas. This cross-section definition can be used to describe the cross-sectional
characteristics of an elastic Hermitian BEAM element. (See Figure for beam element coordi-
nate system.)
RINERTIA
Torsional moment of inertia, about the beam r-axis. This includes warping effects.
SINERTIA
Bending moment of inertia about the beam s-axis.
The r-axis represents
the beam axis, but not
necessarily the principal
axis of the section
BEAM ELEMENT COORDINATE SYSTEM
N2
N1
AUX
s
t
r
Node AUX lies in
r-s plane
X
Y
Z
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES
TINERTIA
Bending moment of inertia about the t-axis.
AREA
Cross-sectional area.
SAREA [0.0]
Effective shear area in the s-direction.
TAREA [0.0]
Effective shear area in the t-direction.
CTOFFSET [0.0]
Distance between the centroid and shear center of the cross section along the T direction
(zero if section is symmetric about the local S axis).
CSOFFSET [0.0]
Distance between the centroid and shear center of the cross section along the S direction
(zero if section is symmetric about the local T axis).
STINERTIA [0.0]
Inertia term causing coupling between bending about the S axis and bending about the T axis
(zero if section is symmetric about either S or T axis).
SRINERTIA [0.0]
Inertia term causing coupling between twist/warping and bending about the T axis (zero if
section is symmetric about the T axis). This term is caused by the Wagner term in the kinemat-
ics.
TRINERTIA [0.0]
Inertia term causing coupling between twist/warping and bending about the S axis (zero if the
section is symmetric about the local S axis). This is caused by the Wagner term in the
kinematics.
WINERTIA [0.0]
Warping constant.{!0}
WRINERTIA [0.0]
Inertia term causing bi-moment due to warping (zero if the section is symmetric about either S
or T axis). It is caused by the Wagner term.
DRINERTIA [0.0]
Inertia term causing nonlinear twist due to the Wagner effect. {!0}
Notes:
1. The S-axis and T-axis are not the principal axes of the cross section. They are parallel to
the sides of the L-section, U-section and I-section and pass through the centroid of the
cross section.
2. Warping beam should not be used as a bolt.
3. Warping beam should not be used as a rigid link.
4. Warping beam should not be used as a 2D beam.
5. SAREA and TAREA should not be used with the warping beam.
6. CTOFFSET, CSOFFSET, STINERTIA, SRINERTIA, TRINERTIA, WINERTIA,
WRINERTIA and DRINERTIA should only be used with the warping beam.
Auxiliary commands
LAYER SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP PLY-DATA
name
i
material
i
tint
i
pthick
i
maxes
i
phi
i
iaxes
i
phii
i
print
i
save
i
intloc
i
failure
i
plydata
i
LAYER defines the control parameters for each surface layer for use by multi-layer shell
elements.
Label number of the substructure.
GROUP [current element group]
The label number of the element group.
PLY-DATA [NO]
This flag determines whether ply data defined by the PLY-DATA command are used to
calculate layer thicknesses. {YES/NO}
YES The thickness of each layer are calculated using ply-data
i
.
layer 3
layer 2
layer 1
t
h
i
c
k
n
e
s
s
midsurface
node
midsurface
LAYER
NO The thickness of each layer are calculated using pthick
i
.
name
i
Layer label number. {1 # name
i
# NLAYER, NLAYER = total number of layers, see EGROUP
SHELL}
material
i
[1]
Material label number used for layer name
i
.
tint
i
[2]
Integration order for the through-thickness direction (local t-direction) in layer name
i
.
2 # tint
i
# 6 Gauss formulas.
-7 # tint
i
# -3 Closed Newton-Cotes formulas.
pthick
i
[(1./NLAYER) " "" "" 100]
Percentage of element thickness assigned to this layer. (NLAYER is the total number of
layers, see EGROUP SHELL).
maxes
i
[0]
Material axes for orthotropic model, for layer name
i
. <not currently used>
phi
i
[0.0]
Offset angle for orthotropic model, for layer name
i
.
iaxes
i
[0]
Initial strain axes, for layer name
i
. <not currently used>
phii
i
[0.0]
Offset angle for initial strains, for layer name
i
.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
This parameter controls the printing of element results for the layer name
i
. {YES / NO /
STRAINS / DEFAULT}
YES Print the element results for layer name
i
.
NO No results are printed for layer name
i
.
STRAINS Strains are printed in addition to the stresses for layer name
i
.
DEFAULT Layer printing is governed by element data commands.
LAYER
save
i
[DEFAULT]
This parameter controls the saving of element results for the layer name
i
. {YES / NO /
DEFAULT}
YES Save the element results on the porthole file for layer name
i
.
NO No saving of results for layer name
i
.
DEFAULT Layer saving is governed by element data commands.
intloc
i
[DEFAULT]
This parameter controls the printing of integration point coordinates for the layer name
i
.
{YES / NO / DEFAULT}
YES Print integration point (global) coordinates for layer name
i
.
NO No printing of integration point data for layer name
i
.
DEFAULT Printout of integration point data is governed by element data
commands.
failure
i
[0]
The label number of failure criterion. (See FAILURE ). A zero value indicates no failure
criterion for layer name
i
.
plydata
i
The label number of the command PLY-DATA, from which the layer thickness is calculated. If
the parameter PLY-DATA = NO, or number of layers is equal 1, this parameter will be ignored.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LAYER FIRST LAST
DELETE LAYER FIRST LAST
LAYER
PLY-DATA NAME WEIGHT DENSITY FRACTION
Command PLY-DATA defines the layer thickness for a fiber-matrix composite. It is used in
definition of shell elements by the LAYER command.
NAME [(current highest ply-data label number) + 1]
Label number of the ply-data to be defined. If the label number of an existing ply-data is
given, then the previous ply-data definition is overwritten.
WEIGHT
Weight per unit surface of the fiber.
DENSITY
Density of the fiber.
FRACTION
Fiber volume fraction of the fiber-matrix compound.
Auxiliary commands
LIST PLY-DATA FIRST LAST
DELETE PLY-DATA FIRST LAST
PLY-DATA
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS
line
i
material
i
area
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
gapwidth
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS BODY
edge
i
material
i
area
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
gapwidth
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS assigns data for TRUSS elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS assigns data for TRUSS elements to solid geometry edges.
BODY [current active BODY]
The geometry body label number.
line
i
Line label number.
edge
i
Edge label number (for BODY).
material
i
[0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line/ edge
will take the default material for the host element group.
area
i
[0]
Cross-sectional area for each TRUSS element on the line/edge.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Print results for TRUSS elements on line/edge.
NO No results are printed for TRUSS elements on the line/edge.
DEFAULT Element printing is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Save results for TRUSS elements on line/edge.
NO No saving of results for TRUSS elements on the line/edge.
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS
Sec. 7.3 Element properties
DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by PORTHOLE
SAVEDEFAULT.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
The time of element birth.
tdeath
i
[0.0]
The time of element death.
gapwidth
i
[0.0]
Gap width for each TRUSS element on the line/edge. A zero value indicates no gap.
intloc
i
[NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point coordinates (global) in the undeformed
configuration. {YES/NO}
epsin
i
[0.0]
Initial strain for each TRUSS element on the line/edge.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST
DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST
LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST
DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS FIRST LAST
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID
surface
i
material
i
beta
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
gamma
i
FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID BODY
face
i
material
i
beta
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
gamma
i
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID assigns data for TWODSOLID elements to geometry
surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID assigns data for TWODSOLID elements to solid geometry
faces.
The geometry body label number.
surface
i
Surface label number.
face
i
Face label number (for BODY).
material
i
[0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the surface/
face will take the default material for the host element group.
beta
i
[0.0]
Material angle, in degrees, for each TWODSOLID element on the surface/face. Used in
conjunction with orthotropic material types.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Print results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No results are printed for TWODSOLID elements on the surface/face.
STRAINS In addition to stresses, strains are printed.
DEFAULT Printout is governed by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by EGROUP
RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for TWODSOLID elements on the surface/face.
DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
Specifies whether element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed configu-
ration are printed. {YES/NO}
gamma
i
[0.0]
Initial strain angle, in degrees, used in conjunction with any definition of element initial
strains.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST
DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST
LIST FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST
DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID FIRST LAST
VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID
volume
i
material
i
maxes
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
maxesi
i
ngeom
i
BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID
body
i
material
i
maxes
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloci
i
maxesi
i
ngeom
i
VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID assigns data for THREEDSOLID elements to geometry
volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID assigns data for THREEDSOLID elements to solid
geometry bodies.
volume
i
Volume label number.
body
i
Body label number.
material
i
[0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated in the volume/
body will take the default material for the host element group.
maxes
i
[0]
Material axes set for each THREEDSOLID element in the volume/body. Used in conjunction
with orthotropic material types.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Print element results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No results are printed for THREEDSOLID elements in the
volume/body.
STRAINS Strains as well as stresses are printed for THREEDSOLID
elements in the volume/body.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for THREEDSOLID elements in the volume/
body.
DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by command
PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
Determines whether or not element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
configuration are printed. {YES/NO}
maxesi
i
[0]
Initial strain axes set for each THREEDSOLID element in the volume/body. Used in conjunc-
tion with element initial strains.
ngeom
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST
DELETE VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST
LIST BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST
DELETE BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM
line
i
material
i
section
i
endrelease
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
,
moment-r
i
moment-s
i
moment-t
i
rigid-start
i
rigid-end
i
EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM BODY
edge
i
material
i
section
i
endrelease
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
,
moment-r
i
moment-s
i
moment-t
i
rigid-start
i
rigid-end
i
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM assigns data for BEAM elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM assigns data for BEAM elements to solid geometry edges.
Body label number
line
i
Line label number.
edge
i
Edge label number.
material
i
[0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line/edge
section
i
[0]
Cross-section label number for each BEAM element on the line/edge. See CROSS-SECTION.
endrelease
i
[0]
End-release condition label number for each BEAM element on the line/edge. See
ENDRELEASE.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for BEAM elements on the line/edge.
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for BEAM elements on the line/edge.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
Indicates whether to print element integration point (global) coordinates in the undeformed
epsin
i
[0.0]
Initial axial strain for each BEAM element on the line/edge, or initial force if BEAM
OPTION=BOLT is used.
moment-r
i
moment-s
i
moment-t
i
<not currently active>
rigid-start
i
[0.0]
Length of the rigid end-zone connected to the start-point (at u=0.0) of the geometry line/
edge. Note that this zone can span at most one element meshed onto the line.
rigid-end
i
[0.0]
Length of the rigid end-zone connected to the end-point (at u=1.0) of the geometry line/edge.
Note that this zone can span at most one element meshed onto the line.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST
DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST
LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST
DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM FIRST LAST
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM
LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM
line
i
material
i
section
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epaxl
i
ephoop
i
EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM BODY
edge
i
material
i
section
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epaxl
i
ephoop
i
LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM assigns data for ISOBEAM elements to geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM assigns data for ISOBEAM elements to solid geometry edges.
Body label number
line
i
Line label number.
edge
i
material
i
[0]
section
i
[0]
Cross-section label number for each ISOBEAM element on the line/edge. See CROSS-SEC-
TION.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for ISOBEAM elements on the line/edge.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for ISOBEAM elements on the line/edge.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
epaxl
i
[0.0]
Initial axial strain for each ISOBEAM element on the line/edge.
ephoop
i
[0.0]
Initial hoop strain for each ISOBEAM element on the line/edge.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM FIRST LAST
DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM FIRST LAST
LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA ISBEAM FIRST LAST
DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM FIRST LAST
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE
surface
i
material
i
beta
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
gamma
i
, eps11
i
eps22
i
eps12
i
flex11
i
flex22
i
flex12
i
FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE BODY
face
i
material
i
beta
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
gamma
i
, eps11
i
eps22
i
eps12
i
flex11
i
flex22
i
flex12
i
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE assigns data for PLATE elements to geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE assigns data for PLATE elements to solid geometry faces.
Body label number
surface
i
face
i
material
i
[0]
facve will take the default material for the host element group.
beta
i
[0.0]
Material angle, in degrees, for each PLATE element on the surface/face. Used in conjunction
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for PLATE elements on the surface/face.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE
NO No saving of results for PLATE elements on the surface/face.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
Specifies whether or not element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed
configuration, together with direction cosines of stress reference axes are printed. {YES/NO}
gamma
i
[0.0]
strains.
eps11
i
[0.0]
eps22
i
[0.0]
eps12
i
[0.0]
Initial membrane strain components in the element, assumed constant within the element.
flex11
i
[0.0]
flex22
i
[0.0]
flex12
i
[0.0]
Initial flexural strain components in the element, assumed constant within the element.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST
DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST
LIST FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST
DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE FIRST LAST
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL
surface
i
material
i
beta
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
iths
i
intloc
i
gamma
i
,
eps11
i,
eps22
i
eps12
i
eps13
i
eps23
i
geps11
i
geps22
i
geps12
i
geps13
i
, geps23
i
FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL BODY
face
i
material
i
beta
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
iths
i
intloc
i
gamma
i
eps11
i
,
eps22
i
eps12
i
eps13
i
eps23
i
geps11
i
geps22
i
geps12
i
geps13
i
geps23
i
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL assigns data for SHELL elements to geometry surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL assigns data for SHELL elements to solid geometry faces.
Body label number
surface
i
face
i
material
i
[0]
beta
i
[0.0]
Material angle, in degrees, for each SHELL element on the surface/face. Used in conjunction
print
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Print results as requested by EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No results are printed for SHELL elements on the surface/face.
STRAINS In addition to stresses, strains are printed.
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL
save
i
[DEFAULT]
YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested
by EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for SHELL elements on the surface/face.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
iths
i
[NO]
Specifies whether or not the thick shell assumption is made for transverse shear behavior of
SHELL elements on the surface/face. {YES/NO}
intloc
i
[NO]
Specifies whether or not element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed
configuration, together with direction cosines of stress reference axes are printed. {YES/NO}
gamma
i
[0.0]
strains.
epsjk
i
(jk = 11, 22, 12, 13, 23) [0.0]
Initial strain components in the element, assumed constant within the element.
gepsjk
i
(jk = 11, 22, 12, 13, 23) [0.0]
Initial strain gradient components in the element, assumed constant within the element.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST
DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST
LIST FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST
DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL FIRST LAST
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL
ELAYER GROUP
element
i
layer
i
material
i
ELAYER assigns material to individual elements on different layers for shell elements.
GROUP [Current element group]
The label number of the element group.
element
i
The element label number.
layer
i
The layer label number.
material
i
[1]
The material label number.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ELAYER GROUP
DELETE ELAYER GROUP
ELAYER
Sec. 7.3 Element properties ELAYER
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE
line
i
material
i
section
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE BODY
edge
i
material
i
section
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE assigns data for PIPE elements on geometry lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE assigns data for PIPE elements on solid geometry edges.
Body label number.
line
i
Line label number.
edge
i
material
i
[0]
section
i
[0]
Cross-section label number for each PIPE element on the line/edge. See CROSS- SECTION.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for PIPE elements on the line/edge.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for PIPE elements on the line/edge.
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
epsin
i
[0.0]
Initial axial strain for each PIPE element on the line/edge.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST
DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST
LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST
DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE FIRST LAST
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE
LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL
line
i
mset
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL BODY
edge
i
mset
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL
surface
i
mset
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL BODY
face
i
mset
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL
volume
i
mset
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL
body
i
mset
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements on lines.
EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to solid geometry edges.
SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to geometry surfaces
FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to solid geometry faces.
VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to geometry volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL assigns data for GENERAL elements to solid geometry bodies.
BODY [currently active BODY]
Body label number.
line
i
Line label number.
edge
i
surface
i
face
i
volume
i
body
i
Body label number.
mset
i
[0]
Matrixset label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the geometry
will take the default matrixset for the host element group.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for GENERAL elements on the geometry.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for GENERAL elements on the geometry.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
Element birth time.
tdeath
i
[0.0]
Element death time.
Note: tbirth
i
< tdeath
i
, or tbirth
i
= tdeath
i
= 0.0
Auxiliary commands
LIST LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
LIST EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
LIST SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
LIST FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
LIST VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
LIST BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL FIRST LAST
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2
surface
i
material
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 BODY
face
i
material
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 assigns data for FLUID2 elements on surfaces.
FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 assigns data for FLUID2 elements on solid geometry faces.
Body label number.
surface
i
face
i
material
i
[0]
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for FLUID2 elements on the surface/face.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for FLUID2 elements on the surface/face.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
Auxiliary commands
LIST SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST
DELETE SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST
LIST FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST
DELETE FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2 FIRST LAST
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3
volume
i
material
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
ngeom
i
BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3
body
i
material
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
ngeom
i
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3 assigns data for FLUID3 elements in volumes.
BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3 assigns data for FLUID3 elements in solid geometry bodies.
volume
i
body
i
Body label number.
material
i
[0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the volume/
body will take the default material for the host element group.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
NO No results are printed for FLUID3 elements on the volume/body.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
EGROUP RESULTS.
NO No saving of results for FLUID3 elements on the volume/body.
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
intloc
i
[NO]
ngeom
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3 FIRST LAST
DELETE VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3 FIRST LAST
LIST BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3 FIRST LAST
DELETE BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3 FIRST LAST
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3
MATRIX STIFFNESS NAME ND
row
i
... k
ij
... (j = i, i + 1, ..., ND)
Defines a stiffness matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by
MATRIXSET.
NAME [(current highest matrix label number) + 1]
Label number of the matrix to be defined.
ND [1]
The total number of rows entered in this matrix, equal to the number of nodes in the general
element multiplied by the number of active degrees of freedom per node.
{1 ! ND ! 600}
row
i
Row index number for matrix.
k
ij
[0.0]
Entries in the stiffness matrix (k
ij
= entry for row i, column j).
Note: Only the upper-diagonal part of the stiffness matrix is entered by this command.
Thus, for row
i
, only the first (ND - i + 1) entries are used - the rest are ignored due
to symmetry.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST MATRIX FIRST LAST
DELETE MATRIX FIRST LAST
MATRIX STIFFNESS
MATRIX MASS NAME ND
row
i
... m
ij
... (j = i, (i + 1), ..., ND)
Defines a mass matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by MATRIXSET.
ND [1]
{1 ! ND ! 600}
row
i
m
ij
[0.0]
Entries in the mass matrix (m
ij
Note: For a consistent mass matrix, only the upper-diagonal part of the mass matrix is
entered by this command. Thus, for row
i
, only the first (ND - i + 1) entries are
used. When the mass matrix is lumped, only the diagonal term, m
ij
, should be
entered - the rest are ignored due to symmetry.
Auxiliary Commands
MATRIX MASS
MATRIX DAMPING NAME ND
row
i
... c
ij
... (j = i, (i + 1), ..., ND)
Defines a damping matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by
MATRIXSET.
ND [1]
{1 ! ND ! 600}
row
i
c
ij
[0.0]
Entries in the damping matrix (c
ij
Note: Only the upper-diagonal part of the damping matrix is entered by this command.
Thus, for row
i
only the first (ND - i + 1) entries are used, the rest are ignored due
to symmetry.
Auxiliary Commands
MATRIX DAMPING
MATRIX STRESS NAME NS ND
row
i
... s
ij
... (i=1NS; j=1ND)
Defines a stress matrix for use by GENERAL elements. It may be referenced by MATRIXSET.
NS [1]
The total number rows in the matrix, equal to the number of stress components.
{1 ! NS ! 60}
ND [1]
The number of nodes in the general element multiplied by the number of active degrees of
freedom per node. {1 ! ND ! 600}
row
i
Row index number.
s
ij
[0.0]
Entries in the stress-transformation matrix (s
ij
Note: The full matrix should be entered - no symmetry is assumed.
Auxiliary Commands
MATRIX STRESS
MATRIXSET NAME STIFFNESS MASS DAMPING STRESS
Defines a matrixset of stiffness, mass, damping and stress-transformation label numbers for
general elements. One stiffness, one mass, one damping and one stress-transformation label
number are grouped into a matrix set, which can be associated with the elements of an
EGROUP GENERAL element group through its MATRIXSET parameter.
Label number of the matrixset to be defined.
STIFFNESS [0]
Label number of stiffness matrix defined by MATRIX STIFFNESS.
MASS [0]
Label number of mass matrix defined by MATRIX MASS.
DAMPING [0]
Label number of damping matrix defined by MATRIX DAMPING.
STRESS [0]
Label number of stress-transformation matrix defined by MATRIX STRESS.
Auxiliary commands
LIST MATRIXSET FIRST LAST
DELETE MATRIXSET FIRST LAST
MATRIXSET
MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED NAME ELEMENT-SUBTYPE ELNDOF
MATERIAL NUIPT NUIT1 NUIT2 NUIT3
Command MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED defines the element stiffness matrix and nodal force
vector in a general element group, to be provided in the ADINA subroutine CUSERG. The
material constants, variables and solution control parameters required in subroutine CUSERG
can be input via parameter MATERIAL. The element subtype must be input to predetermine
the sizes of arrays RE (element nodal forces) and AS (element stiffness) in CUSERG. If some
element results, e.g. stresses and strains, are to be displayed by ADINA-PLOT, the integra-
tion scheme locations need to be provided through parameters NUIPT, NUIT1, NUIT2 and
NUIT3.
Label number of the matrix to be defined. If the label of an existing matrix is given, then the
previous matrix definition is overwritten.
ELEMENT-SUBTYPE
Element subtype indicator for assembling the general element stiffness. This parameter must
be entered. {TWODSOLID/THREEDSOLID/BEAM/SHELL}
ELNDOF [subtype dependent]
This parameter is not used. However, note that the number of active degrees of freedom per
node for a user-supplied element is set by the IDOF parameter of the MASTER command.
MATERIAL
The label number of MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, in which material constants/variables and
solution control parameters to be used in the calculations of element stiffness matrices and
force vectors are entered. The material constants/variables can be temperature-independent
or temperature-dependent.
NUIPT [NUIT1 " "" "" NUIT2 " "" "" NUIT3]
Number of user-provided interior points used to assemble the element stiffness matrix and to
display the element results at these locations.
NUIT1 [1]
NUIT2 [1]
NUIT3 [1]
Integration orders in the first, second and third local directions of general elements (less than
or equal to 6).
MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED
MASSES POINTS
point
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES LINES
line
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES SURFACES
surface
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES VOLUMES
volume
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES NODESETS
nodeset
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES EDGES BODY
edge
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES FACES BODY
face
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
MASSES POINTS assigns concentrated masses to the nodes at a set of geometry points.
MASSES LINES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes on a set of geometry lines.
MASSES VOLUMES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes in a set of geometry vol-
umes.
MASSES NODESETS assigns concentrated masses to the nodes in a node set.
MASSES EDGES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes on solid geometry edges.
MASSES FACES assigns concentrated masses to the nodes on solid geometry faces.
MASSES
Body label number.
point
i
Label number of a geometry point. All nodes coincident with this geometry point are as-
signed a value equal to the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.
line
i
Label number of a geometry line. All nodes on this line are assigned a value equal to the
specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.
surface
i
Label number of a geometry surface. All nodes on this surface are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.
volume
i
Label number of a geometry volume. All nodes in this volume are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.
nodeset
i
Label number of a node set. All nodes in this node set are assigned a value equal to the
edge
i
Label number of a solid geometry edge (for BODY). All nodes of this entity are assigned a
value equal to the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.
face
i
Label number of a solid geometry face (for BODY). All nodes of this entity are assigned a
value equal to the specified concentrated mass divided by the number of nodes.
mass1
i
[0.0]
Mass assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-translation degree-of-freedom (global or
skew).
mass2
i
[0.0]
Mass assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-translation degree-of-freedom (global
or skew).
mass3
i
[0.0]
Mass assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-translation degree-of-freedom (global or
skew).
MASSES
mass4
i
[0.0]
Mass moment of inertia assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-rotation degree-of-
freedom (global or skew).
mass5
i
[0.0]
Mass moment of inertia assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-rotation degree-of-
mass6
i
[0.0]
Mass moment of inertia assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-rotation degree-of-
Auxiliary commands
LIST MASSES POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES POINTS FIRST LAST
LIST MASSES LINES FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES LINES FIRST LAST
LIST MASSES SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST MASSES VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST MASSES NODESETS FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES NODESETS FIRST LAST
LIST MASSES EDGES FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES EDGES FIRST LAST
LIST MASSES FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES FACES FIRST LAST
MASSES
DAMPERS POINTS
point
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
DAMPERS LINES
line
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
DAMPERS SURFACES
surface
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
DAMPERS VOLUMES
volume
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
DAMPERS NODESETS
nodeset
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
DAMPERS EDGES BODY
edge
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
DAMPERS FACES BODY
face
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
DAMPERS POINTS assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes at a set of geometry points.
DAMPERS LINES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of geometry lines.
DAMPERS SURFACES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of geometry
surfaces.
DAMPERS VOLUMES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of geometry
volumes.
DAMPERS NODESETS assigns concentrated masses to the nodes in a node set.
DAMPERS EDGES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on solid geometry edges.
DAMPERS
DAMPERS FACES assigns concentrated dampers to the nodes on a set of solid geometry
faces.
Body label number.
point
i
Label number of a geometry point. All nodes coincident with this geometry point are as-
signed a value equal to the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.
line
i
Label number of a geometry line. All nodes on this line are assigned a value equal to the
specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.
surface
i
Label number of a geometry surface. All nodes on this surface are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.
volume
i
Label number of a geometry volume. All nodes in this volume are assigned a value equal to
the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.
nodeset
i
Label number of a node set. All nodes in this node set are assigned a value equal to the
edge
i
Label number of a geometry edge (for BODY). All nodes on this entity are assigned a value
equal to the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.
face
i
Label number of a geometry face (for BODY). All nodes on this entity are assigned a value
equal to the specified concentrated damper divided by the number of nodes.
damp1
i
[0.0]
Damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-translation degree-of-freedom (global
or skew).
damp2
i
[0.0]
Damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-translation degree-of-freedom (global
or skew).
damp3
i
[0.0]
Damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-translation degree-of-freedom (global
DAMPERS
or skew).
damp4
i
[0.0]
Rotational damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal x-rotation degree-of-freedom
(global or skew).
damp5
i
[0.0]
Rotational damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal y-rotation degree-of-freedom
(global or skew).
damp6
i
[0.0]
Rotational damper assigned to the geometry entity for the nodal z-rotation degree-of-freedom
(global or skew).
Auxiliary commands
LIST DAMPERS POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS POINTS FIRST LAST
LIST DAMPERS LINES FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS LINES FIRST LAST
LIST DAMPERS SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST DAMPERS VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST DAMPERS NODESETS FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS NODESETS FIRST LAST
LIST DAMPERS EDGES FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS EDGES FIRST LAST
LIST DAMPERS FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS FACES FIRST LAST
DAMPERS
Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry
SUBSTRUCTURE NAME
The model can consist of a main structure and one or more substructures. This command
sets the current substructure.
Substructuring cannot be used with
- multiple time step blocks
- explicit time integration
- rigid link constraint equations in substructure nodes, or between substructure nodes and
the main structure nodes
- potential-based fluid elements
- user-supplied elements, user-supplied loading
- temperature loading and other loading restrictions (see ADINA Theory and Modeling Guide,
Section 11.1.3)
- FSI/TMC analysis
- cyclic symmetry structures
- mapping options
- consistent mass damping
- 3D-iterative solver, multigrid solver, iterative solver
- load penetration
- pressure-update (load stiffening effect of shells)
- frequency analysis, mode-superposition analysis, response analysis, response spectrum
analysis, harmonic analysis and random vibration analysis
- linearized buckling analysis
NAME [(current highest substructure label number) + 1]
Label number of the current substructure.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBSTRUCTURE FIRST LAST
DELETE SUBSTRUCTURE FIRST LAST
SUBSTRUCTURE
REUSE NAME LOAD-REUSE CONNECT TRANSFORM
slavename
i
mastername
i
type
i
sbody
i
mbody
i
connect
i
transformation
i
Connects the current substructure to the main structure. As the command name implies, each
substructure can be used several times and the command REUSE therefore defines the reuse
identifying number for the current substructure.
Input data provided to the following commands refers only to the current reuse number of the
current substructure: PRINT-STEPS, SET-INITCONDITION, APPLY-LOAD
NAME [(highest reuse label number) + 1]
The label number of the reuse.
LOAD-REUSE [SAME]
Loading indicator for the reuse.
SAME Same loading as for the previous (i.e. NAME-1) reuse of the
current substructure.
DIFFERENT Loading for this reuse of the current substructure is specified by
subsequent uses of command APPLY-LOAD.
CONNECT [PARAMETRIC]
Default setting for how nodes on substructure are to be connected to nodes on main structure
when connection is between geometry lines or surfaces. {PARAMETRIC/MATCHING}
Note: When connection is between geometry edges, faces or nodesets,
CONNECT=MATCHING is always used.
Note: When connection is between lines or surfaces and CONNECT=PARAMETRIC, connec-
tion between main structure and substructure is constructed between nodes at the corre-
sponding parametric order on each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces.
TRANSFORM [0]
Default coordinate transformation system to match nodes for connecting substructure to
main structure. When connection is between geometry edges, faces or nodesets, TRANS-
FORM is always applicable. When connection is between geometry lines or surfaces, TRANS-
FORM is only applicable if CONNECT=MATCHING. Transformation is defined from the main
structure to the substructure.
slavename
i
The label number of the substructure boundary entity (point, line, surface, edge, face, node or
REUSE
Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry REUSE
nodeset) for the ith term of the reuse.
mastername
i
The label number of the main structure connection entity (point, line, surface, edge, face,
node or nodeset) for the ith term of the reuse.
type
i
The type of entity. {POINT/LINE(EDGE)/SURFACE(FACE)/NODE/NODESET}
Note: A connection between main structure and substructure is constructed between nodes
at the corresponding parametric order on each entity. Parametric order is in the in-
creasing u-parameter direction for lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In
this case the number of nodes on the slave and master geometry entity must be the same.
sbody
i
[0]
Body label number of slave geometry edge (type
i
=LINE) or face (type
i
=SURFACE). For
geometry line or surface, sbody
i
=0 must be specified. For other entities, sbody
i
is ignored.
mbody
i
[0]
Body label number of master geometry edge (type
i
=LINE) or face (type
i
=SURFACE). For
geometry line or surface, mbody
i
=0 must be specified. For other entities, mbody
i
is ignored.
connect
i
[from parameter CONNECT]
Indicates how nodes on substructure are to be connected to nodes on main structure when
connection is between geometry line or surface. {PARAMETRIC/MATCHING}
transform
i
[from parameter TRANSFORMATION]
Specifies a coordinate transformation system to match nodes for connecting a substructure
to the main structure. When connection is between geometry edges, faces or nodesets,
transform
i
is always applicable. When connection is between geometry lines or surfaces,
transform
i
is only applicable if connect
i
=MATCHING. Transformation is defined from the main
structure to the substructure.
Auxiliary commands
LIST REUSE FIRST LAST
DELETE REUSE FIRST LAST
CYCLIC-CONTROL CYCLICPARTS AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC LOW-HARMONIC
HIGH-HARMONIC FREQ-HARMONIC FREQ-HALF
BOUND-ELEMENT
Specifies parameters that control cyclic symmetry analysis.
CYCLICPARTS [1]
The number of cyclic symmetric parts of the main structure. If the value is greater than or
equal to 2 then a cyclic symmetric analysis is performed. The maximum number of cyclic
symmetric parts allowed is 999. CYCLICPARTS = 1 indicates no cyclic symmetry.
AXIS-CYCLIC [0]
Label number of cyclic symmetry axis defined by axis-rotation command. Default AXIS-
CYCLIC = 0 means use global X axis.
PERIODIC [NO]
Specifies whether the cyclic models are also under periodic symmetry. {NO/YES}
NO No periodic symmetry analysis. A full cyclic symmetry analysis will be performed.
Different loads are used for different cyclic parts.
YES Periodic symmetry analysis. Only the 0 harmonic will be analyzed. Unlike basic cyclic
symmetry analysis, a periodic symmetry analysis can be nonlinear. It can also be
used with explicit dynamic time integration. The load applied on the first cyclic part
is rotated about the cyclic axis and applied to the other cyclic parts.
LOW-HARMONIC [0]
Gives the lowest harmonic to use in cyclic symmetry frequency analysis.
{0 ! LOW-HARMONIC ! N/2} where N is the number of cyclic parts.
HIGH-HARMONIC [DEFAULT]
Gives the highest harmonic to use in cyclic symmetry frequency analysis.
{0 ! HIGH-HARMONIC ! N/2} where N is the number of cyclic parts.
HIGH-HARMONIC = DEFAULT sets the value to N/2.
FREQ-HARMONIC [0]
Gives the number of frequencies to calculate per harmonic. { $ 0}
FREQ-HALF [NO]
This flag which tells the program to only calculate one of every two complex frequency
pairs.{NO/YES}
CYCLIC-CONTROL
Sec. 7.4 Substructure and cyclic symmetry CYCLIC-CONTROL
BOUND-ELEMENT [SINGLE]
Specifies whether structural elements lying completely on the cyclic boundary are defined
once or twice. Applies to beam, isobeam, plate and shell elements. {SINGLE/DOUBLE}
SINGLE Structural elements completely on the cyclic boundary will only be defined once
by the user. The elements may be defined on either the master or the slave cyclic
boundaries, but not both. Some elements can be defined on the slave boundary
and others on the master.
DOUBLE Structural elements completely on the cyclic boundary will be define twice by the
user, once on each cyclic boundary. ADINA will handle the stiffness/mass matrix
modifications required for proper solution.
CYCLICLOADS NAME
A cyclic symmetry analysis can be performed by defining the finite element discretization of
the fundamental part of the geometrically cyclic symmetric structure. This fundamental part is
rotated M times about a cyclic axis to represent the complete structure. CYCLICLOADS
indicates that the loads subsequently defined are to be on a particular one of these M parts.
NAME
Label number of the cyclic part to be loaded.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CYCLICLOADS FIRST LAST
DELETE CYCLICLOADS FIRST LAST
CYCLICLOADS
CYCLICBOUNDARY POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / NODES / NODESET
slavename
i
mastername
i
CYCLICBOUNDARY is used to associate cyclic boundaries (defined by points, lines,
surfaces, nodes, or nodesets) with each other. The command specifies the cyclic boundaries
of the fundamental part of a cyclicaly symmetric structure termed the master cyclic boundary
and the slave cyclic boundary. When the nodes on the master cyclic boundary are rotated
360/M (where M is the number of cyclic parts) degrees counter clockwise about the cyclic
symmetry axis, they should coincide with the nodes on the slave cyclic boundary.
slavename
i
The label number of the slave entity (point, line, surface, node, or nodeset) for the i
th
term
of the cyclic boundary.
mastername
i
The label number of the master entity (point, line, surface, node, or nodeset) for the i
th
term
Note: When cyclic boundaries are based on geometric entities, the number of nodes on both
the master and slave geometries must be the same. The cyclic boundaries are not restricted to
straight lines and flat surfaces.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CYCLICBOUNDARY POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / NODES / NODESET
DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARY POINTS / LINES / SURFACES / NODES / NODESET
MASTER ... AXIS-CYCLIC PERIODIC
CYCLICBOUNDARY
Master cyclic
boundary
Fundamental
cyclic part
360
M
o
Cyclic
symmetry axis
(Default: X axis)
Slave cyclic
boundary
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D
slavename
i
sbody mastername
i
mbody
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D is used to associate cyclic boundaries with each other (defined
by lines or edges).The command specifies the cyclic boundary nodes of the fundamental part
of a cyclically symmetric structure. The cyclic boundaries of the fundamental part consist of
two sets of lines or edges, namely, the cyclic boundary 1 (master cyclic boundary) and the
cyclic boundary 2 (slave cyclic boundary).
Master cyclic
boundary
Fundamental
cyclic part
360
M
o
Cyclic
symmetry axis
(Default: X axis)
Slave cyclic
boundary
slavename
i
The label number of the geometry slave entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
sbody
Geometry body label of slave edge.
mastername
i
The label number of the geometry master entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
mbody
Geometry body label of master edge.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D
DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D
Chap. 7 Model definition CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D
CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D
slavename
i
sbody mastername
i
mbody
Command CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D is used to associate cyclic boundaries with each
other (defined by surfaces or faces).The command specifies the cyclic boundary nodes of the
fundamental part of a cyclically symmetric structure. The cyclic boundaries of the fundamen-
tal part consist of two sets of surfaces or faces, namely, the cyclic boundary 1 (master cyclic
boundary) and the cyclic boundary 2 (slave cyclic boundary).
Master cyclic
boundary
Fundamental
cyclic part
360
M
o
Cyclic
symmetry axis
(Default: X axis)
Slave cyclic
boundary
slavename
i
The label number of the geometry slave entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
sbody
Geometry body label of slave edge.
mastername
i
The label number of the geometry master entity (line or edge) for the ith independent term
mbody
Geometry body label of master edge.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D
DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D
AXIS-ROTATION NAME MODE SYSTEM AXIS ALINE AP1 AP2 X0 Y0 Z0
XA YA ZA
Defines a rotational axis which can be referenced by other commands.
NAME [(current highest axis label number) + 1]
Label number of the axis.
MODE [AXIS]
Selects the method used to define the axis. The parameters (parenthesized) used to define the
axis depends on the method selected.
AXIS - The rotational axis is defined by a coordinate axis of a coordinate system.
(SYSTEM, AXIS)
LINE - The rotational axis is defined by a straight line between the end points of a
geometry line (which is not necessarily straight, but must be open - i.e.,
have non-coincident end points). (ALINE)
POINTS - The rotational axis is defined by a straight line between two non-coincident
geometry points. (AP1, AP2)
VECTOR - The rotational axis is defined by the coordinate position and direction of a
vector. (X0, Y0, Z0, XA, YA, ZA)
to define the rotational axis, via parameter AXIS, when MODE = AXIS.
AXIS [XL]
Selects the axis of the coordinate system, given by parameter SYSTEM, to be used as the axis
of rotation. {XL/YL/ZL}
ALINE
Label number of the geometry line used to define the rotational axis. The direction of the axis
is taken from the start point of the line to the end point of the line.
AP1, AP2
Label numbers of the geometry points used to define the rotational axis. The direction of the
AXIS-ROTATION
Chap. 7 Model definition AXIS-ROTATION
X0, Y0, Z0 [0.0, 0.0, 0.0]
The coordinates (in global coordinates) of the starting position of the vector that defines the
rotational axis.
XA, YA, ZA [1.0, 0.0, 0.0]
The direction (in global coordinates) of the vector that defines the rotational axis.
Auxiliary commands
LIST AXIS-ROTATION FIRST LAST
DELETE AXIS-ROTATION FIRST LAST
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE NEG
substructure
i
eg
i
Creates substructures as sets of existing element groups.
NEG [1]
The maximum number of element groups to be allocated to one substructure.
substructure
i
Label number of a new substructure.
eg
i
Label number of element group in main structure.
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE
ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET ANALYTICAL X0 Y0 Z0 RADIUS GTYPE GNAME
Command ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET defines parameters for analytical rigid target
contact analysis.
Note:
This command is only available for node-to-node contact (i.e., NODETONODE=YES in the
CGROUP CONTACT... command).
ANALYTICAL [NONE]
Analytical rigid target type:
NONE Analytical rigid target is not used.
PLANE Infinite plane.
SPHERE Sphere (3D), or circle (2D).
CYLINDER Infinite cylinder.
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global cartesian component of:
- initial plane normal verctor inside the target body (ANALYTICAL=PLANE).
- initial cylinder axis verctor (ANALYTICAL=CYLINDER).
RADIUS [0.0]
Radius of sphere (ANALYTICAL=SPHERE) or cylinder (ANALYTICAL=CYLINDER).
GTYPE [POINT]
Geometry type for reference node: node or point. {NODE/POINT}
GNAME
Label number of reference node or point. An existing label number must be specified.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET
ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET
Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions
CONTACT-CONTROL CONTACT -ALGORITHM XCONT-ALGORITHM
DISPLACEMENT NSUPPRESS DAMPING
DAMP-NORMAL DAMP-TANGENTIAL
TENSION-CONSISTENT CSTYPE FRICTION-ALGORITHM
POST-IMPACT RT-SUBD SEGMENT-INNER-ITERATION
RT-ALGORITHM
Specifies certain parameters controlling the behavior of the algorithms used in modeling
contact. For further details on these parameters, please consult the Theory and Modeling
Guide.
CONTACT-ALGORITHM [CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION]
Selects the default algorithm used to solve contact problems in implicit analysis.
{CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION / SEGMENT-METHOD / RIGID-TARGET}
XCONT-ALGORITHM [KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT]
Selects the default algorithm used to solve contact problems in explicit analysis.
{KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT / PENALTY / EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET}
DISPLACEMENT [LARGE]
Specifies the default displacement formulation used for contact analysis. A different formula-
tion may be selected for each individual contact group via the CGROUP command. {LARGE/
SMALL}
LARGE Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is per-
formed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.
SMALL Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are gener-
ated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant throughout the
analysis.
NSUPPRESS [0]
Indicates the number of iterations for which previous target segments are stored for contactor
nodes -- in order to suppress oscillation between adjacent segments. Such oscillation can
occur when a contactor node approaches the junction between two adjacent target segments.
Use of NSUPPRESS > 0 allows for such oscillation to be detected and eliminated.
NSUPPRESS = 0 (the default) indicates that no such checking and associated storage is
required. {$ 0}
For NSUPPRESS >0, ADINA stores all target segments that have previously (during equilib-
rium iterations) come into contact with a contactor node. To limit the amount of memory
required, NSUPPRESS is limited to a maximum value of 99.
CONTACT-CONTROL
Chap. 7 Model definition CONTACT-CONTROL
Notes:
1 NSUPPRESS has no effect if the node-to-node contact algorithm is used.
2 NSUPPRESS should be less than the maximum number of equilibrium iterations.
DAMPING [NO]
Indicates whether damping stabilization is applied for contact analysis. This feature is
generally useful when rigid body motion exists in a model. {NO/INITIAL/CONSTANT}
INITIAL Damping is applied at the first time step only. The specified damping
coefficients are applied and ramped down to zero by the end of the first time
step.
CONSTANT The specified damping coefficients are applied at all time steps.
DAMP-NORMAL [0.0]
Specified the normal damping coefficient. { $ 0.0 }
DAMP-TANGENTIAL [0.0]
Specified the tangential damping coefficient. { $ 0.0 }
TENSION-CONSISTENT [NO]
Specifies whether to allow tensile consistent contact forces (quadratic 3D elements only).
{YES/NO}
CSTYPE [NEW]
Selects the type of contact segment to use. {OLD/NEW}
OLD Use the old contact segment.
NEW Use the new contact segment.
FRICTION-ALGORITHM [CURRENT]
Selects which friction algorithm is used in the solution. {V83/CURRENT}
POST-IMPACT [YES]
Indicates whether the post-impact correction of velocities and accelerations is performed
along with the displacement constraint in dynamic contact problems. {YES/NO}
RT-SUBD [MAGNITUDE]
Selects the subdivision scheme used in the rigid-target algorithm when the tensile contact
force (and penetration if selected) is too large. Used only for the rigid-target contact algo-
rithm of version 8.3. {MAGNITUDE/ATS}
Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions CONTACT-CONTROL
MAGNITUDE Subdivision is based on the magnitude of the tensile contact force (and
penetration), i.e., the larger the magnitude, the smaller will be the
subdivided time step size.
ATS Subdivision is based on the global automatic time stepping (ATS)
subdivsion settings.
SEGMENT-INNER-ITERATION [YES]
Indicates whether the inner iteration loop is to be performed for the segment method contact
algorithm. {YES/NO}
RT-ALGORITHM [CURRENT]
Selects the rigid-target contact algorithm. Details are in Chapter 4 of the ADINA Theory and
Modeling Guide. {V83/CURRENT}
V83 Use the rigid-target contact algorithm of ADINA version 8.3 and earlier
CURRENT Use the rigid-target contact algorithm of the current ADINA version.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACT-CONTROL
CGROUP CONTACT2
This command is split, for better readability, based on the contact algorithm. There are 6
possibilities:
Implicit analysis
1. Constraint Function Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)=CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION
2. Segment Method Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT
CONTROL)=SEGMENT
3. Rigid Target Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=RIGID-TARGET
CONTROL)=RIGID-TARGET
Explicit analysis
4. Kinematic Constraint Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-
CONTROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
5. Penalty Algorithm
- XALGORITHM=PENALTY
CONTROL)=PENALTY
- XALGORITHM=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
CONTROL)=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
Note that:
- Algorithms #1, #2, #4 support node-to-node contact (the default is node-to-
segment) via parameter NODETONODE=YES.
- Algorithms #1, #2 support tied contact via parameter TIED=SMALL
Auxiliary Commands
LIST CGROUP2 FIRST LAST
DELETE CGROUP2 FIRST LAST NODES
CGROUP CONTACT2
NODES = YES (the default) will remove nodes which were only attached to contact
segments in the deleted contact group.
The summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm is presented in two tables
following the command descriptions for the 3D contact command (CGROUP CONTACT3).
One table is for implicit analysis and the other for explicit analysis.
CGROUP CONTACT2
Case 1: Implicit Constraint Function Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME ALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION CFACTOR1 DEPTH TIED TIED-OFFSET
OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS
CONTINUOUS-NORMAL DIRECTION
TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION TIME-
PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION EPSN
EPST CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION
SUBTYPE
HHATTMC FCTMC FTTMC EKTMC
Activated when:
The following superscripts are used for some of the parameters:
1. Only applicable to (the default) node-to-segment contact
2. Only applicable to node-to-node contact
The absence of a superscript indicates general applicability.
The CGROUP parameters are divided into 3 subgroups: Basic, Advanced, and Multiphysics:
Basic parameters
NAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact group to be defined.
ALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is implicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on the CONTACT-ALGORITHM parameter
of the MASTER command. See comment above for activating the current contact algorithm.
{DEFAULT/ CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION/ SEGMENT-METHOD/ RIGID-TARGET}
NODETONODE [NO]
Indicates whether node-to-segment or node-to-node contact algorithm is used by the contact
group. {YES/NO}
CGROUP CONTACT2
NO - Use node-to-segment contact
YES - Use node-to-node contact
DISPLACEMENT
1
[DEFAULT]
Specifies the displacement formulation used for this contact group. {DEFAULT/LARGE/
SMALL}
DEFAULT - The displacement formulation specified in the CONTACT-CONTROL
command is used.
LARGE - Large displacement is assumed for contact where the contact search is
performed in each iteration to generate new contact constraints.
SMALL - Small displacement is assumed for contact. The contact constraints are
generated once in the beginning of the analysis and kept constant
throughout the analysis.
FRICTION [0.0]
Default coefficient of Coulomb friction. FRICTION = 0.0 indicates frictionless contact.
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficient.
CFACTOR1 [0.0]
Compliance factor for all contact surfaces in this contact group. {$ 0.0}
DEPTH
1
[0.0]
If DEPTH > 0.0, then penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or
equal to DEPTH, and if the penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is
deemed not to occur.
TIED
1
[NO]
Indicates the type of TIED contact. This parameter is ignored when PENETRATION-
ALGORITHM = TWO. {NO/SMALL}
NO - No TIED contact.
SMALL - Small displacement is used in TIED contact.
TIED-OFFSET
1
[0.0]
If TIED = SMALL, contactor nodes are tied to target if the gap between them is less than or
equal to this parameter. This parameter is ignored when TIED = NO.
OFFSET [0.001]
Two contact surfaces are constructed for each defined contact surface, each contact surface
placed a distance OFFSET from the defined contact surface. { $ 0.0}
Note: The OFFSET parameter specifies the default offset distance. For each individual
CGROUP CONTACT2
contact surface, a different offset distance can be specified using the command
CS-OFFSET.
OFFSET-TYPE [CONSTANT]
Specifies the type of offset to be used for contact surfaces belonging to this group.
{CONSTANT/TRUE/NONE}
CONSTANT - Constant offset as specified by the parameter OFFSET is used.
See note under OFFSET.
TRUE - The actual shell half thickness is used as the offset distance even for
large strains.
NONE - No offset is used (regardless of the value of the parameter OFFSET).
FORCES
1
[YES]
Indicates whether or not concentrated contact nodal forces are calculated for every contact
surface node of this contact group. The contact forces are evaluated with respect to the
global Cartesian coordinate system. {YES/NO}
Note: - If NODETONODE = YES, nodal forces are always calculated and this parameter is
ignored.
- The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.
TRACTIONS
1
[YES]
Indicates whether or not contactor segment tractions (and concentrated contact nodal forces
at solitary nodes in contact) are calculated for every contactor surface of this contact group.
{YES/NO}
Note: The combination FORCES = NO, TRACTIONS = NO is not permitted.
CONTINUOUS-NORMAL
1
[YES if PENETRATION = ONE]
[NO if PENETRATION = TWO]
Indicates whether or not a continuous (interpolated) contact segment normal is to be used for
contact surfaces in the contact group. {YES/NO}
DIRECTION
2
[NORMAL]
Specifies the vector used to describe the normal direction for a nodal pair in node-to-node
contact. {NORMAL/VECTOR}
NORMAL - Use the normal vector inside the target body.
VECTOR - Use the vector connecting target and contactor nodes.
CGROUP CONTACT2
Advanced parameters
TBIRTH
1
[0.0]
TDEATH
1
[0.0]
The birth and death times for the whole contact group. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0,
the birth and death feature is not used.
INITIAL-PENETRATION
1
[ALLOWED]
Initial contactor node penetration flag.
{ALLOWED/PRINT/DISCARDED/GAP-OVERRIDE}
ALLOWED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is
eliminated either in the first solution step or over a specified time
interval (see TIME-PENETRATION parameter). In successive steps
each contactor node cannot penetrate.
PRINT - Same as ALLOWED, but a printout of the penetrating contactor nodes
is produced.
DISCARDED - Any initial penetration of a contactor node into a target surface is not
eliminated in the first solution step. In successive steps each
contactor node is allowed to penetrate up to the initial penetration.
GAP-OVERRIDE - Initial penetrations or gaps are overridden by user-specified GAP-
VALUE parameter.
TIME-PENETRATION
1
[0.0]
Specifies the time used to eliminate any initial penetration. {$ 0.0}
If INITIAL-PENETRATION = ALLOWED or PRINT, and TIME-PENETRATION=0.0, then
the initial penetration is eliminated in the first time step. By specifying TIME-PENETRATION
> 0.0, initial penetration can be eliminated gradually. This may help in the convergence of
the solution.
GAP-VALUE
1
[0.0]
Specifies a constant gap distance between the contactor and target surfaces when INITIAL-
PENETRATION = GAP-OVERRIDE. This value overrides the value measured from the
contact surfaces. A negative GAP-VALUE means initial penetrations which will be eliminated.
CS-EXTENSION
1
[0.001]
The maximum non-dimensional extension of target contact surfaces.
{0.0 < CS-EXTENSION < 0.1}
EPSN [0.0]
The normal contact w-function %
&
parameter. Guidelines for choosing this parameter are
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPSN = 0.0, ADINA automatically deter-
mines this parameter.
CGROUP CONTACT2
Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions CGROUP CONTACT2
EPST [0.0]
The friction contact v-function %
T
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPST = 0.0, ADINA automatically sets it to
0.001.
CONSISTENT-STIFF
1
[DEFAULT]
Indicates whether consistent contact stiffness is used. {DEFAULT/OFF/ON}
When CONSISTENT-STIFF = DEFAULT, consistent contact stiffness is used if the following
conditions are all satisfied:
- the skyline direct equation solver is not used, i.e., SOLVER is not set to SKYLINE in the
MASTER command,
- CONTINUOUS-NORMAL = NO is specified.
- Old contact surfaces are used (CSTYPE=OLD in CONTACT-CONTROL command).
Otherwise, the default is set to off.
Note that this option is not used in small displacement analysis (DISPLACEMENT=SMALL in
the KINEMATICS command). It is also not used if small displacements are selected in the
contact group (DISPLACEMENT parameter).
The use of consistent contact stiffness increases the size of the stiffness matrix. However, it
can improve the convergence rate in contact problems, especially in cases where the normal
vector between the contacting surfaces frequently changes direction during the analysis.
FRIC-DELAY [NO]
Indicates whether the application of friction is delayed, i.e., applied one time step after
contact is established. {NO/YES}
USER-FRICTION
1
[NO]
Indicates whether a user-supplied friction law is used for this contact group. If USER-
FRICTION=YES is specified, additional parameters for defining the user-supplied friction law
can be input using the USER-FRICTION command. {YES/NO}
SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
Indicates the type of CONTACT2 contact-surfaces, all defined in the global YZ plane.
{DEFAULT/AXISYMMETRIC/STRAIN/STRESS}
DEFAULT - Subtype automatically determined based on underlying elements.
AXISYMMETRIC - Axisymmetric contact-surfaces. The global Z axis is that of
rotational symmetry, and Y is the radial direction (Y $ 0).
STRAIN - Planar contact-surfaces.
STRESS - Planar contact-surfaces (identical to STRAIN).
Multiphysics parameters
HHATTMC
1
[0.0]
Contact heat transfer coefficient used for thermo-mechanical coupling (TMC) analysis.
{ $ 0.0}
FCTMC
1
[0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coefficient for contactor used for thermo-mechani-
cal coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 ! FCTMC ! 1.0}
FTTMC
1
[0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coefficient for target used for thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 ! FTTMC ! 1.0}
EKTMC
1
[0.0]
Electrical conductivity for current flow through contact surfaces in a thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. (Units: electrical conductance/length, e.g., Siemens/m) {$ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT2
Case 2: Implicit Segment Method Algorithm
FRICTION DEPTH TIED TIED-OFFSET OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS CONTINUOUS-
NORMAL DIRECTION
PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION
SUBTYPE
Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT-METHOD
CONTROL)=SEGMENT-METHOD
All the parameters for the Segment Method Algorithm are described in Case 1: Implicit -
Constraint Function Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT2
Case 3: Implicit - Rigid Target Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME ALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH
TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS
PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE RESIDUAL-FORCE
LIMIT-FORCE ITERATION-LIMIT RTP-CHECK RTP-MAX
SUBTYPE RIGID-TARGET
Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
RIGID-TARGET
Note: This algorithm is equivalent to the Old 3D Implicit Rigid Target Algorithm.
For the following parameters, see description for Case 1: Implicit - Constraint Function
Algorithm
NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
SUBTYPE
NORMAL-STIFFNESS [1.0E11]
Contact stiffness in direction normal to the contact surface.
TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS [0.0]
Contact stiffness in direction tangential to the contact surface.
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
Maximum allowable penetration of target surface. If penetration is less than PTOLERANCE,
contact is assumed to be not yet established for the node in consideration.
OFFSET [0.0]
The actual contact surface is raised a distance OFFSET away from the surface defined by the
nodes. { $ 0.0}
{CONSTANT/TRUE}
CGROUP CONTACT2
large strains.
RESIDUAL-FORCE [0.001]
Minimum tensile contact force required to change state of a contact node from "node in
contact" to "free node". If the normal component of a tensile contact force is less than
RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" remains in contact. If the normal tensile force is
greater than RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" becomes a "free node".
LIMIT-FORCE [1.0]
Limit (maximum) for the sum of all contact forces for nodes changing from the state of "node
in contact" to "free node". If the absolute value of the sum of the forces is bigger than
LIMIT-FORCE, then the automatic time stepping (ATS) method will be activated to subdivide
the current time step into smaller time increments.
ITERATION-LIMIT [2]
Maximum number of ATS time step subdivisions due to LIMIT-FORCE criterion described
above.
RTP-CHECK [NO]
Specifies whether penetration is checked (in addition to checking the tensile contact force)
against the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid-target algorithm is used. {NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}
NO - Penetration is not checked. Note that with this setting, there is a
possibility that the rigid target surface may excessively penetrate the
contactor surface.
RELATIVE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is specified as a factor of the
overall model size.
ABSOLUTE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is the absolute value of
penetration allowed.
Note that if penetration check is selected, the program will perform subdivision of time steps
if the penetration exceeds the maximum allowable penetration. The subdivision scheme is
specified in the RT-SUBD parameter in the CONTACT-CONTROL command.
RTP-MAX [0.001]
Specifies the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid target algorithm is used.
RTP-MAX is either a factor of the model size or an absolute value depending on the
RTP-CHECK parameter. {> 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT2
SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
RIGID-TARGET (obsolete) [NO]
Indicates whether rigid target contact algorithm is used for current contact group. It is
preferable to set ALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}
CGROUP CONTACT2
Case 4: Explicit - Kinematic Constraint Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME XALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION DEPTH OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES
TRACTIONS DIRECTION
TBIRTH TDEATH INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME-PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
SUBTYPE
Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CON-
TROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
The CGROUP parameters are divided into 2 subgroups: Basic and Advanced.
Basic parameters
XALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is explicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on XCONT-ALGORITHM variable of the
CONTACT-CONTROL command. See comment above for activating the current contact
algorithm.
{DEFAULT/KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT/PENALTY/EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET}
NODETONODE [NO]
group. {YES/NO}
CGROUP CONTACT2
DISPLACEMENT
1
[DEFAULT]
SMALL}
command is used.
FRICTION [0.0]
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficients.
DEPTH
1
[0.0]
If DEPTH > 0.0, then penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or
equal to DEPTH, and if the penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is
deemed not to occur.
OFFSET [0.001]
Two contact surfaces are constructed for each defined contact surface, each contact surface
placed a distance OFFSET from the defined contact surface. { $ 0.0}
CS-OFFSET.
large strains.
FORCES
1
[YES]
CGROUP CONTACT2
ignored.
TRACTIONS
1
[YES]
{YES/NO}
DIRECTION
2
[NORMAL]
Advanced parameters
TBIRTH
1
[0.0]
TDEATH
1
[0.0]
INITIAL-PENETRATION
1
[ALLOWED]
is produced.
VALUE parameter.
TIME-PENETRATION
1
[0.0]
CGROUP CONTACT2
the solution.
GAP-VALUE
1
[0.0]
CS-EXTENSION
1
[0.001]
SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
CGROUP CONTACT2
Case 5: Explicit Penalty Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME XALGORITHM DISPLACEMENT FRICTION
DEPTH OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS
XKN-CRIT XK-NORMAL XKT-CRIT XK-TANGENT
XDAMP XNDAMP
SUBTYPE
Activated when:
- XALGORITHM=DEFAULT & XCONT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
PENALTY
For the following parameters, see description for Case 4: Explicit - Kinematic constraint
algorithm
NAME
XALGORITHM
DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION
DEPTH
OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE
FORCES
TRACTIONS
TBIRTH
TDEATH
INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME-PENETRATION
GAP-VALUE
CS-EXTENSION
SUBTYPE
XKN-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of normal penalty stiffness.
{GLOBAL/USER}
GLOBAL - Penalty stiffness will be determined globally for the whole contact group.
USER - The user sets the penalty stiffness.
CGROUP CONTACT2
XK-NORMAL [0.0]
The normal stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKN-CRIT=USER.
XKT-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of tangential penalty stiffness. {GLOBAL/USER}
XK-TANGENT [0.0]
The tangetial stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKT-CRIT=USER.
XDAMP [NO]
Indicates whether normal damping (proportional to the rate of penetration) is used.{NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}
NO - Damping is not used, i.e., XNDAMP parameter is ignored.
RELATIVE - Damping is used and XNDAMP is a factor of the critical damping, i.e., the
normal contact damping coefficient is given by XNDAMP multiplied by
the critical damping. This is the recommended choice if damping is used.
ABSOLUTE - Damping is included and the normal contact damping coefficient is
specified directly by XNDAMP.
XNDAMP [0.1]
Specifies the relative or absolute normal damping coefficient (for normal penalty stiffness).
{ $ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT2
Case 6: Explicit Rigid Target Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT2 NAME XALGORITHM FRICTION DEPTH TBIRTH
TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-
STIFFNESS PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE
SUBTYPE RIGID-TARGET
Activated when:
EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
Note: This algorithm is equivalent to the old 3D Rigid Target Algorithm.
algorithm
NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
SUBTYPE
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
OFFSET [0.0]
nodes. { $ 0.0}
{CONSTANT/TRUE}
CGROUP CONTACT2
large strains.
SUBTYPE [DEFAULT]
preferable to set XALGORITHM instead. {NO/YES}
CGROUP CONTACT2
Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3
CGROUP CONTACT3
This command is split, for better readability, based on the contact algorithm. There are 8
possibilities:
Implicit analysis
1. Constraint Function Algorithm
2. Segment Method Algorithm
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT
CONTROL)=SEGMENT
CONTROL)=RIGID-TARGET
4. Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 now obsolete)
- Same as Case #3 with RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83
Explicit analysis
5. Kinematic Constraint Algorithm
CONTROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
6. Penalty Algorithm
CONTROL)=PENALTY
CONTROL)=EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
8. Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 now obsolete)
- Same as Case #7 with RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83
Note that:
- Algorithms #1, #2, #5 support node-to-node contact (the default is node-to-
segment) via parameter NODETONODE=YES.
- Algorithms #1, #2 support tied contact via parameter TIED=SMALL
- Algorithms #1, #2, #5, #6 support double-sided contact via parameter
PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=TWO
Auxiliary Commands
LIST CGROUP3 FIRST LAST
DELETE CGROUP3 FIRST LAST NODES
NODES = YES (the default) will remove nodes which were only attached to contact
segments in the deleted contact group.
The summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm is presented in two tables
following the command descriptions, one for implicit analysis and one for explicit analysis.
Chap. 7 Model definition CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 1: Implicit Constraint Function Algorithm
FRICTION CFACTOR1 PENETRATION-ALGORITHM
DEPTH TIED TIED-OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE
FORCES TRACTIONS CONTINUOUS-NORMAL
DIRECTION
PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION EPSN
EPST CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION
HHATTMC FCTMC FTTMC EKTMC
Activated when:
The CGROUP parameters are divided into 3 subgroups: Basic, Advanced, and Multiphysics:
Basic parameters
ALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is implicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on the CONTACT-ALGORITHM parameter
of the MASTER command. See comment above for activating the current contact algorithm.
{DEFAULT/ CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION/ SEGMENT-METHOD/ RIGID-TARGET}
NODETONODE [NO]
group. {YES/NO}
DISPLACEMENT
1
[DEFAULT]
SMALL}
command is used.
FRICTION [0.0]
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficient.
CFACTOR1 [0.0]
Compliance factor for all contact surfaces in this contact group. {$ 0.0}
PENETRATION-ALGORITHM
1
[ONE]
The penetration algorithm can be chosen as follows:
ONE - Each contact surface is single-sided. You must insure that each contact surface
has proper orientation.
TWO - Each contact surface is double-sided. The contact surface orientation does not
matter. It is recommended that the nodal offset be greater than zero in this case.
DEPTH
1
[0.0]
This parameter is used when PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE. If DEPTH > 0.0, then
penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or equal to DEPTH, and if the
penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is deemed not to occur.
TIED
1
[NO]
Indicates the type of TIED contact. This parameter is ignored when PENETRATION-
ALGORITHM = TWO. {NO/SMALL}
NO - No TIED contact.
SMALL - Small displacement is used in TIED contact.
TIED-OFFSET
1
[0.0]
If TIED = SMALL, contactor nodes are tied to target if the gap between them is less than or
equal to this parameter. This parameter is ignored when TIED = NO.
OFFSET [0.0 if PENETRATION = ONE]
[0.001 if PENETRATION = TWO]
For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE, the actual contact surface is raised a distance
OFFSET away from the surface defined by the nodes. { $ 0.0}
For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=TWO, two contact surfaces are constructed for each
defined contact surface, each contact surface placed a distance OFFSET from the defined
contact surface. { $ 0.0}
CS-OFFSET.
large strains.
FORCES
1
[YES]
ignored.
TRACTIONS
1
[YES]
{YES/NO}
CGROUP CONTACT3
CONTINUOUS-NORMAL
1
[YES if PENETRATION = ONE]
[NO if PENETRATION = TWO]
Indicates whether or not a continuous (interpolated) contact segment normal is to be used for
contact surfaces in the contact group. {YES/NO}
DIRECTION
2
[NORMAL]
Advanced parameters
TBIRTH
1
[0.0]
TDEATH
1
[0.0]
INITIAL-PENETRATION
1
[ALLOWED]
is produced.
VALUE parameter.
TIME-PENETRATION
1
[0.0]
the solution.
CGROUP CONTACT3
GAP-VALUE
1
[0.0]
CS-EXTENSION
1
[0.001]
EPSN [0.0]
The normal contact w-function %
&
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPSN = 0.0, ADINA automatically deter-
mines this parameter.
EPST [0.0]
The friction contact v-function %
T
provided in the ADINA-AUI Online Help. When EPST = 0.0, ADINA automatically sets it to
0.001.
CONSISTENT-STIFF
1
[DEFAULT]
Indicates whether consistent contact stiffness is used. {DEFAULT/OFF/ON}
When CONSISTENT-STIFF = DEFAULT, consistent contact stiffness is used if the following
conditions are all satisfied:
- the skyline direct equation solver is not used, i.e., SOLVER is not set to SKYLINE in the
MASTER command,
- CONTINUOUS-NORMAL = NO is specified.
- Old contact surfaces are used (CSTYPE=OLD in CONTACT-CONTROL command).
Otherwise, the default is set to off.
Note that this option is not used in small displacement analysis (DISPLACEMENT=SMALL in
the KINEMATICS command). It is also not used if small displacements are selected in the
contact group (DISPLACEMENT parameter).
The use of consistent contact stiffness increases the size of the stiffness matrix. However, it
can improve the convergence rate in contact problems, especially in cases where the normal
vector between the contacting surfaces frequently changes direction during the analysis.
FRIC-DELAY [NO]
Indicates whether the application of friction is delayed, i.e., applied one time step after
contact is established. {NO/YES}
CGROUP CONTACT3
USER-FRICTION
1
[NO]
Indicates whether a user-supplied friction law is used for this contact group. If USER-
FRICTION=YES is specified, additional parameters for defining the user-supplied friction law
can be input using the USER-FRICTION command. {YES/NO}
Multiphysics parameters
HHATTMC
1
[0.0]
Contact heat transfer coefficient used for thermo-mechanical coupling (TMC) analysis.
{ $ 0.0}
FCTMC
1
[0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coefficient for contactor used for thermo-mechani-
cal coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 ! FCTMC ! 1.0}
FTTMC
1
[0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coefficient for target used for thermo-mechanical
coupling (TMC) analysis. {0.0 ! FTTMC ! 1.0}
EKTMC
1
[0.0]
coupling (TMC) analysis. (Units: electrical conductance/length, e.g., Siemens/m) {$ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 2: Implicit Segment Method Algorithm
FRICTION PENETRATION-ALGORITHM DEPTH TIED
TIED-OFFSET OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES
TRACTIONS CONTINUOUS-NORMAL DIRECTION
PENETRATION GAP-VALUE CS-EXTENSION
CONSISTENT-STIFF FRIC-DELAY USER-FRICTION
Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=SEGMENT-METHOD
CONTROL)=SEGMENT-METHOD
All the parameters for the Segment Method Algorithm are described in Case 1: Implicit -
Constraint Function Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 3: Implicit - Rigid Target Algorithm
TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TENSILE-FORCE
SLIDING-VELOCITY OSCILLATION-CHECKING GAP-BIAS
OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE OFFSET-DETECT TENS-CONTACT
FREE-OVERLAP GAP-PUSH RIGID-TARGET
Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CON-
TROL)= RIGID-TARGET
Algorithm
NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
TENSILE-FORCE [0.001]
The maximum tensile contact force allowed for a converged solution.
{$ 0.0}
SLIDING-VELOCITY [1E-10]
The maximum sliding velocity used in modeling sticking friction. When the velocity is smaller
than SLIDING-VELOCITY, sticking is assumed; when the velocity is larger than SLIDING-
VELOCITY, sliding is assumed. {>0.0}
OSCILLATION-CHECKING [5]
The intent of this parameter is to increase the likelihood of convergence during the equilib-
rium iterations. {$ 0.0}
OSCILLATION-CHECKING=0 turns off oscillation checking.
OSCILLATION-CHECKING>0 signals oscillation checking after equilibrium iteration OSCIL-
CGROUP CONTACT3
LATION-CHECKING. For example, when OSCILLATION-CHECKING=5, then oscillation
checking is activated after equilibrium iteration 5.
Oscillation checking consists of two checks:
a) If a contactor node oscillates between two neighboring target segments during the
equilibrium iterations, oscillation checking puts the contactor node into contact with the
boundary edge between the target segments.
b) In analysis with friction, if the sliding velocity of a contactor node oscillates during the
equilibrium iterations, oscillation checking puts the contactor node into sticking contact.
The oscillation check is only applied for the iteration in which the oscillation is detected.
GAP-BIAS [0.0]
Contact is detected when the distance between the target and contactor (accounting for any
offsets) is less than GAP-BIAS.
GAP-BIAS can be positive, negative or zero.
OFFSET [0.0]
nodes. { $ 0.0}
{CONSTANT/TRUE}
large strains.
OFFSET-DETECT [AUTOMATIC]
This parameter determines the implementation of offsets for the current rigid-target contact
algorithm. {NORMALS/SPHERES/AUTOMATIC}
NORMALS - Two surfaces are constructed for each contactor surface: an upper
surface and a lower surface. These surface are constructed using the
offsets and the averaged contactor normals. Contact is then detected
between points on the constructed contactor surfaces and target
surfaces.
SPHERES - A sphere with a radius equal to the offset is placed around each
contactor node, and contact is detected between the spheres and the
target surfaces.
CGROUP CONTACT3
AUTOMATIC - ADINA chooses the implementation based upon the shape of the
target surfaces; if a target surface is flat or convex, spheres are used,
otherwise normals are used.
TENS-CONTACT [NO]
This parameter controls the use of the tensile contact feature. {NO/YES}
FREE-OVERLAP [NO]
This parameter controls the use of the free overlap feature. {NO/YES}
GAP-PUSH [0.0]
This parameter controls the gap-push feature. { $ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 4: Implicit - Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 - now obsolete)
Note: This is an obsolete algorithm that should only be used for backward compatibility.
TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS
PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE RESIDUAL-FORCE
LIMIT-FORCE ITERATION-LIMIT RTP-CHECK RTP-MAX
RIGID-TARGET
Activated when:
- ALGORITHM=DEFAULT & CONTACT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=
RIGID-TARGET
&
- RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83
Algorithm
NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
OFFSET [0.0]
nodes. { $ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT3
{CONSTANT/TRUE}
large strains.
RESIDUAL-FORCE [0.001]
Minimum tensile contact force required to change state of a contact node from "node in
contact" to "free node". If the normal component of a tensile contact force is less than
RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" remains in contact. If the normal tensile force is
greater than RESIDUAL-FORCE, a "node in contact" becomes a "free node".
LIMIT-FORCE [1.0]
Limit (maximum) for the sum of all contact forces for nodes changing from the state of "node
in contact" to "free node". If the absolute value of the sum of the forces is bigger than
LIMIT-FORCE, then the automatic time stepping (ATS) method will be activated to subdivide
the current time step into smaller time increments.
ITERATION-LIMIT [2]
Maximum number of ATS time step subdivisions due to LIMIT-FORCE criterion described
above.
RTP-CHECK [NO]
Specifies whether penetration is checked (in addition to checking the tensile contact force)
against the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid-target algorithm is used. {NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}
NO - Penetration is not checked. Note that with this setting, there is a
possibility that the rigid target surface may excessively penetrate the
contactor surface.
RELATIVE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is specified as a factor of the
overall model size.
ABSOLUTE - Penetration is checked and RTP-MAX is the absolute value of
penetration allowed.
Note that if penetration check is selected, the program will perform subdivision of time steps
if the penetration exceeds the maximum allowable penetration. The subdivision scheme is
specified in the RT-SUBD parameter in the CONTACT-CONTROL command.
RTP-MAX [0.001]
Specifies the maximum allowable penetration when the rigid target algorithm is used.
CGROUP CONTACT3
RTP-MAX is either a factor of the model size or an absolute value depending on the
RTP-CHECK parameter. {> 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 5: Explicit - Kinematic Constraint Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME XALGORITHM NODETONODE DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION PENETRATION-ALGORITHM DEPTH
OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS
DIRECTION
Activated when:
TROL)= KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT
The CGROUP parameters are divided into 2 subgroups: Basic and Advanced.
Basic parameters
XALGORITHM [DEFAULT]
Selects the contact algorithm for current group if the analysis is explicit. If DEFAULT is
selected the algorithm type is determined based on XCONT-ALGORITHM variable of the
CONTACT-CONTROL command. See comment above for activating the current contact
algorithm.
{DEFAULT/KINEMATIC-CONSTRAINT/PENALTY/EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET}
NODETONODE [NO]
group. {YES/NO}
CGROUP CONTACT3
DISPLACEMENT
1
[DEFAULT]
SMALL}
command is used.
FRICTION [0.0]
Contact pairs can set their own friction coefficients.
1
[ONE]
The penetration algorithm can be chosen as follows:
ONE - Each contact surface is single-sided. You must insure that each
contact surface has proper orientation.
TWO - Each contact surface is double-sided. The contact surface orientation does not
matter. It is recommended that the nodal offset be greater than zero in this case.
DEPTH
1
[0.0]
This parameter is used when PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE. If DEPTH > 0.0, then
penetration is detected when the penetration depth is less than or equal to DEPTH, and if the
penetration distance is greater than DEPTH, penetration is deemed not to occur.
OFFSET [0.0 if PENETRATION = ONE]
[0.001 if PENETRATION = TWO]
For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=ONE, the actual contact surface is raised a distance
OFFSET away from the surface defined by the nodes. { $ 0.0}
For PENETRATION-ALGORITHM=TWO, two contact surfaces are constructed for each
defined contact surface, each contact surface placed a distance OFFSET from the defined
contact surface. { $ 0.0}
CS-OFFSET.
CGROUP CONTACT3
large strains.
FORCES
1
[YES]
ignored.
TRACTIONS
1
[YES]
{YES/NO}
DIRECTION
2
[NORMAL]
Advanced parameters
TBIRTH
1
[0.0]
TDEATH
1
[0.0]
INITIAL-PENETRATION
1
[ALLOWED]
CGROUP CONTACT3
is produced.
VALUE parameter.
TIME-PENETRATION
1
[0.0]
the solution.
GAP-VALUE
1
[0.0]
CS-EXTENSION
1
[0.001]
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 6: Explicit Penalty Algorithm
CGROUP CONTACT3 NAME XALGORITHM DISPLACEMENT FRICTION
PENETRATION-ALGORITHM DEPTH OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE FORCES TRACTIONS XKN-CRIT
XK-NORMAL XKT-CRIT XK-TANGENT XDAMP
XNDAMP
Activated when:
PENALTY
algorithm
NAME
XALGORITHM
DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION
DEPTH
OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE
FORCES
TRACTIONS
TBIRTH
TDEATH
INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME-PENETRATION
GAP-VALUE
CS-EXTENSION
XKN-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of normal penalty stiffness.
{GLOBAL/USER}
CGROUP CONTACT3
XK-NORMAL [0.0]
The normal stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKN-CRIT=USER.
XKT-CRIT [GLOBAL]
Criterion for evaluation of tangential penalty stiffness. {GLOBAL/USER}
XK-TANGENT [0.0]
The tangetial stiffness. It must be greater than 0.0. It is only used for XKT-CRIT=USER.
XDAMP [NO]
Indicates whether normal damping (proportional to the rate of penetration) is used.{NO/
RELATIVE/ABSOLUTE}
NO - Damping is not used, i.e., XNDAMP parameter is ignored.
RELATIVE - Damping is used and XNDAMP is a factor of the critical damping, i.e., the
normal contact damping coefficient is given by XNDAMP multiplied by
the critical damping. This is the recommended choice if damping is used.
ABSOLUTE - Damping is included and the normal contact damping coefficient is
specified directly by XNDAMP.
XNDAMP [0.1]
Specifies the relative or absolute normal damping coefficient (for normal penalty stiffness).
{ $ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 7: Explicit - Rigid Target Algorithm
TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS SLIDING-VELOCITY
GAP-BIAS OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE OFFSET-DETECT
RIGID-TARGET
Activated when:
TROL)= EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
algorithm
NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
The maximum sliding velocity used in modeling sticking friction, used only when friction is
included. When the velocity is smaller than SLIDING-VELOCITY, sticking is assumed; when
the velocity is larger than SLIDING-VELOCITY, sliding is assumed. {>0.0}
GAP-BIAS [0.0]
Contact is detected when the distance between the target and contactor (accounting for any
offsets) is less than GAP-BIAS. GAP-BIAS can be positive, negative or zero.
OFFSET [0.0]
nodes. { $ 0.0}
{CONSTANT/TRUE}
CGROUP CONTACT3
large strains.
OFFSET-DETECT [AUTOMATIC]
This parameter determines the implementation of offsets for the current rigid-target contact
algorithm. {NORMALS/SPHERES/AUTOMATIC}
NORMALS - Two surfaces are constructed for each contactor surface: an upper
surface and a lower surface. These surface are constructed using the
offsets and the averaged contactor normals. Contact is then detected
between points on the constructed contactor surfaces and target
surfaces.
SPHERES - A sphere with a radius equal to the offset is placed around each
contactor node, and contact is detected between the spheres and the
target surfaces.
AUTOMATIC - ADINA chooses the implementation based upon the shape of the
target surfaces; if a target surface is flat or convex, spheres are used,
otherwise normals are used.
CGROUP CONTACT3
Case 8: Explicit Old Rigid Target Algorithm (version 8.3 now obsolete)
Note: This is an obsolete algorithm that should only be used for backward compatibility
TDEATH NORMAL-STIFFNESS TANGENTIAL-
STIFFNESS PTOLERANCE OFFSET OFFSET-TYPE
RIGID-TARGET
Activated when:
EXPLICIT-RIGID-TARGET
&
- RT-ALGORITHM (in CONTACT-CONTROL)=V83
algorithm
NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH
TDEATH
PTOLERANCE [1.0E-8]
OFFSET [0.0]
nodes. { $ 0.0}
CGROUP CONTACT3
{CONSTANT/TRUE}
large strains.
CGROUP CONTACT3
CONTACT ALGORITHM
CONSTRAINT- FUNCTION SEGMENT- METHOD RIGID- TARGET
NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
CFACTOR1
OFFSET
OFFSET- TYPE
EPSN
EPST
FRIC- DELAY
SUBTYPE
1
NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
OFFSET
OFFSET- TYPE
FRIC- DELAY
SUBTYPE
1
NAME
ALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH, TDEATH
NORMAL- STIFFNESS
TENSILE- FORCE
OFFSET
OFFSET- TYPE
SUBTYPE
1
SLIDING- VELOCITY
2
OSCILLATION- CHECKING
2
GAPBIAS
2
OFFSET- DETECT
2
TENS- CONTACT
2
FREE- OVERLAP
2
GAP- PUSH
2
TANGENTIAL- STIFFNESS*
PTOLERANCE*
RESIDUAL- FORCE*
LIMIT- FORCE*
ITERATION- LIMIT*
RTP- CHECK*
RTP- MAX*
NODETONODE = NO
DISPLACEMENT
PENETRATION- ALGORITHM
2
DEPTH
TIED
TIED- OFFSET
FORCES
TRACTIONS
CONTINUOUS- NORMAL
TBIRTH, TDEATH
INITIAL- PENETRATION
TIME- PENETRATION
GAP- VALUE
CS- EXTENSION
CONSISTENT- STIFF
USER- FRICTION
HHATTMC
FCTMC
FTTMC
EKTMC
DISPLACEMENT
PENETRATION- ALGORITHM
2
DEPTH
TIED
TIED- OFFSET
FORCES
TRACTIONS
CONTINUOUS- NORMAL
TBIRTH, TDEATH
INITIAL- PENETRATION
TIME- PENETRATION
GAP- VALUE
CS- EXTENSION
CONSISTENT- STIFF
USER- FRICTION
NODETONODE = YES
DIRECTION DIRECTION
Summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm
(Implicit analysis)
*
in the case of 3D contact, denotes only applicable to the old Rigid Target Algorithm
1
only applicable to 2D contact
2
Summary of parameters applicable for each contact algorithm
(Explicit analysis)
*
in the case of 3D contact, denotes only applicable to the old Rigid Target Algorithm
1
2
CONTACT ALGORITHM
KINEMATIC CONSTRAINT PENALTY EXPLICIT RIGID-TARGET
NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE
SUBTYPE
1
NAME
XALGORITHM
DISPLACEMENT
FRICTION
2
DEPTH
OFFSET
OFFSET- TYPE
FORCES
TRACTIONS
XKN-CRIT
XK-NORMAL
XKT-CRIT
XK-TANGENT
XDAMP
XNDAMP
TBIRTH, TDEATH
INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME- PENETRATION
GAP-VALUE
CS-EXTENSION
SUBTYPE
1
NAME
XALGORITHM
FRICTION
DEPTH
TBIRTH, TDEATH
NORMAL-STIFFNESS
OFFSET
OFFSET-TYPE
SUBTYPE
1
SLIDING-VELOCITY
2
GAPBIAS
2
OFFSET-DETECT
2
TANGENTIAL-STIFFNESS*
PTOLERANCE*
NODETONODE = NO
DISPLACEMENT
2
DEPTH
FORCES
TRACTIONS
TBIRTH, TDEATH
INITIAL-PENETRATION
TIME-PENETRATION
GAP-VALUE
CS-EXTENSION
NODETONODE = YES
DIRECTION
CONTACTBODY NAME PRINT SAVE SOLID BODY
operation
i
type
i
label
i
Command CONTACTBODY defines a contact body, i.e. a geometry surface in 2D
analysis or a geometry volume in 3D analysis, which is expected to be in contact with a
defined contactsurface (from the command CONTACTSURFACE). This allows all the nodes
in the volume to potentially be in contact with a target surface. The target surface should still
be defined using the CONTACTSURFACE command.
Each data input line specifies an operation, entity type and entity label. For example, you can
create a contactbody composed of a geometry volume excluding a geometry point by
specifying two data input lines, the first line adding the volume and the second line subtract-
ing the point.
NAME [(current highest contactbody/surface number) + 1]
Label number of the contactbody to be defined. Note that the contactbody names are unique
only within a contact group, i.e. two different contact groups may each define its own
contactbody 1. Note also that the name must be distinguished from that in the
CONTACTSURFACE command, because a contactpair can be formed between a geometry
defined by the CONTACTBODY and a geometry defined by the CONTACTSURFACE.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling printout of the results of the contact analysis as determined by the FORCES
and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. Choices are NO, YES and DE-
FAULT; when PRINT=DEFAULT, printout is controlled by the PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT
parameter.
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as
determined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. Choices
are NO, YES and DEFAULT; when SAVE=DEFAULT, saving is controlled by the PORTHOLE
SAVEDEFAULT parameter.
SOLID [NO]
Flag indicating whether the contact body is defined on a B-Rep solid model body. {NO/YES}
BODY
Geometry body label number of a B-Rep solid model. This parameter is required if
SOLID=YES.
CONTACTBODY
operation
i
[ADD]
The entity specified in this data line is either added to or subtracted from the contactbody.
{ADD/SUBTRACT}
type
i
The type of the entity specified in this data line. The entity can either be a geometry entity
(POINT, LINE, SURFACE, VOLUME, EDGE, FACE, BODY) or a finite element entity (NODE).
Command line parameter SOLID must be YES if the type is EDGE, FACE or BODY and the
command line parameter BODY must be specified if the type is EDGE or FACE.
label
i
The label number of the entity.
Auxilary commands
LIST CONTACTBODY FIRST LAST
DELETE CONTACTBODY FIRST LAST
CONTACTBODY
CONTACTSURFACE NAME PRINT SAVE SOLID BODY ORIENTATION
SENSE
name
i
sense
i
body
i
CONTACTSURFACE defines a contact-surface, i.e., a set of boundary entities which are
expected to be in contact either initially or during analysis with another similarly defined
contact-surface.
NAME [(current highest contactsurface label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact surface to be defined. Note that the contact-surface names are
unique only within a contact group, i.e., two different contact groups may each define its own
contact-surface 1.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by
PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as deter-
mined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is specified,
saving is controlled by the PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT parameter. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
SOLID [NO]
Indicates whether the contact surface is defined on solid body (or bodies). {NO/YES/
MULTI/BODY}
NO Contact surface is defined on native AUI geometry. Enter lines or surfaces in
the data input lines.
YES Contact surface is defined on a single solid body (specified by parameter
BODY). Enter edges or faces in the data input lines.
MULTI Contact surface is defined on surfaces or faces of multiple bodies. (Only for
3-D contact surface). Enter surfaces or faces (and parent bodies) in the data
input lines.
BODY Contact surface is defined on all boundary faces of a body (specified by
parameter BODY). Do not enter data input lines.
BODY [currently active body]
Geometry body label number.
CONTACTSURFACE
ORIENTATION [AUTOMATIC]
Indicates contact surface orientation.
AUTOMATIC The sense flag for each component of the contact-surface is
determined automatically.
INPUT The sense flag for contact-surface components is input in the
following data lines.
SENSE [+1]
Default for the data line entry for contact-surface orientation. {+1/-1}
name
i
Label of geometric entities used to define this contact surface. The type of geometric entity
depends on the contact group and the parameter SOLID as indicated below.
Contact Group SOLID name
i
2-D NO line label
2-D YES edge label
3-D NO surface label
3-D YES face label
3-D MULTI surface or face label
sense
i
[SENSE]
Orientation flag for geometry component:
+1 contact-surface uses same orientation as geometry.
-1 contact-surface uses opposite orientation to geometry.
body
i
Label of the parent solid body when name
i
is an edge label or a face label.
Note: The label numbers for contact-surface definitions include those defined by
commands CONTACTSURFACE, CONTACTPOINT and
CONTACT-FACENODES. Thus you cannot define CONTACTSURFACE 1 and
CONTACTPOINT 1, one would overwrite the prior definition.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACTSURFACE FIRST LAST
DELETE CONTACTSURFACE FIRST LAST
CONTACTSURFACE
CONTACTPOINT NAME PRINT SAVE POINT-TYPE
point
i
tnx
i
tny
i
tnz
i
Defines a contact-point, i.e., a contact-surface defined as a set of geometry points or nodes
(in 2-D or 3-D analysis) which are expected to be in contact, either initially or during analysis,
with another similarly defined contact-point or contact-surface (see CONTACTSURFACE ).
Note:
This command is only available for node-to-node contact (i.e., NODETONODE=YES in the
CGROUP CONTACT... command).
NAME [(current highest contact point label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact-point to be defined. Note that the contact-point names are
unique only within a contact group, i.e., two different contact groups may each define its own
contact-point 1.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as
determined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of CGROUP. If DEFAULT is
specified, saving is controlled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
POINT-TYPE [GEOMETRY]
Specify whether geometry points or nodal points are used to define the contact surface.
{GEOMETRY/NODAL/NODESET}
point
i
Geometry point, nodal point, or node set label.
tnx
i
X-component of normal vector directed inside target body.
tny
i
Y-component of normal vector directed inside target body.
tnz
i
Z-component of normal vector directed inside target body.
CONTACTPOINT
Note: The label numbers for contact-surface definitions include those defined by
commands CONTACTSURFACE , CONTACTPOINT and
CONTACT-FACENODES. Thus you cannot define CONTACTSURFACE 1 and
CONTACTPOINT 1, one would overwrite the prior definition.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACTPOINT FIRST LAST
DELETE CONTACTPOINT FIRST LAST
CONTACTPOINT
DRAWBEAD NAME CONTACTOR TARGET1 TARGET2 HEIGHT R-FORCE
U-FORCE PRINT SAVE DF-PRINT TBIRTH TDEATH GTYPE
SLIDING-VELOCITY
name
i
Defines a drawbead for metal forming analysis. This command is only active if the current
contact group is a rigid-target 3-D contact group.
NAME [(current highest DRAWBEAD label number) + 1 ]
Label number of the drawbead to be defined.
CONTACTOR
Specifies the contactor surface for the drawbead. A contactor surface is a contact surface that
is assigned as a contactor in a contact
pair definition.
TARGET1
Specifies the first target surface for the drawbead. A target surface is a contact surface that is
assigned as a target in a contact pair definition.
TARGET2
Specifies the second target surface for the drawbead.
HEIGHT
Specifies the drawbead height. {HEIGHT>0.0}
R-FORCE
Specifies the restraining force per unit length of the drawbead. {R-FORCE>0.0}
U-FORCE [0.0]
Specifies the uplifting force per unit length of the drawbead. {U-FORCE>=0.0}
PRINT [NO]
Indicates whether drawbead segment nodal forces are printed.
NO - do not print drawbead forces
R-FORCE - print only restraining forces
RU-FORCE - print restraining and uplifting forces
SAVE [NO]
DRAWBEAD
Indicates whether drawbead segment nodal forces are saved.
NO - do not save drawbead forces
R-FORCE - save only restraining forces
RU-FORCE - save restraining and uplifting forces
DF-PRINT [NO]
Indicates whether drawbead segment distributed forces (traction) are printed and/or saved to
the porthole file.
NO - do not print/save distributed forces
YES - print/save distributed forces
Option DF-PRINT = YES takes effect only if drawbead segment nodal forces are printed/
saved (parameter PRINT or SAVE is set to R-FORCE or RU-FORCE).
TBIRTH [TBIRTH of contact group]
Specifies the birth time of the drawbead.
TDEATH [TDEATH of contact group]
Specifies the death time of the drawbead.
GTYPE [LINE]
Specifies the entity type used to define the drawbead. {LINE/NODE}
The minimum velocity of the contactor surface through the drawbead for which the drawbead
develops the full restraining traction. {>0}
This parameter is used only by the current rigid-target algorithm.
name
i
Specifies the geometry lines or nodes that defines the drawbead.
Auxiliary commands
LIST DRAWBEAD FIRST LAST
DELETE DRAWBEAD FIRST LAST
DRAWBEAD
Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions COULOMB-FRICTION
COULOMB-FRICTION
cpair
i
model
i
A1
i
A2
i
A3
i
Specifies variable Coulomb friction coefficient for each contact pair under the current contact
group. Note that this command is not available for rigid target contact (i.e., the parameter
RIGID-TARGET=YES is specified in the CGROUP command).
cpair
i
Contact pair label number. If zero is specified, the parameter specified in the other fields of
this row will apply to all contact pairs.
model
i
Specifies the formula to define Coulomb friction coefficient '. {LAW1/LAW2}
LAW1 ! " # # $ % & ' A A T T
n n 1 2
1 0 . exp
LAW2 ! " ( # ) # $ % $ % A A A A T
n 2 1 2 3
exp
where T
n
is normal contact pressure and A
1
, A
2
, A
3
are constants.
A1
i
Constant A
1
.
A2
i
Constant A
2
.
A3
i
Constant A
3
. This constant is only applicable if LAW2 is used.
Auxiliary commands
LIST COULOMB-FRICTION
DELETE COULOMB-FRICTION
USER-FRICTION
integer
i
real
i
Specifies the integer and real parameters passed to the user-supplied friction subroutine
(FUSER) for the current contact group. Note that this feature cannot be used with the rigid
target contact option (i.e., RIGID-TARGET=YES is specified in the CGROUP command).
In the current implementation of FUSER, the first integer parameter is used to select a friction
model. Each friction model requires a number of real integer parameters as explained in
Section 4.3.2 of the Theory and Modeling Guide, Volume I (ADINA).
integer
i
Integer number.
real
i
Real number.
Auxiliary commands
LIST USER-FRICTION
DELETE USER-FRICTION
USER-FRICTION
Sec. 7.5 Contact conditions CS-OFFSET
CS-OFFSET
csurf
i
offset
i
Specifies offset distances for individual contact-surfaces under the current contact group. If
an individual contact surface is not specified here, the contact surface will use the default
offset distance specified by the OFFSET parameter in the CGROUP command.
csurf
i
Contact surface label number.
offset
i
Offset distance. { $ 0.0}
Note: This feature is not available for rigid target contact (i.e the parameter
RIGID-TARGET=YES is specified in the CGROUP command).
Auxiliary commands
LIST CS-OFFSET
DELETE CS-OFFSET
CONTACTPAIR NAME TARGET CONTACTOR FRICTION
TBIRTH TDEATH HHATTMC FCTMC FTTMC
NX NY NZ OFFSET-CONTACT EKTMC
Defines a contact pair, i.e., two contact-surfaces (see CONTACTSURFACE ) which are
either initially in contact or are anticipated to come into contact during analysis. One contact
surface is termed the contactor contact-surface and must be deformable, i.e., has contact
segments associated with the boundary surfaces of deformable finite elements (i.e., with
nodes with free displacement degrees of freedom) within the model. The other contact-
surface which makes up the contact pair is termed the target contact-surface. The target
contact-surface may be deformable or have prescribed displacement.
Body III
Body I
Contactor surface
top surface
of Body I
Target surface
bottom surface
of Body II
Contactor surface
bottom surface
of Body III
Body II
Target surface
top surface
of Body I
Contact Pair 1
Contact Pair 2
CONTACTPAIR
Three contact surafces forming 2 contact pairs
NAME [(current highest contactpair label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact pair to be defined. The contactpair numbering is independent for
each contact group.
TARGET
Target contact-surface, which must have been defined by the command
CONTACTSURFACE, CONTACTPOINT or CONTACT-FACENODES for the currently active
group.
CONTACTOR
Contactor contact-surface, defined by the CONTACTSURFACE, CONTACTPOINT or
CONTACT-FACENODES for the currently active contact group.
Note: To specify self-contact, you may specify TARGET and CONTACTOR to be the
same contact-surface.
FRICTION [CGROUP FRICTION]
Coefficient of friction between the target and contactor contact-surfaces. FRICTION = 0.0
implies the default friction specified by CGROUP command is used.
Note: FRICTION is not used in node-to-node contact (parameter NODETONODE in
commands CGROUP CONTACT2 and CGROUP CONTACT3 ). Contact group
friction is used instead.
TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
The birth and death times for current contact pair. If TBIRTH=0.0 and TDEATH=0.0, the
birth and death feature is not used.
Note: TBIRTH and TDEATH options are not used in node-to-node contact (parameter
NODETONODE in commands CGROUP CONTACT2 and CGROUP CONTACT3).
Note: If FRICTION, TBIRTH and TDEATH parameters are not specified, default values
defined by commands CGROUP CONTACT2 or CGROUP CONTACT3 are used.
HHATTMC [0.0]
Contact heat transfer coefficient; used only when thermo-mechanical coupling is active.
FCTMC [0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coef. for contactor; used only when thermo-
mechanical coupling is active. {0.0 ! FCTMC ! 1.0}
CONTACTPAIR
FTTMC [0.5]
Friction contact heat distribution fraction coef. for target; used only when thermo-mechanical
coupling is active. {0.0 ! FTTMC ! 1.0}
NX [0]
NY
NZ
Number of sorting buckets in X, Y, Z direction. For 2D contact groups (CGROUP CONTACT2)
parameter NX is ignored. {$ 0.0}
For rigid-target algorithm of version 8.3, 0 = 1 (set when writing data file).
For current rigid-target algorithm, 0 = automatically calculated by ADINA.
OFFSET-CONTACT [BOTH]
This parameter is used only in the following special cases {LOWER/UPPER/BOTH}:
1) Current rigid-target algorithm, and
2a) CGROUP OFFSET-DETECT=NORMALS, or
2b) CGROUP OFFSET-DETECT=AUTOMATIC and ADINA chooses an offset implementation
using normals.
Then the contactor surface is split into two surfaces, an upper surface and a lower surface:
LOWER Only the lower surface can be in contact with the target.
UPPER Only the upper surface can be in contact with the target.
BOTH Both surfaces can be in contact with the target.
Note that OFFSETCONTACT is only used to provide a hint to the contact algorithm, to speed
up the searching.
EKTMC [0.0]
coupling (TMC) analysis. Applicable only if the constraint function algorithm is used in
implicit analysis, i.e., ALGORITHM = CONSTRAINT-FUNCTION in CGROUP CONTACT2/
3. (Units: electrical conductance/length, e.g., Siemens/m) {$ 0.0}
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACTPAIR FIRST LAST
DELETE CONTACTPAIR FIRST LAST
CONTACTPAIR
CONTACT3-SEARCH BODY1 BODY2 CGROUP CSURFACE CPAIR DIST-TYPE
DIST-MAX DIST-MIN EXISTING
CONTACT3-SEARCH creates 3D contact surfaces and contact pairs between two bodies
within the given distance range.
BODY1
Label number of the first body. The contact surfaces defined by the faces of BODY1 will be
used as target surfaces in contact pair.
BODY2
Label number of the second body. The contact surfaces defined by the faces of BODY2 will
be used as contactor surfaces in contact pair. Please note that BODY1 and BODY2 cannot be
the same.
CGROUP [current 3D contact group label number]
3D contact group label number. The given 3D contact group needs to be defined before this
command is used.
CSURFACE [(current contact surface label number) + 1]
Contact surface label number. If the contact surface label number exists, it will be overwritten.
CPAIR [(current contact pair label number) + 1]
Contact pair label number. If the contact pair label number exists, it will be overwritten.
DIST-TYPE [CLOSEST]
Selects the type of distance that will be used to measure the distance between faces.
CLOSEST The shortest distance between faces
FACE-CENTER The distance between face centers
DIST-MAX
DIST-MIN [0.0]
Faces between BODY1 and BODY2 will be used to define contact surfaces and contact pairs
if the distance is between DIST-MIN and DIST-MAX.
EXISTING [OVERWRITE]
Indicates how existing contact surfaces and pairs in the contact group CGROUP are handled.
{OVERWRITE/REMOVE/KEEP}
OVERWRITE Existing contact surfaces and pairs are overwritten if their label
numbers are the same as the new contact surfaces and pairs
specified by CSURFACE and CPAIR parameters
CONTACT3-SEARCH
REMOVE All existing contact surfaces and pairs are removed
KEEP Existing contact surface and pairs are kept. Hence, if the label numbers
specified in CSURFACE or CPAIR already exist, this command will give an
error.
CONTACT3-SEARCH
FRACTURE TECHNIQUE METHOD DIMENSION TYPE
PRESSURE TEMPERATURE DYNAMIC LVUS3
FRACTURE defines the controlling data for analysis of fracture mechanics problems.
TECHNIQUE [STANDARD]
Defines whether standard or user-supplied fracture criteria / propagation models are used in
the analysis.
STANDARD Standard analysis model.
METHOD [VIRTUAL-CRACK-EXTENSION]
The method of evaluating the J-parameter value. {VIRTUAL-CRACK-EXTENSION/
LINE-CONTOUR/BOTH}
DIMENSION [2]
Dimension of fracture analysis. {2/3}
2 2-D crack.
3 3-D crack.
TYPE [STATIONARY]
Type of crack. {STATIONARY/PROPAGATION}
STATIONARY Analysis of a stationary crack.
PROPAGATION Analysis of a propagating crack.
PRESSURE [YES]
Pressure correction for virtual crack extension method. {YES/NO}
YES Pressure correction applied.
NO No correction.
TEMPERATURE [YES]
Temperature correction for virtual crack extension method. {YES/NO}
YES Temperature correction applied.
NO No correction.
FRACTURE
Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics
DYNAMIC [YES]
Dynamic correction for virtual crack extension method. {YES/NO}
YES Dynamic correction applied.
NO No correction.
LVUS3 [0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST FRACTURE
FRACTURE
CRACK-GROWTH CONTROL-TYPE J-VERSION FACTOR R-CURVE
LOCTYPE DOF SHIFT-RELEASE POINT NODE
CRACK-GROWTH specifies parameters which govern the growth of a propagating crack.
This command should be used whenever the FRACTURE command indicates a 2-D propagat-
ing crack.
CONTROL-TYPE [FIXED]
The type of crack growth control:
FIXED A fixed virtual material shift.
MOVING A moving virtual material shift.
NODAL A nodal degree of freedom.
J-VERSION [CORRECTIONS]
The version of the J-parameter used in crack growth control.
CORRECTIONS J-parameter with thermal, pressure and dynamic corrections.
NONE J-parameter without thermal, pressure and dynamic corrections.
FACTOR [1.0]
This parameter is not used any more, and is permanently set to 1.0 by the program.
R-CURVE [1]
The identifying number of a resistance curve used in crack growth control (see command R-
CURVE ). {POINT/NODE}
LOCTYPE [POINT]
The type of location where a specified degree of freedom is used to control the crack propa-
gation. {POINT/NODE}
DOF
The degree of freedom at the point (or node) used to control the crack propagation.
1 X-translation.
2 Y-translation.
3 Z-translation.
CRACK-GROWTH
SHIFT-RELEASE [SHIFT-RELEASE]
Indicates the mesh updating method used for a propagating crack. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide for details.
SHIFT-RELEASE The node shift & release technique is used to model
the propagation of the crack tip through the finite
element mesh.
RELEASE Only the node release technique is applied, when the
crack opens.
POINT
The label number of a point where a specified degree of freedom is used to control the crack
propagation.
NODE
The label number of a node where a specified degree of freedom is used to control the crack
propagation.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CRACK-GROWTH
CRACK-GROWTH
CRACK-PROPAGATION defines the initial crack front position, or the virtual/actual crack
propagation path along which a crack would propagate.
This command should always be used in a fracture mechanics analysis, whether it is a
CRACK-PROPAGATION POINTS NAME
point
i
nvshft
i
factor
i
CRACK-PROPAGATION LINES NAME
line
i
front-point
i
nvshft
i
factor
i
CRACK-PROPAGATION SURFACES NAME
surface
i
front-line
i
nvshft
i
factor
i
generator lines
initial crack front general direction of
crack propagation
POINT
LINE
CRACK-PROPAGATION
Sec. 7.6 Fracture mechanics CRACK-PROPAGATION
stationary or a propagating crack analysis. Note that in 2-D analysis, the crack front corre-
sponds to a single node the crack tip node. The virtual propagation path corresponds to a
single point or line of nodes starting at the crack tip node. The crack propagation line must
be parallel to the Y axis in 2D mode. In 3-D analysis, the crack front corresponds to a line of
nodes. The virtual/actual crack propagation path corresponds to a surface developed from
the crack front line along generator lines originating from the crack front nodes. The crack
propagation surface must be in the X-Y plane in 3D mode.
NAME [1]
The label number of the crack propagation surface. (At present only one crack is allowed.)
point
i
The label number of a geometry point.
line
i
The label number of a geometry line.
surface
i
The label number of a geometry surface.
front-line
i
The label number of a line which defines initial crack front.
front-point
i
The label number of a point which defines the initial crack front.
nvshft
i
In the case of fixed virtual material shift (CRACK-GROWTH CONTROL-TYPE = FIXED) this
specifies the label number of virtual shift (defined by J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT command).
In the case of moving virtual material shift (CRACK-GROWTH CONTROL-TYPE = MOVING)
this specifies the number of rings of elements about the (moving) crack tip on the generator
line.
Parameter nvshft
i
is used only in crack propagation analysis (FRACTURE TYPE =PROPAGA-
TION).
factor
i
Resistance factor. This parameter is no longer used.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST
DELETE CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST
J-LINE POINT NAME POINT RADIUS PRINT SAVE START-FACE
END-FACE
J-LINE POINT defines a line contour by using a circle defined by its center and radius.
The line contour is defined by a series of elements intersected by the circle.
NAME [(current highest label number) + 1]
Label number of the line contour to be defined. If the label number of an existing line contour
is given, then the previous line contour definition is overwritten.
POINT [0]
The point label number; the center of the circle.
RADIUS [0.0]
The radius of the circle.
PRINT <not currently active>
SAVE <not currently active>
START-FACE [0]
If the first element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then
this parameter determines which face is selected to start the contour. START-FACE should
J-LINE POINT
elements in J-LINE contour
R
A
D
I
U
S
POINT
be an integer in the range 0 - 4, inclusive. A zero value (the default) will cause the program to
select the face opposite that of the second element in the contour definition.
1 face N1-N2.
2 face N2-N3.
3 face N3-N4.
4 face N4-N1.
(Where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.)
END-FACE [0]
If the last element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then this
parameter determines which face is selected to terminate the contour. END-FACE should be an
integer in the range 0 - 4, inclusive. A zero value (the default) will cause the program to select
the face opposite that of the penultimate element in the contour definition.
1 face N1-N2.
2 face N2-N3.
3 face N3-N4.
4 face N4-N1.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-LINE POINT FIRST LAST
DELETE J-LINE POINT FIRST LAST
J-LINE POINT
J-LINE RING NAME NRING POINT PRINT SAVE START-FACE END-
FACE
J-LINE RING defines a line contour by using a ring number. A ring of elements is defined
as follows. Given an origin node, ring number 1 consists of those elements connected at that
node. Ring number 2 then consists of all elements connected to (and including) the elements
in ring number 1, and so on. The line contour is defined by a series of elements. The origin
node of the ring is taken to be the one coincident with a given geometry point.
element in J-LINE contour
NRING=3
Label number of the line contour to be defined. If the label number of an existing line contour
is given, then the previous line contour definition is overwritten.
NRING [0]
Determines the number of rings of elements around the origin node.
POINT [0]
The point label number. The node at this point is at the ring origin.
START-FACE [0]
If the first element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then
this parameter determines which face is selected to start the contour. START-FACE should
J-LINE RING
select the face opposite that of the second element in the contour definition.
1 face N1-N2.
2 face N2-N3.
3 face N3-N4.
4 face N4-N1.
END-FACE [0]
If the last element of the contour does not have a unique face on the mesh boundary then
this parameter determines which face is selected to terminate the contour. END-FACE should
select the face opposite that of the penultimate element in the contour definition.
1 face N1-N2.
2 face N2-N3.
3 face N3-N4.
4 face N4-N1.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-LINE RING FIRST LAST
DELETE J-LINE RING FIRST LAST
J-LINE RING
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH
NORMAL NX NY NZ THICKNESS
POINT RADIUS
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT defines a virtual material shift by using a sphere defined by its
center and radius.
Label number of the virtual shift to be defined. If the label number of an existing virtual shift
is given, then the previous virtual shift definition is overwritten.
VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
Controls whether the actual material shift vector is calculated internally by ADINA, or is
input via the global component values VX, VY, VZ below.
AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically by ADINA, from the
crack surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the
case of a 3-D crack, N3DSH is used to explicitly select a
generator line associated with the automatic shift vector
calculation.
INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY, VZ.
VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
The global components of the material shift vector.
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT
POINT
R
A
D
I
U
S
nodes in
virtual shift
N3DSH [0]
Identifies a generator line of the crack surface with automatic shift vector calculation for a 3-D
crack. A zero value causes ADINA to calculate the shift vector based on the generator line
whose crack tip node appears first in the list of nodes which comprises the virtual shift
definition.
NORMAL [NONE]
Controls (for 3-D virtual material shift) whether or not the nodes of the shift are required to lie
in a disk of given thickness.
NONE The nodes of the shift are not required to lie in a disk.
AUTOMATIC The central plane of the disk is determined automatically from
the crack surface definition. The plane is taken to be perpendicu
lar to the crack tip node for the generator line associated with
parameter N3DSH.
INPUT The normal vector to the central plane of the disk is input via
NX, NY, NZ. The central plane of the disk passes through the
crack tip node for the generator line associated with parameter
N3DSH.
NX [0.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
The global components of the normal to the central plane of the disk in which shift nodes
must lie.
THICKNESS [1.0E-5]
The thickness of the disk containing the shift nodes. If NORMAL ( NONE then a positive
value for THICKNESS must be given.
POINT [0]
The label number of the point which is the center of the sphere.
RADIUS [0.0]
The radius of the sphere.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT FIRST LAST
DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT FIRST LAST
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH
line
i
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE defines a virtual material shift. The shift is defined by those nodes
lying on any of a given set of lines.
VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
case of a 3-D crack, parameter N3DSH may be used to explicitly
select a generator line associated with the automatic shift vector
calculation.
VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
N3DSH [0]
definition.
line
i
Label number of a geometry line.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE FIRST LAST
DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE FIRST LAST
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH
surface
i
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE defines a virtual material shift. The shift is defined by those
nodes lying on any of a given set of surfaces.
VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
calculation.
VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
N3DSH [0]
definition.
surface
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE FIRST LAST
DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE FIRST LAST
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH NORMAL
NX NY NZ THICKNESS RING-TYPE
RING-NUMBER
name
i
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING defines a virtual material shift by using a number of rings of
elements around the crack front points.
nodes in virtual shift
shifted elements
NRING = 3
elements subject to
virtual distortions
VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
calculation.
VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING
N3DSH [0]
definition.
NORMAL [NONE]
Controls (for 3-D virtual material shift) whether or not the nodes of the shift are required to lie
in a disk of given thickness. {NONE/AUTOMATIC/INPUT}
NONE The nodes of the shift are not required to lie in a disk.
AUTOMATIC The central plane of the disk is determined automatically from
the crack surface definition. The plane is taken to be
perpendicular to the crack tip node for the generator line
associated with parameter N3DSH.
INPUT The normal vector to the central plane of the disk is input via
NX, NY, NZ. The central plane of the disk passes through the
crack tip node for the generator line associated with parameter
N3DSH.
NX [0.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
The global components of the normal to the central plane of the disk in which shift nodes
must lie.
THICKNESS [1.0E-5]
The thickness of the disk containing the shift nodes. If NORMAL ( NONE, a positive value
for THICKNESS must be given.
RING-TYPE [POINT]
The type of geometry on which the origin nodes lie. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/NODE/
AUTOMATIC}
POINT The origin nodes are taken to be those at a set of points.
LINE The origin nodes are taken to be those lying on a set of lines.
SURFACE The origin nodes are taken to be those lying on a set of surfaces.
NODE The origin nodes are directly specified in the data input lines.
AUTOMATIC The origin nodes are automatically taken from all vertex nodes,
see notes at the end of this command description. See the
following note.
Note: When RING-TYPE=AUTOMATIC, the J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING command
creates one virtual shift for each vertex node on the crack generator line. This
generation is done by the ADINA command (creation of the .dat file).
RING-NUMBER [0]
Controls the number of rings of elements around the origin nodes.
0 Corresponds to a shift comprised of the origin nodes alone.
1 Includes the nodes of elements connected to the origin nodes.
Higher values of RING-NUMBER recursively define the shift such that RING-NUMBER = (n +
1) gives a shift including the nodes of elements containing any of the nodes defined in the
shift given by RING-NUMBER = n.
name
i
Label number of the geometry entries (point, line or surface) or nodes according to the param-
eter RING-TYPE. For 3-D material virtual shifts, if the geometry entities are points, these points
must be vertices of elements, i.e. no points located at mid-side nodes should be specified.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING FIRST LAST
DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING FIRST LAST
R-CURVE NAME MPOINT
theta
i
x
1
i
y
1
i
x
2
i
y
2
i
. . . x
m
i
y
m
i
R-CURVE defines a resistance curve set which can be referenced by a crack growth analysis
(see CRACK-GROWTH ). Note that (x
j
i
, y
j
i
) comprises a data point on the resistance curve
associated with temperature theta
i
. The curve data is first sorted by increasing temperature
theta
i
, then by increasing crack increment x
j
i
.
If more than one data input line is entered, the values of x
j
i
must be the same for each data
input line.
NAME [(current highest R-CURVE label number) + 1]
Label number of the resistance curve set to be defined. If the label number of an existing
curve set is given, then the previous curve set definition is overwritten.
MPOINT
The maximum number of data points in any single resistance curve, defined in the subsequent
data lines.
theta
i
Reference temperature for resistance curve i.
x
j
i
Crack increment value at data point j on resistance curve i.
y
j
i
Resistance value at crack-increment j on resistance curve i.
Auxiliary commands
LIST R-CURVE FIRST LAST
DELETE R-CURVE FIRST LAST
R-CURVE
SINGULAR POINT Q-POINT
point
i
SINGULAR LINE Q-POINT
line
i
SINGULAR defines a set of singular nodes on geometry points/lines. These are element
vertex nodes whose adjacent non-vertex nodes are moved to the 1/4 point giving a singu-
larity at the required nodes.
Singular vertex on TWODSOLID and THREEDSOLID elements
singular node
node at point
node at point
singular node
Q-POINT [QUARTER]
Controls whether non-vertex nodes adjacent to the desired vertex nodes are moved to the 1/
4 point, or the opposite action is taken.
QUARTER Nodes are moved to the 1/4 point.
MID Nodes are moved from the 1/4 point back to the relevant mid-
side/face position.
point
i
Label number of a singular geometry point.
SINGULAR POINT
line
i
Label number of a geometry line defining a sequence of singular nodes, i.e., all element vertex
nodes associated with the geometry line.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SINGULAR
DELETE SINGULAR
SINGULAR POINT
USER-RUPTURE NAME NR NI
real
i
integer
i
Specifies user-defined rupture data.
NAME [(current highest USER-RUPTURE label number) + 1]
USER-RUPTURE label name {> 0}.
NR [0]
Total number of user-defined real data. Note that NR + NI must be greater than zero. {$ 0.0}
NI [0]
Total number of user-defined integer data. Note that NR + NI must be greater than zero.
{$ 0.0}
real
i
[0]
User-defined real data.
integer
i
[0]
User-defined integer data.
Auxiliary commands
LIST USER-RUPTURE FIRST LAST
DELETE USER-RUPTURE FIRST LAST
USER-RUPTURE
RIGIDLINK NAME SLAVETYPE SLAVENAME MASTERTYPE
MASTERNAME DISPLACEMENTS OPTION SLAVEBODY
MASTERBODY DOF DOFSI
slavename
i
Specifies rigid links between pairs of nodes on entities. As the nodes move under model
deformation, the slave node is constrained to translate and rotate such that the distance
between the master node and the slave node remains constant and the rotations at the
slave node are the same as the corresponding rotations at the master node.
A rigid link can be specified only between nodes in the main structure, and the distance
between the nodes must be greater than zero. The displacement degrees of freedom at the
master node must all be independent, i.e., they cannot be constrained to other degrees of
freedom. Fixity conditions may, however, be specified for the master node.
Different skew degree-of-freedom systems may be assigned for the master and slave nodes.
If either the master or slave node is a shell midsurface node, then six degrees of freedom is
uesd for both nodes.
Only the displacement degrees of freedom (translations and rotations) are constrained by a
rigid link. Other degrees of freedom, e.g., pipe ovalization, warping, and fluid potential, are
not constrained by a rigid link.
NAME [(highest rigid link label number) + 1]
The label number of the rigid link.
SLAVETYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify slave nodes. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/
EDGE/FACE/NODESET/VOLUME/BODY}
SLAVENAME
The label number of the slave entity (point, line, etc. as directed by parameter SLAVETYPE).
MASTERTYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of the entity used to specify master nodes. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/
EDGE/FACE/NODESET}
MASTERNAME
The label number of the master entity (point, line, etc. as directed by parameter
MASTERTYPE).
RIGIDLINK
Sec. 7.7 Boundary conditions
v
u
u
v
rigid
links
master surface
slave surface
master line
slave line
u
u
rigid
links
u
v
u
u
v
rigid
links
slave surface
master surface
u
u
slave line
master line
rigid
links
OPTION = 0
OPTION = 1
RIGIDLINK
DISPLACEMENTS [DEFAULT]
Specifies whether the constraint equations in ADINA are for kinematically linear (infinitesi-
mal displacements), or large displacements. DISPLACEMENTS = DEFAULT indicates that
displacements are controlled by the KINEMATICS command. {SMALL/LARGE/DE-
FAULT}
OPTION [0]
{0/1/2/3/4}
When multiple nodes exist on both the slave and master geometry entities, OPTION indicates
how the rigid link between nodes on each entity is defined.
0 A rigid link is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric order on
each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter direction for lines,
increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In this case the number of nodes on
the slave and master geometry entities must be the same.
1 A rigid link is constructed for each node on the slave geometry entity to the closest
node on the master geometry entity. In this case, the number of nodes need not be
the same for the slave and master geometry entities.
2 A rigid link is constructed between slave node to master node using reverse u
parametric order. Applies to line/edge and surface/face.
3 A rigid link is constructed between slave node to master node using reverse v
parametric order. Applies to surface/face.
4 A rigid link is constructed between slave node to master node using reverse u and v
parametric order. Applies to surface/face.
SLAVEBODY [currently active BODY]
Indicates the solid geometry body used to reference a slave edge or face when SLAVETYPE
= EDGE or FACE, respectively.
MASTERBODY [currently active BODY]
Indicates the solid geometry body used to reference a master edge or face when
MASTERTYPE = EDGE or FACE, respectively.
Note: Only the following SLAVETYPE, MASTERTYPE combinations are allowed:
SLAVETYPE MASTERTYPE
POINT POINT
LINE POINT
LINE LINE
SURFACE POINT
SURFACE SURFACE
EDGE POINT
EDGE EDGE
FACE POINT
FACE FACE
NODESET any
any NODESET
DOF [ALL]
Indicates whether all relevant slave DOFs are constrained to the master node.
{ALL/MASTER}
RIGIDLINK
ALL All relevant slave DOFs are constrained to the master node.
MASTER The slave DOF is only constrained where the corresponding master DOF is
not fixed. Note that DOF = MASTER is only used if DISPLACEMENTS =
SMALL and all rotational degrees of freedom on the master node is fixed.
slavename
i
Slave geometry label (TYPE = SLAVETYPE). If SLAVETYPE = EDGE or FACE , all Slave
geometry belongs to SLAVEBODY.
DOFSI [123456]
Specifies the slave degrees of freedom (dof) to be constrained to the master node. DOFSI
must contain 1 to 6 digits ranging from 1 to 6. Dofs 1, 2, 3 indicate X, Y, Z translations and 4,
5, 6 indicate X, Y, Z rotations.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RIGIDLINK FIRST LAST
DELETE RIGIDLINK FIRST LAST
RIGIDLINK
CONSTRAINT NAME SLAVETYPE SLAVENAME SLAVEDOF MASTERTYPE
SBODY OPTION GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT TRANSFORMATION
mastername
i
masterdof
i
beta
i
mbody
i
Specifies a constraint set which expresses a slave (dependent) degree of freedom as a linear
combination of a set of master (independent) degrees of freedom. The slave and master
degrees of freedom are input by reference to geometry entities or node sets.
A constraint equation can only reference nodes in the main structure.
A constraint equation at a slave degree of freedom is unique. Therefore, if several constraint
equations are input for the same slave degree of freedom, then only that for the highest label
number will be used.
A fluid potential slave degree of freedom can have only fluid potential master degrees of
freedom, and a displacement (translation, rotation) slave degree of freedom can have only
displacement master degrees of freedom. Constraint equations cannot refer to pipe
ovalization or warping degrees of freedom.
Note that constraint equations necessary to enforce a rigid link between two geometry
entities can be defined using the RIGIDLINK command.
NAME [(highest constraint set label number) + 1]
The label number of the constraint set.
SLAVETYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify slave nodes. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/
VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY/NODESET}
SLAVENAME
The label number of the slave entity as directed by SLAVETYPE.
SLAVEDOF
The degree of freedom associated with the slave geometry entity. {X-TRANSLATION/ Y-
TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/
ALL-TRANSLATION/ALL-ROTATION/FLUID-POTENTIAL/TEMPERATURE}
SLAVEDOF = TEMPERATURE is only available when MASTER TMC = YES.
MASTERTYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify master nodes. {POINT/LINE/ SURFACE/
CONSTRAINT
EDGE/FACE/NODESET}
Note: Only the following SLAVETYPE, MASTERTYPE combinations are allowed:
SLAVETYPE MASTERTYPE
POINT POINT,NODESET
LINE POINT,LINE,NODESET
SURFACE POINT,SURFACE,NODESET
EDGE POINT,EDGE,NODESET
FACE POINT,FACE,NODESET
NODESET any
VOLUME any
BODY any
SBODY [currently active body]
The label number of the geometry slave body (used when SLAVETYPE=EDGE or FACE).
OPTION [0]
how the constraint between nodes on each entity is defined. OPTION is only applicable when
constraining line to line, edge to edge, surface to surface, and face to face. OPTION= 1 is
used for all other cases. {0/1/2/3/4}
0 A constraint is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric order
on each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter direction for
lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In this case the number of
nodes on the slave and master geometry entities must be the same.
1 A constraint is constructed for each node on the slave entity to the
closest node on the master entity. In this case, the number of nodes need
not be the same for the slave and master entities.
2 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u parametric order. Applies to
line/edge and surface/face.
3 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse v parametric order. Applies to
surface/face.
4 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u and v parametric order.
GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT [NO]
Generate generalized constraints instead of standard constraints.
{NO/YES}
CONSTRAINT
TRANSFORMATION [0]
Transformation label number which is applied to slave geometry entity when OPTION = 1.
mastername
i
The label number of the master entity as directed by MASTERTYPE for the ith independent
term of the constraint.
masterdof
i
The degree of freedom of the master entity for the ith independent term of the constraint.
Possible values are the same as for SLAVEDOF.
beta
i
[1.0]
The coefficient of the ith independent term of the constraint. Note that this value remains
constant throughout the time history of the response. A zero value is not accepted since it
implies no contribution to the linear combination of independent master degrees of freedom.
mbody
i
[currently active body]
The label number of the geometry master body (used when MASTERTYPE = EDGE or
FACE).
Note: For a cyclic symmetric analysis, constraint equations may be applied to degrees of
freedom within the fundamental part, but in this case similar constraint equations
for corresponding degrees of freedom in all other cyclic parts of the structure will
be applied.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONSTRAINT FIRST LAST
DELETE CONSTRAINT FIRST LAST
CONSTRAINT
CONSTRAINT-MS NAME MASTERTYPE MASTERNAME MASTERDOF
SLAVETYPE MBODY OPTION GENERALIZED-CONSTRAINT
slavename
i
slavedof
i
beta
i
sbody
i
This command is similar to the CONSTRAINT command. The difference between the CON-
STRAINT-MS and CONSTRAINT commands is that CONSTRAINT-MS allows the specifica-
tion of multiple slave entities for a single master entity.
Note that constraint equations that are necessary to enforce a rigid link between two geom-
etry entities can be defined using the RIGIDLINK command.
NAME [(highest constraint-ms set label number) + 1]
The label number of the constraint-ms set.
MASTERTYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of the geometry entity used to specify master nodes.
{POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY/NODESET}
MASTERNAME
The label number of the master entity as directed by MASTERTYPE.
MASTERDOF
The degree of freedom associated with the master entity.
{X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/
Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/ALL-TRANSLATION/ALL-ROTATION/
FLUID-POTENTIAL/TEMPERATURE}
SLAVETYPE [POINT]
Indicates the type of entity used to specify slave nodes.
{POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/EDGE/FACE/BODY/NODESET}
MBODY [currently active body]
The label number of the geometry master body (used when MASTERTYPE=EDGE or FACE).
OPTION [0]
how the constraint between nodes on each entity is defined.
CONSTRAINT-MS
OPTION is only applicable when constraining line to line, edge to edge, surface to surface,
and face to face. OPTION= 1 is used for all other cases.{0/1/2/3/4}
0 A constraint is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric order
on each entity. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter direction for
lines, increasing u- then v-parameter for surfaces. In this case the number of
nodes on the slave and master geometry entities must be the same.
1 A constraint is constructed for each node on the slave geometry entity to the
closest node on the master geometry entity. In this case, the number of nodes need
not be the same for the slave and master entities.
2 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u parametric order.
3 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse v parametric order. Applies to
surface/face.
4 Constrain slave node to master node using reverse u and v parametric order. Applies
to surface/face.
Generate generalized constraints instead of standard constraints.
{NO/YES}
slavename
i
The label number of the slave entity as directed by SLAVETYPE for the ith independent
term of the constraint.
slavedof
i
The degree of freedom of the slave geometry entity for the ith independent term of the
constraint. Possible values are the same as for MASTERDOF.
beta
i
[1.0]
The coefficient of the ith independent term of the constraint. Note that this value remains
constant throughout the time history of the response. A zero value is not accepted since it
implies no contribution to the linear combination of independent master degrees of freedom.
sbody
i
[currently active body]
The label number of the geometry slave body (used when SLAVETYPE = EDGE
or FACE).
CONSTRAINT-MS
Chap. 7 Model definition CONSTRAINT-MS
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONSTRAINT-MS FIRST LAST
DELETE CONSTRAINT-MS FIRST LAST
Chap. 7 Model definition CONSTRAINT-G
CONSTRAINT-G NAME
node
i
dof
i
beta
i
Defines a generalized linear constraint equation between specified degrees of freedom.
None of the degrees of freedom are made dependent (there are no slave degrees of freedom).
The generalized constraints are imposed using Lagrange Multipliers, and can only be applied
to nodes and not geometric entities.
Note that GLUEMESH automatically creates generalized constraint equations that enforce
glueing.
NAME [(highest generalized constraint label number) + 1]
Label number of the generalized constraint.
node
i
Node label associated with the ith term (degree of freedom) in the generalized constraint
equation.
dof
i
Degree of freedom (global or skew direction) at node
i
.{X-TRANSLATION /
Y-TRANSLATION / Z-TRANSLATION / X-ROTATION / Y-ROTATION /
Z-ROTATION}
beta
i
Coefficient for the ith term.
FIXITY NAME
dof
i
FIXITY defines a fixity boundary condition which is referenced by FIXBOUNDARY, which
assigns the fixity to a given geometry entity. All degrees of freedom are assumed free unless
fixed by this command (subject to the overall control of active degrees of freedom as deter-
mined by MASTER ).
NAME
The identifying name of the fixity condition (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters).
Note: The following predefined fixities exist (and cannot be updated):
ALL All degrees of freedom are fixed.
NONE No degrees of freedom are fixed.
dof
i
Degree(s) of freedom to be fixed. {X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/
Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/OVALIZATION/
FLUID-POTENTIAL/PORE-FLUID-PRESSURE/BEAM-WARP}
Note: The fixity conditions will be applied to the nodes of the model, albeit indirectly,
via the model geometry. The translations and rotations of the fixity thus refer to
the degree-of-freedom system at each node, which may be the global coordinate
system or a skewsystem. (See SKEWSYSTEM, DOF-SYSTEM ).
Auxiliary commands
LIST FIXITY NAME
DELETE FIXITY NAME
FIXITY
FIXBOUNDARY POINTS FIXITY
point
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY LINES FIXITY
line
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY SURFACES FIXITY
surface
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY VOLUMES FIXITY
volume
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY EDGES FIXITY BODY
edge
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY FACES FIXITY BODY
face
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY BODIES FIXITY
body
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY NODE-SETS FIXITY
node-set
i
fixity
i
FIXBOUNDARY assigns fixity conditions to a set of geometry entities.
FIXITY [ALL]
Default fixity condition (see command FIXITY ) for geometry entities given in the subsequent
data lines.
Body label number.
FIXBOUNDARY POINTS
point
i
Label number of a geometry point.
line
i
surface
i
volume
i
edge
i
Label number of a geometry edge (for BODY).
face
i
Label number of a geometry face (for BODY).
body
i
Label number of a geometry body.
node-set
i
Label number of a node-set.
fixity
i
[FIXITY]
Fixity condition to be applied at the geometry entity.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FIXBOUNDARY POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY POINTS FIRST LAST
LIST FIXBOUNDARY LINES FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY LINES FIRST LAST
LIST FIXBOUNDARY SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST FIXBOUNDARY VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST FIXBOUNDARY EDGES FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY EDGES FIRST LAST
FIXBOUNDARY POINTS
LIST FIXBOUNDARY FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY FACES FIRST LAST
LIST FIXBOUNDARY BODIES FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY BODIES FIRST LAST
LIST FIXBOUNDARY NODE-SETS FIRST LAST
DELETE FIXBOUNDARY NODE-SETS FIRST LAST
FIXBOUNDARY POINTS
ZOOM-BOUNDARY NAME GTYPE
name
i
body
i
Specifies the boundary of a mesh overlay model that is inside (internal to) the coarse model
(see Figure A). Note that if no zoom boundary is defined, all the boundary of the mesh
overlay model will be treated as being inside the coarse model (see Figure B, next page).
NAME [current highest ZOOM-BOUNDARY label number + 1]
Label number of the ZOOM-BOUNDARY to be defined.
GTYPE [TWO-D]
{TWO-D / THREE-D / NODESET}
The geometry type used to define ZOOM-BOUNDARY.
TWO-D line or edge
THREE-D surface or face
NODESET node set
ZOOM-BOUNDARY
Figure A: Internal boundary must be defined
Coarse model Mesh overlay model
This part of the boundary of
the mesh overlay needs to be
specified as internal boundary
name
i
List of geometry label numbers or node set numbers.
body
i
Geometry body label of edges and faces.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ZOOM-BOUNDARY FIRST LAST
DELETE ZOOM-BOUNDARY FIRST LAST
ZOOM-BOUNDARY
Coarse Model
Mesh Overlay Model
Figure B: No need to define internal boundary
Since the mesh overlay model
is completely inside the coarse
model, there is no need to identify
the internal boundary.
ENDRELEASE NAME MOMENT1 MOMENT2 MOMENT3 MOMENT4
MOMENT5 MOMENT6
Defines an endrelease condition for elements of type BEAM, which may be used to
prescribe that selected end forces and/or moments of the elements are zero. The endrelease
may be referenced (e.g. by LINE-ELEMDATA ) to assign the endrelease to the elements (on a
given geometry line).
AUX
node AUX lies in
r-s plane
X
Y
Z
neutral axis
s
r
t
S
1
S
4
S
2
S
3
S
6
S
5
node 1
node 2
S
9
S
12
S
7
S
10
S
11
S
8
NAME [(current highest endrelease label number) + 1]
The label number of the endrelease condition to be defined.
MOMENTi [0]
List of up to six identifiers (i = 1,...,6) indicating which of the element end forces on moments
are prescribed to be zero. See Figure.
1 Force in r-direction at local node 1 = 0.0.
2 Force in s-direction at local node 1 = 0.0.
3 Force in t-direction at local node 1 = 0.0.
ENDRELEASE
Chap. 7 Model definition ENDRELEASE
4 Moment about r-axis at local node 1 = 0.0.
5 Moment about s-axis at local node 1 = 0.0.
6 Moment about t-axis at local node 1 = 0.0.
7 Force in r-direction at local node 2 = 0.0.
8 Force in s-direction at local node 2 = 0.0.
9 Force in t-direction at local node 2 = 0.0.
10 Moment about r-axis at local node 2 = 0.0.
11 Moment about s-axis at local node 2 = 0.0.
12 Moment about t-axis at local node 2 = 0.0.
0 No selection.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ENDRELEASE FIRST LAST
DELETE ENDRELEASE FIRST LAST
FSBOUNDARY LINES NAME
line
i
FSBOUNDARY SURFACES NAME
surface
i
FSBOUNDARY EDGES NAME BODY
edge
i
FSBOUNDARY FACES NAME BODY
face
i
Defines a fluid-structure-interaction boundary, as a set of geometry lines/edges (2-D analy-
sis), or as a set of geometry surfaces/faces (3-D analysis), which establish those areas of the
structure, which may interact with fluid flow.
Note that the FSBOUNDARY defined is not referenced by another ADINA-IN for ADINA
command, but may be referenced by the BOUNDARY-CONDITION FLUID-STRUCTURE
command for ADINA-F.
NAME [(current highest fsboundary label number) + 1]
Label number of the fluid-structure-boundary to be defined.
BODY
Body label number.
line
i
Geometry line label number.
surface
i
Geometry surface label number.
edge
i
Geometry edge label number (for BODY).
face
i
Geometry face label number (for BODY).
Auxiliary commands
LIST FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST
DELETE FSBOUNDARY FIRST LAST
FSBOUNDARY
Chap. 7 Model definition FSBOUNDARY TWO-D
FSBOUNDARY TWO-D NAME
name
i
body
i
Defines a fluid-structure-interaction boundary, as a set of geometry lines/edges (2D analysis)
that establish those areas of the structure to be analysed using ADINA. This boundary may
interact with a fluid flow analysed by ADINA-F.
command, but rather may be referenced by the BOUNDARY-CONDITION FLUID-STRUC-
TURE command for ADINA-F.
name
i
Geometry line/edge label number.
body
i
Auxiliary commands
FSBOUNDARY THREE-D NAME
name
i
body
i
Defines a fluid-structure-interaction boundary, as a set of geometry surfaces/faces (3D
analysis) that establish those areas of the structure to be analysed using ADINA. This
boundary may interact with a fluid flow analysed by ADINA-F.
command, but rather may be referenced by the BOUNDARY-CONDITION FLUID-STRUC-
TURE command for ADINA-F.
name
i
Geometry line/edge label number.
body
i
Auxiliary commands
FSBOUNDARY THREE-D
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE ADINA-F NAME GTYPE BODY
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-FLUID NAME GTYPE BODY
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-STRUCTUR NAME GTYPE BODY
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FREE-SURFACE NAME GTYPE BODY
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INLET-OUTLET NAME GTYPE BODY
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE RIGID-WALL NAME GTYPE BODY
name
i
body
i
Defines an interface between potential-based fluid elements and structural elements.
NAME [(current potential-interface label number) + 1]
Label number of the potential-interface to be defined.
GTYPE [LINES]
The type of geometry used to define the potential-interface.
{LINES/SURFACES/EDGES/FACES/THREE-D/NODES/NODESETS}
BODY [1]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Must be specified when GTYPE=EDGES or FACES.
name
i
Label number of a geometry entity or node.
body
i
[0]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when GTYPE=THREE-D and name
i
is a face.
body
i
=0 means that name
i
is a surface.
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE
Auxiliary commands
LIST POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST
DELETE POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE NAME GTYPE BODY INFTYPE RADIUS
PRESSURE VELOCITY ALL-EXT
name
i
body
i
Defines an interface between potential-based fluid elements and an infinite boundary.
NAME [(current potential-interface label number) + 1]
Label number of the potential-interface to be defined.
GTYPE [LINES]
The type of geometry used to define the infinite potential-interface.
{LINES/SURFACES/EDGES/FACES/THREE-D/NODESETS}
BODY [1]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Must be specified when GTYPE=EDGES or FACES.
INFTYPE [PLANAR]
The type of infinite boundary.
{PLANAR/CYLINDRICAL/SPHERICAL}
RADIUS [1.0]
The radius of cylinder or sphere.
PRESSURE [0.0]
The pressure at infinity, used only for a planar infinite boundary in conjunction with the
subsonic formulation for the potential-based fluid elements.
VELOCITY [0.0]
The velocity at infinity, used only for a planar infinite boundary in conjunction with the
subsonic formulation for the potential-based fluid elements. The velocity is assumed to be
normal to the planar boundary and is positive for flow out of the planar boundary.
ALL-EXT
name
i
Label number of a geometry entity or node.
body
i
[0]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when GTYPE=THREE-D and name
i
is a face.
body
i
=0 means that name
i
is a surface.
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE
Auxiliary commands
LIST POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST
DELETE POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FIRST LAST
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION NAME GTYPE ALL-EXT NODES
SUBTYPE SIGMAT
name
i
body
i
Defines a surface tension boundary for ADINA.
NAME [(current highest surface-tension label number) + 1]
Label number of the surface-tension to be defined.
GTYPE [TWO-D]
The type of geometry used to define the surface boundary condition.
{TWO-D/THREE-D/ELEMENT-EDGESET/ELEMENT-FACESET}
ALL-EXT
(Currently not used)
NODES [0]
Number of nodes for each element. Only used if the surface tension
boundary is not attached to any finite elements. {0/2/3/4/8/9}
SUBTYPE [PLANE]
The type of 2-D surface tension boundary. Only used if the boundary is not attached to any
finite elements. If the boundary is attached to finite elements, the subtype of the 2-D finite
elements will be used. {AXISYMMETRIC/PLANE}
SIGMAT [0.0]
Surface tension value.
name
i
Label number of a geometry entity or element edge/face set.
body
i
[0]
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when GTYPE=TWO-D/THREE-D and name
i
is a face or edge. body
i
=0 means that namei is a surface or line.
Auxiliary commands
LIST BOUNDARY-SURFACE ALL FIRST LAST
DELETE BOUNDARY-SURFACE ALL FIRST LAST
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT TYPE
point
i
Enforces the zero-slope-of-skin in the longitudinal direction for pipe element nodes.
TYPE
FLANGE The flange condition is applied at the specified points. Both
ovalization and warping at these points are suppressed.
SYMMETRY The symmetry condition is applied to the specified points. The
ovalization at these points is left free but the warping suppressed.
point
i
A point label number where the constraint of the ovalization derivative is enforced.
Auxiliary commands
LIST OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT FIRST LAST
DELETE OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT FIRST LAST
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT
FREESURFACE
line
i
(for FLUID2 element groups)
or
surface
i
(for FLUID3 element groups)
Defines the free surface on the boundary lines (2-D) or surface (3-D) of previously-defined
surfaces (2-D) or volumes (3-D) consisting of potential-based elements.
line
i
Geometry line label number.
surface
i
Geometry surface label number.
FREESURFACE
Chap. 7 Model definition BCELL
BCELL NAME REVERSE
cell
i
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
n4
i
Defines a boundary cell using 4-node or 3-node cells. A boundary cell must be defined by all
3-node cells or all 4-node cells. It cannot be defined by a mixture of 3-node and 4-node cells.
NAME [(current highest bcell label number) + 1]
Label number of the boundary cell to be defined.
REVERSE [NO]
{NO/YES}
Normal direction reverse flag.
cell
i
Cell label number.
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
n4
i
Node labels for cell
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST BCELL FIRST LAST
DELETE BCELL FIRST LAST
BCELL
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL NAME OMEGA FACTOR AX AY AZ
BX BY BZ ALPHA
Defines a combination of a centrifugal load and a tangential load.
The centrifugal load vector is calculated as
(mass) ! !! !! OMEGA
2
! !! !! FACTOR ! !! !! f(t) ! !! !! (radius)
and the tangential load vector is calculated as
(mass) ! !! !! ALPHA ! !! !! FACTOR ! !! !! f(t) ! !! !! (radius)
when ALPHA is non-zero.
OMEGA
(w)
(AX, AY, AZ)
centrifugal
forces
structure
(BX, BY, BZ)
tangential forces
(// a x r )
i
r
i
ALPHA
(a)
X
Z
Y
where mass is a concentrated nodal point mass or a differential mass element at a distance
radius from the axis of revolution. The load may be applied to the model via APPLY-LOAD
whereby it may also be assigned a time function, specifying how its magnitude varies in time.
Only one centrifugal load may currently be applied to the model.
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL
Sec. 7.8 Loading
NAME [(current highest centrifugal
load label number) + 1]
Label number of the centrifugal load to be defined.
OMEGA
Angular velocity.
FACTOR
Multiplying factor.
AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of one end of axis of revolution, see Figure.
BX [1.0]
BY [0.0]
BZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of other end of axis of revolution. See Figure.
ALPHA [0.0]
Angular acceleration.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD CENTRIFUGAL FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD CENTRIFUGAL FIRST LAST
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL
LOAD CONTACT-SLIP NAME OMEGA FACTOR AX AY AZ BX BY BZ
Defines a contact-slip load. The actual tangential slip of a contact surface is calculated as
OMEGA * FACTOR * (RADIUS) * F(t)
The load may be applied to a contact surface via command APPLY-LOAD whereby it may also
be assigned a time function F(t), specifying how its magnitude varies with time.
NAME [(current highest contact-slip load label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact-slip load to be defined. If the label number of an existing contact-
slip load is given, then the previous contact-slip load definition is overwritten.
OMEGA
Angular velocity.
FACTOR
Multiplying factor.
AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of one end of axis of revolution.
BX [1.0]
BY [0.0]
BZ [0.0]
Position vector (in global coordinate system) of other end of axis of revolution.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD CONTACT-SLIP FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD CONTACT-SLIP FIRST LAST
LOAD CONTACT-SLIP
Sec. 7.8 Loading LOAD CONVECTION
LOAD CONVECTION NAME MAGNITUDE C-PROP
Defines a convection load, i.e., prescribed environmental temperatures for convection
element nodes. Note that the command only defines a convection load, to apply it to the
model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest convection load label number) + 1]
Label number of the convection load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Environmental temperature (in chosen units).
C-PROP [0]
The label number of convection property command C-PROP. It is only used for ADINA TMC
analysis. In TMC analysis, if C-PROP = 0 means parameters TYPE = CONSTANT and H = 0.0
in the C-PROP command.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD CONVECTION FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD CONVECTION FIRST LAST
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD DISPLACEMENT NAME DX DY DZ AX AY AZ
Defines a prescribed displacement load. This command defines prescribed displacements
which may be assigned to certain degrees of freedom (global or skew) of the model. Note that
this command only defines a displacement load, to apply it to the model you must use
APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest displacement load label number) + 1]
Label number of the displacement load to be defined.
DX [FREE]
Prescribed value for the X-translation (or a-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.
DY [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Y-translation (or b-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.
DZ [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Z-translation (or c-translation for a skew dof-system) degree of
freedom.
AX [FREE]
Prescribed value for the X-rotation (or a-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of freedom, in
radians.
AY [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Y-rotation (or b-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of freedom, in
radians.
AZ [FREE]
Prescribed value for the Z-rotation (or c-rotation for a skew dof-system) degree of freedom, in
radians.
Note: For parameters DX, DY, DZ, AX, AY, AZ the value FREE may be specified,
indicating that the corresponding degree of freedom is not prescribed.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD DISPLACEMENT FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD DISPLACEMENT FIRST LAST
LOAD DISPLACEMENT
LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC NAME
Defines an electromagnetic load. Note that the command only defines a electromagnetic load,
to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest electromagnetic
load label number)+ 1]
Label number of the electromagnetic load to be defined.
Note: The magnitude of the load is governed by the currents specified by the
timefunction parameter of APPLY-LOAD.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC FIRST LAST
LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD FORCE NAME MAGNITUDE FX FY FZ
Defines a force load. Note that the command only defines a force load, to apply it to the
NAME [(current highest force
Label number of the force load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Force magnitude.
FX [1.0]
FY [0.0]
FZ [0.0]
Force direction.
Note: The vector (FX, FY, FZ) specifies only the direction of the force.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST
LOAD FORCE
LOAD LINE NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a line load, i.e., a distributed load in terms of force / unit length. Note that the
command only defines a line load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
Note that line loads may be applied to geometry lines or edges, in order to specify distributed
loading to BEAM, ISOBEAM, and PIPE elements, and to edges of SHELL elements.
NAME [(current highest line
Label number of the line load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Distributed load magnitude [force / unit length].
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD FORCE FIRST LAST
LOAD LINE
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL NAME MAGNITUDE AX AY AZ
INTERPRETATION
Defines a mass-proportional load. Such loads may be used to model gravity loading
(including static analysis) or ground acceleration. The load acts uniformly on the entire
structure. APPLY-LOAD is used to apply a mass-proportional load to the model, at which
time it may be assigned a time function specifying how its magnitude varies in time. More
than one mass-proportional load may be applied to the model.
NAME [(current highest mass-proportional
Label number of the mass-proportional load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Magnitude of mass-proportional loading.
AX [0.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [-1.0]
Vector giving direction of mass-proportional load. Note the components of the mass-
proportional loading are:
MAGNITUDE ! !! !! AX
MAGNITUDE ! !! !! AY
MAGNITUDE ! !! !! AZ
i.e., the magnitude of vector (AX, AY, AZ) is used together with MAGNITUDE to give the
total load vector.
INTERPRETATION [BODY-FORCE]
Flag indicating static or dynamic effect for potential-based fluid elements:
BODY-FORCE The load is interpreted as a physical body force
GROUND-ACCELERATION The load is interpreted as a ground motion acceleration,
and is numerically integrated to obtain ground motion
velocities and displacements.
This parameter is used only by potential-based fluid elements and is not used by any of the
other element types.
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL FIRST LAST
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD MOMENT NAME MAGNITUDE MX MY MZ
Defines a moment load. Note that the command only defines a moment load, to apply it to the
NAME [(current highest moment load label number) + 1]
Label number of the moment load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Moment magnitude.
MX [1.0]
MY [0.0]
MZ [0.0]
Components of moment vector.
Note: The vector (MX, MY, MZ) specifies only the direction of the moment axis.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD MOMENT FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD MOMENT FIRST LAST
LOAD MOMENT
LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a nodal-phiflux load. This command defines a prescribed nodal-phiflux which may be
assigned to certain degrees of freedom of the model. Note that this command only defines a
nodal-phiflux load to apply it to the model you must use command APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest nodal-phiflux load label number) + 1]
Label number of the nodal-phiflux load to be defined. If the label number of an existing nodal-
phiflux load is given, then the previous nodal-phiflux load definition is overwritten.
MAGNITUDE
Prescribed value for the fluid potential degree of freedom.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX FIRST LAST
LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD PHIFLUX NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a phiflux load. Note that this command only defines a phiflux load to apply it to
the model you must use command APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest phiflux load label number) + 1]
Label number of the phiflux load to be defined. If the label number of an existing phiflux load
is given, then the previous phiflux load definition is overwritten.
MAGNITUDE
Prescribed value for the fluid potential degree of freedom.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD PHIFLUX FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD PHIFLUX FIRST LAST
LOAD PHIFLUX
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a pipe-internal-pressure load. Note that the command only defines a pipe-internal-
pressure load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest pipe-internal-pressure
Label number of the pipe-internal-pressure load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Pipe internal pressure magnitude (force / unit area).
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE FIRST LAST
LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE
LOAD POREFLOW NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a poreflow load. Poreflow loads may be applied ( command APPLY-LOAD ) to
surfaces (element groups THREEDSOLID, TWODSOLID- subtype STRESS3 ) or lines
( TWODSOLID element edges ).
NAME [(current highest poreflow load label number) + 1]
Label number of the poreflow load to be defined. If the label number of an existing poreflow
load is given, then the previous poreflow load definition is overwritten.
MAGNITUDE
Flux magnitude (velocity).
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD POREFLOW FIRST LAST
The command LIST LOAD POREFLOW lists the loads of type POREFLOW with label
numbers in a given range. If no range is specified, then a list of all the label numbers of
loads of type POREFLOW is given.
DELETE LOAD POREFLOW FIRST LAST
The command DELETE LOAD POREFLOW deletes all loads of type POREFLOW with
label numbers in a given range.
Note: A load will not be deleted if it is referenced by the command APPLY-LOAD
(i.e. the load has been applied to the model).
Note: For command DELETE LOAD POREFLOW, one of the parameters FIRST,
LAST must be specified.
LOAD POREFLOW
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD PORE-PRESSURE NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a pore-pressure load, which may be assigned to certain degrees of freedom (global or
skew) of the model. To apply a pore-pressure load to the model command APPLY-LOAD
should be used.
NAME [(current highest pore-pressure
Label number of the pore-pressure load to be defined. If the label number of an existing pore-
pressure load is given, then the previous pore-pressure load definition is overwritten.
MAGNITUDE
Prescribed value for the pore pressure degree of freedom.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD PORE-PRESSURE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD PORE-PRESSURE FIRST LAST
LOAD PORE-PRESSURE
LOAD PRESSURE NAME MAGNITUDE BETA LINE
Defines a pressure load. Note that the command only defines a pressure load, to apply it to
the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
Note: Pressure loads may be applied to:
Surfaces/Faces SHELL, THREEDSOLID, TWODSOLID (subtype STRESS3),
THREEDFLUID elements.
Lines/Edges TWODSOLID, TWODFLUID element edges.
To apply distributed loads to uni-dimensional elements (e.g., beams) or to edges of shell
elements, command LOAD LINE should be used to define such a load in terms of force/unit
length.
Note that for potential-based elements, pressure loads may be applied only on the boundary
of fluid-structure, free-surface, inlet-outlet or fluid-fluid interface elements.
NAME [(current highest pressure
Label number of the pressure load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Pressure magnitude [force / unit area].
BETA [0.0]
Specifies the angle to the reference line (LINE) that will determine the direction of the tangen-
tial traction. (in degrees)
LINE [0]
Reference line for tangential traction direction. If LINE=0, the reference direction for the
tangential traction will be the parametric u-dir of the surface or face.
Note: The parameters BETA and LINE are only applicable when applying pressure loading
on surface/face and the tangential pressure loading is specified (i.e. idirn=4 in
command APPLY-LOAD).
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD PRESSURE FIRST LAST
LOAD PRESSURE
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD RADIATION NAME MAGNITUDE R-PROP
Defines a radiation load, i.e., prescribed radiative source/sink temperatures, at radiation
element nodes. Note that the command only defines a radiation load, to apply it to the model
you must use APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest radiation load label number) + 1]
Label number of the radiation load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Radiative source/sink temperature (in chosen units).
R-PROP [0]
The label number of convection property command R-PROP. It is only used for ADINA TMC
analysis. In TMC analysis, if R-PROP = 0 means parameters TYPE = CONSTANT and E = 0.0
in the R-PROP command.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD RADIATION FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD RADIATION FIRST LAST
LOAD RADIATION
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD TEMPERATURE NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a prescribed temperature load. Note that the command only defines a temperature
load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest temperature
Label number of the temperature load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Temperature (in chosen units).
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD TEMPERATURE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD TEMPERATURE FIRST LAST
LOAD TEMPERATURE
LOAD TGRADIENT NAME MAGNITUDE
Defines a prescribed temperature gradient load to specify the temperature gradient in the
thickness direction of a surface (when applied to shell elements). Note that the command only
defines a temperature gradient load, to apply it to the model you must use APPLY-LOAD.
NAME [(current highest temperature gradient
Label number of the temperature gradient load to be defined.
MAGNITUDE
Temperature gradient (degrees / unit length).
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD TGRADIENT
DELETE LOAD TGRADIENT
LOAD TGRADIENT
Sec. 7.8 Loading CPROP
C-PROP NAME TYPE H ITHETA TBIRTH TDEATH
t
i
h
i
Defines convection properties for convection loading.
NAME [(Current highest label) + 1]
The label number of the C-PROP to be defined.
TYPE [CONSTANT]
The type of convection property. {CONSTANT/TEMP-DEP/TIME-DEP}
CONSTANT Property is constant
TEMP-DEP Property is temperature dependent
TIME-DEP Property is time dependent
H [0.0]
Convection coefficient. Used for TYPE = CONSTANT only. { # 0.0}
ITHETA [TEMPERATURE]
Indicates the dependence of the convection coefficient. Used for TYPE = TEMP-DEP only.
{TEMPERATURE/DIFFERENCE}
TEMPERATURE Convection coefficient is a function of surface temperature
DIFFERENCE Convection coefficient is a function of temperature difference
TBIRTH [0.0]
Birth time for convection boundary, i.e., time at which the convection boundary becomes
active.
TDEATH [0.0]
Death time for convection boundary, i.e. time at which the convection boundary becomes
inactive. Note that TDEATH=0.0 has no effect.
t
i
Temperature at data point i for ITHETA = TEMPERATURE
Temperature difference at data point

i for ITHETA = DIFFERENCE
Time at data point

i for TYPE = TIME-DEP
h
i
Convection coefficient at t
i
Chap. 7 Model definition RPROP
R-PROP NAME TYPE E ISIGMA SIGMA TBIRTH TDEATH
t
i
e
i
Define radiation properties for radiation loading.
NAME [(Current highest label) + 1]
The label number of the R-PROP to be defined.
TYPE [CONSTANT]
The type of radiation property. {CONSTANT/TEMP-DEP}
CONSTANT Property is constant
TEMP-DEP Property is temperature dependent
E [0.0]
Emissivity coefficient Used for TYPE = CONSTANT only. { # 0.0}
ISIGMA [FAHRENHEIT]
Unit of temperature. {FAHRENHEIT/CENTIGRADE/KELVIN/RANKINE}
SIGMA [0.0]
Stefan-Boltzmann constant. { # 0.0}
TBIRTH [0.0]
Birth time for radiation boundary, i.e., time at which the convection boundary becomes active.
TDEATH [0.0]
Death time for radiation boundary, i.e. time at which the convection boundary becomes
inactive. Note that TDEATH=0.0 has no effect.
t
i
temperature at data point i
e
i
Emissivity coefficient at t
i
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD-CASE NAME
LOAD-CASE may be used in a linear static analysis to identify the current load case.
LOAD-CASE cannot be used in the analysis of a cyclic symmetric structure.
If load cases are specified, no reference to, or specification of, time functions can be made.
Therefore, use of the commands TIMEFUNCTION, TIMESTEP, or any timefunction reference
by any APPLY-LOAD command, is not allowed.
NAME [(current highest load-case
label number) + 1]
Label number of the load-case to be defined.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD-CASE FIRST LAST
DELETE LOAD-CASE FIRST LAST
LOAD-CASE
LCOMBINATION NAME
lcase
i
factor
i
May be used in a linear static analysis to define a new load case as a linear combination of
load cases previously defined by LOAD-CASE. The combination is performed so that
(combined load-case results) =
$
(results for lcase
i
) ! factor
i
i=1
NAME [(highest lcombination label number) + 1]
The label number of the load-combination.
lcase
i
The label number of a load case previously defined by command LOAD-CASE.
factor
i
[1.0]
The factor associated with lcase
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LCOMBINATION FIRST LAST
DELETE LCOMBINATION FIRST LAST
LCOMBINATION
Sec. 7.8 Loading
APPLY-LOAD BODY LCASE SHELLNODE
name
i
ltype
i
lname
i
stype
i
sname
i
idvar
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
pfocus
i
body
i
psense
i
unload
i
timeu
i
forceu
i
ncuru
i
cgroup
i
shellnode
i
(no load cases)
or
name
i
ltype
i
lname
i
stype
i
sname
i
idvar
i
lcase
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
pfocus
i
body
i
psense
i
unload
i
timeu
i
forceu
i
ncuru
i
cgroup
i
shellnode
i
(load cases)
Command APPLY-LOAD specifies the loads applied to a model. This command is used to apply
named loads (see commands LOAD FORCE, LOAD MOMENT, LOAD PRESSURE, etc.) to the
model geometry. The spatial variation of the load may be specified by reference to a data-line,
data-surface, or data-volume as appropriate (see command LINE-FUNCTION,
SURFACE-FUNCTION, VOLUME-FUNCTION ). The time dependence of the load may be
specified by reference to a time function (see command TIMEFUNCTION ).
LCASE [1]
Load-case number (see LOAD-CASE, LCOMBINATION ).
name
i
Label number of a load application.
ltype
i
The type of load to be applied. {FORCE/MOMENT/PRESSURE/LINE/CENTRIFUGAL/
MASS-PROPORTIONAL/DISPLACEMENT/TEMPERATURE/TGRADIENT/PIPE-
INTERNAL-PRESSURE/ELECTROMAGETIC/POREFLOW/POREPRESSURE/CON-
TACT-SLIP/PHIFLUX/NODAL-PHIFLUX}
In addition, for TMC analysis only, the following choices are available:
CONVECTION
RADIATION
NODAL-HEATFLOW
HEATFLUX
INTERNALHEAT
LATENT
A table of load types and the corresponding allowed application site types is given below.
APPLY-LOAD
lname
i
Label number of the load (defined by LOAD FORCE, etc.).
stype
i
The type of site where the load is to be applied. {POINT/LINE/SURFACE/VOLUME/
EDGE/FACE/BODY/MODEL/NODE-SET/ELEMENT-EDGE-SET/ELEMENT-FACE-
SET/CONTACT-SURFACE}
sname
i
The label number of the application site, e.g., point label number, line label number, etc.
idvar
i
[0]
The label number of the spatial function (defined by LINE-FUNCTION, SURFACE- FUNC-
TION, VOLUME-FUNCTION as appropriate). Enter 0 for the load to be considered constant
in space (but not necessarily in time). If load ltype
i
=PRESSURE and stype
i
=FACE, idvar
i
is
the surface spatial function for the reference surface (pfocus
i
).
Note:
The spatial variation along the reference line is used to determine the spatial variation of the
load on the face. For a point on the face, the closest point on the line is determined and the
spatial value at that point is used.
ncur
i
[1]
The label number of a time function, as defined by command TIMEFUNCTION.
artm
i
[0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads. The load is considered zero for
t % artm
i
, and is governed by the time function ncur
i
for t > artm
i
. The time function is
effectively shifted along in the time direction. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
idirn
i
[0]
Specifies the load direction for pressure load or distributed line load.
{0/1/2/3/4/11/12/13}
0 total (normal) pressure load is applied.
1 only the X-component of the load is applied.
2 only the Y-component of the load is applied.
3 only the Z-component of the load is applied.
4 tangential traction.
11 load acts in the global X-direction.
12 load acts in the global Y-direction.
13 load acts in the global Z-direction.
The following table lists the allows load types and application site types:
APPLY-LOAD
Sec. 7.8 Loading
Table: Allowed load type / application site types
Point Line Surface Volume Edge Face Body Others
Force
1
! ! ! ! !
Moment
1
!
Pressure
2
! ! ! !
Line ! !
Centrifugal Model
Mass Model
proportional
Displacement
1
! ! ! ! ! ! !
Temperature
1
! ! ! ! ! ! !
Temperature ! ! ! ! !
gradient
1
Pipe-Internal ! ! !
pressure
1
Electro- ! !
magnetic
Pore flow
2
! ! ! !
Pore ! ! ! ! ! ! !
pressure
1
Contact slip Contact surface
Phiflux
2
! ! ! !
Nodal phiflux
1
!
Convection
1,3
! ! ! ! !
Radiation
1,3
! ! ! ! !
Nodal-heatflow
1,3
!
Heatflux
2,3
! ! ! !
Internalheat
1,3
! ! ! ! ! ! Group
Latent
3
Group
Notes:
1. Can also be applied to Node Sets.
2. Can also be applied to Element-Edge Sets and Element-Face Sets.
3. Can only be applied in TMC analysis.
APPLY-LOAD
Chap. 7 Model definition APPLY-LOAD
iddl
i
[-1]
If ltype
i
={PRESSURE/LINE/CENTRIFUGAL/ELECTROMAGNETIC/PORE FLOW}, this
specifies whether the load is deformation-dependent, i.e. the direction of the load changes in
response to the (large displacement) deformation of the structure. {0/1/-1}
0 the load is independent of structural deformation.
1 the load is deformation-dependent.
-1 the load is deformation-dependent for large displacement or large strain
formulation, otherwise the load is deformation independent.
iddl
i
[0]
If ltype
i
=DISPLACEMENT, this specifies whether the prescribed displacement is measured
relative to the original configuration or to the deformed configuration {0/1}.
The deformed configuration is the configuration at the arrival time of the prescribed
displacement (if the arrival time is not equal to zero), or the configuration at the start time of
the current analysis (which can be a restart analysis).
0 Original configuration
1 Deformed configuration
pfocus
i
[0]
Specifies a point which determines the plane of load application for loads of type LINE. It
may also be used to specify a follower force or moment, in which case the direction of the
load application is determined by the relative positions of the point of application and the
focus point pfocus
i
. If point pfocus
i
is input, then a unique node must be defined at the
same location as the focus point. If load ltype
i
=PRESSURE and stype
i
=FACE, pfocus
i
means
the reference surface for spatial function of surface.
body
i
[BODY]
Body label number, used when stype
i
= FACE or EDGE.
psense
i
[0]
Qualifies the direction of the distributed line load controlled by the point pfocus
i
. If
psense
i
=0 then the plane of action of the load is determined by the focal point and the end
nodes of each element edge along the application line; in this case a single auxiliary node will
be generated at the focal point. If psense
i
=1 the load will act perpendicular to the plane
defined by the focal point and the element edge end nodes; in this case an auxiliary node will
be generated for each element edge along the line (positioned above the plane defined by
the vertex nodes and the focal point). Furthermore, for psense
i
=0 (in-plane) a positive load
acts toward the element from the focal point. The convention for load direction when
psense
i
=1 can be understood as follows: imagine walking along the line in its positive
parametric direction (i.e. from the start point to the end point) such that the focal point is
always above you - a positive load is then assumed to act from your left.
Sec. 7.8 Loading
unload
i
[NO]
Specifies the type of unloadng for prescribed displacement. {TIME/FORCE/NO}
timeu
i
[0.0]
If unload
i
=TIME, this specifies the time at which unloading of prescribed displacement starts.
forceu
i
[0.0]
If unload
i
=TIME and forceu
i
= 0.0, then the prescribed force for time > timeu
i
is equal to the
reaction force multiplied by the value of time function ncuru
i
.
If unload
i
=TIME and forceu
i
& 0.0, then the prescribed force for time > timeu
i
is equal to
forceu
i
multiplied by the value of time function ncuru
i
.
If unload
i
=FORCE, then the prescribed displacement becomes a prescribed force for the
solution step after the step in which the reaction force exceeds forceu
i
. The value of the
prescribed force is equal to forceui multiplied by the value of time function ncuru
i
. forceu
i
cannot equal 0.0 if unload
i
=FORCE.
ncuru
i
[1]
Label number of a time function for the unloading of prescribed displacement.
cgroup
i
[0]
Contact group label number.
shellnode
i
[MID]
Specifies whether the loads is applied to the top, bottom or both top and bottom of shell
surface.{TOP/BOTTOM/MID}
TOP The load is applied to top surface
BOTTOM The load is applied to bottom surface
. MID The load is applied to shell midsurface. This option is only used
for temperature loading. If no temperature gradient is applied at the
shell node, the top and bottom shell surface will have the same
temperature.
Note that this parameter is used only for temperature, heat flux, convection and radiation
loading in TMC analysis
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY-LOAD
DELETE APPLY-LOAD
APPLY-LOAD
APPLY-LOAD
Sec. 7.8 Loading
LOAD-PENETRATION
group
i
Defines a region in terms of element groups where an initial pressure load can penetrate; i.e. if
an element in the region, to which a pressure load is applied ruptures or dies, the pressure
load is distributed to its neighboring element faces. This command is only active if
MASTER LOAD-PENETRATION = YES.
Note: A pressure load must already be applied to the penetration region, see
APPLY-LOAD or LOADS-ELEMENT.
group
i
Element group label number.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOAD-PENETRATION
DELETE LOAD-PENETRATION
LOAD-PENETRATION
INITIAL-CONDITION NAME INITIALSTRESS
variable
i
value
i
Defines an initial condition that can be referenced by SET-INITCONDITION to assign the
initial condition to geometry entities. All variables are assumed initially zero unless set by
this command in conjunction with SET-INITCONDITION.
NAME
The identifying name of the initial condition (1 to 30 alphanumeric characters).
INITIALSTRESS [NO]
Controls whether the initial strain input at nodes are to be interpreted initial stresses.
NO No change to nodal initial strain input.
YES Nodal initial strains are to be interpreted as initial stresses.
DEFORMATION Nodal initial strains are to be interpreted as initial stresses
which result in deformations.
variable
i
Degree(s) of freedom or their time derivatives to be set initially. Possible values (strings) are:
INITIAL-CONDITION
X-TRANSLATION
Y-TRANSLATION
Z-TRANSLATION
X-ROTATION
Y-ROTATION
Z-ROTATION
X-VELOCITY
Y-VELOCITY
Z-VELOCITY
OVALIZATION-1
OVALIZATION-2
OVALIZATION-3
OVALIZATION-4
OVALIZATION-5
OVALIZATION-6
XROT-VELOCITY
YROT-VELOCITY
ZROT-VELOCITY
X-ACCELERATION
Y-ACCELERATION
Z-ACCELERATION
XROT-ACCELERATION
YROT-ACCELERATION
ZROT-ACCELERATION
WARPING-1
WARPING-2
WARPING-3
WARPING-4
WARPING-5
WARPING-6
TEMPERATURE
TGRADIENT
PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE
STRAIN-11
STRAIN-22
STRAIN-33
STRAIN-12
STRAIN-13
STRAIN-23
FLUID-DOF
FPOT-VELOCITY
FPOT-ACCELERATION
STRAIN-GRADIENT-11
STRAIN-GRADIENT-22
STRAIN-GRADIENT-12
STRAIN-GRADIENT-13
STRAIN-GRADIENT-23
FLEXURAL-STRAIN-11
FLEXURAL-STRAIN-22
FLEXURAL-STRAIN-12
Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions INITIAL-CONDITION
value
i
The value to be assigned to variable
i
.
Note: The initial conditions will be applied to the nodes of the model, albeit indirectly via
the model geometry. The variables of the initial condition thus refer to the degree-of-
freedom system at each node, which may be the global coordinate system or a
skewsystem. See SKEWSYSTEM, DOF-SYSTEM.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL-CONDITION NAME
DELETE INITIAL-CONDITION NAME
SET-INITCONDITION POINTS CONDITION
point
i
condition
i
SET-INITCONDITION LINES CONDITION
line
i
condition
i
idvar
i
SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES CONDITION
surface
i
condition
i
idvar
i
SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES CONDITION
volume
i
condition
i
idvar
i
SET-INITCONDITION EDGES CONDITION BODY
edge
i
condition
i
idvar
i
SET-INITCONDITION FACES CONDITION BODY
face
i
condition
i
idvar
i
SET-INITCONDITION BODIES CONDITION BODY
body
i
condition
i
SET-INITCONDITION NODE-SET CONDITION
node-set
i
condition
i
SET-INITCONDITION POINTS assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry points.
SET-INITCONDITION LINES assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry lines.
SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry surfaces.
SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES assigns initial conditions to a set of geometry volumes.
SET-INITCONDITION
Sec. 7.9 Initial conditions
SET-INITCONDITION EDGES assigns initial conditions to a set of solid geometry edges.
SET-INITCONDITION FACES assigns initial conditions to a set of solid geometry faces.
SET-INITCONDITION BODIES assigns initial conditions to a set of solid geometry bodies.
SET-INITCONDITION NODE-SET assigns initial conditions to sets of nodes.
CONDITION [lowest (alphabetically) INITIAL-CONDITION]
Default initial condition ( see command INITIAL-CONDITION ) for subsequent data lines.
Label number of a solid geometry body.
point
i
line
i
surface
i
volume
i
edge
i
Label number of a solid geometry edge (for BODY).
face
i
Label number of a solid geometry face (for BODY).
body
i
condition
i
[CONDITION]
Initial condition to be applied at point point
i
.
idvar
i
[0]
Label number of a spatial data variation, defined by LINE-FUNCTION, SURFACE-FUNCTION
or VOLUME-FUNCTION, as appropriate. A 0 value indicates the initial condition is assumed
constant over the geometry entity.
SET-INITCONDITION
Auxiliary commands
LIST SET-INITCONDITION POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION POINTS FIRST LAST
LIST SET-INITCONDITION LINES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION LINES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-INITCONDITION EDGES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION EDGES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-INITCONDITION FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION FACES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-INITCONDITION BODIES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-INITCONDITION BODIES FIRST LAST
SET-INITCONDITION
STRAIN-FIELD NAME A B C D E F
Defines an initial geological strain field which varies in the global z-direction for 2-D and 3-D
solid elements. This strain-field may be referenced by element groups using commands
EGROUP TWODSOLID and EGROUP THREEDSOLID (Section 8.1) in order to give initial
element strains.
NAME [(current highest strain-field label number) + 1]
Label number of the strain-field to be defined.
A [0.0]
B [0.0]
C [0.0]
D [0.0]
E [0.0]
F [0.0]
Parameters used to evaluate an initial strain field as follows:
TWODSOLID elements:
e A B z
e C e D
e E e F
22
11 22
33 22
' ( )
' ) (
' ) ( (axisymmetric analysis only)
THREEDSOLID elements:
e A B z
e C e D
e E e F
33
11 33
22 33
' ( )
' ) (
' ) (
where e
ij
are the normal components of initial strain, and z is the global z-coordinate.
Auxiliary commands
LIST STRAIN-FIELD FIRST LAST
DELETE STRAIN-FIELD FIRST LAST
STRAIN-FIELD
IMPERFECTION POINTS
bucklingmode
i
point
i
direction
i
displacement
i
Specifies imperfections based on the buckling mode shapes, which have been calculated and
stored in a previous run. The total imperfection applied is a superposition of the imperfec-
tions from each specified buckling mode. List of buckling modes has to be continous - all
buckling modes between the first and last mode have to be specified. For modes which are
not significant, displacement
i
should be set to 0.
bucklingmode
i
The number of the buckling mode-shape.
point
i
Point label number where the magnitude of imperfection is specified.
direction
i
Translational degree of freedom for displacement
i
.
1 X-translation (a-translation if skew system).
2 Y-translation (b-translation if skew system).
3 Z-translation (c-translation if skew system).
displacement
i
Magnitude of imperfection in the same length unit as the global coordinates. ADINA scales
the buckling mode shape indicated by bucklingmode
i
to have this value for the node at the
point and in the direction specified.
Auxiliary commands
LIST IMPERFECTION POINTS
DELETE IMPERFECTION POINTS
IMPERFECTION POINTS
IMPERFECTION SHAPE OPTION
Indicates when initial nodal displacements should be read for initial shape calculations (but
not for initial load vector or stress calculations) (OPTION = READ), or when ADINA should
write out all nodal displacements (OPTION = WRITE).
OPTION [READ]
The flag of initial imperfection input:
READ Read initial nodal displacements.
WRITE Save nodal displacements.
Auxiliary commands
LIST IMPERFECTION SHAPE
DELETE IMPERFECTION SHAPE
IMPERFECTION SHAPE
INITIAL-MAPPING FILENAME EXTERNAL-NODE DISTANCE TIME ORDER
variable
i
Loads an initial mapping-file and interpolates variable values at existing model nodes using
variable values at another set of nodes for a mesh which is stored in the initial mapping file.
FILENAME
The mapping file to be loaded. {Any filename accepted by the computer system (up to 80
characters long)}.
EXTERNAL-NODE [ALL]
The option for the treatment of external nodes (i.e., outside the boundary of the mesh
contained in the mapping-file).
ALL Interpolation for all external nodes.
NONE No interpolation (extrapolation).
DISTANCE Interpolation for nodes which are within a maximum
specified distance from the mapping-file mesh.
DISTANCE [0.0]
Maximum allowed distance from the mapping-file mesh (used when EXTERNAL-NODE =
DISTANCE).
variable
i
Degree(s) of freedom or their time derivatives to be interpolated for as nodal initial conditions.
These include the following:
X-TRANSLATION Y-TRANSLATION Z-TRANSLATION
X-VELOCITY Y-VELOCITY Z-VELOCITY
X-ACCELERATION Y-ACCELERATION Z-ACCELERATION
X-ROTATION Y-ROTATION Z-ROTATION
XROT-VELOCITY YROT-VELOCITY ZROT-VELOCITY
XROT-ACCELERATION YROT-ACCELERATION ZROT-ACCELERATION
TEMPERATURE TGRADIENT
STRAIN-11 STRAIN-22 STRAIN-33
STRAIN-12 STRAIN-13 STRAIN-23
INITIAL-MAPPING
OVALIZATION-1 OVALIZATION-2 OVALIZATION-3
OVALIZATION-4 OVALIZATION-5 OVALIZATION-6
WARPING-1 WARPING-2 WARPING-3
WARPING-4 WARPING-5 WARPING-6
FLUID-POTENTIAL FPOT-VELOCITY FPOT-ACCELERATION
PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE
INITIAL-MAPPING
TIME [0.0]
Selects the solution time to be mapped.
Note that this parameter is used when the mapping file is from ADINA-F.
ORDER [2]
Order of interpolation. {2/1}
THERMAL-MAPPING FILENAME EXTERNAL-NODE DISTANCE TIME
Creates a nodal temperature and temperature gradient file for the current finite element model
by interpolation from a mapping-file which contains a finite element mesh with nodal
temperatures / gradients for a range of solution times.
This command is useful for prescribing temperatures for the ADINA model from a temperature
solution obtained from an independent mesh, e.g. from an ADINA-T model.
FILENAME
The mapping-file to be read.
EXTERNAL-NODE [ALL]
The option for the treatment of external nodes, i.e. those which lie outside the mesh con-
tained within the mapping-file:
ALL Interpolation (extrapolation) for all external nodes.
NONE No interpolation (zero value assigned).
DISTANCE Interpolation for nodes which are within a maximum
specified distance from the mapping-file mesh.
DISTANCE [0.0]
Maximum distance for external node interpolation.
TIME [0.0]
Selects the solution time to be mapped.
Note that this parameter is used when the mapping file is from ADINA-F.
THERMAL-MAPPING
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL
n
i
xorigin
i
yorigin
i
zorigin
i
xaxis
i
yaxis
i
zaxis
i
normal
i
Command SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL defines a skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of a cylinder origin and axis direction. Skew systems can be referenced (via command
DOF-SYSTEM ) by geometry and nodes to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees
of freedom.
Note that skew system definitions are distinct from coordinate systems defined via command
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations.
n
i
Label number for the desired skew system.
xorigin
i
[0.0]
yorigin
i
[0.0]
zorigin
i
[0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the axis of the cylinder.
xaxis
i
[0.0]
yaxis
i
[1.0]
zaxis
i
[0.0]
Global system components of the direction axis of the cylinder.
normal
i
[B]
normal
i
indicates which of the skew system axes is to be aligned with the e
r
(radial) direction.
Valid choices are A, B. If normal = A, skew system axis C is aligned with the e
z
(axis)
direction of the cylinder. If normal = B, skew system axis A is aligned with the e
z
direction of
the cylinder.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST
DELETE SKEWSYSTEM FIRST LAST
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL
Sec. 7.10 Systems
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES
n
i
phi
i
theta
i
xsi
i
Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of Euler angles. Skew systems can be
referenced, via DOF-SYSTEM, to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of
freedom.
n
i
phi
i
[0.0]
theta
i
[0.0]
xsi
i
[0.0]
Rotations, in degrees, about the global Cartesian system axes, required to orient the local
directions of the skew system, see SYSTEM for Euler-angle definition.
Auxiliary commands
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES
SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL NAME
Defines a skew Cartesian coordinate system to be such that one of its directions is normal to
a given line or surface. Note that no other parameters are required to define this skewsystem.
When assigned via DOF-SYSTEM, each node referenced has a skew system defined such
that a selected local axis is normal to the underlying geometry.
NAME
Label number of the skew coordinate system, which may be referenced by commands DOF-
SYSTEM.
Auxiliary commands
SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL
Sec. 7.10 Systems
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS
n
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of geometry points. Skew systems can
be referenced, via DOF-SYSTEM, to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of
freedom.
X
Z
Y
Xs
Zs
Ys
node
P2
P3
P1
Xs
Zs
Ys
n
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
Geometry point label numbers. The vector from point p1
i
to point p2
i
defines the direction of
the local X-axis of the skew system. The vector from p1
i
to p3
i
is taken to lie in the local XY-
plane of the skew system. Note that points p1
i
, p2
i
, p3
i
must not be collinear.
Auxiliary commands
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS
SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL
n
i
xorigin
i
yorigin
i
zorigin
i
Command SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL defines a skew Cartesian coordinate system in
terms of a sphere origin. Skew systems can be referenced (via command DOF-SYSTEM ) by
geometry and nodes to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of freedom.
SYSTEM, which are used to indicate point and node locations. The skew system axis A is
aligned with the e
r
direction of the sphere, axis B is aligned with the e
*
direction and axis C is
chosen to create a right-handed orthogonal coordinate system.
n
i
xorigin
i
[0.0]
yorigin
i
[0.0]
zorigin
i
[0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the sphere.
Auxiliary commands
SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL
Sec. 7.10 Systems
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS
n
i
ax
i
ay
i
az
i
bx
i
by
i
bz
i
Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of direction vectors. Skew systems
can be referenced, via DOF-SYSTEM, to indicate the local orientation of the nodal degrees of
freedom.
(ax,ay,az)
(bx,by,bz)
X
Z
Y
Xs
Zs
Ys
node
n
i
ax
i
[1.0]
ay
i
[0.0]
az
i
[0.0]
Vector aligned with the local X-axis of the skew system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian system. Note that for two-dimensional problems vector (ax
i
,ay
i
,az
i
) must be parallel
to the global Cartesian X-axis.
bx
i
[0.0]
by
i
[1.0]
bz
i
[0.0]
Vector lying in the local XY-plane of the skew system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian system. Note that vector (bx
i
,by
i
,bz
i
) must not be parallel to vector (ax
i
,ay
i
,az
i
).
Auxiliary commands
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS
Sec. 7.10 Systems
DOF-SYSTEM POINTS
name
i
skewsystem
i
DOF-SYSTEM LINES
line
i
skewsystem
i
normal
i
tangent
i
pfocus
i
nsense
i
tsense
i
DOF-SYSTEM EDGES BODY
edge
i
skewsystem
i
normal
i
tangent
i
pfocus
i
nsense
i
tsense
i
DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES
name
i
skewsystem
i
normal
i
tangent
i
pfocus
i
nsense
i
tsense
i
DOF-SYSTEM FACES BODY
name
i
skewsystem
i
normal
i
tangent
i
pfocus
i
nsense
i
tsense
i
DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES
name
i
skewsystem
i
DOF-SYSTEM BODIES
name
i
skewsystem
i
DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS
name
i
skewsystem
i
DOF-SYSTEM POINTS assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associated
with a set of geometry points.
DOF-SYSTEM LINES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associated
with a set of geometry lines. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems defined to be of type
NORMAL, the local skew system axes to be aligned with the normal and tangent directions to
the line are specified. The normal vector may also be directed such that it points toward or
DOF-SYSTEM
away from a given focal point, and the sense of the tangent vector may be similarly
assigned.
DOF-SYSTEM EDGES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associ-
ated with a set of solid geometry edges. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems defined to
be of type NORMAL, the local skew system axes to be aligned with the normal and tangent
directions to the edge are specified. The normal vector may also be directed such that it
points toward or away from a given focal point, and the sense of the tangent vector may be
similarly assigned.
DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom
associated with a set of geometry surfaces. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems
defined to be of type NORMAL, the local skew system axis to be aligned with the normal
direction to the surface is specified along with the axis to be aligned with the surface tangent
parallel to the local surface parametric u-coordinate direction. The normal vector may also be
directed such that it points toward or away from a given focal point, and the sense of the
tangent vector may be similarly assigned.
DOF-SYSTEM FACES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associ-
ated with a set of solid geometry faces. Furthermore, for skew coordinate systems defined to
be of type NORMAL, the local skew system axis to be aligned with the normal direction to
the face is specified along with the axis to be aligned with the face tangent parallel to the local
face parametric u-coordinate direction. The normal vector may also be directed such that it
points toward or away from a given focal point, and the sense of the tangent vector may be
similarly assigned.
DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom
associated with a set of geometry volumes.
DOF-SYSTEM BODIES assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associ-
ated with a set of geometry bodies.
DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom
associated with a node set.
name
i
/ line
i
/ edge
i
Label number of a geometry entity or nodeset. All nodes associated with the geometry or
contained in the nodeset are assigned the specified skew system.
DOF-SYSTEM
Sec. 7.10 Systems
skewsystem
i
Label number of a skew coordinate system, as defined by SKEWSYSTEM. Setting
skewsystem
i
= 0 assigns the global Cartesian system to the nodal degrees of freedom.
The following parameters are applicable only to skew systems of type NORMAL applied to
geometry lines, edges, surfaces and faces.
normal
i
Indicates which of the skew system axes is to be aligned with the normal direction of the
geometry. The default is C when applied to lines or edges, and A when applied to surfaces or
faces. {A/B/C}
tangent
i
[B]
Indicates which of the skew system axes is to be aligned with the tangential direction of the
geometry. {A/B/C}
pfocus
i
Label number of a geometry point which is the focal point for directing the normal vector,
when skewsystem
i
is of type NORMAL. The principal normal vector at a point on the line is
determined to point away from the local center of curvature. The opposite direction is also
normal to the line, and thus a focal point may be used so that the actual normal direction used
points toward or away from this point, the selection of which is made by nsense
i
. If input as 0,
then no focus is specified, and the principal normal direction is used.
Note:
For straight lines, straight line segments, or points of inflection on a curve, for
which the curvature is zero, the normal vector is taken to be either:
(a) when pfocus
i
= 0, or when pfocus
i
>0 and the tangent points directly toward or away
from point pfocus
i
; the cross product of the tangential direction with the global X-
direction (or Y-direction if the tangent is parallel to the X-direction)
(b) otherwise, a binormal vector is calculated as the cross product of the tangent vector and
the vector directed from the point on the curve to the focal point (the focal vector).
The normal vector is then taken as the cross product of the binormal and the tangent
vectors. In this way the normal vector lies in the plane formed by the tangent and focal
vectors, and is directed toward the focal point (or away from the focal point, as
controlled by nsense
i
).
DOF-SYSTEM
nsense
i
[+1]
Indicates the direction of the normal vector with reference to the focal point. It is used in
conjunction with the pfocus
i
to orient the normal direction.
+1 Normal direction points toward point pfocus
i
.
-1 Normal direction points away from point pfocus
i
.
tsense
i
[+1]
Indicates the direction of the tangent vector. It is used in conjunction with tangent
i
to orient
the skew system tangent direction.
+1 Follow tangent direction of the geometry.
-1 Opposite to tangent direction of the geometry.
Auxiliary commands
LIST DOF-SYSTEM POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM POINTS FIRST LAST
LIST DOF-SYSTEM LINES FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM LINES FIRST LAST
LIST DOF-SYSTEM EDGES FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM EDGES FIRST LAST
LIST DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST DOF-SYSTEM FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM FACES FIRST LAST
LIST DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS FIRST LAST
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM NODESETS FIRST LAST
DOF-SYSTEM
Sec. 7.10 Systems DOF-SYSTEM
SHELLNODESDOF POINTS
point
i
nsdof
i
SHELLNODESDOF LINES
line
i
nsdof
i
SHELLNODESDOF SURFACES
surface
i
nsdof
i
SHELLNODESDOF NODESETS
nodeset
i
SHELLNODESDOF EDGES BODY
edge
i
nsdof
i
SHELLNODESDOF FACES BODY
face
i
nsdof
i
SHELLNODESDOF POINTS specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of geometry points.
SHELLNODESDOF LINES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of geometry lines.
SHELLNODESDOF SURFACES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell
midsurface nodes associated with a set of geometry surfaces.
SHELLNODESDOF NODESETS specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell
midsurface nodes associated with a node set.
SHELLNODESDOF EDGES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of solid geometry edges.
SHELLNODESDOF
Sec. 7.10 Systems
SHELLNODESDOF FACES specifies the number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface
nodes associated with a set of solid geometry faces.
point
i
Geometry point label number.
line
i
Line label number.
surface
i
nodeset
i
Nodeset label number.
edge
i
face
i
nsdof
i
[AUTOMATIC]
Number of degrees of freedom for shell midsurface nodes at the geometry entity.
FIVE Three translation, and two rotation degrees of freedom (in local
midsurface system). See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
SIX Three translation and three rotation (global or skew) degrees of
freedom.
AUTOMATIC The program automatically decides on the number of degrees of
freedom to be assigned to shell nodes based on certain modeling
considerations. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SHELLNODESDOF
POINTS/LINES/SURFACES/NODESETS/EDGES/FACES FIRST LAST
SHELLNODESDOF
DELETE SHELLNODESDOF
POINTS/LINES/SURFACES/NODESETS/EDGES/FACES FIRST LAST
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES CONSTANT NAME AX AY AZ BX BY BZ
Defines an axes-system in terms of constant direction vectors. Axes-systems can be
referenced by SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orien-tation
of the orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.
NAME
Label number for the axes-system to be defined.
AX [1.0]
AY [0.0]
AZ [0.0]
Vector aligned with the local x-axis of the axes-system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian coordinate system.
BX [0.0]
BY [1.0]
BZ [0.0]
Vector lying in the local xy-plane of the axes-system, defined with respect to the global
Cartesian coordinate system. Note that vector (BX, BY, BZ) must not be parallel to vector
(AX, AY, AZ).
Auxiliary commands
LIST AXES FIRST LAST
DELETE AXES FIRST LAST
AXES CONSTANT
AXES LINE1 NAME LINE
Defines an axes-system via a geometry line. Axes-systems can be referenced by
SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation of the
orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.
centroid
element
z
y
x
P
t
LINE
(|| t)
C
NAME
LINE
Label number of the geometry line defining the axes-system.
Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the tangent
vector at the nearest point P on the geometry line. This gives the local x-direction
of the axes-system. The local xy-plane of the axes-system is calculated to include
both the tangent vector to the line and the vector from the element centroid to the
nearest point on the line. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
AXES LINE1
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES LINE2 NAME LINE1 LINE2
Defines an axes-system via two geometry lines. Axes-systems can be referenced by
SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation of the
NAME
LINE1
Label number of the first geometry line defining the axes-system.
LINE2
Label number of the second geometry line defining the axes-system.
vector at the nearest point P
1
on the first geometry line. This gives the local x-
direction of the axes-system. The local xy-plane of the axes-system is determined
to include this tangent vector and the tangent vector at the nearest point P
2
on the
second geometry line. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
AXES LINE2
y
LINE 1
centroid
element
C
(t
2
)
t
1
P
1
LINE 2
P
2
t
2
z ( || t
1
xt
2
)
x ( || t
1
)
Chap. 7 Model definition AXES NODES
AXES NODES NAME NODE1 NODE2 NODE3
Defines an axes-system using three nodes.
Axes-systems can be referenced by commands SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN,
by elements to indicate the local orientation of the orthotropic material properties and/or
initial strain, respectively.
NAME
Label number for the desired axes-system.
NODE1
Label number of the first axes-system defining node.
NODE2
Label number of the second axes-system defining node.
NODE3
Label number of the third axes-system defining node.
Note:
The local x-direction of the axes-system is determined by the vector from the first node
NODE1 to the second node NODE2. The local z-direction of the axes-system is determined
as the normal to the plane defined by the three nodes NODE1, NODE2, and NODE3. The local
y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand rule. See figure.
x (a)
C
centroid
element
z (a
x
b) y (a
x
b)
x
a
NODE3
NODE2
NODE1
(a
x
b)
a
b
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES NODES
AXES POINT2 NAME POINT1 POINT2
Defines an axes-system via two geometry points. Axes-systems can be referenced by
SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation of the
z ( a
x
b)
y
POINT2
x
POINT1
a
C
centroid
element
b
NAME
POINT1
Label number of the first geometry point defining the axes-system.
POINT2
Label number of the second geometry point defining the axes-system, which must not be
coincident with point POINT1.
Note The local x-direction of the axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by
the vector from the centroid to POINT1. The local z-direction of the axes-system
is determined as the normal to the plane defined by the centroid, POINT1 and
POINT2. The local y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand
rule. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
AXES POINT2
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES POINT3 NAME POINT1 POINT2 POINT3
Defines an axes-system via three geometry points. Axes-systems can be referenced by
x ( a)
C
centroid
element
z ( a
x
b) y ( a
x
b)
x
a
POINT3
POINT2
POINT1
( a
x
b)
a
b
NAME
POINT1
Label number of the first geometry point defining the axes-system.
POINT2
Label number of the second geometry point defining the axes-system.
POINT3
Label number of the third geometry point defining the axes-system.
Note: The local x-direction of the axes-system is determined by the vector from POINT1
to POINT2. The local z-direction of the axes-system is determined as the normal
to the plane defined by the three points POINT1, POINT2, and POINT3. The
local y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand rule. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
AXES POINT3
AXES POINT-LINE NAME LINE POINT
Defines an axes-system via a geometry line and a geometry point. Axes-systems can be
referenced by SET-AXES-MATERIAL, SET-AXES-STRAIN, to indicate the local orientation
of the orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.
NAME
LINE
Label number of the geometry line defining the axes-system. Note that the line must not be
closed, i.e., it must have non-coincident end-points.
POINT
Label number of the geometry point defining the axes-system. The point must not be
collinear with the end-points of line LINE.
vector at the nearest point P on the geometry line. This gives the local x-direction of
the axes-system. The local xy-plane of the axes-system is defined by the end-points
of the geometry line LINE, and the given geometry point POINT. Thus, in order
to determine this plane, the line must have distinct end-points P1 and P2, i.e., it
cannot be closed or degenerate, and the geometry point must not be collinear with
those end-points. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
P1
POINT
P2
LINE
u
y
P
z ( || a
x
b)
C
centroid
element
x( || t )
a
x
b
t
b
a
AXES POINT-LINE
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES SURFACE NAME SURFACE
Defines an axes-system via a geometry surface. Axes-systems can be referenced by
NAME
SURFACE
Label number of the geometry surface defining the axes-system.
Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the surface
tangent and normal vectors at the nearest point P on the geometry surface. The
local x-direction of the axes-system is given by the tangent vector in the local
parametric u-direction of the surface. The local z-direction of the axes-system is
given by the surface normal direction and the local y-direction of the axes-system is
then given by the right-hand rule. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
y ( || n
x
u)
C
centroid
z ( || n)
x ( || u)
P
u
v
n
element
AXES SURFACE
AXES EDGE NAME EDGE BODY
Defines an axes-system via a geometry edge. Axes-systems can be referenced by
NAME
EDGE
Label number of the geometry edge defining the axes-system.
Label number of the geometry body containing the edge.
Note: The axes-system at an element centroid C is determined by calculating the edge
tangent and normal vectors at the nearest point P on the geometry edge. The local x-
direction of the axes-system is given by the edge tangent vector (in the local
parametric u-direction of the edge). The local z-direction of the axes-system is given
by the edge normal direction and the local y-direction of the axes-system is then
given by the right-hand rule. See Figure.
Auxiliary commands
C
z
y
x ( || t )
EDGE
centroid
element
t
P
n
u
AXES EDGE
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES FACE NAME FACE BODY
Defines an axes-system via a geometry face. Axes-systems can be referenced by
NAME
FACE
Label number of the geometry face defining the axes-system.
Label number of the geometry body containing the face.
Note: The axes-system at an element centroid is determined by calculating the face
tangent and normal vectors at the nearest point on the geometry face. The local x-
direction of the axes-system is given by the tangent vector in the local parametric
u-direction of the face. The local z-direction of the axes-system is given by the
face normal direction and the local y-direction of the axes-system is then given by
the right-hand rule. See Figure for AXES SURFACE.
Auxiliary commands
AXES FACE
AXES CYLINDRICAL NAME XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN XAXIS YAXIS
ZAXIS
Defines a cylindrical axes system in terms of an origin and an axis direction. This axes system
can be referenced by SET-AXES-MATERIAL and SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local
orientation of the orthotropic material properties and/or initial strain, respectively.
In this axes system, the local x direction is aligned with the e
r
(radial) direction, the local y
direction is aligned with the e
+
direction, and the local z direction is aligned with the e
h
(cylindrical axis) direction.
AXES-CYLINDRICAL
NAME
Label number for the axes system to be defined.
XORIGIN, YORIGIN, ZORIGIN [0.0,0.0,0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the cylindrical axis.
XAXIS, YAXIS, ZAXIS [0.0,0.0,1.0]
The global components of the direction vector of the cylindrical axis.
Auxiliary commands
X
Y
Z
+
XL
e
r
YL
ZL
e
h
r
h
e
+
Sec. 7.10 Systems
AXES SPHERICAL NAME XORIGIN YORIGIN ZORIGIN XAXIS YAXIS
ZAXIS
Defines a spherical axes system in terms of an origin. This axes system can be referenced by
SET-AXES-MATERIAL and SET-AXES-STRAIN to indicate the local orientation of the
In this axes system, the local x direction is aligned with the e
r
(radial) direction of the sphere,
the local y direction is aligned with the e
,
direction, and the local z direction is aligned with
the e
+
direction.
AXES-SPHERICAL
NAME
Label number for the axes system to be defined.
XORIGIN, YORIGIN, ZORIGIN [0.0,0.0,0.0]
The global coordinates of the origin of the spherical axis.
XAXIS, YAXIS, ZAXIS [0.0,0.0,1.0]
The global components of the direction vector of the spherical axis.
Auxiliary commands
X
Y
Z
,
+
XL
ZL
YL
e
r
e
+
e
,
SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES
surface
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-MATERIAL VOLUMES
volume
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES BODY
face
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES
body
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-MATERIAL ELEMENTSETS
elementset
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of
geometry surfaces.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL VOLUMES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of
geometry volumes.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of solid
geometry faces.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES assigns axes-systems, as defined by AXES, to a set of solid
geometry bodies.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL ELEMENTSETS assigns axes-systems, defined by command AXES,
to a set of element sets.
surface
i
SET-AXES-MATERIAL
Sec. 7.10 Systems
volume
i
face
i
body
i
Label number for a solid geometry body.
Note: Any elements generated for the referenced geometry will adopt orthotropic
material directories as calculated by the assigned axes-system.
elementset
i
Label number of a element set. Any elements generated in this element set will calculate
orthotropic material directions from the assigned the axes-system axes
i
.
axes
i
Label number of an axes-system defined by AXES.
adir
i
[1]
The material a-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y-, or
z-directions of the axes-system.
1 a-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.
2 a-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.
3 a-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.
-1 a-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.
-2 a-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.
-3 a-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.
bdir
i
[2]
The material b-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y-, or
z-directions of the axes-system.
1 b-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.
SET-AXES-MATERIAL
2 b-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.
3 b-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.
-1 b-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.
-2 b-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.
-3 b-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.
Note: abs(adir
i
) must differ from abs(bdir
i
).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIAL SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIAL VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIAL FACES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-MATERIAL BODIES FIRST LAST
SET-AXES-MATERIAL
LIST SET-AXES-MATERIAL ELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST
DELETE S ET-AXES-MATERIAL ELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST
Sec. 7.10 Systems
SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES
surface
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES
volume
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES BODY
face
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES
body
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS
elementset
i
axes
i
adir
i
bdir
i
SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES assigns axes-systems, defined by AXES, to a set of geom-
etry surfaces.
SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES assigns axes-systems, defined by AXES, to a set of geometry
volumes.
SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES assigns axes-systems, defined by AXES, to a set of solid
geometry faces.
SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES assigns axes-system, defined by AXES, to a set of solid
geometry bodies.
SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS assigns axes-systems, defined by command AXES, to a
set of element sets.
surface
i
SET-AXES-STRAIN
volume
i
face
i
body
i
Note: Any elements generated for the referenced geometry will adopt initial-strain
directions as calculated by the assigned axes-system.
elementset
i
Label number of a element set. Any elements generated in this element set will calculate
orthotropic straindirections from the assigned the axes-system axes
i
.
axes
i
Label number of an axes-system defined by AXES.
adir
i
[1]
The strain a-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y- or z-
directions of the axes-system.
1 a-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.
2 a-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.
3 a-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.
-1 a-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.
-2 a-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.
-3 a-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.
bdir
i
[2]
The strain b-direction is selected to be determined from one of the calculated local x-, y- or z-
directions of the axes-system.
1 b-direction coincides with local x-direction of axis-system.
SET-AXES-STRAIN
Sec. 7.10 Systems
2 b-direction coincides with local y-direction of axis-system.
3 b-direction coincides with local z-direction of axis-system.
-1 b-direction coincides with local negative x-direction of axis-system.
-2 b-direction coincides with local negative y-direction of axis-system.
-3 b-direction coincides with local negative z-direction of axis-system.
Note: abs(adir
i
) must differ from abs(bdir
i
).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN SURFACES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN VOLUMES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN FACES FIRST LAST
LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN BODIES FIRST LAST
SET-AXES-STRAIN
LIST SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST
DELETE SET-AXES-STRAIN ELEMENTSETS FIRST LAST
Chapter 8
Finite element representation
Sec. 8.1 Element groups
EGROUP TRUSS NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL INT
GAPS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS TIME-OFFSET OPTION
RB-LINE AREA PRINT SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH
TMC-MATERIAL GAPWIDTH
Defines an element group consisting of truss elements.
NAME [(current highest element group label number) + 1]
Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number of an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type TRUSS. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group you must first delete that group using command DELETE EGROUP TRUSS.
SUBTYPE [GENERAL]
Indicates the type of TRUSS element.
GENERAL General 3-D truss elements with 2-4 nodes.
AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric truss (ring) elements with 1 node in the
global YZ plane. Z is the axis of rotational symmetry
and Y is the radial direction (Y ! 0).
Indicates whether large displacements are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the
element group.
SMALL Small displacements only.
LARGE Effects of large displacements are included.
DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified
by KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for an element group. Elements within the group may
use a different material as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
must be of the same model type as that of the material given by this parameter.
Note: Elements of type TRUSS can use materials of the following types:
ELASTIC THERMO-PLASTIC
THERMO-ISOTROPIC CREEP
PLASTIC-BILINEAR PLASTIC-CREEP
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR NONLINEAR-ELASTIC
EGROUP TRUSS
Chap. 8 Finite element representation
INT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order. {1 " INT " 4}
DEFAULT =1 when SUBTYPE = AXISYMMETRIC, or maximum number of
element nodes is 2.
2 when maximum number of nodes per element is 3.
3 when maximum number of nodes per element is 4.
GAPS [NO]
YES All elements in this (nonlinear) group have gaps, i.e., no element
in the group can resist tensile force. The gap width for elements
may be specified via the element data commands. This option
may only be used when material models PLASTIC- BILINEAR or
PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR are employed, in conjunction with
2-node general truss elements.
NO The gap element option is inactive for this element group, and all
elements can resist tensile as well as compressive forces.
INITIALSTRAIN [NONE]
Indicates whether initial strains are to be applied to this element group.
NONE No initial strains for elements of this group.
NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION are
accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the element data commands
are accounted for.
BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.
CMASS [MASTER CMASS]
Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass. {YES/NO}
TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
With this parameter, a creep law can be modified as follows (example given for creep law
number 1) :
e a t t
c
a
a
# $ $ %
& '
0 0
1
2
(
EGROUP TRUSS
where t is the absolute time and t
0
=TIME-OFFSET represents a shift in the time scale.
Note: When TIME-OFFSET is used, the same shift is applied to all time dependent terms.
The TIME-OFFSET value can be negative or positive and can be modified for a
restart run.
OPTION [NONE]
Special option for this element group.
NONE - No special option. Elements are regular truss elements.
REBAR - Elements are used as rebar elements.
RB-LINE [1]
Rebar label number as defined by the command REBAR-LINE. Only used if OPTION=REBAR.
AREA [1.0]
Specifies the default cross-section area for elements in the group.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the PRINTDEFAULT
parameter of the PRINTOUT command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Print element result flag. The DEFAULT value takes the setting from the SAVEDEFAULT
parameter of the PORTHOLE command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}
TBIRTH [0.0]
Default element birth time.
TDEATH [0.0]
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of ADINA-T material used for thermal coupling.
GAPWIDTH [0.0]
Specifies the default gap width for truss element.
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP TRUSS FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP TRUSS FIRST LAST
EGROUP TRUSS
EGROUP TWODSOLID NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS STRAINS
MATERIAL INT RESULTS DEGEN FORMULATION
STRESSREFERENCE INITIALSTRAIN FRACTURE CMASS
STRAIN-FIELD PNTGPS NODGPS LVUS1 LVUS2 SED
RUPTURE INCOMPATIBLE-MODES TIME-OFFSET
POROUS WTMC OPTION THICKNESS PRINT SAVE
TBIRTH TDEATH TMC-MATERIAL RUPTURE-LABEL
Defines an element group consisting of planar or axisymmetric elements.
Label number of the element group to be defined. The label number on an existing element
group can only be given if it is of type TWODSOLID. Hence, to re-define the type of a
named element group, you must first delete that group using command DELETE EGROUP
TWODSOLID.
SUBTYPE
Indicates the type of TWODSOLID element. (See the Theory and Modeling Guide).
AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric elements in the global YZ plane. Z is the
axis of rotational symmetry and Y is the radial direction (Y!0).
STRAIN Plane strain elements in the global YZ plane.
STRESS2 Plane stress elements in the global YZ plane.
STRESS3 3-D plane stress (membrane) elements.
STRAIN3 Generalized plane strain in the global YZ plane.
element group.
DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by
KINEMATICS.
STRAINS [DEFAULT]
Indicates whether large strains are assumed for the kinematic formulation for the element
group.
EGROUP TWODSOLID
SMALL Small strains only.
LARGE Effects of large strains are included.
KINEMATICS.
Note: DISPLACEMENTS = LARGE is automatically set if STRAINS = LARGE is input.
MATERIAL [1]
Note: Elements of type TWODSOLID can use materials of the following types. Only
elements marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains.
ELASTIC THERMO-ISOTROPIC
ORTHOTROPIC THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC
*PLASTIC-BILINEAR *PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
*THERMO-PLASTIC *PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
DRUCKER-PRAGER *MROZ-BILINEAR
GURSON *CREEP
*CREEP-VARIABLE *PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
*PLASTIC-CREEP *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CURVE-DESCRIPTION *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
CONCRETE CAM-CLAY
*ARRUDA-BOYCE *MOONEY-RIVLIN
*OGDEN *SUSSMAN-BATHE
*USER-SUPPLIED
INT [DEFAULT]
DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, dependent on the polynomial order
of the elements, i.e., the number of nodes per element side.
RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis.
FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but stresses are not. These
forces are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal
element stresses. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
freedom system associated with the node (global or skew).
EGROUP TWODSOLID
STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration
points, but forces are not.
DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction for degenerate (triangular) 8-node elements. When
true 6-node triangular elements are defined in this element group through ENODES command,
DEGEN = UNUSED should be specified. The DEFAULT option means that the default is taken
from the parameter DEGEN of the MASTER command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/UNUSED}
FORMULATION [DEFAULT]
Indicates use of displacement or mixed interpolation formulation.
DISPLACEMENT [1] Displacement interpolation only.
MIXED [2] Mixed pressure-displacement interpolation.
DEFAULT [0] See note below.
-N N is the number of pressure degrees of freedom for each
element.
Note: The mixed formulation cannot be used for material models CAM-CLAY, GURSON,
CURVE-DESCRIPTION, CONCRETE, DRUCKER-PRAGER, MOHR-COULOMB and
HYPER-FOAM. Furthermore, it is only applicable for plane strain, generalized plane
strain and axisymmetric analyses.
Note: The value DEFAULT assumes a MIXED formulation for element groups with
material models OGDEN, MOONEY-RIVLIN, ARRUDA-BOYCE and SUSSMAN-
BATHE. For all other material models the value assumed for DEFAULT is that of
DISPLACEMENT formulation.
Note: When using the mixed formulation, 1 pressure degree of freedom is used for
elements with 8 or fewer nodes, and 3 pressure degrees of freedom are used for the
9-node element. In general, the 9-node element is the most effective, and is thus
recommended. To explicitly set the number of pressure degrees of freedom, input
FORMULATION = -N, where N is the desired number of pressure degrees of
freedom within each element.
STRESSREFERENCE [GLOBAL]
Indicates the reference system for calculated stresses.
GLOBAL The global Cartesian coordinate system (X, Y, Z).
MATERIAL The element material system, for orthotropic materials.
EGROUP TWODSOLID
Indicates whether initial strains are to be applied to this element group.
accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the STRAIN-FIELD parameter
are accounted for.
FRACTURE [NO]
STRAIN-FIELD [0]
Label number of a strain-field defined by STRAIN-FIELD command (Section7.9). A 0 value
indicates no initial element strains, and any initial element strains selected by input of
STRAIN-FIELD > 0 will only be considered if INITIALSTRAIN = ELEMENT or BOTH.
PNTGPS [0]
Label number of a geometry point at which the auxiliary node for generalized plane strain
elements (SUBTYPE = STRAIN3) is located.
NODGPS [0]
Label number of the auxiliary node for generalized plane strain elements.
Note: For SUBTYPE = STRAIN3, PNTGPS = NODGPS = 0 is not allowed (an auxiliary
node must be specified). If PNTGPS and NODGPS are both > 0, then the input for
PNTGPS is used.
LVUS1 [0]
LVUS2 [0]
EGROUP TWODSOLID
SED [NO]
Indicate whether or not to compute, and output, the strain energy density at all integration
points of elements within the group. {NO/YES}
RUPTURE [ADINA]
Indicates whether the program rupture criteria or user-supplied rupture criteria to be applied
to the material used in this element group.
ADINA Use the program criteria.
USER User must provide fortran-coded subroutine CURUP2 to decide
the element rupture.
Note that material models available for this option are:
PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, MROZ-BILINEAR,
PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC, THERMO-PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP,
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP, USER-SUPPLIED
INCOMPATIBLE-MODES [DEFAULT]
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in the formulation of 4-node 2D solid
elements.
NO Incompatible modes are not included.
YES Incompatible modes are included.
DEFAULT Choice of formulation is controled by the KINEMATICS command.
TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
number 1) :
e a t t
c
a
a
# $ $ %
& '
0 0
1
2
(
0
restart run.
POROUS
This parameter is now obsolete. It is replaced by the parameter OPTION.
EGROUP TWODSOLID
WTMC [1.0]
Plastic work to heat factor for thermo-mechanical coupling. Must be in the range<0.0,1.0>
OPTION [NONE]
{NONE/POROUS/USER-CODED/GASKET-SIMPLE/GASKET-GENERAL}
NONE No special option.
POROUS This element group is used with porous media properties.
USER-CODED User-supplied code is used for this element group.
GASKET-SIMPLE This element group is used with a simple gasket material.
GASKET-GENERAL This element group is used with a general gasket material.
THICKNESS [1.0]
Defines the default element thickness.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
RUPTURE-LABEL [0]
User-rupture label number which is defined by the USER-RUPTURE command.
Used only for RUPTURE = USER.
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP TWODSOLID FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP TWODSOLID FIRST LAST
EGROUP TWODSOLID
EGROUP THREEDSOLID NAME DISPLACEMENTS STRAINS MATERIAL
RSINT TINT RESULTS DEGEN FORMULATION
STRESSREFERENCE INITIALSTRAIN FRACTURE
CMASS STRAIN-FIELD LVUS1 LVUS2 SED
RUPTURE INCOMPATIBLE-MODES TIME-OFFSET
POROUS WTMC OPTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH
TDEATH TMC-MATERIAL RUPTURE-LABEL
Defines an element group consisting of three-dimensional solid elements.
NAME [(current highest element group label number )+ 1]
group can only be given if it is of type THREEDSOLID. Hence, to re-define the type of a
named element group you must first delete that group using command DELETE EGROUP
THREEDSOLID.
element group.
KINEMATICS.
STRAINS [DEFAULT]
group.
LARGE Effects of large strains are included.
KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
use a different material, as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
Note: Elements of type THREEDSOLID can use materials of the following types. Only
elements marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains.
ORTHOTROPIC THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC
*PLASTIC-BILINEAR *PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
*THERMO-PLASTIC *PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC
DRUCKER-PRAGER *MROZ-BILINEAR
GURSON *CREEP
*CREEP-VARIABLE *PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
*PLASTIC-CREEP *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CURVE-DESCRIPTION *MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
CONCRETE CAM-CLAY
*ARRUDA-BOYCE *MOONEY-RIVLIN
*OGDEN *SUSSMAN-BATHE
*USER-SUPPLIED
RSINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the r- and s- element coordinate directions. {2 " RSINT " 6}
TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the t-element coordinate direction. {2 " TINT " 6}
RESULTS [STRESSES]
DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction of degenerate 20-node elements. When true 10-node
tetrahedral elments are defined in this element group through ENODES command, DEGEN =
UNUSED should be specified. The DEFAULT option means that the default is taken from the
parameter DEGEN of the MASTER command.{DEFAULT/NO/YES/UNUSED}
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
Indicates use of displacement or mixed interpolation formulation.
DISPLACEMENT [1] Displacement interpolation only.
MIXED [2] Mixed pressure-displacement interpolation.
DEFAULT [0] See note below.
-N N is the number of pressure degrees of freedom for each
element.
Note: The mixed formulation cannot be used for material models CAM-CLAY, GURSON,
CURVE-DESCRIPTION, CONCRETE, DRUCKER-PRAGER, MOHR-COULOMB, and
HYPER-FOAM.
Note: The value DEFAULT assumes a MIXED formulation for element groups with
material models OGDEN, MOONEY-RIVLIN, ARRUDA-BOYCE and SUSSMAN-
BATHE. For all other material models the value assumed for DEFAULT is that of
DISPLACEMENT formulation.
Note: When using the mixed formulation, 1 pressure degree of freedom is used for
elements with 8 to 21 nodes, and 4 pressure degrees of freedom are used for the
27-node element. In general, the 27-node element is the most effective, and is thus
recommended. To explicitly set the number of pressure degrees of freedom, input
FORMULATION = -N, where N is the desired number of pressure degrees of
freedom within each element.
Indicates the reference system for calculated stresses.
Indicates initial strains applied to this element group.
NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION
are accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the STRAIN-FIELD
parameter are accounted for.
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
BOTH Nodal and element strains are taken into consideration.
FRACTURE [NO]
STRAIN-FIELD [0]
Label number of a strain-field defined by STRAIN-FIELD command (Section7.9). A 0 value
indicates no initial element strains, and any initial element strains selected by input of
STRAIN-FIELD > 0 will only be considered if INITIALSTRAIN = ELEMENT or BOTH.
LVUS1 [0]
LVUS2 [0]
SED [NO]
Indicate whether or not to compute, and output, the strain energy density at all integration
points of elements within the group. {YES/NO}
RUPTURE [ADINA]
Note: Material models available for this option are:
PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, MROZ-BILINEAR,
PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC, THERMO-PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP,
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP, USER-SUPPLIED
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in the formulation of 8-node 3D solid
elements.
NO Incompatible modes are not included.
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
YES Incompatible modes are included.
DEFAULT Choice of formulation is controled by the KINEMATICS command
TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
number 1) :
e a t t
c
a
a
# $ $ %
& '
0 0
1
2
(
0
restart run.
POROUS [NO]
Indicates whether porous media properties are used for elements in this group. {NO/YES}
WTMC [1.0]
Plastic work to heat fator for thermo-mechanical coupling. Must be in the range <0.0,1.0>
OPTION [NONE]
{NONE,POROUS,USER-CODED, GASKET-SIMPLE,GASKET-GENERAL}
NONE No special option.
USER-CODED User-supplied code is used for this element group.
GASKET-SIMPLE This element group is used with a simple gasket material.
GASKET-GENERAL This element group is used with a general gasket material.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
EGROUP THREEDSOLID
Sec. 8.1 Element groups EGROUP THREEDSOLID
TDEATH [0.0]
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
RUPTURE-LABEL [0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST GROUP THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP THREEDSOLID FIRST LAST
EGROUP BEAM NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL
RINT SINT TINT RESULTS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS
RIGIDENDTYPE MOMENT-CURVATURE RIGIDITY
MULTIPLY BOLT RUPTURE OPTION BOLT-TOL
SECTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH SPOINT
BOLTFORCE BOLTNCUR TMC-MATERIAL
BOLT-NUMBER BOLT-LOAD WARP
Defines an element group consisting of Hermitian beam elements.
group can be given only if it is of type BEAM. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP BEAM.
SUBTYPE [THREE-D]
Indicates the type of BEAM element.
TWO-D Two-dimensional action beam elements, defined parallel to one of the X-Y,
Y-Z, or X-Z global coordinate planes.
THREE-D Three-dimensional action beam elements.
element group.
DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
use a different material, as specified by an element data command, but each material specified
Note: Elements of type BEAM can use materials of the following types:
ELASTIC
PLASTIC-BILINEAR
EGROUP BEAM
RINT [5]
Numerical integration order along the centroidal axis of each element, the local element r-
direction. {1 " RINT " 7}
SINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local s-direction of each element, which lies in the element
plane defined by the element nodes including the auxiliary node. {1 " SINT " 7}
DEFAULT = 7 for 3-D action elements of rectangular cross-section, 3 otherwise.
TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local t-direction of each general 3-D beam element, normal
to the plane of the element. {1 " TINT " 8}
DEFAULT = 1 for 2-D action elements of rectangular cross-section.
7 for 3-D action elements of rectangular cross-section.
5 for 2-D action elements of pipe cross-section.
8 for 3-D action elements of pipe cross-section.
Note: The element matrices are integrated exactly when used in conjunction with a linear
elastic material, and, therefore, parameters RINT, SINT, TINT are not considered.
RESULTS [STRESSES]
The calculated element response from the ADINA analysis. {STRESSES/FORCES/
SFORCES}
element stresses.
STRESSES Element stresses and strains are calculated at all integration points, but
forces are not.
SFORCES Element forces and moments are calculated at equidistant section
points along the length of the element. The number of section points is
set by the parameter SPOINT. This option is only available for static,
linear analysis.
Note: When an elastic material model is used, the choice STRESSES is not considered
since no integration point data are available. In this case, the default ouput choice is
FORCES.
EGROUP BEAM
accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via the EDATA command
are accounted for.
RIGIDENDTYPE [NONE]
Specifies whether rigid end-zones exist for elements of the group. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide.
NONE No rigid end-zones are defined.
ABSOLUTE Rigid end-zones are defined in terms of dimensions in length units.
INFINITE Rigid end-zones with infinite stiffness are defined in terms of
dimensions in length units.
MOMENT-CURVATURE [NO]
Specifies whether or not moment-curvature properties are to be utilized by elements in the
group. {YES/NO}
RIGIDITY [0]
Label number of a rigidity moment-curvature property set to be used for elements of the
group. See RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE. Used when MOMENT-CURVATURE = YES.
MULTIPLY [1.0E6]
This parameter is only applicable if RIGIDENDTYPE=ABSOLUTE. It specifies a multiplier to
the stiffness properties of the element in case of rigid ends. The multiplier is used to compute
the stiffness of the rigid ends. {>=0.0}
BOLT [NO]
This parameter in now obsolete. It is replaced by the parameter OPTION.
EGROUP BEAM
RUPTURE [ADINA]
Note that the only material model available for this option is:
OPTION [NONE]
Option for the behaviour of beam elements in this group. {NONE/BOLT}
BOLT-TOL [0.0]
Bolt force tolerance used to determine convergence. During solution iterations, the element
internal force is compared with the preload force. If the difference is within the tolerance, the
converged solution is obtained. BOLT-TOL=0.0 means the default bolt tolerance specified in
BOLT-OPTIONS command will be used.
SECTION [1]
Specifies the default cross section label for elements in the group.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
SPOINT [4]
Specifies the number of section points for output of section forces when
RESULTS=SFORCES. The points are located equidistant along length of the element.
{ 2 " SPOINT " 7 }
EGROUP BEAM
Note: SPOINT is only considered when the option SFORCES is used in the parameter
RESULTS.
BOLTFORCE [0.0]
BOLTNCUR [0]
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
BOLT-NUMBER [0]
Specifies the bolt number for the current group. It can be used in the command BOLT-TABLE.
BOLT-LOAD [0.0]
The parameter BOLTFORCE is obsolete. BOLT-LOAD takes it place, and specifies the default
bold load for each element. A bolt can be either be of the type force-tensioning or length-
reducing.
WARP [NO]
Specifies whether warping degress of freedom are active. {NO/YES}
NO No warping DOF
YES Warping DOF is active.
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP BEAM FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP BEAM FIRST LAST
EGROUP BEAM
EGROUP ISOBEAM NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL RINT
SINT TINT RESULTS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS
RUPTURE TIME-OFFSET OPTION SECTION THICKNESS
PRINT SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH TMC-MATERIAL
Defines an element group consisting of isoparametric beam elements.
group can be given only if it is of type ISOBEAM. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP ISOBEAM.
SUBTYPE [GENERAL]
Indicates the type of ISOBEAM element.
GENERAL General three-dimensional beam elements.
PLSTRAIN Plane strain elements in the global YZ plane.
PLSTRESS Plane stress elements in the global YZ plane.
AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric elements in the global YZ plane. Z is the
axis of rotational symmetry and Y is the radial direction
(Y ! 0).
element group.
by KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
Note: Elements of type ISOBEAM can use materials of the following types:
EGROUP ISOBEAM
PLASTIC-BILINEAR PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
THERMO-PLASTIC CREEP
PLASTIC-CREEP MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CREEP-VARIABLE PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
RINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order along the centroidal axis of each element (the local element r-
direction). Negative values imply the closed Newton-Cotes integration method, and zero or
positive values the Gauss integration method. Possible values/orders include:
RINT Method No. of integration points
-1 Newton-Cotes 3
-2 Newton-Cotes 3
-3 Newton-Cotes 3
-4 Newton-Cotes 5
-5 Newton-Cotes 5
-6 Newton-Cotes 7
-7 Newton-Cotes 7
0 Gauss DEFAULT (see below)
1 Gauss 1
2 Gauss 2
3 Gauss 3
4 Gauss 4
DEFAULT The Gauss integration order such that the element matrix obtained is
equivalent to the mixed formulation for this element. With this integration
order, the elements do not contain any spurious zero energy modes, do not
lock and are efficient in general nonlinear analysis.
SINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local s-direction of each element, which lies in the element
plane defined by the element nodes (including the auxiliary node). The same input conven-
tion for RINT is assumed. (Note, however, that ADINA will currently employ the 4-point
Gauss or the 7-point Newton-Cotes method for general 3-D isobeam elements, overriding
your input value).
For plane stress/strain beams or axisymmetric shell elements, we have:
2 " SINT " 4 Gauss method.
EGROUP ISOBEAM
-7 " SINT " -3 Newton-Cotes method.
DEFAULT = 4 for general 3-D elements.
2 for plane stress/strain, axisymmetric elements.
TINT [4]
Numerical integration order for the local t-direction of each general 3-D beam element, normal
to the plane of the element. The same input convention for RINT, SINT is used, but note that
ADINA employs either the 4-point Gauss or the 7-point Newton-Cotes method, overriding
the input value.
RESULTS [STRESSES]
element stresses.
NODAL Only the nodal strains are accounted for; these can be input
with the INITIAL-CONDITION or ELEMENT-DATA commands.
ELEMENT Only the element strains are accounted for; these can be input
with the INITIAL-CONDITION or ELEMENT-DATA commands.
RUPTURE [ADINA]
EGROUP ISOBEAM
PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, THERMO-PLASTIC,
CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
number 1) :
e a t t
c
a
a
# $ $ %
& '
0 0
1
2
(
0
restart run.
OPTION [NONE]
Indicates whether user-supplied code is used for this element group.
{NONE / USER-CODED}
If OPTION = USER-CODED, then {SUBTYPE, INITIALSTRAIN, CMASS, RUPTURE} are
not applicable
SECTION [1]
Specifies the default cross-section label for elements (excluding axisymmetric shell) in the
group.
THICKNESS [1.0]
Specifies the default thickness of axisymmetric shell elements in the group.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
EGROUP ISOBEAM
TDEATH [0.0]
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP ISOBEAM FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP ISOBEAM FIRST LAST
EGROUP ISOBEAM
EGROUP PLATE NAME DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL INT
RESULTS INITIALSTRAIN CMASS THICKNESS PRINT
SAVE TBIRTH TDEATH
Defines an element group consisting of plate elements.
group can be given only if it is of type PLATE. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP PLATE.
element group.
KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for the element group. Elements within the group
may use a different material, but each material specified must be of the same model type as
that of the material given by this parameter.
Note: Elements of type PLATE can use materials of the following types:
ELASTIC
ORTHOTROPIC
ILYUSHIN
INT [2]
Integration scheme indicator. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for the triangular element
integration schemes. {1 " INT " 4}
1 1-point (centroid).
2 3-point (interior).
3 3-point (mid-side).
4 7-point (interior).
Note: For linear analysis (small displacement, elastic material) ADINA uses the
integration scheme given by INT = 2; the input value for parameter INT is thus
ignored.
EGROUP PLATE
RESULTS [STRESS-RESULTANTS]
FORCES Element nodal forces and moments are calculated, but
stresses are not. These forces/moments are equivalent, in
the virtual work sense, to the internal element stresses.
The reference system is that of the degree-of-freedom
system associated with the node (global or skew).
STRESS-RESULTANTS Element stress resultants are calculated at all integration
NODAL Only the nodal strains input via INITIAL-CONDITION
are accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via element data
commands are accounted for.
BOTH Both nodal and element strains are taken into
consideration.
THICKNESS [1.0]
Defines the default element thickness.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
EGROUP PLATE
TDEATH [0.0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP PLATE FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP PLATE FIRST LAST
EGROUP PLATE
EGROUP SHELL NAME DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL RINT SINT
TINT RESULTS STRESSREFERENCE PRINTVECTORS
NLAYERS INITIALSTRAIN FAILURE SECTIONRESULT
CMASS STRAINS RUPTURE TIME-OFFSET OPTION
THICKNESS INCOMPATIBLE-MODES PRINT SAVE
TBIRTH TDEATH TINT-TYPE TMC-MATERIAL WTMC
RUPTURE-LABEL RELROT-PENALTY
Defines an element group consisting of shell elements.
group can be given only if it is of type SHELL. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP SHELL.
element group.
DEFAULT Formulation for element group defaults to that specified by KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
The label number of the default material for the element group. Elements within the group
may use a different material, but each material specified must be of the same model type as
that of the material given by this parameter.
Note: Elements of type SHELL can use materials of the following types. Only elements
marked with an asterisk (*) can be used with large strains, but are restricted to 3-, 4-,
9-, or 16-node single layer shell elements, in which the shell geometry is described in
terms of midsurface nodes.
ELASTIC *PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR
ORTHOTROPIC CREEP
THERMO-ISOTROPIC THERMO-PLASTIC
*PLASTIC-BILINEAR PLASTIC-CREEP
*PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
CREEP-VARIABLE PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE
EGROUP SHELL
RINT [DEFAULT]
Integration order for the local r-direction of the elements. {1 " RINT " 6}
DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order, the reliable integration order,
dependent on the polynomial order of the elements, i.e., the
number of nodes per element side.
SINT [DEFAULT]
Integration order for the local s-direction of the elements. {1 " SINT " 6}
DEFAULT same as RINT.
Note: For a triangular shell element, the integration scheme uses the following number
of sampling points. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
NRS = RINT * SINTNo. of integration points
1 1
1 < NRS " 4 4
4 < NRS " 9 7
9 < NRS " 36 13
TINT [2]
Integration order for the local t-direction (through thickness) of the elements.
TINT > 0 Gauss, Newton-Cotes or trapezoidal rule integration, see parameter
TINT-TYPE
-7 " TINT " -3 Newton-Cotes integration (for backwards compatibility with
previous versions of the AUI)
Note: For multilayer shell elements this integration order is applied to each layer.
RESULTS [STRESSES]
FORCES Element nodal forces and moments are calculated, but stresses are
not. These forces/moments are equivalent, in the virtual work
sense, to the internal element stresses. The reference system is
that of the degree-of-freedom system associated with the node
(global or skew).
EGROUP SHELL
Indicates the reference system for calculated stresses. {GLOBAL/LOCAL/MATERIAL/
MIDSURFACE }
LOCAL The local element system (r, s, t).
MIDSURFACE The mid-surface coordinate system (
, , r s t
).See Theory and
Modeling Guide.
PRINTVECTORS [0]
Indicator for printing, by ADINA, of the direction cosines of the element midsurface vectors
(at the nodal points).
0 No printing.
1 Initial direction cosines printed.
2 Initial and updated direction cosines printed.
NLAYERS [1]
The number of layers for elements of the group. See LAYER.
accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via element data commands are
accounted for.
FAILURE [0]
Label number of the default failure criterion assigned to elements of this group. Elements
EGROUP SHELL
within the group may use a different failure criterion, but each failure criterion specified must
be of the same type as that of the failure criterion given by this parameter, see FAILURE. A 0
value indicates no failure criterion to be used.
ISOTROPIC ORTHOTROPIC
THERMO-ISOTROPIC THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC
SECTIONRESULT [0]
Indicates which of the following are calculated at integration point midsurface locations:
element force and moment resultants (per unit length), membrane strains and curvatures and
positions of the neutral axes. Printing and saving of this data for each element may be
specified by the element data commands.
-2 Calculation of force/moment resultants, strains/curvatures,
neutral axes.
-1 Calculation of force/moment resultants, strains/curvatures.
0 No calculation.
1 Calculation of force/moment resultants.
2 Calculation of force/moment resultants, neutral axes.
Note: Parameter SECTIONRESULT takes effect only if parameter RESULTS =
STRESSES, and if the calculated data refers to the local element (r, s, t) system.
STRAINS [DEFAULT]
group.
LARGE Effects of large strains are included. For details of restrictions,
please refer to the note under the parameter MATERIAL.
KINEMATICS.
EGROUP SHELL
Sec. 8.1 Element groups EGROUP SHELL
RUPTURE [ADINA]
PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC,
THERMO-PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
number 1) :
e a t t
c
a
a
# $ $ %
& '
0 0
1
2
(
0
restart run.
OPTION [NONE]
Indicates whether user-supplied code is used for this element group.
{NONE / USER-CODED}
if OPTION = USER-CODED, then {STRESSREFERENCE, PRINTVECTORS, NLAYERS,
INITIALSTRAIN, FAILURE, SECTIONRESULT, CMASS, STRAINS, RUPTURE} are not
applicable
THICKNESS [1.0]
Specifies the default thickness of elements in the group.
Specifies whether incompatible modes are included in the formulation of 4-node shell ele-
ments. {NO/YES/DEFAULT}
NO Incompatible modes are not included
YES Incompatible modes are included
DEFAULT Choice of formulation is set by the KINEMATICS command
Incompatible modes are only applicable to quadrilateral MITC4 elements. They are not
applicable to triangular collapsed MITC4 elements.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
TINT-TYPE [GAUSS]
Parameter TINT-TYPE controls the type of numerical integration through the shell thickness.
GAUSS Gauss integration is used with TINT points. (2 " TINT " 6)
NEWTON-COTES Newton-Cotes integration is used with TINT points. (TINT =
3,5,7)
TRAPEZOIDAL Trapezoidal rule integration is used with TINT points. Can only be
used with MITC3, MITC4, MITC6, MITC9, MITC16 single layer shell
elements. ( 2 " TINT " 20)
If TINT < 0, then Newton-Cotes integration is always used regardless of the value of TINT-
TYPE (for backwards compatibility with previous versions of the AUI).
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
WTMC [1.0]
Plastic work to heat factor for the thermo-mechanical coupling. ( 0.0 " WTMC " 1.0)
EGROUP SHELL
EGROUP SHELL
RUPTURE-LABEL [0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP SHELL FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP SHELL FIRST LAST
EGROUP PIPE NAME DISPLACEMENTS MATERIAL RINT SINT
TINT RESULTS OVALIZATION INITIALSTRAIN
ICALRA RADTOL CMASS RUPTURE TIME-OFFSET
OPTION BOLT-TOL SECTION PRINT SAVE TBIRTH
TDEATH BOLTFORCE BOLTNCUR TMC-MATERIAL
Defines an element group consisting of pipe elements. See the Theory and Modeling Guide
for a complete description of pipe elements.
group can only be given if it is of type PIPE. Hence, to re-define the type of a named element
group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP PIPE.
element group.
KINEMATICS.
MATERIAL [1]
use a different material, as specified by element data command, but each material specified
Note: Elements of type PIPE can use materials of the following types:
ELASTIC, THERMO-ISOTROPIC, PLASTIC, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, THERMO-
PLASTIC, CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, CREEP-VARIABLE, MULTILINEAR-PLAS-
TIC-CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP-
VARIABLE
RINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order along the centroidal axis of each element (the local element r-
direction). Negative values imply the closed Newton-Cotes integration method, and zero or
positive values the Gauss integration method.
DEFAULT Full Gauss integration order the reliable integration order,
maximum number of nodes per element.
EGROUP PIPE
RINT Method No. of integration points
-1 Newton-Cotes 3
-2 Newton-Cotes 3
-3 Newton-Cotes 3
-4 Newton-Cotes 5
-5 Newton-Cotes 5
-6 Newton-Cotes 7
-7 Newton-Cotes 7
0 Gauss DEFAULT (see above)
1 Gauss 1
2 Gauss 2
3 Gauss 3
4 Gauss 4
SINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local s-direction of each element, which is the radial
direction of the pipe). The same input convention for RINT is assumed.
TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the local t-direction or circumferential direction used in the
composite trapezoidal rule. Only 4, 8, 12 or 24 integration points can be employed and the
following default values are used by ADINA when other values of TINT are specified.
4 < TINT " 7 8
8 < TINT " 11 12
12 < TINT " 24 24
If element warping/ovalization is enabled then
TINT ! 12 must be used for MASTER OVALIZATION = IN-PLANE.
TINT = 24 must be used for MASTER OVALIZATION = OUT-OF-PLANE or ALL.
DEFAULT = 8 when MASTER OVALIZATION = NO.
= 12 when MASTER OVALIZATION = IN-PLANE.
= 24 when MASTER OVALIZATION = OUT-OF-PLANE or ALL.
RESULTS [STRESSES]
FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, stresses are not. These forces
are equivalent, in the virtual work sense, to the internal element
stresses.
EGROUP PIPE
points, but no forces.
OVALIZATION [DEFAULT]
Flag that indicates whether or not the pipe nodes in this element group have ovalization/
warping degrees of freedom.
NO Pipe element nodes do not have ovalization/warping degrees of
freedom.
DEFAULT Warping/Ovalization based on MASTER command.
NO if MASTER OVALIZATION = NO
YES if MASTER OVALIZATION = IN-PLANE,
OUT-OF-PLANE
or ALL.
accounted for.
ELEMENT Only the element strains input via element data commands are
accounted for.
ICALRA [0]
Flag for the calculation of internal radii and internal areas at pipe nodes.
0 Internal radii and internal areas are not calculated.
1 Internal radii and internal areas are calculated and stored on the
porthole file.
2 Internal radii and internal areas are calculated, stored on the
porthole file and printed out.
RADTOL [0.001]
For 4-node, circular bend pipe elements, the nodes should lie on a circular arc with the auxiliary
node at the center of that arc. RADTOL provides a relative tolerance for checking this.
EGROUP PIPE
total volume, moments and products of inertia, centroid, and center of mass.{YES/NO}
RUPTURE [ADINA]
Note: Material models available for this option are:
PLASTIC-BILINEAR, PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, THERMO-PLASTIC,
CREEP, PLASTIC-CREEP, MULTILINEAR-PLASTIC-CREEP
TIME-OFFSET [0.0]
number 1) :
e a t t
c
a
a
# $ $ %
& '
0 0
1
2
(
0
restart run.
OPTION [NONE]
BOLT-TOL [0.01]
SECTION [1]
Specifies the default cross-section label for elements in the group.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
EGROUP PIPE
TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
BOLTFORCE [0.0]
Specify default bolt force for each element.
BOLTNCUR [0]
Specify time function for bolt element.
TMC-MATERIAL [1]
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP PIPE FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP PIPE FIRST LAST
EGROUP PIPE
EGROUP SPRING NAME PROPERTYSET RESULTS NONLINEAR
SKEWSYSTEM BOLT OPTION PRINT SAVE
TBIRTH TDEATH
Defines an element group consisting of spring elements.
group can be given only if it is of type SPRING. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP SPRING.
PROPERTYSET [1]
The label number of the default property set (giving the stiffness, mass, damping properties)
for the element group, defined via command PROPERTYSET. Elements within the group may
use a different property set, as specified, e.g., by SPRING-POINTS.
RESULTS [FORCES]
FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated. The reference system is that
of the degree-of-freedom system associated with the node (global
or skew).
STRESSES Element stresses are calculated using the specified stress
transformation (see command PROPERTYSET).
NONLINEAR [NO]
Specifies whether springs in this group has nonlinear effects. {NO/MNO/GEOM/MNO-G}
NO Spring is linear
MNO Spring properties may be nonlinear but geometric nonlinearities
are not taken into account
GEOM Spring properties may be nonlinear and geometric nonlinearities
are taken into account
MNO-G Spring with general nonlinear spring properties, with option of
using skewsystem at the spring nodes
SKEWSYSTEM [NO]
Skewsystem usage, only applicable to springs with option NONLINEAR = NO or MNO-G.
EGROUP SPRING
NO All property sets are assumed to be with respect to the global
Cartesian system. ADINA performs all necessary
transformations for any skewsystems at spring element nodes.
YES Property sets are assumed to be with respect to the coordinate
systems at the element nodes. Thus, in this case, ADINA does
not perform any transformation between global and skew system.
BOLT [NO]
This parameter is now obsolete. It is replaced by the parameter OPTION.
OPTION [NONE]
Specifies special options for springs in this group. {NONE/TIED/TRANSVERSE}
NONE No special options
TIED Springs used to tie closely spaced shell surfaces
TRANSVERSE Spring may act in the transverse direction (instead of axial). Only
applicable when NONLINEAR=MNO
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
TBIRTH [0.0]
TDEATH [0.0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP SPRING FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP SPRING FIRST LAST
EGROUP SPRING
EGROUP GENERAL NAME MATRIXSET RESULTS SKEWSYSTEMS
USER-SUPPLIED PRINT SAVE
Defines an element group consisting of linear general elements.
group can only be given if it is of type GENERAL. Hence to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP GENERAL.
MATRIXSET [1]
The label number of the default matrix set giving element stiffness, mass, damping and stress
matrices for an element group, defined via command MATRIXSET. Elements within the group
may use a different matrix set, as specified by element data commands.
RESULTS [STRESSES]
points, but forces are not calculated.
SKEWSYSTEM [NO]
NO All matrix sets are assumed to be with respect to the global
Cartesian system. ADINA performs all necessary
transformations for any skewsystems at general element nodes.
YES Matrix sets are assumed to be with respect to the coordinate
systems at the element nodes. Thus, in this case, ADINA does
not perform any transformation between global and skewsystems.
USER-SUPPLIED [NO]
If USER-SUPPLIED=YES, then use the MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED command to input the
required information, which will be used in the ADINA subroutine CUSERG for calculating
the element stiffness, mass and damping matrices, and nodal forces. Note that if the stiffness,
mass or damping matrices are constants, then they can instead be provided by the MATRIX
STIFFNESS, MATRIX MASS or MATRIX DAMPING commands, respectively. If the
MATRIX STIFFNESS command is used, then obviously USER-SUPPLIED=NO. Only one
EGROUP GENERAL
matrix set (specified by MATRIXSET) is allowed when USER-SUPPLIED=YES.
NO Element stiffness is directly input through the commands
MATRIX STIFFNESS and MATRIXSET.
YES Element stiffness is to be provided by the user from ADINA
subroutine CUSERG, and the element nodal forces is to be
calculated too. The command MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED must
be input and the MATRIXSET command is used to combine the
stiffness, mass and damping effects.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP GENERAL FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP GENERAL FIRST LAST
EGROUP GENERAL
EGROUP FLUID2 NAME SUBTYPE DISPLACEMENTS IPO
MATERIAL INT RESULTS DEGEN
FORMULATION CMASS
Defines an element group consisting of 2-D planar or axisymmetric fluid elements.
group can only be given if it is of type FLUID2. Hence to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP FLUID2.
SUBTYPE [AXISYMMETRIC]
Indicates the type of FLUID2 element.
AXISYMMETRIC Axisymmetric elements (which cannot be used in a cyclic
symmetric analysis).
PLANE 2-D Planar elements.
element group. Only applicable for FORMULATION = 0 or 1.
by KINEMATICS.
IPO [0]
Each fluid region may required one point at which a hydrostatic pressure degree of freedom is
specified. See the Theory and Modeling Guide. If required, IPO specifies the appropriate
geometry point. IPO = 0 indicates no such requirement.
MATERIAL [1]
use a different material, as specified by element data commands, but each material specified
Note: Elements of type FLUID2 can only use a material of the type: FLUID.
EGROUP FLUID2
INT [DEFAULT]
RESULTS [PRESSURES]
FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but pressures are not. These
element pressures. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
PRESSURES Element pressures are calculated at all integration points, but
forces are not.
Note: RESULTS=FORCES can not be applied to the potential based fluids.
DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction for degenerate (triangular) 8-node elements. When
true tetrahedral elements are defined in this element group, DEGEN = UNUSED should be
specified. The DEFAULT option means that the default is taken from the parameter DEGEN of
the MASTER command. {DEFAULT/NO/YES/UNUSED}
Indicates which fluid element to use:
0 Displacement-based element without rotation penalty.
1 Displacement-based element with rotation penalty.
2 Potential-based element, acoustic formulation.
3 Potential-based infinite element
4 Potential-based element, subsonic formulation
Notes on the formulations:
The potential-based formulations can only be used in conjunction with small displacements
(DISPLACEMENTS=SMALL).
Formulation 3 is obsolete and is maintained only for backwards compatibility with ADINA 7.5
and lower.
EGROUP FLUID2
Formulation 4 is allowed only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC.
DEFAULT = 2
= 1 (cyclic symmetric analysis)
Requires the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group: total mass,
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP FLUID2 FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP FLUID2 FIRST LAST
EGROUP FLUID2
EGROUP FLUID3 NAME DISPLACEMENTS IPO MATERIAL RSINT
TINT RESULTS DEGEN FORMULATION CMASS
Defines an element group consisting of three-dimensional fluid elements.
group can only be given if it is of type FLUID3. Hence, to re-define the type of a named
element group, you must first delete that group using DELETE EGROUP FLUID3.
element group. Only applicable for FORMULATION = 0 or 1.
by KINEMATICS.
IPO [0]
Each fluid region may required one point at which a hydrostatic pressure degree of freedom is
specified. See the Theory and Modeling Guide. If required, IPO specifies the appropriate
geometry point. IPO = 0 indicates no such requirement.
MATERIAL [1]
use a different material, as specified by element data commands, but each material specified
Note: Elements of type FLUID3 can only use a material of type: FLUID.
RSINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order for the element r-, s-directions. {1 " INT " 6}
dependent on the polynomial order of the elements, i.e. the
TINT [DEFAULT]
Numerical integration order in the element t-direction. Same input convention as RSINT.
EGROUP FLUID3
RESULTS [PRESSURES]
FORCES Element nodal forces are calculated, but pressures are not. These
element pressures. The reference system is that of the degree-of-
PRESSURES Element pressures are calculated at all integration points, but
forces are not.The calculated element response from the ADINA
analysis.
Note: RESULTS=FORCES can not be applied to the potential based fluids.
DEGEN [DEFAULT]
Indicator for spatial isotropy correction for degenerate 20-node elements. When
true 10-node tetrahedral elements are defined in this element group through ENODES
command, DEGEN = UNUSED should be specified. The DEFAULT option means that the
default is taken from the parameter DEGEN of the MASTER command. {DEFAULT/NO/
YES/UNUSED}
Indicates which fluid element to use:
0 Displacement-based element without rotation penalty.
1 Displacement-based element with rotation penalty.
2 Potential-based element, acoustic formulation.
3 Potential-based infinite element
4 Potential-based element, subsonic formulation
Notes on the formulations:
The potential-based formulations can only be used in conjunction with small displacements
(DISPLACEMENTS=SMALL).
Formulation 3 is obsolete and is maintained only for backwards compatibility with ADINA 7.5
and lower.
Formulation 4 is allowed only when MASTER FLUIDPOTENTIAL=AUTOMATIC.
DEFAULT = 2
= 1 (cyclic symmetric analysis)
EGROUP FLUID3
Requests the calculation of the following mass properties for the element group; total mass,
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGROUP FLUID3 FIRST LAST
DELETE EGROUP FLUID3 FIRST LAST
EGROUP FLUID3
EGCONTROL MAXELG
EGCONTROL specifies general control data for element groups.
MAXELG [9999]
Maximum number of elements in a single element subgroup. If the number of elements in a
group is greater than MAXELG it will be split into subgroups such that each subgroup has
MAXELG or fewer elements. This parameter has no effect if PPROCESS NPROC is greater
than 1, for which element group splitting is handled independently of MAXELG.
Auxiliary commands
LIST EGCONTROL
EGCONTROL
BOLT-OPTIONS TYPE TABLES STEPS TIME TOLERANCE DAMPING
Defines bolt options for use with the EGROUP BEAM command.
TYPE [FORCE]
Specifies the type of bolt. {FORCE/LENGTH}
FORCE Force-tensioning bolt
LENGTH Length-reducing bolt
TYPE can be overwritten by the BOLT-TABLE command.
TABLES [NO]
Indicates whether bolt tables (BOLT-TABLE command) are used to specify the bolt loading
sequence. If TABLES=YES, at least one BOLT-TABLE command must be specified in the
model. {NO/YES}
STEPS [1]
Specifies number of bolt steps used to apply the full bolt load. Not used if TABLES=YES is
specified.
TIME [0]
Specifies bolt time. Not used if TABLES=YES is specified.
TOLERANCE [0.01]
Specifies the default bolt convergence tolerance. A different tolerance value may be specified
for a group of bolts with the BOLT-TOL parameter in EGROUP BEAM command.
DAMPING [0.0]
Specifies bolt damping.
BOLT-OPTIONS
BOLT-TABLE
BOLT-TABLE NAME TYPE TIME
sequence
i
bolt-number
i
factor
i
save
i
Specifies the bolt loading sequence.
NAME [current highest label + 1]
Bolt-table label number.
TYPE [FORCE]
Specifies the type of bolt. {FORCE/LENGTH}
FORCE Force-tensioning bolt
LENGTH Length-reducing bolt
The specification of TYPE in this command overwrites any from the BOLT-OPTIONS com-
mand.
TIME [0]
Specifies bolt time.
sequence
i
Bolt sequence number.
bolt-number
i
Bolt number assigned in the EGROUP BEAM command.
Note that if bolt-number=0, it means all bolts are loaded in same sequence.
factor
i
Bolt factor.
save
i
[DEFAULT]
Save flag. {DEFAULT/NO/YES}
When the setting is DEFAULT, the save flag is NO, except for last bolt in the table, for which
the save flag = YES.
Note that the same sequence with different bolt numbers must have the same save flag. If
multiple entries have the same sequence and the same bolt number, only the last one will be
taken. Sequence numbers must start at number 1 and have no gaps. Bolt time must be
different for each bolt-table. The same sequence must have the same save flags.
TRANSITION-ELEMENT BODY1 FACE1 EDGE GROUP1 BODY2 FACE2
GROUP2 SUBSTRUCTURE
Converts a set of shell elements along an edge of a face/surface into shell transition elements.
BODY1 [0]
Label number of the body of FACE1 that has a shell mesh.
FACE1 [1]
Label number of the face on BODY1. If BODY1 is 0, FACE1 is a surface label number.
EDGE
Label number of the edge where the shell transition elements are to be created. If BODY1 is 0,
EDGE is a line label number.
GROUP1 [Highest shell element group number of mesh on FACE1]
Element group number of the shell mesh on FACE1.
BODY2 [0]
Label number of the body that has a 3-D solid mesh.
FACE2 [1]
Label number of face on BODY2 where the shell transition elements are to be created. If
BODY2 is 0, FACE2 is a surface label number.
GROUP2 [Highest 3-D solid element group number of mesh on
BODY2]
Element group number of the 3-D solid mesh on BODY2.
SUBSTRUCTURE [Currently active substructure]
Substructure number for the nodes created by this command.
TRANSITION-ELEMENT
Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation
BLAYER SUBSTRUC GROUP GEOM
body
i
face
i
edge
i
ptype
i
thick0
i
nlayer
i
thickt
i
Command BLAYER generates boundary layers on specified body faces for the specified
(substructure, group). In 3D, boundary layers are grown normal to body faces. In 2D,
boundary layers are grown normal to body edges along body faces.
Notes for 3D models:
1 BLAYER is active only if: number of bodies > 0 and number of volumes = 0
and all bodies have been meshed.
2 BLAYER executes only if number of nodes per element is 4.
3 In case of multiple bodies, "interface" body faces must be linked.
4 Linked body faces cannot have boundary layers on both sides.
5 Once boundary layers have been generated and in case of multiple bodies,
do not delete body meshes unless you intend to delete all of them.
6 There can be only one element group.
7 As a rule of thumb, the total thickness should be less than the element size on
the body face.
Notes for 2D models:
1 BLAYER is active only if number of body faces > 0 and number of surfaces = 0
and all body faces have been meshed.
2 BLAYER executes only if number of nodes per element is 3.
3 In case of multiple bodies, "interface" body edges must have same nodes.
4 Interface body edges cannot have boundary layers on both sides.
5 Once boundary layers have been generated and in case of multiple bodies,
do not delete body meshes unless you intend to delete all of them.
6 There can be only one element group.
7 As a rule of thumb, the total thickness should be less than the element size on the
body edge.
SUBSTRUC [current substructure label number]
Element substructure.
GROUP [current group label number]
Element group.
GEOM [YES]
Option to use the geometric modeler for placement of nodes on body faces/edges. {YES/
NO}
BLAYER
YES The geometric modeler (parasolid) is used to place nodes on body faces/edges.
NO The mesh is used to place nodes on body faces/edges.
body
i
Label number of the body.
face
i
Label number of the face.
edge
i
Label number of the edge. In 3D, this is a dummy argument.
ptype
i
Progression type for boundary layers. {GEOMETRIC/ARITHMETIC}
thick0
i
Thickness of first layer (off face).
nlayer
i
Number of layers.
thickt
i
Total thickness.
BLAYER
COPY-TRIANGULATION
COPY-TRIANGULATION BODY1 FACE1 BODY2 FACE2
TRANSFORMATION PCTOLERANCE
Copies face triangulation which can be later be used by meshing commands like GFACE or
GBODY. Enables the creation of identical meshes on similar faces.
BODY1 [NONE]
Label number of body where the face triangulation(s) is to be copied from. {> 0}
FACE1 [0]
Label number of face on BODY1 where the triangulation is to be copied from. See notes below
if FACE1=0. {! 0}
BODY2 [NONE]
Label number of body where the face triangulation(s) is to be copied to. {> 0}
FACE2 [0]
Label number of face on BODY2 where the triangulation is to be copied from. See notes below
if FACE2=0. {! 0}
TRANSFORMATION [0]
Label number of the transformation from BODY1 (FACE1) to BODY2 (FACE2).
PCTOLERANCE [as set in TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]
Relative tolerance to be used to check if faces are matched using the provided transforma-
tion.
Notes:
If FACE1>0 and FACE2>0, it is assumed FACE1 transforms into FACE2 and the triangulation
stored internally for FACE1 is copied onto FACE2 if they match.
If FACE1=0 and FACE2=0, any face of BODY1 is checked against any face of BODY2 for a
match using the provided transformation. The face triangulations are copied for all matching
faces.
DELETE-TRIANGULATION OPTION BODY FACE
Deletes face triangulations created by the COPY-TRIANGULATION command.
OPTION [ALL]
Indicates whether triangulation is deleted for all relevant faces on all bodies or for selected
faces on a body. {ALL/SELECT}
BODY
Body label where triangulation is to be deleted. {>0}
FACE [0]
Face label where triangulation is to be deleted. If FACE=0, then triangulation on all relevant
faces of BODY will be deleted. {!0}
DELETE-TRIANGULATION
LIST-TRIANGULATION
Lists all faces (body and face labels) which have triangulation created by the COPY-TRIAN-
GULATION command.
LIST-TRIANGULATION
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT MODE PROGRESSION SIZE NDIV PSIZE MINCUR
Defines default mesh subdivision data for subsequent model geometry definitions. Model
geometry created or imported will initially have the subdivision data given by this command.
Note that this command does not update any current geometry subdivision data, it only
specifies defaults for subsequent geometry definitions.
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT has a similar syntax, but quite distinct action, to SUBDIVIDE MODEL,
which assigns a given subdivision data to all currently defined geometry.
MODE [NONE]
Selects the method of model subdivision data specification.
NONE no default mode. Subdivision mode will depend on the
SUBDIVIDE commands for each individual geometry type
LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of
an element edge.
DIVISIONS A geometry line or edge is assigned a number of equal
subdivisions.
POINTWISE A geometry line or edge is subdivided according to the
desired element size at its end-points.
Sets the method of element edge length distribution along a line or edge of the geometry model.
ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its
adjacent edges is constant.
GEOMETRIC The ratio of lengths of adjacent element edges is
constant.
APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that a
given ratio of end-lengths is only approximately satisfied.
Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with earlier
versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or GEOMETRIC
normally be used.
SIZE [0.0]
If MODE=LENGTH, this parameter specifies the element edge length. Then SIZE=0.0 means
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT
that the element edge length is the length of the edge (i.e. every edge will have 1 subdivsion).
If MODE=POINTWISE, this parameter specifies the maximum element edge length.
NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to a geometry line/edge.
PSIZE [0.0]
Element size at geometry points.
MINCUR [1]
Minimum number of subdivisions for curved lines and edges used when
MODE=POINTWISE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT
Lists the current default subdivision data.
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT
SUBDIVIDE MODEL MODE SIZE NDIV PROGRESSION MINCUR
Assigns mesh subdivision data to the entire current model geometry. The data can be in the
form of a specified element size, or the number of subdivisions along each line.
MODE [POINTWISE]
Selects the method of model subdivision data specification.
LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of
an element edge.
DIVISIONS Each model geometry line or edge is assigned the same
number of equal subdivisions.
POINTWISE Each model geometry line or edge is subdivided
according to the element size at its end-points.
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to each geometry line or edge.
Sets the method of element edge length distribution along each line or edge of the geometry
model
.
constant.
APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that a
given ratio of end-lengths is only approximately satisfied.
normally be used.
MINCUR [1]
Minimum number of subdivisions for curved lines and edges used when MODE =
POINTWISE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE MODEL
SUBDIVIDE MODEL
SUBDIVIDE POINT NAME SIZE
point
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data (element sizes) to a set of geometry points.
NAME
Label number of a geometry point. Other points may be specified in subsequent accompany-
ing data lines.
SIZE
Requested element size. The size of an element is defined to be the maximum length of an
edge of that element. {! 0.0}
Note: The element size at a geometry point may be used to determine the subdivision
data of geometry entities: lines and edges, and thereby that of surfaces, volumes,
faces and bodies.
point
i
Note: A zero element size at a point indicates that any line or edge for which the point is
a vertex (end-point) will have only a single element edge if the mode of that line/
edge is POINTWISE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE POINT FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE POINT
SUBDIVIDE LINE NAME MODE SIZE NDIV RATIO PROGRESSION
CBIAS
line
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of geometry lines. The data can be in the form of a
specified element size, or the number of subdivisions along the line.
P1
P2 Line length = L
MODE = DIVISIONS
NDIV = 5
RATIO = 2
PROGRESSION = GEOMETRIC
u
MODE = LENGTH
SIZE = L/10
MODE = POINTWISE
SIZE @ P1 = 0.4L, @ P2 = 0.1L
PROGRESSION = ARITHMETIC
SUBDIVIDE LINE
NAME
Label number of a geometry line. Other geometry lines to have the same subdivision data
may be given on accompanying data-lines.
MODE [DIVISIONS]
Selects the method of mesh subdivision data specification. This controls the actual param-
eters used, other parameters are ignored.
DIVISIONS The geometry lines are assigned a number of subdivisions which
can be graded in size according to the selected progression rule
(NDIV, RATIO, PROGRESSION).
LENGTH An element size is input corresponding to the length of an
element edge (SIZE).
POINTWISE The number of subdivisions, and any necessary grading, for the
geometry line is calculated from the element size specified at the
end points of the geometry line. See SUBDIVIDE POINT,
POINT-SIZE (SIZE, PROGRESSION).
COMBINED For lines of type COMBINED (COUPLED=YES), the subdivision
data assigned to the parent lines (which are combined to define
the line) are transferred to the combined line, overwriting any
existing subdivision for the combined line. This mode guarantees
that the junctions where parent lines meet is assigned a subdivi-
sion location, i.e. a node will be generated at these positions
during mesh generation.
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the geometry lines.
RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the geometry line. The grading of
element lengths is governed by PROGRESSION. Last refers to the end of the line corre-
sponding to parametric coordinate u = 1.0, whilst first refers to the end of the line corre-
sponding to parametric coordinate u = 0.0.
When element edges are to be graded along a geometry line, i.e., when RATIO + 1.0, the
distribution of element edge lengths can be selected from:
ARITHMETIC The difference in length of each element edge from its adjacent
edges is constant.
APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that RATIO is only
approximately satisfied.
normally be used.
CBIAS [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used. {NO/YES}
line
i
SUBDIVIDE LINE
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE LINE FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE LINE
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE NAME MODE SIZE NDIV1 NDIV2 RATIO1
RATIO2 PROGRESSION CBIAS1 CBIAS2
surface
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of geometry surfaces. The data can be in the form of
a specified element size, or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry surface.
The subdivision data is actually assigned to the geometry lines which comprise the edges of
the geometry surfaces.
v
u
P3
P4
P1
P2
NDIV1, RATIO1
NDIV2, RATIO2
NAME
Label number of a geometry surface. Other geometry surfaces to have the same subdivision
data may be given on accompanying data-lines.
MODE [DIVISIONS]
element edge. Each edge of the geometry surfaces is subdivided
separately so as to give element edges which are approximately of
length SIZE (SIZE).
DIVISIONS Each parametric direction of the geometry surfaces is assigned a
number of subdivisions which can be graded in size according to
the selected progression rule (NDIV1, NDIV2, RATIO1, RATIO2,
PROGRESSION).
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE
POINTWISE Each edge of the geometry surfaces is assigned a number of
sub-divisions which is calculated, along with any necessary
grading, from the element size specified at the end points of the
edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT, POINT-SIZE (SIZE, PROGRES
SION).
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV1 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the first parametric direction, u, of the geometry surfaces.
NDIV2 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the second parametric direction, v, of the geometry surfaces
RATIO1 [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the edges corresponding to the
first parametric direction, u, of the geometry surfaces. The grading of element edge lengths is
governed by PROGRESSION.
RATIO2 [1.0]
second parametric direction, v, of the geometry surfaces. The grading of element edge
lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.
When element edges are to be graded, the distribution of element edge lengths can be
selected from:
edges is constant.
APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that RATIO is only
approximately satisfied.
normally be used.
CBIAS1 [NO]
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE
Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation SUBDIVIDE SURFACE
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric u direction. {NO/YES}
CBIAS2 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric v direction. {NO/YES}
surface
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE SURFACE FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME NAME MODE SIZE NDIV1 NDIV2 NDIV3 RATIO1
RATIO2 RATIO3 PROGRESSION CBIAS1 CBIAS2
CBIAS3
volume
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of geometry volumes. The data can be in the form of
a specified element size, or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry volume.
The subdivision data is actually assigned to the geometry lines which comprise the edges of
the geometry volumes.
P1
P2
P3
P5
P7 P8
NDIV1, RATIO1
NDIV2,
RATIO2
NDIV3,
RATIO3
w
P6
P4
v
u
NAME
Label number of a geometry volume. Other volumes to have the same subdivision data may
be given on accompanying data-lines.
MODE [DIVISIONS]
element edge. Each edge of the geometry volumes is subdivided
length SIZE (SIZE).
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME
DIVISIONS Each parametric direction of the geometry volumes is assigned a
number of subdivisions, which can be graded in size according to
the selected progression rule (NDIV1, NDIV2, NDIV3,
RATIO1, RATIO2, RATIO3, PROGRESSION).
POINTWISE Each edge of the geometry volumes is assigned a number of
subdivisions, which is calculated, along with any necessary
edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT, POINT-SIZE (SIZE,
PROGRESSION).
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV1 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the first parametric direction, u, of the geometry vol-
umes.
NDIV2 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the second parametric direction, v, of the geometry
volumes.
NDIV3 [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the third parametric direction, w, of the geometry
volumes.
RATIO1 [1.0]
first parametric direction, u, of the geometry volumes. The grading of element edge lengths is
governed by PROGRESSION.
RATIO2 [1.0]
second parametric direction, v, of the geometry volumes. The grading of element edge
lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.
RATIO3 [1.0]
third parametric direction, w, of the geometry volumes. The grading of element edge lengths
is governed by PROGRESSION.
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME
When element edges are to be graded the distribution of element edge lengths can be
selected from:
constant.
APPROXIMATE The distribution of edge lengths is made such that the
ratio of first to last edge lengths (RATIO1, RATIO2, or
RATIO3) is only approximately satisfied.
Note: PROGRESSION = APPROXIMATE is only provided for compatibility with
earlier versions of ADINA-IN. It is recommended that ARITHMETIC or
GEOMETRIC normally be used.
CBIAS1 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric u direction. {NO/YES}
CBIAS2 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric v direction. {NO/YES}
CBIAS3 [NO]
Indicates if central bias is used along the parametric w direction. {NO/YES}
volume
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE VOLUME FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME
SUBDIVIDE EDGE NAME BODY MODE SIZE NDIV RATIO
PROGRESSION
edge
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data to edges of a solid geometry body. The data can be in the
form of a specified element size, or the number of subdivisions along the edge.
NAME
Label number of a geometry edge of BODY. Other edges (of BODY) to have the same
subdivision data may be given in accompanying data-lines.
MODE [LENGTH]
DIVISIONS The geometry edge is assigned a number of subdivisions, which
can be graded in size according to the selected progression rule
(NDIV, RATIO, PROGRESSION).
element edge (SIZE).
geometry edges is calculated from the element size specified at
the end points of the geometry edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT,
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to a geometry edges.
RATIO [1.0]
Ratio of lengths of the last to the first element edges along the geometry edges. The grading
of element lengths is governed by PROGRESSION.
SUBDIVIDE EDGE
When element edges are to be graded along the geometry edges (i.e., when RATIO + 1.0),
then the distribution of element edge lengths can be selected from the following.
edges is constant.
edge
i
Label number of a geometry edge (of BODY).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE EDGE FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE EDGE
SUBDIVIDE FACE NAME BODY MODE SIZE NDIV PROGRESSION
MAX-SIZE
face
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data to faces of a solid geometry body. The data can be in the
form of a specified element size, or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry
faces.
NAME
Label number of the geometry face (of BODY). Other faces (of BODY) to have the same
subdivision data may be given on accompanying data lines.
MODE [LENGTH]
DIVISIONS The edges of the geometry faces are assigned a number of
subdivisions (NDIV).
element face. Each edge of the geometry face is subdivided
separately so as to give element edges approximately the length
of SIZE (SIZE).
edges of geometry faces calculated from the element size specified
at the end points of the geometry edges. See SUBDIVIDE POINT,
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the edges of the geometry faces.
When element edges are to be graded, the distribution of element edge lengths can be
SUBDIVIDE FACE
selected from the following:
edges is constant.
MAX-SIZE [0.0]
If set to a value greater than 0.0, free-form meshing will be allowed to create elements greater
in size than the max size on the faces boundary. Free-form meshing will however not be
allowed to create elements with a size greater than MAX-SIZE. Relevant only with
MESHING=FREE-FORM and METHOD=DELAUNAY in the GFACE command. {! 0.0}
face
i
Label number of a geometry face (of BODY).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE FACE FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE FACE
SUBDIVIDE BODY NAME MODE SIZE NDIV PROGRESSION MAX-SIZE
body
i
Assigns mesh subdivision data to a set of solid geometry bodies. The data can be in the form
of a specified element size or the number of divisions along the edges of the geometry
bodies. The subdivision data is assigned to the edges of the geometry bodies.
NAME
Label number of a solid geometry body. Other geometry bodies to have the same subdivision
data may be given in accompanying data lines.
MODE [LENGTH]
DIVISIONS Each edge of the geometry bodies is assigned a number of
subdivisions (NDIV).
element edge. Each edge of the geometry bodies is subdivided
length SIZE (SIZE).
POINTWISE Each edge of the geometry bodies is assigned a number of
subdivisions, which are calculated, along with any necessary
edge. See SUBDIVIDE POINT, POINT-SIZE (SIZE,
PROGRESSION).
SIZE [0.0]
NDIV [1]
Number of subdivisions assigned to the edges of the geometry bodies.
When element edges are to be graded the distribution of element edge lengths can be
selected from the following
SUBDIVIDE BODY
edges is constant.
MAX-SIZE [0.0]
If set to a value greater than 0.0, free-form meshing will be allowed to create elements greater
in size than the max size on the faces boundary. Free-form meshing will however not be
allowed to create elements with a size greater than MAX-SIZE. Relevant only with
MESHING=FREE-FORM and METHOD=DELAUNAY in the GBODY command. {! 0.0}
Note that MAX-SIZE is passed down to the bounding faces.
body
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST SUBDIVIDE BODY FIRST LAST
SUBDIVIDE BODY
POINT-SIZE OPTION INPUT SIZE-FUNCTION MAXSIZE
MINSIZE BODY
name
i
size
i
Specifies the mesh-size (element edge length) for a set of geometry points, either directly, or
by a size-function, or by evaluation from the lengths of the lines/edges which meet at the
points. The set of points can be given by label or by reference to other geometry entities in
the model.
OPTION [DIRECT]
Indicates how the mesh-size is to be evaluated:
DIRECT The mesh-size is input in the data lines.
ATTACHED The lengths of the lines/edges which meet at a point, together
with input minimum, maximum values are used to determine the
mesh-size at that point.
FUNCTION A pre-defined size-function is used to calculate the mesh size at a
point, dependent on its location.
INPUT [POINT]
Indicates how the set of points is defined:
MODEL All geometry points.
POINT The geometry points will be explicitly identified by label number.
LINE The end-points of a set of geometry lines.
SURFACE The vertices of a set of geometry surfaces.
VOLUME The vertices of a set of geometry volumes.
EDGE The end-points of a set of solid geometry edges.
FACE The vertices of a set of solid geometry faces.
BODY The vertices of a set of solid geometry bodies.
SIZE-FUNCTION [1]
Label number of a size-function, input when OPTION = FUNCTION. See command
SIZE-FUNCTION.
POINT-SIZE
MAXSIZE [0.0]
The maximum mesh-size for the input points. This is used in two cases:
OPTION = DIRECT, INPUT = MODEL The mesh-size at every geometry point
in the model will be set to MAXSIZE.
OPTION = ATTACHED The mesh-size computed from the
attached lines/edges will be subject to a
maximum value of MAXSIZE.
MINSIZE [0.0]
The minimum mesh-size for the input points, used to provide a lower bound on the computed
mesh-size when OPTION = ATTACHED.
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used when INPUT = EDGE or FACE.
name
i
Entity label number.
size
i
Mesh-size, (element edge length) for entity name
i
. (Used when OPTION = DIRECT).
Note: If there is any ambiguity in the input, e.g. INPUT = LINE, OPTION = DIRECT
with two different mesh-sizes assigned to two lines which meet at a point, the
mesh size at the point is taken from the entity (line) with the higher label number.
POINT-SIZE
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS NAME XMIN YMIN ZMIN XMAX
YMAX ZMAX SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3
SIZE4 SIZE5 SIZE6 SIZE7 SIZE8
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS defines a mesh-size function in terms of a bounding box with
faces parallel to the global coordinate planes and the mesh-sizes at the vertices of the box.
The mesh-size at any other point is interpolated from this bounding box.
A size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via POINT-SIZE, and may also be used
directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control the gener-
ated element sizes.
In 8.3 and earlier versions, the size of a point outside the bounding box is given by the size of
the points closest location on the bounding box (that size is interpolated from the sizes at the
8 corners).
In version 8.4, inside the bounding box, the size is interpolated from the sizes at the 8 corners
(same as version 8.3 and earlier). Outside the bounding box, the size follows a geometric
progression (see SIZE-FUNCTION POINT for geometric progression definition) with a fixed
factor of 1.4.
NAME [(current highest size-function label number) + 1]
Label number of the size-function to be defined.
XMIN, YMIN, ZMIN [current minimum coordinates of model]
Minimum coordinates of the bounding box.
XMAX, YMAX, ZMAX [current maximum coordinates of model]
Maximum coordinates of the bounding box.
SIZE1
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMAX,ZMAX).
SIZE2
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMAX,ZMAX).
SIZE3
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMIN,ZMAX).
SIZE4
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMIN,ZMAX).
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS
SIZE5
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMAX,ZMIN).
SIZE6
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMAX,ZMIN).
SIZE7
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMIN,YMIN,ZMIN).
SIZE8
Mesh-size (element edge length) at (XMAX,YMIN,ZMIN).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
DELETE SIZE-FUNCTION FIRST LAST
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX NAME X1 Y1 Z1 X2 Y2 Z2 X3 Y3 Z3 X4 Y4
Z4 X5 Y5 Z5 X6 Y6 Z6 X7 Y7 Z7 X8 Y8 Z8
SIZE1 SIZE2 SIZE3 SIZE4 SIZE5 SIZE6 SIZE7
SIZE8
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX defines a mesh-size function in terms of a bounding hexahedral
volume, specified by its vertex coordinates, and the mesh size at those vertices. The mesh-
size at any other point is interpolated from this bounding box.
A size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via POINT-SIZE, and may also be used
directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control the gener-
ated element sizes.
In 8.3 and earlier versions, the size of a point outside the bounding hexahedral volume is
given by the size of the points closest location on the bounding hexahedral volume (that size
is interpolated from the sizes at the 8 corners).
In version 8.4, inside the bounding hexahedral volume, the size is interpolated from the sizes
at the 8 corners (same as version 8.3 and earlier). Outside the bounding hexahedral volume,
the size follows a geometric progression (see SIZE-FUNCTION POINT for geometric progres-
sion definition) with a fixed factor of 1.4.
NAME [(current highest size-function label number) + 1]
Label number of the size-function to be defined.
X1, Y1, Z1
Global Cartesian coordinates of vertex 1 of the bounding hexahedral volume.
. . .
X8, Y8, Z8
Global Cartesian coordinates of vertex 8 of the bounding hexahedral volume.
SIZE1
Mesh-size (element edge length) at vertex 1.
SIZE2
SIZE3
SIZE4
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX
SIZE5
SIZE6
SIZE7
SIZE8
Auxiliary commands
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT NAME MODE POINT X Y Z SIZE DISTANCE
SCALE TYPE A1 A2 A3 PROGRESS
Defines a mesh-size function of source type where the element size is dependent on the
distance from a given location.
The size-function may be used to set point mesh-sizes, via command POINT-SIZE, and also
may be used directly by the free-form mesh generation commands GFACE, GBODY to control
element sizes during the meshing process.
NAME [(current highest size-function label) + 1]
The identifying label number of the size-function.
MODE
Indicates how the source location is defined:
POINT The source location is given by a geometry point.
POSITION The source location is given by a position vector (X,Y,Z).
POINT
X [0.0]
Y [0.0]
Z [0.0]
Global Cartesian system components of the position vector giving the source location.
SIZE
Constant (minimum) element size. The size function will yield this value within the distance
given by parameter DISTANCE from the specified location. Further away, the element size
gradually increases as determined by this command. {> 0.0}
DISTANCE
Distance from location for which the size function is constant, giving element size SIZE.
{> SIZE}
SCALE [1.0]
Scaling factor for the distance from the source location.
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT
TYPE [LINEAR]
Indicates the type of growth function for the element size away from the source location. Let
d=distance from source location, R = MAX[ 0.0, ((d-DISTANCE)/SCALE)], ,= element size, then
the following function types are available:
A1 [0.0]
A2 [0.0]
A3 [0.0]
Function coefficients. {! 0.0 for TYPE = LINEAR, QUADRATIC, CUBIC}
PROGRESS [NONE]
This option controls the progression of the meshing from the defined point. {NONE/
ARITHMETIC/GEOMETRIC}
NONE TYPE, A1, A2, A3 are used according to the existing description (8.3 and
earlier versions).
ARITHMETIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows an arithmetic progression, in other words,
past the sphere of radius DISTANCE, sizes increase (as the distance to
the sphere increases) by a constant value given by A1. Start with
size=SIZE, then next size is the previous size+A1.
GEOMETRIC Only A1 is used. Sizing follows a geometric progression, in other words,
past the sphere of radius DISTANCE, sizes increase (as the distance to
the sphere increases) by a constant factor given by A1. Start with
size=SIZE, then next size is the previous size*A1.
Auxiliary commands
LINEAR
QUADRATIC
CUBIC
POWER
EXPONENTIAL
,
,
,
,
,
# * - * . /
# * - * - *
. /
# * - * - * - *
. /
# * -
. /
# *
. /
* & '
SIZE A R
SIZE A R A R
SIZE A R A R A R
SIZE R
SIZE e
A
A R
10 1
10 1 2
10 1 2 3
10
2
2 3
1
1
.
.
.
.
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS NAME MODE SYSTEM AXIS LINE P1 P2 X0
Y0 Z0 XA YA ZA SIZE DISTANCE SCALE
TYPE A1 A2 A3 PROGRESS
distance from a given axis (an unbounded straight line).
MODE
Selects the method of defining the axis. This controls which parameters actually define the
axis - other parameters are ignored.
AXIS - The axis is taken as a coordinate axis of a given coordinate system.
LINE - The axis is taken as the straight line passing through the end
points of a given geometry line (which is not necessarily straight,
but must be open - i.e. have non-coincident end points).
POINTS - The axis is taken as the straight line between two given (non-
coincident) geometry points.
VECTORS - The axis is defined by a position and a direction vector.
to define the axis, via parameter AXIS, when MODE=AXIS.
AXIS [XL]
Selects which of the basic axes (XL,YL,ZL) of the local coordinate system, given by param-
eter SYSTEM, is used to define the axis. {XL/YL/ZL}
LINE
Label number of a geometry line defining the axis.
P1, P2
Label numbers of geometry points used to define the axis.
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the position vector defining the axis when MODE=VECTORS.
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS
XA [1.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components (with respect to the global coordinate system) of the axis direction when
MODE=VECTORS.
SIZE
given by parameter DISTANCE from the specified axis. Further away, the element size
gradually increases as determined by this command. {> 0.0}
DISTANCE
Distance from the axis for which the size function is constant, giving element size SIZE.
{> SIZE}
SCALE [1.0]
Scaling factor for the distance from the source axis.
TYPE [LINEAR]
Indicates the type of growth function for the element size away from the source axis. Let
d=distance from axis, R = MAX[ 0.0, ((d-DISTANCE)/SCALE)], , = element size, then the
following function types are available:
A1 [0.0]
A2 [0.0]
A3 [0.0]
LINEAR
QUADRATIC
CUBIC
POWER
EXPONENTIAL
,
,
,
,
,
# * - * . /
# * - * - *
. /
# * - * - * - *
. /
# * -
. /
# *
. /
* & '
SIZE A R
SIZE A R A R
SIZE A R A R A R
SIZE R
SIZE e
A
A R
10 1
10 1 2
10 1 2 3
10
2
2 3
1
1
.
.
.
.
PROGRESS [NONE]
earlier versions).
past the cylinder of radius DISTANCE, sizes increase (as the distance to
the cylinder increases) by a constant value given by A1. Start with
size=SIZE, then next size is the previous size+A1.
past the cylinder of radius DISTANCE (where size is given by SIZE),
sizes increase (as the distance to the cylinder increases) by a constant
factor given by A1. Start with size=SIZE, then next size is the previous
size*A1.
Auxiliary commands
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE NAME MODE X Y Z NX NY NZ P1 P2
P3 SYSTEM COORDINATE SIZE
DISTANCE SCALE TYPE A1 A2 A3 PROGRESS
distance from a given plane.
MODE
This controls the origin and direction of the size-function source plane as follows:
POSITION-NORMAL The origin is given by a position vector (X,Y,Z), and the
plane normal by a direction vector (NX,NY,NZ).
POINT-NORMAL The origin is given by a geometry point P1, and the plane
normal by a direction vector (NX,NY,NZ).
THREE-POINT The origin is given by a geometry point P1, and the plane
normal is determined from two other points, P2, P3, lying
in the plane. The points cannot be collinear.
XPLANE The size-function source plane passes through the
YPLANE specified coordinate value (COORDINATE) for a given
ZPLANE coordinate system (SYSTEM).
X [0.0]
Y [0.0]
Z [0.0]
The position vector of a point lying in the source plane. Used when MODE=POSITION-
NORMAL.
NX [1.0]
NY [0.0]
NZ [0.0]
The direction vector of the normal to the source plane. Used when MODE=POSITION-
NORMAL or POINT-NORMAL.
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE
P1
P2
P3
Label numbers of three non-collinear geometry points lying in the source plane. P1 is used
when MODE=POINT-NORMAL or THREE-POINT, and P2, P3 are only used when
MODE=THREE-POINT.
Label number of a coordinate system. The source plane passes through the base Cartesian
coordinate value as determined by parameters MODE and COORDINATE. Used when
MODE=XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.
COORDINATE [0.0]
The position of the size-function sourc plane along the specified coordinate direction of
coordinate system SYSTEM. Used when MODE=XPLANE, YPLANE, or ZPLANE.
SIZE
given by parameter DISTANCE from the specified plane. Further away, the element size
gradually increases as determined by this function. {> 0.0}
DISTANCE
Distance from the plane for which the size function is constant, giving element size SIZE.
{> SIZE}
SCALE [1.0]
Scaling factor for the distance from the source plane.
TYPE [LINEAR]
Indicates the type of growth function for the element size away from the source plane. Let
d=distance from plane, R = MAX[ 0.0, ((d-DISTANCE)/SCALE)], , = element size, then the
following function types are available:
LINEAR
QUADRATIC
CUBIC
POWER
EXPONENTIAL
,
,
,
,
,
# * - * . /
# * - * - *
. /
# * - * - * - *
. /
# * -
. /
# *
. /
* & '
SIZE A R
SIZE A R A R
SIZE A R A R A R
SIZE R
SIZE e
A
A R
10 1
10 1 2
10 1 2 3
10
2
2 3
1
1
.
.
.
.
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE
A1 [0.0]
A2 [0.0]
A3 [0.0]
PROGRESS [NONE]
earlier versions).
sizes increase (as the DISTANCE to the plane increases) by a constant
value given by A1. Start with size=SIZE, then next size is the previous
size+1.0*A1, etc.
sizes increase (as the DISTANCE to the plane increases) by a constant
value given by A1. Start with size=SIZE, then next size is the previous
size*A1, etc.
Auxiliary commands
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE
SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED NAME
szfunc
i
Defines a mesh-size function as a combination of other size-functions. The element size at
any given location is taken as the minimum of all the size-functions which contribute to this
combination.
szfunc
i
Label number of an existing size-function. This function cannot be the same as NAME, or of
type COMBINED - i.e. recursive combinations are not allowed.
Auxiliary commands
SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED
SIZE-LOCATIONS BODY FACE
loc
i
x
i
y
i
z
i
size
i
Specifies the mesh-size (element edge length) at coordinate locations (i.e. independent of
any geometry point positions). These size-locations may be utilized by the free-meshing
commands GFACE, GBODY to locally set element sizes within the bounds of a solid geometry
face or body.
The points along with the sizes are inserted into a size octree which will be used for mesh
density purposes in GFACE and GBODY.
Label number of a solid geometry body to which the size-locations are to be associated.
FACE [0]
Label number of a the solid geometry face (of BODY) to which the size-locations are to be
associated. If FACE = 0, the size-locations are to be associated with the solid geometry body
interior and not with any particular one of its faces. Conversely, if FACE > 0, then the size-
locations are only associated with that face alone, and not with the interior of the body or
any other of its faces.
loc
i
Location identifier.
x
i
, y
i
, z
i
Global Cartesian coordinates of the size-location loc
i
.
size
i
Mesh-size, element edge length at (x
i
, y
i
, z
i
).
Auxiliary commands
LIST SIZE-LOCATIONS BODY FACE
DELETE SIZE-LOCATIONS BODY FACE
SIZE-LOCATIONS
NLTABLE NAME BODY
gtype
i
ent1
i
ent2
i
nlayer
i
Creates a table which specifies the minimum number of layers across thin setions in a body or
on a face. Each thin section is specified by 2 opposing faces or edges.
Tables can be used by commands GBODY and GFACE.
NAME
Label number of a table - NLTABLE.
BODY
Geometry body label.
gtype
i
Specifies the entity type for entries ent1
i
and ent2
i
.
EDGE ent1
i
and ent2
i
are edges on face.
FACE ent1
i
and ent2
i
are faces.
ent1
i
First face or edge label.
ent2
i
Second face or edge label.
nlayer
i
Minimum number of elements across the 2 faces or edges.
Note: This command allows the user to control where the thin sections should be
considered at the face/face level and also at the edge/edge level for a given face.
NLTABLE
GPOINT NAME NODE NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE
Creates a node at a geometry point.
NAME
The label number of a geometry point at which a node is to be created.
NODE [(highest node label number) + 1]
The label number of node to be created.
NCOINCIDE [NO]
ALL The global coordinates of the generated node is compared against those of
existing nodes of the substructure. If there is coincidence to within
NCTOLERANCE * (max. difference in global coordinates between all
current nodes of the substructure)
then no new node is created at that location.
Label number of the substructure in which the node is created.
GPOINT
GLINE NAME NODES AUXPOINT NCOINCIDE NCENDS
NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NCDOMAIN
MIDNODES
line
i
Generates elements along a set of geometry lines. Elements can be created within element
groups of type: TRUSS, BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE, GENERAL, or FLUID2 (interface).
The number of elements, and the distribution of their lengths, is governed by the subdivision
data assigned to the geometry lines, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE LINE.
Note that either a single line or multiple lines may be specified for generation of elements,
using the same control parameters.
AUXPOINT
NODES = 2
NODES = 3
NODES = 4
NAME
The label number of a geometry line along which elements are to be generated.
NODES [2]
The number of nodes per element.
2, 3, 4 for TRUSS, ISOBEAM and GENERAL elements.
2 for BEAM elements.
2, 4 for PIPE elements.
2, 3 for FLUID2 (interface) elements.
GLINE
AUXPOINT
The label number of the auxiliary geometry point used to orient BEAM, ISOBEAM, and PIPE
elements. A node is generated at this point, unless one already exists at that location, which
becomes the auxiliary node for each element generated on the geometry line.
NCOINCIDE [ALL]
Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at a geometric
location when there is already at least one node close to that geometric location.
|XB-XA| " COINCIDENCE * XLEN
|YB-YA| " COINCIDENCE * YLEN
|ZB-ZA| " COINCIDENCE * ZLEN
where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are decided
by the following:
If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-LOCAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,
YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the volume before generation.
If NCTOL-TYPE = RELATIVE-GLOBAL in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, (XLEN,
YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation.
If NCTOL-TYPE = ABSOLUTE in command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC or no bounding box
in the model, (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are taken as (1.0, 1,0, 1.0).
ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against
those of existing nodes of the substructure.
ENDS Coincidence checking is carried out only for the nodes generated at
the end points of the geometry lines. The end point(s) participating
in this checking process may be selected via NCENDS.
LINE Coincidence checking is carried out for all generated nodes, but
comparison is made only against those nodes already generated on
the line under consideration.
SELECTED Coincidence checking is carried out at the end points of the
geometry lines, but comparison is made only against the nodes
generated for the input set of lines for the current command
execution and those already generated for the geometry domain
indicated by NCDOMAIN.
GLINE
NCENDS [12]
Selects which end points of the geometry lines participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCENDS is an integer of up to two distinct digits, either 1 or 2, indicating which end points
of the geometry line are subject to nodal coincidence checking. NCENDS is only used when
NCOINCIDE = ENDS.
Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are generated.
The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated. The group
type must be one of those listed above.
NCDOMAIN [0]
Label number of a geometry domain for which nodal coincidence is checked. See DOMAIN.
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is to
be used.
MIDNODES [CURVED]
Indicates whether the mid-side nodes for higher order elements are to be placed on the
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes, or on the underlying curved geometry.
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
line
i
Note: Elements are generated in order, in the direction from the starting point P1 to the
ending point P2 of the geometry line.
GLINE
GSURFACE NAME NODES PATTERN NCOINCIDE NCEDGE
NCVERTEX NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
PREFSHAPE MESHING SMOOTHING DEGENERATE
CRACK-TYPE TIP-POINT TIP-OPTION RADIUS
Q-POINT CPOINT1 CPOINT2 COLLAPSED NCDOMAIN
MIDNODES METHOD FLIP
surface
i
Generates elements on a set of geometry surfaces. Elements can be created within element
groups of type: TWODSOLID, PLATE, SHELL, GENERAL, FLUID2, or FLUID3 (interface).
The distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data assigned
to the edges of the geometry surfaces, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE SURFACE.
Note that either a single surface or multiple surfaces may be specified for generation of ele-
ments, with the same control parameters.
Regular subdivision
Irregular subdivision
Triangular surface
DEGENERATE = YES DEGENERATE = NO
Quadrilateral surface
GSURFACE
NAME
The label number of a geometry surface on which elements are to be generated.
NODES [8 (3 for plate elements)]
The number of nodes per element. {3/4/6/7/8/9/16}
PATTERN [AUTOMATIC]
Selects the type of pattern used to further subdivide quadrilateral surface cell subdivisions.
Allowable values for PATTERN are integer numbers 0 through 11, or the string value
AUTOMATIC. PATTERN=1 to 9 is allowed for triangular elements (NODES=3, 6, 7) and
PATTERN=10, 11 is allowed only for NODES=4. See Figure.
PATTERN OPTIONS:
1
4
7
2
5
8
3
6
9
10 11
GSURFACE
NCOINCIDE [ALL]
|XB - XA| " NCTOLERANCE*XLEN
|YB - YA| " NCTOLERANCE*YLEN
|ZB - ZA| " NCTOLERANCE*ZLEN
where where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are
decided by the following:
YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation.
If there are no nodes close to that geometric location, a new node is placed at that geometric
location.
Otherwise, parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that geometric
location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:
NCOINCIDE Which nodes to Which nodes to
consider for coincidence check against
ALL all all
BOUNDARIES those on all vertices all
and edges of the face
SELECTED those on all vertices those within the
and edges of the face geometry domain
specified by parameter
NCDOMAIN
GSURFACE
GROUP those on all vertices those that are in
and edges of the face the same element
or faces meshed by the group
current command
NO none none
NCEDGE [1234]
Selects which edges of the geometry surfaces participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCEDGE is an integer of up to four distinct digits in the range 1 through 4. NCEDGE is only
used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES.
NCVERTEX [1234]
Selects which vertices of the geometry surfaces participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCVERTEX is an integer of up to four distinct digits in the range 1 through 4. NCVERTEX is
only used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES.
The label number of the element group into which the generated elements are generated.
PREFSHAPE [AUTOMATIC]
This specifies the preferred shape of the cells created when the surface subdivision is
irregular.
If MESHING=MAPPED,
AUTOMATIC - The command selects the appropriate cell shape depending on
the surface geometry and element (group) type.
QUADRILATERAL - A quadrilateral cell shape is preferred.
TRIANGULAR - A triangular cell shape is preferred.
If MESHING=FREE-FORM,
AUTOMATIC - QUADRILATERAL if METHOD=ADVFRONT,
TRIANGULAR if METHOD=DELAUNAY.
QUADRILATERAL - A quadrilateral cell shape is preferred.
TRIANGULAR - A triangular cell shape is preferred.
QUAD-DIRECT - Quadrilateral only meshing.
GSURFACE
Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation GSURFACE
CRACK-TYPE = LINE
CRACK-TYPE = POINT
TIP-POINT
CPOINT1 CPOINT2
CPOINT1 CPOINT2
MESHING [MAPPED]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed.
MAPPED Rule-based mapping of surface edge subdivisions.
FREE-FORM Free-form mesh generation based on advancing front or Delaunay
scheme.
SMOOTHING [NO]
Indicates whether or not Laplacian smoothing is employed to improve mesh quality.
{YES/NO}
GSURFACE
TIP-OPTION = SINGULAR
TIP-OPTION = RIGHT-ARC TIP-OPTION = LEFT-ARC
TIP-POINT
TIP-POINT
TIP-OPTION = CIRCULAR-ARC
CPOINT1 CPOINT2
TIP-POINT
CPOINT2
CPOINT1
CPOINT1
CPOINT2
TIP-POINT
R
A
D
I
U
S
midside node
Q-POINT = QUARTER
R
A
D
I
U
S
R
A
D
I
U
S
DEGENERATE [NO]
Indicates whether triangular surfaces (with coincident vertices) are to be treated as degener-
ate quadrilaterals or triangles (with a special consideration for the degenerate edge, see
Figure) for irregular rule-based mapped meshing. {YES/NO}
CRACK-TYPE [NONE]
Selects the type of crack propagation on surfaces, which controls mesh generation. See Figures.
NONE No crack propagation.
LINE Crack propagation along line.
POINT Crack is stationary at a point.
Note: When CRACK-TYPE + NONE, GSURFACE will adjust the mesh generated for a
set of input surfaces (i.e., more than one surface is typically required) for use in
fracture mechanics problems, as shown in the Figures.
TIP-POINT [1]
The label number of the crack tip point.
TIP-OPTION [SINGULAR]
Allows the crack tip region to be represented as a single point or a circular arc.
SINGULAR The tip region is a single point.
RIGHT-ARC The tip region is a 90
arc quadrant to the right of the tip.

LEFT-ARC The tip region is a 90
arc quadrant to the left of the tip.

CIRCULAR-ARC The tip region is semi-circular.
RADIUS [0.0]
The radius of the circular arc generated about the crack tip.
Q-POINT [QUARTER]
Controls the placement of mid-side nodes in elements adjacent to the crack-tip.
MID The nodes are generated without any special placement.
QUARTER Mid-side nodes are generated at the point adjacent
to crack tip.
GSURFACE
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GSURFACE
CPOINT1 [0]
CPOINT2 [0]
Allows for the specification of the points that are to be generated at key positions. This
provides the ability to subsequently refer to these locations and any lines they belong to.
Note that the point label numbers CPOINT1 and CPOINT2 must not have been defined prior
to this command. See Figures.
COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether triangular TWODSOLID, FLUID2 or FLUID-3 (interface) elements are to be
treated as collapsed quadrilateral elements by ADINA. {YES/NO}
NCDOMAIN [0]
be used.
MIDNODES [CURVED]
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used.
There are two available methods:
ADVFRONT - Based upon advancing front methodology.
DELAUNAY - Based upon Delaunay insertion methodology.
FLIP [NO]
Reverses the orientation of shell elements on the surface. This parameter is only used when
the element type is SHELL for ADINA or SHELL CONDUCTION for ADINA-T. {NO/YES}
surface
i
Label numbers of geometry surfaces.
GVOLUME NAME NODES PATTERN NCOINCIDE NCFACE
NCEDGE NCVERTEX NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE
GROUP MESHING PREFSHAPE DEGENERATE
NCDOMAIN MIDNODES METHOD BOUNDARY-METHOD
volume
i
Generates elements on a set of geometry volumes. Elements can be created within element
groups of type THREEDSOLID or FLUID3.
The distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data
assigned to the edges of the geometry volumes, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE VOLUME.
NAME
The label number of a geometry volume on which elements are to be generated.
NODES [20]
The number of nodes per element. {4/8/10/11/20/27}
PATTERN [0]
Selects the pattern used to subdivide hexahedral volume into tetrahedral elements (used
when NODES=4, 10 or 11) - see Figures. PATTERN=0 indicates that one of the patterns 1
through 4 is to be automatically selected so as to match the patterns already used for
adjacent volumes. If no pattern is suitable, for PATTERN=0, then a warning message is given
and no elements are generated - in this case existing pattern usage must be examined care-
fully to avoid pattern mismatches which would result in incompatible meshes. (This param-
eter is only used when MESHING=MAPPED)
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/SELECTED/
BOUNDEXSEL/GROUP/NO}
GVOLUME
V4
V1 V2
V3
V5
V8 V7
V6
PATTERN = 1
PATTERN = 3
V4
V1 V2
V3
V5
V8 V7
V6
V4
V1 V2
V3
V5
V8 V7
V6
PATTERN = 4
V4
V1 V2
V3
V8 V7
V6
PATTERN = 2
V4
V1 V2
V3
V5
V8 V7
V6
PATTERN = 5
V5
GVOLUME
location.
Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that geometric
location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:
ALL all all
BOUNDARIES those on the selected all
vertices, edges and faces of
the volume. Vertices,
edges and faces are selected
by parameters NCVERTEX,
NCEDGE and NCFACE
SELECTED those on all vertices, those within
edges and faces of the the geometry domain
volume or volumes meshed selected by parameter
by the current command NCDOMAIN
BOUNDEXSEL those on all vertices, all
edges and faces of the
volume except surfaces
in the domain specified by
NCDOMAIN
GROUP those on all vertices, those that are in
edges and faces of the the same element
volume or volumes meshed group
by the current command
NO none none
GVOLUME
NCFACE [123456]
Selects which faces of the geometry volumes participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCFACE is an integer of up to six distinct digits in the range 1 through 6. NCFACE is only
used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES. Refer to the follwoing figure for numbering (F1,
F2, etc.)
NCEDGE [123456789ABC]
Selects which edges of the geometry volumes participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCEDGE is an alphanumeric string which can include the digits 1-9 and the characters A, B,
C. NCEDGE is only used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES. Refer to the follwoing figure
for numbering (E1, E2, etc.)
GVOLUME
V1
V2
V3
V4
V1
V2
V3
V4
V2 V1
V5
V7
V3
V6
F1
F4
F3
F2
V4
V8
F6
V1 V2
V3 V4
V5
V6
F
5
F4
F
5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F1
F3
F2
F4
F1
F3
F5
P4
F2
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E10
E11
E12
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
E1
E2
E3
E4 E5
E6
E1
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
E7
E8
NCVERTEX [12345678]
Selects which vertices of the geometry volumes participate in nodal coincidence checking.
NCVERTEX is an integer of up to eight distinct digits in the range 1 through 8. NCVERTEX is
only used when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDARIES. Refer to the follwoing figure for numbering
(V1, V2, etc.)
The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created.
MESHING [MAPPED]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed.
MAPPED Rule-based mapping based on volume edge subdivisions.
FREE-FORM Free-form mesh generation.
When MESHING = MAPPED, and the volume subdivision is regular, the resulting mesh will
consist entirely of hexahedral (brick) cells. If the subvision is irregular, the resulting mesh will
be a mix of hexahedra and prisms, and the parameter PREFSHAPE (following) can be used. If
the subdivision is neither regular nor irregular, an error message will be given.
Example:
In the case of the rectangular volume shown in the figure accompanying the command
NCVERTEX (see preceding page), if we define Ni as the number of subdivisions on edge Ei
(i = 1, 2, ...12), and set
N2 = N4 = N12 = N10; N1 = N3 = N11 = N9; and N5 = N6 = N7 = N8,
we have the volume set up with regular subdivisions, and the resulting mesh will be all-
hexahedral. If, however, we set
N5 = N6 = N7 = N8; N1 = N9; N2 = N10; N3 = N11; and N4 = N12,
the volume is set up with irregular subdivisions.
Specifies the preferred shape of the cells created when the volume subdivision is irregular,
GVOLUME
whereby the command employs a rule-based scheme for mapped meshing.
AUTOMATIC The appropriate cell shape is determined by the program,
depending on the volume geometry and element group type.
HEXAHEDRAL A brick cell shape is preferred.
PRISMATIC A prism cell shape is preferred.
DEGENERATE [YES]
Indicates whether or not volumes of shape PRISM, TETRA or PYRAMID are to be treated as
degenerate hexahedra with special consideration of the degenerate edges. {YES/NO}
NCDOMAIN [0]
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED or NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL. NCDOMAIN
= 0 indicates that no domain is to be used.
MIDNODES [CURVED]
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
METHOD [DELAUNAY]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used. There are two available meth-
ods: advancing front and Delaunay. This parameter is used only when MESHING=FREE-
FORM. {ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}
BOUNDARY-METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used for triangular elements on
volumes boundary. There are two available methods: advancing front and Delaunay. This
parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM. {ADVFRONT / DELAUNAY}
volume
i
GEDGE NAME NODES AUXPOINT NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE
SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP BODY NCDOMAIN
MIDNODES
edge
i
Generates elements along a set of solid geometry edges. Elements can be created within
element groups of types TRUSS, BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE, GENERAL or FLUID2- interface.
The number of elements, and the distribution of their lengths, is governed by the subdivision
data assigned to the geometry edges, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE EDGE.
Note that either a single edge or multiple edges may be specified for generation of elements.
NAME
The label number of a geometry edge along which elements are to be generated.
NODES [2]
The number of nodes per element.
2, 3, 4 for TRUSS, ISOBEAM and GENERAL elements.
2 for BEAM elements.
2, 4 for PIPE elements.
2, 3 for FLUID2 (interface) elements.
GEDGE
3-node isobeam elements
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GEDGE
AUXPOINT
The label number of the auxiliary geometry point used to orient BEAM, ISOBEAM, and PIPE
elements. A node is generated at this point, unless one already exists at that location, which
becomes the auxiliary node for each element generated on the geometry edge.
NCOINCIDE [ENDS]
|XB-XA| " COINCIDENCE * XLEN
|YB-YA| " COINCIDENCE * YLEN
|ZB-ZA| " COINCIDENCE * ZLEN
where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN, YLEN, ZLEN) are decided
by the following:
YLEN, ZLEN) are the lengths of the bounding box for the volume before generation.
ALL The global coordinates of all generated nodes are compared against
those of existing nodes of the substructure.
ENDS Coincidence checking is carried out only for the nodes generated
at the end points of the geometry edges.
SELECTED Coincidence checking is carried out at the end points of the
geometry edges, but comparison is made only against those nodes
generated for the input set of edges for the current command
execution and those already generated for the geometry domain
indicated by NCDOMAIN.
SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure]
The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated. The group
type must be one of those listed above.
The solid geometry part (body) label number.
NCDOMAIN [0]
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is
to be used.
MIDNODES [CURVED]
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
edge
i
Label number of a geometry edge.
GEDGE
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GFACE
GFACE NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE
GROUP PREFSHAPE BODY COLLAPSED SIZE-FUNCTION
NCDOMAIN MIDNODES METHOD NLAYER NLTABLE
GEO-ERROR SAMPLING MIN-SIZE AUTO-GRADING SIMULATE
face
i
Generates elements on a set of solid geometry faces. Elements can be created within element
groups of type TWODSOLID, PLATE, SHELL, FLUID2, FLUID3-interface or GENERAL.
There are two methods for quadrilateral mesh generation (controlled by PREFSHAPE param-
eter). If PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT,a proprietary algorithm is used to generate an all-
quad mesh. This methodology requires an even number of subdivisions for each bounding
edge (enforced automatically). If PREFSHAPE=QUADRILATERAL, an advancing front
method is used which may leave some triangles in the mesh.
Two triangular free-form meshing methods (controlled by METHOD parameter) are available:
advancing front and Delaunay.
The distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data
assigned to the edges of geometry faces, e.g. via SUBDIVIDE FACE.
NAME
The label number of a solid geometry face on which elements are to be generated.
NODES [8 (3 for PLATE elements)]
The number of nodes per element. {3/4/6/7/8/9/16}
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/EXSELECTED/NO/SELECTED}
location.
Otherwise, parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that geometric
location, or whether a close node is used insted, as shown
in the following table:
ALL all all
BOUNDARIES those on all vertices all
and edges of the face
geometry body except
edges in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN
GFACE
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GFACE
GROUP those on all vertices those that are in
and edges of the face the same element
or faces meshed by the group
current command
EXSELECTED those on all vertices, all, except those coming
edges and faces of the from the entities in the
geometry body or bodies in the DOMAIN provided.
meshed by the current Similar in concept to
command BOUNDEXSEL (the DOMAIN
provided contains entities
bounding the body to be
meshed)
NO none none
SELECTED nodes on boundary nodes coming from the entities
in domain NCDDOMAIN
The label number of the element group into which the elements are generated.
PREFSHAPE [TRIANGULAR]
Specifies the shape or preferred shape of the elements generated. {QUADRILATERAL/
TRIANGULAR/QUAD-DIRECT}
QUADRILATERAL Quadrilateral elements are preferred.
TRIANGULAR Triangular elements are generated.
QUAD-DIRECT Quadrilateral elements are generated.
BODY [currently active solid body]
The solid geometry body label number.
COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether triangular TWODSOLID, FLUID2 or FLUID3-interface elements are to be
treated as collapsed quadrilateral elements by ADINA. {YES/NO}
SIZE-FUNCTION [0]
Label number of a mesh-size function (see command SIZE-FUNCTION) which may be used to
control the element sizes away from the boundary edges of the face. SIZE-FUNCTION = 0
implies a size function is not to be used. Was not used in 8.3 and earlier (or if used with
advancing front, was not giving the expected results). It is now functional if METHOD =
DELAUNAY and BOUNDARY = DELAUNAY. (ADINA)
NCDOMAIN [0]
be used.
MIDNODES [CURVED]
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used. There are two available
methods: advancing front and Delaunay. {ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}
NLAYER [1]
Specifies a minimum number of elements across. By default, this option is off. To be turned
on, NLAYER must be greater than 1.
If NLAYER > 1 the distribution of elements, including their size, is also governed by the
presence of thin sections on the face.
NLAYER > 1 and NLTABLE = 0 NLAYER is taken as the minimum number of
elements across anywhere in the body.
NLAYER > 1 and NLTABLE > 0 the minimum number of elements across is taken
from the table NLTABLE (see command
NLTABLE).
GFACE
d/L = geometrical discretization error
Mesh
d
L
Geometry
When NLAYER = 2, the program will make sure that there are NO interior mesh edges
(segments) with both end vertices located on the boundary.
Notes:
1) Only the first face (if more than one) will be affected by NLTABLE.
2) This option works best if a given bounding edge is NOT close to more than one other
bounding edges within a small area, e.g., case of a small sphere close to the corner of a
square.
3) The number of requested thin layers will be present in the thin sections but there is no
guarantee near side boundaries.
NLTABLE [0]
Table which indicates the thin sections of face.
GEO-ERROR [0.0]
Relative geometric discretization error (see picture). If GEO-ERROR > 0.0 the distribution of
elements, including their size, is also governed by the curvature of the geometry body's
bounding edges and faces. (Only applicable if METHOD=DELAUNAY.)
SAMPLING
Number of sampling points on edge Meaningful only if GEO-ERROR option turned on.
For edges: number of sampling points = SAMPLING
For faces: number of sampling points = SAMPLINGxSAMPLING
MIN-SIZE
Minimum size allowed. Meaningful only if GEO-ERROR option turned on. It is important to
give a meaningful value to MIN-SIZE to avoid overrefinement and, as a consequence, high
CPU times for this command. (Only applicable if METHOD=DELAUNAY.)
AUTO-GRADING [NO]
Mesh densities required to satisfy smooth gradation. {NO/YES}
If AUTO-GRADING=YES the distribution of elements, including their size, is also governed
by the requirement for smoothly graded mesh densities.
SIMULATE [NO]
This parameter can be used (SIMULATE=YES) to see the effect on the body edge subdivi-
sions of the GFACE command without actually meshing. It is relevant for the following cases:
- MESHING= FREE-FORM, and GEO-ERROR > 0.0 or AUTO-GRADING = YES
- MESHING=FREE-FORM and PREFSHAPE=QUAD-DIRECT (will modify body edge
subdivisions so that the body face has an even number of subdivisions; necessary condition
for quadrilateral meshing on the body face)
GFACE
face
i
GFACE
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY
GBODY NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE
GROUP PREFSHAPE SIZE-FUNCTION DELETE-SLIVER
ANGLE-MIN MIDNODES METHOD PATTERN MESHING
DEGENERATE BOUNDARY-METHOD DEG-EDGE GEO-ERROR
SAMPLING MIN-SIZE NLAYER NLTABLE AUTO-GRADING
NCDOMAIN PYRAMIDS DANGMAXB DANGMAXC
DANGMAXD HEXALAYER SIMULATE EVEN MIDFACENODES
body
i
deg-edge
i
Command GBODY creates elements for a solid geometry body. Elements can be created within
element groups of type THREEDSOLID or FLUID3.
There are two tetrahedral free-form meshing METHODs available: advancing front and
Delaunay. There are two triangular free-form meshing BOUNDARY-METHODs available:
advancing front and Delaunay.
Mapped meshing is available only when the body type is a Parasolid
body and the geometry

of the body is either tetrahedron, hexahedron, prism or pyramid.
NAME
The label number of a solid geometry body for which elements are to be generated.
NODES [4]
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/EXSELECTED/NO/SELECTED}
location. Otherwise parameter NCOINCIDE governs whether a new node is placed at that
geometric location, or whether a close node is used instead, as shown in the following table:
ALL all all
BOUNDARIES those on all vertices, all
geometry body
geometry body except faces
in the domain specified by
NCDOMAIN
GBODY
Chap. 8 Finite element representation GBODY
geometry body or bodies group
meshed by the current
command
EXSELECTED those on all vertices, all, except those coming
edges and faces of the from the entities in the
geometry body or bodies in the DOMAIN provided.
meshed by the current Similar in concept to
command BOUNDEXSEL (the DOMAIN
provided contains entities
bounding the body to be
meshed)
NO none none
SELECTED nodes on boundary nodes coming from the entities
in domain NCDDOMAIN
Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are created.
Specifies the preferred shape of the cells created when the body subdivision is irregular,
whereby the command employs a rule-based scheme for mapped meshing.
AUTOMATIC The appropriate cell shape is determined by the program,
depending on the body geometry and element group type.
HEXAHEDRAL A brick cell shape is preferred.
PRISMATIC A prism cell shape is preferred.
This parameter is used only when MESHING=MAPPED.
SIZE-FUNCTION [0]
Selects an auxiliary mesh-size function which controls the element sizes within the body. See
command SIZE-FUNCTION. SIZE-FUNCTION = 0 indicates that a size-function is not to be
used. Was not used in 8.3 and earlier (or if used with advancing front, was not giving the
expected results). It is now functional if METHOD = DELAUNAY and BOUNDARY =
DELAUNAY. (ADINA)
DELETE-SLIVER [NO]
Controls whether triangular sliver element faces are to be removed from the body boundary
before generating volume elements. Such slivers can arise from small geometry features such
as fillets or rounds with small curvature, or by inappropriate edge subdivision data. The
presence of such slivers can result in poor quality elements and a degradation of the meshing
process. Enabling the prior removal of such slivers may result in a mesh which smoothest
over small geometric features - if these features are important then the local subdivision data
should be refined about them. {YES/NO}
Note: This parameter is ignored if METHOD=DELAUNAY.
ANGLE-MIN [5.0]
Provides an angle-tolerance for detecting boundary slivers. A triangular element face is
considered a sliver if one of its internal angles is less than ANGLE-MIN (in degrees). {0.0
" ANGLE-MIN " 10.0} (The upper bound precludes unrealistic sliver definitions).
MIDNODES [CURVED]
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
METHOD [DELAUNAY]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used. There are two available
methods: advancing front and Delaunay. This parameter is only used when
MESHING=FREE-FORM. {ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}
PATTERN [0]
Selects the pattern used to subdivide the hexahedral body cells into tetrahedral elements
(used when NODES=4, 10 or 11) - see figures - GVOLUME command. PATTERN=0 indi-
cates that one of the patterns 1 through 5 is to be automatically selected so as to match the
patterns already used for adjacent volumes. If no pattern is suitable, for PATTERN=0, then a
warning message is given and no elements are generated - in this case existing pattern usage
must be examined carefully to avoid pattern mismatches which would result in incompatible
meshes. This parameter is only used when MESHING=MAPPED.
GBODY
bodys boundary. There are two available methods: advancing front and Delaunay.
{ADVFRONT/DELAUNAY}
ADVFRONT distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by the
subdivision data assigned to the geometry bodies, e.g. via
command SUBDIVIDE BODY, and by any auxiliary size-function.
GBODY
MESHING [FREE-FORM]
Selects the type of mesh generation to be employed. {MAPPED/FREE-FORM}
MAPPED A rule based mapping of body edge subdivisions. Mapped
meshing is available only when the body is a Parasolid body and
the topology of the body is similar to a hexahedron, prism,
pyramid, or tetrahedron.
FREE-FORM when NODES=4,10,11 free-form mesh generation based on
advancing front or Delaunay scheme creates tetrahedral elements.
when NODES=8,27 free-form mesh generation based on advanc-
ing front creates a mix of hexahedral and tetrahedral elements, with
hexahedral elements occupying most of the volume space.
DEGENERATE [NO]
Indicates how bodies with triangular faces are to be handled:
NO The triangular face is not given any special consideration for its
degenerate edge.
YES The volume is treated as a degenerate hexahedral shape.
Note: This parameter is only used when MESHING=MAPPED.
BOUNDARY-METHOD [ADVFRONT]
Indicates the type of free-form meshing algorithm to be used for triangular elements on
d/L = geometrical discretization error
Mesh
d
L
Geometry
Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation GBODY
DELAUNAY the distribution of elements, including their size, is governed by
the subdivision data assigned to the geometry bodies, e.g. via
command SUBDIVIDE BODY and by the rules of smooth grada-
tion. This means subdivisions on body edges may be overwritten
to allow for smooth gradation of element sizes.
Note: This parameter is only used when MESHING=FREE-FORM.
DEG-EDGE [0]
The degenerate edge of the body. This parameter is only used if the body is a prism body,
MESHING=MAPPED, and DEGENERATE = YES.
GEO-ERROR [0.0]
Relative geometric discretization error (see picture). If GEO-ERROR > 0.0 the distribution of
elements, including their size, is also governed by the curvature of the geometry body's
bounding edges and faces. (Only applicable if BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY.)
SAMPLING
Number of sampling points on edge Meaningful only if GEO-ERROR option turned on.
For edges: number of sampling points = SAMPLING
For faces: number of sampling points = SAMPLINGxSAMPLING
MIN-SIZE
Minimum size allowed. Meaningful only if GEO-ERROR option turned on. It is important to
give a meaningful value to MIN-SIZE to avoid overrefinement and, as a consequence, high
CPU times for this command. (Only applicable if BOUNDARY-METHOD=DELAUNAY.)
NLAYER [1]
When NODES = 4,10,11 and MESHING = FREE-FORM, specifies a minimum number of
elements across. By default, this option is off. To be turned on, NLAYER must be greater than
1. If BOUNDARY-METHOD = DELAUNAY, this option also applies to any bounding face (of
the body). If no NLTABLE is specified, NLAYER is used as the minimum number of elements
across anywhere in body. When NLAYER = 2, the program will make sure that there are NO
interior mesh edges (segments) with both end vertices located on the boundary.
NLTABLE [0]
Table which indicates the thin sections of body and/or body faces.
AUTO-GRADING [NO]
Mesh densities required to satisfy smooth gradation. {NO/YES}
If AUTO-GRADING=YES the distribution of elements, including their size, is also governed
by the requirement for smoothly graded mesh densities.
NCDOMAIN [0]
Used only when NCOINCIDE=SELECTED or NCOINCIDE=BOUNDEXSEL.
NCDOMAIN=0 indicates that no domain is to be used.
PYRAMIDS [NO]
When NODES = 8,20,27 and MESHING = FREE-FORM, indicates whether pyramid
elements should be used to transition from hexahedra to tetrahedra.
If PYRAMIDS = ONLY, no hexahedra are created and pyramids are created for each boundary
quadrilateral cell. In order to guarantee (if possible) quadrilateral surface meshes on all faces
of a body (as opposed to possible triangles among the quads), it is necessary to set
PYRAMIDS=ONLY or YES. Note that when PYRAMIDS=YES, pyramids may be created not
only for boundary quad facets but also for interior quad facets (if those facets connect
directly to tetrahedra), meaning that a possibly large number of pyramids may be created. If
the program fails to create all the pyramids that are needed, an error message will be displayed
and the command will be cancelled. In this case, it is recommended to decrease the maximum
dihedral angle allowed for quad facets (see DANGMAXC parameter), use PYRAMIDS=ONLY
or change the mesh density. {NO/YES/ONLY}
DANGMAXB [80]
Max angular deviation (from 90 degrees) for the angle at corners of hex side faces.
DANGMAXC [60/20]
Max angular deviation (from 180 degrees) for the dihedral angle at diagonals of hex side faces
Default = 60 degrees (20 degrees if PYRAMIDS = YES).
DANGMAXD [80]
Max angular deviation (from 90 degrees) for the dihedral angle at hex edges.
HEXALAYER [NO]
When NODES = 8,20,27 and MESHING = FREE-FORM, specifies the number of
hexahedral element layers to be grown from bodys boundary faces (0 or 1).By default, this
number is set to 0. To be turned on, HEXALAYER must be equal to YES.
SIMULATE [NO]
This parameter can be used (SIMULATE=YES) to see the effect on the body edge subdivi-
sions of the GBODY command without actually meshing. It is relevant for the following cases:
- MESHING= FREE-FORM, and GEO-ERROR>0.0 or AUTO-GRADING=YES
GBODY
- MESHING=FREE-FORM and NODES=8,20,27 (brick elements)
EVEN [SUM]
When GBODY is used with NODES=8,20,27, the command pre-processes the subdivisions
to make sure the all-quad mesher will produce all-quad meshes on the body faces. This
parameter controls the number of subdivisions as follows. {SUM/LINK/ALL}
SUM For each body face, the program forces the sum of the subdivisions of the bounding
edges to be even.
LINK The program forces any bounding edge of a linked face (FACELINK) to have an
even number of subdivisions. Note that the program also forces the sum of the
subdivisions of the bounding edges of non-linked faces to be even.
ALL The program forces any edge to have an even number of subdivisions.
MIDFACENODES [TRIA]
Determines where the mid-face node on a quadrilateral facet (of an hexahedral or pyramid
element) should be placed. TRIA places the mid-face nodes mid-way on the diagonal of the
two triangles making up the facet. QUAD places the mid-face node at the centroid of the four
facet vertices. {TRIA/QUAD}
When elements with quad facets connect with tetrahedral elements, TRIA should be se-
lected. Otherwise, QUAD should be selected. This only concerns free form meshing (higher
order mixed meshing) and quadrilateral facets on linked body faces.
body
i
Label numbers of geometry bodies. The data line input allows for more than one body to be
meshed via a single GBODY command call.
deg-edge
i
The degenerate edge of body
i
. This data is only used if the body is a prism body,
MESHING=MAPPED, and DEGENERATE=YES.
GBODY
NAME
Label number of geometry body.
NODES [8]
The number of nodes per element. {8/20/27}
GHEXA NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCDOMAIN NCTOLERANCE GROUP
MIDNODES SIZE MINSIZE PROJECT SMOOTH DANGMAXA
OPTIONA SHIFTX SHIFTY SHIFTZ MAX-REF
Generates brick element (hexahedron) dominant free-form meshes for a given body.
Note that this command
- meshes the boundary as well as the inside of the given body
- does not take into account edge subdivisions (see SIZE parameter)
- does not update edge subdivisions
- should only be used on near-primitive bodies
Any body connected (typically via a face) to a body meshed with GHEXA must be meshed
with GBODY in order to produce compatible meshes (at the interface). However, because
GHEXA does not guarantee that nodes classified on the body's boundary are actually on the
body's boundary, it is not always possible to mesh connected bodies. This is due to the fact
that GBODY (unlike GHEXA) always assumes that nodes classified on the body's boundary
are actually on the body's boundary.
Because GHEXA does not guarantee the creation of an all-quad surface mesh, it may be
necessary to mesh connected bodies with tetrahedral elements only.
GHEXA
cover (cutaway)
gear (cutaway)
pulley
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking.{ALL/BOUNDARIES/BOUNDEXSEL/
GROUP/NO}
where NCTOLERANCE is a parameter of this command and (XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN) are the
lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation. If there is no bounding box,
then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as (1.0,1.0,1.0).
ALL all all
BOUNDARIES those on all boundaries all
as defined by the input
boundary cell sets
BOUNDEXSEL those on boundaries all
boundary cell sets except
those in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN
GROUP those on boundaries those that are in
as defined by the input the same element
boundary cell sets group
NO none none
GHEXA
NCDOMAIN [0]
Used only when NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL. NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is
to be used.
The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created.
MIDNODES [STRAIGHT]
straight line between the relevant vertex nodes (STRAIGHT), or on the underlying curved
geometry using either mapping from parameter space to real space (CURVED), or projection
(PROJECT). {CURVED/STRAIGHT/PROJECT}
SIZE
Desired (uniform) mesh density for elements to be created. The generated element size will
only approximately be equal to SIZE.
MIN-SIZE [0.0]
PROJECT [YES]
Mesh vertices on the bodys boundary are projected onto the corresponding bodys entities.
It refers to the mesh obtained after subdividing the bodys polyhedral representation. It does
not relate to MIDNODES. {YES/NO}
SMOOTH [NO]
Mesh vertices on the bodys boundary are smoothed. It refers to the mesh obtained after
subdividing the bodys polyhedral representation. {YES/NO}
DANGMAXA [20.0]
Maximum angle allowed for face normals before and after collapsing of edges, considering
the bodys polyhedral representation. The polyhedral representation is obtained by intersect-
ing the body with a regular grid (with cell size equal to 2 x SIZE), which is then subdivided
(once) to obtain the final mesh topology. {0.0 " DANGMAXA " 180.0}
OPTIONA [YES]
Option to allow faces to share more than one edge during the collapsing of edges consider-
ing the bodys polyhedral representation (see DANGMAXA). {YES/NO}
GHEXA
NO Allows faces to share more than one edge during collapsing of edges. MIN-SIZE
will more likely be respected, but the body may not be successfully meshed.
YES Does not allow faces to share more than one edge during collapsing of edges. MIN-
SIZE is less likely to be respected, but successful meshing of the body is more
probable.
SHIFTX [0.0]
SHIFTY [0.0]
SHIFTZ [0.0]
Shifts along the X, Y and Z directions the bounding box used for the grid (whose intersection
with the body gives the body's polyhedral representation).
MAX-REF [5]
When problems are detected, the grid can be locally refined to resolve those problems. MAX-
REF indicates how many times the program is allowed to subdivide the problem grid cells and
restart. If the problems can not be resolved, it is suggested to reduce SIZE (uniformly).
GHEXA
GADAPT NAME NODES NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE SUBSTRUCTURE
GROUP MIDNODES NCDOMAIN COLLAPSED
body
i
face
i
Functionality of this command is as follows:
In 3D, face
i
=0
Takes a finite element mesh attached to a body or set of bodies, deletes it (keeping the
boundary mesh intact), adapts the boundary mesh based on the provided mesh densities and
remeshes the interior(s).
In 2D, face
i
+ 0
Takes a finite element mesh attached to a body face or set of body faces, deletes it (keeping
the boundary mesh intact), adapts the boundary mesh based on the provided mesh densities
and remeshes the interior(s).
Desired (new) mesh densities are provided to the program using the SIZE-LOCATIONS
command. The SIZE-LOCATIONS entries would typically correspond to node locations along
with mesh densities. Note that they do not have to be as long as they are inside the geomet-
ric entity given in the argument. If there are no SIZE-LOCATIONS entries, the quality of the
boundary mesh is optimized without changing the mesh density.
NAME
The label number of a solid geometry body for which elements are to be generated.
NODES [4]
GADAPT
GADAPT
lengths of the bounding box for the body before generation. If there is no bounding box,
ALL all all
geometry body
faces in the domain
specified by NCDOMAIN
command
NO none none
Tolerance used to determine nodal coincidence.then XLEN,YLEN,ZLEN are taken as
(1.0,1.0,1.0).
MIDNODES [CURVED]
{CURVED/STRAIGHT}
NCDOMAIN [0]
COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether tetrahedral THREEDSOLID, or FLUID3 elements are to be treated as col-
lapsed hexahedral elements by ADINA. {NO/YES}
body
i
Label numbers of geometry bodies. The data line input allows for more than one body to be
meshed via a single GADAPT command call.
face
i
GBCELL
GBCELL SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NODES NCOINCIDE
NCTOLERANCE NCDOMAIN COLLAPSED PYRAMIDS BCELL
bcell
i
Creates 3D elements from boundary cells. Boundary cells are grouped into sets using the
BCELL command. The boundary cells must form a water-tight domain and
must be oriented towards the domain. This command creates node sets and element face sets
corresponding to each boundary cell set.
Label number of the substructure in which the elements and nodes are created. The default
value is defined by the last preceding SUBSTRUCTURE command.
GROUP [current element group number]
The label number of the element group in which the generated elements are created. The
default value is determined by the last preceding SET EGROUP command. The group type
must be one of those listed above.
NODES [4]
The number of nodes per element. Allowable values for each analysis program are
ADINA - 4, 8, 10, 11, 20, 27
ADINA-T - 4, 8, 10, 11, 20, 27
ADINA-F - 4, 8, 27
Note that if NODES=8, 20, or 27, boundary cells must be made up of all 4-node quadrilateral
cells.
Selects the method of nodal coincidence checking. {ALL/BOUNDARIES/GROUP/NO}
|XB - XA| " NCTOLERANCE * XLEN
|YB - YA| " NCTOLERANCE * YLEN
|ZB - ZA| " NCTOLERANCE * ZLEN
lengths of the bounding box for the model before generation. If there is no bounding box,
NCOINCIDE Which nodes to consider Which nodes to
for coincidence check against
ALL all all
BOUNDARIES those on all boundaries all
boundary cell sets
GROUP those on boundaries those that are in
as defined by the input the same element
boundary cell sets group
NO none none
NCTOLERANCE [value set by parameter COINCIDENCE of
command TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC]
NCDOMAIN [0]
Used only when NCOINCIDE = SELECTED or NCOINCIDE = BOUNDEXSEL.
NCDOMAIN = 0 indicates that no domain is to be used.
COLLAPSED [NO]
Selects whether tetrahedral THREEDSOLID, or FLUID3 elements are to be treated as col-
lapsed hexahedral elements by ADINA.
NO - Tetrahedral elements are not collapsed
YES - Tetrahedral elements are treated as collapsed hexahedra
PYRAMIDS [NO]
When NODES = 8,20,27, this parameter indicates whether pyramid elements should be used
to transition from hexahedral to tetrahedral elements. If PYRAMIDS = ONLY, no hexahedral
elements are created and pyramid elements are created for each boundary quadrilateral cell.
{NO/YES/ONLY}
GBCELL
BCELL [ALL]
Indicates whether all boundary cells are used to create the 3-D mesh. {ALL/SELECT}
ALL All boundary cells are used.
SELECT Selected boundary cells as specified by bcell
i
are used.
bcell
i
Label number of boundary cell. Boundary cells specified in the list are used to create the 3-D
mesh.
GBCELL
ELDELETE LINE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE
line
i
ELDELETE SURFACE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE
surface
i
ELDELETE VOLUME NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE
volume
i
ELDELETE EDGE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE BODY
edge
i
ELDELETE FACE NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE BODY
face
i
ELDELETE BODY NAME GROUP SUBSTRUCTURE NODE-DELETE
body
i
ELDELETE deletes elements generated on a given geometry entity for a specific element
group. The nodes connected to the deleted elements may also be optionally deleted (pro-
vided they are not connected to other elements or define other model features).
NAME
Label number of the geometry entity for which generated elements are to be deleted.
GROUP [current group number]
SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure number]
Substructure label number.
NODE-DELETE [YES]
Node deletion option. {YES/NO}
Label number of a solid geometry body. Used for edge/face references in ELDELETE EDGE/
FACE
ELDELETE
line
i
/surface
i
/volume
i
/edge
i
/face
i
/body
i
Line/Surface/Volume/Edge/Face/Body label number.
Sec. 8.2 Mesh generation COPY-MESH-BODY
COPY-MESH-BODY BODY1 BODY2 SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NCOINCIDE
NCDOMAIN NCTOLERANCE TRANSFORMATION
Copies a mesh from one body to another body via affine transformation.
BODY1
Body whose mesh is to be copied. {>0}
BODY2
Target body. {>0}
COPY-MESH-BODY
ALL all all
geometry body
those in the domain specified
by NCDOMAIN
command
NO none none
NCDOMAIN [0]
NCTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
TRANSFORMATION
Transformation used to match BODY1 to BODY2. Using this transformation, all faces on
BODY1 must match all faces on BODY2. {>0}
CSURFACE NAME NODES PATTERN NCOINCIDE NCTOLERANCE
SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
Generates a set of contact segments on a contact-surface, see CONTACTSURFACE. Contact
segments are normally created by default from associated finite elements defined on the
geometry of the contact-surface. However, a target contact-surface which is rigid (or has a
completely known displacement), may be defined to consist of contact segments with no
associated finite elements.
The distribution of segments, including their size, is governed by the subdivision data
assigned to the geometry components of the contact-surface, e.g., via SUBDIVIDE LINE,
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE.
NAME
The label number of a contact-surface on which contact segments are to be generated.
NODES [2 (2-D); 4 (3-D)]
1
[3 (2-D); 9 (3-D)]
2
The number of nodes per contact segment.
The default value is indicated by the superscripts 1 or 2 as follows:
1. CONTACT-CONTROL CSTYPE=OLD
2. CONTACT-CONTROL CSTYPE=NEW
The permitted values depend on whether the contact-surface is 2-D or 3-D:
2-D contact-surface {2/3}.
3-D contact-surface {3/4/6/9}.
PATTERN [1]
Selects the type of triangulation pattern used to further subdivide the quadrilateral surface
subdivisions into triangular segments, only used when NODES = 3, i.e., for 3-D contact
segments. (See GSURFACE for PATTERN options).
NCOINCIDE [SURFACE]
Controls nodal coincidence checking. If SURFACE is selected, nodal coincidence is carried
out, but comparison is made against only those nodes already generated on the contact-
surface. {YES/NO/SURFACE}
SUBSTRUCTURE [current substructure number]
Label number of the substructure in which the contact segments and nodes are generated.
GROUP [current contact group number]
The label number of the contact group into which the contact segments are generated.
CSURFACE
CSDELETE LINE NAME GROUP CONTACTSURFACE NODE-DELETE
CSDELETE SURFACE NAME GROUP CONTACTSURFACE NODE-DELETE
CSDELETE EDGE NAME GROUP CONTACTSURFACE NODE-DELETE
BODY
CSDELETE FACE NAME GROUP CONTACTSURFACE NODE-DELETE
BODY
Deletes contact segments generated on a given geometry entity for a specified contact
group. Nodes connected to the contact segments may be optionally deleted (provided they
do not connect to other elements or define other model features).
NAME
Label number of the geometry entity for which generated elements are to be deleted.
GROUP [current active contact group number]
Contact group label number. Contact segments should have already been generated on
geometry entity "NAME".
CONTACTSURFACE [1]
Contact surface label number.
NODE-DELETE [YES]
Node deletion option:
NO No nodes are deleted as a result of this command
YES Nodes which are only connected to elements in the deleted set (i.e. those
generated on the line for the particular element group) will be deleted.
BODY
The body label number.
CSDELETE
Sec. 8.3 Elements GLUEMESH
GLUEMESH NAME EXTENSION
stype
i
name
i
body
i
side
i
Glues two dissimilar meshes together. The mesh on each side (master or slave) may span over
several sites.
NAME
Label number of GLUEMESH.
EXTENSION [0.01]
Extension for the master surface (as a ratio of element length). {0.00 < EXTENSION "
0.25 }
This extension is only applied to glueing of 3-D meshes.
stype
i
Type of site the gluing is applied to. Sites must be either all 2-D types (line, edge, element-
edge) or all 3-D types (surface, face, element-face).
{LINE/SURFACE/EDGE/FACE/ELEMENT-EDGE/ELEMENT-FACE}
For example,
GLUEMESH NAME=1
SURFACE 1 0 SLAVE
SURFACE 5 0 MASTER
name
i
Site label number.
body
i
Body label number when stype
i
= EDGE or FACE.
side
i
Indicates whether site is on the master or slave side. {SLAVE/MASTER}
TRUSS-POINTS
name
i
point
i
material
i
area
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
epsin
i
Defines axisymmetric truss elements at geometry points. Coincidence checking is used when
generating nodes at the geometry points, with tolerance adjusted by the command
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC. Note: The current element group must be of type TRUSS, with
axisymmetric subtype, for this command to be active.
name
i
Label number of an axisymmetric truss element.
point
i
Label number of the geometry point associated with the axisymmetric truss element.
material
i
[0]
Label number for the material to be used with element name
i
. A zero value indicates that the
element group default material is to be used.
area
i
[1.0]
The cross-sectional area of the element.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
Printing flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is controlled by PRINTOUT
PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
save
i
[DEFAULT]
Saving (to the porthole file) flag for the element. If DEFAULT is specified, saving is con-
trolled by PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
tbirth
i
[0.0]
Time of element birth.
tdeath
i
[0.0]
Time of element death.
epsin
i
[0.0]
Element initial strain.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TRUSS-POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE TRUSS-POINTS FIRST LAST
TRUSS-POINTS
Sec. 8.3 Elements
SPRING POINTS
name
i
p1
i
dof1
i
p2
i
dof2
i
pset
i
print
i
save
i
ax
i
ay
i
az
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
Defines spring elements either between two degrees of freedom at distinct geometry points,
or a grounded degree of freedom at a single geometry point. Coincidence checking is used
when generating nodes at the geometry points, with tolerance adjusted by the command
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC.
Note: The current element group must be of type SPRING for this command to be active.
name
i
Label number of a spring element.
p1
i
Label number of the first (or only) geometry point at one end of the spring element.
dof1
i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring element at the first point p1
i
.
1 X translation.
2 Y translation.
3 Z translation.
4 X rotation.
5 Y rotation.
6 Z rotation.
p2
i
Label number of the second geometry point at the opposite end of the spring element from
point p1
i
. Input of p2
i
= 0 implies that the degree of freedom dof1
i
at point p1
i
is
connected to ground.
dof2
i
The degree of freedom for the spring element at point p2
i
. The choice of input values is the
same as for entry dof1
i
. If p2
i
= 0, then input for dof2
i
is ignored.
pset
i
[1]
Label number of the spring property set for element spring
i
. See PROPERTYSET.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
SPRING POINTS
save
i
[DEFAULT]
ax
i
, ay
i
, az
i
[0.0]
Global coordinate system components of the spring element direction, used if the spring
connects two coincident points, or one point to ground. Note that this vector is only used for
nonlinear spring elements.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
Element birth time.
tdeath
i
[0.0]
Element death time.
Note: tbirth
i
< tdeath
i
, or tbirth
i
= tdeath
i
= 0.0
Auxiliary commands
LIST SPRING POINTS FIRST LAST
DELETE SPRING POINTS FIRST LAST
SPRING POINTS
Sec. 8.3 Elements
SPRING LINES
name
i
line1
i
dof1
i
line2
i
dof2
i
pset
i
print
i
save
i
ax
i
ay
i
az
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
option
Defines spring-lines, i.e. a set of spring elements either between two degrees of freedom
along distinct geometry lines, or a grounded degree of freedom along a single geometry
line.
name
i
Label number of a spring-line.
line1
i
Label number of the first (or only) geometry line at one end of the spring-line.
dof1
i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring elements along the first line line1
i
.
1 X translation.
2 Y translation.
3 Z translation.
4 X rotation.
5 Y rotation.
6 Z rotation.
line2
i
Label number of the second geometry line at the opposite end of the spring-line from line1
i
.
Input of line2
i
= 0 implies that the degree of freedom dof1
i
at line line1
i
is connected to
ground.
dof2
i
The degree of freedom selected for the spring elements along the second line line2
i
.
If line2
i
= 0, then input for dof2
i
is ignored.
pset
i
[1]
Label number of the spring property set for spring-line name
i
. See PROPERTYSET.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
save
i
[DEFAULT]
SPRING LINES
ax
i
, ay
i
, az
i
[0.0]
Global coordinate system components of the spring-line direction, used if the spring-line
connects two coincident nodes, or one node to ground.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
Element birth time.
tdeath
i
[0.0]
Element death time.
Note: tbirth
i
< tdeath
i
, or tbirth
i
= tdeath
i
= 0.0
option [SAME]
{SAME / REVERSE}
When multiple nodes exist on the line1 and line2, this flags how the spring element between
nodes on each entity is defined.
SAME - A spring is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric
order on each line. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines.
REVERSE - A spring is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric
order on each line, but for line2 the parametric order is reversed.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SPRING LINES FIRST LAST
DELETE SPRING LINES FIRST LAST
SPRING LINES
Sec. 8.3 Elements
REBAR-LINE NAME NCOINCIDE
line
i
Defines a rebar using lines. The rebar defined is then referenced in the EGROUP TRUSS
command to model rebar elements.
NAME [(current highest rebar-line label number) + 1]
Label number of the rebar-line to be defined. This label is referenced in the EGROUP TRUSS
command.
NCOINCIDE [NO]
Coincidence checking is used to determine whether to place a new node at end point of
geometry line. {NO/YES}
line
i
List of geometry line label numbers used for defining the rebar.
Auxiliary commands
LIST REBAR-LINE FIRST LAST
DELETE REBAR-LINE FIRST LAST
REBAR-LINE
TRUSS-LINE
name line1 line2 material area print save tbirth tdeath gapwidth intloc epsin
option
Creates 2-node general truss elements between line1 and line2 or 1-node axisymmetric truss
elements on line1 at the line subdivision locations.
name
Label number of a truss-line
line1
Line1 label number
line2
Line2 label number. Specify line2=0 for axisymmetric truss element.
material [0]
Material label number. A zero input value indicates that elements generated on the line will
take the default material for the host element group.
area [1.0]
Cross-sectional area for each TRUSS element on the line.
print [DEFAULT]
YES Print element results as requested by parameter RESULTS of the relevant
EGROUP command.
NO No results are printed for TRUSS elements on the line.
DEFAULT Element printing is governed by parameter PRINTDEFAULT of the
PRINTOUT command.
save [DEFAULT]
YES Save, on the porthole file, element results as requested by parameter
RESULTS of the relevant EGROUP command.
NO No saving of results for TRUSS elements on the line.
TRUSS-LINE
Sec. 8.3 Elements
DEFAULT Saving of element results is governed by parameter SAVEDEFAULT of
the PORTHOLE command.
tbirth [0.0]
tdeath [0.0]
Note: tbirth < tdeath, or tbirth = tdeath = 0.0
gapwidth [0.0]
Gap width for each TRUSS element on the line.
intloc [NO]
Option to print the location of the integration point. {YES/NO}
YES Print the element integration point (global) coordinates, in the undeformed
configuration.
NO No printing of integration point data for TRUSS elements on the line.
epsin [0.0]
Initial strain for each TRUSS element on the line.
option [SAME]
{SAME/REVERSE}
When multiple nodes exist on the line1 and line2, this flags how the truss element between
nodes on each entity is defined.
SAME A truss is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric
order on each line. Parametric order is in the increasing u-parameter
direction for lines.
REVERSE A truss is constructed between nodes at the corresponding parametric
order on each line. For line2 the parametric order is reversed.
Auxiliary commands
LIST TRUSS-LINE FIRST LAST
DELETE TRUSS-LINE FIRST LAST
TRUSS-LINE
Sec. 8.3 Elements
ELTHICKNESS
name
i
thick1
i
thick2
i
thick3
i
... thick16
i
Defines thickness for 3D shell elements and axisymmetric shell elements (EGROUP ISOBEAM
SUBTYPE =AXISYMMETRIC).
name
i
The element label number, in the current element group.
thick1
i
[0.0]
Thickness of shell element i at local node number 1.
thick2
i
[thick1
i
]
.
.
.
thick16
i
[thick1
i
]
Note: Thickness is measured in the direction of the director/normal vector at the node.
Note: The thicknesses thickn
i
are defined for midsurface nodes, ignoring top/bottom
nodes of transition elements.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ELTHICKNESS FIRST LAST
DELETE ELTHICKNESS FIRST LAST
ELTHICKNESS
Chapter 9
Direct finite element data input
Sec. 9.1 Nodal data
COORDINATES NODE SYSTEM
(ENTRIES NAME X Y Z SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = global Cartesian (0))
(ENTRIES NAME XL YL ZL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = Cartesian)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA XL SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = cylindrical)
(ENTRIES NAME R THETA PHI SYSTEM) (SYSTEM = spherical)
n
i
x
i
y
i
z
i
sys
i
Defines coordinates for current substructure nodes. The coordinates given refer to the local
system specified by parameter SYSTEM.
SYSTEM [currently active system]
Label number of the required local coordinate system. This specifies the coordinate system
to which any appended data line coordinates refer and determines which column heading
names are allowed by any ENTRIES data line.
ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. The heading
names depend on the type of local coordinate system specified by SYSTEM.
Note: Less than five entry column headings may be given e.g., to specify nodes in a
coordinate plane, but the column heading NAME must always be specified.
n
i
Label number for the desired current substructure node, input under the column heading
NAME.
x
i
[0.0]
y
i
[0.0]
z
i
[0.0]
Coordinate values in local coordinate system sys
i
.
sys
i
[SYSTEM]
Local coordinate system label number. Note sys
i
defaults to the system specified by
SYSTEM, which in turn defaults to the currently active coordinate system.
Auxiliary commands
LIST COORDINATES NODE FIRST LAST SYSTEM GLOBAL
DELETE COORDINATES NODE FIRST LAST
If GLOBAL = YES the coordinates are listed in terms of the global Cartesian system.
COORDINATES NODE
Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input
SKEWSYSTEMS NODES
n
i
node1
i
node2
i
node3
i
Defines skew Cartesian coordinate systems in terms of nodes. Skew systems can be
referenced via DOF-SYSTEM to indicate the local orientation of nodal degrees of freedom.
n
i
Label number for the skew system to be defined.
node1
i
node2
i
node3
i
Node label numbers. The vector from node1
i
to node2
i
defines the direction of the local X-axis
of the skew system. The vector from node1
i
to node3
i
is taken to lie in the local XY-plane of
the skew system. Note that the three nodes must not be collinear.
Auxiliary commands
SKEWSYSTEM NODES
Sec. 9.1 Nodal data
DOF-SYSTEM NODES SUBSTRUCTURE
node
i
skewsystem
i
Assigns skew coordinate systems to the degrees of freedom associated with a set of nodes in
the current substructure.
Label number of the substructure for the nodes referenced in the accompanying data lines.
node
i
Label number of a node in the current substructure given by SUBSTRUCTURE.
skewsystem
i
Label number of a skew coordinate system, as defined by SKEWSYSTEM. Setting
skewsystem
i
= 0 assigns the global Cartesian system to the nodal degrees of freedom.
Auxiliary commands
LIST DOF-SYSTEM NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE
DELETE DOF-SYSTEM NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE
DOF-SYSTEM NODES
MASSES NODES
node
i
mass1
i
mass2
i
mass3
i
mass4
i
mass5
i
mass6
i
Assigns concentrated masses to a set of nodes in the current substructure.
node
i
Label number of a node.
mass1
i
[0.0]
The mass assigned to node
i
for the x-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).
mass2
i
[0.0]
i
for the y-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).
mass3
i
[0.0]
i
for the z-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).
mass4
i
[0.0]
The mass moment of inertia assigned to node
i
for the x-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).
mass5
i
[0.0]
The massmoment of inertia assigned to node
i
for the y-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).
mass6
i
[0.0]
The mass moment of inertia assigned to node
i
for the z-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).
Auxiliary commands
LIST MASSES NODES FIRST LAST
DELETE MASSES NODES FIRST LAST
MASSES NODES
Sec. 9.1 Nodal data
DAMPERS NODES
node
i
damp1
i
damp2
i
damp3
i
damp4
i
damp5
i
damp6
i
Assigns concentrated dampers to a set of nodes in the current substructure.
node
i
damp1
i
[0.0]
The damper assigned to node
i
for the x-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).
damp2
i
[0.0]
i
for the y-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).
damp3
i
[0.0]
i
for the z-translational degree of freedom (global or skew).
damp4
i
[0.0]
The rotational damper assigned to node
i
for the x-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).
damp5
i
[0.0]
i
for the y-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).
damp6
i
[0.0]
i
for the z-rotational degree of freedom (global or
skew).
Auxiliary commands
LIST DAMPERS NODES FIRST LAST
DELETE DAMPERS NODES FIRST LAST
DAMPERS NODES
SHELLNODESDOF NODES SUBSTRUCTURE
node
i
nsdof
i
ndirv
i
Specifies the number of degrees of freedom and the director vector number, if applicable, for
midsurface shell element nodes. This specification overrides the global default set by
MASTER SHELLNDOF.
The substructure for each node specified in this command.
node
i
The node number.
nsdof
i
[MASTER SHELLNDOF]
Number of degrees of freedom for node
i
, if the node is a shell node.
FIVE Shell midsurface rotational degrees of freedom are used.
SIX Global or skew degrees of freedom are used.
AUTOMATIC The program chooses the number of degrees of freedom to be
used based on certain modeling considerations. See Theory and
Modeling Guide.
ndirv
i
Number of a director vector defined by the SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SHELLNODESDOF NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE
DELETE SHELLNODESDOF NODES FIRST LAST
SHELLNODESDOF NODES
Sec. 9.1 Nodal data
SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR OPTION SUBSTRUCTURE
n
i
vx
i
vy
i
vz
i
(OPTION = COMPONENTS)
or
n
i
phi
i
theta
i
(OPTION = EULERANGLES)
Defines director vectors that can be applied to shell element nodes in the model via command
SHELLNODESDOF. Director vectors are used in shell analysis to define the shell director
vectors for those nodes with five (5) degrees of freedom. It is not necessary to specify
director vectors for these nodes, however, as the program will automatically compute director
vectors for those nodes for which you do not assign director vectors.
OPTION [COMPONENTS]
COMPONENTS Director vectors are input in the form of vector components in
the global coordinate system. Input vx, vy and vz in the data lines.
EULERANGLES Director vectors are input in the form of Euler rotation angles in
the global coordinate system. Input phi and theta in the data lines.
The substructure for the director vector specified by this command.
n
i
Director vector number.
vx
i
[0.0]
vy
i
[0.0]
vz
i
[0.0]
Components of the director vector. This vector need not be normalized.
phi
i
[0.0]
theta
i
[0.0]
Euler rotation angles measured in degrees.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR FIRST LAST OPTION SUBSTRUCTURE
DELETE SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR FIRST LAST OPTION SUBSTRUCTURE
SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR
NODESET NAME ALL-EXT OPTION GROUP ZONE ELSET TARGET ANGLE
node
i
substructure
i
reuse
i
(OPTION = NODE)
name
i
(OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT)
name
i
body
i
(OPTION = LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE)
Defines a collection of nodes by label number. The NODESET may be referenced by other
commands such as CONSTRAINT, RIGIDLINK, BEAMSET, and SPRINGSET.
NAME [(current highest nodeset label number) + 1]
Label number of NODESET.
ALL-EXT [NO]
Indicates whether this node set includes all nodes on the external boundary of the model. If
ALL-EXT=YES, then "nodei" is a list of nodes which will be excluded in this node set. Note
that parameter ALL-EXT is used only for OPTION = NODE. {YES/NO}
OPTION [NODE]
The option to define the NODESET. {NODE/GROUP/ZONE/ELEDGESET/ELFACESET/
MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE/CHAIN}
NODE NODESET is defined from table input.
GROUP NODESET is defined from given Element Group.
ZONE NODESET is defined from given Zone name. Note that all nodes are
added only from zone entities that contain element information.
ELEDGESET NODESET is defined from given element edge set in parameter
ELSET.
ELFACESET NODESET is defined from given element face set in parameter
ELSET.
MERGE NODESET is defined by merging nodesets specified in the table.
SUBTRACT NODESET is defined by subtracting from the TARGET nodeset the
nodesets specified in the table.
NODESET
Sec. 9.1 Nodal data
INTERSECT NODESET is defined as the intersection of all nodesets specified in
the table.
LINE-EDGE NODESET is defined from nodes currently on geometry lines and
edges.
SURFACE-FACE NODESET is defined from nodes currently on geometry surfaces and
faces.
CHAIN NODESET is defined according to the normal direction of the first
element face in the table. All element faces of continuous normal
direction with the same element type will be selected. All nodes on
these element faces will be filled in the table.
GROUP [0]
If GROUP > 0 all element nodes of this group will be included in this NODESET. Used only
for OPTION = GROUP.
ZONE
Zone name. Used only for OPTION = ZONE.
ELSET [0]
Label number of element edge set if OPTION = ELEDGESET.
Label number of elfaceset if OPTION = ELFACESET.
Ignored for other values of OPTION.
TARGET [0]
Label number of target nodeset for OPTION = SUBTRACT.
ANGLE [0.0]
Angle (in degrees) used to determine all continuous normal directions.
node
i
Node label number. Used only for OPTION = NODE.
substructure
i
[current substructure]
Substructure label number for node
i
. Used only for OPTION = NODE.
reuse
i
[current reuse]
Reuse label number for node
i
. Used only for OPTION = NODE.
NODESET
name
i
Label number of element node set. Used only for OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTER-
SECT/LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-FACE.
body
i
Label number of element node set. Used only for OPTION = LINE-EDGE/SURFACE-
FACE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST NODESET FIRST LAST
DELETE NODESET FIRST LAST
Sec. 9.1 Nodal data
RIGIDNODES SHELL
node
i
Specifies shell midsurface nodes for which the rotation normal to the shell is constrained to
the perpendicular translations of neighboring shell midsurface nodes. This effectively
removes the usual singularity associated with the lack of stiffness for the shell normal
rotation degree of freedom.
This condition may be used, for example, in conjunction with beam or spring elements to
connect two or more offset shell surfaces.
Note that any node specified cannot have 5 or 6 degrees-of-freedom explicitly assigned
(either directly or to any attached geometry); i.e. they must have an automatic number of
degrees-of-freedom assignment. Thereafter, if the automatic calculation otherwise results in 5
degrees-of-freedom, the actual number of degree-of-freedom will be output as 6 and the
required constraint will be applied.
node
i
The label number of a shell midsurface node. The node must belong to the main structure (not
any substructure).
Auxiliary commands
LIST RIGIDNODES SHELL
RIGIDNODES SHELL
AXES-NODES NAME NODE1 NODE2 NODE3
Defines an axes-system via three model nodes. Axes-systems can be referenced by
element data commands (e.g., EDATA) to indicate the local orientation of the orthotropic
material properties and/or initial strain.
NAME
Label number for the desired axes-system. This is numbered independently for each element
group.
NODE1
Label number of the first node defining the axes-system.
NODE2
Label number of the second node defining the axes-system.
NODE3
Label number of the third node defining the axes-system.
Note: The local x-direction of the axes-system is determined by the vector from NODE1
to NODE2. The local z-direction of the axes-system is determined as the normal
to the plane defined by the three nodes NODE1, NODE2, and NODE3. The local
y-direction of the axes-system is then given by the right-hand rule.
Auxiliary commands
LIST AXES-NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
DELETE AXES-NODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
AXES-NODES
Sec. 9.2 Element data
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN NAME LINE ALFA GROUP
ele
i
This command defines sets of axes to be used with the definition of the directions of the
initial strains in each element. Elements are input in the data lines. A geometry line labeled
LINE and an angle ALFA (in degrees) are used to define the initial strain axes orientations.
The elements can belong to the current element group or an element group input through the
GROUP parameter.
Axes initial strain system can be referenced by commands INITIAL STRAINS and INITIAL
SGRADIENTS to specify initial strains or initial strain gradients.
This command is applicable to 2D, 3D, plate and shell elements.
NAME [(current highest defined label) + 1]
Label number for the desired axes-initial strain system to apply to the specified elements..
LINE
Label number of the defined geometry line. The geometry line must either be a straight line or
an arc line.
ALFA [0.0]
An angle (in degrees) is used together with the geometry line.
Element group number which this axes-initial strain system is applied to.
ele
i
Element number which this axes-initial strain system is applied to.
Auxiliary commands
LIST AXES-INITIALSTRAIN FIRST LAST
DELETE AXES-INITIALSTRAIN FIRST LAST
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC NAME LINE ALFA GROUP
ele
i
This command defines sets of principal material axes orientations for the elements used with
the orthotropic material model. Elements are input in the data input lines. A geometry line
labeled LINE and an angle ALFA (in degrees) are used to define the principal material axes
orientations. The elements can belong to the current element group or an element group input
through the GROUP parameter.
This command is applicable for 2D, plate and shell elements.
NAME [(highest axes-orthotropic system) + 1]
Label number for the desired axes-orthotropic system.
LINE
Label number of the defined geometry line. The geometry line must be a straight line or an arc
line.
ALFA [0.0]
An angle (in degrees) is used together with the geometry line.
Element group number which this axes-orthotropic system is applied to.
ele
i
Element number which this axes-orthotropic system is applied to.
Auxiliary commands
LIST AXES-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST
DELETE AXES-ORTHOTROPIC FIRST LAST
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC
Sec. 9.2 Element data ELEDGESET
ELEDGESET NAME ALL-EXT OPTION TARGET
edge
i
el
i
group
i
(OPTION = ELEDGE)
name
i
name
i
body
i
(OPTION = LINE-EDGE)
Defines an element edge set containing edges of 2-D elements. An element edge set can be
used for load application (APPLY-LOAD command) such as pressure, normal traction and
heat flux. It can also be used in the definition of a 2-D contact surface (see command
CONTACT-ELEMSET ).
NAME [(current highest eledgeset label number) + 1]
Label number of the element edge set.
ALL-EXT [NO]
Indicates whether this element edge set includes all external boundary element edges. If
ALL-EXT=YES, then edgei is a list of element edges which will be excluded in this element
edge set. Note that parameter ALL-EXT is used only for OPTION = ELEDGE. {YES/NO}
OPTION [ELEDGE]
The option to define the element edge set.{ELEDGE/LINE-EDGE/MERGE/SUBTRACT/
INTERSECT}
ELEDGE Define an element edge set by specifying element edges in the table
LINE-EDGE Define an element edge set from geometry lines or edges
MERGE Merge element edge sets specified in the table
SUBTRACT Subtract from the TARGET element edge set the element edge sets
specified in the table
INTERSECT Obtain the intersection of all element edge sets specified in the table
TARGET [0]
Label number of target element face set for OPTION = SUBTRACT .
edge
i
Edge number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELEDGE.
el
i
Label number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELEDGE.
group
i
Label number of the element group. Used only for OPTION = ELEDGE.
name
i
Label number of element edge set. Used only for OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTER-
SECT (without body
i
) or OPTION = LINE-EDGE (with body
i
).
body
i
Label number of body; if body
i
= 0 , this means that the geometry is a line. Used only for
OPTION = LINE-EDGE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ELEDGESET FIRST LAST
DELETE ELEDGESET FIRST LAST
ELEDGESET
ELEMENTSET NAME GROUP
el
i
group
i
Defines an element set containing elements specified in the parameter GROUP and in the table
entries.
Element sets containing beam or truss elements can be referenced in the SWEEP and RE-
VOLVE commands to generate reinforcement beam or truss elements.
Element sets containing 3-D solid, 2-D solid, and shell elements can be referenced in the SET-
AXES-MATERIAL and SET-AXES-STRAIN commands to specify the orientation of
orthotropic material properties or initial strains for the elements.
NAME
Label number of ELEMENTSET.
GROUP [0]
Specifies an element group to be included in this element set. If GROUP > 0 is specified, all
elements in the group will be included in this element set.
el
i
Label number of the element.
group
i
Label number of the element group for element el
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ELEMENTSET FIRST LAST
DELETE ELEMENTSET FIRST LAST
Example
ELEMENTSET NAME=2 GROUP=5
3 2
TO
10 2
@
The above command will create an element set 2 which contains all elements in element group
5 and elements 3 to 10 in element group 2.
ELEMENTSET
ELFACESET NAME ALL-EXT OPTION GROUP ZONE ANGLE TARGET
face
i
el
i
group
i
(OPTION = ELFACE)
name
i
name
i
body
i
(OPTION = SURFACE-FACE)
Defines an element face set containing faces of 3-D and shell elements. An element face set
can be used for load application ( APPLY-LOAD command) such as pressure, normal traction
and heat flux. It can also be used in the definition of a 3-D contact surface (see command
CONTACT-ELEMSET ).
NAME [(current highest elfaceset label number + 1)]
Label number of the element face set.
ALL-EXT [NO]
Indicates whether this element face set includes all external boundary element faces. If ALL-
EXT=YES, then face
i
is a list of element faces which will be excluded in this element face set.
Note that parameter ALL-EXT is used only for OPTION = ELFACE.{YES/NO}
OPTION [ELFACE]
The option to define the ELFACESET. {ELFACE/GROUP/ZONE-3D/ZONE-SHELL/
CHAIN/SURFACE-FACE/MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTERSECT}
ELFACE ELFACESET is defined from table input.
GROUP ELFACESET is defined from given Element Group.
ZONE-3D ELFACESET is defined from given ZONE name and only external 3D
element faces are selected.
ZONE-SHELL ELFACESET is defined from given ZONE name and only SHELL
element faces are selected.
CHAIN ELFACESET is defined according to the normal direction of first
element face in the table. All element faces of continuous normal
direction with same element type will be filled in table.
SURFACE-FACE ELFACESET is defined from geometry sufaces or faces.
MERGE ELFACESET is defined by merging element face sets specified in the
table.
ELFACESET
SUBTRACT ELFACESET is defined by subtracting from the TARGET element face
set the element face sets specified in the table.
INTERSECT ELFACESET defined by obtaining the intersection of all element face
sets specified in the table.
GROUP [0]
If GROUP > 0 and the GROUP is a SHELL element group, all element faces of this
group will be included in this ELFACESET. Used only for OPTION = GROUP.
ZONE
Zone name. Used only for OPTION = ZONE-3D/ZONE-SHELL.
ANGLE [0.0]
Angle (in degrees) used to determine all continuous normal directions.
{0.0 % ANGLE % 90.0}
TARGET [0]
Label number of target element face set for OPTION = SUBTRACT .
face
i
Face number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELFACE.
el
i
Label number of the element. Used only for OPTION = ELFACE.
group
i
Label number of the element group. Used only for OPTION = ELFACE.
name
i
Label number of element face set. Used only for OPTION = MERGE/SUBTRACT/INTER-
SECT (without body
i
) or OPTION = SURFACE-FACE (with body
i
).
body
i
Label number of body; if body
i
= 0 , this means that the geometry is a surface. Used only for
OPTION = SURFACE-FACE.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ELFACESET FIRST LAST
DELETE ELFACESET FIRST LAST
ELFACESET
ENODES SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP NNODES
(ENTRIES EL AUX N1 N2 ... NK)
el
i
aux
i
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
n4
i
... nk
i
ENODES defines element nodal connectivity for the substructure and element group speci-
fied. The defaults are the currently active substructure and element group. NNODES is only
used for specifying maximum number of nodes allowed for ADINA GENERAL elements
SUBSTRUCTURE [currently active substructure]
Label number for the substructure to which subsequent nodal and element data refer.
GROUP [currently active element group]
NNODES [32]
Maximum number of nodes allowed for ADINA GENERAL elements. (command line input
only).
ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. Specifies the
element nodes for which the global node numbers shall be input. The column heading EL
must always be specified first, and the essential and optional nodal headings for each type of
element are:
el
i
n1
i
... n4
i
TRUSS elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n9
i
TWODSOLID elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n9
i
FLUID2 elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n27
i
THREEDSOLID elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n27
i
FLUID3 elements.
el
i
aux
i
n1
i
n2
i
BEAM elements.
el
i
aux
i
n1
i
... n4
i
ISOBEAM elements.
el
i
aux
i
n1
i
... n4
i
PIPE elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n3
i
PLATE elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n32
i
SHELL elements.
el
i
n1
i
... n32
i
GENERAL elements.
el
i
n1
i
id1
i
n2
i
id2
i
SPRING elements.
el
i
Element number within the current substructure and element group.
ENODES
aux
i
n1
i
, n2
i
, n3
i
,... , nk
i
The global node numbers defining the element in the order given by ENTRIES.
Note: Node aux
i
is required by the BEAM, ISOBEAM and PIPE elements.
Note: The spring element is defined by n1
i
, id1
i
, n2
i
and id2
i
, where id1
i
and id2
i
are the
global degrees of freedom. Parameter id2
i
is ignored when n2
i
=0
Node numbering
The node numbering convention and other pertinent information for the truss, beam,
isobeam, pipe, plate and general elements are described in the corresponding sections in the
Theory and Modeling Guide, Volume I: ADINA, as follows:
Element Section
TRUSS 2.1
BEAM 2.4
ISOBEAM 2.5
PIPE 2.8
PLATE 2.6
GENERAL 2.9.1
The node numbering for the TWODSOLID/FLUID2, THREEDSOLID/FLUID3, SHELL and
SPRING elements is explained in the following sections.
1. TWODSOLID/FLUID2 elements
The TWODSOLID/FLUID2 elements are triangles and quadrilaterals. Their nodes are
numbered as shown in Fig. ENODES-1.
2. THREEDSOLID/FLUID3 elements
The THREEDSOLID/FLUID3 elements fall into two categories based on node numbering:
(a) the brick elements (4-, 8-, 20-, 21- and 27-node) and degenerate elements formed by
collapsing the 8-, 20- and 27-node brick elements, and
(b) the tetrahedral elements (4-, 10- and 11-node).
Fig. ENODES-2 shows the node numbering convention of the 27-node brick element. Note
that node 21 is in the center of the element. The elements that are based on the 27-node brick
must be numbered according to the convention shown in the figure, e.g., a node number that
is reserved for a vertex cannot be used to number a node on an edge.
Fig. ENODES-3 shows the node numbering for elements based on the 27-node brick.
ENODES
K The 21-, 20-, and 8-node bricks (Fig. ENODES-3(f), (d) and (a) respectively) result when
the nodes on the element faces, the node at the element center, and the nodes on the
element edges are progressively left out.
K The 6-node prism (Fig. ENODES-3(b)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained by
collapsing one face (1-4-8-5) of the 8-node brick.
K The 15-node prism (Fig. ENODES-3(c)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained by
collapsing one face (1-4-8-5) of the 20-node brick.
K The 13-node pyramid (Fig. ENODES-3(e)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained
from the 20-node brick by collapsing one face (1-2-3-4), and then collapsing the edge so
formed into the apex of the pyramid.
K The 14-node pyramid (Fig. ENODES-3(g)) and its corresponding numbering are obtained
from the 27-node brick by collapsing one face (1-2-3-4), and then collapsing the edge so
formed into the apex of the pyramid; nodes 21 26 are not used, leaving only the last
node (27) on the base of the pyramid.
The 4-, 10- and 11-node tetrahedral elements are numbered as shown in Fig. ENODES-4.
3. SHELL elements
Fig. ENODES-5 shows the node numbering conventions for SHELL elements.
K In midsurface nodes representation (Fig. ENODES-5(a)), node numbers 13 16 are
always reserved for element interior nodes. Therefore, in the case of a 9-node shell
element defined using midsurface nodes, the nodes defined are the 1 4 at the vertices, 5
8 on the edges and 13 in the center of the element. The center node is defined by
nodes 13 and 29 if the 9-node shell element is defined using top-bottom nodes represen-
tation.
K In top-bottom nodes representation (Fig. ENODES-5(b)), the element interior nodes are
numbered 13 16 on the top surface and 29 32 on the bottom surface. Each top surface
node has a dual bottom surface node. Nodes 1 16 are on the top surface, or on the
middle surface if the dual node on the bottom surface is not present. Nodes 17 32 are
on the bottom surface.
K Triangular shell elements are obtained by degeneration of these quadrilateral shell
elements, that is, by assigning nodes 1 and 4 (also nodes 17 and 20 if applicable) to the
same global number. Note that for triangular shell elements, nodes 8 and 12 (also nodes
24 and 28 if applicable) are not used. Further, interior nodes are not allowed. Some
examples of triangular shell elements using midsurface node representation are shown in
Fig. ENODES-6.
4. Nonlinear SPRING elements
For nonlinear springs, the stiffness of the spring can change as functions of the displacement
ENODES
between 2 nodes (or node to ground). The 2 categories of nonlinear spring are
-- material nonlinear only (MNO) spring (specify NONLINEAR=MNO in EGROUP
SPRING command)
-- geometric nonlinear spring (specify NONLINEAR=GEOM in EGROUP SPRING com-
mand)
Option 1 (MNO):
The 2 nodes of the spring are initially coincident. The spring action is assumed to act always
in the global directions regardless of the current relative positions of the 2 nodes. Figure
ENODES-7 illustrates the use, where n
1
and n
2
have moved apart but the spring stiffness
continues to act into the global directions.
To use this spring option, specify
ENODES
el n1 id1 n2
where id1 = 1, 2 and 3 indicates global X, Y and Z directions respectively. id1 = 4, 5, and 6
for torsional springs.
If n2 = 0, then a grounded spring is defined.
Option 2 (MNO):
The 2 nodes of the spring are initially coincident. The spring action is assumed to act always
in an arbitrary direction specified by the user. Figure ENODES-8 illustrates the use of this
option.
To use this spring option, the EDATA command is used to specify the spring action direction.
ENODES
el n1 id1 n2 id2
EDATA
el ax ay az
ax, ay, az are vector components in the global X, Y, Z directions.
If n2 = 0, then a grounded spring is defined.
For translational spring, specify id1 = 0 and id2 = 0. For torsional spring, specify id1 = 0 and
id2 = 1.
ENODES
Option 3 (MNO):
The 2 nodes of the spring are initially not coincident. The spring action is assumed to act
always in the direction connecting the original positions of the two nodes. Figure ENODES-9
illustrates the use of this option.
ENODES
el n1 id1 n2
id1 = 1 for translational spring and id1 = 4 for torsional spring. If OPTION=TRANSVERSE is
specified in EGROUP SPRING command, then the spring action acts in the transverse
directions to n
1
to n
2
direction.
Option 4 (Geometric Nonlinear):
The 2 nodes of the spring are initially not coincident. The spring action is assumed to act in
the direction connecting the current positions of the two nodes. Hence, the spring direction
changes as the position of the two nodes changes. Figure ENODES-10 illustrates the use of
this option.
ENODES
el n1 id1 n2
id1 = 1 for translational spring and id1 = 4 for torsional spring.
Examples of input for options 1 to 3 are given in the following tables. Table ENODES-1 covers
the translational spring elements, and the Table ENODES-2 covers the torsional spring
elements.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ENODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
DELETE ENODES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
NODE-DELETE
NODE-DELETE {YES/NO} allows for the deletion of unattached nodes along with the
element deletion. The default is YES.
ENODES
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
(b) 4-, 8- &9-node quadrilaterals
l
l
l
l
l
l
l l
l
l
l
(a) 3-, 6- &7-node triangles
Fig. ENODES-1: Node numbering of 2-D elements
l
l
l l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
8
5
6
7
8
5
6
7
9
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
4
8
Figure ENODES-2: Node numbering convention for
the 27-node brick element
6
13
5
16
15
7
14
17
9
1
18
2
10
3
20
11
19
12
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Nodes 1 to 8 are at element vertices.
Nodes 9 to 20 are on element edges.
Node 21 is at the center of the element.
Nodes 22 to 27 are on the element faces.
10
18
19
14
15
13
5, 8, 16
17, 20, 25
9
11
2
3
6
7
1, 4, 12
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l l
l
l
l
26
l22
21 l
27
l
l
24
23l
ENODES
(e) 20-node brick
(b) 8-node brick
Figure ENODES-3: Node numbering of the elements derived fromthe 27-node brick
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
4
8
6
13
16
15
7 14
17
9
1
18
5
10 3
20
11
19
12
21
l l
l l
l l
l
2
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
4
8
6
13
16
15
7 14
17
9
1
18
5
10 3
20
11
19
12
l l
l l
l l
l
2
4
8
6
7
1
5
3
l l
l l
l l
l
2
(g) 21-node brick
1,2,3,4,
9,10,11,12
19 18
20
17
14
15
7
8
16
13
5
6
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
(f) 13-node pyramid
1,2,3,4,
9,10,11,12
19 18
20
17
14
15
7
8
16
13
5
6
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
(h) 14-node pyramid
l
27
2 3
6
7
5, 8
1, 4
l
l
l
l
l l
(c) 5-node pyramid
10
18
19
14
15
13
5, 8, 16
17, 20
9
11
(d) 15-node prism
2
3
6
7
1, 4, 12
l
l
l
l
l l
l
l
l
l
l
l l
l
l
l
l l
l
l
l
l l
l
(a) 6-node prism
1,2,3,4
7
8
5
6
l
l
l
l
l
ENODES
1
17
1
5
21
5
9
25
9
2
18
2
6
22
6
10
26
10
3
19
3
7
23
7
11
27
11
4
20
4
8
24
8
12
28
12
15
31
15
16
32
16
13
29
13
14
30
14
a) Midsurface nodes
b) Top-bottom nodes
Figure ENODES-5: Node numbering conventions for the shell element
For the 9-node shell, the
midsurface center node
is local node number 13.
For the 9-node shell, the
top-bottom center nodes
are local node numbers
13 and 29.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l l l l
Figure ENODES-4: Node numbering of tetrahedral elements
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l l
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
(a) 4-node tetrahedron (b) 10-node tetrahedron (c) 11-node tetrahedron
ENODES
X, u
Y, v
Z, w
Figure ENODES-7: Nonlinear Spring, Option 1
n (0)
1
n (0)
2
n
1
n
2
k
z
k
y
k
x
n and n initially coincident
k = f (u), k = f (v), k = f (w) and always
acting in global directions X, Y, Z.
Here, 3 spring elements are defined for
spring action in X, Y and Z directions.
1 2
x 1 y 2 z 3
X, u
Y, v
Z, w
n
1
n
2
ax, ay, az
direction
k
n (0)
1
n (0)
2
d n and n initially coincident
k = f(d)
spring stiffness between nodes always act
in the specified direction ax, ay, az.
1 2
5
9
2
6
10
3
7
11
1, 4
Figure ENODES-6: Node numbering for some triangular shell elements, midsurface nodes
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
5
2
6
3
7
1, 4
l
l
l
l
l
l
(c) 9-node triangular shell (b) 6-node triangular shell
1, 4
l
2
l
3
l
(a) 3-node triangular shell
ENODES
X, u
Y, v
Z, w
n (0)
1
n (0)
2
n
1
n
2
k
n (p)
2
n (0) and n (0) indicate the original
positions of the two spring nodes.
spring stiffness always acts in direction
n (0) to n (0).
line joining n to n (p) is parallel to line
joining n (0) to n (0).
1 2
1 2
1 2
1 2
X, u
Y, v
Z, w
n (0)
1
n (0)
2
n
1
n
2
k
ENODES
Global
direction
Z
X
Y
Different
node numbers
and noncoincident
coordinates
Different node
numbers and
initially coincident
coordinates
Grounded
node
Global
direction
Z
X
Y
n1
n2
id1 = 1
n1
n2
id1 = 3
n1 n2
id1 = 2
ENODES
el n1 id1 n2
(id2 not used)
n1
id1 = 1
n1
id1 = 3
n1
id1 = 2
ENODES
el n1 id1 0
(id2 not used)
n1
n2
ENODES
el n1 0 n2 0
EDATA
el ax ay az
Arbitrary direction Arbitrary direction
ENODES
el n1 0 0 0
EDATA
el ax ay az
n1 n1
n2
ENODES
el n1 1 n2
(id2 not used)
Table ENODES-1: Input cases for translational nonlinear spring elements
U
1
U
2
U
1
U
2
U
2
U
1
n1,n2
n1,n2
n1,n2
U
1
U
2 U
1
U
1
U
1
n1,n2
U
1
U
2
U
1
a
a
ENODES
Global
direction
Z
X
Y
Different
node numbers
and noncoincident
coordinates
Different node
numbers and
initially coincident
coordinates
Grounded
node
Global
direction
Z
X
Y
n1
n2
id1 = 4
n1
n2
id1 = 6
n1 n2
id1 = 5
ENODES
el n1 id1 n2
(id2 not used)
n1
id1 = 4
n1
id1 = 6
n1
id1 = 5
ENODES
el n1 id1 0
(id2 not used)
n1
n2
ENODES
el n1 0 n2 0
EDATA
el ax ay az
Arbitrary direction Arbitrary direction
ENODES
el n1 0 0 1
EDATA
el ax ay az
n1 n1
n2
ENODES
el n1 4 n2
(id2 not used)
Table ENODES-2: Input cases for torsional nonlinear spring elements
U
1
U
2
U
1
U
2
U
2
U
1
n1,n2
n1,n2
n1,n2
U
1
U
2
U
1
U
1
U
1
n1,n2
U
1
U
2
U
1
a
a
ENODES
MESH-CONVERT IN OUT ELEMENT-TYPE GROUP SKEW LOAD-INIT
NCOINCIDE
Converts 2-D solid, 3-D solid or shell elements by changing the number of nodes of the
element.
IN
OUT
These parameters are currently not used.
ELEMENT-TYPE [TWODSOLID]
Selects the type of element to be converted. {TWODSOLID/THREEDSOLID/SHELL/
ALL}
GROUP [ALL]
Selects the element group to be converted. GROUP = ALL means all element groups will be
converted. {ALL/>0}
SKEW [NO]
Indicates whether skew system is assigned to newly created nodes if all other nodes on the
element face are assigned a skew system.{NO/YES}
LOAD-INIT [NO]
Indicates whether existing nodal-based prescribed loads (e.g., displacement, temperature,
velocity) and initial conditions are applied on the newly created nodes.{NO/YES}
Note: - Load or initial condition will only be applied on a created mid-surface node if all
the eight nodes on the element face have the load or initial condition applied.
- If a load or initial condition is applied after this command, it will not be applied on
the newly created nodes. Hence, this command should normally be used at the
end of model creation.
NCOINCIDE [NEW]
Indicates whether nodal coincidence is checked with newly generated nodes or all existing
nodes. When a node already exists at a location, no new node will be created. {NEW/ALL}
NEW Check only with newly generated nodes.
ALL Check with all existing nodes.
MESH-CONVERT
Element Type Original Element Converted Element
8-node quadrilateral 9-node quadrilateral
6-node triangular 7-node triangular
Shell 8-node quadrilateral 9-node quadrilateral
20-node brick 27-node brick
10-node tetrahedral 11-node tetrahedral
2-D Solid
3-D Solid
ENODES-INTERFACE SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
(ENTRIES EL N1 N2 N3 ... NK)
el
i
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
... nk
i
Defines fluid-structure interface elements when potential-based fluid elements are connected
to solid elements.
Label number for the substructure to which subsequent nodal and element data refer.
ENTRIES
Defines, as column headings, the input for the subsequent tabular entries. Specifies the
element nodes for which the global node numbers shall be input. The column heading EL
must always be specified first, and the essential and optional nodal headings for each type of
element are:
el
i
n1
i
... n3
i
FLUID2-interface elements
el
i
n1
i
... n9
i
FLUID3-interface elements
el
i
Element number within the current substructure and element group.
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
...
nk
i
The global node numbers defining the element in the order given by ENTRIES.
Auxiliary commands
LIST ENODES-INTERFACE FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
DELETE ENODES-INTERFACE FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP
ENODES-INTERFACE
EDATA SUBSTRUCTURE GROUP UNDEFINED
el
i
material
i
area
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
epsin
i
gapwidth
i
intloc
i
(for TRUSS elements)
el
i
material
i
thick
i
bet
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
beti
i
itri
i
(for TWODSOLID elements)
el
i
material
i
ielx
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
maxes
i
maxesi
i
itri
i
(for THREEDSOLID elements)
el
i
material
i
section
i
endrelease
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
rigid1
i
rigid2
i
(for BEAM elements)
el
i
material
i
section
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epaxl
i
ephoop
i
(for ISOBEAM elements)
el
i
material
i
thick
i
bet
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
beti
i
meps11
i
meps22
i
meps12
i
flex11
i
flex22
i
flex12
i
(for PLATE elements)
el
i
material
i
bet
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
beti
i
iths
i
eps11
i
eps22
i
eps12
i
eps13
i
eps23
i
geps11
i
geps22
i
geps12
i
geps13
i
geps23
i
failure
i
(for SHELL elements)
el
i
material
i
section
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
epsin
i
(for PIPE elements)
el
i
matrixset
i
print
i
save
i
(for GENERAL elements)
el
i
propertyset
i
print
i
save
i
ax
i
ay
i
az
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
(for SPRING elements)
el
i
material
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
ifre
i
itri
i
(for FLUID2 elements)
el
i
material
i
ielx
i
print
i
save
i
tbirth
i
tdeath
i
intloc
i
ifre
i
itri
i
(for FLUID3 elements)
Specifies property data associated with individual elements in a group.
EDATA
Sec. 9.2 Element data EDATA
Label number for the substructure to which subsequent element data refer.
GROUP [currently active group]
UNDEFINED [IGNORE]
Indicates what action is taken if element specified in data line is not defined.
{IGNORE/ERROR}
IGNORE - Program ignores any undefined element specified.
ERROR - Program issues input error for undefined element and continues.
el
i
Element label number.
material
i
[element group default]
Material number. The material type must be the same as the default material type for the
element group.
print
i
[DEFAULT]
Controls printout of element results. The value DEFAULT corresponds to that given for
save
i
[DEFAULT]
Controls saving of element results to porthole file. The value DEFAULT corresponds to that
given for PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT.
tbirth
i
[0.0]
tdeath
i
[0.0]
Element birth and death times, respectively.
intloc
i
[0]
Integration point coordinates printout flag.
0 No printing of integration point coordinates.
1 Print integration point global coordinates.
area
i
[0.0]
Cross-sectional area. A 0.0 value indicates the element has the same cross-sectional area as
the element with the lowest label number in the group.
Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input EDATA
thick
i
[0.0]
Element thickness. A 0.0 value indicates the element has the same thickness as the element
with the lowest label number in the group.
ielx
i
iths
i
[0]
Indicates whether the transverse shear adjustment feature is used (1) or not (0). This feature
is only available for elastic shells. {0/1}
maxes
i
[0]
Material axes label number. See AXES-NODES.
bet
i
[0.0]
Material angle for orthotropic materials.
section
i
[0]
Cross-section label number. See CROSS-SECTION.
endrelease
i
[0]
End release label number. See ENDRELEASE.
propertyset
i
Propertyset label number. See PROPERTYSET.
matrixset
i
Matrix set label number. See MATRIXSET.
maxesi
i
[0]
Initial strain axes label number. See AXES-NODES.
beti
i
[0.0]
Initial strain angle.
epsin
i
[0.0]
Initial axial strain (TRUSS, BEAM, PIPE elements), or initial force if BEAM OPTION=BOLT
is used.
epaxl
i
[0.0]
Initial axial strain (ISOBEAM elements).
Sec. 9.2 Element data EDATA
ephoop
i
[0.0]
Initial hoop strain.
meps11
i
[0.0]
meps22
i
[0.0]
meps12
i
[0.0]
Initial membrane strains.
flex11
i
[0.0]
flex22
i
[0.0]
flex12
i
[0.0]
Initial flexural strains.
eps11
i
[0.0]
eps22
i
[0.0]
eps12
i
[0.0]
eps13
i
[0.0]
eps23
i
[0.0]
Initial strains.
geps11
i
[0.0]
geps22
i
[0.0]
geps12
i
[0.0]
geps13
i
[0.0]
geps23
i
[0.0]
Initial strain gradients.
gapwidth
i
[0.0]
Initial gap width of element. The gap option is used only for the 2-node TRUSS element with
a PLASTIC-BILINEAR or PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR material model.
failure
i
[0]
Label number of failure model.
ifre
i
[0]
This option is not supported from Version 8.0 onwards.
itri
i
[0]
Collapsed element indicator.
0 Collapsed quadrilateral or hexahedral element.
-1 True triangular or tetrahedral element.
ax
i
[0.0]
ay
i
[0.0]
az
i
[0.0]
Direction of grounded spring element.
rigid1
i
[0.0]
rigid2
i
[0.0]
Length of rigid end zones at the start (rigid1) and/or end (rigid2) of a BEAM element. See
EGROUP BEAM.
Note: To define shell element thickness command ELTHICKNESS should be used.
EDATA
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES FROM TO
Copies over all elements and nodes from one finite element analysis program to another finite
element analysis program, creating new element groups for the destination program. If, for a
particular element group type, there is no equivalent group type available in the destination
program the source group will not be copied.
FROM [ADINA]
The source finite element analysis program. {ADINA/ADINA-T/ADINA-F}
TO
The destination finite element analysis program. {ADINA/ADINA-T/ADINA-F}
The following table indicates the source-destination element type mapping used by this
command:
SOURCE DESTINATION
ADINA ADINA-T ADINA-F
TRUSS ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
TWODSOLID TWODCONDUCTION TWODFLUID
THREEDSOLID THREEDCONDUCTION THREEDFLUID
BEAM ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
ISOBEAM ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
PLATE SHELLDCONDUCTION <not copied>
SHELL SHELLCONDUCTION <not copied>
PIPE ONEDCONDUCTION <not copied>
SPRING <not copied> <not copied>
GENERAL <not copied> <not copied>
FLUID2 TWODCONDUCTION TWODFLUID
FLUID3 THREEDCONDUCTION THREEDFLUID
ADINA-T ADINA ADINA-F
ONEDCONDUCTION TRUSS <not copied>
TWODCONDUCTION TWODSOLID TWODFLUID
THREEDCONDUCTION THREEDSOLID THREEDFLUID
CONVECTION <not copied> CONVECTION
RADIATION <not copied> RADIATION
SHELLCONDUCTION SHELL <not copied>
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES
ADINA-F ADINA ADINA-T
TWODFLUID TWODSOLID TWODCONDUCTION
THREEDFLUID THREEDSOLID THREEDCONDUCTION
CONVECTION <not copied> CONVECTION
RADIATION <not copied> RADIATION
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES
DELETE-FE-MODEL PROGRAM
Deletes all finite element data associated with a particular analysis program from the model
database - including element groups, elements, nodes, contact groups, contact-surfaces, and
contact segments.
PROGRAM [ADINA]
The finite element analysis program for which all data is to be deleted. {ADINA/
ADINA-T/ADINA-F}
DELETE-FE-MODEL
REVOLVE NAME EGROUP XA YA ZA X0 Y0 Z0 ANGLE NEREV
NODES NFIRST EFIRST NCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE
DELETE-EGROUP LOADS-ELEMENT AXES-ORTHOTROPIC
AXES-INITIAL BC-FIXITY RBAR-NODESET
RBAR-ELEMSET RBAR-EGROUP RBAR-TYPE
RBAR-SECTION RBAR-MATERIAL CGROUP CNAME
DELETE-CGROUP RBAR-AREA ALL-GROUP
Generates THREEDSOLID or FLUID3 elements by revolving 2D elements about an axis.
The rule for generating a new element group type is
TWODSOLID > THREEDSOLID
FLUID2 > FLUID3
NAME [current highest element group label + 1]
Element group label number of the volume elements. If NAME already exists, it must be a
THREEDSOLID or FLUID3 element group.
EGROUP
Previously defined 2D element group label.
XA [0.0]
YA [0.0]
ZA [0.0]
Components of the rotation axis direction.
X0 [0.0]
Y0 [0.0]
Z0 [0.0]
Global coordinates of the origin of the axis of rotation.
ANGLE
Angle of rotation (in degrees).
Note: ANGLE must be in the range <-360,360>. The sign of the angle is given by
considering the right hand rule.
NEREV [1]
The number of elements in the direction of rotation.
NODES [0]
Number of nodes for the revolved 3D elements. {0/8/20/27}
REVOLVE
Sec. 9.2 Element data REVOLVE
If NODES=0, then the following rule applies:
Max. number of nodes Number of nodes
in 2D element group in 3D element group
4 8
8 20
9 27
NFIRST [1]
The starting node label for the generated nodes.
EFIRST [1]
The starting element label for the generated elements.
NCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with existing nodes. If
NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be checked against
existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance (specified by
NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}
NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates of a
location againts existing nodes.
DELETE-EGROUP [YES]
Allows to preserve or delete original 2D element group, after the volume element group is
generated. {YES/NO}
LOADS-ELEMENT [NO]
Indicates whether element loading acting on the edges of the 2D elements will be converted
to element loadings on the faces of the 3D elements. {NO/YES}
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC [NO]
Indicates whether the material axis systems of the 2D elements will be converted to initial
strain axis systems for 3D elements. {NO/YES}
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN [NO]
Indicates whether the initial strain axis systems of the 2D elements to 3D elements will be
converted to initial strain axis systems for the 3D elements. {NO/YES}
BC-FIXITY [NO]
Indicates whether fixity boundary conditions will be assigned to the generated nodes
corresponding to the fixity conditions on the original nodes. {NO/YES}
RBAR-NODESET [0]
Label number of a node set defined by the command NODESET. If this parameter references a
node set that is defined, truss or beam elements (as specified by parameter RBAR-TYPE) will
be generated by connecting the nodes along the revolved direction.
RBAR-ELEMSET [0]
Label number of an element set defined by the command ELEMENTSET. If this parameter
references an element set that is defined, the elements in the element set will be duplicated in
the revolved direction.
RBAR-EGROUP [(current highest element group label number) + 1]
Label number of an element group for the elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET. Note that elements generated from parameter RBAR-ELEMSET are appended to
the existing element group.
RBAR-TYPE [TRUSS]
Specifies the type of element to be generated from parameter RBAR-NODESET. {TRUSS/
BEAM}
RBAR-SECTION [1]
Label number of a cross section to be assigned to beam elements generated from parameter
RBAR-NODESET. Note that cross sections can be defined by the command CROSS-SEC-
TION.
RBAR-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of a material to be assigned to elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.
CGROUP
Specifies a 2-D contact group to be used for generating 3-D contact surfaces. Note that only
2-D contact surface elements which are attached to the mesh to be revolved will be used for
generating 3-D contact surface elements.
CNAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]
Label number of 3-D contact group that will contain the generated 3-D contact surface
elements. If CNAME already exists (it must be a 3-D contact group), the generated
contact surface elements will be added to the existing contact group.
DELETE-CGROUP [NO]
Indicates whether the 2-D contact group will be deleted after the 3-D contact surface ele-
ments are generated. When all the contact surfaces in the 2-D contact group has been used
to generate the necessary 3-D contact surfaces, the parameter should be set to YES. {YES/
NO}
REVOLVE
RBAR-AREA [1.0]
Specifies the cross-section area for truss elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.
REVOLVE
ALL-GROUP [NO]
Defines whether all groups are acted upon by this command.
{NO/YES}
NO Revolve only the specified group
YES Revolve all applicable element groups and contact groups. Parameters NAME,
EGROUP, CGROUP and CNAME are ignored.
SWEEP NAME EGROUP DX DY DZ NESWP NODES NFIRST EFIRST
NCOINCIDE NTOLERANCE DELETE-EGROUP
LOADS-ELEMENT AXES-ORTHOTROPIC AXES-INITIAL
BC-FIXITY RBAR-NODESET RBAR-ELEMSET
RBAR-EGROUP RBAR-TYPE RBAR-SECTION
RBAR-MATERIAL CGROUP CNAME
DELETE-CGROUP RBAR-AREA LINE ALIGNMENT ALL-GROUP
Generates a volume of 3D elements by extruding 2D elements along a vector or a line.
The rule for generating a new element group type is
TWODSOLID > THREEDSOLID
FLUID2 > FLUID3
NAME [current highest element group label + 1]
Element group label number of the volume elements. If NAME already exists, it must be a
THREEDSOLID or FLUID3 element group.
EGROUP
Previously defined 2D element group label.
DX [0.0]
DY [0.0]
DZ [0.0]
Vector components defining the direction of extrusion.
NESWP [1]
The number of elements in the direction of extrusion.
NODES [0]
Number of nodes for the extruded 3D elements. {0/8/20/27}
If NODES=0, then the following rule applies
Max. number of nodes Number of nodes
in 2D element group in 3D element group
4 8
8 20
9 27
NFIRST [1]
The starting node label for the generated nodes.
SWEEP
EFIRST [1]
The starting element label for the generated elements.
NCOINCIDE [NO]
Indicates whether the locations of new nodes generated are compared with existing nodes. If
NCOINCIDE=YES, then the location of generated generated nodes will be checked against
existing nodes. For each generated node, if it lies within the tolerance (specified by
NTOLERANCE) of an existing node, no new node will be created. {YES/NO}
NTOLERANCE [1.0E-5]
If NCOINCIDE=YES parameter provides a tolerance for checking the global coordinates of a
location againts existing nodes.
DELETE-EGROUP [YES]
Allows to preserve or delete original 2D element group, after the volume element group is
generated. {YES/NO}
LOADS-ELEMENT [NO]
Indicates whether element loading acting on the edges of the 2D elements will be converted
to element loadings on the faces of the 3D elements. {NO/YES}
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC [NO]
Indicates whether the material axis systems of the 2D elements will be converted to initial
strain axis systems for 3D elements. {NO/YES}
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN [NO]
Indicates whether the initial strain axis systems of the 2D elements to 3D elements will be
converted to initial strain axis systems for the 3D elements. {NO/YES}
Note: We use the command SWEEP to be consistent with BODY SWEEP command for
extrusion along a vector or sweeping along a line. Using the more general term
SWEEP allows this command to be extended for sweeping 2D elements along a line
to form 3D elements.
BC-FIXITY [NO]
Indicates whether fixity boundary conditions will be assigned to the generated nodes
corresponding to the fixity conditions on the original nodes. {NO/YES}
RBAR-NODESET [0]
Label number of a node set defined by the command NODESET. If this parameter references a
node set that is defined, truss or beam elements (as specified by parameter RBAR-TYPE) will
be generated by connecting the nodes along the swept direction.
SWEEP
Chap. 9 Direct finite element data input SWEEP
RBAR-ELEMSET [0]
Label number of an element set defined by the command ELEMENTSET. If this parameter
references an element set that is defined, the elements in the element set will be duplicated in
the swept direction.
RBAR-EGROUP [(current highest element group label number) + 1]
Label number of an element group for the elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET. Note that elements generated from parameter RBAR-ELEMSET are appended to
the existing element group.
RBAR-TYPE [TRUSS]
Specifies the type of element to be generated from parameter RBAR-NODESET. {TRUSS/
BEAM}
RBAR-SECTION [1]
Label number of a cross section to be assigned to beam elements generated from parameter
RBAR-NODESET. Note that cross sections can be defined by the command CROSS-SEC-
TION.
RBAR-MATERIAL [1]
Label number of a material to be assigned to elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.
CGROUP
Specifies a 2-D contact group to be used for generating 3-D contact surfaces. Note that only
2-D contact surface elements which are attached to the mesh to be swept will be used for
generating 3-D contact surface elements.
CNAME [(current highest contact group label number) + 1]
Label number of 3-D contact group that will contain the generated 3-D contact surface
elements. If CNAME already exists (it must be a 3-D contact group), the generated contact
surface elements will be added to the existing contact group.
DELETE-CGROUP [NO]
Indicates whether the 2-D contact group will be deleted after the 3-D contact surface ele-
ments are generated. When all the contact surfaces in the 2-D contact group has been used
to generate the necessary 3-D contact surfaces, the parameter should be set to YES. {NO/
YES}
RBAR-AREA [1.0]
Specifies the cross-section area for truss elements generated from parameter RBAR-
NODESET.
LINE
Line label of the line used for sweeping.
ALIGNMENT [NORMAL]
Specifies the alignment of the 2D meshed face during sweeping.
NORMAL : 2D face normal is at fixed angle to line tangent.
PARALLEL : 2D face normal always points to the same direction.
ALL-GROUP [NO]
Defines whether all groups are acted upon by this command.
{NO/YES}
NO Revolve only the specified group
YES Revolve all applicable element groups and contact groups. Parameters NAME,
EGROUP, CGROUP and CNAME are ignored.
SWEEP
BOUNDARIES SUBSTRUCTURE
node
i
ux
i
uy
i
uz
i
rx
i
ry
i
rz
i
phi
i
ovalization
i
warping
i
pore
i
temperature
i
beam-warp
i
Assigns fixed/free boundary conditions to nodes. All of the nodes belong to the specified
substructure.
Substructure label number.
node
i
Node label number.
ux
i
[FREE]
uy
i
[FREE]
uz
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to displacement degrees of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}
rx
i
[FREE]
ry
i
[FREE]
rz
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to rotation degrees of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}
phi
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to the fluid potential degree of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}
ovalization
i
[FREE]
warping
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to the pipe ovalization and warping degrees of freedom.
{FIXED/FREE}
pore
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to pore pressure degree of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}
temperature
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to temperature degree of freedom. Temperature degree of
freedom applies only to heat transfer or thermo-mechanical coupled analysis. {FIXED/
FREE}
BOUNDARIES
beam-warp
i
[FREE]
Boundary conditions applied to beam-warp degree of freedom. {FIXED/FREE}
Auxiliary commands
LIST BOUNDARIES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE OPTION
Option defines listing nodes: input nodes or all model nodes. {INPUT/MODEL}
DELETE BOUNDARIES FIRST LAST SUBSTRUCTURE
BOUNDARIES
CONSTRAINT-NODE NAME SLAVENODE SLAVEDOF GENERALIZED-
CONSTRAINT
masternode
i
masterdof
i
beta
i
slavenode
i
slavedof
i
Specifies a constraint equation which expresses a slave (dependent) degree of freedom as a
linear combination of a set of master (independent) degrees of freedom.
A constraint equation can only reference nodes in the main structure.
NAME [(highest constraint equation label number) + 1]
The label number of the constraint equation.
SLAVENODE
The label number of the slave node.
SLAVEDOF
The degree of freedom associated with the slave node.
{X-TRANSLATION/Y-TRANSLATION/Z-TRANSLATION/X-ROTATION/
Y-ROTATION/Z-ROTATION/FLUID-POTENTIAL/TEMPERATURE}
Generate generalized constraints instead of standard constraints. {NO/YES}
masternode
i
The label number of the master node for the i
th
independent term of the constraint equation.
masterdof
i
The degree of freedom of the master node for the i
th
independent term of the constraint
equation. Allowable values are the same as for SLAVEDOF.
beta
i
[1.0]
The coefficient of the i
th
independent term of the constraint equation.
slavenode
i
slavedof
i
The degree of freedom associated with the slave node.
CONSTRAINT-NODE
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONSTRAINT-NODE FIRST LAST
DELETE CONSTRAINT-NODE FIRST LAST
RIGIDLINK-NODE NAME SLAVENODE MASTERNODE DISPLACEMENTS
DOFSI
slavenode
i
masternode
i
displacements
i
Specifies a rigid link between two nodes. A rigid link can only be specified between nodes in
the main structure.
NAME [(highest rigid link label number) + 1]
The label number of the rigid link.
SLAVENODE
MASTERNODE
The label number of the master node.
Selects kinematic formulation for rigid link. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
SMALL Small displacement formulation.
LARGE Large displacement formulation.
DEFAULT As set by KINEMATICS.
slavenode
i
masternode
i
The label number of the master node.
displacements
i
[DEFAULT]
Selects kinematic formulation for rigid link. Note that displacement
i
= DEFAULT means that
the formulation specified in the KINEMATICS command is used. See the Theory and
Modeling Guide. {DEFAULT/SMALL/LARGE}
DOFSI [123456]
Specifies the slave degrees of freedom (dof) to be constrained to the master node. DOFSI
must contain 1 to 6 digits ranging from 1 to 6. Dofs 1, 2, 3 indicate X, Y, Z translations and 4,
5, 6 indicate X, Y, Z rotations.
Auxiliary commands
LIST RIGIDLINK-NODE FIRST LAST
DELETE RIGIDLINK-NODE FIRST LAST
RIGIDLINK-NODE
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE TYPE GROUP
node
i
element
i
Enforces the zero-slope-of-pipe-skin condition in the longitudinal direction for pipe element
nodes. This condition is applicable in the case of a rigid flange (TYPE = FLANGE) or when
symmetry is to be enforced (TYPE = SYMMETRY). These conditions apply to pipe element
nodes for the element group specified. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
TYPE [FLANGE]
FLANGE The flange condition is applied at the specified nodes. Both
ovalization and warping at these nodes are suppressed.
SYMMETRY The symmetry condition is applied at the specified nodes. The
ovalization at these nodes is left free but the warping is suppressed.
The element group for each pipe element node specified in this command.
node
i
element
i
Label number of the element that contains the node.
Auxiliary commands
LIST OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE FIRST LAST TYPE
GROUP
DELETE OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE FIRST LAST TYPE
GROUP
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE
FSI-FACE NAME DIMENSION
cell
i
n1
i
n2
i
n16
i
Defines fsi boundary using element face node for ADINA.
NAME [(current highest fsi boundary label number) + 1]
DIMENSION [3]
Dimension of FSI boundary. {3/2}
cell
i
Label of a cell on FSI boundary.
n1
i
n16
i
Cells node numbers.
Auxiliary commands
LIST FSI-FACE FIRST LAST
DELETE FSI-FACE FIRST LAST
FSI-FACE
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
direction
i
factor
i
ncur
i
artm
i
nodaux
i
Applies concentrated loads to nodes.
The magnitude of the load is given by entry factor
i
, which may be modified (except when
load cases are employed) via a timefunction given by entry ncur
i
.
Several concentrated loads can be defined for the same node and direction. In this case the
loads are added.
Identifying number for the substructure to which subsequent nodes refer.
REUSE [currently active reuse]
Identifying number for the reuse to which subsequent nodes refer.
node
i
The label number of a node to which the load is to be applied.
direction
i
The direction in which the load acts.
1 x-translation force (global or skew).
2 y-translation force (global or skew).
3 z-translation force (global or skew).
4 x-rotation moment (global or skew).
5 y-rotation moment (global or skew).
6 z-rotation moment (global or skew).
7 Follower force acting from nodaux
i
to node
i
.
8 Follower moment about the direction from nodaux
i
to node
i
.
factor
i
[1.0]
Multiplying factor, giving load intensity.
ncur
i
[1]
The label number of a time function.
artm
i
[0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS
Sec. 9.4 Loads
nodaux
i
[0]
Auxiliary node used to control follower loads. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary Commands
LIST APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS SUBSTRUCTURE RESUSE
DELETE APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
direction
i
factor
i
ncur
i
artm
i
iddl
i
unload
i
timeu
i
forceu
i
ncuru
i
Specifies prescribed displacements applied to nodes.
The magnitude of the displacement is given by entry factor
i
, which may be modified (except
when load cases are employed) via a timefunction given by entry ncur
i
.
Several prescribed displacements can be defined for the same node and direction; in this case
the displacements are averaged.
Identifying number for the substructure to which subsequent nodes refer.
Identifying number for the reuse to which subsequent nodes refer.
node
i
The label number of the node for which the displacement is to be prescribed.
direction
i
The direction in which the displacement is prescribed. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
1 x-translation (global or skew)
2 y-translation (global or skew)
3 z-translation (global or skew)
4 x-rotation (global or skew)
5 y-rotation (global or skew)
6 z-rotation (global or skew)
11 - 16 Ovalization degrees of freedom.
21 - 26 Warping degrees of freedom.
factor
i
[1.0]
Multiplying factor, giving displacement magnitude.
ncur
i
[1]
artm
i
[0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent prescribed displacements.
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS
Sec. 9.4 Loads
iddl
i
[0]
Specifies whether the prescribed displacement is applied to the original configuration or the
deformed configuration for a restart analysis.
0 original configuration
1 deformed configuration
unload
i
[NO]
Specifies the type of unloadng for prescribed displacement.{TIME/FORCE/NO}
timeu
i
[0.0]
If unload
i
=TIME, this specifies the time at which unloading of prescribed displacement
starts.
forceu
i
If unload
i
=FORCE, this specifies the force (or reaction) value at the prescribed displacement
at which unloading starts.
ncuru
i
[1]
Label number of a time function for the unloading of prescribed displacement.
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
DELETE APPLY DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS
APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS
node1
i
node2
i
ncur
i
artm
i
iddl
i
Applies electromagnetic loads to nodes.
The nodes must be part of the main structure. The load corresponds to electromagnetic
forces induced by short-circuit currents flowing between pairs of nodes. The magnitude of
the short-circuit current is governed by a timefunction given by entry ncur
i
.
node1
i
node2
i
A pair of nodes between which a short-circuit current flows.
ncur
i
[1]
The label number of a time function, giving the time dependent value of the short-circuit
current.
artm
i
[0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent loads.
iddl
i
[0]
Indicator for deformation-dependent loading. {0/1}
0 Deformation-independent.
1 Deformation-dependent.
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS
DELETE APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS
APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS
Sec. 9.4 Loads
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES
node
i
factor
i
ncur
i
artm
i
Applies internal pressures to pipe element nodes. The nodes must be part of the main
structure.
The magnitude of the pipe internal pressure is given by entry factor
i
, which may be
modified by a time function given by entry ncur
i
. Pipe internal pressure loading cannot be
used in a load case, nor when automatic load displacement control is employed.
Several pipe internal pressure loads can be defined for the same node; in this case the loads
are averaged.
node
i
The label number of the node to which the load is to be applied.
factor
i
[1.0]
Multiplying factor giving the internal pressure magnitude.
ncur
i
[1]
artm
i
[0.0]
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES
DELETE APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES
APPLY TEMPERATURES
node
i
factor
i
ncur
i
artm
i
This command defines temperatures applied to nodes. The actual applied temperature is the
reference temperature plus the temperature applied in this command. The reference tempera-
ture is defined in command TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE..
Several temperatures can be defined for the same node; in this case the temperatures are
averaged.
node
i
The label number of the node at which the temperature is to be prescribed.
factor
i
[1.0]
Multiplying factor.
ncur
i
[1]
artm
i
[0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent temperatures.
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY TEMPERATURES
DELETE APPLY TEMPERATURES
APPLY TEMPERATURES
Sec. 9.4 Loads
APPLY TGRADIENTS
node
i
factor
i
ncur
i
artm
i
Prescribes temperature gradients at shell element midsurface nodes of the main structure.
The magnitude of the temperature gradient (degrees/unit length) is given by entry factor
i
,
and may be modified by a time function given by entry ncur
i
. Shell midsurface nodes
which have no temperature gradient specified will take the value given by TEMPERATURE-
REFERENCE.
Several temperature gradients can be defined for the same node; in this case the temperature
gradients are averaged.
node
i
The label number of a shell midsurface node at which the temperature gradient is prescribed.
factor
i
[1.0]
Multiplying factor, giving the temperature gradient at the node.
ncur
i
[1]
artm
i
[0.0]
The arrival time associated with time dependent temperature gradients.
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY TGRADIENTS
DELETE APPLY TGRADIENTS
APPLY TGRADIENTS
APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS NODE-DEPENDENCE NICONS NRCONS
icons
i
rcons
i
Establishes the presence of user-supplied loads, which are computed using the user-supplied
subroutines USERSL and IUSER. See the Theory and Modeling Guide for details regarding
these subroutines.
NODE-DEPENDENCE [1]
1 Load contribution calculated in the user-supplied load subroutine for a node
depends only on nodal quantities at that node.
2 Load contribution calculated in the user-supplied load subroutine may depend on
nodal quantities at other nodes.
NICONS [0]
Number of integer constants to be input in the accompanying data lines.
NRCONS [0]
Number of real constants to be input in the accompanying data lines.
icons
i
[0]
Integer constant passed to user-supplied subroutine USERSL.
rcons
i
[0.0]
Real constant passed to user-supplied subroutine USERSL.
Auxiliary commands
LIST APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS
DELETE APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS
APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS
Sec. 9.4 Loads
LOADS-ELEMENT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP LOAD-TYPE
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(TWODSOLID elements, LOAD-TYPE = IN-PLANE)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(TWODSOLID elements, LOAD-TYPE = OUT-PLANE)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(THREEDSOLID elements)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(BEAM elements)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(ISOBEAM elements)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(PLATE elements)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(SHELL elements, LOAD-TYPE = SURFACE)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
nodaux
i
(SHELL elements, LOAD-TYPE = LINE)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(PIPE elements)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(FLUID2 elements)
el
i
face
i
p1
i
p2
i
p3
i
p4
i
ncur
i
artm
i
idirn
i
iddl
i
(FLUID3 elements)
Applies distributed loads onto elements, either line loads or pressure loads.
The substructure number for all elements referenced by this command.
The reuse number for all elements referenced by this command.
LOADS-ELEMENT
The element group number for all elements referenced by this command.
LOAD-TYPE [IN-PLANE (TWODSOLID elements)]
[SURFACE (SHELL elements)]
A subtype load indicator for TWODSOLID elements and SHELL elements.
IN-PLANE In-plane line loads for TWODSOLID elements edges.
OUT-PLANE Out-of-plane surface loads for TWODSOLID elements.
SURFACE Surface loads for SHELL elements.
LINE Line loads for SHELL element edges.
el
i
The label number of the element to which the load is applied.
face
i
A number giving the location onto which the load is applied. See Tables 1 and 2 below.
p1
i
[0.0]
p2
i
[0.0]
p3
i
[0.0]
p4
i
[0.0]
Load magnitude at element vertex nodes. The sign convention used is such that the load is
positive if directed into/toward the element.
ncur
i
[1]
artm
i
[0.0]
idirn
i
[0]
Load direction filter.
0 Total load is applied.
1 x-component of load is applied.
2 y-component of load is applied.
3 z-component of load is applied.
LOADS-ELEMENT
Sec. 9.4 Loads
iddl
i
[0]
Deformation dependent loading flag.
0 Load is independent of structural deformation.
1 Load depends on structural deformation.
nodaux
i
[0]
An auxiliary node used when a line load is applied to shell elements, giving the plane of line
load application.
Auxiliary commands
LIST LOADS-ELEMENT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP
LOAD-TYPE
DELETE LOADS-ELEMENT SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE GROUP
LOAD-TYPE
Face parameter conventions:
Table 1: True triangular and tetrahedral elements
Face Applicable element types Location
1 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID opposite node 1
4 THREEDSOLID opposite node 4
LOADS-ELEMENT
Table 2: Elements including degenerated elements, but excluding true triangular and true
hexahedron elements (r, s, t refer to local element coordinates)
Face Applicable element types Location
1 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID r = 1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE r-s plane load
2 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID s = 1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
BEAM, ISOBEAM, PIPE r-t plane load
-1 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID r = -1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
-2 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID s = -1 side/face
FLUID2, FLUID3
3 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID t = 1 side/face
FLUID3, PLATE, SHELL
-3 TWODSOLID, THREEDSOLID t = -1 side/face
FLUID3, PLATE, SHELL
4 SHELL line load, N4-N1 side,
r-s plane load
r-s plane load
-4 SHELL line load, N2-N3 side,
r-s plane load
r-s plane load
r-t plane load
r-t plane load
r-t plane load
r-t plane load
LOADS-ELEMENT
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
ux
i
uy
i
uz
i
rx
i
ry
i
rz
i
f
i
Specifies initial accelerations at nodes. Only nonzero initial accelerations need be assigned.
REUSE [current reuse]
The reuse for each node specified in this command.
node
i
Label number of a node at which initial accelerations are given.
ux
i
[0.0]
uy
i
[0.0]
uz
i
[0.0]
The initial accelerations for the displacement degrees of freedom at node
i
.
rx
i
[0.0]
ry
i
[0.0]
rz
i
[0.0]
The initial accelerations for the rotational degrees of freedom at node
i
.
f
i
[0.0]
The initial 2
nd
time derivative of fluid potential or hydrostatic pressure at node
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL ACCELERATIONS
DELETE INITIAL ACCELERATIONS
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS
INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
ux
i
uy
i
uz
i
rx
i
ry
i
rz
i
f
i
Specifies initial displacements to nodes. Only nonzero initial displacements need be as-
signed.
node
i
Label number of a node at which initial displacements are given.
ux
i
[0.0]
uy
i
[0.0]
uz
i
[0.0]
The initial displacements for the translational degrees of freedom at node
i
.
rx
i
[0.0]
ry
i
[0.0]
rz
i
[0.0]
The initial displacements for the rotational degrees of freedom at node
i
.
f
i
[0.0]
The initial fluid potential or hydrostatic pressure at node
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS
DELETE INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS
INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS
INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS
node
i
kappa-11
i
kappa-22
i
kappa-12
i
Specifies initial flexural strains at plate element nodes. Only nonzero flexural strains need be
assigned.
node
i
Label number of a plate element at which initial flexural strains are given.
kappa-11
i
[0.0]
kappa-22
i
[0.0]
kappa-12
i
[0.0]
Flexural strain components kappa11, kappa22, kappa12. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS
DELETE INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS
INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS
INITIAL OVALIZATIONS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
ov1
i
ov2
i
ov3
i
ov4
i
ov5
i
ov6
i
Specifies initial ovalizations at pipe element nodes. Only nonzero ovalizations need be
assigned.
node
i
Label number of a pipe element node at which initial ovalizations are given.
ov1
i
[0.0]
ov2
i
[0.0]
ov3
i
[0.0]
ov4
i
[0.0]
ov5
i
[0.0]
ov6
i
[0.0]
The initial ovalization magnitudes at node
i
. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL OVALIZATIONS
DELETE INITIAL OVALIZATIONS
INITIAL OVALIZATIONS
INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES
node
i
pin
i
Specifies initial pipe internal pressures at pipe element nodes. Only nonzero pipe internal
pressures need be assigned.
node
i
Label number of a pipe element node at which initial internal pressure is given.
pin
i
[0.0]
The initial pipe internal pressure at node
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES
DELETE INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES
INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES
INITIAL STRAINS
node
i
stran-11
i
stran-22
i
stran-33
i
stran-12
i
stran-13
i
stran-23
i
Specifies initial strains at nodes. Only nonzero initial strains need be assigned.
Orientation of initial strain axes is defined by command AXES-INITIALSTRAIN.
node
i
Label number of a node at which initial strains are given.
stran-11
i
[0.0]
stran-22
i
[0.0]
stran-33
i
[0.0]
stran-12
i
[0.0]
stran-13
i
[0.0]
stran-23
i
[0.0]
The strain components at node
i
, in the coordinate system of the element(s) to which node
i
is
attached. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL STRAINS
DELETE INITIAL STRAINS
INITIAL STRAINS
INITIAL SGRADIENTS
node
i
sgrad-11
i
sgrad-22
i
sgrad-12
i
sgrad-13
i
sgrad-23
i
Specifies initial strain gradients at shell element midsurface nodes. Only nonzero strain
gradients need be assigned. Orientation of initial strain gradient axes is defined by command
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN.
node
i
Label number of a shell element midsurface node at which initial strain gradients are given.
sgrad-11
i
[0.0]
sgrad-22
i
[0.0]
sgrad-12
i
[0.0]
sgrad-13
i
[0.0]
sgrad-23
i
[0.0]
The strain gradient components at node
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL SGRADIENTS
DELETE INITIAL SGRADIENTS
INITIAL SGRADIENTS
INITIAL TEMPERATURES
node
i
temp
i
Specifies initial temperatures at nodes. Only temperatures that are different from the initial
reference temperature, defined by TEMPERATURE REFERENCE, need be assigned.
node
i
Label number of a node at which initial temperature is given.
temp
i
[0.0]
The initial temperature at node
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL TEMPERATURES
DELETE INITIAL TEMPERATURES
INITIAL TEMPERATURES
INITIAL TGRADIENTS
node
i
tgradient
i
Specifies initial temperature gradients at shell element midsurface nodes. Only initial tempera-
ture gradients that are different than the reference temperature gradient, defined by TEM-
PERATURE-REFERENCE, need be assigned.
node
i
Label number of a shell element midsurface node at which initial temperature gradient is
given.
tgradient
i
[0.0]
The initial temperature gradient at node
i
, measured in degrees/unit length in the shell normal
direction.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL TGRADIENTS
DELETE INITIAL TGRADIENTS
INITIAL TGRADIENTS
INITIAL VELOCITIES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
ux
i
uy
i
uz
i
rx
i
ry
i
rz
i
f
i
Specifies initial velocities at nodes. Only nonzero initial velocities need be assigned.
node
i
Label number of a node at which initial velocities are given.
ux
i
[0.0]
uy
i
[0.0]
uz
i
[0.0]
The initial velocities for the displacement degrees of freedom at node
i
.
rx
i
[0.0]
ry
i
[0.0]
rz
i
[0.0]
The initial velocities for the rotational degrees of freedom at node
i
.
f
i
[0.0]
The initial 1
st
time derivative of fluid potential or hydrostatic pressure at node
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL VELOCITIES
DELETE INITIAL VELOCITIES
INITIAL VELOCITIES
INITIAL WARPINGS SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
node
i
warp1
i
warp2
i
warp3
i
warp4
i
warp5
i
warp6
i
Specifies initial warpings at pipe element nodes. Only nonzero warpings need be assigned.
node
i
Label number of a pipe element node at which initial warpings are given.
warp1
i
[0.0]
warp2
i
[0.0]
warp3
i
[0.0]
warp4
i
[0.0]
warp5
i
[0.0]
warp6
i
[0.0]
The initial warping magnitudes at node
i
Auxiliary commands
LIST INITIAL WARPINGS
DELETE INITIAL WARPINGS
INITIAL WARPINGS
IMPERFECTION NODES
bucklingmode
i
node
i
direction
i
displacement
i
Specifies imperfections based on buckling mode shapes which have been calculated in a
previous run. The total imperfection applied to the nodal coordinates is a superposition of
the imperfections from each specified buckling mode. List of buckling modes has to be
continous - all buckling modes between the first and last mode have to be specified. For
modes which are not significant, displacement
i
should be set to 0.
bucklingmode
i
The number of the buckling mode shape.
node
i
Node label number where the magnitude of the imperfection associated with bucklingmode
i
is
specified.
direction
i
Translational degree of freedom for node
i
.
1 X-translation (global or skew).
2 Y-translation (global or skew).
3 Z-translation (global or skew).
displacement
i
[0.0]
Magnitude of imperfection in the same length unit as the global coordinates. ADINA scales
bucklingmode
i
to have this value at the node and in the direction specified.
Auxiliary commands
LIST IMPERFECTION NODES
DELETE IMPERFECTION NODES
IMPERFECTION NODES
Sec. 9.6 Contact
CONTACT-ELEMSET NAME PRINT SAVE
eledgeset
i
sense
i
(2-D contact groups)
elfaceset
i
sense
i
Defines a contact surface using element edge or face set defined by the ELEDGESET or
ELFACESET command.
NAME [(current highest contact surface label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact surface to be defined. Note that the contact surface names are
unique only within a contact group, i.e. two different contact groups may each define its own
contact surface "1".
PRINT [DEFAULT]
and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. If DEFAULT is specified, printout is
controlled by PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Flag controlling saving (to the porthole file) of the results of the contact analysis as deter-
mined by the FORCES and TRACTIONS parameters of the CGROUP command. If DEFAULT
is specified, saving is controlled by the PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT parameter. {YES/NO/
DEFAULT}
eledgeset
i
Element edge set label number.
elfaceset
i
Element face set label number.
sense
i
[+1]
Orientation flag.
+1 contact surface follows the orientation of the element edges or faces.
-1 contact surface uses opposite orientation to the element edges or faces.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACT-EELEMSET FIRST LAST
DELETE CONTACT-EELEMSET FIRST LAST
CONTACT-ELEMSET
CONTACT-FACENODES NAME PRINT SAVE
seg
i
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
n4
i
n5
i
n6
i
n7
i
n8
i
n9
i
This command defines a contact surface within the current contact group using face node
numbers. Command can be applied only to 3-D contact.
NAME
Label number of the contact surface to be defined.
PRINT
Flag controlling printout of the results, see command CONTACTSURFACE.
SAVE
Flag controlling saving of the results, see command CONTACTSURFACE.
seg
i
Label number of segment i.
n1
i
...n4
i
The corner nodes for segment i.
n5
i
...n8
i
The midside nodes for segment i.
n9
i
The midsurface node for segment i.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACT-FACENODES FIRST LAST GROUP
DELETE CONTACT-FACENODES FIRST LAST GROUP
CONTACT-FACENODES
Sec. 9.6 Contact
CONTACT-NODES NAME PRINT SAVE MODE MASTER
n
i
seg
i
n1
i
n2
i
n3
i
n4
i
Defines a contact surface within the current contact group. Contact surfaces are defined by
the end-nodes of the segments.
NAME [(current highest contact-surface label number) + 1]
Label number of the contact-surface to be defined. Contact-surface numbering is shared with
CONTACTSURFACE, CONTACTPOINT and CONTACT-FACENODES.
PRINT [DEFAULT]
Controls printout of results for the contact-surface. Input of DEFAULT implies the setting of
PRINTOUT PRINTDEFAULT is used. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
SAVE [DEFAULT]
Controls saving of results (to the porthole file) for the contact-surface. Input of DEFAULT
implies the setting of PORTHOLE SAVEDEFAULT is used. {YES/NO/DEFAULT}
MODE [INPUT]
INPUT The contact segments are defined exactly as input.
REVERSE The contact segments are reversed.
ALIGN The contact segments are aligned to have the same sense as the
first segment.
MASTER [0]
Master Point Label used for creating rigid link between this Master Point and all these
contact nodes.
n
i
Label numbers of nodes on a 2-D contact-surface, see the Theory and Modeling Guide for the
orientation convention used. Segments are defined by successive node numbers; that is,
segment 1 is defined by the first two nodes, segment 2 is defined by the second and third node,
etc.
seg
i
Label number of an area-segment on a 3-D contact surface. Each data input line defines a new
segment.
CONTACT-NODES
n1
i
,...,n4
i
Label numbers of nodes defining the area segment, see the Theory and Modeling Guide for
the orientation convention used.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CONTACT-NODES FIRST LAST GROUP
LIST CONTACT-NODES lists the definitions of contactsurfaces with label numbers in a
given range. If no range is specified a list of all contactsurfaces label numbers within the
given contact group is listed. GROUP is set to the current active contact group if no
value is input for this parameter.
DELETE CONTACT-NODES FIRST LAST GROUP
DELETE CONTACT-NODES deletes the contactsurfaces with label numbers in a given
range. Note that a contactsurface will not be deleted if it is referenced by a contactpair
definition (see command CONTACTPAIR ). GROUP is set to the current active contact
group if no value is input for this parameter.
CONTACT-NODES
Sec. 9.7 Fracture
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES NAME NCRACK
node-1
i
... node-NCRACK
i
nvshft
i
factor
i
Defines the initial crack front position and/or the virtual/actual crack propagation path along
which a crack would propagate.
For 2-D analysis, the crack front corresponds to a single node - the crack tip node. the virtual
crack propagation path corresponds to a single line of nodes starting at the crack tip node.
For 3-D analysis, the crack front corresponds to a line of nodes - the first node given for each
generator line of nodes. The virtual/actual crack propagation path corresponds to a
surface developed from the crack front along generator lines originating at the crack front
nodes.
NAME [1]
The label number of the crack propagation surface. At present only one crack surface is
allowed.
NCRACK [1]
The number of vertex nodes along the generator lines. {1 % NCRACK % 999}
node-1
i
... node-NCRACK
i
Label numbers of nodes along generator line i of the crack propagation surface.
nvshft
i
[0]
Virtual material shift associated with generator line i of the crack propagation surface:
For a fixed virtual material shift, this is the label number of a virtual shift defined by command
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT.
For a moving virtual material shift, this is the number of rings of elements about the
(moving) crack tip on the generator line.
Parameter nvshft
i
is used only in crack propagation analysis (FRACTURE TYPE =PROPAGA-
TION).
factor
i
[0.0]
Resistance factor. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Auxiliary commands
LIST CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST
DELETE CRACK-PROPAGATION FIRST LAST
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE NAME VECTOR VX VY VZ N3DSH
node
i
Defines a fixed virtual-crack-extension material shift via a set of nodes.
NAME [(current highest virtual shift label number) + 1]
Label number of the virtual shift to be defined.
VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically, from the crack
surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION). In the case of
a 3-D crack, N3DSH is used to select a generator line associated
with the automatic shift vector calculation.
INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY and VZ.
VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
N3DSH [0]
Generator line number of the crack surface for automatic shift vector calculation (for a 3-D
crack).
node
i
The label number of a node contained within the virtual material shift.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE FIRST LAST
DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE FIRST LAST
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE
Sec. 9.7 Fracture
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT NAME GROUP VECTOR VX VY VZ
N3DSH
element
i
group
i
Defines a fixed virtual-crack-extension material shift via a set of elements.
NAME [(current highest virtual shift label number) + 1]
Label number of the virtual shift to be defined.
GROUP [current active group]
VECTOR [AUTOMATIC]
AUTOMATIC The shift vector is calculated automatically, from the crack
surface definition (see CRACK-PROPAGATION ). In the case of
a 3-D crack, N3DSH is used to select a generator line associated
with the automatic shift vector calculation.
INPUT The shift vector is input directly via VX, VY and VZ.
VX [0.0]
VY [0.0]
VZ [0.0]
N3DSH [0]
Generator line number of the crack surface for automatic shift vector calculation, (for a
3-D crack).
element
i
The label number of an element contained in the virtual material shift.
group
i
[GROUP]
The label number of the element group, containing element
i
.
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT FIRST LAST
DELETE J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT FIRST LAST
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT
J-LINE ELEMENT NAME GROUP PRINT SAVE START-FACE END-FACE
element
i
group
i
Defines a line contour connected by a series of element faces.
NAME [(current highest line contour label number) + 1]
Label number of the line contour to be defined.
START-FACE [0]
Determines which face of the first element is selected to start the contour, if the element has
more than one boundary face.
0 Face number automatically selected.
1 Face N1-N2.
2 Face N2-N3.
3 Face N3-N4.
4 Face N4-N1.
where N1, N2, N3, N4 are the element vertex nodes.
END-FACE [0]
Determines which face of the last element is selected to terminate the contour, if the element
has more than one boundary face.
0 Face number automatically selected.
1 Face N1-N2.
2 Face N2-N3.
3 Face N3-N4.
4 Face N4-N1.
element
i
The label number of an element which forms the line contour.
group
i
[GROUP]
The label number of the element group, containing element
i
.
J-LINE ELEMENT
Sec. 9.7 Fracture
Auxiliary commands
LIST J-LINE ELEMENT FIRST LAST
DELETE J-LINE ELEMENT FIRST LAST
J-LINE ELEMENT
SINGULAR NODES Q-POINT
node
i
Defines a set of vertex nodes whose adjacent non-vertex nodes are to be moved to form
singularities. See the Theory and Modeling Guide.
Q-POINT [QUARTER]
Selects whether non-vertex nodes adjacent to the desired vertex nodes are moved to the 1/4
point, or the opposite action is taken.
QUARTER Nodes are moved to the 1/4 point.
MID Nodes are moved from the 1/4 point back to the relevant mid-
side/face position.
node
i
Label number of a singular node.
Auxiliary commands
LIST SINGULAR NODES FIRST LAST
DELETE SINGULAR NODES FIRST LAST
SINGULAR NODES
Sec. 9.8 Substructures and cyclic symmetry
REUSE-NODES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE LOAD-REUSE
icona
i
iretn
i
Defines the nodal connectivity between a substructure and the main structure. Each sub-
structure can be used several times and this command sets the current reuse label identify-
ing number for the active substructure.
Identifying number for the substructure to which subsequent reuse data refer.
Label number of the reuse to be defined.
LOAD-REUSE [SAME]
Reuse loading indicator.
SAME The loading for this reuse is the same as for the previous reuse,
REUSE-1, of the same substructure.
DIFFERENT The loading for this reuse is specified by subsequent loading
commands, e.g., APPLY-LOAD.
icona
i
The main structure connection node for the substructure reuse. Note that the same number
of data input lines must be entered for each reuse of the substructure.
iretn
i
[0]
The substructure connection node for the substructure reuse.
Auxiliary commands
LIST REUSE-NODES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
DELETE REUSE-NODES SUBSTRUCTURE REUSE
REUSE-NODES
CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES
sbnode
i
mbnode
i
Specifies the cyclic boundary nodes of the fundamental part of a cyclic symmetric structure.
The cyclic boundaries of the fundamental part consist of two boundaries, namely, the master
and slave cyclic boundaries.
When the nodes on the master cyclic boundary are rotated 360/M (where M is the number of
cyclic parts) degrees counter clockwise about the cyclic symmetry axis, they should coincide
with the nodes on the slave cyclic boundary.
sbnode
i
Label number of a node on the slave cyclic boundary.
mbnode
i
Label number of the corresponding node on the master cyclic boundary.
Auxilary commands
LIST CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES FIRST LAST
DELETE CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES FIRST LAST
CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES
ADINA R & D, Inc. Index-1
Command index
Command index
A
ADINA, 3-9
ANALYSIS DYNAMIC-DIRECT-INTEGRA-
TION, 5-22
ANALYSIS MODAL-PARTICIPATION-
FACTORS, 5-33
ANALYSIS MODAL-STRESSES, 5-34
ANALYSIS MODAL-TRANSIENT, 5-32
ANALYTICAL-RIGID-TARGET, 7-238
APPLY CONCENTRATED-LOADS, 9-62
APPLY DISPLACEMENTS, 9-64
APPLY ELECTROMAGNETIC-LOADS, 9-66
APPLY PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURES, 9-67
APPLY TEMPERATURES, 9-68
APPLY TGRADIENTS, 9-69
APPLY USER-SUPPLIED-LOADS, 9-70
APPLY-LOAD, 7-395
AUTOMATIC LOAD-DISPLACEMENT, 5-57
AUTOMATIC TIME-STEPPING, 5-59
AUTOMATIC TOTAL-LOAD-APPLICATION,
5-61
AXES CONSTANT, 7-429
AXES EDGE, 7-438
AXES FACE, 7-439
AXES LINE1, 7-430
AXES LINE2, 7-431
AXES NODES, 7-432
AXES POINT-LINE, 7-436
AXES POINT2, 7-434
AXES POINT3, 7-435
AXES SURFACE, 7-437
AXES-CYLINDRICAL, 7-440
AXES-INITIALSTRAIN, 9-15
AXES-NODES, 9-14
AXES-ORTHOTROPIC, 9-16
AXES-SPHERICAL, 7-441
AXIS-ROTATION, 7-235
B
BCELL, 7-366
BLAYER, 8-59
BODY BLEND, 6-102
BODY BLOCK, 6-104
BODY CHAMFER, 6-107
BODY CONE, 6-109
BODY CYLINDER, 6-112
BODY HOLLOW, 6-115
BODY INTERSECT, 6-116
BODY LOFTED, 6-117
BODY MERGE, 6-118
BODY MID-SURFACE, 6-119
BODY OPTION, 6-120
BODY PARTITION, 6-121
Index-2 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA Structures Model Definition
Command index
BODY PIPE, 6-122
BODY PRISM, 6-125
BODY PROJECT, 6-128
BODY REVOLVED, 6-129
BODY SECTION, 6-132
BODY SEW, 6-133
BODY SHEET, 6-134
BODY SPHERE, 6-135
BODY SUBTRACT, 6-137
BODY SURFACES, 6-63
BODY SWEEP, 6-138
BODY TORUS, 6-141
BODY TRANSFORMED, 6-144
BODY VOLUMES, 6-64
BODY-CLEANUP, 6-74
BODY-DEFEATURE, 6-71
BODY-DISCREP, 6-70
BODY-DSCADAP, 6-76
BODY-ELEMDATA FLUID3, 7-211
BODY-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-206
BODY-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID, 7-192
BODY-RESTORE, 6-75
BOLT-OPTIONS, 8-56
BOLT-TABLE, 8-57
BOUNDARIES, 9-54
BOUNDARY-SURFACE SURFACE-TENSION,
7-362
BUCKLING-LOADS, 5-30
C
CGROUP CONTACT2, 7-243
CGROUP CONTACT3, 7-264
CHECK-SURFACES, 6-49
COEFFICIENTS-TABLE, 7-131
COMMANDFILE, 3-34
CONSTRAINT, 7-338
CONSTRAINT-G, 7-346
CONSTRAINT-MS, 7-342
CONSTRAINT-NODE, 9-57
CONTACT-CONTROL, 7-239
CONTACT-ELEMSET, 9-87
CONTACT-FACENODES, 9-88
CONTACT-NODES, 9-89
CONTACT-OUTPUT-NODES, 5-92
CONTACT3-SEARCH, 7-307
CONTACTBODY, 7-291
CONTACTPAIR, 7-304
CONTACTPOINT, 7-296
CONTACTSURFACE, 7-293
CONTROL, 4-3
COORDINATES NODE, 9-3
COORDINATES POINT, 6-6
COPY-ELEMENT-NODES, 9-43
COPY-MESH-BODY, 8-147
COPY-TRIANGULATION, 8-61
COULOMB-FRICTION, 7-301
CPROP, 7-391
Command index
CRACK-GROWTH, 7-312
CRACK-PROPAGATION, 7-314
CRACK-PROPAGATION NODES, 9-91
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS LUBBY2, 7-132
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS MULTILINEAR,
7-133
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS TEMPERATURE-
ONLY, 7-134
CREEP-COEFFICIENTS USER-SUPPLIED,
7-136
CROSS-SECTION BOX, 7-168
CROSS-SECTION I, 7-170
CROSS-SECTION L, 7-172
CROSS-SECTION PIPE, 7-174
CROSS-SECTION PROPERTIES, 7-180
CROSS-SECTION RECTANGULAR, 7-176
CROSS-SECTION U, 7-178
CS-OFFSET, 7-303
CSDELETE, 8-152
CSURFACE, 8-151
CURVATURE-MOMENT, 7-137
CURVE-FITTING, 7-100
CYCLIC-CONTROL, 7-228
CYCLICBOUNDARIES NODES, 9-98
CYCLICBOUNDARY, 7-232
CYCLICBOUNDARY THREE-D, 7-234
CYCLICBOUNDARY TWO-D, 7-233
CYCLICLOADS, 7-231
D
DAMPERS, 7-222
DAMPERS NODES, 9-7
DATABASE ATTACH, 3-7
DATABASE DETACH, 3-8
DATABASE NEW, 3-3
DATABASE OPEN, 3-4
DATABASE SAVE, 3-6
DATABASE WRITE, 3-5
DELETE-FE-MODEL, 9-45
DELETE-TRIANGULATION, 8-62
DISK-STORAGE, 5-97
DOF-ACTIVE, 5-17
DOF-SYSTEM, 7-421
DOF-SYSTEM NODES, 9-5
DOMAIN, 6-95
DRAWBEAD, 7-298
E
EDATA, 9-38
EDGE-ELEMDATA BEAM, 7-194
EDGE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-206
EDGE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, 7-196
EDGE-ELEMDATA PIPE, 7-204
EDGE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, 7-188
EG-SUBSTRUCTURE, 7-237
EGCONTROL, 8-55
EGROUP BEAM, 8-19
Command index
EGROUP FLUID2, 8-49
EGROUP FLUID3, 8-52
EGROUP GENERAL, 8-47
EGROUP ISOBEAM, 8-24
EGROUP PIPE, 8-40
EGROUP PLATE, 8-29
EGROUP SHELL, 8-33
EGROUP SPRING, 8-45
EGROUP THREEDSOLID, 8-12
EGROUP TRUSS, 8-3
EGROUP TWODSOLID, 8-6
ELAYER, 7-202
ELDELETE, 8-146
ELEDGESET, 9-17
ELEMENTSET, 9-19
ELEMSAVE-STEPS, 5-88
ELFACESET, 9-20
ELTHICKNESS, 8-163
END, 3-37
ENDRELEASE, 7-353
ENODES, 9-23
ENODES-INTERFACE, 9-37
EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS, 5-71
EXPORT NASTRAN, 3-26
EXPORT UNIVERSAL, 3-27
F
FACE-ELEMDATA FLUID2, 7-209
FACE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-206
FACE-ELEMDATA PLATE, 7-198
FACE-ELEMDATA SHELL, 7-200
FACE-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, 7-190
FACE-THICKNESS, 6-65
FACELINK, 6-66
FAILURE HASHIN, 5-50
FAILURE MAXSTRAIN, 5-45
FAILURE MAXSTRESS, 5-43
FAILURE TSAI-HILL, 5-47
FAILURE TSAI-WU, 5-48
FAILURE USERSUPPLIED, 5-51
FEPROGRAM, 5-3
FILEECHO, 3-32
FILELIST, 3-31
FILELOG, 3-33
FILEREAD, 3-29
FILESESSION, 3-30
FIXBOUNDARY, 7-348
FIXITY, 7-347
FORCE-STRAIN, 7-140
FRACTURE, 7-310
FREESURFACE, 7-365
FREQUENCIES, 5-26
FSBOUNDARY, 7-355
FSBOUNDARY THREE-D, 7-357
FSBOUNDARY TWO-D, 7-356
FSI-FACE, 9-61
FTABLE, 7-138
Command index
G
GADAPT, 8-140
GBCELL, 8-143
GBODY, 8-128
GEDGE, 8-119
GET-EDGE-FACES, 6-98
GET-EDGE-POINTS, 6-98
GET-FACE-EDGES, 6-99
GFACE, 8-122
GHEXA, 8-136
GLINE, 8-102
GLUEMESH, 8-153
GPOINT, 8-101
GSURFACE, 8-105
GVOLUME, 8-113
H
HEADING, 5-4
I
IMPERFECTION NODES, 9-86
IMPERFECTION POINTS, 7-408
IMPERFECTION SHAPE, 7-409
INITIAL ACCELERATIONS, 9-75
INITIAL DISPLACEMENTS, 9-76
INITIAL FLEXURALSTRAINS, 9-77
INITIAL OVALIZATIONS, 9-78
INITIAL PINTERNALPRESSURES, 9-79
INITIAL SGRADIENTS, 9-81
INITIAL STRAINS, 9-80
INITIAL TEMPERATURES, 9-82
INITIAL TGRADIENTS, 9-83
INITIAL VELOCITIES, 9-84
INITIAL WARPINGS, 9-85
INITIAL-CONDITION, 7-402
INITIAL-MAPPING, 7-410
IRRADIATION_CREEP-TABLE, 7-141
ITERATION, 5-66
J
J-LINE ELEMENT, 9-94
J-LINE POINT, 7-316
J-LINE RING, 7-318
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT ELEMENT, 9-93
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT LINE, 7-322
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT NODE, 9-92
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT POINT, 7-320
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT RING, 7-325
J-VIRTUAL-SHIFT SURFACE, 7-324
K
KINEMATICS, 5-35
KNOTS, 6-19
L
LAYER, 7-184
LCOMBINATION, 7-394
LCURVE, 7-164
Command index
LINE ARC, 6-9
LINE CIRCLE, 6-14
LINE COMBINED, 6-25
LINE CURVILINEAR, 6-17
LINE EXTRUDED, 6-29
LINE POLYLINE, 6-20
LINE REVOLVED, 6-26
LINE SECTION, 6-23
LINE STRAIGHT, 6-8
LINE TRANSFORMED, 6-31
LINE-ELEMDATA BEAM, 7-194
LINE-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-206
LINE-ELEMDATA ISOBEAM, 7-196
LINE-ELEMDATA PIPE, 7-204
LINE-ELEMDATA TRUSS, 7-188
LINE-FUNCTION, 6-78
LIST-TRIANGULATION, 8-63
LNTHICKNESS, 6-34
LOAD CENTRIFUGAL, 7-368
LOAD CONTACT-SLIP, 7-370
LOAD CONVECTION, 7-371
LOAD DISPLACEMENT, 7-373
LOAD ELECTROMAGNETIC, 7-374
LOAD FORCE, 7-375
LOAD LINE, 7-376
LOAD MASS-PROPORTIONAL, 7-377
LOAD MOMENT, 7-379
LOAD NODAL-PHIFLUX, 7-380
LOAD PHIFLUX, 7-381
LOAD PIPE-INTERNAL-PRESSURE, 7-383
LOAD PORE-PRESSURE, 7-385
LOAD POREFLOW, 7-384
LOAD PRESSURE, 7-386
LOAD RADIATION, 7-387
LOAD TEMPERATURE, 7-389
LOAD TGRADIENT, 7-390
LOAD-CASE, 7-393
LOAD-CLOUD, 3-19
LOAD-PENETRATION, 7-401
LOAD-STL, 3-20
LOADDXF, 3-12
LOADIGES, 3-14
LOADS-ELEMENT, 9-71
LOADSOLID, 3-17
M
MASS-MATRIX, 5-38
MASSES, 7-219
MASSES NODES, 9-6
MASTER, 5-6
MATERIAL ANAND, 7-3
MATERIAL ARRUDA-BOYCE, 7-5
MATERIAL CAM-CLAY, 7-8
MATERIAL CONCRETE, 7-9
MATERIAL CREEP, 7-13
MATERIAL CREEP-IRRADIATION, 7-15
MATERIAL CREEP-VARIABLE, 7-17
MATERIAL CURVE-DESCRIPTION, 7-19
Command index
MATERIAL DRUCKER-PRAGER, 7-21
MATERIAL ELASTIC, 7-24
MATERIAL FLUID, 7-25
MATERIAL GASKET, 7-26
MATERIAL GURSON-PLASTIC, 7-28
MATERIAL HYPER-FOAM, 7-34
MATERIAL HYPERELASTIC, 7-30
MATERIAL ILYUSHIN, 7-37
MATERIAL ISOTROPIC, 7-92
MATERIAL MOHR-COULOMB, 7-38
MATERIAL MOONEY-RIVLIN, 7-40
MATERIAL MROZ-BILINEAR, 7-43
CREEP, 7-44
CREEP-VARIABLE, 7-47
MATERIAL NONLINEAR-ELASTIC, 7-50
MATERIAL OGDEN, 7-52
MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, 7-55
MATERIAL PLASTIC-BILINEAR, 7-57
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP, 7-60
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CREEP-VARIABLE,
7-62
MATERIAL PLASTIC-CYCLIC, 7-65
MATERIAL PLASTIC-MULTILINEAR, 7-68
MATERIAL PLASTIC-ORTHOTROPIC, 7-71
MATERIAL SMA, 7-75
MATERIAL SUSSMAN-BATHE, 7-77
MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC, 7-95
MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ORTHOTROPIC,
7-96
MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, 7-94
MATERIAL THERMO-ISOTROPIC, 7-81
MATERIAL THERMO-ORTHOTROPIC, 7-82
MATERIAL THERMO-PLASTIC, 7-84
MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K, 7-99
MATERIAL USER-SUPPLIED, 7-86
MATERIAL VISCOELASTIC, 7-90
MATRIX DAMPING, 7-215
MATRIX MASS, 7-214
MATRIX STIFFNESS, 7-213
MATRIX STRESS, 7-216
MATRIX USER-SUPPLIED, 7-218
MATRIXSET, 7-217
MEASURE, 6-96
MESH-CONVERT, 9-36
MODAL-DAMPING, 5-41
MOMENT-CURVATURE-FORCE, 7-143
MOMENT-TWIST-FORCE, 7-144
MONITOR, 5-100
MONITOR-CONTROL, 5-102
N
NASTRAN-ADINA, 3-23
NEUTRON-DOSE, 7-146
NEUTRON-TABLE, 7-147
NLTABLE, 8-100
NODESAVE-STEPS, 5-86
Command index
NODESET, 9-10
O
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT NODE, 9-60
OVALIZATION-CONSTRAINT POINT, 7-364
P
PARAMETER, 3-38
PAUSE, 3-36
PHI-MODEL-COMPLETION, 7-106
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC BILINEAR, 7-107
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC EXPONENTIAL, 7-109
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MEMORY-EXPONEN-
TIAL, 7-110
PLCYCL-ISOTROPIC MULTILINEAR, 7-108
PLCYCL-KINEMATIC ARMSTRONG-
FREDRICK, 7-111
PLCYCL-RUPTURE AEPS, 7-112
PLY-DATA, 7-187
POINT-SIZE, 8-83
PORE-FLUID-PROPERTY, 7-145
PORTHOLE, 5-83
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE ADINA-F, 7-358
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-FLUID,
7-358
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FLUID-
STRUCTUR, 7-358
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE FREE-SURFACE,
7-358
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INFINITE, 7-360
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE INLET-OUTLET,
7-358
POTENTIAL-INTERFACE RIGID-WALL,
7-358
PPROCESS, 5-54
PRINT-STEPS, 5-81
PRINTNODES, 5-90
PRINTOUT, 5-78
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-C, 7-148
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-K, 7-149
PROPERTY NONLINEAR-M, 7-150
PROPERTYSET, 7-151
R
R-CURVE, 7-329
RAYLEIGH-DAMPING, 5-39
REACTION-NODES, 5-93
READ, 3-28
REBAR-LINE, 8-159
REBUILD-MODEL, 3-10
REDO, 4-10
REM-EDGE, 6-100
REM-FACE, 6-101
REUSE, 7-226
REUSE-NODES, 9-97
REVOLVE, 9-46
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE NONLIN-
EAR-ELASTIC, 7-153
Command index
RIGIDITY-MOMENT-CURVATURE PLASTIC-
MULTILINEAR, 7-155
RIGIDLINK, 7-334
RIGIDLINK-NODE, 9-59
RIGIDNODES SHELL, 9-13
RPROP, 7-392
RTOFILE, 3-35
RUBBER-MULLINS OGDEN-ROXBURGH,
7-125
RUBBER-ORTHOTROPIC HOLZAPFEL,
7-129
RUBBER-TABLE ARRUDA-BOYCE, 7-117
RUBBER-TABLE HYPER-FOAM, 7-119
RUBBER-TABLE MOONEY-RIVLIN, 7-113
RUBBER-TABLE OGDEN, 7-115
RUBBER-TABLE SUSSMAN-BATHE, 7-121
RUBBER-TABLE TRS, 7-123
RUBBER-VISCOELASTIC HOLZAPFEL,
7-127
RUPTURE MULTILINEAR, 7-158
RUPTURE THREE-PARAMETER, 7-159
RUPTURE-CURVE, 7-160
S
SAVENODES, 5-95
SCURVE, 7-161
SET-AXES-MATERIAL, 7-442
SET-AXES-STRAIN, 7-445
SET-INITCONDITION, 7-404
SFTHICKNESS, 6-48
SHEET PLANE, 6-145
SHELLDIRECTORVECTOR, 9-9
SHELLNODESDOF, 7-426
SHELLNODESDOF NODES, 9-8
SINGULAR, 7-330
SINGULAR NODES, 9-96
SIZE-FUNCTION AXIS, 8-91
SIZE-FUNCTION BOUNDS, 8-85
SIZE-FUNCTION COMBINED, 8-98
SIZE-FUNCTION HEX, 8-87
SIZE-FUNCTION PLANE, 8-95
SIZE-FUNCTION POINT, 8-89
SIZE-LOCATIONS, 8-99
SKEWSYSTEM NODES, 9-4
SKEWSYSTEMS CYLINDRICAL, 7-414
SKEWSYSTEMS EULERANGLES, 7-415
SKEWSYSTEMS NORMAL, 7-416
SKEWSYSTEMS POINTS, 7-417
SKEWSYSTEMS SPHERICAL, 7-418
SKEWSYSTEMS VECTORS, 7-419
SOLVER ITERATIVE, 5-53
SPLIT-EDGE, 6-68
SPLIT-FACE, 6-69
SPLIT-LINE, 6-33
SPRING LINES, 8-157
SPRING POINTS, 8-155
SSCURVE, 7-162
Command index
STIFFNESS-STEPS, 5-69
STRAIN-FIELD, 7-407
STRAINRATE-FIT, 7-166
SUBDIVIDE BODY, 8-81
SUBDIVIDE DEFAULT, 8-64
SUBDIVIDE EDGE, 8-77
SUBDIVIDE FACE, 8-79
SUBDIVIDE LINE, 8-68
SUBDIVIDE MODEL, 8-66
SUBDIVIDE POINT, 8-67
SUBDIVIDE SURFACE, 8-71
SUBDIVIDE VOLUME, 8-74
SUBSTRUCTURE, 7-225
SURF-ELEMDATA FLUID2, 7-209
SURF-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-206
SURF-ELEMDATA PLATE, 7-198
SURF-ELEMDATA SHELL, 7-200
SURF-ELEMDATA TWODSOLID, 7-190
SURFACE EXTRUDED, 6-42
SURFACE FACE, 6-148
SURFACE GRID, 6-39
SURFACE PATCH, 6-35
SURFACE REVOLVED, 6-44
SURFACE TRANSFORMED, 6-47
SURFACE VERTEX, 6-37
SURFACE-FUNCTION, 6-80
SWEEP, 9-50
SYSTEM, 6-3
T
TEMPERATURE-REFERENCE, 5-52
THERMAL-MAPPING, 7-413
TIMEFUNCTION, 5-64
TIMESTEP, 5-63
TMATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, 7-94
TMC-CONTROL, 5-18
TMC-ITERATION, 5-73
TMC-MATERIAL ISOTROPIC, 7-92
TMC-MATERIAL ORTHOTROPIC, 7-93
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-ISOTROPIC,
7-95
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-K, 7-98
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-C-
ORTHOTROPIC, 7-96
TMC-MATERIAL TEMPDEP-K, 7-94
TMC-MATERIAL TIMEDEP-K, 7-99
TMC-SOLVER ITERATIVE, 5-55
TOLERANCES GEOMETRIC, 5-74
TOLERANCES ITERATION, 5-76
TRANSFORMATION COMBINED, 6-85
TRANSFORMATION DIRECT, 6-87
TRANSFORMATION INVERSE, 6-94
TRANSFORMATION POINTS, 6-88
TRANSFORMATION REFLECTION, 6-89
TRANSFORMATION ROTATION, 6-90
TRANSFORMATION SCALE, 6-92
TRANSFORMATION TRANSLATION, 6-93
Command index
TRANSITION-ELEMENT, 8-58
TRUSS-LINE, 8-160
TRUSS-POINTS, 8-15
TWIST-MOMENT, 7-167
U
UNDO, 4-9
USER-FRICTION, 7-302
USER-RUPTURE, 7-333
V
VISCOELASTIC-CONSTANTS, 7-105
VOL-ELEMDATA FLUID3, 7-211
VOL-ELEMDATA GENERAL, 7-206
VOL-ELEMDATA THREEDSOLID, 7-192
VOLUME BODY, 6-147
VOLUME EXTRUDED, 6-57
VOLUME PATCH, 6-50
VOLUME REVOLVED, 6-54
VOLUME SWEEP, 6-60
VOLUME TRANSFORMED, 6-62
VOLUME VERTEX, 6-52
VOLUME-FUNCTION, 6-83
Z
ZOOM-BOUNDARY, 7-351
Error messages

ADINA R & D, Inc. A-1
Appendix 1

Error Messages

General errors

Error
Number
Description
1002 Stiffness matrix not positive definite, boundary conditions or model collapsed
1003 Either the ADINA input file (*.dat) is missing or is incorrect
1004 Program not able to open the restart file, please check your input
1005 Not enough memory on the system to be allocated for the ADINA program
1006 Not enough memory allocated, sparse matrix indexes cannot fit into memory
1007 Node label cannot be zero or larger that the maximum label number
1008 Wrong input data, this is ADINA-F input data
1009 Wrong input data, this is ADINA-T input data
1010 Input data from an unsupported program version
1011 Restart from static to dynamic cannot be used if factorized K is reused
1012 Restart from dynamic analysis to static cannot be used if LDC is used
1013 Number of time functions in restart cannot be smaller than in the previous run
1014 Temperature loading used in a previous run but not in restart
1015 Model contains features not available in explicit time integrations
1016 Number of nonlinear element groups changed in the restart run
1017 Number of substructures changed in restart analysis
1018 Incorrect number of substructure stiffness blocks in the restart run
1019 Errors in reading restart file
1020 Element group data is changed in restart analysis
1021 Material model is changed in restart analysis
1022 Substructure reused different number of times in restart analysis
1023 The total number of DOFs changed for restart and substructure analysis
1024 Zero effective mass input in explicit time integration
1025 Restart time mismatch, please check your input data
1026 Temperature file cannot be opened
1027 Temperature gradient file cannot be opened
Appendix 1

A-2 AUI Command Reference Manual: Vol. I ADINA- Model Definition
1028 External force file (IT58) cannot be opened
1029 Automatic time stepping not available for options used
1030 Program cannot find a license file or is not allowed to run on this platform
1031 Density cannot be set to zero in explicit time integration
1032 ISOBEAM, only 2-node elements can be used in explicit time integration
1033 Pipe elements cannot be used in explicit time integration
1034 Explicit time integration, material model cannot be used in this element group
1035 Potential based fluid elements cannot be used in explicit time integration
1036 User-supplied material model cannot be used in explicit time integration
1037 Material model in this element group cannot be used with initial stresses
1038 Number of nodal points equal to zero is not allowed
1039 The restricted number of nodes exceeded - 900 nodes maximum allowed
1040 Incorrect entry for temperatures, pipe pressure or forces read from a file
1041 Nodal forces provided on an external file cannot be used with substructures
1042 Wrong input for extended results printout for large strains
1043 Wrong input data for file provided forces, see DISK-STORAGE
1044 Fracture flag out of range, please check your input data
1045 Rigid beam-bolts cannot be used with cyclic symmetry
1046 Static correction for response spectrum can be used in linear analysis only
1047 Wrong formulation used, fluid potential and response spectrum
1048 Wrong formulation used, fluid potential and mode- superposition
1049 Solution (iteration) method is out of range, please see ITERATION METHOD
1050 Wrong flag for the automatic time-stepping method
1051 Input for number of subdivisions is wrong (negative!), see AUTOMATIC
TIME-ST
1052 Large strains extended printing flag is wrong see PRINTOUT LARGE-
STRAINS
1053 Automatic load displacement (LDC) method cannot be used in crack
propagation
1054 Incorrect main fracture input flags (see FRACTURE...)
1055 Frequency calculation cannot be done in static analysis
1056 Determinant search cannot be used to calculate frequencies within interval
1057 Frequency file is missing, it is required to perform modal analysis
Error messages

1058 Number of frequencies and mode shapes stored on file is smaller than
requested
1059 Response spectrum analysis cannot be used with cyclic symmetry
1060 Number of frequencies requested is larger than number frequencies calculated
1061 Response spectrum analysis cannot be performed without translational DOFs
1062 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method can only be used in static
analysis
1063 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method can only be used in nonlinear
analysis
1064 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method cannot be used in linearized
buckling
1065 LDC method, wrong node label used in the first step loading
1066 LDC method DOF used for the prescribed first step displacement is incorrect
1067 LDC method maximum allowable displacement(DISPMAX) cannot be
negative
1068 Incorrect input data for fluid-structure analysis (FSI)
1069 Error in STIFFNESS-STEPS or EQUILIBRIUM-STEPS input data
1070 Error in printing or saving block input data
1071 Number of linear, nonlinear and substructure element groups is equal to zero
1072 Potential based fluid element flag is incorrect
1073 Potential based fluid elements cannot be used with substructures
1074 Potential based fluid elements cannot be used with lumped damping
1075 Potential based fluids cannot be used with the subspace iteration method.
Only determinant search or Lanczos method can be used.
Note: For large problems or mid-size problems with a large number of
frequencies requested, the Lanczos method should be used.
1076 Potential based fluid elements can not be used with lumped mass matrix
1077 Input error, time step cannot be equal to or smaller than zero
1078 Flag to request reaction calculations is incorrect
1079 Damping can only be included in dynamic analysis
1080 Wilson method cannot be used with the automatic time stepping (ATS) method
1081 Lumped mass has to be used for the explicit time integration
1082 Frequency calculation cannot be used with explicit time integration
1083 Damping flag is incorrect
Appendix 1

1084 Only lumped damping can be used in explicit time integration
1085 Consistent mass matrix cannot be used with substructures
1086 Damping cannot be used with substructuring
1087 Mode superposition analysis cannot be used with substructuring
1088 Linearized buckling cannot be used in dynamic analysis
1089 Frequency calculation cannot be requested when substructuring is used
1090 Initial imperfections cannot be used with substructures
1091 Explicit time integration cannot be used with substructures
1092 Mode superposition can be performed if mass matrix assemblage is requested
1093 Automatic load-displacement (LDC) method cannot be used with thermal
loading
1094 User-supplied loading cannot be used with automatic load-displacement
method
1095 Contact surfaces cannot be present in mode superposition analysis
1096 Factorized stiffness matrix cannot be stored, explicit time integration used
1097 Displacements cannot be prescribed in mode superposition analysis
1098 Linearized buckling cannot be performed in linear analysis
1099 Centrifugal loading cannot be used with substructures
1101 Mesh too distorted, Jacobian determinant not positive
1102 Contact conditions inadmissible (either wrong contact orientation or
divergence)
1103 No convergence, concrete material model, stresses outside the failure curve
1104 Mixed (u/p) formulation an internal matrix cannot be inverted
1105 No convergence in the iterative solver
1106 No convergence in plasticity (bisection algorithm)
1107 No convergence in the Drucker-Prager material model
1108 No convergence in the creep material model
1109 No convergence in orthotropic plasticity (bisection)
1110 No convergence in rubber-like material model
1111 Green-Lagrange strains beyond theoretical limit
1112 No convergence in the moment-curvature material model
1113 Strains out-of-range nonlinear elastic material model
1114 No stress convergence in the Gurson material model
Error messages

1115 FSI load calculation problem, time step reduced
1116 Insufficient memory for double-sided contact (could be due to divergence)
1117 Mesh too distorted BEAM distributed load calculation
1118 Zero pivot probably wrong boundary conditions
1119 No convergence in Mohr-Coulomb material model
1120 Divergence, energy greater than 1.E30, model crushed, time step probably too
large
1121 Rigid contact, time step reduced due to tensile contact
1122 BEAM elements, program stopped in material model calculations
1123 Solution is diverging, time step reduced, solution continues
1124 No convergence in the concrete material model
1125 Invalid energy value (either NaN or Inf) in the convergence check
1126 A division by zero in the BEAM element, program might be diverging
1127 3-D solid elements, ULH eigenvector cannot be calculated
1128 Incompatible mode elements an internal matrix cannot be inverted
1130 No convergence in the foam material model (bisection algorithm)
1131 No convergence in element pressure calculations, mixed u/p elements
1132 SHELL elements mesh too distorted
1133 Rigid target contact algorithm, time step reduced due to excessive penetration
1197 Probably too many nodes suddenly in contact, program takes a smaller step
1198 Rigid contact internal error, non-unique contact surface definition
1199 Program internal error
1201 Not enough memory to store nodal coordinates, probably gaps in node
numbering
1202 Total number of constraint equations is incorrect
1203 Constraint equations are out of order
1204 Node numbers input for constraints is incorrect
1205 Constraint equations Incorrect number of degrees of freedom
1206 Constraint equations incorrect number of independent degrees of freedom
1207 An independent degree of freedom is used as a dependent in constraints
1208 Fluid DOF can only be constrained to another fluid DOF
1209 An independent DOF has to be an active DOF, i.e., cannot be a "fixed" DOF
1210 Rigid links must be input in ascending order
Appendix 1

1211 Incorrect input for a rigid link number
1212 Flag indicating type of rigid link (linear or nonlinear) is incorrect
1213 Nonlinear rigid links cannot be used in linear analysis
1214 Linear rigid links must be input before nonlinear links
1215 Rigid links cannot be used with SHELL having 5 DOFs
1216 Independent DOFs are not allowed on slave rigid links nodes
1217 Master rigid link nodes must have all independent DOFs
1218 Number of constraint equations with bolts is incorrect
1219 Rigid bolts cannot be connected to shell elements with 5 DOFs
1220 Slave nodes of rigid bolts must have all DOFs constrained
1221 A constrained degree of freedom (DOF) by a rigid bolt must be free
1222 Bolt constraints cannot be generated, independent DOFs are missing
1223 There are no potential fluid degrees of freedom for marked structural DOFs
1224 Allocated memory too small to store stiffness matrix
1225 Insufficient allocated memory
1226 Insufficient allocated memory. More than 1000 blocks need to be created.
1227 Rigid bolt, translational DOFs are constrained
1228 SHELL elements, an averaged director vector has zero magnitude
1229 Rigid bolt, translational DOFs are constrained
1230 Incorrect flag for convergence criteria, see TOLERANCES ITERATION
CONVERGENCE
1231 Incorrect convergence criteria in mode superposition, only energy can be used
1232 Reference force in force convergence criteria must be greater than zero
1233 Reference translation in displacement convergence must be greater than zero
1234 Reference moment in force convergence criteria must be greater than zero
1235 Reference rotation in displacement convergence must be greater than zero
1236 Reference value of initial imperfections cannot be specified on constrained
DOF
1237 Initial strain flag is incorrect
1238 Time on temperature tape does not match solution starting time
1239 Temperature tape steps do not match steps in ADINA, use DISK-S
TEMP=INTERPOLATE
1240 Director vectors can only be generated if Euler angles are used
Error messages

1241 Incorrect input for SHELL director vectors
1242 Skew system number in nodal input data is incorrect
1243 Coordinate system type is incorrect
1244 Mid-surface vector number is greater than total number of director vectors
1245 Number of degrees of freedom allowed in analysis is incorrect
1246 The fluid DOF is incorrect, it can be free, fixed or constrained
1247 SHELL 5/6 DOF indicator is incorrect. It should be 0 or 1.
1248 End-of-file when reading, temperature or pipe pressure external file
1249 No fluid (PHI) DOF for marked structural degrees of freedom
1250 Total number of equations is zero. At least one equation is required.
1251 Incorrect element type input, please check your data
1252 Contact element groups must be input after ALL element group data
1253 Specified number of element groups is different than the number read from
input
1254 Specified number of contact groups is different than the number read from
input
1255 Crack growth, stiffness must be reformed every step
1256 A node with assigned pressure DOF has not been used in any element group
1257 Incorrect input data for rigid-bolt element
1258 Number of elements connected to 1 node exceeds the value specified in input
1259 LDC-initial displacement imposed on a deleted or constrained DOF
1260 Substructure identification number incorrect
1261 Substructures local X vector has zero length, please check your input
1262 Substructures local Y vector has zero length, please check your input
1263 Substructures local X&Y vectors are not orthogonal, please check your input
1264 Substructures incorrect connectivity array, please check your input
1265 Substructures error in printing or saving block input data
1266 Time integration method incorrect, can be implicit or explicit
1267 Wilson-theta method, theta incorrect, see ANALYSIS DYNAMIC METHOD
1268 Newmark method, incorrect parameters, see ANALYSIS DYNAMIC
METHOD
1269 Dynamic analysis, time step too small
1270 An unsuccessful attempt has been made to read a direct access file
Appendix 1

1271 An unsuccessful attempt has been made to write into a direct access file
1272 Incorrect maximum number of DOF per node, input probably is not correct
1273 Mode superposition analysis requires number of modes greater than zero
1274 Program internal error, very likely memory corrupted
1275 Slave DOFs cannot be connected to multiple rigid links
1276 Incompatible options for centrifugal force calculation
Element-based centrifugal force calculation option cannot be used if a lumped
mass matrix is specified for the problem.
1277 Incompatible options for centrifugal force calculation.
Deformation-dependent centrifugal loading cannot be used with element-based
centrifugal force calculation option.
1278 PHI massflux loads can only be used with potential-based elements
1279 The number of elements in the restart run is different than in the previous run
1280 Explicit analysis TOTALTIME option, can only be used with one time step
block
1281 Explicit time integration method cannot be used with potential fluid elements
1282 Constraint equation cannot be defined along prescribed direction
1283 Incompatibility between time functions in the fluid and structural models
1284 Rigid target, different number of processors used in restart than in a previous
run
1285 No active degrees of freedom (DOF) are present
1286 The number of time step blocks limit has been exceeded
1287 Error in the reading of time function input data. Please check your input.
1288 Error in the skew coordinate system input (inadmissible direction cosines)
1289 Incorrect input data for substructures
1290 Substructure no. of condensed and retained nodes is not equal to total no. of
nodes
1291 No convergence. Invalid energy value (either NaN or Inf) in the convergence
check
1292 Incorrect displacement vector, invalid displacement values (either NaN or Inf
entries)
1293 Error in closing a porthole file (porthole splitting option)
1294 Explicit time integration cannot be used with thermal loading provided via tape
1295 Damping elements can only be used if damping is requested in the master
input
Error messages

1296 TMC, different meshes for heat transfer and structure analysis cannot be used
1297 Nodal mass input, non-existing node numbers(labels) are used
1298 Nodal damping input, non-existing node numbers(labels) are used
1299 Incorrect domain decomposition, contact nodes belong to a wrong subdomain

Appendix 1

Element error messages (during element group input)

Error
Number
Description
1301 Incorrect kinematic formulation used for element group
1302 Element death/birth option flag is out of range
1303 Truss element type out-of-range
1304 Truss-gap element flag is incorrect
1305 Incorrect maximum number of nodes per element
1306 Incorrect number of element integration points
1307 Incorrect material model number for an element group
1308 Incorrect number of material constants
1309 The total number of elements in an element group is ZERO
1310 Element death/birth cannot be used with linear elements
1311 Gap elements cannot be used as linear elements
1312 Material model used requires nonlinear element groups
1313 Truss-ring element cannot have more than 1 node
1314 Truss-ring element cannot be used with skew systems
1315 Truss-ring element cannot have gap options
1316 Incompatible (bubble function) elements cannot be defined as mixed (u/p)
elements
1317 No skew system defined, elements cannot have nodes referred to a skew
systems
1318 Temperature is required for the specified material model
1319 The gap option can only be used with 2-node elements
1320 Input error in element group control parameters
1321 Youngs modulus must be greater than zero
1322 Youngs modulus must be greater than zero for all temperatures
1323 Incorrect material properties, nonlinear elastic model
1324 Incorrect material constants for a plastic material model
1325 Incorrect input data for plastic-multilinear material
1326 Incorrect input for strain rate effects
1327 Incorrect input for creep material model
1328 Material type number is out of range
Error messages

1329 Element birth time must be smaller than death time
1330 Incorrect flag for spatial isotropy correction
1331 Energy release rate cannot be performed with fracture mechanics
1332 Mixed formulation cannot be used for some material models
1333 Wrong number of pressure points for mixed elements
1334 Incorrect number of temperature points-creep/plasticity
1335 Stress table flag out of range
1336 Soil material models cannot be used in plane stress analysis
1337 Incorrect number of curve points- user-supplied material
1338 Large strain analysis is not allowed for material model used
1339 Energy release rate can only be calculated in linear analysis
1340 Fabric material model can only be used in plane stress analysis
1341 Mixed elements cannot be used for plane stress analysis
1342 Temperature flag incorrect for concrete material model
1343 Stress tables cannot be used with the specified material
1344 Initial strains/stresses cannot be used in linear analysis or flags are incorrect
1345 Incorrect flags for user-supplied creep coefficients
1346 Incorrect flag to calculate strain energy densities
1347 Incorrect number (negative) of axes of orthotropy sets
1348 SHELLs - incorrect number of nodes in the surface direction
1349 Incorrect number of integration points through the thickness
1350 Total number of nodes must be greater or equal than number of midsurface
nodes
1351 Multi-layer SHELL can only have mid-surface nodes
1352 Improper section type specified for a BEAM element group
1353 Incorrect flag for stress output tables
1354 Moment-curvature law cannot be used with this material model
1355 Incorrect ISOBEAM element cross section type
1356 Incorrect thickness table number for ISOBEAM elements
1357 PLATE element requested material model is not available
1358 PLATE element initial flexural strains input is required
1359 Elements require nodal initial strain/stress input which is not provided
Appendix 1

1360 PIPE internal pressure cannot be used with linear pipe elements
1361 PIPE with ovalization is requested but ovalization DOFs are specified
1362 Improper input for a PIPE element
1363 Flange conditions used, which requires Newton-Cotes integration along PIPE
axis
1364 Only 4-node PIPE element can be used with warping/ovalization DOFs
1365 Full Newton iteration must be used in contact analysis
1366 CONTACT at least three contact surface nodes must be specified
1367 CONTACT at least one contact surface must be specified
1368 CONTACT at least one contact surface pair must be specified
1369 Total number of contact nodes must be GT or EQ to the number of contactor
nodes
1370 2-D CONTACT can only be: plane stress, plane strain or axisymmetric
1371 No skew system defined, contact surface nodes cannot refer to skew systems
1372 CONTACT model out-of-range, can be: frictionless or with friction
1373 Friction in explicit analysis cannot be used with selected contact algorithm
1374 3-D CONTACT number of contactor nodes must be greater or equal to 1
1375 3-D CONTACT total number of contact nodes must be greater or equal to 5
1376 3-D CONTACT at least one segment must be attached to a contact surface
node
1377 Generalized plane strain-skew system cannot allow rotations around the
X-axis
1378 Incorrect number of material data sets, please check your material input data
1379 Incorrect node number input for strain energy release calculation
1380 Triangular elements can only have 3 or 6 or 7 nodes
1381 Maximum number of nodes exceeded for a 2-D element
1382 Incorrect material data set number, please check your input data
1383 Element birth time must be smaller than element death time
1384 Porous solid elements cannot be used with explicit time integration
1385 SHELL maximum number of nodes per element exceeded
1386 Nonsymmetric moment-curvature cannot be used with this beam model
1387 Cyclic elastic rigidity not permitted for this beam model
1388 Cannot use more than one pressure DOF in 3-node triangular elements
Error messages

1389 Cannot use more than one pressure DOF in 4-node tetrahedral elements
1390 Rigid target contact can only be used with ATS method
1391 Errors in contact segment definitions
1392 Consistent contact linearization cannot be used with direct solver
1392 Tied contact is not available in explicit time integration
1394 Large strain formulation cannot be used with multilayered shell element
1395 Incompatible modes elements: integration order must be greater than 1
1396 Error in the shell element group data, please see the *.out file for details
1397 Error in the element group control parameters, skew systems not indicated
1398 One (or more) of the element node numbers is either negative or undefined
1399 Incorrect number of nodes in a TRUSS element, program stops

Appendix 1

Temperature error messages, rigid links, loadings, etc.

Error
Number
Description
1401 Time mismatch between temperature file and program, use option interpolate
1402 Time mismatch between temperature gradient file and the program, use option
interpolate
1403 Time mismatch, pipe internal pressure file, use option interpolate
1404 Time mismatch between nodal force file and the program, use option
interpolate
1405 Rigid links fixities applied to a slave node conflicts with a motion of a
master node
1406 Pipe internal pressure is either missing or should not be present in the restart
file
Note: if pipe internal pressure is present in the first run, the it has to be present
in subsequent restart runs. The opposite also holds. I f there is no pipe internal
pressure in the first rune, then the pipe internal pressure cannot be applied in
subsequent runs.
1407 Empty
1408 Program internal error true cyclic symmetry and computing nonlinear
constraints
1409 Rigid links one rotation free and different skew systems used for M&S
nodes
1410 Rigid links only 2 translations free and different skew systems for M&S
nodes
1411 Rigid links only 1 translation free and different skew systems for M&S
nodes
1412 Temperature outside range of material property temperatures
1413 BEAM pressure loading input error, incorrect component indicator
1414 Concentrated load input data, loading cannot be generated
1415 BEAM pressure loading input error, zero length between nodes
1416 FSI, temperature file incorrect. Time span for structure is smaller than for
fluid.
The time span is equal to the total number of time steps multiplied by the time
step value.
1417 FSI, temperature gradient file incorrect. Time span for structure is smaller
than for fluid
1418 FSI, pipe int. pr. file incorrect. Time span for structure is smaller than for fluid
Error messages

1419 Fracture, ratio of J-integral/(nodal displacement) is larger than the resistant
curve
1420 Fracture, the crack increment is negative, program stops
1421 Fracture, the J-integral number is out of range, program stops
1422 Fracture internal error, please see *.out file for more information
1423 Fracture, the number of crack nodes or rings is negative
1424 Fracture, the flag for virtual vector calculation is out of range
1425 Fracture, a crack node cannot be smaller or equal to zero
1426 Fracture, a crack node degree of freedom cannot be smaller or equal to zero
1427 Fracture, no J-integral specified for crack growth control
1428 Fracture, the number of nodes in the material shift is too small
1429 Fracture, no temperature input for temperature-dependent resistance curves
1430 Fracture, temperature at crack tip node out-of-range of resistance curves
1431 Fracture, nodes on the crack propagation surface cannot be constrained
1432 Fracture, a negative crack increment, please check the resistance curve
1433 Fracture, the end of propagation surface has been reached
1434 Fracture, crack increment is zero, please check your input
1435 Mixed-interpolated (u/p) elements cannot be used with incompatible modes
1436 Shells - element temperatures are outside material property parameters
1437 Initial temperature is outside the range of material property temperatures
1438 Fracture mechanics, incorrect crack front node number
1439 Concrete model, initial temperature must be equal to reference temperature
1440 Curve description material, gravitational strain is outside the material curve
1441 Curve description material, error in pressure-volumetric strain calculations
1442 Curve description material model cannot be used with plane stress elements
1443 Crack front node number is out of range, please check your input data
1444 Zooming, incorrect solution starting time for the zoomed model
1445 Unit containing pipe internal pressure can not be opened as requested by input
1446 Input error in temperature loading data
1447 A file unit could not be opened as requested by the input
1448 Temperature gradients can only be specified on SHELL midsurface nodes
1449 BEAM pressure load cannot be generated. Incorrect input.
Appendix 1

1450 Deformation dependent loading cannot be imposed on substructures
1451 Pressure (distributed) load is applied on non-existing nodes
1452 Pressure (distributed) loading, illegal face number
1453 Incorrect time function number specified for a load
1454 A distance between points defining an axis of rotation is zero or too small
1455 Contact slip load, contact surface, on which load is applied, does not exist
1456 Incorrectly applied contact slip load
1457 Input error in contact slip load
1458 Input error in concentrated load data
1459 Follower concentrated loading, incorrect input data
1460 Input error in electromagnetic load
1461 Ground motion loading is used with conflicting options
1462 Incorrectly applied load on a generalized plane strain element
1463 Prescribed displacements cannot be generated between two load sets
1464 A prescribed displacement is applied on a non-existing node
1465 Isobeam pressure load, incompatibility between face and auxiliary node
numbers
1466 Incorrect pressure load data
1467 Pressure loading, incorrect load direction (x-axis) for y-z plane elements
1468 Input error in pipe internal pressure loading data
1469 Input error in pressure loading data
1470 FSI stress loading FSI boundaries cannot be applied on substructures
1471 FSI (Fluid-Structure-Interaction) cannot be used with cyclic symmetry
1472 Input error in FSI boundaries (structural model)
1473 FSI forces, incorrect FSI boundaries in the structural model
1474 Potential-based fluid elements, loading used with conflicting options
1475 Potential-based fluids, error in load calculations due to mass fluxes
1476 Potential fluids, error in load calculations due to element face pressure
1477 Constrain equations cannot be applied to non-existing nodes
1478 Constrain equations, degree of freedom not marked as constrained
1479 Constrains, the independent degree of freedom is either fixed or constrained
1480 Rigid links cannot be applied to non-existing nodes
Error messages

1481 A potential-based fluid interface element is not attached to a fluid element
1482 Incorrect input for 2-D flow load data
1483 Incorrect input for 3-D flow load data
1484 Input error in user-supplied loading data
1485 Incorrect input for fracture mechanics data
1486 A temperature file is requested but is either missing or not correct
1487 Error in shell element stress calculations
1488 Error in TMC analysis, only 2D and 3D elements are allowed
1489 Some of the master nodes used in constraints should be retained (shared)
nodes

Appendix 1

Initial stress & element group error messages

Error
Number
Description
1501 TRUSS-initial stresses can be used for linear elastic material only
1502 2-D SOLID initial stresses can only be used for elastic & soil materials
1503 3-D SOLID initial stresses can only be used for elastic & soil materials
1504 BEAM initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1505 ISOBEAM initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1506 PLATE initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1507 SHELL initial stresses can only be used for linear (iso & ortho) materials
1508 PIPE initial stresses can only be used for linear elastic material model
1509 2-D POROUS initial stresses can only be used with elastic and soil
materials
1510 3-D POROUS initial stresses can only be used with elastic and soil
materials
1511 PLATE initial strains cannot be used with the Ilyushin material model
1512 Material model used is not permitted in CDM with mixed u/p elements
1513 Program internal error, KPP matrix is not invertible, mixed u/p elements
1514 Program internal error, a matrix is not invertible, mixed nonlinear u/p
elements
1515 2-D solid elements, incorrectly collapsed nodes, numbering sequence should
be changed
1516 Plane stress elements have to have thickness provided via input(positive
value)
1517 Energy release rate cannot be requested for more than three nodes
1518 Node numbers cannot be negative, please check your input data
1519 Incorrect 3-D transition element, nodes 22 & 27 can only be used in 27-node
bricks
1520 Incorrect 3-D transition element, node 21 can only be used in 21-node bricks
1521 Axes of orthotropy and initial strains axes have to be orthogonal
1522 Maximum number of nodes exceeded for a 3-D solid (or fluid) element
1523 Incorrect number of nodes describing a 3-D solid (or fluid) element
1524 A transition elements cannot be a true tetrahedral element
1525 BEAM elements incorrect input for a stress table
Error messages

1526 BEAM elements incorrect input for rigid end offsets
1527 BEAM (or ISOBEAM or PIPE) elements- incorrect auxiliary node number
1528 BEAM elements zero cross-sectional area
1529 BEAM elements-negative rigidity input, the value must be greater or equal
zero
1530 BEAM elements incorrect input in the nonlinear elastic material data
1531 3-D solid elements, ULH eigenvector cannot be computed
1532 Curve-description material, gravitational strain is too large
1533 Incompatible mode elements a matrix is not invertible
1534 Ogden material model, initial strains are too large
1535 Mooney-Rivlin model, initial strains are larger than a maximum allowable
value
1536 Foam material model, initial strains are larger than a maximum allowable
value
1537 Invalid contact algorithm type
1538 Curve-description material model, incorrect volumetric pressure
1539 Curve-description material, current volumetric strain is outside the table input
1540 2D contact surface offsets cannot be based on shell thickness
1541 Layered shell elements, incorrect input for a layer number
1542 Layered shells, incorrect input data, pleas see the *.out file for details
1543 Specified material model or failure criterion is not used by any layered shell
1544 Error in the layered-shell input data, please see the *.out file for details
1545 Incorrect number of shell thickness tables for layered-shell elements
1546 Truss elements with gap, gap width cannot be negative
1547 Initial strains are too large
1548 BEAM element, error in the end release, very likely rigid body motion
1549 Incorrect thickness for isobeam axisymmetric or plane stress or strain
elements
1550 Incorrect number of nodes describing an ISOBEAM (or PIPE) element
1551 ISOBEAM or PIPE elements incorrect input for a stress table
1552 Stress printing or saving flag is incorrect
1553 isobeam(axisymmetric, plane stress/strain) elements must lie in the y-z plane
1554 Incorrect element configuration, the length cannot be smaller than zero
Appendix 1

1555 ISOBEAM, both section dimensions have to have values greater than zero
1556 BEAM, ISOBEAM or PIPE elements auxiliary node is not specified
1557 Element is not in a plane as required
1558 Auxiliary node cannot coincide or lie on a straight line with element nodes
1559 BEAM, ISOBEAM or PIPE element nodes cannot have the same
coordinates
1560 Incorrect number of nodes describing PIPE element
1561 Incorrect kinematic formulation requested for surface tension elements
1562 Surface tension elements, zero distance between nodes
1563 Incorrect number of composite shell failure sets
1564 SHELL elements, incorrect stress table input data
1565 Incorrect composite shell failure criterion number
1566 Incorrect number of nodes specified for a SHELL element
1567 Incorrect thickness table number for a SHELL element
1568 Incorrect transition SHELL element
1569 Error in the pressure-load shell-stiffness option
1570 Input error in shell stress resultant calculations
1571 Incorrect node definition for a SHELL element
1572 SHELL director vectors cannot be created, incorrect element nodal data
1573 Incorrect bend radius for a PIPE element
1574 Incorrect input for a PIPE flange data
1575 Incorrect PIPE cross section dimensions
1576 Incorrect input data for 2-D contact elements
1577 Variable contact friction requested for contact pair & not specified for
CGROUP
1578 Contact nodes refer to skew systems which is not indicated in control input
1579 Node-to-node cont, prescribed displacements cannot be applied to contactor
nodes
1580 Zero mass on contact nodes is not allowed in explicit time integration
1581 Post-impact calculation, zero mass on contact nodes is not allowed
1582 Incorrect input data for 2-D rigid target contact
1583 Incorrect input data for 3-D contact elements
1584 3-D contact, incorrect contact segment number
Error messages

1585 3-D contact, program internal error
1586 Incorrect input data for 3-D rigid-target contact
1587 General spring elements input data errors
1588 Input error in 2-D fluid elements, please see *.out for details
1589 Input error in 3-D fluid elements, please see *.out for details
1590 Memory corrupted in 2-D fluid elements
1591 Memory corrupted in 3-D fluid elements
1592 Incorrect number of nodes for a spring element
1593 Potential-based infinite elements cannot be triangular
1594 Potential-based interface elements, incorrect number of nodes in an element
1595 Potential-based fluid elements, input error in material data
1596 General (spring, damping or mass) elements, incorrect property set number
1597 Incorrect input data for general (spring, damping or mass) elements
1598 Incorrect input data for a user-supplied general element
1599 Incorrect input data for a CGAP element

Appendix 1

Frequency solution and element group error messages

Error
Number
Description
1601 Frequency negative/zero diagonal element before decomposition. Incorrect
model.
1602 Frequency too many negative diagonal elements, please check your model
1603 Number of mass DOFs is smaller than the number of requested frequencies
1604 Frequency rigid body shift input must be negative
(FREQUENCIES...RSHIFT=-...)
1605 Frequency zero pivot after decomposition, rigid body shift should be applied
1606 Frequency cannot be calculated for a single DOF, mass is not greater than
zero.
1607 Frequency, determinant search method rigid body mode found
1608 Determinant search method lower bound of the first frequency not found,
incorrect model
1609 Determinant search method non-positive calculated shift, probably incorrect
model
1610 Frequency calculation no eigenvalue computed, please check your model
1611 Frequency-no eigenvalue computed, check for rigid body without fluid effects
1612 Determinant search method upper bound of current eigenvalue not found,
incorrect model
1613 Frequency non-positive or too small calculated shift, probably incorrect
model
1614 Frequency, potential based fluids no convergence to rigid body mode
1615 Multi-block solution cannot be used if mass/stiffness are imported from file
1616 Could not factorize A*F=B frequency and potential based fluid elements
1617 No convergence in eigensolver, please check your model or solution
parameters
1618 Solution for linearized buckling failed, please check your model
1619 No convergence, subspace iteration, increase no. of iterations/starting vectors
1620 Upper bound for the first critical buckling load not found
1621 FREQUENCIES, interval too narrow, use higher value for FMAX or lower
for FMIN
1622 Sturm sequence failed, no eigenvalue found, please check your model
1623 Frequencies, matrices not positive and no shift applied
Error messages

1624 Frequency calculations failed, matrices not positive
1625 Frequencies, matrices not positive after a sweep or no shift applied
1626 Frequencies, JACOBI iteration could not converge, please check your model
1627 Lanczos method, stiffness matrix not positive definite, please check your
model
1628 Lanczos method, not enough memory, please increase allocation for ADINA
1629 Lanczos method internal error, please check your model
1630 Mode superposition, potential based fluid elements- program internal error
1631 Sturm sequence shows that incorrect number of frequencies has been
calculated
1632 Mode superposition cannot be done with rigid body motions and potential
fluids
1650 Estimated storage less than actual storage for element group - internal error

Appendix 1

Material data errors

Error
Number
Description
1701 BEAM bending table (R-T plane) input data cannot have negative values
1702 BEAM bending table (R-T plane) input data cannot have zero values
1703 BEAM multiplier used to compute stiffness of rigid end zones is negative
1704 BEAM axial force table input data cannot have negative values
1705 BEAM axial force table input data cannot have zero values
1706 BEAM torsion table input data cannot have negative values
1706 BEAM torsion table input data cannot have zero values
1708 BEAM bending table (R-T plane) input data is not in ascending order
1709 BEAM axial force table input data is not in ascending order
1710 BEAM torsion table input data is not in ascending order
1711 BEAM bending table (R-S plane) input data cannot have negative values
1712 BEAM bending table (R-S plane) input data cannot have zero values
1713 BEAM bending table (R-S plane) input data is not in ascending order
1714 BEAM axial, bending, torsional cyclic factors must be greater or equal to
1.0
1715 Isotropic elastic material, Young's modulus and/or Poisson ratio is incorrect
1716 BEAM, rigidity, FORCE-AXIAL table, curve n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1717 BEAM, rigidity, MOMENT-R (twist) table, n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1718 BEAM, rigidity, MOMENT-S table, curve n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1719 BEAM, rigidity, MOMENT-T table, curve n-th slope is larger than the n-1
slope
1720 Material creep-variable, effective stress is out of the stress range input
1721 Material creep-variable, yield curve cannot be interpolated, incorrect input
1722 Integration point temperature is outside material temperature range
1723 Material creep, integration point initial temperature is outside material
temperature
1724 Material concrete, cut-off tensile stress SIGMAT has to be greater than zero
Error messages

1725 Material concrete, incorrect input for SIGMAC, SIGMAU and/or EPSC,
EPSU
1726 Zero point in axial force table not found
1727 Zero point in torsion table not found
1728 Position of zero point in torsion table varies with axial force
1729 Zero point in bending (R-T plane) table not found
1730 Position of zero point in bending (R-T) table varies with axial force
1731 Zero point in bending (R-S plane) table not found
1732 Position of zero point in bending (R-S) table varies with axial force
1733 Insufficient data points in axial force table (positive side)
1734 Insufficient data points in axial force table (negative side)
1735 Insufficient data points in torsion table (positive side)
1736 Insufficient data points in torsion table (negative side)
1737 Insufficient data points in bending (R-T plane) table (positive side)
1738 Insufficient data points in bending (R-T plane) table (negative side)
1739 Insufficient data points in bending (R-S plane) table (positive side)
1740 Insufficient data points in bending (R-S plane) table (negative side)
1741 Visco-elastic shear model, decay constants in Prony series cannot be equal to
zero
1742 Visco-elastic shear model, number of terms in Prony series cannot be greater
than 5
1743 Visco-elastic bulk mass, decay constants in Prony series cannot be equal to
zero
1744 Visco-elastic bulk mass, number of terms in Prony series cannot be greater
than 5
1745 User-supplied material, no convergence in effective plastic strain
1746 No convergence in plasticity. Using automatic time stepping might help.
1747 No convergence in the creep model. Using automatic time stepping might
help.
1748 Strains outside input data, nonlinear elastic material model, truss elements
1749 Input error in irradiation creep property table input
1750 Input of mixed hardening parameters for von-Mises plasticity is incorrect
1751 Error in the optional printing for the large strain (ULH) formulation
1752 Input error in the material property data for 2-D solid elements
Appendix 1

1753 Input error in the gasket material property data set
1754 Input error in the material property data for 3-D solid elements
1755 BEAM elements error in the elasto-plastic moment- curvature input
1756 BEAM elements error in the user-supplied material data
1757 BEAM elements incorrect cross-section input data
1758 Orthotropic material model, incorrect material data
1759 Error in the truss material data input
1760 Fabric material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1761 Incorrect material data input for the fabric model
1762 Incorrect material properties for a thermo-orthotropic material model
1763 BEAM element, plasticity, shear reduction factor must be smaller than 1.0
1764 Isotropic elastic material, coefficient of thermal expansion is negative
1765 Input error in the material property data for isobeam elements
1766 Input error in the material property data for plate elements
1767 Input error in the material property data for SHELL elements
1768 Input error in (composite) shell failure criteria
1769 Input error in the material property data for pipe elements
1770 Input error, SHELL orthotropic plasticity, constituent matrix not positive
definite
1771 User-supplied material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1772 thermo-orthotropic material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1773 Orthotropic material model, material axis angle larger than 2*PI
1774 Porous elements, porous properties not available for material model used
1775 Input error in the material property data for 2-D porous elements
1776 Input error in the material property data for 3-D porous elements
1777 Incorrect material model for the gap element
1778 No initial stress input for Cam-Clay material model

Error messages

General errors, messages

Error
Number
Description
1801 No convergence, iteration limit reached, automatic time stepping might help
1802 No convergence, out-of-balance load too large, automatic time stepping might
help
1803 Zero (or almost zero) length between element nodes
1804 Zero (or almost zero) length of the orthotropic material axes vector
1805 Number of nodes exceeds the limit (900)
1806 Mapping Interface error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.
1807 Mapping program internal error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.
1808 Incorrect displacement boundary conditions for cyclic symmetry
1809 Incorrectly prescribed displacements on cyclic parts
1810 the number of prescribed displacements is greater than requested in the input
1811 Prescribed displacement unloading option cannot be used in linear analysis
1812 Incorrect degree of freedom (DOF) entry in the prescribed displacement input
1813 Arrival time cannot be negative. This holds for all load cases.
1814 Incorrectly prescribed displacements in cyclic symmetry analysis
1815 Internal error in cyclic symmetry, program stops
1816 A shell node on the cyclic boundary cannot have 5 degrees of freedom
1817 Cyclic symmetry, Y direction for nodes on the center line is not constrained
1818 Error(s) in cyclic symmetry
1819 Number of prescribed displacements is changed from one cyclic part to
another
1820 Skyline solver (COLSOL) cannot be used with consistent contact algorithm
1821 Periodic symmetry cannot be used with explicit dynamic analysis
1822 Insufficient memory for double-sided contact algorithm
1823 Insufficient memory - FSI analysis. Use -R option (maximum memory for
solution).
1824 Internal error in GASKET material, program stops
1825 Master degrees of freedom are modified in the restart run, which cannot be
done
1826 Error in user-supplied friction model calculations
Appendix 1

1827 Internal error in surface tension boundary, program stops
1828 Bad key in NASTRAN-OP2 stress output, program stops
1829 Error in NASTRAN-OP2 principal stress calculations, program stops
1830 EXP( ) is too large in Mooney-Rivlin material
1831 Non-positiveitive stretch in Ogden material
1832 Non-positiveitive stretch in hyper-foam material
1833 Bad isotropic model number in rubber
1834 Non-positive volume in 3-D rubber
1835 Bad orthotropic model number in rubber
1836 Zero pivot in stress-strain matrix for viscoelastic rubber
1837 Could not determine eigenvalues for viscoelastic rubber
1838 Could not determine actual J3 for Arruda-Boyce material
1839 Actual J3 out of range for Arruda-Boyce material
1840 Cannot use U/P formulation with hyper-foam material
1842 Thermal strain less than -1.0 in rubber
1843 Too many orthotropic directions for orthotropic viscoelastic rubber
1844 EXP( ) is too large in orthotropic rubber
1845 Non-positive in-plane area in compressive plane stress rubber
1847 Bad orthotropic model number in rubber
1848 Cannot find bounding out-of-plane stretches in rubber
1849 Cannot begin Newton iterations in rubber
1850 Zero slope in Newton iterations in rubber
1851 No convergence in Newton iterations in rubber
1853 Non-positive stretch in compressive plane stress rubber
1854 Zero denominator in WLF shift function in rubber
Error messages

1859 Non-positive in-plane area in incompressible plane stress rubber
1860 Invalid value for element STYPE in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1861 Non-positive volume in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1862 Non-positive stretch in incompressible plane stress rubber
1863 Non-positive in-plane area in incompressible plane stress rubber
1864 Invalid value for element STYPE in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1865 Non-positive stretch in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1866 Non-positive in-plane area in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1867 Non-positive volume in axisymmetric/plane strain rubber
1868 Non-positive in-plane area in orthotropic compressible plane stress rubber
1869 Excessive penetration in rigid target contact algorithm
1870 Fracture mechanics cannot be used in a distributed memory parallel
processing
1871 ADINA trap error, program stops
1872 Excessive displacements in explicit analysis, probably due to unstable time
step
1873 Material model not allowed in explicit analysis
1874 Mismatch of element parameters in 3-D restart analysis
1875 Mismatch of element parameters in 2-D restart analysis
1876 Mismatch of element parameters in shell restart analysis
1877 General constrains (or mesh gluing) cannot be used in explicit time
integration
1878 Number of components in a general constraint equation is larger than the
maximum specified value by the input
1879 Non-positive elastic Finger tensor in ULH shells
1880 Non-positive Finger tensor in ULH shells
1881 Invalid deformation tensor (from displacements) in ULH shells
1882 Invalid deformation tensor in ULH shells
1883 Non-positive volume in ULH shells
1884 Non-positive updated Jacobian determinant in ULH shells

Appendix 1

Sparse solver messages

Error
Number
Description
1901 Problem too large for the 32-bit version, no. of matrix elements larger than
2E31
1902 Sparse solver could not open a file, please check your write permission
1903 Sparse solver, write file failed, please check your disk space
1904 Reading the L-matrix failed, please check the disk space the file size
1905 Sparse solver, write file failed, please check the disk space
1906 Sparse solver, write file failed, please check the disk space
1907 Sparse solver, read file failed, please check the disk space
1908 Sparse solver, read file failed, please check the disk space
1909 Not enough memory for in-core analysis, solver switches to out-of-core
1911 Sparse solver internal error, please contact ADINA R&D, Inc.
1940 Not enough memory on the system to be allocated for the solver
1941 Error in the multi-grid solver, program stops
1942 AMG iterative solver failed, please check your model or use another solver

Error messages

Errors with specific information

Error
Number
Description
2001 BEAM: group= element=, nodes 1 and 2 are too close to each other
2002 BEAM: group= element=, auxiliary node is not positioned correctly
2003 Error in closing a file (file probably does not exist), file=
2004 No convergence in Gurson model, element group=, element number=
2005 Input ERROR, element group number=, material property set number=
2009 Stiffness matrix not positive definite, eqn=, pivot=
2010 Duplicate input in electromagnetic loading, nodes

Adina Command Referece Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Adina Command Referece Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UTOMATIC

data file into the database.

part (or "transmit") file into the database. The

file a solid geometry BODY is created

data file into the ADINA-IN database.

data file. If SUBCASE=0, the first

universal file format.

Material model Output when ELEM-RESULT=STRETCH

ARRUDA-BOYCE Green-Lagrange strains

* = KINEMATICS DISP=LARGE STRAINS = LARGE

in one of the coordinate angles. This parameter selects which angle to

arc quadrant to the right of the tip.

arc quadrant to the left of the tip.

body and the geometry

You might also like